r.triast^iasii'
 
 /. r^ < r '. i"-^ ''^f i<'f^^f^*f -iT^r ^» wmm. "' TLm Tifln- — 
 
 r/. 
 
 r- 
 
 I
 
 ■/■'■ /,!.-,■ //,,' f///,' 
 
 
 ;
 
 A COMPLEAT 
 
 SYSTEM 
 
 O F 
 
 General Geograp] 
 
 EXPLAINING 
 
 The Nature and Properties of the EARTH; 
 
 V I 7.. 
 It's Figure, Magnitude, Motions, Situation, Contents, 
 
 and Divifion into Land and Water, Mountains, Woods, 
 
 Defarts, Lakes, Rivers, l£c. 
 
 With particular Accounts of the different Appearances 
 of the Heavens in different Countries; the Seafons of 
 the Year over all the Globe ; the Tides of the Sea ; Bays, 
 Capes, Iflands, Rocks, Sand-Banks, and Shelves. 
 
 The State of the Atmofphere ; the Nature of Exhala- 
 tions; Winds, Storms, Tornados, i^c. 
 
 The Origin of Springs Mineral- Waters, Burning Moun- 
 tains, Mines, i5c. 
 The Ufes and Making of Maps, Globes, and Sea-Charts. 
 
 The Foundations of Dialling; the Art of Meafuring 
 Heights and Difinnces\ the Art of Ship-Building, Navigation, 
 and the Ways of Finding the Longitude at Sea. 
 
 Originally written in LATIN 
 
 By BERKIHARD VARENIUS, M. D. 
 
 Since Improved and Illuftrated 
 
 By Sir I s A A c Newton and Dr J u r i n ; 
 
 And nowTranflated into Englijh; with additional Notes, Cop- 
 
 fer-Vlates, an Alphabetical Index, and other Improvements. 
 
 Particularly ufeful to Students in the Univerfities ; Travellers, 
 Sailors, and all thoie who defire to be acquainted with Mixed 
 Mathematics, Geography, AJlronomy, and Navigation, 
 
 By UrDUGDALE. 
 
 The whole Revifed and Correfted by P e t e r S h a w, M. D. 
 
 %^z %\)\i^ (gPition, tpitt) large 3iDtittiong. 
 
 In TWO VOLUMES. 
 
 LONDON: Printed for STEPHEN AUSTEN, at 
 the Angel and Bil^le, in St P aid's Church-Yard. 1736. 
 
 *maKBna.iMiJuxu>'nv)^n<M"vVi^<L ^^^nv*
 
 I HAVE perufed this SYSTEM of 
 GENERAL GEOGRAPHY; 
 
 and I do recommend it as the moft Ufeful 
 Book upon this Subjed:. 
 
 JAMES HODGSON, 
 
 Majier of the Royal Mathematical 
 Chrijl-Hofpital, School; ^nd Fellow of the 
 
 Dtc. 14. 1732. Royal Society.
 
 THE 
 
 T R A N S L A T O R's 
 
 lf?Wli52£^ 
 
 CO 
 01 
 
 
 ^^=^^|HE Original of this Work 
 ^^^Mi ^^^^ re-printed at Cam- 
 ^^M bridge in the Year 1672, 
 ^Sl ^or the Ufe of the Students 
 
 and an 
 given of 
 
 it, the Beginning of the Year following, 
 in the Philojophical 'J'rajjfaBions [a). 
 
 THE Dutch Edition being then out of 
 Print, was carefully corrected, in many. 
 
 jffjtfSLajjiii^^;! 
 
 (a) Phil. Tranfaft. No. 
 91. Pag. 5172. Bern- 
 
 H A R D I V A R E N I r, 
 
 M. D. Geographia Gene- 
 ralis; i?i qua Affc^i'iones ge- 
 nerales Telluris explicantur^ 
 fumma ciira qiiam plurimh^ 
 in Loc'ts emendata^ ^33 
 Schsmatibiis novis^ ar? in- 
 
 A 
 
 cijlsf una cum TabuUs ali- 
 quot, quce defiderabantur, ■ 
 ci{6ia Cff illujlrala : ab 
 IsAACo Ne-\vton 
 Mathef. ProfeJJore Luca- 
 fiano apud Cantabrigienfes. 
 e Societate Regia. Cantab. 
 1672. i;i 8vo. 
 
 2 Places 
 
 46691)3
 
 •iv - l^he I'ranjlators Preface. 
 
 Places enlarged and improved, and the ne- 
 ceilary 'T'ables and Schemes fupplied by the 
 Illuftrious Sir Isaac Newton, at that 
 Time Lucafian ProfeJJbr of Mathematics in 
 that Univerfity. 
 
 THE Reafon why this great Man took 
 fo much Care in Correding and Pubiifhing 
 our Author, was, becaufe he thought him 
 neceflary to be read by his Audience, 
 the Toimg Gentlemen of Ca?nbridge, while 
 he was delivering Led:ures upon the fame 
 StihjeSl from the Lticafan Chair. And 
 tho' many Hundreds were then printed at 
 Cambridge and from that Edition often re- 
 printed abroad; yet by being frequently 
 read in both Lhiiverfities, all the Impreffions 
 were in Time fold off; fo that their Scarcity 
 among the Bookfellers was obferved by the 
 Reverend Dr Bentley to be a great 
 Detriment to the Toung Gentlemen of Cam- 
 bridge in perfed:ing their Studies (h). 
 
 WHERE- 
 
 (h) Appendix Jurin. ]orem cequo pro lonitote fua 
 
 Pag. I . Cian frujtra jam if Hu7nanitate opinionem 
 
 ubique fere quctrcrentWy conceperat^ hortatus ejl ut 
 
 apud Bibliopolas Varenii Jiova; hujufce Editiones a- 
 
 exemplaria^ idque judicaret dornandce ciiratn fufcipercm. 
 
 magna cum yuventutis A- Simul monuit utile futurum 
 
 cademlca detr'imetito fieri ut quce inventa., dimidii am- 
 
 Vir ReverenduSf nee mihi plius feculi pojl Varenium 
 
 nifi fummo cutn Hoyiore no- fpatio^fiitis multa fuerant^ 
 
 mtnandus^ R i c h a r- ea, in Tyronwji Gratianiy 
 
 Dus Bentleius in Appendicem conferreniy 
 
 •J-'-- n ms d^ ^«? wa- breviturque (fcpUcarm- E-
 
 'Jhe 'Tranjlator s Preface. v 
 
 WHEREUPON this worthy En- 
 coura^er and Advancer of all Sorts of Lite- 
 ratiire, importuned the Learned Dr J u r i n 
 (as being the iittell Perfon) to take parti- 
 cular Care of a new Impreffion ; and, for 
 the Benefit of the younger Students, to fup- 
 ply the Defeats of Varenius with an Appen- 
 dix, containing the later Difcoveries and 
 Improvements. 
 
 T O Him therefore is owing that cor- 
 reB Editio?! of Varenius, with an excellent 
 Appendix y printed in the Year 17 12, and 
 Dedicated to Dr B e n t l e y : which is 
 the Edition from whence the following 
 l^ranjlation was made {c). ^ 
 
 I beg leave to infifl: the more upon this 
 becaufe the Authority of our Author, back'd 
 with three fuch Great and Learned Men, 
 as Sir Isaac Newton, Dr Bent- 
 ley, and Dr J u R I N, will doubtlefs make 
 an Englifh Edition of this Work more ac- 
 ceptable to an Englifi Reader. 
 
 jus ego auSloritati, tantiV't- cipua Recentiorum inven- 
 
 r/, ^ cujiis eram benefic'iis ta, ad Geographiam fpe- 
 
 crnatus maximis, non oh- (Hiantia, continens, a J A- 
 
 temperare omnino non po~ coBO JuRiN, A. M. 
 
 tin, &c. Collegii S. Trinitatis Socio^ 
 
 [c) Bernhardi Varenii ^ Schola publica Novoca- 
 
 Geographia Generalis, &l\ Jirenjis Archididafcalo. Can." 
 
 adjeda eft Appendix prae- tabrigiis 1712» in 8vo. 
 
 A ? IT,
 
 vi ^he T!ranjlatof s Preface 
 
 I T is therefore unneceflary to add any 
 thing farther in Recommendation of the 
 Author; or enter into an Encomium of the 
 Work, fmce they have both of them fo 
 well recommended themfelves to the Public 
 already. All that remains is only to indicate 
 what has been farther done in our prefent 
 EngUJJo Edition. 
 
 AND iirfl:, in the Geometrical Part, we 
 have given Demonftrations to feveral Propo- 
 fitions, where they were wanting, and in a 
 conclfe Manner explained feveral tedious 
 Deinonjlratiom ; or at leafl have dire(5led the 
 Reader v/here he may find them ready de- 
 monftrated; fo that we hope by this 
 Means to incite the Studious to purfue the 
 Mathematical Studies, by giving them cer- 
 |:ain Specimens of their Excellency. 
 
 2. IN the jijirofwmical Part, we have 
 ftrengthened our Author's Arguments in Fa- 
 vour of the Copernican Plypothefis ; and 
 correded or illulirated his AfTcrtions and 
 Propoiitions, by others taken from later 
 Authors, or built upon more accurate Obfer- 
 vations made lince his Time. 
 
 3. IN the Philofophical and Phyfical 
 Part^ we have rejeded the improbable 
 Conjecflures of the Antients, and the un- 
 warrantable Suppolitions of Des Cartes, 
 
 ..■^hich our Author feems to be fond of: 
 ■ "" Inllead
 
 '^he iVanjlators Preface V\\ 
 
 Inftead whereof, v/e have (with the learn- 
 ed Dr Jurin) introduced the Newtonian 
 Fhilojcphy to folve the Fhcemmena^ as being 
 much more ehgible than the Cartefmn, for 
 \hQ J^r^-reeabk and Geometrical Manner of 
 it's Conclufions. Wherefore we have fre- 
 quently made ufe of this New Philofoph)\ 
 in the Way of Annotations upon our Au- 
 thor, where he has ufed that of Des 
 Cartes. 
 
 4. 1 N the Geographical and Hydrographi' 
 cal PartSy there is often not the leafh Co?tfo- 
 nance or Similitude between the Latin and 
 modern 'Englifi Names of feveral Countries^ 
 IJlands^ Seas^ Streights^ &c. And very 
 often their Names are changed by later 
 Dijcoverers, and their Figures and Situa- 
 tions better difcovered lince our Author's 
 Time. Wherefore, in fuch Cafes, we 
 have taken the Liberty to alter their 
 Names^ Situations^ and Defcriptio?is, m 
 order to make them conformable to our 
 latcft and beft E?iglifi Maps; deviating as 
 little as poflible from our Author's Senfe;. 
 and making ufe of the Jdtne Words as 'tis 
 likely he would have done, had he writ 
 at the fame Fi?ne^ and in the fame Lan- 
 guage. We have done this to avoid, in 
 fome Meafure, Marginal Notes, which 
 muft neceffarily have been inferted to have 
 explained a JlriSl '^ranflation ; but would 
 have been neither entertaining nor inftru- 
 A 4 4tive
 
 viil 'TLe T'ranjlator s Preface. 
 
 <5live to an Englifi Reader. Theie Alte- 
 rations are included in Brackets^ and for 
 he moil part diftinguiflied by a different 
 Charadter. 
 
 5. W E have tranfiated Dr J u r i n's 
 Appendix^ and added it to the feveral Paf- 
 fages of our Author, whereto each Part 
 of it properly belongs, ■ 
 
 6. WE have, as much as poffible, en- 
 deavoured after our Auihofsfingidar Plaift- 
 nefs of ExpreJJion^ and perhaps in this may 
 be thought to have imitated him to a Fault ; 
 but coniidering that we were not fpeaking 
 to the Learned ; but to thofe lefs ikilled in 
 Language; we thought it neceffary to e?t- 
 deavour to make the Author imderftood^ 
 even by Perfons of ordinary Capacities, ra- 
 ther than to render him abjiriife and imin- 
 telligihle by being too concife and curious 
 in Words and Phrafes. 
 
 T O conclude, we have endeavoured to 
 give the Ejiglifi Reader an ufeful Edition 
 of the Work, rather than one that was 
 Elegant and Polite. And to this Purpofe, 
 we have added, what v/as never added be- 
 fore, an Alphabetical Index to the whole. 
 
 THE
 
 [ix] 
 
 THE 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 Of the Firfl: Volume. 
 
 B O O K I. 
 
 ne ABSOLUTE, or INDEPENDENT 
 PART, 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 RELIMIN ARIES. Page i^ 
 
 1. The Definition of Geograj^b^, 
 
 2. Divifion. 
 
 3. Suhje5i. 
 
 4. Properties, 
 
 5. Principles, ' "' "■" 
 
 6. Order. 
 
 7. Method of Proof, 
 
 8. Origin. 
 
 9. Excellency. 
 
 10. Divifton of the whole JVorh 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Preparatory Propofitions from Geography and 
 Trigonometry. Page 15. 
 
 I. Three kinds of Magnitude. 
 2> 3> 4> 5- Definitions of a right Line^ Circle, 
 Diameter^ and Arc» 
 
 I ' 6. 2i
 
 X The C O N T E N T S. 
 
 6. 'To ere5i a Perpendicular upon a given Line. 
 ■ 7. To divide a Circle and it*s Periphery into four 
 »■ ^ladrants. 
 
 ;8. 7(7 divide the Periphery of a Circle into 360 De- 
 grees. 
 
 9. To find the Contents of a Re 5f angle d-Triangle, 
 
 10. Having the Semi-diameter given ^ to find the Pe- 
 riphery of a Circle. 
 
 1 1 . Having the Periphery given to find the Diameter. 
 
 12. The Diameter of a Sphere being given, to find ii*5 
 curve Surface y and Solidity, or folid Content. 
 
 13. Definitions of a Triangle^ Sine, Tangent, and ma- 
 thematical Canon, . ^ . .- 
 
 14. Two necrffary Theorems. 
 
 15. Four nee effary Problems. { v ., 
 
 16. An Explanation of different Meafures, 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Figure of the Earth. Page 27 
 
 1 . Various Opinions concerning the Figure of the Earth. 
 
 2. The Earl h^s Figure, the primary Prop>erty where- 
 on the reft depend. 
 
 3. The Arguments that prove it fpherical. 
 
 4. taken f rem the Heavens, 
 r^. taken from the Earth. 
 6. Obje5lions anfwcrcd. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of the Menfuratlon and Magnitude of the Earth. 
 
 Page 41 
 
 • I. The Menfuratlon of the Earth requires a Know- 
 
 , led^e of three Particulars y viz. Lines, Surface, 
 
 and Solirhty. 
 
 2. Tbc^ different Authors, who. have, attempted the 
 
 Menfuraliof} of the Earth, 
 
 3. The
 
 The C O N T E N T S. xi 
 
 $, The Method of the AT2ih'nns. 
 
 4. EratoRhenes. 
 
 5. Pofidonius. 
 
 6. Snellius. 
 
 . 7. I'he firji Terreftrial Method. 
 
 8. The fecond. 
 
 9. The third, 
 
 I o. The Circumference of the Earth ; f/'j Diameter^ 
 Surface^ and Solid Content, in linear, fquare, 
 and cubic Miles. 
 
 II. The Errors and Defers of the feveral preceding 
 Methods of meafuring the Earth. 
 
 J 2. The Meafure of the Parallels of the Earth, 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Motion of the Earth. Page 64 
 
 1. The Motion of the Earth the Caufe of the Celefiial 
 Appearances, upon the Copernican Hypothefis. 
 
 2. A double Motion, befides the third, which is ra- 
 ther an Inclination of the Earth'' s Axis. 
 
 3. The Arguments for proving thefe Motions. 
 
 4. Obje^ions anfuuercd. 
 
 5. The Velocity of this Motion in different Parts of 
 the Earth. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the Earth's Place in the Syflem of the World. 
 
 Page 78 
 
 1. Common Opi?iion places the Earth in the Centre of 
 the PVorld. 
 
 2. The Situation of the Earth, and the Order of 
 the Planets. 
 
 3. The Situation of the Earth upon the Copernican 
 Hjpothefis. 
 
 4. The Dijlance of the Earth from the Planets, 
 
 5. The Dijiance of the Earth from the fixed Stars. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 xli The CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Subftance, internal Strudure, and Compo- 
 fition of the Earth. Page 87 
 
 1. To explain of what Suhjlances the Earth is com- 
 pofed. 
 
 2. The Earth divided into a confiflent and fluid Part, 
 and the Atmofphere ; or into Earth, Water, and 
 Air. 
 
 3 . How the Earth and Water hold together, and 
 conjiitute one Globe. 
 
 4. The Surface of the Earth continued, hut not the 
 Surface of the Waters. 
 
 5. How the Farts of the Earth are, from the Sur- 
 face to the Center, is uncertain. 
 
 6. That Earth has it's Conjiflency and Coherence 
 from Salt. 
 
 7 . Different kinds of Earth varioufly mixed in the 
 Globe. :'.'• ", 
 
 S. The Situation and Difpofition of the Parts of the 
 Earth different at different Times. 
 
 ^^rVti.r CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the Dlvifion of the Parts of the Earth into 
 integrant Parts of the Sea. Page 103 
 
 ,1. Part of the Earth covered with Water, and 
 '„ Part Jwt. "'"" " " 
 
 1. The dry Parts feparated from each other by the 
 ^' Waters between. 
 .^ 3 . Four great Continents enumerated. 
 '• 4. Ten great Iflands enumerated, 
 
 5.. Ten moderate Iflands enumerated. 
 - 6. Tenfmall Iflands enufnerated. 
 
 7. The fmallejl Iflands enu?nerated. 
 
 8. The PeninfulaSy Jfihfnuffet, and Capes, or Head- 
 Lands» 
 
 • 9. Fourteen
 
 The C O N T E N T S. xlii 
 
 9. Fourteen Peninfula^s enumerated. 
 10. 'The more remarkable Ifimujjes enumerated. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of Mountains in general, and the Ways of taking 
 their Altitude. Page 119 
 
 1. The Parti of the Earth are of different Al- 
 titudes, 
 
 2. To find the Height of a Mountain hy AU 
 timetry, 
 
 3. The Height of a Mountain being given, to find 
 it*s Difiance from a certain Place. 
 
 4. The Difiance being given from whence the Top 
 of a Mountain is firfi feen ; to find it*s 
 Height. 
 
 5. The Height of a Mountain being known, to 
 find the utmofi Difiance whereto it may he 
 feen. 
 
 6. The Sun's Height above the Horizon being given 
 at an'j Time, and the Length of the Shadow of 
 the Mountain at that Time, to find the Height 
 of the Mountain. 
 
 7. The Height of Mountains hears no fenfible Pro- 
 portion to the Semidiaineter of the Earth, or does 
 ?iot hinder the Sphericity of the Globe, 
 
 8. To explain the Origin of Mountains. 
 
 9. Why Rains and watery Meteors are frequent on 
 the Tops of Mountains, whilfi it is fair below. 
 
 10. Whether the Surface of a Mountain be more ca^ 
 pacious than the Plain it ftands on. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Of the Differences of Mountains. Page 135 
 
 1 . Some Motmtains are large, ethers fmall. 
 
 2, The mqr^ famous Mwntains numerated.
 
 xiv The C O N T E N T S. 
 
 3 . The Tops of Mountains in mojl IJlands and Head- 
 Lands reach to the middle Region of the Air. 
 
 4. To enumerate the Mountains remarkable for their 
 Height. 
 
 5. To enumerate the Burning Mountains. 
 
 6. To explain the Differences of Mountains. 
 
 7. Some Mountains are open^ others clofe. 
 
 8. To enumerate the more fainous Promontories. 
 
 9. CaveSy deep Pits, &c. oppofed to Mountains: 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Of Mines, Woods, and Defarts. Page 15S 
 
 1. The Difference of Mines ^ and the more famous 
 of them enumerated. 
 
 2. The Difference of V/oods, and the more famous 
 enumerated. 
 
 3. The Difference ofDefarlSy and the more famous 
 enumerated.. 
 
 V CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Divifion of the Ocean by the Interpofition 
 of the Land. Page 165 
 
 1. The Ocean furrounds the Earth in a continued 
 Extent. 
 
 2. The Parts of the Ocean are of three kinds, viz. 
 Seas, Bays^ and Streights. 
 
 3. The Ocean divided into four grand Parts, or 
 Oceans. 
 
 4. The Parts of the Ocean named. 
 
 5. The eminent Bays enumerated, with their Diffe^ 
 rences. 
 
 6. The Enumeration and Differences of Streights. 
 
 7. The Sea~CoaJis traced over the four garters, 
 and the Communication of the Parts of the Ocean, 
 
 CHAP,
 
 The G O N T E N T S. xv 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Of certain Properties of the Ocean. Page 1 8 1 
 
 I , 'The Surface of the Ocean fpherical. 
 1. The Sea not hkher than the Land. 
 
 3. JVb-j the Sea feems to rife higher when viewed 
 at a Diflance from the Shore. 
 
 4. To explain the Origin of Bap and Streights. 
 
 5. Whether the Ocean he everj where of the fame 
 Height. 
 
 6. The Depth of the Ocean m^<iy be found in man-j 
 Places but not in all. 
 
 7. The Ocean has no proper Springs. 
 
 8. The Saltnefs of the Ocean from the Particles of 
 Salt dijfolved in it. 
 
 9. Whether Sea Water he fweeter at the Bottom. 
 
 10. The Sea grows falter towards the Equator^ and 
 the Seafons of it's being unequally fait, 
 
 1 1 . Why the Rain is fweet on the Sea. 
 
 1 2. Different Sea Waters are heavier than each other ^ 
 and than common Water. 
 
 13. Sea Water does not freeze fo foon as River 
 Water. 
 
 14. Why the Ocean becomes no larger by receiving 
 fo many Rivers. 
 
 15. Different Parts of the Ocean have different Colours. 
 J.6. Certain Peculiarities in certain Parts of the Ocean. 
 IJ. Why the Sea appears luminous \ or fJjines^ by 
 
 Night, efpecially when the Waves are violent. 
 18. The Ocean throws up terreflrial and conjijlent 
 Bodies to the Shore. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 Of the Motions of the Ocean, particular it's 
 Flux and Reflux. Page 230 
 
 I . Wa^r has only one natural Motion* 
 
 I 2. When
 
 xvi The CONTENTS. 
 
 a, W^hen a Fart of the Ocean moves, the whole 
 
 is moved. 
 3. To obferve the Point of the Compafs wherein 
 ■f^. the Sea moves. 
 
 4. Ihe Motion of the Sea is either dire^, vorticaly 
 concuffory.) or tremulous. 
 
 5. Some Motions of the Sea are general, fome 
 particular, and the reft contingent. 
 
 6. 'The IVind caufes the contingent Motion of the 
 Sea. 
 
 '7. The general Motion, of the Ocean double, viz. 
 continued, and ebbing and floiving, 
 
 8. Winds often alter the general Motions of the Ocean. 
 
 9. The Caufe of the general Motion uncertain. 
 
 10. What the Motion of the Flux and Reflux is. 
 
 1 1. The Caufe of that Motion. 
 
 12. Why at new and full Moon the general Mo" 
 tion of the Sea is more violent -, and alfo the 
 Swell larger. 
 
 13. Why on the Days of the Equinoxes the general 
 Motion and Swell of the Sea is greater. 
 
 14. A great Flux and Reflux on fome Shores, and 
 on others fear ce fenfible. 
 
 15. The Flux of the Sea violent, the Reflux natural, 
 
 1 6. The Flux largefi in thofe Places where the Moon 
 is vertical. 
 
 17. The ^lantity of the Flux not conflant. 
 
 18. The Time of the beginning and ending of the Flux 
 different in different Places. 
 
 19. In piofl Places the Sea flows to the Shore fix 
 Hours, and ebbs as many ; but in fome Places it 
 flows' longer thdnit ebbs; and vice versa. 
 
 20. Whether ,the Flood begins when the Moon touches 
 the Horizon'^ 
 
 2 1 . Th'^e' Hour: h'eing given, wherein the Flood is at 
 it's gr-mtfifl^ Height in any Place, on the Day of 
 new Moon^if id find the MQurpf it* i ^reateft Height 
 for the following V^^S4 - , . '
 
 The C O N T E N T S. xvli 
 
 2 2. 'The IVifids prolong and Jhorten the Duration 
 of the Flux and Reflux. 
 
 23. A great Diverfity in the particular Motion of 
 the Sea. 
 
 24. The firfl particular perpetual Motion. 
 
 25. The fecond 
 
 26. The third • 
 
 27. The fourth 
 
 28. The fifth 
 
 29. The fix th 
 
 30. The feventh • 
 
 3 I . Ihe particular periodical Motions enumerated. 
 
 32. Two kindi of Cortices in the Sea. 
 
 33. The Caufe of the Tremor in the Sea, with 
 Examples. 
 
 34. JVhy the Pacific Ocean isfo calm in fair Weather^ 
 hut eafily moved with gentle V/inds. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Of Lakes, Moors, and Bogs. Page 280 
 
 1 . Lakes., Moors, and Bogs defined. 
 
 2. Four kinds of Lakes. 
 
 3. To explain the Origin of thofe Lakes that 
 neither receive nor fend out Rivers ; and to 
 enumerate them. 
 
 4. To explain the Origin of thofe that fend out Rivers^ 
 hut receive none. 
 
 5. To explain the Origin of thofe that receive Rivsrs^ 
 hut fend none out. 
 
 6. To explain the Origin of thofe that hotb receive 
 and fend out Rivers. 
 
 7. Mofi Lakes contain a frefh hut fome a fait Water. 
 
 8. Whether the Cafplan Sea he a Lake or a Bay, 
 
 9. Whether the Euxine he a Lake or a Bay, 
 
 10. The Lakes enumerated that have IJlands in thi 
 middle. 
 
 VOL. I, a II. ^*?
 
 xviii The CONTENTS. 
 
 Ji. To 7}iakc a Lake in a Place affigncd; if the 
 
 thing be pfjihle. 
 11. To dry or drain a Lake. 
 
 13. Bogs of two kinds. 
 
 14. Bogs contain a fulphureotis Earth. 
 
 15. To dry a Bog. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 Of Rivers in general. Page 295 
 
 1. The Definition of Rivers^ Rivulets^ and Springs ^^c. 
 
 2. Torrents and Rivers fometimes produced by violent 
 Rains, and melted Snow. 
 
 3. Mojl Rivulets rife from Springs, and Rivers from 
 a Conflux of Rivulets. 
 
 4. Riven enlarged by Rains and fuelled Snow at 
 different Times of the Tear. 
 
 5 . The Caufes of Springs, or the Origin of Spring Water, 
 
 6. Some Rivers dip under Ground, and rife again. 
 
 7. Rivers dijembogue into the Sea, or Lakes. 
 
 8. Few Rivers become flagnant. 
 
 9. Whether the Chanels, and Windings of Rivers 
 were made by Nature or hiunan Induflry. 
 
 10. Chanels, the nearer to the Spring- Head the higher ; 
 and the nearer to the Riveras mouth the deeper. 
 
 11. OfCatara^s. 
 
 1 2. JVhy Rivers are broader in one Part than another. 
 
 13. The Chanels of Rivers fink more or lefs in one 
 Part than another. 
 
 14. Why fome Rivers are rapid, others gentle ', and 
 why the fame River is more rapid in one Place 
 than another. 
 
 15. Some fe%v Rivers run a direcl Courfe -, but mcfi a 
 winding one, to their Exits. 
 
 1 6. The Lakes thro'* 'which certain Rivers have their 
 courfe. 
 
 17. Mojl Rivers the nearer their Mouths the wider 
 they becotfie, 
 
 18. The
 
 The CONTENT S. xix 
 
 1 8. 'T'hs Water of Rivers contains jnany Particles 
 of d[iferent Metals, Minerals^ Sands, oleaginous 
 and other Sub/lances -, as alfo certain Jubtile 
 Spirits of Vitriol, Salt, Sulphur, &C. 
 
 19. The Rive-'s that have Gold Sand enumerated. 
 
 20. 'The Waters of moft Rivers differ in Colour, 
 Gravity, and other Qualities. 
 
 21. Certain Rivers are fo enlarged, at flated Times, 
 as to overflow their Banks. 
 
 22. To enumerate thefe Rivers, and their Caufes, 
 
 23. To explain the Origin and Rife of Springs. 
 
 24. To find whether a Spring, or Well, may he made 
 in a Place affgned. 
 
 25. To make a Well in a given Spot ; if the Thing he 
 poffihle. 
 
 26. To make an apparent Spring in a Place ajfigned ; 
 if the Thing he pojfihle. 
 
 27. To bring a River from a Spring, or froyn another 
 River, to a given Place, if the Thing he poffihle, 
 
 28. The Art of Levelling, or taking the Fall of Wa- 
 ter, &c. 
 
 29. The great Rivers of a long Coiirfe enumerated, 
 
 30. Certain Rivers have JVhirlpools and S-ivallows, 
 
 31. River^Water lighter than Sea-Water, 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 Of Mineral- Waters, Hot-Springs, ^c. Page 359 
 
 1. No Water found pure and elementary, 
 
 2 . Mineral Waters defined. 
 
 3. Three general Kinds of Mineral Waters. 
 
 4. To explain the Origin of Mineral Waters. 
 
 5. That the particular Species of Mineral Wat en 
 are infinite. 
 
 6. To enumerate the more remarkable and extra- 
 ordinary Differences of Waters. 
 
 7. 0//^(? Acidulce, or tart Waters» 
 
 8. Of Hot Springs, 
 
 a 2 S' Of
 
 XX The CONTENTS. 
 
 9. Of oily and uncluous pyaters. 
 
 10. Of bitter Pi^aters. 
 
 11. Of extreamly cold Springs. 
 
 12. Of fuch PVaters as tranfmute or alter Subjlances. 
 
 13. Of poifonous and Mortal IVatcrs. 
 
 14. Of coloured IP^aters. 
 
 15. Of Salt-V/aters. 
 
 16. Of bubbling^ or boilings Springs, andfuch as break 
 ■foytb izith a violent Spirit. 
 
 17. Springs that run only at ftated 'Ti?nes, 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 Of the Change, and Origin of dry Parts and 
 watery, on the Earth. P^S 395 
 
 1. To examine the extant Surface of the Earth, and 
 that covered -Lvith V/ater. 
 
 2. The Surface of the Land and Water not perpe- 
 tually the fame. 
 
 3 . To compute how much Earth, and how much 
 Water the Globe contains. 
 
 4. Waters forfake the Shores, and leave them dry on 
 7nany Accounts ; andfirfi, as in Meers and Bogs. 
 
 5. Rivers forfake their Banks and Chanels, and af- 
 ford new Land. 
 
 6. Lakes are dried up, and changed to Land. 
 
 7 . Sir eights are dried up, 
 
 8. Bays are dried up. 
 
 f). Parts of the Ocean are dried up. 
 
 10. To explain the Origin of Sand- Banks. 
 
 J I. Whether Sand- Banks may become a part of the 
 neighbouring Continent. 
 '12. Iflands are formed feveral Ways. 
 
 13. The more extraordinary Ways wherein Iflands are 
 formed. 
 
 14. Of Floating Iflands. 
 
 15. Rivers change their Chanels many Ways, or run 
 over new Tra^s of Land. 
 
 16. Lakes
 
 The CONTENTS. xxi 
 
 1 6. LaKeSy Meers^ and Bogs pojfefs Spaces of Land 
 
 thej did not occupy before, 
 ij. '■The Ocean poffefjes new "Traofs of Land, where it 
 
 did not appear before. 
 
 1 8. Pf^hethdr the entire Surface of the Earth may he 
 folely poffeffed by Water alone .^ or Land alone. 
 
 19. Why there are few Jflands in the middle of the 
 Ocean ; but many Shoals of them near Continents 
 or larger Iflands. 
 
 20. Why Lands prove fertile or barren; and zvhy on 
 the S'^a- Shore the kind of Earth alters that; 
 covers the Fields. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Of the Air and Atmofphere. Page 419 
 
 1. Exhalations continually rife from the Parts of 
 the Earth. 
 
 2. T^he State of the Atmnfphere. 
 
 3. Exhalations are thicker or thinner at different 
 Times, and in different Places. 
 
 4. Various Kinds of Exhalations. 
 
 5. The Particles of the Air reflet the Sun^s Rays., 
 like a Speculum. 
 
 6. The upper Parts of the Almofphere are more 
 rarified than the lozver. 
 
 7. Exhalations are driven upwards by a violent Mo- 
 tion ; thd* their natural Tendency is downwards. 
 
 8. Ihe Atmofphere when wanned poffeffes a larger 
 Space, and when cold a lefs. 
 
 9. To make a Thermometer, or Weather-Glafs. 
 
 10. How, or to what Degree, the Air may be rarified. 
 
 1 1 . Why the Air is generally thick and cloudy in the 
 Frigid Zone. 
 
 12. Why the Air is thin and clear in violently frofiy 
 Weather. 
 
 1 3. Why the Air appears thicker at the Horizon. 
 
 14. Whether the Air, or Atmofphere, be of the fame 
 Height in all Places, 
 
 IS. I^he
 
 xxii The CONTENTS. 
 
 15. The Condenfation aud Rarifa^ion oj the Air 
 does 72ot alter it^s Height. 
 
 16. "TheHeightof the Air the fame at all Times, and 
 in all Places. 
 
 17. The Air more condcnfed in the Winter, and at 
 Night, than in the Summer, and b-j Day. 
 
 18. The different Denfitj of the Air in different Places. 
 
 19. The middle Region oj the Air nearer the Earth 
 in Places contiguous to the Pole. 
 
 20. In Places adjacent to the Pole the hot Region of 
 the Air, or the beginning of the upper Region^ 
 is more remote. 
 
 21. The Rays of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, are re- 
 fr acred in the Air. 
 
 11. On Account of this Refraulion the Sun and Aloon 
 appear to rife fooner than they ought. 
 
 23. The thicker the Air, the greater the RefraElion. 
 
 24. The thicker the Air, the fooner the Sun and Moon 
 appear to rife. 
 
 25. The lower the Air that caufes the Refra^ion, the 
 fooner the Stars appear to rife. 
 
 1 6. The Refraulion of a Star may he the fame in the fame 
 Situation, tho'' the Height of the Air be different. 
 
 27. If the Air he thicker, or lower, in one Place than 
 in another, the Sun or Moon will appear fooner 
 in the former than in the latter. 
 
 28. If the Air he thicker and higher in one Place than 
 ' another, the Stars will accordingly be feen to rife 
 
 fooner, or later. 
 
 29. Two Refratlions being taken at two Altitudes, to 
 find from whence both the Height and Thicknefs of 
 the Air, with Refpeol to the /Ether, or the 
 Law of Refraction. 
 
 50. To find the leaft poffihle Height of the Atmofphere, 
 
 3 1 . To find the Law of RefraBion. 
 
 32, To find the RefraoJion at any Inclination. 
 
 2^. To find the Refra5lion at the given Height of a Star. 
 34. The Light of the Stars, particularly the Sun and 
 Moon, are refle^ed by the Particles of Air. 
 
 3 ZS' ^^^»
 
 The C O N T E N T S. xxiii 
 
 2S. This Reflexion h the principal Caiife of the Twilight. 
 0,6. When the Twilight begins. 
 
 Q^j. The Height of the Air not to he found from the 
 ^antitj of the Twilight. 
 
 38. "i he Height of the Air, upon a Suppofition that 
 a double Reflexion is the Caufe of the Twilight. 
 
 39. The Height of the Air being given, to compute it's 
 ^antity. 
 
 40. The Air has certain Peculiarities, in certain 
 Places, 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Of the Motion of the Air, Winds in general, and 
 the Points of the Compafs. Page 477 
 
 1. IVinds defined. 
 
 2. Mojl IVinds blow from one Point to the oppofite, 
 
 3. Points of the Compafs defined. 
 
 4. The Number of Points and JVinds, 
 
 5. Two and thirty Points and Winds. 
 
 6. A more accurate Enumeration of the Points and 
 Winds. 
 
 7. The Winds according to the Antients enumerated, 
 
 8. Another Enumeration of the Winds. 
 
 9. Oppofite Winds. 
 
 10. Various Caufes of Winds. 
 
 1 1 . Why Winds may blow perpendicularly to the Ho- 
 rizon of a Place. 
 
 12. Why the Winds blow not in continued, hut inter- 
 rupted Blafls. 
 
 13. Why Winds veryfeldom blow perpendicularly upon 
 a Place from above, but generally oblique. 
 
 14. Why the South and Weft Winds are warm. 
 
 15. Why the Weft Winds blow feldomer than the Eaft. 
 
 16. Why the North and Eaft Winds are ftronger, and 
 the South and Weft Winds weaker. 
 
 17. Why a fmall, thick, and blackifh Cloud foretels 
 Wind from that garter. 
 
 1 8. Why Winds arefrecpient in the Spring and Autumn. 
 
 19. At
 
 xxiv The CONTENTS. 
 
 19. At ivhai Height, or in what Region of the Air, 
 the JVinds blow. 
 
 20. To ivhat Difiance one and the fame Wind may reach . 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of particular Winds, and Storms or Tempefls. 
 
 Page 49 1 
 
 1 . Some iVinds are conflant, others not. 
 
 2. Some Windi are general, others -particular. 
 
 3. The Caiife of the general Winds. 
 
 ^. Some Winds periodical and flated -, others uncer- 
 tain and contingent. 
 
 5. The periodical Winds enumerated. 
 
 6. The Caufe of the Etefian Winds. 
 
 7. Why the Etefian are not found in many Places. 
 
 8. Some Winds peculiar^ others common. 
 
 9. Certain Winds periodical at certain Hours. 
 
 10. Northern Winds ??ioJl frequent in Places near the 
 North Pole. 
 
 11. Four Species of Winds. 
 
 12. Certain impetuous and fudden Winds, 
 
 13. Their Kinds exemplified. 
 
 14. Tornados, or Travados. 
 
 15. Catarauls, or Exhydrias. 
 
 16. Ecnephias, or leffer Exhydrias. 
 
 17. Typhon, or Oranchan. 
 
 18. Whether certain Winds hurfl out of the Earth, or 
 rife from the Water. 
 
 19. Whether a certain Wind may rife from the Flood 
 of the Sea and Rivers. 
 
 20. The Caufes of the Brothers at Sea, or Caftor, 
 i Pollux, and Helena, in Tempefis. 
 
 "21. Why Calms arefo frequent in Part of the Ethiopic 
 Ocean, under the Equator ; efpecially on the Gui- 
 nea Coajl. 
 
 22. Storms and Tempefls anniverfary in certain Places. 
 
 T H E
 
 eBiMavarenAsnnH 
 
 Ifc— — ifBCTB_ ^ 
 
 THE 
 
 ABSOLUTE PART 
 
 O F 
 
 Univerfal Geography. 
 
 i8|l2s «iS^ ^B5^ €ii» §*> ^i9« ^1 -^ ^ > «S|3^ ♦&! I^ ^ JS« 
 
 SECT. I. 
 
 PRELIMINARIES. 
 
 C H A P. I. 
 
 Of the Definition, Division, Method, &g. 
 ofGEOGRJPHT. 
 
 |f|J^^^^ggS»T hath been an antientCuftom for 
 ^PMk^ii^ f^i^Mi thofe that fully treat of any Art^ 
 or Science, to premife fomewhat 
 ofit'sOr/g2>, Nature, ConJlituHon^ 
 &c. And this Procedure is not 
 improper, provided it be clear of 
 all fophiftical Equivocation j be-» 
 caufe from fuch Preliminaries the Reader may con- 
 ceive an Idea of the Work, or at leaft the Sub- 
 ftance thereof, and fo proceed more advifedly there- 
 in. We Ihall therefore here offer a few Particulars 
 as to the Nature, Ufe, and- Defign of Geoqraphy, 
 
 VOL. LB n&
 
 2 "The Abjolute Fart S e c T. I 
 
 l!he Definition of Geography. 
 
 GEOGRAPHTh that part of mixed Mathe- 
 matics, which explains the State of the Earth, and 
 of it's Parts, depending on Quantity, viz. it*s 
 Figure, Place, Magnitude, and Motion, with the 
 Celeftial Appearances, &'c. 
 
 B Y fome it is taken in too limited a Senfe, for a 
 bare Defcription ol the feveral Countries -, and by 
 others too extenfively, who along with fuch a De- 
 fcription would have their Political Conftitution. 
 But the Authors who proceed thus are exculable, 
 becaufe they do it only to excite and delight the 
 Reader, who might other wife be the lefs attentive 
 to a bare Enumeration and Defcription of the Coun- 
 tries, without fome Knowledge of the Manners, and 
 Cuftoms of the Inhabitants. 
 
 'The Divifwn of Geography, 
 
 ^ W E divide Geography into General and Special, 
 or Univerfal and Particular. Golnitziui fays. Geo- 
 graphy is to be explained externally and internally ; 
 but thefe Terms are improper, and ill chofen, Uni- 
 verfal and Particular being much more pertinent. 
 We call that Univerfal Geography which confiders 
 the whole Earth in general, and explains it's Pro- 
 perties without regard to particular Countries : But 
 Special or Particular Geography defcribes the Confti- 
 tution and Situation of each fingle Country by itfelf 
 which is twofold, viz. Chorographical^ which de- 
 fcribes Countries of a confiderable Extent ; or Topo- 
 graphical^ which gives a View of fome place or 
 fmall Tradl of the Earth. 
 
 I N this Book, we fhall exhibit Univerfal Geogra- 
 phy^ which may be divided into three Parts, Abfo- 
 lute^ Relative, and Comparative. In the Ahfolute 
 
 Part
 
 Chap. i. of Vnlvcrfal Geography. ^ 
 
 Part we fhall handle v/hat refpccfts the Body of the 
 Earth itfelf, it's Parts and peculiar Properties -, as 
 it's Figure, Magnitude, and Motion ; it's Lands, 
 Seas, and Rivers, l^c. In the Relative Part we 
 fhall account for the Appearances and Accidents 
 that happen to it from Cdeftial Caufes : and, laftly, 
 the Comparative Part Ihall contain an Explication 
 of thofe Properties, which arife from comparing dif- 
 ferent Parts of the Earth together {a). 
 
 ^he Suhje5f of Geogi-aphy. 
 
 THE Objeft, or Subjed, of Gscgraphy is the 
 Earth ; efpecially it's Superficies and exterior Parts. 
 
 The Properties of Geography. 
 
 THE Things which feem to be mofl: worthy of 
 Obfervation in every Country are of three kinds, viz. 
 Celejlial, Terrejlrial^ and Human. The Celefiial Pro- 
 perties are fuch as affed: us by reafon of the apparent 
 Motion of the Sun, and Stars. Thefe are eight in 
 Number: i. The Ekvatioji of the Pole, or the Dif- 
 tance of a Place from the Equator. 2. The Obliquity 
 of the Diurnal Motion of the Stars above the Horizon of 
 that Place. 3. The Time of the longeji and fhorteji 
 
 [a) The Honour of reducing Miftakes, and hath left us a Me- 
 
 Geography to Art and Syftem thod of difcovering his own. 
 
 was reierved to Ptolemy ; who There is one thing yet very 
 
 by adding Mathematical Advan- lame in our Geography, the fix- 
 
 tages to the Hillorical Method, ing the true Longitude of 
 
 in which it had been treated of Places ; and tho' feveral new 
 
 before, has defcribed the World Ways have been lately tried, to 
 
 in a much more Intelligible redrefs this Inconvenience, both 
 
 Manner: he has delineated it from exaft Pendulums, and from 
 
 under more certain Rules, and Obfervations upon the Immer- 
 
 by fixing the Bounds of Places, fions and Emerfions oi Jupiter^ 
 
 from Longitude and Latitude, Satellites, yet they have not al- 
 
 hath both difcovercd others together proved effeftual. 
 
 B 2 Da\\
 
 4 ■ "The Abfolute Part Sect. I. 
 
 Da-j. 4. J'he Cliriiate and Zone. 5. Heat, Cold^ 
 and the Seafons of the 2'^ear ; with Rain, Snow, Windy 
 and other Meteors : and tho' thefe may feem Ter- 
 reftrial ProperLies, yet becaufe they chiefly depend 
 upon the Motion ot the Sun, and the four Seafons 
 of the Year, we have reckoned them among the 
 Celeflial Matters. 6. 'The Rifing, Appearance, and 
 Continuance, of the Stars above the Horizon. 7. The 
 Stars that pafs thro' the Zenith of a Place. 8. The 
 Celerity of the Motion with which, according to the Co- 
 pernican Hypothefis, every place conflantly revolves. 
 And according to Aftrologers a ninth Property may 
 be added ; for they afllgn fome Country or other 
 to every one of the twelve Signs of the Zodiac, and 
 the Planets which are Lords of thefe Signs -, but 
 fuch imaginary Qualities feem fuperflitious and vain 
 to me ; nor do I perceive any reafonable Foundati- 
 on for them {a). Thus far the Celeflial Properties. 
 W E call thofe Terreftrial Properties that are ob- 
 ferved in the Face of every Country ; which are 
 ten in Number, t . The Limits and Bounds of each 
 Country. 1. Ws Figure. 3. ICs Magnitude. 4. //'j 
 Mountains. 5. It^s Waters, viz. Springs, Rivers, 
 and Bays. 6. It's IVoods and Defarts. 7, The Fruit- 
 fulnefs and Barrennef of the Country, with it* s various 
 kinds of Fruits. 8. The Minerals and Fojfils. 9. The 
 living Creatures there. 10. The Longitude of the 
 Place : which might be comprehended under the 
 firft of thefe Properties. 
 
 (/{) Tho' this Art be of great to this Day, venerated in moft 
 
 Antiquity, it is rejeded and Eafiern Countries, efpecially a- 
 
 exploded by moft knowing Peo- mong the hdiatis ; where no- 
 
 pleofthis Age; and only Jm- thing is done of any Confe- 
 
 poftors, or fome weak Pre- quence, before the Aftrologer 
 
 tenders to Learning, now pra- determines a fortunate Hour 
 
 £life it, in thefe Parts of tlie to undertake it. See Rohaulfs 
 
 World. It is however, even Phyjics Part z. Chap, zj. 
 
 THE
 
 C H AP. I. of Vfiiverfal Geography. f 
 
 THE third kind of Obfervations to be made 
 in every Country, we call Humane becaufe they 
 chiefly refpedl the Inhabitants of the Place -, and 
 thefe are alio ten in Number. i. Their Stature, 
 Shape, Colour, and the length of their Lives ; their 
 Origin, Meat, and Drink. 2. Their Arts, and the 
 Profits which arife from them \ with the Merchandife 
 and Wares they barter with one another. 3, Their 
 Virtues and Vices, Learning, Capacities, and Schools. 
 4. Their Ceremonies at Births, Marriages, and Fu~ 
 ?ierals. 5. The Language which the Inhabitants ufe. 
 6. Their Political Gcverninen^. y . Their Religion and 
 Church Government. 8. Their Cities and famous 
 Places. 9. Their remarkable Hiflories. 10. Their 
 famous Men, Artificers, and the Inventions, of the 
 Natives. 
 
 THESE are the three kinds of Occurrences to 
 be explained in Special Geography j and tho' the lafl 
 Sort leem not fo properly to belong to this Science, 
 yet we are obliged to admit them for Cuftom fake, 
 and the Information of the Reader. 
 
 I N Univerfal Geography (which is the Subjedt 
 of this Book) the abfolute Divifion of the Earth, 
 and the Conftitution of it's Parts, will firft be exa- 
 mined ', then the Celeftial Phenomena, in general, 
 that are to be applied to their refpe<5live Countries, 
 in Special Geography -, and laftly, there will follow in 
 the Comparative Part fuch Confiderations as occur 
 from comparing the Phasnomena of one Place with 
 another. t 
 
 The Principles of Geography, 
 
 THE Principles from which Arguments are 
 drawn for proving Propofitions in Geography are 
 of three forts, i. Geometrical, Arithmetical, and 
 Trigonometrical Propofitions. 2. Aftronomical 
 Precepts and Theorems (tho* it may feem ftrange 
 B 3 we
 
 6 1h Abfohite Part S E c T. I. 
 
 we Hiould hav^e Recourfe to the Celeflial Bodies, 
 which are dillant from us fo many Millions of 
 Miles, for underftanding the Nature of the Earth 
 we inhabit). 3. Experience j becaufe the greateft 
 Part of Geography, and chiefly the Special^ is 
 founded only upon the Experience and Obferva- 
 tions of thofe who have defcribed the feveral Coun- 
 tries. 
 
 The Order of Geography. 
 
 THE Order we have thought mofl conve- 
 nient to follow in General Geography, is already 
 mentioned in the Divifion and Explication of it's 
 Properties •, yet there remains a Doubt as to the 
 Order to be obfcrved in explaining thefe Properties : 
 viz. whether we fnould apply them to their relative 
 Countries in which they are found, or refer the 
 Couiicries themfelves to the Properties accounted 
 for, in general. Arijlotle, in his iirft Book of A- 
 nimals, moves the fame Doubt ; and argues at 
 large, whether the Properties fliould be adjufted to 
 the general Account of Animals, or the Animals 
 ranked under the Account of their Properties. The 
 like Difficulty occurs in other Parts of Philofophy. 
 However we Ihall here firft explain fome general 
 Properties ; and after apply them to their refpedive 
 Countries. 
 
 The Proof of Geography. 
 
 I N proving Geographical Proportions we are 
 to obfcrve •, that feveral Properties, and chiefly 
 the Celeft:ial, are confirmed by proper Dcmonfl:ra- 
 tions : But in Special Geography (excepting the Ce- 
 IcflialsJ almoll every Thing is explained without 
 Demonfl:ratIon ; being either grounded on Expe- 
 rience and Obfcrvation, or on the Teitimony of 
 
 our
 
 Chap. i. of U?iherfal Geography, j 
 
 our Senfes : nor can they be proved by any other 
 Means. For Science is taken either for that Know- 
 ledge which is founded on things highly proba- 
 ble •, or lor a certain Knowledge of I'hings which 
 is gained by the force of Argument, or the Tefti- 
 mony of Senfe •, or for that Knov/lcJge which a- 
 rifes from Dcmonilraiion in a iu'ldl Senfe, fuch as 
 is found in Geometry, Arithmetic, and other Ma- 
 thematical Sciences ; excepting Chronology and 
 Geography ; to both which the Name of Science, 
 taken in the fecond Senfe, doth moft properly be- 
 long. 
 
 T H E R E are alfo feveral Propofitions proved, 
 or rather expofed to view, by the artificial Ter- 
 reftrial Globe, or by Geographical Maps ; moft of 
 which might be confirmed by a ftri(5t Demonftrati- 
 on ; tho' omitted on Account of the Incapacity of 
 fome Readers. Other Propofitions cannot be lb 
 well proved, yet are received as apparent Truths. 
 Thus tho' we fuppofe all Places on the Globe, and 
 in Maps, to be laid down in the fame Order as 
 they really are on Earth ; neverthelefs in thefe Mat- 
 ters we rather follow the Defcriptions that are given 
 by Geographical Authors. Globes and Maps, in- 
 deed, made from fuch Obfervations, ferve well 
 enough for lUuftration, and the more cafy Com- 
 prehenfion of the Thing. 
 
 Ihe Origin of Geograph'j, 
 
 THE Origin of Geography is not of late Date, 
 nor was it brought into the World as it were at one 
 Birth •, neither was it invented by one Man : but 
 it's Foundations were laid many Ages ago. It is 
 true, indeed, the old Geographers were employed 
 only in defcribing particular Countries, either in 
 whole, or in part. The Romans^ when they had 
 overcome and fubdued any Province, ufed to ex- 
 B 4 pofe
 
 8 ^he Ahjolute Tart S e c t. L 
 
 pofe the Chorograph^ thereof to the Speflators in 
 their Triumphs delineated upon a liable, and 
 Jlouriflied round with Picflures. There were alfo at 
 Romc^ in the Portico of Luculhts, feveral Geographi- 
 cal Tables expoled to public View. The Senate of 
 Rojne, about one hundred Years before the Birth of 
 Christ, lent Geographers and Surveyors into the fe- 
 veral parts of the Earth, that they might meafure 
 the whole -, tho' they fcarce vifited a twentieth Part 
 of it. Neco^ alfo, King of Egrpt, many Ages be- 
 fore Christ, commanded that the Extremities of 
 jifrica fliould be diligently fcarched into •, which 
 was performed by the Fbcenidans in the fpace of three 
 Years. Darius commanded that the Mouths of the 
 River Indus, and' the whole ytthiotic Sea, to the 
 eallward, fliouId be diligently examined into. Alex- 
 ander the Great, as Plin^ tells us, in his Afiatic Ex- 
 pedition, carried along with him two Geographers, 
 Dicgenes2ind Beta, to meafure and delineate to him his 
 Journies ; from whole Journals and Obfervations 
 the Geographers of fucceeding Ages borrowed many 
 Things. And tho' the fludy of all other Arts was 
 almoit abolifhed by the Wars, Geography and For- 
 ■/4ification were improved thereby. 
 
 NEVERTHELESS the Geography of the 
 Antients v/as very imperfed:, and commonly full of 
 falfe Relations ; becaufe they knew little or nothing 
 of thofe Places of the Earth which are of moil Con- 
 fequence to be known -, or at leaft they had no cer- 
 tain Experience about them. For, I. 2\\ America 
 V/as entirely unknown to them. 2. So were there- 
 motefl Northern Countries. 3. The South Ccnti- 
 vent and the Country of Magellan. 4. They knew 
 not that the World could be failed round, or that 
 the Earth was furrounded by the Ocean, in an un- 
 interrupted Continuity : Some indeed of the Anti- 
 ents I confefs were of this Opinion, but I deny 
 fhey I]ad any Certainty of it. 5. They knew not
 
 Chap. i. of V7therfal Geography. 9 
 
 that the horrid Zone was inhabited, by an almoft in- 
 finite number of People. 6. They were ignorant 
 of the true Meafure of the Earth, the' they writ a 
 great deal on that fubjeft. 7. They did not think 
 that Afrka could be failed round (b)^ becaufe the 
 South Parts thereof were unknown to them. 8. 
 Both the Greeks and Romans wanted true Defcripti- 
 ons of the Countries remote from them, and have 
 left us a great many forged and fabulous Stories, 
 concerning the People that live in the Borders of 
 Jfia, and thofe that inhabit the Northern parts of 
 the Earth (c). 9. They were ignorant of the ge- 
 neral Motion of the Sea, and the Diflerence of Cur- 
 rents in particular Places, 10. The Grecians^ even 
 Jrifiotlc himfelf, did not know the Reafon of the 
 Ebbing and Flowing of the Sea, 1 1 . Few of them 
 underftood the Variation of the Winds ; and the 
 
 {b) It is likely the antient 
 Egyptiatjs had fome Knowledge 
 of the extream Parts of Africa, 
 as appears from what Herodotus 
 relates, ^iz. " That AVco, King 
 " of Egypt, (2200 Years ago) 
 ** having furnifhedcertainPi'a?- 
 * ' nicians with Ships ; thefe fet- 
 *' ting Sail for the Red-Sea, and 
 ** coalting sXonvJfrica, doub- 
 ^* led the Cape of Good Hope ; 
 ** and after two Years fpent 
 " in the Voyage entered the 
 " Streights of Gibraltar, in the 
 «* third. Herod. Lib. a. 
 
 [c) C. Piinii Nat. Hi/. Lib. 5 . 
 Chap. 8. Blemmyis traduntur ca- 
 pita abejfe, ore iS oculis peHori 
 afi.xis. The Blem7nai are faid to 
 be witliout Heads, having their 
 Mouths and Eyes fixed in their 
 Breafts. Ibid. Lib. 7. Cap. z.Ari- 
 mafpi i;no oculo in fronte jnedia 
 injignes: quibus ajjtdue bellimi 
 ^e circa met alia cum Grypbii. 
 
 Et alibi, Cauda ijillofa homhies 
 nafci pernicitatis eximi^. The 
 Arimafpi are famous for having 
 only one Eye fixed in the mid- 
 dle of their Foreheads, between 
 whom and the Grijfons there 
 is a continual War carried on 
 about their Metals. In another 
 Place there areafort of grinning 
 Apilh People, born with long 
 hairy Tails, and very fwift of 
 Foot. From which Romantic 
 ftories of PBiy, Sir J . Mande- 
 fille took his lying Reports, of 
 his meeting (in his T'ravels,) 
 with thefe very People, and al- 
 fo fome, in the TorridZone, that 
 to guard themfelves againft the 
 fcorching Heat of theSun, had 
 one of their Feet fo large, that 
 by lying on their backs, and 
 holding it up againft the Sun, 
 would fcreen them againft it's 
 immoderate Heat ; with otlier 
 the like whimfical Relations. 
 
 Periodical,
 
 lo ^he Ahfoliite Fart Sect. I. 
 
 Periodical, or 'Trade-Wmdi^ were never dreamt of 
 by them. 12. The noble Property of the Load- 
 Stone, which fliews the North and South, was un- 
 known to them ; tho' they knew it's Virtue of at- 
 tradling Iron. And Anaximander, who lived about 
 400 Years before Chrift, was the firfl: that attemp- 
 ted to give the Dlmenfions of the Earth {a). 
 
 The Excellency of Geography. 
 
 THERE are three Things that recommend 
 the Scudy of Geography, i. It's Dignity ; and in 
 that it greatly adorns Man, the Inhabitant of the 
 Earth endowed with Reafon above all other Ani- 
 mals, to underftand the Nature of Countries, and the 
 ConlUtution of the Earth. 2. It is as well a plea- 
 fant, as an innocent Recreation. 3. There is an ab- 
 folute necefficy for the Knowledge of it j becaufe 
 neither Divines, Phyficians, Lawyers, Hijlorians, nor 
 other Men of Letters, can well proceed in their 
 Studies, without interruption, unlefs they have fome 
 Knowledge of Geography ; as it hath been obferved 
 by others, and illuftrated by feveral Examples. 
 
 HERE follow two Tables, whereof the firft • 
 may ferve for the Contents of this Book j which 
 
 [a) The Moderns have de- much of the Globe undifcover- 
 
 tehed many Errors of the An- ed. There is a vaft Southern 
 
 tients, and very much improved Continent, as yet fcarce looked 
 
 Geography, by opening a Paf- into.The northern parts of /ite*?- 
 
 fage to a New World, and by rica, areyetundifcovcred. j^fri- 
 
 difcovering that thofe Parts of ca, tho' it hath been compared 
 
 the Old which were thought round and round from the Me- 
 
 uninhabitable, to be inhabited; diterranean to the Red Sea, yet 
 
 the Torrid Zone is known to little more than it's Coafts are 
 
 be temperate, by refrefhing throughly known, exce^it Egypt 
 
 Showers and conftant Breezes, and AbaJJia. It's inland parts 
 
 andcold Nights ; and the Globe have been either not fuffici- 
 
 itfelf has been compaficd by fe- ently viewed or imperfedly 
 
 veral, both Englijh and Foreign defcribed. 
 Sailors. But there yet remains 
 
 2 contains
 
 Chap. I. of Unherjal Geography. ii 
 
 contains Univerfal Geography : the other fhews the 
 Order that ought to be obferved by thofe that treat 
 o^ Special Geography. 
 
 W E divide Univerfal Geography into three Parts, 
 
 viz. 5 
 
 • i 
 
 I. THE JBSOLUTE Pyfi^r, fubdivided 
 
 into fix Sed ions, whereof 
 
 SECTION I. contains two Chapters of 
 PRELIMINARIES. 
 
 r Chap. I. The Introdu6lion or Preface. 
 ^Chap. II. Some Geometrical Propofitions of ufe 
 (^ in the Work. 
 
 SECT. II. In which the Nature of the Earth 
 is explained, in five Chapters. 
 
 Chap. III. Of the Figure of the Earth. 
 Chap. IV. Of it*s Meafure and Magnitude. 
 iChap. V. Of it's Motion. 
 ^Chap. VI. Of it's Situtation in the Syftem of the 
 
 World. 
 Chap. VII. Of it's Subftance and Matter. 
 
 SECT. III. In which the Conftitution of the 
 Earth and it's Parts are explained, in four Chapters. 
 
 Chap. VIII. Of the Divifion of the Earth b/ 
 
 Water. 
 *Chap. IX. Of Mountains in general. 
 )Chap. X. Of the Differences of Mountains. 
 
 Chap. XL Of Woods, Defarts, and Mines. 
 
 SECT.
 
 12 I'he Abfolute Tart Sect. I. 
 
 SECT. IV. Of H-jdrography, in which the 
 Conftitution of the Waters, and their Properties 
 are explained, in fix Chapters. 
 
 J" Cbcip. XII. Of the Divifion of the Waters by 
 the Earth. 
 
 Chap. XIII. Of the Ocean and Sea. 
 J Chap. XIV, Of the Motion of the Sea, viz. it*s 
 1 Flux and Reflux. 
 
 Chap. XV. Of I.akes, Meres, and MorafTes. 
 
 Chap. XVI. Of Rivers. 
 _ Chap. XVII. Of Mineral Waters. 
 
 SECT. V. 
 
 r Chap. XVIII. Of the extraordinary Changes of 
 <^ the Sea into Land, and dry 
 
 C. Places into watery. 
 
 SECT. VI. Of the Atmofphere. 
 
 r Chap. XIX. Of the Atmofphere and Air. 
 < Chap, XX. Of Winds in general. 
 <Shap.XXl. Of the difterent forts of Winds. 
 
 : ■ 'if: ■■: • ' . ' : /; . 
 
 II. THE REUriFE PART explains 
 the Celeflial Properties, in nine Chapters. 
 
 " Chap. XXII. Of the Celeflial Properties in ge- 
 neral. 
 
 Chap, XXIII. Of the Latitude of the Place, or 
 the Elevation of the Pole. 
 
 Chap. XXIV. Of the Divifion of the Earth into 
 Zones. 
 
 Chap, XXV. Of the Length of Days, and the 
 Divifion of the Earth into 
 ClimateSo
 
 Chap. I. of IJmverfal Geography. i'^ 
 
 I Chap. XXVI. Of Light, Heat, and the Seafons 
 j of the Year. ' , 
 
 ^ Chap. XXVII. Of Shadows, and how the Inha- 
 bitants are divided according 
 to them. 
 Chap.X^YlW. Of comparingthe Celeftial Phre- 
 nomena, in difierent Places. 
 Of the Ant(sci, Periceci and 
 Antipodes. 
 Chap. XXIX. Of the Difference of Time in dif- 
 ferent Places. 
 Chap. XXX. Of the different Rifing of the Sun 
 and Moon, and other Phse- 
 nomena. 
 
 III. THE COMPARATIVE PART 
 
 confiders the Particulars arifing from comparing tiie 
 Phenomena of one Place, with thofe of another. 
 
 ■ Chap. XXXI. Of the Longitude of Places. 
 Chap. XXXII. Of the Situation of Places in re- 
 
 fpedt of one another. 
 Chap. XXXIII. Of the Diftances of Places. 
 Chap. XXXIV. Of the Vifible Horizon. 
 C^^^. XXXV. Of Navigation, in general, and 
 
 Ship-Building. 
 Chap. XXXVI. Of Lading and Ballafting of 
 
 Ships. 
 Chap. XXXVII. The Nautical Diredory, Part 
 
 I. Of Diftances. 
 Chap. XXXVIII. Part 2. Of the Points of the 
 
 Compafs. 
 Chap. XXXIX. Part 3. Of a Ship's Courfe. 
 Chap. XL. Part 4. Of the Ship's Place in her 
 
 Voyage. 
 
 Special
 
 .i4 ^he Abfolute Fart S e c T. I. 
 
 Special Geography exhibits three kinds of Particu- 
 lars. Ten of them are Terreftrial. ^^^ j . 
 
 1. The Limits and Bounds of the Country. 
 
 2. The Longitude and Situation of Places. 
 
 3. The Figure of the Country. 
 
 4. It's Magnitude. 
 
 5. It's Mountains ; their Names, Situations, Al- 
 titudes, Properties, and Things contain- 
 ed in them. ! 
 
 6. It's Mines. 
 
 7. It's Woods and Defarts. 
 
 8. It's Waters-, as Seas, Rivers, Lakes, Marflies, 
 Springs -, their Rife, their Origin, and 
 Breadth ; the Quantity, Quality, and Ce- 
 lerity of their Waters, with their Catarads. 
 
 9. The Fertility, Barrennefs, and Fruits, of the 
 Country. 
 
 10. It's livino; Creatures. 
 
 < 
 
 *o 
 
 The Celeftial Properties are eight. 
 
 1. The Diftance of the Place from the Equator 
 and Pole. 
 
 2. The Obliquity of the Motion of the Stars a- 
 bove the Horizon. 
 
 3. The Length of the Days and Nights. 
 J 4. The Climate and Zone. 
 
 ! 5. The Heat and Seafons : Wind, Rain, and 
 ^ other Meteors. 
 
 6. The Rifing and Continuance of the Stars a- 
 bove the Horizon. 
 
 7. The Stars that pafs thro' the Zenith of the 
 Place. 
 
 8. The Celerity with which each Place revolves, 
 according to the Copernican S^flem, 
 
 THE
 
 C H A p. I . of Vniverfal Geography, 
 
 THE Human Particulars arc ten. 
 
 ^S 
 
 " I . The Stature of the Inhabitants ; their Meat, 
 Drink, and Origin. 
 
 2. Their Arts, Profits, Commodities, and 
 Trade. 
 
 3. Their Virtues and Vices ; their Capacities 
 and Learning. 
 
 4. Their Ceremonies at Births, Marriages, and 
 <^ Funerals. 
 
 5. Their Speech and Language. 
 
 6. Their Political Government. 
 
 7. Their Religion and Church Government. 
 
 8. Their Cities. 
 
 9. Their memorable Hiftories. 
 
 10. Their famous Men and Women, Artificers, 
 i and Inventions. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 S)Ome Tropofitions hi Geometry and T^rigonometry ^ 
 of life in Geography, 
 
 PLA'TO very juftly called Geometry and Ariih- 
 metic the two Wings whereby the Minds of 
 Men might mount up to Heaven ; that is, in fearch- 
 ing after the Motions and Properties of the Ccleftial 
 Bodies. Thefe Sciences are no kfs ufeful in Geogra- 
 phy ; if we defire to underftand it's fublime and in- 
 tricate Parts, without any Hinderance. It is true* 
 a lefs fhare of Mathematics will ferve for Geography 
 than /Ifironomy : but becaufe feveral are taken with 
 
 the
 
 i 6 llje Ahfilute Part S e c T. I. 
 
 the Study of Geography^ who do not underftand 
 thefc Sciences, we Ihall here fet down a few Propo- 
 (itions from them, iuch as we think mofl necelTary ; 
 that the Reader may proceed the more readily with- 
 out Interruption in his Study. Tho', by the way, 
 we do not at all encourage that bad Cuftom fome 
 young Gentlemen have got, in applying themfelves 
 iinadvifedly to other Parts of Philofophy, betbre 
 they have a competent Knowledge in Arithmetic 
 and Geometr'j. The Fault is very often in their 
 Mafirers and Tutors, who are for the moil Part ig- 
 norant of thefe Things themfelves, and therefore 
 cannot admonifli Youth to fliun fo pernicious a 
 Cuftom. In Arith7netic we fuppofe the Reader to 
 know the four common Rules of Numeration, viz. 
 yJcUitiofj, SubJlraBion, Multiplication^ and Divifwn^ 
 •with the Golden Rule, or Rule of Three i and there- 
 fore fliall not treat of them here. If any one under- 
 ftand them not, he may learn them much better 
 from fome able Teacher, than from Books. 
 
 1. BUT as to Geometry, it treats of three forts 
 of Magnitudes by which every thing is meafu* 
 red -, viz. Lines, Superficies, and Solids : neither can 
 there be found in Nature a Body of any other 
 Dimenfion. 
 
 2. A LINE is either ftraight or curved •, and 
 a Curve again is either uniform as circular, or difti- 
 milar and variable, as the Ellipfe, the Conchoid, 
 and Spiral Line. 
 
 3. A CIRCLE is a Space or plain Super- 
 ficies bounded with a curv^e Line, wherein there 
 is a Point from which all right Lines drawn to 
 the Curve are equal. The curve Line which bounds 
 that Space is called the Circumference, or Periphery^ 
 of the Circle ; and the middle Point is called the 
 Center (a). . . 
 
 {a) Euclid, Lib. i. Def. 1 5, 1 6. 
 
 z 4. THE
 
 Chap. 2. of U?2iverfal Geography . 17 
 
 4. THE Diameter of a Circle is a right L.ine 
 drawn thro' the Center, and terminated at both 
 ends by the Periphery : one half of which is called 
 the Semidiameter, or Radius {a). 
 
 5. A N ^uh is part of the Periphery of a 
 Circle. A ^adrant is a fourth Part of the whole 
 Periphery. What an Arch wants of a Quadrant is 
 called the Complement of that Arch : and it's Diffe- 
 rence from a Semicircle it called it's Suppletnent (b), 
 
 PROBLEM. 
 
 6. HAVING a right Line given ^ and a Point, 
 either in or out of it, to draw thro* that Point a 
 Line perpendicular to the former. 
 
 LET the Line given {Fig. 2.) be A B, and 
 the Point C: open the Compafles fo, that fetting 
 one Foot in C, you may with the other cut the 
 Line given in df; then one Foot being placed 
 at dy with the other delcribe an Arch, ^s gh % alfo 
 make /the Center, and with the fame Radius de- 
 fcribe another Arch, which will cut the former 
 in g and h -, fo draw the Line g h ; which will be 
 the Perpendicular required. 
 
 7. TO divide a Circle and it*s Periphery into four 
 equal Parts. Draw a Diameter, and from the 
 Center raife to it a Perpendicular, which prolonged 
 will be alfo a Diameter ; whereby both the Circle 
 and it's Periphery will be divided into four equal 
 Parts {c). 
 
 8. TO divide the Periphery of a Circle into Degrees. 
 A Degree is the 360th Part of the Circumference. 
 Mathematicians always divide the Periphery into 
 
 {a) Euclid. Lib. i . Def. 1 7. (r) Ibid. Prop. 4. Lib. \v. 
 
 {b) lb. Prop. 11,12, Lib. 1. 
 
 VOL. L C fo
 
 1 8 ^be Ahfolute Fart S e c t. I. 
 
 fo many equal Parts {d) ; and each of thefe Parts 
 into 60 fmaller Divifions, called firfl Minutes -, 
 alfo each Minute into 60 Seconds, ^c. commonly- 
 writ thus, 3 de^r. 1. min. c, fee. that is, 3 Degrees, 
 2 Minutes, 5 Seconds. Hence the Qtiadrant con- 
 taineth90 Degr. the Semicircle 180, andthefixth 
 Part of a Circle 60 Degrees, 
 
 T H E R E F O R E to folve this Problem, di- 
 vide the Periphery into Quadrants, then take off 
 the Semidiameter, and with it's Length cut an 
 Arch from the Periphery ("<?), which will be equal 
 to 60 Degr. lb there remains in the fame Qua- 
 drant 30 Degr. which being bifcded you will have 
 15 Degr. this again mechanically trifetled will give 
 5 Degr. which divided into five equal Parts make 
 fo many Degrees, Q^E. F, But this is done more 
 artificially by mathematical inflrumentsC/). 
 
 9. 'TO find the Area of a ^adrangle^ or a Space 
 contained in a Figure of four Sides ^ and four Right 
 Angles. Multiply one fide by the other, and the 
 Produd is the Area. It is to be obferved that 
 Lines are meafured by Lines, and Superficies by 
 Meafures that are Superficies, or Squares ; alfo the 
 Contents of folid Bodies, which have their Dimen- 
 fions, are computed in folid Meafure, or fo many 
 •Cubes. Thus we meafure the Sides of a Houfe 
 by a lineal Foot, the Floors and Wainfcot by a 
 
 [d) This Divifion of a Circle from the fame Point lay on the 
 into 360 Parts, or Degrees, is Chord of two Degr. fo of three 
 becaufe that number can be di- Degr. ijfc. 'tijl you come to 90 
 vided into more Aliquot Parts, Degr. then beginagain as before 
 than any other convenient 'till the whole Periphery is di- 
 Number, wz, into 2, 3,4,5, vided. By this means you will 
 6, 8 and 9 Parts, avoid the Errors which may a- 
 
 (e) Euclid. Prop. 1 5 . Lib. iv. rife from the intermediate Di- 
 (/ ) By a Line of Chords vifions, and tho' thefe Errors 
 
 truly divided ; thus, from any llngly confidered are very fmall. 
 Point in the Periphery lay on yet in fo many Degr. they will 
 the Chord of or? Degr, then produce one very fenfible. 
 
 -t ' fquare
 
 Ch AP. 2. of XJniverfal Geography. 19 
 
 fquare Foot, and the Space it enclofcrh, confider- 
 ed as a Solid, by a cubical Foot. 
 
 10. li AV I N G the Diameter or Semidiameter of 
 a Circle, to find the Periphery in the [ame Meafure : 
 and converjlj^ having the Periphery given to find the 
 Diameter as near as poffible (g). The Solution of 
 this Problem depends upon the determined Pro- 
 portion of the Diameter to the Periphery, which is 
 nearly as 7 to 22 ; as is demonft rated by Arch:^ 
 medes ; or more accurately, as i 0000000000 is to 
 31415926535 {h). For Example, let the Dia- 
 meter be 12 Foot -, by the Golden Ride, as 7 is to 
 22: fo is 1 2 to the Periphery of the Circle ; or if 
 you ufe the other Proportion it will be much the 
 fame. 
 
 B UT if the Periphery be given, and the Dia- 
 meter be required, fay ; as 22 is to 7, or as 
 3 141 5926535 to loooooooooo, fo is the Peri- 
 phery given to the Diameter required. 
 
 11. THE Diameter and Periphery of a Circle, 
 or either of them, being given in Miles or Feet, to find 
 
 {g) See racquet's feka TYvq- 
 Crcmsoi Archimedes, Prop. 5. 
 
 [h) Tho' it be well known 
 that the Periphery of a Circle 
 IS incommenfurable to the Dia- 
 meter, yet either of thefe Pro- 
 portions will ferve well enough 
 for common Ufe. But no Pro- 
 portion in fmall Numbers is fo 
 exadl as that of Andrciv Ma:- 
 tius, I'i-z. 113 to 355, which 
 is found not to differ from the 
 
 if the Reader defireth the niceft 
 Computation of the Proportion 
 of the Diameter of a Circle to 
 the Circumference (altho' that 
 of Meet ins comes very near) , let 
 him have recourfe to the labo-- 
 xious Cfilcului of Fan CguU'j!, 
 
 c 
 
 who carried his Calculation to 
 35 places of Decimal Fraftions. 
 Or if he v/ould Hill be more 
 nice and curious, he may have 
 recourfe to Mr Abr. Sharp's 
 Calculation, to double the Num- 
 ber of Fan Caulens Fraclions. 
 By which Exadnefs the Cir- 
 cumference of the Terraqueous 
 Globe, m.ay be computed to a 
 Degree lefs than the Breadth 
 of a Grain of Sand: yea, more 
 than this, the number of the 
 Grairis of Sand, that would be 
 contained in a Space as big as 
 the Sphere of the Fixt Stars, 
 "might be truly computed by 
 this means. Vid. Math. Tables 
 printed for Mr Momst, page 
 53» &c. 
 2 he
 
 20 "The Abfolute Fart S e c T. I. 
 
 the Area of that Circle in fquare Miles, or fquare Feet. 
 Multiply oneluilfof the Periphery into the Semi- 
 diameter, and the ProducSl v/ill be the Area requi- 
 red (i) : but if you have only one of them given, 
 you may find the other by the lad Problem : Or it 
 may be done without it {k). 
 
 12. 'TH E Diameter, or Semidianieier^ of a Glohe 
 being given ; to find it's Superficies in Square, or il^s 
 Solidity in Cubic Meafure. 
 
 A Globe is a round folid Body, having a certain 
 Point in the Center of it, from whence all right 
 Lines drawn to the Surface are equal : and a Line 
 drawn thro* this Poirst is the Diameter, about 
 which if the Globe be revolved it is called it's 
 Axis (I). Moreover if a Globe be cut any how 
 by a right Line, the Sedion is a Circle ; if thro* 
 the Center the Circle will have the fame Diameter 
 as the Globe itfelf ; and fuch are called the greater 
 Circles of the Sphere or Globe, and the reft leffcr 
 Circles. To folve the Problem {m) : By the tenth 
 Article, find the Periphery ; then multiply the Di- 
 ameter into this Periphery, and the Produ6t will be 
 the Superficies of the Globe in fquare Meafure, which 
 multiplied into the I of the Diameter, will produce 
 the Solidity of the Globe in cubic Meafure. 
 
 (/) As is demonflrated by i j j j 
 
 Arch'unedes, Prop. \ . De Di- h- — ~| — ~~ 
 
 menfione Circuit. S J 7 9 
 
 [k) By faying, as the Square 
 
 of I (which is i) is to 7854 J[_ J_ 
 
 (the Area of a Circle whofe n' 13 I5l7 
 
 JDiamcter is i) fo is the Square 
 
 of any other Diameter to it's ___ _^ _[__ _£_ » 
 
 Area; By Prop. z. Lih.'ii. of IQ ' 2l' 
 
 Euclid. The famous M. Leib- ,;. _ ... r ■, ■■ n ^ 
 
 vitz has demonflrated, that if W Euchd, Lth. 11. Def. 14, 
 
 the Diameter of a Circle be r, ^5; 'O' '7- „ ^ . 
 
 \jn) See this demonitrated m 
 
 the true Area will be — ' — Tacquet's Seleil Theorems of Ar- 
 
 ^ cbmedcs. Scholium 2, of Prop. 
 
 24.. and that of Prop, 28. 
 
 -• \ 13« ^
 
 C H AP. 2. of Vniverfal Geography. 2 1 
 
 13. A RIGHT angled Triafigle hath two fides 
 perpendicular to each other (or make an Angle of 
 90 Degr.) which two fides are called the Catheti, 
 or Perpendiculars, and the third fide the Hypo- 
 temfe. 
 
 THE Meafure of an Angle is the Length of 
 an Arch defcribed from the angular Point as a 
 Center : that is, as many Degrees as the Arch be- 
 tween the Legs of the Angle doth contain ; fo 
 many Degrees the Angle is faid to be of. Thus a 
 right Angle is 90 Degr. becaufe the Arch fo de- 
 fcribed is a Quadrant. 
 
 THE right Sine of an Arch is a right Line 
 drawn from the one end of the Arch perpendicular to 
 the Diameter, vv'hich paffeth thro' the other end («). 
 
 THE Tangent of an Arch is a right Line which 
 touches the Arch at one end, and is bounded at 
 the other with a Line drawn thro' the Center, and 
 the other end of the Arch; which Line is called 
 the Secant of that Arch. 
 
 MOREOVER, the Sine, Tangent, and Secant, 
 of an Angle, are the lame of the Arch which 
 meafureth the Angle. 
 
 (?i) WrWJnpn, in his Notes AB D, the Square a/AB is e- 
 
 upon Tacquef% Euclid, has neat- qual to the Sqiiare of AT) and 
 
 ly explained the Origin of Sines, B D. Therefore let the Semi- 
 
 Tangents, and Secants. Coroll. diameter AB be fquared, and 
 
 to the 4.7th Pra/. Lib. i. which from that Square fubfiraB the 
 
 we fhall here tranfcribe. Let Square of 'QD : The Remainder 
 
 A C the Semidlameter of a Circle ^vill be the Square of AT) or 
 
 (Fig, 3. J be of 100,000 Parts, of the Cefme B F equal to it: 
 
 and the Angle BAD ^30 Deg. out of n>:hich extraB the fquare 
 
 becaufe the Chord or Subtenfe of Root, ajid you 'will ha-ve the 
 
 60 Degr. is equal to AC the Line BF w AD. Then by this 
 
 Semidiafneter (by Prop. 15. Lib. Afialo^v «jj AB : B D : : AE : 
 
 iv. Euclid) B D the Sine 0/" 30 C E or A D:BD::AC:CE, 
 
 Degrees, fjall be equal to one fo you ha've the Tangent C E. 
 
 half the Semidiameter, or ^ And if the Square of AC be ad- 
 
 A C ; and therefore fjall con- d^d to the Square of C¥,, the 
 
 tain 50,000 Parts. But notfj Root of the Sum being extraBed 
 
 ;« ihe rizht-anded Triangle njoillbe the Secant A^. 9- E. L. 
 
 C3 IT.
 
 22 ^be Ahjolute "Part S e c t. I. 
 
 I T is alfo necefiliry to be known that Table^ 
 have been calculated by the great Labour and In- 
 duftry of Ibme Mathematicians, in which the Dia- 
 meter being taken for looooo, i^c. the Sines, 
 Tangents, and Secants, are found out in propor- 
 tional Numbers ; as of 2 Degr. 10 Degr. 2oDegr. 
 32 Min. ^c. Thefe Tables are called mathema- 
 tical Canons, and are of extraordinary ufe in all 
 mathematical and phyfical Sciences ; wherefore I 
 am willing to give fome Hints of thefe things 
 to the young Geographer. But bccaufe fpherical 
 Triangles have fome Difficulty in their manage- 
 ment, and regard none but thofe who defire to 
 be deeper fl^illed in this Science, we fliall pals them 
 by ; and only treat of right-angled Triangles, the 
 meafuring of which is as eafy as neceflary. 
 
 Two r H E O R E M S. 
 
 14. 'THE three Angles of every Triangle^ taken 
 together^ are equal to two right Angles^ or 180 Degr. 
 and therefore the two acute Angles of a right angled 
 Triangle make exadlly 90 Degr. (0). Alfo if a 
 right Line touch a Circle^ and there he drawn from 
 the Point of Conta5l another right Line to the Center, 
 that Line w.akes a right Angle with the Tangent (p). 
 
 15. T HE moil neceliary Problems are thefe. 
 
 I. THE Hypotenufe and one fide of a right angled 
 Triangle being given ^ io find either of the acute Angles. 
 Say, by the Golden Rule ; As the given Hypote- 
 nufe is to the given fide : fo is the Radius 1 00000 
 (which Number is afTumed equal to the Semidia- 
 metcr in the Tables) to the Sine of the oppofite 
 Angle ; which Sine being found in the Tables 
 
 (0) 'Euclid. Prop. 32. Lib. i. (p) Ibid. Prop. 18. Lib. iii. 
 
 will
 
 C H AP. 2. of JJniverfal Geography. 23 
 
 will ihew the Quantity of the Arch or Angle op- 
 pofite to the Side given ; and the other Angle is 
 the complement of that now found, to 90 Dcgr. 
 
 II. N E fide and the acute Jrigle riexl it being 
 given^ to find the Ilypotenufe. Say, as before •, As 
 the Sine of the Complement of the given Angle is 
 to the Radius 1 000000 : fo is the Side given to the 
 Hypotenufe fought. 
 
 III. HAVING two Sides given, to f,nd either of 
 the acute Angles. Say, As either of the Sides is to 
 the other, fo is the Radius 1 00000 to the Tangent 
 of the Angle adjacent to the Side firfl affumed. 
 
 IV. HAVING the Hypotenufe and one acute 
 Angle given, to fi.nd either of the Sides : Say -, As the 
 Radius 1 00000 is to the Sine of the Angle op- 
 pofite to the Side required : So is the given Hy- 
 potenufe to that Side. 
 
 Of Divers Meafures. 
 
 BECAUSE the ufe of Meafures is frequent 
 in Geography, and fince divers Nations ufe dif- 
 ferent Meafures, 'tis proper to premife fomewhat 
 concerning them •, partly that the Reader may the 
 better underftand the Writings of the antient Geo- 
 graphers and Hiftorians ; and partly that he may 
 compare together thofe in ufe at this Day. 
 
 THE Length of a Foot is almoll univerfally 
 made ufe of, tho' a Foot in one Place differs 
 from that in another. Mathematicians frequent- 
 ly meafure by the Rhinland Foot of Snellius, which 
 he proves to be equal to the old Roman Foot. 
 And becaufe Snellius was very diligent and accu- 
 rate in meafuring the Earth, that Rhinland Foot 
 C 4 of
 
 24 '^be Ahjolute Fart Sect. I. 
 
 of his is defervedly taken as a Standard for ar 
 other Meafures (^). See half it's Length, iJPig. i.) 
 
 A PERCH or Pole ought to confift of ten 
 fuch Feet. But the Surveyors in liolla/id make 12 
 Feet a Rhinland Perch, and in Germany they com- 
 pute 16 -, which is very incommodious in Calcula" 
 tion. Snellius makes the Holland Mile equal to 
 1500 Rhinland Fetches (each Perch being 12 Foot) 
 or iSoo Rhinland Feet. 
 
 THESE two Meafures, a Perch and a Mile, 
 arife from the repetition of a Foot •, but a Palm^ 
 an Inch^ and a Barley-Corn^ (which are fometimes 
 ufed in Holland) proceed from it's Divifion, An 
 Inch is the twelfth Part of a Foot. A Palm is 
 4 Inches, A Barley. Corn is the fourth Part of an 
 Inch. However it would be much better to 
 divide the Foot into 10 Inches, and the Inch into 
 10 Subdivifions or Seconds, ^c. 
 
 THESE are the Meafures now made ufe of 
 by the Dutch in Geography. It remains that fome 
 others be alfo taken Notice of ; viz. thofe of the 
 Antients, whether Greeks, Romans., Perfians, Aigyp- 
 tians ; and thofe alfo of later Times as of the 
 'Turks ^ Polanders., Germans., Mofcovites., Italians, 
 Spaniards, French, and Englijh. 
 
 (q) Bccaufe the Knowledge 
 of an Englijh, French, and Rhin- 
 landijh Foot will be of life in 
 what follows, we will here give 
 their Proportions; to which we 
 fhall add the Meafure of the old 
 Roman Foot, taken from Dr 
 
 Bernard's Treatife of Weights 
 and Meafures, where he molt 
 learnedly confutes the great Er- 
 ror 0^ S?tellius in this Matter. 
 
 If an Englifj Foot be divided 
 into 1000 Parts, and a French 
 Foot into 1440. Then, 
 
 \EngliJh 
 ^ KJ^rench 
 to jRhinla7id 
 
 tRiuiian 
 
 furin's Ap-' 
 ■pendix. 
 
 THE
 
 PUttl. 
 
 4^-49 
 
 ^ 
 
 p 4-S. 40.
 
 Chap. 2. of Univerfal Geography. 25 
 
 THE Grecian Stadium, or Furlong, is fuppofed 
 to be 600 of their Feet, which make 625 Romany 
 or Rhinland, Feet ^ their Foot being a little larger 
 than the Roman. 
 
 A GERM J N Mile (15 of which Geogra- 
 phers allow to a Degree) contains 22800 Rhintand 
 Feet, and is accounted 4000 Paces, or 32 Fur- 
 longs. It is in Proportion to the Rhinland Mile, 
 as 19 to 15. 
 
 THE Italian or Roman Mile is 1000 Paces, 
 which is equal to 4000 Rhinland Feet. Note, The 
 Romans uled to call their Mile Lapis, becaufe a 
 Stone was eredted at the end of every Mile ; elpe- 
 cially in Places adjacent to the City. 
 
 A G EO M ETRIC AL Pacehtx?.a.\y s^^^t', 
 and a Fathom 6 Feet ; which is thought by fome to 
 have been the Pace of the Grecians. 
 
 A CUB IT is fuppofed to be a Foot and a half. 
 
 THE Parafange, or Perfian Mile, is thought 
 to be 30 Furlongs, or 3000 Pcrfian Paces. 
 
 THE Schcenus, or ^Egyptian, Mile, according 
 to Herodotus, contains 60 Furlongs, tho' only 40 
 according to Pliny. Perhaps their Length diffe- 
 red in divers Places, or the Furlongs of the Au- 
 thors might be unequal : Or very likely their Books 
 are corrupted. 
 
 THE French League is in Proportion to the 
 Rhinlandijh Mile, as 19 to 25; and the Spanijh 
 League is to the fame Mile, as 19 to 273 : Bun 
 becaufe in feveral Parts of France and Spain their 
 League is found to differ, we cannot be well afTu- 
 red of the Length of thefe Meafures. 
 
 THE Englifo Mile is in Proportion to the 
 Rhinlandijh, as 19 to 55, or as 19 to 60, (r). But 
 
 there 
 
 (rj The lezQ. Van of Efig/i/^ and well dried; whereof 3 in 
 
 MeafureisaBarley-Corn, taken Length make an Inch, ^f. as 
 
 out of" Jhe middle of the Ear in the following Table. 
 
 I J Table
 
 26 Tloe Abfolute Part Sect. I. 
 
 there are three forts of EngliJJj Miles, whereof 27 1 
 of the longed, 50 of the middle Kind, and 60 of 
 the lliortell, make a Degree or 19 Dutch Miles. 
 
 THE Danijh and Swediflj Mile is to the Rhin- 
 landi/h Mile as 19 to 10; tho' in fome Places they 
 ufe the German Mile. 
 
 THE Vorejl, or Rujfian, Mile is as 19 to 80. 
 
 THE T^urhjh League or Mile is faid to be e- 
 qual to the Italian Mile ; of which 60 make a 
 Degree. 
 
 THE Arabian League was formerly accounted 
 the twenty fifth Part of a Degree, or 19 Holland 
 Miles : but they now ufe another of which P;,S 
 make a Degree. 
 
 A HUNDRED Indian Miles are thought to 
 equal a Degree. Tho' the Indians commonly de- 
 fcribe Diftances by a Day, or an Hour's Journey. 
 
 THE Inhabitants of Cambaya and Guzarat, 
 ufe a Meafure which they call Co/fa, of which 30 
 make a Degree. 
 
 THE Chinefe obferve three Meafures in their 
 Journies, which they call Li, Pu, and Uchan. Li is 
 the Diftance at which a Man's loud Voice may be 
 heard on a Plain, in a calm Air ; which is accounted 
 300 Geometrical Paces. Their Pu contains 10 Li's-, 
 
 fo 
 
 \Bar. C. 
 
 A Table of EngUJIj Meafure. 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 1 J 
 
 Inches 
 
 
 
 3^ 
 
 12 
 
 Feci 
 
 
 
 loi-- 
 
 36 
 
 3 
 
 Tard. 
 
 
 
 180 
 
 60 
 
 5 
 
 »f 
 
 Pace 
 
 
 
 216 
 
 72 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 M 
 
 Fath. 
 
 
 
 594 
 
 198 
 
 i6.i 
 
 5^ 
 
 4i 
 
 2: 
 
 Poles 
 40 
 
 Furl. 
 
 
 23760 
 
 7920 
 
 660 
 
 220 
 
 132 
 
 I ic 
 
 
 180090 
 
 63360 
 
 5280 
 
 1760 
 
 ioc6 
 
 88c 
 
 320 
 
 8 
 
 Mile
 
 Chap. 2. ofUjiiverfal Geography. 27 
 
 fo that 20 Puh make a Degree. And 10 P^/'s make 
 an Uchan, or 30000 Paces ; which they account a 
 Day's Journey. 
 
 iVi?/^, A Square Rhinland Mile confifts of Square 
 Feet and a Cubic Mile of Cubic Feet. Alfo a 
 Mile multiplied into itfelf makes a Square Mile; 
 and that again by a Mile makes a Cubic Mile. 
 The fame is to be underftood of a Square and 
 Cubic Foot. A _- 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 Cofitaining fome general and ahjolute Properties 
 of the Earthy in Jive Chapters. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Figure of the Earth. 
 
 TH E firft and nobleft Property of the Earth 
 (as exceeding the reft in being more ufeful and 
 neceflaryj is it's Figure ; without the Knowledge 
 of which there can be nothing well underftood or 
 demonftrated in this Science -, and all the following 
 Propofitions almoft entirely depend on, or imme- 
 diately flow from, this ; which for that Reafon 
 ought to be firft treated of. 
 
 THERE have been, and are to this Day, fe- 
 veral Opinions about the Figure of the Earth ; for 
 the Vulgar that underftand not Geography, imagine 
 it to be extended into a vaft Plain bounded with a 
 Circular Line ; except where Mountains and Val- 
 lies interpofe. Of this ftrange Opinion was La^an^ 
 tius and others of the Fathers, who ftrenuoufly ar- 
 gued that the Earth was extended infinitely down- 
 wards.
 
 28 The Ahfoliite Tart Sect. I. 
 
 wards, and eftablifhed upon feveral Foundations (^). 
 This they were inclined to think from Tome Places 
 of Scripture which they either ill underftood or 
 wrong interpreted. Heraclitus, that antient Philo- 
 fopher, is laid to have been of their Opinion : tho* 
 others fay, he fuppofed the Earth to be in the Shape 
 ol: a Skitt, or Canoo, very much hollowed. But 
 what is more ftrange Francis Patricius (a modern 
 Philofopher of no fmall Repute in the laft Age) 
 ftrcnuoufly endeavoured to prove, that the Earth 
 was horizontally flretched out and plain under Foot. 
 ^naxmander is faid by Peucerus to have fuppofed 
 the Earth like a Cylinder -, tho' that is not fo pro- 
 bable, becaufe he tried to meafurc it, and alfo in- 
 vented a fort of a Dial at hacedcsmon^ upon which 
 the Top of the Gnomon by it's Sliadow marked out 
 the Days of the Equinoxes, and Soljltces : which 
 fhewed him to have been tolerably fkilled in J/lro- 
 r.omy, confidering the Time he lived in. Leucippus 
 alio thought the Earth to be in the Shape of a Drum. 
 Thefe with a great many other abfurd Opinions, are 
 by Arijhlle and others attributed to the Antients : of 
 which fee Arijlotle Lib. ii. Cap. 13. de C(rlo. 
 
 BUT the true and undoubted Opinion, which 
 is defended by all Mathematicians, and almoft all 
 Philofophers, is, That the Earth is of a globular 
 or fpherical Figure {b). 
 
 THE 
 
 (a) See LaSlmitiiLs Lib. iii. Honour and Admiration in it ; 
 Chap. z\.2S'A Aitgiijlin. Lib. r^vx. that the true Figure of the 
 Chap. 9. De Ci'vit. Dei. They Earth, v/hich Men have inha- 
 thoaght their Opinion was fa- bited for fo many thoufand 
 voured by the Pfalmiji. Pfal. Years, is but now begun to be 
 xxiv. 2. andcxxxvi.6. known a few Years ago. For 
 
 (b) Among the many excel- that which all Men thought to 
 lent and wonderful Inventions be globular and truly fpherical, 
 of the modern Philofophers, is now found to imitate rather 
 this here is not certainly in the an oval Figure, or that of an 
 laft Place, nor hath the leall Ellipfis revolved about it's Icfle? 
 
 Axis
 
 C H A p. 3 • rf Univerfal Geography. 2 9 
 
 Axis : So that thofe Diameters 
 are longeft which come nearcft 
 the Equator, and Icfien as they 
 become more remote, but the 
 leaft Diameter of all is the Axis 
 which joineth the two Poles. 
 The Thing will perhaps be bet- 
 ter underftood if it be reprefen- 
 ted by a Figure. 
 
 Let ft; pqp [Fig. 4.) be a cir- 
 cular Sedlion of the Earth made 
 by the Meridian, inch as it was 
 thought to be formerly, and pp 
 the Axis or Diameter joining 
 the Poles, and t^q the Diameter 
 of the Equator : then the oval 
 Line JE P QJ*, defcribed upon 
 the Diameter tE Q^and P P, 
 will reprefent the Seftion or 
 true Meridian Line, which for 
 DiftiniElion fake is made hereto 
 differ more from a Circle than 
 it really ought to do j but in 
 truth, the Proportion is as 692 
 to 689. So that the Line C Q_ 
 meafuring the Altitude of the 
 Earth at the Equator, exceeds 
 C P the Altitnde at the Pole 
 S5200 Paris Feet, or about 1 7 
 Miles. 
 
 This Affair is well worthy to 
 be traced to it's Original, and to 
 be backed by a Demonftration, 
 fo far as our Purpofe will permit. 
 See the Hijiory of the Ro)ial A- 
 cademy of Sciences hy dii Hamel, 
 Pag. I 10, I 56, 206. Alfo Hifl. 
 de r Acad. Roy. 1700, 1701. 
 
 T\it French made an Experi- 
 ment about forty Years ago, 
 fhewingthata Pendulum (which 
 is a well known Inftrument for 
 meafuring of Time) vibrates fo 
 much the flower, by how m.uch 
 the nearer it is brought to the 
 Equator : that is, the Gravity, 
 of Celerity of Defcent of tlae 
 Pendulum, and of all other Bo- 
 
 dies, is lefs in Countries ap- 
 proaching the Equator than in 
 Places near cither Pole. The 
 two famous Philofophers New- 
 ton and Huygens being excited 
 by the Novelty of the Thing, 
 and fearching more narrowly in 
 to the Caufe of it, found thereby 
 that the Earth muft have fome 
 other Figure than what was 
 known ; and alfo demonfbated 
 that this Diminution of Weight 
 doth naturally arifc from the 
 Rotation of the Earth round it's 
 Axis ; which Rotation, accord- 
 ing to the Laws of circular Mo- 
 tion, repels all heavy Bodies 
 from the Axis of Motion : fo 
 that this Motion being fwifter 
 under the Equator than in Parts 
 more remote, the Weight cf 
 Bodies muft alfo be much lefs 
 there than nearer the Poles. 
 Therefore the Parts of the O- 
 cean under the Equator being 
 made lighter, and according to 
 the Nature of all Fluids, preffed 
 and forced on cither fide by the 
 Waters nearer the Poles, they 
 muft be raifed up to a greater 
 Height, that fo they may better 
 fupport and balance the greater 
 Weight of the contiguous Wa- 
 ters. Which mutual Libraticn 
 is demonftrated upon Suppofi- 
 tion of that Inequality of the 
 Dis meters which we mentioned, 
 above. The Figure of the Sea 
 being refembled by the Lands 
 adjacent, which are every v/here 
 raifed above the Sea, the afore- 
 faid Form muft be attributed to 
 the whole terraqueous Globe. 
 They that would be more fully 
 informed in this Matter may 
 confjlt Nenvtoii's Principia Lio. 
 iii. Prop. 19. or Huygeris Irca- 
 tife ofths Catfs of Gran;' iy. 
 
 Tlie
 
 30 The Ahfolute Fart S e c t. II. 
 
 THE Arguments indeed which Authors offer 
 to confirm the Truth of this, are handled fo obfcure- 
 ]y and confufedly, that they are ahiiofl infulScient 
 to convince the ftrenuous and obflinate Defenders of 
 the contrary Opinion. We flTall therefore as much- 
 as is poffible, clear up and examine thefe Argu- 
 ments •, that the Reader may have a diftind; Know- 
 Jedge of them, and know the better how to ufe them. 
 
 WE fhall not here take notice of fuch Reafons 
 as are of lefs Weight, and at befl only probable, or 
 perhaps fophiftical. Such as, i. A fpherical Fi- 
 gure is the mofl capacious ; and therefore the Earth 
 ought to have fuch a Figure. 2. All the Parrs of 
 the Earth tend to the iame Center ; therefore all thefe 
 
 The fame Inequality of Dia- 
 meter is alfo found in the Pla- 
 net Jupiter, by the Obfervations 
 of thofe Excellent Aftronomers 
 CaJJini and Fla?nJ}ead, and that 
 much more than in our Earth ; 
 becaufe the diuj-nal Rotation of 
 that Planet is more than twice 
 as fwift as the Rotation of the 
 Earth : which plainly proves, 
 th;it the DiiFerence arifes from 
 no other Caufe than the circu- 
 lar Motion. 
 
 Jurws Appendix. 
 
 Dr Derhojn ( in his Phyfico. 
 Theol. B. ii. C. I . Note [a) doth not 
 feem to entertain any doubts 
 concerning the terraqueous 
 Globe, and the other Planets, 
 being of a prolate fpheroidal Fi- 
 gure; but he faith, Thataltho' 
 lie hath often viewed Jupiter, 
 and other Planets, with very 
 good Glaffes, which he hath of 
 72 feet, and the Royal Society's 
 Glafs of above 120 feet, yet he 
 never could perceive them to be 
 otberwifg than pcff<;6lly globu- 
 
 lar. And he thinks it next to 
 impoflible, to take an exadt mea- 
 fure of the Polar and ^quatoreal 
 Diameters, by reafon of the 
 Smallnefs of theirapparent Dia- 
 meters in a Micrometer, and 
 their Motion all the timeofmea- 
 furing them. 
 
 And as to the Variation of the 
 Vibrations of Pendulums, under 
 the Line, and in the Northern 
 and Southern Latitudes, he hath 
 no doubt, but different Diilances 
 from the Earth's Center, may 
 caufe different Vibrations ; but 
 yet he ihews, from good Expe- 
 riments he made with Pendu- 
 lums in the Air-Pump, that 
 thofe Alterations might, in fome 
 meafure, be from the Rarity 
 and Denfity of the Air, in the 
 different Zones. And I may add 
 to Dr. Derhatns Experiments, 
 the Lengthening of Iron Rods 
 by Pleat, and their Shortening 
 by Cold ; which 1 have found 
 to be A-ery confidcrable, by ve- 
 ry exa6t E.xperiments, 
 
 Parts
 
 C H A p. 3 • rf Univerfal Geography. 3 i 
 
 Parts ought to make up a globular Figure. 3. When, 
 at the firft Creation the Waters were confufedly 
 mixed with the Earth, it "was then without doubt 
 moift and foft *, but the Figure of all moift and li-. 
 quid Bodies is fpherical : and fo ought the Earth to 
 remain after the ieparation of the moift Parts from 
 the dry. 
 
 I SAY, negleding thefe and fuch like Argu- 
 ments, let us look out for better ; which are of three 
 kinds. Of the firft there is only one deduced dprioriy 
 as they call it : thofe of the other two kinds are de- 
 monftrated a pojieriori ; or from Celeftial or Ter- 
 reftrial Obfervations and Appearances. 
 
 THE firft Argument is taken from the Nature of 
 Water, and borrowed either from Ariftotle or Archie 
 medes. Ariftotle in his fecond Book de Ccelo, chap. 5th, 
 propofes it as his own, after this manner, (tho' it iz 
 Jikely he borrowed it from fome Philofopher before 
 him). If we take it for granted f fays he) that Wa- 
 ter of it's own Nature tends always down to the 
 moft concave or loweft Place •, it will neceflarily 
 follow, that the Superficies of the Water is round 
 or fpherical ; but that Place is moft concave that is 
 neareft the Center of the Earth, therefore let there 
 be drawn from the Center ^- two right Lines «^3 and 
 «> ; and from /3 to 7 the Line ?>y •, to which from 
 tt let fill the Perpendicular ctz. (^c) It is plain the 
 Line a J" (Fig. 5.) is lefs than <*3 or ety^ and there- 
 fore the Place <^ is lower and more concave then ^ or 
 y ; therefore the Water muft flow downwards from 
 /3 and y *till the Lines t:^, ay^ and a-J" are equal» 
 that is, 'till aJ" becomes Ai equal to a.^, and cty 5 
 hence /3, £, and >- being in the Periphery of the fame 
 Circle, muft make the true Superficies of the W^a- 
 t^r of a round Figure. 
 
 (f) EhcM lib, i. Prop. 1 8, 
 
 THIS
 
 ^2 The Ahfolute Tart Se CT. H. 
 
 THIS is ArijlotWs Demonftration, in whichjj 
 befides the Incoherency of it, which might be eafi- 
 ly amended, I obferve thefe greater Errors, i. He 
 fuppofeth the Univerfe to have a certain Center. 
 2. That Places are higher or lower in refpefl to 
 that Center. Now he who denies the fpherical Fi- 
 gure of the Earth, will pcrhapsgrant neither of thefe 
 Poftulata : Tho' the Univerfe may be eafily 
 proved to have a Center, bccaufe the apparent Mo- 
 tion of the fixed Stars obligeth us to fuppofe that 
 they themfelves either revolve by a diurnal Motion, 
 or that the Earth is turned about it's Center. If the 
 Stars be really moved, then the Point about which 
 they will revolve v^^ill certainly be the Center of the 
 Univerfe. If the Earth ♦, then the middle Point 
 round which it moves, may, in the Demonftration, 
 be taken for Arijiotk^s central Point. But the chief 
 Difficulty is in the fecond Suppofition ; viz. that 
 Places are higher or lower in refped; of that Center ; 
 becaufe he who will have the Superficies of the Earth 
 to be a Plane, or fome other Figure, not round, 
 will deny this Suppofition, and fay that Places appear 
 higher or lower in refpccft of the horizontal Plane, 
 perpendicular to which the Earth is infinitely extend- 
 ed downwards ; or will perhaps explain the Decli- 
 vity fome other way ; fo that the Argument would 
 not be conclufive except it were firft granted that the 
 Elevation of one Place above another is only in re- 
 ipedt of fome Center, about which the Stars have 
 their apparent Motion. And tho' this were true, 
 and all other Notions of Declivity by which Water 
 is deprefil'd were confuted, yet it could fcarcely be 
 admitted for a Principle, becaufe it precarioufly 
 fuppofes the Earth to be of a fpheric Figure, which 
 is begging the Queftion. 
 
 THEREFORE fome prefer Archmedes^s 
 Demonftration (found in the firfi Book of his De Infi- 
 dmt'ibm Humido) which is indeed more artificial than 
 
 that
 
 C H A p. 3 • 9f "Univerfal Geography, % ^ 
 
 that of Ariflotle -, yet labours under the fame Diffi- 
 culties, in previoufly I'uppofing the Earth to beof'a 
 fpheric Figure, to whofe Center the prefTure of the 
 Water is made. But we are far from fuppofing that 
 the divine Archimedes could be guilty of any falfe 
 Reafoning ! No, his Defign in that Book was not 
 to demoflrate the fpherical Figure of the Earth 
 ffor then he had indeed begged the Queftion) but 
 only to explain the Nature of Water and other Li- 
 quids i in order to which he pre-fiippofes the Earth 
 to be of a fpherical Figure, or to have a Center, to 
 which all heavy Bodies in general tend •, and this he 
 takes as a Principle before known and demonftrated 
 from other Phsenomena : So that I wonder Clav'ws 
 did not obferve this, who, in his Commentary upon 
 Joannes de Sacro Bofco^ ufes this Demonftration of 
 Archimedes for the fpheric Figure of the Earth : 
 Sneliius^lfo does the fame in his Eratojlhenes Batavus. 
 But it was AriJlotWs, Defign in the Place before cited 
 to demonftrate the fpheric Figure of the Earth, Sea, 
 and Heavens ; wherefore he could notaffume a Cen- 
 ter to the Univerfe, or Earth, without being guilty 
 of a manifeft Paralogifm. 
 
 S O that this Argument taken from the Nature 
 of Water, tho it be propofed be almoft all Authors, 
 yet labours under fome Difficulties, which more 
 learned Mathematicians have endeavoured to re- 
 move, ifpoffible. I have myfelf fpent fome Time 
 upon this Matter, and tryed feveral Methods, but 
 could not bring them to bear. I was induced to 
 attempt the Thing, becaufe it would be an elegant 
 and unqueftionable Demonftration of the fpherical 
 Figure of the Earth. 
 
 THEREFORE waving this ; we fhall now 
 propofe fome Arguments a pojierioriy taken firft , 
 from celeftial Phaenomena. Let us conceive a Sec- 
 tion made by a plane or a meridian Line fwhich is 
 called the Line of Latitude) to pafs thro' a Place B, 
 VOL. I, D or
 
 34 ^'fj^ Abfolute Fart S e c T. II. 
 
 or any other Part of the Earth, and alfo thro' the 
 two Poles M, N ; as A B C D. And fuppofe another 
 Sedlion (or Luie of Longitude) {F'lg.o^,) to pafs thro' 
 the fame Point B, perpendicular to the fcrrmer, and 
 parallel to the Equator ; as E B F C. I fay thefe 
 two Sei5lions or Lines on the Surface of the Earth 
 may be proved to be circular. And it is a plain 
 geometrical T'heot'em, that any Superficies whatever, 
 when it is cut with perpendicular Planes, interfe6t- 
 ing each other in one common Line or Axis, if the 
 Lines produced on the Surface be circular, the Body 
 can be no other than ipherical. 
 
 THEREFORE if we can prove, that the 
 two perpendicular Sedlions are circular, which pafs 
 thro' any Point, B, taken at Pleafure ; we may alfo 
 by the aforefaid Theorem conclude the Superficies 
 of the Earth to be of a fphsrical Figure, and the 
 Earth itfclf a globular Body. 
 
 N O W it is proved from divers celeftial Phaeno- 
 mena, that a Section made from one Pole to ano- 
 ther, according to the Latitude of the Earth, is cir- 
 cular. I. If in the Line ABCD, a Perfon go 
 from any Point, as B, towards either Pole, as M , 
 or the Star near it •, he will find that by equal Jour- 
 nies he will equally approach nearer the Pole ; which 
 would be impoffible if the Line he travelled in was 
 not circular ; as is plainly fhewed by the artificial 
 terrejirial Globe, 2. The Line ABCD is the me- 
 ridian Line^ into which when the Sun comes it is 
 Noon or Mid-Day with us j and all the People who 
 inhabit that Line, as we know by Experience ; and 
 they that fail in the Torrid Zone teftify, that the Sun 
 at Ibme Time of the Year is perpendicular to fome 
 Place in the Line ABC i for Example, to P. If 
 we take equal Spaces B Q^ P Q^(or<iny other) we 
 fliall find the Diftance of the Sun from the Zenith of 
 Q, equal to the Interval, by which the Diftance of 
 the Sun from the Zenith of B exceeds the Diftance 
 
 2 of
 
 C H A p. 3 • 9^ Univerfal Geography. 5 « 
 
 of the fame from that of Q^; which could by no 
 means happen if the Line B F Q^was not circular^ 
 3. In like manner all the Scars when they come to 
 the Meridian ABC, have their Diftances from the 
 Zeniths of P, Q^, B, in the lame Proportion as the 
 Diftances Q^^ P B, QB. Moreover when our Ma- 
 riners fail towards the South, the Stars which before 
 were depreffed under the Horizon, and could not 
 be feen, begin to appear, and by degrees are elevated 
 in proportion to their Courfe. 4. If feveral Places 
 be obferved in the fame Meridian, and the Stars 
 that pafs thro' their Zeniths be noted ; the Diftances 
 of thefe Places have the fame Proportion one to ano- 
 ther, as the Diftances of the meridional Points, 
 wherein the feveral vertical Stars make their fouth- 
 ing. 
 
 ALSO to prove that the Line of Longitude 
 E B F C is circular, and that the Earth rifes into a 
 globular Figure, according to that other Dimenfion^ 
 we need but obferve that the Sun and Stars rife and 
 fet fooner to thofe that inhabit eaftward of us, but 
 later to them that are more to the weft •, and alfo 
 that the Difference of Time is in proportion to the 
 Diftances of their Meridians from ours. Thus, if 
 we fuppofe two Places dire£lly Ealt, the onediftant 
 from us 225 Miles, the other 450, twice as much ; 
 v/e fliall find that in this laft Place the Sun rifeth two 
 Hours fooner, and in the other one Hour fooner 
 than with us. The Argument v/ill be more clear, 
 if it be propofed about the Sun's approaching rhe 
 Meridians of divers Places ; for their Diftances in 
 refpe6l of ours are in Proportion to the Time ot the 
 Sun's apparent Motion (or an Arch of the Equator 
 intercepted between our Meridian and theirs) as is; 
 evident in Eclipfes. Thefe Fads agree precifely to 
 the Demonftrations upon the Artificial Globe: 
 which could not happen if the Earth had any other' 
 Figure. 
 
 D 2 SO
 
 36 ^he Abfohte Part Sect. II. 
 
 S O that the Earth is found to have a fpherical 
 P'orm, both in Longitude and Latitude. 
 
 BUT fincc there feems to be a Difficulty in 
 handling the Longitude, all this may be proved by 
 the Latitude only. For it is manifeil:, that the Fi- 
 gure of the Earth is fpherical, fince all the Sedions, 
 or Lines of Latitude, are circular j and pafs thro' 
 the fame Point or Pole. Becaufe any folid Body 
 whatfoever being cut with innumerable Planes, all 
 paffing thro the fame Point ; if the Peripheries of 
 thefe Sedtions are circular, the Body itfelf muft be 
 fpherical : as is known and allowed by all Geome- 
 tricians. 
 
 TH E R E is another Reafon of no lefs Force, 
 taken from the Shadow of the Earth upon the Face 
 of the Moon in Lunar Eclipfes. For fince the ob- 
 fcured Part of the Moon, caufed by the conical Sha- 
 dow cf the Earth, fcems always to be bounded with 
 a circular Line \ the Earth itfelf, for that Reafon, 
 muft needs be fpherical (J). Becaufe it is manifeft 
 from Optics that a folid Body being every way op- 
 pofed to the Sun ; if the Shadow be always conical, 
 the Body itfelf is fpherical. 
 
 I F thefe Arguments are not fufficient, we might 
 produce a great miany more, from the confideration 
 of the Earth itfelf, which perfedly prove the Earth's 
 Rotundity : fuch as thefe ; 
 
 (d) Tacquet {in his Afirono- dow proceed from the Earth it- 
 
 tny Lib. \v.) hath demon- felf, or the Jtmo/phcre, (the' 
 
 ftrateu that the Shadow of the the latter indeed be the Trutli) 
 
 Earth never readies fo far as the the Thing is the fame in the 
 
 Moon ;fo that the Moonisdark- prefent Cafe: for if the Shadow 
 
 ened not by the Shadow of the of the Aunofphere be circular. 
 
 Earth, but by that of its At- the Siiadow of the Earth which. 
 
 7nofphere only ; which was ob- is enclofed on every Side there- 
 
 ferved, tho' not fo exactly de- by muft be circular too. Whi- 
 
 monftrated, by Kepler and Ric- Jlons> AJlron. Le£l. Pag. z 
 ciolui. But whether the Sha- 
 
 2 I. FROM
 
 C H A p. 3 • ^f 'Umvei'jal Geography, 3 7 
 
 I. FROM Circumnavigation ; for the Europeans 
 have feveral times fet Sail from Europe^ and fteer'd 
 their Courfe dire(5tly South and Weft, 'till they came 
 to the Magellanic Sea ; and from thence to the Nortli 
 and Weft 'till they returned to Europe from the 
 Eaft ; and all the Phrenomena, which fhould na- 
 turally arife from the Earth's Rotundity, happened 
 to them. Their Method of failing alio was founded 
 upon this Hypothecs *, which could never have fuc- 
 ceeded fo happily if the Earth had been of any other 
 Figure *. 
 
 2. WHEN we take our Departure from high 
 Mountains and Towers ; firft the lower Parts, then 
 thofe that are higher, and laftly, their Tops are by 
 degrees deprefled, as it were, and hid from us : Or 
 the other Hand, when we approach towards them, 
 from a Place at a great Diftance, firft the Top ap- 
 pears, then the middle Part, and laftly, when we 
 come pretty near, the very Foot of the Mountain is 
 difcovered. So that this gradual Appearance and 
 Occultation, is fuch as muft neceflfarily happen from 
 the fpherical Figure of the Earth. 
 
 3. I F we meafure the Altitude of any Mountain 
 upon this Suppofition, that the Earth is globular ; 
 the Pradlice is always found tojuftify the Truth of 
 the Theory. 
 
 W E might demonftrate many of thefe Argu- 
 ments geometrically •, but (becaufe it would be both 
 
 * Ferdinando Magellan was Simon Cor^i?j in the Year 1590 
 
 the firft who failed round the By Oliver Nort, Anno 159S. 
 
 Earth, in the Year 15 19, he ^y Cornel Scharten, Annoxhi^f 
 
 performed it in 1 1 24 Days. Sir And by Jacob Hercmites, Anno 
 
 Francis Drake was the next, in 1 623 ; and all by directing their 
 
 the Year 1577, and he perform- Courfe conftantly from Enjl to 
 
 ed it in 1056 Days. The fame Wefi \ and thus returned into 
 
 was afterwards done by Sir Europe, having all along obfcr- 
 
 Thomas Cavendijh, in the Year ved the Phasnom^ena which ne- 
 
 1586; intheSpaceof777Days. cefiarily arife upon fiippofmg 
 
 It Wfis done again by Mynheer the Earth ?i fpherical Body. 
 
 P 3 laborious
 
 g8 I'be Ahjolutc Tart Sect. II. 
 
 Jaborious and difficult to prove this, or that Line 
 circular, from fijch Principles, iSc.) we fliall con- 
 tent ourfelves with thole evident Proofs above de- 
 livered : which being colle6ted into one Sum, y/ill 
 fuHiciently demonftrate the Earth to ht globular. As, 
 iirft, the celeftial Phasnomena (viz, the diiierent 
 Elevation of the Pole ; the unequal Altitude of the 
 Sun, at the fame Inftant, in different Countries ; the 
 Earth's Shadow on the Moon ; the vaft Increafe of 
 ^he longeft Day tov/ards the Poles -, the Rifingand 
 Setting of the Stars; their perpetual Appearance 
 ne?,r the Pole, i^c.) do all equally prove the Earth's 
 Rotundity, Alfo the terretlrial Appearance (viz. 
 The Art of Navigation ; the Appearance and Oc- 
 cultation of Mountains and Towers ; the Diifances 
 of Places ; the Winds and Points of the Compafs, 
 t^c.) can only be accounted for by this Figure and 
 no other. Alfo the artificial Globe ^ which we make 
 to reprefent the Earth, exhibits all thcfe Things as 
 they really are on the Earth ; which would certainly, 
 in fome Cafes, be different, except this was it's true 
 Reprefentation. The Earth is not of a plane Figure, 
 as is manifeft from the aforefaid Arguments ; nor of 
 a hollow Figure ; for then the Sun and Stars would 
 appear fooner to the weftern Inhabitants than to thofe 
 of the Eaft; : But we fee the Rifing Sun every Day 
 illuminates the Vallies, before it fhines upon the 
 |?ack Parts of the oppofice Mountains*» 
 
 * Another Argument is * follow, that one (too vaft a 
 
 drawn from the commodious ' Part) would be drowned ; and 
 
 and equal Diftribution of the ' another too dry. But being 
 
 Waters in the Earth. * For * thus orbicular, the Waters 
 
 * fmce, by the Law of Gra- ' areequallyand commodioufly 
 
 * vity, the Waters will pof- ' diftributed here and there ac- 
 J fefs the lowcft place ; there- * cording as the Divine Provi- 
 f fore, if the Mafs of the Earth * dence faw moft fit. Derhams 
 f was cubic, prifmatic, or any * Phjico- Theology, Book 2 Ch. 
 ? Other angular Figure, it would f i. Art. 2. 
 
 A
 
 C H A p. 3 • ^f Ujiiverfal Geography. 3 ^ 
 
 A fpherical Body alfo is the only one that is fi- 
 milar, or hath ail it's Parts alike among themfelves -, 
 fo tliat they may be mutually applied one to another. 
 For if two equal Parts of a Sphere be confidered, the 
 Properties of each are the fame ; which will not hold 
 in any other Body. Thus in meafuring the Earth 
 in different Places-, if it be performed by the fame 
 Method, it is always found of the hmt Magnitude : 
 which doth not a little contribute to the Proof of 
 thefe Afiertions. 
 
 ANY impartial Perfon may eafily perceive ot 
 how little Weight their Reafons are, who believe 
 the Earth to be of a plane Figure. For which they 
 argue, i . Becaufe on a clear Day the Earth feems 
 to be plane, as well as the Sea, if we look every way 
 round about us (1?). 2. If the Surface of it was not 
 plane, it would be more eafily moved, and more 
 fubje(5t to fall to pieces ; whereas flat Figures are 
 more firm and (lable (/j. 3. The Rifing or Setting 
 Sun and Moon are cut, as it were, with right Lines ; 
 but if the Earth was fpherical, they ought to be di- 
 vided by circular ones. Thus the Ancients reafoned, 
 ridiculoufly, as Artijlotk tells us. 4. Some argue 
 that the many high Mountains muft, ofneceflity, 
 deface it's Rotundity. 5. Orhers believe the Sea to 
 be higher than the Earth. 6. Some again think it 
 impoffible that Men fhould fland upon the oppofite 
 
 {e) This Argument is confu- Power of Attraftion upon all 
 
 ted by what is faid above, about the Matter in the Univerfe, 
 
 the Appearance and Dilappea- whereby all Bodies, and all 
 
 ranee of Mountains. the Parts of Bodies, mutually 
 
 (/) A fpherical Body is not attraft themfelves and one ano- 
 
 fo liable to decay and frafture ther ; vvhicii, as the Rev. Dr 
 
 as another, becaufe all the Parts Derham obferves, is the natural 
 
 of the Surface are equidiilant Caufe of the Sphericity of our 
 
 from the Center. And we are common Globe. See Nevj^ 
 
 taught by Sir Ifaac Ne-ivton^s ioji's Principia, Lib. 3. Prap. 
 
 Principles, that the Divine Being 7. Alfo Derham & PhyJico^fheoL 
 
 &% the Creation, bellowed the p. 40. 
 
 P 4 . Part
 
 40 ^he Ahfolute Fart S e c T. II. 
 
 Part of the Earth to us •, and not fall headlong into 
 the Sky. This laft has created a Scruple not only 
 with the Vulgar, but even with feme Men of 
 Letters ; which I could fcarce have believed, had I 
 not heard them confefs, that tho' they could not de- 
 ny tht fpherical Figure oj the Earth for many urgent 
 Reafons ; yet they could not remove this one Objec- 
 tion out of their Minds -, not to mention the Taunts 
 and Scoffs of St Augujl'me^ and other Fathers, upon 
 this Subje6t. Thefe and fuch like Reafons are foon 
 confuted by any one : and that the higheft Mountains 
 have fcarce any Proportion to the Semidiameter of 
 the Earth, we fliall afterwards demonftrate {g). 
 
 THEREFORE, fmce the fpherical Eigure 
 of the Earth is plainly proved and demonftrated, we 
 ought to make ourfclves acquainted with thofe De- 
 finitions and Properties which are applied to, and 
 found in the Sphere^ or Glohe^ by Geometricians, and 
 accommodate them to the Earth •, as the Center, the 
 Diameter, the Axis and Poles, the greater and lef- 
 fer Circles of the Sphere, ^c. (h), 
 
 WHO 
 
 [g) The higheft Mountains 
 arc To inconfiderable to the Se- 
 midiameter of the Earth ; that 
 they alter the Figure of it no 
 more than Duft upon the Sur- 
 face of our common Globes, as 
 is proved below, C^. 9. Prop. 7. 
 
 (/■) Tacquet [Lib. I. Chap. 2. 
 of hi; Aflro7207}iy] has drawn 
 fomc very neat Confequences 
 from the roundnefsof the Earth ; 
 which we Ihall here tranfcribe 
 from Dr Clarke s Notes 0« Ro- 
 hvivXt^ sPfjyJtcs. Vol. n.Pag. 5. 
 
 I . If any Part of the Earth's 
 Superficies were plane. Men 
 could no more ftand upright 
 wpon it, than upon the fi^e of 
 9 mounjain. 
 
 2. Becaufe the Superficies of 
 the Earth is globular, the Head 
 of a Traveller goes a longer 
 journey than his Feet : and 
 he who rides onHorfeback,goes 
 a longer Journey than he who 
 walks the fame Way on Foot. 
 So, likewife, the upper Part 
 of the Maft of a Ship goes 
 more Way than the lower; mx. 
 Becaufe they mo^oe in Part of a 
 larger Circle. 
 
 3 . If a Man goes the whole 
 Circumference of the Earth's 
 Orb ; the Journey which his 
 Head travels exceeds that of 
 his Feet, by the Circumference 
 of a Circle whofe Radius is the 
 Mau's height, 
 
 4' if
 
 C H A p. 3 • ^f Univerfal Geography. 4 1 
 
 W H O it was that firft found out the Earth's 
 fpherical Figure, lies hid in the dark Ruins of An- 
 tiquity. Certainly the Opinion is very ancient (i) ; 
 for when Babylon was taken by Alexander^ Eciipfes 
 were there found calculated and foretold, for many 
 Years before Chrift : which could not be done with- 
 out the Knowledge of the Earilfs Figure, Nor can 
 Shales the Grecian be thought to have been ignorant 
 of it, by his foretelling an Eclipfe. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of the Menfuration and MagJiitude of the Earth, 
 
 THE Menfuration of the Earth is founded up- 
 on the Solution of thefe three Problems, i. 
 To meafure the Diameter or Semidiameter, and 
 alfo the Circuit or Periphery. 2. To find the Area 
 
 or 
 
 4. IfaVeflel full of Water 
 be raifed perpendicularly, fome 
 of the Water would continually- 
 run over, and yet the VefTel 
 would be always full. 'viz. Be- 
 caufe the Superficies of the 
 Water is coJitinually deprejfed 
 into Part of a lai-ger Sphere. 
 
 5. If a VefTel full ofV/ater 
 were carried direftly downwards 
 tho' none of it run over, yet 
 the VefTel would not be full, 
 <viz. Becaufe the Superficies of 
 the Water is continually raifed 
 into Part of a lefs Sphere, 
 
 6. Whence it follows, that 
 $he fame Veflcl will hold more 
 
 Water at the Foot of a Moun- 
 tain than at the Top; and more 
 in a Cellar than in a Chamber, 
 
 To which may be added, lafT- 
 ly, that twoThreads upon which 
 two Steel Balls hang perpen- 
 dicularly (or tivo Walls of a 
 Houfe raifed hy a Plufnb Line) 
 are not parallel to each other, 
 but Parts of two Radius's which 
 meet at the Center of the Earth. 
 
 (z) Ptolemy, in his Almagcji, 
 tells the Times of three Lunar 
 Eciipfes, obferved by the Baby- 
 lonian Aftronomers. The fuft 
 on the 19th of March jzi 
 Years before Chrifl ; The next
 
 42 ^^^ Abfolute Fart S e c t. 11, 
 
 or Extent of the Superficies. 3. To compute the 
 Solidity, Mafs, or Magnitude. Thefe have fuch 
 a. Relation among themfelves, that one being known 
 the red are obtained by Geometrical Propofuions, 
 foppofing the Earth a Sphere •, as is fhev/n in 
 Chap. 2 , 
 
 THIS Propofition has been efteemed fo advan- 
 tageous and ufeful, that it hath employed and exer- 
 cised the greateft Geniuses for many Ages : fo that 
 whole Volumes have been writ only upon this Sub- 
 ject. Wherefore I thought it would not be unaccepta- 
 ble to the Students in Geography, to give a fhort 
 Hiflory of the Menfuration of the Earth. 
 
 DIOG E N ES Laertius highly commends z^- 
 naximander^ a Difciple of Thales, for that, befides 
 other Afironomical Inventions, he firft difcovered 
 the Perimeter or Circuit of the terraqueous Globe. 
 This Anaximander lived about 550 Years before 
 the Birth of our Saviour: and Authors mention no 
 other Meafure but his, to be ufed by the Mathema- 
 ticians of Succeeding Ages, even 'till the Time of 
 Eratojlhenes : fo that it is (very likely) his Meafure, 
 ■which Ariftotk mentions in the end of his fecond 
 Book De Cceh. " Mathematicians, fa-jS he., who 
 *' have attempted to meafure the Earth fay it is 
 " 400,000 Furlongs round.'* Hence we have the 
 Dimenfions of the Earth according to Anaximander. 
 But befides this one Teftimony oi Diogenes Laertius^ 
 we are entirely in the dark by what Invention, Ar- 
 
 on the 8th of Marr^ 720 Years " Day became prefently as dark 
 
 before Chrifl ; and the third *' as the Night ; ivhich Change 
 
 on September ill, 710 Years be- " had been predicied by Thales 
 
 fore the fame ^ra. And He- " to the lonians." This was 
 
 rodotus (in his HiJlo>y, Lib. i. abbut 594 Years before Chrift i 
 
 SeSi. 74. Pag. '^o) fays, ^^ That which fhews us that the Phi- 
 
 *' after the War bad been car- lofophers in thefe early Times 
 
 *' ried on fix years beti.veen the were not ignorant of the true 
 
 Medes and Lydians ; as thiy Figure of the Earth. 
 
 cujere going to battle, the 
 
 tificCg
 
 C H A p. 4- rf TJniverfal Geography, 43 
 
 tifice, or Method, Anaximander found out this Mca- 
 fure. Therefore Eratojlhenes (who attempted it next 
 after him, and lived about 200 Years before Chrill ; 
 being perfeftly fl^illcd in Menfuration, and other 
 Parts of Mathematics) is juftly celebrated and 
 efteemed by all, as the firft and moft accurate Mea- 
 furer of the Earth. He difcovered the Perimeter of 
 it to be about 250000 Furlongs ; or, as others fay, 
 252.000; which are, as P/i/7y tells us, 31.500.000 
 Roman Paces, equal to 3 1.500 Miles of 1000 Paces 
 each. 
 
 ST R ABO relates the Contents of three Books 
 of Geography that had been writ by Eratojlhenes^ 
 •which are now loft, thro' the Injury of Time. Cleo- 
 medes alfo mentions the Method he ufed in meafur- 
 ing the Earth -, which we fliall explain afterwardc. 
 However, this Meafure o^ Eratojlhenes wViSyad^tdi 
 by feveral Mathematicians (and firfb by Hipparchus 
 about 100 Years after) to deviate fomething from 
 the Truth : tlio' Hipparchus himfelf has not left us 
 his Method of Menfuration •, but only added 25.000 
 Furlongs to Eratojlhenes^ % Perimeter. After him 
 Pofidonius (an excellent pra6lical Aftronomer, and 
 alfo well flcilled in Philofophy -, a little before Chrift, 
 in the Time of Cicero and Pompef) fet about it, and 
 found, by his Menfuration, the Circumference of 
 the Earth to be 240.000 Furlongs, zs,Cleo7nedesit\h 
 us. But Strabo differs from him, and fays it was 
 180.000 : whence there arofe great Doubts and Dif- 
 putes about the Caufe of this Difference. It is true, 
 Strabo's Method is delivered in few Words, and is 
 in Fadl much nearer the Truth than the other : but 
 becaufe Cleomedes both read and taught Pofidonius's 
 Geography, we fhall explain his Method hereafter. 
 
 NEVERTHELESS, the Dimenfions of 
 Eratojlhenes were made ufe of by many; even 'till 
 the Time of Ptolemy. And he, in the year of Chrift 
 j44j ufed 180.000 Furlongs, as the Perimeter, and 
 
 affirmed
 
 44 ^b^ Ahfoliite Part Sect. II. 
 
 affirmed it to be moft agreeable- to the Truth ; in- 
 fomuch that this Invention was, by Theon^ afcribed 
 to him. We gather alfo from the Writings of 
 Ptole7n\^ that Marinus, a famous Geographer, by 
 "whofe Writings he himfelf was very much inftrudt- 
 ed, had attempted fomething in this Matter. 
 
 PrOLEMT(\n Lib. i. Chap. 3, of his G^c- 
 graphy) tells us, that he alfo had tried this Method, 
 not the fame Way with his PredecefTors ; but in 
 Places of different Meridians : tho' he does not tell 
 us how much he found the Perimeter to be, but con- 
 tents himfelf with the Meafure he had received from 
 Marinus and his PredecelTors, viz. 180.000 Fur- 
 longs. 
 
 AFTERWARDS, when the Cultivation of 
 Arts by degrees difappeared in Greece, nothing was 
 done in this Bufinefs ', neither did the Romans trou- 
 ble themfelves about it. 
 
 BUT the jlrabs and Saracens having wrefted 
 the Glory of Empire and Arts out of the Hands of 
 the Grecians, did not negleft this Part of Mathe- 
 matics. For (as Snellius tells us from Abulfeda, an 
 Arabian Geographer, who flourifhed about the 
 Year of Chrift 1300, and whofe Writings were pub- 
 lifhed at Rome) about the 800 Year of the Chriftian 
 jEra, Maimon King of Arabia, or Calif of Baby- 
 lon, being a great Student in Mathmatics, com- 
 manded Ptokmfs Great Conjlru^ion to be tranflated 
 from the Greek into Arabic, which is, by the Ara- 
 lians, called Ptolemy* s Abnagejl. This Maimon hav- 
 ing fummoned together fcveral learned Mathemati- 
 cians commanded them to fearch into the Earth's Pe- 
 rimeter. For performing of which they made ufe 
 of the Planes of Zinjan or Mefopotamia ; and mea- 
 furing from North to South under the fame Meridian 
 'till they had decreafed the Elevation of the Pole 
 one Degr. they found the length of their Journey to 
 be 56 Miles, or ^6h; from whence we find the 
 ; Perimeter
 
 C n A p. 4- rf TJniverfal Geography. 45 
 
 Perimeter of the Earth to be 20.160 Miles, or 20. 
 340, according to that Meafure. 
 
 FROM that Time to this none were folicitous 
 about folving the Problem. The j^rabs commonly 
 Lifing the Dimenfions they had received from their 
 Mathematicians •, and the Italians, when they beg-an 
 toftudy Aftronomy, madeufe of P/o/d-w^'s Meafure, 
 viz. 1 80.000 Furlongs (which make 2 1 .600 Italian 
 Miles, c,. 4^00 German; fo that 60 of the former, 
 and 1 5 of the latter was thought to make a Degree : 
 but they ought to have reckoned 15s of the latter, 
 becaufe 32 Furlongs nearly equal a German Mile ; 
 thus the Periphery would be 5625 Germ. Miles). 
 But about 80 Years ago Snellius, a famous Mathe- 
 matician, and Profeffor at Leyden, obferving that 
 the Perimeter of the Earth, commonly made ufe of 
 by Mathematicians (or the length a Degree, vul- 
 garly fuppofed 15 Dutch Miles), was quellionable, 
 and founded upon no certain Demonltration ; hs 
 thereupon applied himfelf with great Induftry to it's 
 Menfuration, and happily finiflied it ; demonftra- 
 ting the Magnitude of one Degree of the Earth's Pe- 
 riphery to be 28.500 Perches (each containing 12 
 Rhinland Feet) or 19 Holland Miks -, and the wholc- 
 Periphery to equal 6.840 Miles (reckoning 1.500 
 Perches, or 18.000 Rhinland Feet, to a Mile). 
 
 WE thought fit to premife this fhort Hiftory of 
 the Earth's Menfuration, that the Reader may per- 
 ceive by what Induftry it hath been managed, and 
 with what Difficulty effefled. Now we fliall treat 
 of the different Methods of Menfuration, all found- 
 ed upon the Difcovery of the 'Ed.nWsfpherical Figure, 
 which we have proved in the preceding Chapter. 
 Therefore, confidering it globular^ if it be cut by a 
 Plane pafiing thro' the Center, the Section will be a 
 great Circle of the Earth : if not thro' the Center, then 
 the Se<5tion will be one of the leffer Circles. Alfo the 
 Periphery of a great Circle upon the Surface of the 
 
 Earthj
 
 46 ^he Ahfolute Fart Sect. IL 
 
 Earth, is it*s Circuit or Meafure round. Note^ This 
 Periphery is divided (as all others are) into 360 
 Degr. and becaufe the Extent of the whole cannot be 
 meafured at once, we folve the Problem by finding 
 the Length of a Part (f iz, of i Degr. k Degr. l^c.) in 
 known Meafures; which NecefTity often occurs ino- 
 ther Problems.We alio frequently take the Periphery 
 of the Earth to be a Meridian paffing thro* the Place 
 of Obfervation, and the North or Pole-Star ; which 
 is more eafy, and lefs fubjed to Error. 
 
 'The fir fl Method'^ ttfedhy the Arabians and others 
 for meafurwg the Earth. 
 
 LET our Horizon be y& H R S J ; then the Peri- 
 meter of the Terredrial Meridian (which lies under, 
 and is concentrical to, that in the Heavens abed) 
 will be A BCD, (Fig. 6.) and R will be the Cen- 
 ter of the Earth. Suppofe our Place of Obfervation 
 at B, whofe Zenith is ^, and the Terreftrial Pole 
 A lying under that in the Heavens a ^ then the Ele- 
 vation of the Pole above our Horizon will be A H, 
 or ah. Let us rake another Place in the fime Me- 
 ridian A B CD under ab c d, as G, who.^e Zenith is 
 g, and Horizon/F R T /. Now fuppofe the Ele- 
 vation of the Pole to be accurately obferved in the 
 Place B, viz. a h or A H •, and alfo in the Place G, 
 viz. fa or F A. Take F A from H A and the Re- 
 mainder is H F, equal to B G, the Arch intercepted 
 between the two Places. Laftly, the Diftance B G 
 equal to the Arch b g^ \>x.o be accurately meafured 
 by fome known Meifure, as a Perch or a Mile.' 
 Then by the Goldej^ Rule fay, as B G is to AB G C D, 
 360 Degr. fo is the known ' Ir.terval in Miles or 
 Perches, to the Miles or Perches contained in the 
 Periphery A B G C D : or as the Arch B G is to i 
 Degr. fo are the Miles in the Diftance B G, to the 
 Miles or Perches in i Degree. 
 
 NOTE,
 
 C H A p. 4- <>f Vnherfal Geography, 47 
 
 NOTE, if you take the vulgar Computation of the 
 Diftance B G, without meafuring it, then the Quan- 
 tity of the Degree will be determined accordingly ; 
 as I Dcgr. will equal 15 fuch JVIiles, as B G equals 
 10, i^c. 
 
 Example, Let B be Amjlerdatn, where the Eleva- 
 tion of the Pole AH or (2 Z) is 52 degr, 23 min. and 
 let G be Schoonhoven, lying under the fime Meri- 
 dian wkh Amfterdam, where the Elevation of the 
 Pole A F or a/ is 51 degr 54 min, therefore FH 
 or BG will be 29 min. but the Diftance betweea 
 jimjlerda?n and Schoonhoven is gl Dutch Miles, or 
 13875 Rhinland Perches, 12 Foot each •, therefore 
 as 29 7nin. is to 60 min. or i degr. fo is 97^ Miles 
 to 19 Dutch Miles: therefore 19 Dutch Miles equal 
 I degr. and 6.840 make 360, or the whole Peri- 
 phery. 
 
 O R if the Diftance B G be fuppofed jl German 
 Miles feach equal to 1900 Rhinland Fcrchcs) it will 
 be as 29 min. is to 60 min. fo is 7 4: to 15 of the fame 
 German Miles, for a Degr. of which 5.400 make 
 the v/hole Circumference- Thus the Elevation of 
 the Pole at Prague is 50 degr. 6 7nin. and at Lincimn 
 48 degr. 1 6 min. the Difference B G is i degr. 50 min. 
 and the Diftance is computed to be 26 German Miles i 
 from whence the Periphery will be 5.105 Miles. 
 
 The fecond Method, that of Eratofthenes. 
 
 AGAIN, let there be two Places under the 
 fame Meridian ; the one B, Alexandria in Egypt, 
 where Eratofthenes, Keeper of the King's Library, 
 Jived ; the other G, (Fig. 6.) the Town of Syene, 
 a City in Egypt, under the Tropic of Cancer, and 
 for that Reafon, chofen by Eratofthenes, whofe Di- 
 ftance from Alexandria was computed 5000 Fur- 
 longs. Let the Diftance of the Sun, at Noon, 
 from the Zeniths, g and ^, of both Places be 
 
 obfcrved
 
 48 The Ahjblute Part S e c t. II. 
 
 obferved by an Inftrument on the fame Solfti- 
 tial Day, viz. the 21ft oijune-, when at Alexan- 
 dria^ gb or G B equals fo Part of the Periphery 
 by Obfervation (or 7 degr. 1 2 ptin.) but at Syene 
 the Sun hath no Diftance from the Zenith at Noon, 
 it being exa6lly vertical that Day. So that the Arch 
 of the Diftance BG, intercepted between the two 
 Places is 7 degr. 12 min. but the Diftance itfelf 
 is accounted 5.000 Furlongs (8 of which make 
 an Italian Mile). Therefore by the Golden Rule, 
 as 7 degr. 12 7mn. is to i degr. (or as i'o to 360, or 
 as 36 to 5) fo is 5000 to 694^ Furlongs in i degr. 
 Or as To is to i, (or as i to 50) fo is 5000 to 
 25000 Furlongs, the whole Periphery, according 
 to this Meafure. There are divers ways of taking 
 the Meridian Altitude of the Sun, or it's Diftance 
 from the Vertex •, as by a Quadrant, (ffc. Eratojlhe- 
 nes found it by a hollow hemifpherical Dial ; 
 where the Style BX {Fig. 7.} points to the 
 Zenith, and OXZ is a Ray of the Sun ter- 
 minating the Shadow of the Style, and fhews the 
 Arch B Z equal to O B 7 degr. 1 2 min. the Diftance 
 of the Sun from the Zenith. But at Syene the 
 Style hath no Shadow -, nor hath the Sun any Di- 
 ftance from the Zenith i being perpendicular to 
 the Plane of the Place. Therefore fince BXZ 
 (Fig. 6, 7.) is equal to the Angle /'X O, (whofe 
 Meafure is B G or Z'O) B G is equal to B Z 7 degr. 
 12 min. or ro Part of the Periphery, as before. 
 
 The third Method, that o/Poftdonius. 
 
 POSIDONIUS took two Places under the 
 fame Meridian ; viz. B, Rhodes, the Place where 
 he lived, and G, Alexandria in Egypt j and ob- 
 ferved the Altitude of the Star S {Fig. 6.) fa bright 
 Star in the Ship Argo called Canopui) when it 
 came to the Meridian of both Places, on the fame, 
 
 or
 
 C H A p. 4- tf 'U?2iverfal Geography. ^^y 
 
 cr which is all one, on different Days. This Star 
 did not rife above the Horizon h H s at Rhodes, 
 but only glanced upon it at S : tho' it was elevated 
 above the Horizon ot Alexandria FR T, the Arch 
 is :j7Part of the Periphery or 7 degr. 30 min. He 
 tells us the Diftance betwixt Alexandria and Rhodes 
 is 5.000 Furlongs. Therefore, as 7 degr. 30 min. 
 is to I degr. (or as -^ to -^-^^ i. e. as 360 to 48) fo 
 is 5.000 to 6667 Furlongs in i degr. or as i : 48 : : 
 5,000 : 24,000 Furlongs, for the whole Periphe- 
 ry of the Earth, according to Rofidonius. 
 
 '^he fourth M-clhod^ that of Snellius. 
 
 IN the Methods above delivered, we have con- 
 ftantly fuppofed the two Places to lie under the 
 fame Meridian ; but becaufe Places may lie plain- 
 er, and more commodious for this Purpofe under 
 different Meridians, we fnall propofe an Example 
 in this Cafe which is that of Snellius. 
 
 LET therefore ABCD {Fig. 6.) be the Me- 
 ridian of Alcmair, and B, Alcmalr itfelf ; where 
 the Elevation of the Pole ^ <^ is 52 degr. 40^ min. 
 and the Polar Diftance B A 37 degr. ic)i min. 30 
 fee. 
 
 LET the other Place P be Bergen- op-zfxnn, 
 whofe Meridian is A PC, and it's Diftance from 
 the Pole, or Complement of Latitude {viz. to 
 51 degr. 29 i?iin.) is A P 38 degr. 31 7nin. there- 
 fore, having drawn P G perpendicular to A BG, 
 the Difference of their Diftances from the Pole is 
 BG I degr. II min. '^o fee. 
 
 AFTER Snellius had taken thefe Obfervations, 
 he accurately meafured the Diftance B P, between 
 Alcmair and Bergen., and found it to be ^^yio 
 Rhinland Perches ; and the Angle of Pofition 
 PEG 1 1 degr. 26 7nin. 1 fee. therefore in the right- 
 angled Triangle PEG, the Hypotenufe P B and 
 
 VOL. I. E the
 
 $0 "The Abfolute Part Sect. II. 
 
 the Angle PBG being given, the Side BG is 
 found to be 34018 Perches (which 5«(?//i>^i makes 
 only 33930, lor he abated 88 Perches on Account 
 of the Stations where the Elevation of the Pole was 
 obferved). But the Arch B G, as was (aid before, 
 is 715 min. therefore as 71^ is to i dcgr. or 60 7nin. 
 ibis 33930 (or 34018) 1028473 Perches; or the 
 round Number 28500 for i dfgr. equal to 19 Dutch 
 Miles. Or by fpherical Trigonometry •, having 
 A B, A P, and the Angle A B P given, find the 
 Arch BP I d::gr. 14. fnhi. which equals 34710 
 Perches ; therefore i degr. will be 28300 Perches, 
 or 1 87 Miles. The Reafon why this Account differs 
 from that oi' Sueiiius h -, i. He did not obferve the 
 Elevation of the Pole from the very Tops of the 
 Towers B and P themfelves, from whence the An- 
 gle GBP was taken, but from fome Eminence or 
 rifing Ground a little remote from them : yet with- 
 out Doubt the Altitudes of the Pole were the iame 
 on the Tops of the Towers. 2. Another Reafon 
 is, he took BG, BP, PG for right Lines, which 
 are indeed circular -, tho*, in fo fmall an Arch, 
 the Difference is of little or no Moment. There- 
 fore, granting 5;7(?//f;/i's Meafure of a Degree to be 
 28500 Perches, equal to 18^^ Miles, (and mine 
 28 3 00 making i8tj the Perimeter of the Earth 
 will be, according to Snellius^ 10.260.000 Per- 
 ches, or 123.120.000 Feet, that is 6.840 Holland 
 Miles {a). 
 
 {a) The Meafure of the ficukies, the curious have not 
 
 Earth which Snellius with great thought it fafe to confide in a- 
 
 Ir.duftry difcovered, hath been ny one, tho' the moft fkillful, 
 
 defervedly embraced by the Mathematician ; which we fee 
 
 Learned ; as being much more confiimed by CaJJini, the Son 
 
 accurate than any of the for- of the famous Allronomer of 
 
 mer. Neverthelefs, in a Mat- that Name. For he having cal- 
 
 ter of fuch A^oment, and which culated the Numbers arifing 
 
 is involved with fo many Dif- from Siiellius\ Obfervation, af- 
 
 figned
 
 C H A p. 4- ^f Vni'verfal Geography^ 5 r 
 
 The fifth, hut firjl Tenejlrial, Mdhod. 
 
 HOW to perform the Work without Celeftinl 
 Obfervations, or a Meridian Line, is explained in 
 
 the 
 
 figned a much greater Meafure 
 to the Earth than Snellias ; 
 and alfo difcovered fome Er- 
 rors in his Calculation, which 
 fpoiled the whole Prccefs of 
 his Work. See Hi/. Acad. 
 Scien. 1702. Add to this, that 
 the Latitude and Angle of Por- 
 tion of Places can now be taken 
 more accurately by Telefcopes, 
 which are begun, fome Years 
 ago, to be fitted to Aftrono- 
 mical and Surveying Inftru- 
 ments, inilead of bare little 
 Pins, which 5«£'//;«j ufed. Tho' 
 feveral others had fet about this 
 Work ; yet fome Frejich Ma- 
 thematicians, Fellows of the 
 Royal Academy of Sciences, 
 did moft fuccefsfully perform 
 it : whofe Menfuration far ex- 
 ceeds all others, both in the 
 Number and Accuracy of their 
 Obfervations, and alfo in the 
 Furniture of moft exquifite In- 
 ftruments. Wherefore we e- 
 fteem it well worth the while, 
 to give the whole Method of 
 Operation in fhort. 
 
 The Points in the Figure 
 which are marked with Roman 
 Letters, Ihew the Places cho- 
 fen for Observation ; whofe 
 Bearing, or Situation, in refpeft 
 of the Royal Obferv^atory at 
 Paris, is feen in a Geographical 
 Map. [See Fig. 8.) 
 
 By the fame Method of Men- 
 furation which Smllius ufed. 
 
 they propofed to find the Di- 
 ftance between the Parallels of 
 the Places N and E, or the 
 Line N ct in Fathoms ; fo that 
 this Diftance being known, 
 and the Latitude of each Place 
 N and E, or the Difference of 
 Latitude ; that is an Arch of 
 the Meridian intercepted be- 
 tween the two Parallels, being 
 found, it will appear how ma- 
 ny Fathoms make any deter- 
 mined Arch of a great Circle 
 of the Earth, fuch as the Me- 
 ridian is : from whence it will 
 be eafily found how many Fa- 
 thoms equal a Degree, or the 
 v/hole Periphery of the Earth. 
 Afterwards it was thought fit 
 to meafure the Line N p, the 
 Diftance between the Parallels 
 of the Places N and Q__; fo 
 that the Latitude at Q__ being 
 alfo obferved, there might be 
 had an Arch of the Meridian 
 equal to the whole Diftance 
 {i ct. For by this Iv leans, they 
 could more accurately de- 
 termine the Meafure of the 
 Earth's Periphery, when they 
 had found it the fame 
 by two Operations. Thefe 
 Lines they meafured by a 
 continued Series of Triangles 
 drawn from the Line A B ; 
 for it being direftly plane and 
 ftraight, they had the Advan- 
 tage of meafuring it with Lon 
 Rods as accurately as could 
 E z be.
 
 52 
 
 be, and found it to be 5663 
 Fathom?. 
 
 The Latitudes of tlic Places 
 were taken by an Inftrumcnt, 
 whofe Radius was 10 Paris 
 Feet ; and the Angles of each 
 Triangle by a Quadrant cf a 
 Circle whofe Semidir.metcr was 
 3gFeet; both wliich Inilru- 
 ments were accurately divided 
 by Diagonal Lines. 
 
 lie Ahjolute Fart S e ct. IL 
 
 In the firft Triangle ABC. 
 Thereare known by Obiervation 
 
 The ^ ^'-^^ 54°- 04- 35' 
 Ar 
 
 he S 
 
 ABC 95. 06. 55. 
 
 ACB 30. 48. 30. 
 Found by Fath. Fe. 
 
 meafuring --AB-5663. 00. 
 Hence by Calcula- 
 tion is found the 
 Side - - A C - - 1 1012. 05. 
 
 In thefecondTrangle A D C. 
 
 D AC 77°. 25'. 50". 
 
 ADC 55. 00. 00. 
 
 ACD 47. 34. 00. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 AC I IOI2. 5. 
 
 Hence DC 1 3 1 2 1 . 3 . 
 
 In the third Triangle D E C. 
 DEC 74''. 09' 30". 
 D C E 40. 34 00. 
 C D E 65. 16. 30. 
 Fath. Fe. 
 DC 1 31 21. 03. 
 Hence DE 8870. 03. 
 
 In the fourth Triangle DCF. 
 
 D C F 113. 47. 40. 
 
 DEC 33-40. 00. 
 
 F D C 32. 32. 20. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 DC 1 31 21. 03. 
 
 Hence DF 21658. 00. 
 
 In the fifth Triangle DFG. 
 
 D F G 92. 05. 20. 
 
 DGF 57. 34. 00. 
 
 G DF 30. 20. 40. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 D F 21658. 00. 
 
 Hence DG 25643. 00. 
 
 And F G I 2963. 03. 
 
 In the fixth Triangle GDE.. 
 
 GDE 28. 09. 30. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 D G 25643. 00. 
 
 DE 8874. 03. 
 
 Hence GE 13897. 00- 
 
 When they had found the 
 Line G E, by another Series 
 of Triangles, to be 3 1 893 Fath. 
 3 Feet, they divided the Dif- 
 ference which made up the 
 Icfier Meafure 31895 Fath. 
 
 In thefeventhTriangleHFG. 
 
 H F G 36. 50. 00. 
 
 HGF 104. 48. 30. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 F G 12963. 03. 
 
 Hence HG 12523. 00. 
 
 In the eighth Triangle HG I. 
 
 H G I 31. 50. 30. 
 
 HI G 43. 29. 30. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 H G 12523. 00. 
 
 Hence GI 17562. 00. 
 
 And H I 9570. 00. 
 
 In the ninth Triangle HIK. 
 
 H IK 49. 20. 30. 
 
 HKI 53. 06. 40. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 H I 9570. 00. 
 
 Hence IK H083. 00. 
 
 In the tenth Tmngle IKL. 
 
 LIK 58. 31. 30. 
 
 IKL 58. 31. 00. 
 
 Faih.
 
 C H A p. 4- ^f ^ni'^^^fa^ Geography, 
 
 Fath. Fe 
 
 53 
 
 IK 
 
 1 1683. 00 
 
 Hence KL 
 
 11188. 02 
 
 And I L 
 
 1 1 186. 03 
 
 e eleventh Tri 
 
 mgle K L M 
 
 LK?vI 
 
 28. 52. 30 
 
 KAIL 
 
 63. 31 . 00 
 
 
 Fath. Fe 
 
 KL 
 
 I1188. 02 
 
 Hence LM 
 
 6036. 02 
 
 If the Sum of the three 
 Angles ILK, KLM, MLN. 
 be taken from 360 Degrees, 
 there will remain the Angle 
 ILN ll()degr. Izmir. . ip fee. 
 
 In the 1 2th Triangle L M N. 
 
 LMN 60. 38. 00. 
 
 MNL 29. 28. 20. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 L M 6036. 02. 
 
 Hence LN 10690. 00. 
 
 In the 13th Triangle ILN. 
 
 ILN 
 
 LN 
 I L 
 
 IN 
 
 32. 
 
 Fath. 
 
 1 069 1. 
 
 I 1 186. 
 
 18905. 
 
 40. 
 Fe. 
 GO. 
 04. 
 
 Here are found three Parts 
 of the Space intercepted be- 
 tween the two Places E and N, 
 «I'/z. EG, GI, IN, not ex- 
 actly in the Meridian Line it 
 felf N ct ; but fo as the Meri- 
 dional Diilances may be found 
 by the following Operations. 
 Alfo after they had found the 
 Length of G I and IN by ano- 
 ther Series of Triangles, as they 
 had done before in the Line 
 GE, they propofed to meafure 
 a new ftraight Line R S (and 
 found it to be 3902 Fath.) by 
 which the Meafures of the a- 
 
 forefaid Lines might be verified' 
 and fo be a Foundation to them 
 in their proceeding to the 
 Point Q^ 
 
 Hence were 
 
 found the Lines 
 
 r ML 6037 
 S IN 1S907 
 i. IG 17564 
 
 In the 1 4th Triangle L M O 
 
 LMO 58. 21. 50 
 
 MOL 68. 52. 30 
 
 Fath. Fe 
 
 M L 6037. 00 
 
 Hence LO 5510. 03 
 
 In the I cth Triangle N O L 
 
 NOL 115. 01. 30 
 
 ON L 27. 50. 30 
 
 Fath. Fe 
 
 L O 5510. 03 
 
 Hence NO 7122. 02 
 
 In the 1 6th Trianak NOP 
 40 
 40 
 Fe 
 04 
 04 
 
 NPO 72. 25. 
 PNO 67. 21. 
 
 Fath. 
 
 NO 7122. 
 NP 4822. 
 
 In the 1 7th Triangle N P Q^ 
 
 NPQ^83. 58. 4c 
 
 PNQ_7o. 34, 
 
 Fath. 
 
 NP 4822. 
 
 NQ^ 11161, 
 
 30 
 Fe 
 
 04 
 04 
 
 Therefore 
 they had gotc 
 the Lines 
 
 • QJST 1 1 1 6 1 . 4 
 
 |N I 18907. o 
 1 1 G 17564. o 
 3189c 
 
 But before they could a£lu- 
 ally fet upon meafuring the 
 Earth, all thefe were to be re- 
 ferred to the Meridian Line 
 a, 'p paffing thro' the Point N, 
 that thefe Lines following might 
 be known, %>i%. 
 
 E 2 N^
 
 54 
 
 I £ or ^ cT 
 G i or J'a. 
 
 I'be Abfohite Part 
 
 ?anfwer-C ^-^ 
 >ing t}ie< 
 3 Lines. (^ 
 
 Sect. II. 
 
 I G 
 GE 
 
 of which the Line /^ ct is com- 
 pounded, (hewing the Dillance 
 between QjA and c.n. Parallels 
 of Latitude of the Places Qjind 
 E. For this being found, and 
 an Arch of the Meridian inter- 
 cepted between the fame Pa- 
 rallels being known, they had 
 in Efleft obtained their Defnx-, 
 n;iz. the Meafure agreeing to 
 a known Part of the Periphery 
 of the Earth. 
 
 Let therefore ^ISiyS'cf, 19, 
 G s be Parts of the Pvlcridian 
 Circle, pafling thro' the Places 
 N, I, G; alfoQ^i?, ly, GJ", 
 and dE i Parallels of Latitude 
 pafung perpendicularly thro' 
 thofe Meridians in the Places 
 QJ G E. 
 
 Then in the Triangle Q_j5 N 
 rightangled at B, the Inclina- 
 tion of the Line Q__N to the 
 Meridian Line N /a is cbfer- 
 ved, ^'!z. 
 
 The Angle Q_N /3 i8^. 
 
 Faf/j. 
 
 'And the Line NQjs 1 1 1 6 1 
 
 Hence NB 10559 
 
 55 
 Fe. 
 
 .4. 
 ■ 3- 
 
 In the Triangle N ^ I, rect- 
 angled at y, 
 
 y NI 2°. 9' 10". 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 IN 18907. o. 
 
 Hence N y 18893. 3. 
 
 In the Triangle G 1 9, reft- 
 
 angled at G, GI9 i. 9. o. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 I G 17564. o. 
 
 Hence I 9, or y S" 17560. 3. 
 
 In the Triangle G E j, reft- 
 angled at «, 
 
 E G « 00. 26. 00. 
 
 Fath. Fe. 
 
 G E 31895. o. 
 
 Hence G j, or cT ct 31 894. o. 
 
 Hence the Dlftance between 
 the Parallels of the Places N 
 and E, njiz. the Sum of the 
 three Lines, '^y,yS', J^rf, is 
 68348 Fathoms ; to which if 
 the Line N /3 be added, it 
 will make up the Diftance be- 
 tween the Parallels of the 
 Places Qjind E 78907 Fath. 3. 
 Feet. 
 
 Then it remained to obferve 
 the DiiFerence of Latitude of 
 the Places E, N, and Q^; or 
 the Arches of the Meridian in- 
 tercepted between their Paral- 
 lels. To which end there 
 Vi-ere taken three Stations, a 
 little diftance from the Places 
 themfelves j for the fake of bet- 
 ter Obfervation. 
 
 The firll Station was diftant 
 from the Place E 1 8 Fathoms 
 Southward ; the fecond from 
 the Place N 65 Fathoms North- 
 ward ; the third from the Place 
 Q_75 Fathoms Eallward. 
 
 The Arch of the Meridian 
 intercepted between the firft 
 and fecond Station was found 
 to be 1°. 11'. 57'. between 
 the fecond and third was 122. 
 
 35- 
 
 But if 83 Fath. (the Sum of 
 
 18 and 65, by which the firlt 
 
 and fecond Station were further 
 
 than the Place N and E) be 
 
 added to 68.348 (that is to the 
 
 Line N a. the Dillance between 
 
 the Parallels of the two Places 
 
 N and E) the Sum will be 
 
 68.43<
 
 C H A p. 4- 9f 'Univarfal Geography. 55 
 
 68.431 Fatb. (the Diftance be- 
 tween the Parallels of the firft 
 and fecond Station) which is e- 
 qual to an Arch of i° ii' 57". 
 Therefore the Length of i 
 Degr. is 57064 Path. 3 Feet. 
 Alfo if 57 Fath. (the Diffe- 
 rence between 75 and 18) be 
 fubftrafted from 78907 Fath. 3 
 Feet (the Diftance between the 
 Parallels of the Places Qjind E) 
 the Remainder will be 78.850 
 Fath. 3 Feet, (the Diftance be- 
 tween the Parallels of the firft 
 and third Station) which agrees 
 to the Arch of 1°. 22'. 55". 
 Hence i Degree is 57.057 Fa- 
 thoms. 
 
 Therefore there was taken 
 for I degr. 57.060 Fath. an in- 
 termediate Number betwixt 
 thefe two. 
 
 Thus with great Labour they 
 acquired the Meafure of i Degr. 
 of the Periphery of the Earth 
 as accurately as poffible. Ne- 
 verthelefs it is to be confeffed, 
 the Difficulty of making Obfer- 
 vations (efpecially tliofe about 
 the Latitude of the Place) was 
 fo great, that it really baffled 
 the profound Endeavours of the 
 diligent Obfervers. And tho' 
 the Inllrument was exquifitely 
 divided, and of 10 Foot Radi- 
 us, yet they could not avoid an 
 Error of 2 Seconds, v/hich on 
 the Earth make 22 Fathoms; 
 by which the obferved Lati- 
 tude of each Place might be 
 wrong. 
 
 Since this Error could not 
 be avoided, it was thought 
 neceffary to meafure a greater 
 Space, fo that it might be di- 
 vided among more Degrees, 
 by which means a leffer Por- 
 tion of it would faU to any one. 
 
 This the famous CaJJlm eHe- 
 (f;ed a few Years ago, at the 
 Command of the moft Chriiiiaa 
 King, as he was marking a 
 Meridian for the Obfervatcry 
 at Paris, thro' tliC South Pro- 
 vinces of France. He then 
 meafiired with the fiime Care 
 all tliat Space between Faris 
 and the Pyre/iean Mountains ; 
 to which if the former Diftance 
 betv/een Mal'vofine and A?nkns 
 be added, they make 7 \ Degr. 
 Hence the Meafure of the 
 Earth is procured more accu- 
 rately, and concluded on more 
 fafely, than from the former 
 Obfervations only. And by this 
 Menfaration he found i Degr. 
 to make 57.292 Fath. v/hicli by 
 the former v/as computed to 
 be 57.060 Fath. 
 
 Monfieur I'Abbe Bignon tdh 
 us, that the fajne Meridian 
 i^ould ha-ve been ohfer'ved round 
 the <vjhoIe World by Monjieicr 
 de Chafel {a Ferfon cf great 
 Courage and Experience) vjith 
 the fame Exadnefs as it ivas 
 begun ; but that the War 'was 
 at that Time e-very n-vhere ur.- 
 fortunately kindled, 'vchereby vje 
 are depri'ved of a v.orc accurate 
 Meafure. 
 
 But to proceed. The fame 
 Caffni, by comparing the fe- 
 veral Degrees in the aforefiid 
 Space, thought himfelf to have 
 found that there was no cer- 
 tam and determinate Meafure 
 to a Degree J but that one fur- 
 paffed another continually to- 
 wards the Equator by almoll 
 an 800th Part. So that to a 
 Degree northward from the Ob- 
 lervatory of Paris there were 
 found 57.055 Degr. and to the 
 next Decree Southward of 
 E 4 it
 
 56 
 
 ^he Abjolute Fart Sect. 1L 
 
 it i^j.iz6\ which is mere by 
 7 1 1 . See Hiji. Accd. Sckn. 
 I 70 1. 
 
 But by v.'hat we faid above, 
 about the Figure of the Earth, 
 in our Notes upon the third 
 Chapter, itappears there is foKc 
 fmal! Difference between one 
 Degree and another; which can 
 fcarce'y be perceived by meer 
 Obfervation. Tho' this Increafe 
 
 is not towards the South, as 
 CaJJiiii thought, but to the 
 North. Neverthelefs, becaufe 
 France is almoft an Intermediate 
 between the Pole and the E- 
 quator ; the Degrees there will 
 be in a Medium betwixt the 
 leafc at the Equator and the 
 greateil at the Pole. 
 
 According to the aforefaid 
 Dimenhons, 
 
 One Degree of the Circumference of the Earth conta'ms 
 Paris Fctt 343752 French Leagues each 2000 Path. aSyfl- 
 London 366669 Englifj Miles each 5280 Feet 69,7^^ 
 
 PMnland 356117 Rhinland Miles each 1 8000 Feet 1 9 ig 5^^ 
 
 The Fcriphcry of the Earth contains 
 Paris Feet - - -- 123750720 French Leagues - - 
 
 London Feet i 32000768 Englijh Miles 
 
 P.h:nland ¥ect i 28202 1 85 Rhinkmd Miles - 
 
 The Diameter cf the Earth contains 
 
 Paris Feet 39391077 French Leagues - 
 
 London Feet 4201 71 49 Eng/if:) Miles 
 
 Rhinland Feet 4080S032 Rhinland Miles - 
 
 - lojizi^ 
 
 - 25000 ^\ 
 
 7I22i^ 
 
 32»2^^g-3 
 
 - /9)7i2T- 
 22071 53o5 
 
 ^ 
 
 French F.ngiijh 
 
 Koiul. 
 
 
 ^l'ren.\ 
 
 Eng. Rhin. 
 
 s:' 
 
 Feet 
 
 Feet 
 
 Feet 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Feet 
 
 Feet Feet 
 
 ! 
 
 572'. 
 
 bin 
 
 5935 
 
 I 
 
 95 
 
 1C2 99 
 
 2 
 
 1 145'. 
 
 12222 
 
 1 1 871 
 
 
 2 
 
 igi 
 
 204 
 
 198 
 
 3 
 
 I718; 
 
 18333 
 
 i7Sc( 
 
 
 3 
 
 286 
 
 306 
 
 297 
 
 -: 
 
 2291; 
 
 24445 
 
 23741 
 
 
 A 
 
 382 
 
 407 
 
 396 
 
 ^ 
 
 2%b\L 
 
 3°5 5'^ 
 
 29676 
 
 
 5 
 
 477 
 
 509 
 
 495 
 
 6 
 
 34375 
 
 36667 
 
 35612 
 
 
 6 
 
 573 
 
 6ii 
 
 594 
 
 7 
 
 4010^ 
 
 42778 
 
 41547 
 
 
 / 
 
 66b 
 
 713 
 
 692 
 
 S 
 
 45834 
 
 48889 
 
 4748- 
 
 
 8 
 
 764 
 
 815 
 
 .7X 
 
 c 
 
 51565 
 
 550C0 
 
 5341S 
 
 
 9 
 
 85c. 
 
 917 
 
 89a 
 
 IC 
 
 57292 
 
 61111 
 
 59353 
 
 
 10 
 
 955 
 
 1019 
 
 989 
 
 2C 
 
 114584 
 
 122223 
 
 118706 
 
 
 20 
 
 IQIC 
 
 2037 
 
 1978 
 
 5c 
 
 i7i87t 
 
 183334 
 
 178050^ 
 
 
 5c 
 
 2865 
 
 3056 
 
 2968 
 
 p 
 
 229168 
 
 244446 
 
 237411 
 
 
 i-c 
 
 3819 
 
 t074 
 
 3957 
 
 ^c 
 
 i 8 646c 
 
 305557 
 
 296764 
 
 
 50 
 
 477^ 
 
 5093 
 
 4946 
 
 So 
 
 543752 
 
 366669 
 
 356117 
 
 I'O 
 
 572^ 
 
 61 1 1 
 
 .'93'? 
 
 Jurin's ylffendix.
 
 C H A p. 4« ^f Univerfal Geography. ^y 
 
 the three following Methods *. Lee PB (Fig. 9.) 
 the Altitude of a Tower or Mountain, be found 
 out by Jltimetry ; and imagine P S, the furtheft 
 Diftance from which it may be feen, to be a right 
 Line, as being fo very fmall a Part of the Earth's 
 Periphery •, and the Triangle B P S reftangled. 
 In which having BP and P S given, the Angle 
 P S B may be found ; which is equal to the Angle 
 PRS, whofe Meafure is the Arch S P (b). There- 
 fore as this Arch is to i degr. fo is the Diftance 
 PS meafured by fome known Meafure to the 
 Length of I degr. in that Meafure. For Exam- 
 pie, Let the Altitude B P be 480 Paces or 1? part 
 of a German Mile ; and let the Diftance of P from 
 S, the Point which terminates the Sight, be 40000 
 Paces, or 10 German Miles. Then by the Pro- 
 blem Cap. 1. fay, As PS 40000 Paces is to 480 ; 
 fo is the Radius 1 0000000 to 11904, the Tran- 
 gent of the Angle BSP, or SRP, or of the Arch 
 S P, which is 41 rnin. And as 41 mm. is to 60 ; 
 fo is 40000 Paces 1059000-, that is, about 15 
 Miles for i Degree. 
 
 OR the Semidiameter PR may be found with- 
 out the Table of Sines, thus j As B P is to P S : 
 fo is PS to PR : Or as 480 is to 40000: fo is 
 40000 to 3333333 Paces, for the Semidiameter 
 PR(0. 
 
 The fixth, hut fecond Terrejirial, Method without 
 knowing the Dijiances. 
 
 THE fame Semidiameter PR (Fig. 9.) maybe 
 thus found. Suppofe PB to be a high Mountain, 
 
 * The three following Ter- Height and Horizontal Di- 
 
 reftrial Methods, are more to be Ilances of Mountains, hinder the 
 
 admired for their Theor/, than Exaftnefs which is required in 
 
 for any Truth in their Praftice. a Matter of fuch Nicety. 
 
 For tlio' they be all Geome- (^) Euc/iti. Lib. 6. Prop. 8. 
 
 trically true; yet Refrafltipn and \c) Euclid. Coroll, to Prop. 
 
 want of Accuracy, intaking the 8. Lib. 6. 
 
 ^' or
 
 58 The Ahfohite Part Sect. 1L 
 
 or a Tower. If a Tower, it's Altitude may be 
 found by a Plumb-line to be, fuppofe, 100 Pa- 
 ces : If a Mountain, the Height P B may be known 
 by Altimetry to be, fuppofe, 480 Paces. Then 
 with a Quadrant at the Top B, find the Angle at 
 the furthcll Point of Sight PBS 88 degr, 3 7 mm. 
 wherefore B R S will be i degr. 23 wn";/. Let the 
 Sine of 88 degr. 37 min. be taken from the Canon of 
 Sines, and fubftraded from the Radius loooooooo, 
 and then fiy ; As the Remainder is to the Sine of 
 ^^ degr. '^y min. fo is BP 100 Paces to the Semi- 
 diameter S R in Paces {d). 
 
 ^he feventh, hut tJArd Terrejlrial, Method. 
 
 THIS Method [Fig. 9.) feems to be more ac- 
 curate and fitter for Praflice, where two Moun- 
 tains or Eminences are ufed, whofe Diftance (v/ith- 
 out their Altitudes) is found by Longmetry. For 
 Example, Let BPbe a Mountain, Tower, or 
 Qiftle i and let S T be another, whofe Diftance, 
 luppofe, 5 Ger?nan Miles. Fir/}, by a Quadrant 
 (or otherwife) find the Angle BTR 89 degr. ^.^ 
 min. and on the other Mountain the Angle T B R 
 ^() degr. ^^ min. which will make die Angle P R S 
 to be 20 min. becaufe the three Angles T, B, and 
 R, are equal to two right Angles, or 180 degr. 
 Then fay as 20 min. : 60 min. : : 5 miles to i^ 
 Miles for i Degree {e). 
 
 THESE are the chief Methods of meafuring 
 the Earth ; for by knowing the Meafure of i degr. 
 the whole Perimeter, Diameter, Superficies, and 
 Solidity, may be found. 
 
 BUT the Perimeter of the Earth, according to 
 Snellius., is 6840 D^/c^ Miles, or 10260000 Rhin- 
 land Perches, or 1 23 1 20000 Feet. Therefore the 
 
 [d] See P;-o/i. 14. oi Chap. 2. above. [e) Ibid. 
 
 I Semidi-
 
 ., H A p. 4« ^f Univerfal Geography, tg 
 
 Semidiameter of the Earth is, by ih^ Proh. of Chap. 
 2. found to be 1 08 8;^ Miles, or 1633190 Perches^ 
 or 19598300 Feet-, and the Superficies i88ii353-i 
 fquare Dutch Miles *. 
 
 AND the Solidity of the whole 1340956831512 
 Cubic Miles. 
 
 BUT becaufe accounting by German Miles is 
 more common, 15 of which make a Dt^gree, 
 thefe may be ufed on this Condition, that 1 5 of 
 fuch Miles may equal 19 Holland ^Wq'^^ or that 
 one Mile may contain 1900 Rhinland Perches, or 
 22800 Rhinland Feet. 
 
 OF fuch Miles the Circumference of the Earth 
 is 5400, the Semidiameter 860, the Superficies 
 92781 81 fquare Miles, and the Solidity 265693384 
 cubic Miles. 
 
 YET the Italian Miles are moft commodious, 
 60 of which make a Degr. and a Mile a Minute. 
 Tho* thefe Italian Miles are to be computed fuch 
 as each of them may contain 475 Rhinland Per- 
 ches. The Circuit of the Earth in this Meafure is 
 2 1600 Miles, and it's Semidiameter 3440. 
 
 THESE Things being explained, let us next 
 confider why the above-mentioned Meafures of 
 feveral Authors difier ; and what is wanting in 
 each. 
 
 I N the firft Method, thefe Things are dubious. 
 I. The Elevation of the Pole might, perhaps, 
 have been taken wrong. 2. It may be doubted 
 whether the Places obferved were in the fame Me- 
 ridian or no. 3. Their Diftance is not particularly 
 known ^ nor the Meafure which the Arahiam then 
 ufed. So that in this Menfuration thefe Things 
 are required, i. The Length of their Mile Cac- 
 
 counted 
 
 * According to our A'or'u'ooi, the Surface, 199,444,201 
 
 and the Famous Cafftni, the Miles ; and the folid Content, 
 
 Meafures are thus ; the Diame- 264,856,000,000 Miles. 
 ^^ 7^9^7>7 ^ngl'Jb Miles;
 
 6o The Ahfohite Fart S e c T. II. 
 
 counted 4000 Cubits according to Alfraganus) is 
 not well known to us. 2. They do not fliew us 
 the Situation of the Places whofe Latitude they 
 took ; neither can we be certain of their Diligence 
 in taking them. 3. Nor do they tell us by what 
 Method they meafured their Diftances. \ 
 
 I N Eratojlhcnei^s Menfuration, thefe Things are 
 to be obferved. i. He did not add 15 ?nin. (for 
 the Angle made by the Sun's apparent Ray x z 
 and the true central Ray) (Fig. 7.) to the Arch 
 found BZ y degr. iimin. 2. He did not prove 
 S'jene and Alexandria to lie under the fame Meridi- 
 an. 3. The Termination of Shadows cannot be 
 accurately obferved ; and alfo a Style at any o- 
 ther Place within 150 Furlongs of S^cne would 
 have been without a Shadov/. 4. He took the 
 Diftance between Sjene and Alexandria from com- 
 mon Computation which is feldom exad ; neither 
 do we certainly know the Length of his Furlong. 
 
 I N Pofidomui^s Method thefe Errors may be 
 objefted. i. He fuppofed Canotus not to rife a- 
 bove the Horizon of Rhodes ; tho' it is known to 
 be elevated two Degrees there : however, he could 
 not be fure it exactly touched it. 2. He deter- 
 mined the Diftance between Rhodes and Alexan- 
 dria by Guefs, and computed Voyages. 3. The 
 I^ength of his Furlong is not truly ftated. 4. It 
 may be doubted wliether Alexandria and Rhodes 
 lie under the fame Meridian, &c. 
 
 I N the Terreftrial Methods there are thefe De- 
 fecfts. I. An Error is eafily committed in taking 
 the exad Altitude of any Mountain. 2. The 
 extream Point of Vifion cannot be cxaftly deter- 
 mined, by reafon of the Refradlion and the Weak- 
 nefs of the Sight. 
 
 THUS tar concerning the Dimenfions of the 
 Earth's Perimeter, it's Semidiameter, Superficies, 
 and Solidity j from whence we might compute it's 
 
 Solidity
 
 Chap. 4- ofTJniverfal Geography, 6i 
 
 Solidity or Weigiit : but becaufe it's Parts are of 
 different Gravities and Textures unknown to us, 
 we cannot fo well determine it's Weight but by 
 Suppofition, 
 
 I T muft be remembered that the Semidiameter 
 of the iLarth is the Model of all Celeftial Dimen- 
 fions, both in determining the Dillances of the 
 Planets from the Earth, and from one another, 
 and in computing their Magnitude. Thus we lay, 
 the Sun is diftant from the Earth 1200 Semidia- 
 meters, and the Moon 59, &c. 
 
 I N Geography^ not only the greater Circles, as 
 the Equator, &c. are to be confidered, but alfo 
 the lelTer are of Ufe, that are parallel to the Equa- 
 tor, viz. how many Miles, or Perches, make a 
 Degree in fuch or fuch a Parallel ^ Therefore we 
 have taken the following Table out of Sneliius, 
 and have added to his Meafure of a Degree in 
 Perches, the fame in German^ Dutch^ and Italian 
 Miles. 
 
 A Table Jhewing the Extent of one Degree in thefeve- 
 ral Parallels. 
 
 The Latitude of the Place, 
 or the Diftance of each Pa- 
 rallel from the Equator. 
 
 
 Perches in 
 I Degr. 
 
 Holland 
 Miles 
 
 German 
 Miles 
 
 Italian 
 
 Miles 
 
 Deg. 
 
 
 Miles Perch. 
 
 Miles Min. 
 
 Miles Min. 
 
 Equ. 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 28500 
 2S496 
 28483 
 28461 
 28431 
 28392 
 
 19 
 
 18 1496 
 18 1483 
 18 1461 
 i8 1431 
 18 1392 
 
 15 
 
 H 59 
 14 59 
 14 58 
 
 14 57 
 14 56 
 
 60 
 
 59 59 
 59 5« 
 59 54 
 59 5' 
 59 45 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 28344 
 28288 
 
 18 1344 
 18 1288 
 
 H 55 
 H 53 
 
 59 4' 
 
 s9 34-
 
 62 
 
 I'he Ahfolute Part S e c T. IL 
 
 Lati- 
 
 Perches in 
 
 Holland 
 
 Gcrjnan 
 
 Italian 
 
 tude 
 
 Dcg. 
 
 8 
 
 I Df^r. 
 
 Miles 
 
 Miles 
 
 Miles 
 
 
 Miles Perch. 
 
 Miles Min. 
 
 Miles Min. 
 
 2822 
 
 18 
 
 1223 
 
 14 5. 
 
 59 25 
 
 9 
 
 28149 
 
 18 
 
 1 149 
 
 14 48 
 
 59 16 
 
 lO 
 
 28061 
 
 18 
 
 1067 
 
 14 46 
 
 59 6 
 
 1 1 
 
 27976 
 
 18 
 
 975 
 
 14 43 
 
 58 55 
 
 I 2 
 
 27877 
 
 18 
 
 877 
 
 14 40 
 
 58 42 
 
 M 
 
 27769 
 
 18 
 
 769 
 
 14 37 
 
 58 29 
 
 H 
 
 27653 
 
 18 
 
 653 
 
 14 33 
 
 58 ,4 
 
 1^ 
 
 27!;26 
 
 18 
 
 529 
 
 14 29 
 
 57 58 
 
 i6 
 
 27596 
 
 18 
 
 396 
 
 14 25 
 
 57 42 
 
 I? 
 
 27255 
 
 18 
 
 255 
 
 ,4 21 
 
 57 24 
 
 i8 
 
 27105 
 
 18 
 
 105 
 
 14 i6 
 
 57 4 
 
 iq 
 
 269.L7 
 
 17 
 
 1447 
 
 14 II 
 
 56 44 
 
 20 
 
 76781 
 
 17 
 
 I 281 
 
 14 6 
 
 ';6 24- 
 
 21 
 
 26607 
 
 17 
 
 1 107 
 
 14 
 
 56 
 
 22 
 
 26425 
 
 17 
 
 925 
 
 13 54 
 
 55 36 
 
 2^ 
 
 26234 
 
 17 
 
 734 
 
 13 48 
 
 55 '2 
 
 24 
 
 26036 
 
 17 
 
 536 
 
 13 42 
 
 54 48 
 
 25 
 
 2t;S^o 
 
 17 
 
 330 
 
 13 36 
 
 54. 24 
 
 26 
 
 25615 
 
 '7 
 
 n6 
 
 13 29 
 
 54 
 
 27 
 
 25394 
 
 16 
 
 '394 
 
 13 22 
 
 53 28 
 
 28 
 
 25164 
 
 16 
 
 1 164 
 
 •5 15 
 
 53 
 
 29 
 
 24927 
 
 16 
 
 927 
 
 13 7 
 
 52 28 
 
 30 
 
 21681 
 
 16 
 
 681 
 
 '3 59 
 
 5' 96 
 
 31 
 
 24429 
 
 16 
 
 429 
 
 12 51 
 
 51 24 
 
 32 
 
 24169 
 
 16 
 
 169 
 
 12 43 
 
 50 52 
 
 33 
 
 23902 
 
 '5 
 
 1402 
 
 12 35 
 
 50 20 
 
 34 
 
 23628 
 
 15 
 
 1128 
 
 12 26 
 
 49 44 
 
 3'? 
 
 23346 
 
 15 
 
 846 
 
 12 17 
 
 49 8 
 
 36 
 
 23057 
 
 '5 
 
 557 
 
 12 8 
 
 48 32 
 
 37 
 
 22761 
 
 15 
 
 261 
 
 II 59 
 
 47 56 
 
 3« 
 
 22458 
 
 H 
 
 1458 
 
 II 49 
 
 47 16 
 
 39 
 
 22149 
 
 H 
 
 1149 
 
 11 39 
 
 46 39 
 
 40 
 
 21832 
 
 '4 
 
 832 
 
 1 1 29 
 
 46 
 
 41 
 
 21509 
 
 •4 
 
 509 
 
 II 19 
 
 45 '6 
 
 42 
 
 21180 
 
 14 
 
 180 
 
 II 9 
 
 44 36 
 
 43 
 
 20843 
 
 13 
 
 1343 
 
 10 58 
 
 43 52 
 
 44 
 
 20501 
 
 13 
 
 1 00 1 
 
 10 47 
 
 43 8 
 
 45 
 
 20152 
 
 13 
 
 652 
 
 JO 36 
 
 42 24 
 
 46 
 
 19798 
 
 13 
 
 298 
 
 10 25 
 
 41 40 
 
 47 
 
 «9437 
 
 »3 
 
 
 1070 
 
 10 14 
 
 41 
 
 4« 
 
 19070 
 
 12 
 
 10 2 
 
 40 8 [
 
 Chap. 4« of Vniverjal Geography, 63 
 
 Lati 
 
 Perches in 
 
 Holland 
 
 German 
 
 Italian 
 
 lide. 
 
 I Degr. 
 
 Miles 
 
 Miles 
 
 Miles 
 
 Deg. 
 
 49 
 
 
 Miles Perch. 
 
 Miles Min. 
 
 Miles Min. 
 
 u;6}8 
 
 12 698 
 
 9 50 
 
 39 20 
 
 50 
 
 18319 
 
 12 319 
 
 9 38 
 
 38 32 
 
 17936 
 
 11 1436 
 
 9 20 
 
 37 44 
 
 S2 
 
 17546 
 
 11 1046 
 
 9 H 
 
 37 
 
 ?3 
 
 17152 
 
 1 I 652 
 
 9 2 
 
 36 8 
 
 S4 
 
 16752 
 
 II 252 
 
 8 49 
 
 3 5 26 
 
 =;> 
 
 16347 
 
 10 M4-' 
 
 8 36 
 
 XX 24 
 
 56 
 
 '5937 
 
 10 937 
 
 8 23 
 
 33 32 
 
 57 
 
 15522 
 
 10 522 
 
 8 10 
 
 32 40 
 
 5« 
 
 1 5 103 
 
 !0 103 
 
 7 57 
 
 31 48 
 
 59 
 
 14679 
 
 9 '»79 
 
 7 44 
 
 31 
 
 60 
 61 
 
 14250 
 
 9 750 
 
 7 30 
 
 30 
 
 13817 
 
 9 3'7 
 
 7 16 
 
 29 4 
 
 62 
 
 13380 
 
 8 1330 
 
 7 2 
 
 28 8 
 
 63 
 
 '2939 
 
 8 939 
 
 6 48 
 
 27 12 
 
 64 
 
 12494 
 
 8 494 
 
 6 34 
 
 26 16 
 
 b.- 
 
 12045 
 
 8 45 
 
 6 20 
 
 25 2n 
 
 66 
 
 11592 
 
 7 1092 
 
 6 6 
 
 24 24 
 
 67 
 
 lli:;6 
 
 7 639 
 
 5 52 
 
 23 28 
 
 68 
 
 10676 
 
 7 176 
 
 5 38 
 
 22 32 
 
 69 
 
 102(3 
 
 6 1213 
 
 5 23 
 
 21 32 
 
 70 
 
 9748 
 
 6 748 
 
 5 8 
 
 20 32 
 
 7» 
 
 9279 
 
 6 279 
 
 4 53 
 
 19 3- 
 
 72 
 
 8807 
 
 5 '307 
 
 4 38 
 
 18 32 
 
 73 
 
 8333 
 
 5 933 
 
 4 23 
 
 17 32 
 
 74 
 
 7846 
 
 5 346 
 
 4 8 
 
 10 32 
 
 75 
 76 
 
 7376 
 
 4 i?t6 
 
 3 53 
 
 15 32 
 
 6895 
 
 4 895 
 
 3 38 
 
 14 32 
 
 77 
 
 641 I 
 
 4 4'i 
 
 3 23 
 
 '3 32 
 
 7« 
 
 5925 
 
 3 »425 
 
 3 8 
 
 12 3-i 
 
 79 
 
 5438 
 
 3 938 
 
 2 52 
 
 11 28 
 
 80 
 
 4949 
 
 3 4/10 
 
 2 36 
 
 10 24 
 
 81 
 
 4458 
 
 2 i4c;8 
 
 2 20 
 
 9 20 
 
 82 
 
 3966 
 
 2 f65 
 
 2 5 
 
 8 20 
 
 83 
 
 3473 
 
 2 473 
 
 I 50 
 
 7 2^ 
 
 «4 
 
 2979 
 
 I 1479 
 
 I 34 
 
 6 12 
 
 85 
 
 2484 
 
 I 984 
 
 I 18 
 
 5 '^ 
 
 86 
 
 1988 
 
 I 488 
 
 I 3 
 
 4 1 2 
 
 87 
 
 1492 
 
 1492 
 
 47 
 
 3 12 
 
 88 
 89 
 90 
 
 995 
 
 991 
 
 31 
 
 - 2 4 
 
 497 
 
 498 
 
 16 
 
 I 4 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 

 
 64 
 
 'The Ahfolutc Fart Se C T. II. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Motion of the Earth. 
 
 ^Jf^ H E Pythagorean Motion or Circumvolution 
 X of the Earth fnot a Nutation or Quaking) 
 is according to the Coper nicain the Caufe of molt 
 of the Changes in the Celeftial Appearances, v/hich 
 would otherwife be conftantly the fame in every 
 Place {a), Tho' indeed there is not any Property 
 
 ,0 of 
 
 [a) This Syftem was not in- 
 vented by Pythagoras, as fome 
 imagine, for Diogenes Ldertius 
 exprefsly faith, that Pythago- 
 ras'i Opinion was, That the 
 World n>jas round, co-ntaining 
 the Earth in the ?niddle of it \ 
 and that Phihlaus, the Pythago- 
 rean, was the firft that faid the 
 I^larth moved in a Circle : But 
 fome fay tlercetas the Syracu- 
 Jian. Derhams Ajlro-Theology. 
 
 Pythagoras, who lived in So- 
 ciety with the Egyptian PiieJIs 
 feven Years, and was initiated 
 into their Religion, carried 
 home from thence, befides fe- 
 veral Geometrical Inventions, 
 the true Syllem of the Uni- 
 verfe, and was the firft that 
 taught in Greece, that the 
 Earth and Planets turned round 
 the vSun, which was immovea- 
 ble in the Center ; and that the 
 Diurnal Motion of the Sun and 
 fixed Stars, was not real but ap- 
 
 parent, arifing from the Mo- 
 tion of the Earth round it's 
 Axis. 
 
 The next Perfon who made 
 a confiderable Figure this way, 
 was Ptolemy with his Cycles, 
 Epicycles, and Eccentrics, he 
 quite burthened Nature, and his 
 Hypothefis Ihews too much of 
 Art j thefe are all now explo- 
 ded, and his folid Spheres broke 
 to pieces ; he left behind 
 him a Work entitled Almagcjl, 
 or the great Conftradtion, 
 which was founded on the 
 Oblervations of Hipparchus. 
 
 Copernicus had the Honour 
 to reftore the ancient Pytha- 
 gorean Syftem, notwithftanding 
 the PrepofTelTion the Ptolemaic 
 had gained in the World. 
 
 To thefe fucceedcd the No- 
 ble Dane, T^ycho Brake, whofe 
 Hypothefis in a great Meafure 
 is compounded of the other two, 
 and feems defigned to account 
 for
 
 Chap. 5' of Vnherfal Geography. 65 
 
 of the Earth fo much difputed againft and cavil- 
 led at as this -, fo as even not long ago to have 
 undergone the Cenfure of the liomi/Jj Church. 
 However, becaufe it feems very probable to many 
 that there is fuch a Motion, we Ihall endeavour to 
 explain it. 
 
 I T is known to all, even the Vulgar, that the 
 Sun, Moon, and Stars, appear to move from Eafb 
 to Weft, and to return to almoft the fame Places 
 again in the Heavens, in the Space of twenty four 
 Hours. So that either they muft really move, 
 or we our felves be moved •, and attribute our 
 Motion to them. For it is a felf-evident Prin- 
 ciple, that if two Things change their Diftance 
 from one another, one of them, at leaft, mufl 
 have moved. 
 
 THAT the Earth is fixed, or at Reft, and the 
 Stars with the Heavens in Motion, was a common 
 Opinion ; and is fo ftill among thofe that are ac- 
 counted Ptolemaic Aftronomers : But the Pythago- 
 reans of old maintained, that the Stars conftantly 
 kept their Places ; and that the Earth was revol- 
 ved about it*s Center. Of which Sedl was the 
 ctl^ihmizd Anjlarchus o^ Samos \ who, for defend- 
 ing this Opinion, was, by his Enemy and Adver- 
 fary, accufed, before the Bench of the Areopagites^ of 
 having violated the Lav/s of Religion ; but v/as 
 fortunately abfolved by them*. Afterwards, buc 
 
 very 
 
 for the difficulties of both of the Celeftial Bodies obfcrve in 
 
 them, and fo is liable to leveral their i\Iotion, and laid the 
 
 Objeftions in them both. He Ground-work of the Modern 
 
 was very fkillful in obferving, Philofophy. Thus I have given 
 
 and in the Furniture of his a fhort Skctcli of the Rife and 
 
 Obfervatory exceeded even Perfedlion of this Science. 
 
 Princes and Kings. * The Great Galileo, the 
 
 Joh7t Kepler, the laft I (hall Modern AfTertor of the fame 
 
 mention, by the help of Tycho'^ Doftrine, met with the fate of 
 
 Labours, found out the Laws theancientSamianPhilefopher ; 
 
 VOL. L F H«
 
 66 "The Ahjolute Fart S e ct. II. 
 
 very few ailented to this Opinion ; fo that it lay 
 hid, or, as ic were, buried in Oblivion for many- 
 Ages ; infomuch that we find not the leaft men- 
 tion of it in tiie Schools, till the famous Afhrono- 
 mer Copernicus^ about 200 Years ago, brought it 
 again into Eftimation, and backed it with feveral 
 Arguments, fo that many excellent Aftronomers af- 
 ter him embraced it •, among whom flourifhed not 
 long fince the great Kepler, Profeffor of Mathema- 
 tics to the Emperor ; and Galiltxo an Italian, Ma- 
 thematician to the great Duke of Tufcany ; as alfo 
 Lanjberg a Dutchman. 
 
 AND whereas we obferve two apparent Mo- 
 tions in the Pleavenly Bodies (one by which all 
 the Stars both fixed and wandering feem be car- 
 ried about the Earth, and to rife to the Meridian, 
 and fet under the Horizon nearl-y in the fame or 
 equal Times : The other, which is called their 
 Annual Motion ; by which the Planets with dif- 
 ferent Motions, and the fixed Stars with equal Ve- 
 locity, are carried the contrary Way from Weft 
 to Eaft) the Ptclemaics affirm both thefe Motions 
 to be in the Stars themfelves, or in their Orbs ; 
 But the Copernicans attribute this firft apparent Mo- 
 tion to that real one of the Earth, not in being 
 transferred from one Place to another, but to it's 
 Rotation about it's Axis from Weft to Eaft, while 
 it continues ftill in it's own Place fwhich caufeth 
 the apparent Motion of all the Stars the contrary 
 way). And they alfo free the Sun and the fixed 
 Stars from the aforefaid annual Motion, by attri- 
 
 He was brought before the proper Center. The poor Man 
 
 Inqulfition, and obliged folemn- was forced to fay, that he did, 
 
 ly to abjure his Aftronomical with a fincere Heart, and Faith 
 
 Tenets, that the Sun frood im- unfeigned, abjure, curfe, and 
 
 movable in the midft of the deteil, the aforefaid Errors and 
 
 Univerfe, and that the Earth Herefies. 
 
 moved round it, as about it's 
 
 buting
 
 J H A p. 5. of Vitlverfal Geography, 67 
 
 juting the apparent Motion of thefe to the real an- 
 nual Motion of the Earth round the Sun ; and to 
 the liiclinarion ot it's Axis : Notwidiftanding they 
 affign this fliid annual Motion to the reft of the 
 Planets -, only they deny the Sun to be a Planet, 
 and advance him to the Center of the S\ftemy 
 where Ptolemy had placed the Earth •, and make 
 the reft of the Planets, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars^ 
 the Earth, Venus, and Mercury, revolve round 
 him. 
 
 THE Reafons for the Copernican Ihpothefis are 
 thefe. 
 
 1. T H E Motion of the Earth round it's Axis, 
 continuing in the flime Place, will beft account for 
 the Appearance of fuch a vaft Number of Stars, 
 which feem to perform their Revolutions round 
 the Earth in 24 Hours ; and therefore this Mo- 
 tion is moft agreeable to Reafon : As it happens 
 with us when we fit in a Ship, failing towards o- 
 thers at Reft in the Harbour ; tho' they feem to 
 approach and come nearer us, yet v/e do not affigii 
 that to any Motion in them. And as Nature ne- 
 ver performs that by many means which may be 
 done by a few ; it is very likely the fame Rule is 
 obferved here. 
 
 2. THE Motion of the Stars would thus be 
 incredibly fwift and beyond all Imagination ; be- 
 caufe their Diftance, in Refped of us, is almoft infi- 
 nite, and the Orbit they have to run round {o 
 prodigioufty great, that they muft move at leaft 
 100,000 Miles in a Minute: On the other hand, 
 if this Motion be affigned to the Earth, we nesd 
 not introduce a progrejjive Celerity -, for tho' flie re- 
 mains ftill in the fame part of Space, flie folves 
 the Phsenomena by revolving about her Axis, 
 
 3. THIS Argument is the ftronger if we com- 
 pare the vaft Bulk of the Celeftial Bodies with the 
 Bulk ot the Earth. For as the Sun is at leaft 200 
 
 F 2 times
 
 6B 1'he Abjolute Tart S e c T. IL 
 
 times bigger than the Earth, and fome of the fixed 
 Stars 1000 times; it is much more probable, that 
 the Earth revolves round it's Axis with an eafy 
 natural Motion, than that fuch vaft Bodies fliould 
 move from one Place to another with incredible 
 Swiftnefs. 
 
 4. THE mod celebrated Aflronomers are, 
 with 1')cho^ forced, by the Phenomena, to deny 
 that there are folid Orbs, fuch as the Ancients 
 made ufe of, the better to explain their imaginary 
 Motion of the Stars; hence their Arguments for 
 this diurnal Rotation about the Earth, are lefs co- 
 gent. The Reafon why they are forced to deny 
 this, is, becaufe that one Planet is often feen with- 
 in the Orb of another ; which muft caufe a mutual 
 Penetration. 
 
 5. NO Reafon can be given why the Stars 
 ihould move round the Earth : But on the other 
 hand, it is moil agreeable to Reafon, that the 
 Earth, and the reft of the Planets, fhould move 
 about the Sun. 
 
 6. NEITHER the Pole nor the Axh about 
 which the Stars are fuppofed to revolve, is real : 
 On the contrary, there is a known Pole and Aviii 
 in the Earth. 
 
 7. F O R this Reafon alfo Navigation is much 
 ealier from. Weft to Eaft than the contrary Way. 
 For they can fail from Europe to India in about 
 four Months ; but can fcarce return in lix Months : 
 becaufe in their going they move to the fame Point 
 with the Earth ; but in their returning they fteer 
 contrary to the Earth's Motion. 
 
 8. BECAUSE the Celejlial Phcenomena, fuch 
 as the rifing and fetting of the Stars, the Inequali- 
 ty of Days, i^c. cannot be accounted for, by any 
 other Motion than that of the Earth. And the 
 Commodioufnefs and NecefTity of this Hypothefis, 
 is more particularly perceived in the wonderful Ap- 
 
 I pearances
 
 C H A p. 5- of Vniverfal Geography. 6g 
 
 psarances of the Planets •, for explaining of which 
 the Plolemaics are forced to fuppofe feveral unnecef- 
 fary interfering Circles, Epicycles, arA Eccentrics, 
 without any Reafon : Whereas the Copermcans can 
 naturally account for them all, (without any pre- 
 vious Suppofitions,) by the annual Motion of the 
 Earth, or it's Revolution round the Sun, viz. 
 I. Why the Planets feem fometimes retrograde; 
 and why Saturn is oftener and continues longer fo 
 than Jupiter ; and Jupiter oftener and longer fo 
 than Mars, &c. and alio why they are carried 
 fometimes with a fwifter Motion, and at other 
 times appear flationary. 2. Why Mercury and 
 Venus can never be feen a v/hole Night together. 
 3. Why Venus is never carried further from the 
 Sun than 48 degr. and Mercury never more than 
 28 ; and fo can never be feen in Oppofition to the 
 Sun. 4. Why Venus may be feen in the Evening 
 after the Sun is fet ; and the next day in the Morn- 
 ing before the Sun rifes, i^c. 
 
 I FORBEAR to mention any more Phe- 
 nomena, (thefe being the principal from whence a 
 folid Argument may be drawn for the Motion of 
 the Earthj fince they are all eafily and naturally 
 accounted for upon this Hypothefis ; fo that it 
 would be ftrange if the Earth fhould not move, 
 when fuch evident Appearances require fuch a Mo- 
 tion. And tho' thefe Arguments are not demon- 
 Jlrative, yet they render this Hypothefis prefera- 
 ble to the other, which fuppofeth the Motion of 
 the Heavens. And we mull admit of the one or 
 the other. 
 
 BUT the Arguments which feme alledge to 
 the contrary are eafily anfwered ; fuch as, i . The 
 Earth is not fit for Motion, becaufe of it's Gravis 
 ty. 2. The Parts of the Earth naturally tend in 
 a right Line to the Center -, and therefore a circu- 
 lar Motion is againft Nature. 3. If the Earth 
 
 F 3 were
 
 "JO ^he Ahfotute Tart Sect. II. 
 
 were moved, a Stone dropped from the Top of a 
 Tower would not falljuft at the Foot of it. 4. A 
 Ball fhot from a Cannon Eaftward at a Mark, 
 could not come home to it, if the Mark with the 
 whole Earth did at the fame Time move towards 
 the Eaft : or at lead would hit the Mark fooner 
 when fliot towards the Weft. Alfo a Bird flying 
 towards the Eaft would be retarded : but forward- 
 ed in flying the contrary Way. 5. Towers and 
 Buildings could not ftand upright, but would fall : 
 and Men, by the quick Rotation, would become 
 giddy. 6. Becaufe (fay theyj the Stars are obfer- 
 ved to change their Places, but not the Earth. 
 7. Becaufe the Earth is in the Center of the World ; 
 but the Center of any Thing is not moved. 8. Be- 
 caufe the holy Scriptures confirm the Stability of 
 the Earth. 
 
 T O all which the Coperuicans anfwer thus. To 
 the/r/?, that the whole Earth, taken together, is 
 not abfolutely heavy. For Gravity confifts in the 
 Tendency of the homogenous Parts to the whole ; 
 and tho' this kind of Gravity be found in the Sun 
 and Moon, they are neverthelefs not accounted 
 weighty. 
 
 T O the fecond they anfwer, that the circular 
 Motion of the whole does in no wife hinder the 
 relative Motion of the Parts, which are moved in 
 a diredt Line towards the Center -, as appears 
 by the Parts of the Sun and Moon, 
 
 TO the third they anfwer three ways, i. That 
 heavy Bodies are not carried directly toward the 
 Center of the Earth, but in the ftiorteft Lines pof- 
 fible to it's Superficies ; which are thofe parallel to 
 the Tower ; as Iron does not tend to the Center 
 of the Loadftone, but to the Loadftone itfelf. 
 2. The whole Atmofphere adheres to the Earth, 
 and is moved along with it : therefore when Bo- 
 dies are thus let fall, they partake of this circular 
 
 I Motion,
 
 C H A p. 5- ^f Ufiiverfal Geography. y r 
 
 Motion, and are carried downwards as it were in 
 a Veffel. 3. Gajfendus, by repeated Experiments, 
 found, that if a Body be proje6ced from another 
 Body in Motion, it will partake of the Motion of 
 that other Body ; as a Stone dropped from the 
 Top of a Maft, while the Ship is in a very fwift 
 Motion, is not left by the Ship but fills at the 
 Foot of the Maft. Alio a Ball fhot perpendicu- 
 larly from the Foot of the Maft tails in the very 
 fame Place. Therefore the Objedion is of no 
 Force. 
 
 T O xht fourth they anfwer as to the third. 
 TW'E fifth Objedion hath no Place, becaufc 
 the Motion of the Earth is even and uniform, with- 
 out dafhing or ftriking againft any other Body ; 
 and the Buildings being heavy Bodies, and homo- 
 geneous to the Earth, are moved as if they were 
 in a Ship -, which tho' it ^ils either fwiftly or flow- 
 ly, yet if the Motion be even and fteady without 
 Waves and on fmooth Water, Bodies fet upright 
 will not be overturned, nor a Glafs of Wine be 
 fpilt. 
 
 T O the fixth v/e anfwer, that we are nor fen- 
 fible of any Change of Place in the Stars, only of 
 their Situation in Refpe6t of our felves; which 
 may appear and really be, whether we with the 
 Earth, or the Stars themfelves are moved; or 
 even tho' both we and the Stars ftiould be in Mo- 
 tion {b). I N 
 
 [h) Moft of thefe Objeaions the Top T, in the fame Time 
 
 are anfwered by the Laws of that the Ship moves from M 
 
 Mechanics, thus : Let W, Ebe to D. From the Conjunftion 
 
 the Line of Motion of a Ship of thefe two Forces (MTthe 
 
 from W to E, reprefenting the Projedion, and MD the Ship's 
 
 Motion ofthe Earth from Weft Motion) it is manifeft, by the 
 
 to Eaft. Let MT {in Fig. g) known Laws of Motion, that 
 
 be a Maft, from the Foot of the body will not be carried 
 
 which, M, fuppofe a Body to perpendicularly to the place 
 
 be thrown perpendicularly to T, but in the Diagonal Line 
 
 F 4. MB*.
 
 72 I'be Abfolute Fart S e c t. II. 
 
 IN i\-\tfeventh Objsdion both the Affertions are 
 falfe j or, at kaft, doubtiul. 
 
 TO 
 
 MB, fo as to accompany the 
 Maft in it's Motion from 
 MT to CD. Tiien fuppoic 
 the Body to fall from the 
 top of the Maft B, to the foot 
 D, in the fame Time the Ship 
 moves from D to G ; and it 
 is phiin, that, by the mutual 
 afting of B D, the centripetal 
 Force, and BF = DG, the 
 Ship's Motion, the Body will 
 fall in t'ne diagonal Line BG, 
 and alfo accompany the Maft 
 in it's Motion from D to G ; 
 fo that tho' it was really carri- 
 ed in t!ie Lines MB, BG, yet 
 it will feem to have moved, on- 
 ly upwards and downwards, pa- 
 rallel to the Line F G. 
 
 Alfo (in Fig. lo.) let MT 
 be the fame Maft, and fuppofe 
 a Projeftile to be caft eaft- 
 ward from the Stern S, to the 
 top of the Maft T, in the Time 
 the Ship moves alfo eaftward 
 from M to D; then will it's 
 Motion upwards defcribe the 
 Diagonal S B ; where let it be 
 obftrufted fo as to feem to fall 
 perpendicularly to D, in the 
 ftrime the Ship moves from D 
 to G ; then, as before, it will 
 defcribe the Diagonal BG, tho' 
 it fcemed to move upwards only 
 in the LineTS, and dov/nwards 
 inFG. 
 
 So (in Fig. II.) if a Body 
 be projefted weftward from 
 the Head of the Ship H to the 
 top of the Maft T, in the time 
 it moves eaftward, HG equal 
 to the Diftance M H, then will 
 it's Motion upwaids defcribe 
 
 the perpendicular Line HB, 
 And if in the fame time it 
 feems to defcend from B to H 
 that the Maft moves H G ^ 
 G /^ c= M H, it's Motion down- 
 wards v/ill defcribe the Diago- 
 nal BG. So that, in this Cafe, 
 it afcends by a perpendicular 
 Line, and falls by an inclining 
 Line ; tho' it feemed to afcend 
 by the inclined Line h F, and 
 to fall by the perpendicular 
 LineF G. 
 
 Hence it is plain that bodies 
 may appear to have a A-Iotion, 
 diredly contrary to their real 
 and abfolute Motion : fo that it 
 is pleafant to conceive, how 
 falily we may judge of the 
 Motion of Bodies by their une- 
 qual Diftance from us ; not con- 
 fidering that we may be infen- 
 fibly moved from them. 
 
 Hence alfo is deduced that 
 ingenious Experiment of Gali- 
 Irco, mentioned in Derharns 
 JJiro-Theology, as follows. 
 
 ' Shut yourfelf up [fays he) 
 
 * with your Friend in the great 
 
 * Cabin of a Ship, together 
 
 * with a Parcel of Gnats and 
 ' p'lies, and other little winged 
 ' Creatures. Procure alfo a 
 ' great Tub of Water, and put 
 
 * Fifties therein. Hang alfo a 
 ' Bottle of Water up to empty 
 ' itfelf, drop by drop into ano- 
 
 * ther fuch Bottle placed under- 
 
 * neath with a narrow Neck. 
 ' Whilft the Ship lies ftill, di- 
 
 * ligently obferve how thefe 
 ' little winged Creatures fly 
 
 * with the like fwiftnefs to eve- 
 
 ry
 
 JP/a/^e.Jl^ 
 
 p. 120.1 2^. 
 
 iO 
 
 •J-f'y.14' P.J14., 
 126.
 
 l^ Jf fl.Jlt 
 
 o 
 
 r
 
 Chap. 5. of Univerfal Geography» 73 
 
 TO the eighth is anfwered, i. The holy Scrip- 
 tures, in phyfical matters, always fpeak according 
 to Appearances, and the Capacity of the Vulgar -, 
 as wliere the Moon is faid to be a great Light crea- 
 ted to give Light in the Night (c) : tho' the Moon 
 
 ry Part of the Cabin ; how 
 the Fifhes fwim indifFerently 
 towards all Sides ; and how 
 the defcending Drops all fall 
 into the Bottle underneath. 
 And if you throw any thing 
 to your Friend you need ufe 
 no more Force one way than 
 another ; provided the Di- 
 ftances be equal. And if you 
 leap, you will reach as far 
 one way as the other. Hav- 
 ing obferved thefe Particulars 
 whilft the Ship lies ftill, 
 make the Ship to fail with 
 what Velocity you pleafe ; and 
 fo long as the motion is uni- 
 form, not fluftuating this 
 Way and that Way, you fhall 
 not perceive there is any Al- 
 teration in the aforefaid Ef- 
 fe6ls ; neither can you from 
 them conclude whether the 
 Ship movcth or ftandeth Hill. 
 But in leaping you fhall reach 
 as far on the Floor as you did 
 before ; nor by any Reafon 
 of the Ship's Motion fhall you 
 make a longer leap towards 
 the Poop than the Prow ; 
 notwithftanding that whilft 
 you are up in the Air, the 
 Floor under your Feet had 
 run the contrary Way to 
 your Leap. And if you cafe 
 any thing to your Compa- 
 nion, you need ufe no more 
 Strength to make it reach 
 him, if he fhould be towards 
 the Prow and you towards 
 
 * the Poop, than if you flood 
 ' in a contrary Polition. I'he 
 ' Drops fhall all fall into the 
 
 * Bottle that is lower ; and not 
 ' one towards the Poop, al- 
 ' tho' the Ship fhall have run 
 ' many Feet, whilft the Drop 
 ' was in the Air. The Fifties 
 
 * in the Water fhall have no 
 ' more trouble in fwimming 
 ' towards the fore part of the 
 ' Tub, than towards the hin- 
 ' der Part ; but fhall make to 
 ' the Bait with equal fwiftnefs 
 
 * on any fide of the Tub. 
 ' And laftly the Gnats and Flies 
 ' fhall continue their Flight in- 
 ' differently towards all Parts, 
 ' and never be driven together 
 
 * towards the Side of the Ca- 
 ' bin next the Prow ; as if 
 ' wearied with following the 
 ' fwift Motion of the Ship. 
 ' And if by burning a few 
 ' Grains of Incenfe you make 
 ' a little Smoak ; you fhall 
 ' perceive it toafcend on high, 
 
 * and hang like a Cloud, mov- 
 
 * ing indifFerently this Way or 
 ' that, without any Inclination 
 
 * to one Side more than ano- 
 ' ther.' All which Obferva- 
 tions depend upon the aforefaid 
 Laws of Mechanics ; and fufR- 
 ciently anfwer the moft confl- 
 derable Objeftions, deduced 
 from Philofophy, againfl the 
 Motion of the Earth. 
 
 (<:) Gen. i. i6. 
 
 b«
 
 74 ^h^ Abfohte Tart Sect. II. 
 
 be not great in Refpedl of the Earth and fixed 
 Stars, nor hath any Light in itfelf; neither doth 
 it give Light to the Earth every Night. Thus 
 the Sun is laid to go forth from the End of the Hea- 
 vens^ and to hajle to it again (d) ; whereas in Truth 
 there is no fuch End to be found. So in the Book 
 of Job {e), the Earth is faid to be of a plane and 
 fquare Figure, underpropped and fupported virith 
 Pillars •, which is not to be underftood in a literal 
 Senfe, as even the moll ignorant may perceive (/j : 
 
 More 
 
 [d] Pfal. xix. 6. EccUf. i. 
 
 (f) yob ix. 6. xxviii. 24. 
 
 (_/■) Befides, Things are of- 
 ten fpoke of as they appear, 
 not as they really are. For as 
 St Hierom fays (upon the thir- 
 teenth Chapter of St Matthenx>) 
 It is the Ciijiom of the Scrip- 
 tures, for the Hijiorian to relate 
 the Opinion Men had of many 
 Matters, as at that time thofe 
 Matters 'were by all People ta- 
 ken to he. And in another Place. 
 There are many Things in the 
 Holy Scriptures, n.vhich are 
 fpoken according to the Opinion 
 »f the time in <vjhich they ivere 
 done ; aitd not according to Rea- 
 lity. And we fhould iind very 
 abfurd Conclufions would fol- 
 ioW the taking of thefe Texts 
 in a literal fenfe. For in fo- 
 Jhuax. 12, 13. the Sun is or- 
 dered to jland fill upon mount 
 Gibeon, and the Moon in the 
 »valley of Ajalon. But it would 
 be very abfurd to take this in a 
 iirift literal fenfe, and imagine 
 thofe two great Luminaries 
 were confined to thofe two Pla- 
 ces, otherwife than in Appea- 
 rance to the victorious Ifrac- 
 
 Utes. And if fo confiderable 
 a Part of the Tranfancftion be 
 fpoken according to it's Ap- 
 pearance, why may not the 
 whole ? Why might not tliis 
 Station as well be an Arreft of 
 the Earth's Motion, as that of 
 the Heavens ? If the whole 
 Miracle was not (as fome not 
 improbably think) efFeftcd by 
 Means of fome preternatural 
 Refractions, or extraordinary 
 Meteors, dfff . And fo for the 
 Recefs of the Sun, or it's Sha- 
 dow in Hczekiah^ Cafe (2 Kings 
 XX. 10. and I/a. xxxviii. 8.) 
 which in appearance fecmed to 
 be the Sun, is, by divers learned 
 Men, thought to have been the 
 cfFedt of fuch like extraordi- 
 nary Refraiftions or Meteors, as 
 mentioned in the laft Cafe : Or 
 if it was a real Regrefs, why 
 not of the Earth rather than 
 the Sun and whole Heavens .^ 
 See Derham^s JJlro-Theol. Be- 
 fides, Hiftoriographers feldoni 
 confine thcmfelves to a Geo- 
 metrical or Aftronomiail nicety 
 in their Defcriptions of Things, 
 As, in I Kings vii. 23. it is 
 written, that Solomon made a 
 molten fea, ten cubits from one
 
 Chap. 5« of Univerfal Geography. 75 
 
 More Places might be quoted, but thefe arc fuffi- 
 cient ; for the holy Scriptures were not given us 
 to philofophize by, but to increafe our Piety. 
 1. Some Places of Scripture are alfo produced, 
 which do not fpeak of the Mobility of the Earth, 
 but of it's Stability and Permanency ; as that in Job 
 aforefaid {g). 
 
 THUS we have declared in brief what that 
 Motion is, which the Copernicans aflign to the Earth ; 
 the more full and accurate Explication of which 
 belongs to Jijlronofw^ . And this Motion being 
 fuppofed, all the Phasnomea we obferve in a 
 Globe revolved about it's Axis, muft be applied 
 to the Earth, viz. That the Axis, upon which it is 
 turned. Is one of the Diameters: That the Poles 
 are two immoveable Points in the Extremities of 
 the Axis : That the great Circle, or Perimeter, in 
 which the Rotation is made, is the Equator with 
 it's Parallels, i^c. 
 
 L E T us now confider the Velocity of the Earth's 
 Motion ; which, in that about it's Axis, is not 
 over all the Earth equal, but different according 
 to the Diflance from the Equator ; being there 
 
 brim to the other, round all hended to be 25031,4 Miles, 
 
 c.hout, and a line of thirty cu- which, divided into 24 Hours, 
 
 bits did compafs it round about, makes the Revolution to be 
 
 But as J -.zz: : 10 : 3 if Cu- at the Rate of about 1043 
 
 bits is very near the true Length Miles in an hour ; a Rotation 
 
 of the Line that ought to en- that would as eafily throw off 
 
 compafs a round Vefiel of ten the Parts of the Earth, efpe- 
 
 Cubits Diameter. cially the Waters, as the whirl- 
 
 {g) Such as P/al. xciii. i. ing round of a Wheel, or a 
 cxix. 90. civ. 5. Eccle/. i. 4. Globe, would the loofe Duft 
 and I Chron. xvi. 30. which and Water thereon ; but by 
 Texts are all underil;ood by Reafon the Gravitating Power 
 learned Commentators to mean exceeds the Centrifugal, a« 
 the unalterable Condition, Se- 2174 exceeds 754,064, that 
 curity. Peace, and Tranquillity, is, above 288 times ; there- 
 of the Earth. fore all Parts lie quiet and fe- 
 
 The Ambit of the Earth, cure in their refpeftive Places, 
 
 by the molt accurate, is appre- Derbanis, JJiro-Jheol. p. i49- 
 
 fwiftelt
 
 ^6 "The Ahjolute Tart Sect. II. 
 
 fwifteft as pafiing thro' a greater Space, and fo 
 by Degrees flower towards the Poles, as paffing 
 thro' a kfs Space in the fame Time. Therefore 
 fince every Part of the Earth is moved thro* the 
 Space of it's Periphery (or 360 Degr.) in 24 
 Hours ; the Space of one Hour's Motion is found 
 by dividing 360 by 24, which gives in the Quo- 
 tient 15 Degr. and fo much doth any Place on the 
 Earth move (whether in the Equator or without it) 
 in an Hour, Alfo 15 Degr. in the Equator make 
 125 German yVA^%^ therefore it revolves 15 fuch 
 Miles ("or one Degr.) in 4 mm. and in one mm. 3 + 
 Miles. 
 
 BUT Places without the Equator, lying to- 
 wards either Pole, are in the fame Time revolved 
 the fame Number of Degrees : but thefe Degrees 
 are much lefs than thofe in the Equator -, fo that 
 the Celerity of Motion, or Progreffion, is as the 
 Sines of the Arches by which thefe Places are 
 diflant from the Pole. Example. The Diftance 
 froni the Equator (or Elevation of the Pole) of 
 Amjlerdam is 52 degr. 23 min. therefore the Di- 
 ftance from the Pole (or Complement of Latitude) 
 is 37 degr. 37 min. whofe Sine is 61037. Suppofe 
 another Place, under the Equino6tial, diftant from 
 the Pole 90 Degr. whofe Sine alfo is 1 00000, but 
 the Place under the Equinoflial moves 15 Miles 
 in 4 mm. and 225 an Hour. Therefore by the 
 Golden Rule, as 1 00000 : 61037 : : 15:9 Miles, 
 or lb is 225 to 137 Miles. So that Amjlerdam is 
 carried every Hour 137 Miles, and in 4 mm. 9 
 Miles, by this Motion. 
 
 T H I S is more eafily found by the foregoing 
 Table; for by dividing 360 by 24 we find each 
 Place to move 15 Degr. of it's own Circle in an 
 Hour, and therefore i. Degr. in 4 mm. i^c. con- 
 fulting the Table with the Latitude of the Pface, 
 we find how many Miles it moves in 4 min. For 
 
 Ex ampule- 5
 
 C H A p. 5« rf Vnherfal Geography. yy 
 
 Exa??iple •, The Latitude of Stockholm is about 60 
 Degr. oppofite to which in the Table is 77 Miles. 
 Therefore Siockholm revolves fo many Miles in 4 
 min. and fuch hihtfirfi Alotion in divers Places. 
 
 THE Second Motion of the Earth, it's Change 
 of Place -, whereby every Part of it moves the 
 fame Space with the fame Velocity. This Motion 
 is determined by the Diftance of the Earth from 
 the Sun, or the Semidiameter of the Orbit in which 
 it performs it's annual Revolution, moving in a 
 Day about a Degr. and in an Hour il min. 
 
 A S to the third Motion of the Earth, becaufe 
 it is more difficult to conceive, we fhall leave it 
 to Aftronomers, who have found it neceffary to 
 be fuppofed. Origanus moves a Doubt about the 
 fecond Motion •, and fuppofes the Earth to be on- 
 ly moved by the firfl, but the Sun and fixed Stars 
 by the fecond : Tho' the above-cited Appearan- 
 ces, in the Motions of the Planets, fufficiently 
 confirm this annual Motion {h). 
 
 [h) This imaginary third mid the Regrefs of the Nodes ; 
 
 Motion of the Earth they were /fom njJnch thing neverthekfs 
 
 obliged to fuppofe, to account no Variation of Declination, pro- 
 
 for the difputed Inequality of perly fo called, can arife. JVhi- 
 
 the Declination of the Ecliptic, foil's Afron. LcSl. pag. 57. 
 
 which is now by moft Aftro- That there is fuch a Nutation 
 
 nomers thought to be always wliereby the x'\xis of the Earth 
 
 the fame ; feeing there is no- doth twice incline towards the 
 
 thing nxihich fould difurh the Ecliptic, and twice return to 
 
 perpetual Paralklifn of the it's former Pofition, fee in 
 
 Earth, on ivhich this Equality Ne^zvtons Ptin. Phil. Nat. Book 
 
 depends, except it f^ould be the iii. Prop. 21. 
 infenfihle Nutation of the AxiSf 
 
 CHAP,
 
 yB 
 
 I'he Ahfolute Fart S e c t. II. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the Situation^ or Place^ of the Earth, in Re- 
 fpedi of the Flanets and fixed Stars. 
 
 TH E Situation of the Earth, in the Syftem of 
 the World, in relpecl to the reft of the Pla- 
 nets, hath feme Relation to the Account we gave 
 of the Earth's Motion, in the preceding Chap- 
 ter. For it is the general Opinion of the Ftokinaic 
 Aftronomers and Philofophers, that the Earth, 
 being the Center of the World, is placed in the 
 middle of the Stars and Planets (a) : But the Co- 
 fer-mcans, with the antient Pythagoreans, place the 
 Sun in the Center of all the Stars, and make the 
 Earth a Planet performing an annual Revolution 
 about him, between Mars and Venus -, as is beft 
 underftood by a Diagram of the Syftem. Never- 
 thelefs they both agree in this, that the Earth may 
 be accounted the apparent Center of the diurnal 
 Motion, by which the Stars feem to be carried a- 
 bout in twenty four Hours. For both Aftronomy 
 and Geography require this Suppofition -, fo that 
 whether we adhere to the Ptolemaic or Copernican 
 Hypothefis, we do not detraft from the Certainty 
 of general Aftronomy or Geography. Becaufe 
 the Difference of theie Opinions confifts only in 
 this J that the Ptolemaics will have this Motion to 
 
 {a) Since the World, or Uni- 
 verfe, is infinite, the central 
 Place of it cannot be determi- 
 ned : What our Author means 
 
 by the World here is only our 
 Solar Syftem, in which Senfe 
 he muft be taken ia what fol- 
 lows-. 
 
 be
 
 Chap. 6. ofJJnherJal Geography. 79 
 
 be in the Stars themfelves, but the Pythagoreans 
 in the Earth -, the Stars in the mean time refling : 
 neither of which need be determined in Geography 
 or common Afironoiwj. 
 
 A C C O R D I N G to the Ptolemalcs the Situa- 
 tion of the Earth, in refpe6t of the Planets and 
 fixed Stars, is this -, The Earth in the Center^ then 
 the Moon, Mercury, Venus, 'The Sun, Mars, Ju- 
 piter, Saturn, and the Fixed Stars. 
 
 ACCORDING to the Copernicans -, The, 
 Sun is placed in the Center of the Syftem, as the 
 Heart and Focus of the World ; and next him is 
 the Orbit of Mercury, then that of Venus, the 
 Earth, with the Moon, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and 
 the Fixed Stars. 
 
 I F it be required how far diftant we are from 
 each of the Planets, we muft know that the Di- 
 ftance is not always the fame, but continually chang- 
 ing ; and therefore Aftronomers reckon three De- 
 grees of Diilance, viz, the leajl, greateft, and 
 mean or middle Bijlance ♦, which lafl of the Earth, 
 from the refl of the Planets, is as follows, accor- 
 ding to moft Aftronomers {b). 
 
 The Earth is 
 
 ofit*sSemi- 
 
 The Moon 60 " 
 
 Mercury no 
 
 Venus • 701 
 
 X 11c ll,ctl Lll 15 T cT'L n I «JUL SOCHii- 
 
 diftant from^ ,^ \ '^^*^ {diameters. 
 
 Mars about 5000 
 
 Jupiter about- 1 1000 
 
 Saturn about- 18000 
 
 NEVERTHELESS the Diftanceofthe 
 Earth from Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and the fixed 
 
 (^} See Note {m) at the end of this Chapter^ 
 
 Star*
 
 8o 1'he Ahfohue Fart Sect. IL 
 
 Stars, is not fo perfeftly determined, for want of 
 Certainty in their Parallaxes. Alfoin the Coperni- 
 can Syftem the Diftance varieth, not only from 
 the Motion of the Planets ; but alfo from the Mo- 
 tion of the Earth itfelf. 
 
 THEReafon for either Opinion, {y'lz. of the 
 Ptolemaic and Copernican) about the Situation of 
 the Earth, are much the fime with thofe we dif* 
 cufled in the preceding Chapter about the Earth's 
 Motion. For this Difpute is of great Affinity 
 witii the former. Becaufe, if the Sun hath an an- 
 nual Motion, then the Earth and not the Sun pof- 
 fefles the middle Place: But if the Earth fo move, 
 the Sun and not the Earth will certainly be in the 
 Center. 
 
 THE following Arguments favour the Coper- 
 nican Hypotbe/is. 
 
 1. THE Sun is not only the glorious Fountain 
 of Light, which, like a clear fhining Torch, illu- 
 minates the Earth, Moo??, Venus, and without 
 doubt, the reft of the Planets ; but is alfo the Focus 
 of Heat, and the Source of vital Spirits; whereby 
 the whole Univerfe is fubfifted and nourifhed: 
 and therefore very probably poflefleth the Center 
 about which they all revolve. 
 
 2. IT is more likely that the Earth, with the 
 reft of the Planets, fhould revolve about the Sun, 
 when they receive Light and Heat from him •, than 
 that the Sun fhould move about the Earth, when 
 he receives nothing from it. 
 
 3. T H E R E are many Caufes why the Sun 
 (hould poflefs the middle Place, and the reft of 
 the Planets revolve round him, Cefpecially if v/e 
 embrace the Hypothefis of Kepler, concerning the 
 Motion of the Planets) the chief of which is, that 
 the Sun, b.i.ig a vaft Body, is moved about it*s 
 uixisy and by a ftrong [Ve^iorfl Force exciteth the 
 
 Earth
 
 C H A p. 6. of XJniverfal Geography, 8 1 
 
 Earth and the reft of the Planets to a circular Mo- 
 tion {c). 
 
 4. THIS Rotation of the Sun about it's Axis 
 is proved from the Obfervanons of the Spots upon 
 it's Surface by Galileo {d)^ Scheiner. Sec. and we 
 may reafonably prefume, it is owing to this com- 
 mon Caufe that the reft of the Planets revolve a- 
 bout theirs j but we cannot perceive a likelihood of 
 any Motion in this Luminary (<?}. 
 
 5. If 
 
 (c) The fagacious Kep/er 
 was the Founder of" the Ae^-- 
 tonian Philofophy: it was he 
 that firft found out the true 
 Syllem of the World, and the 
 Laws which the celefcial Bodies 
 obferve in their Motions ; it was 
 he that determined the true 
 Path of the Earth, and the 
 reft of the Planets about the 
 Sun, and difcovered the har- 
 monic Proportions and Concin- 
 nities of their Dillances and 
 Motions : and tho' he did not 
 demonftrate (and flxew a Reafon 
 for the Neceflity of) fuch Laws 
 and Proportions ; yet he gave a 
 Hint, and bid a Foundation 
 for that Prince of Geometers 
 Sir ISAAC NEWTON, to 
 demonftrate an abiblute Necef- 
 fity of thefe Laws ; and that 
 without a total Subverlion of 
 the Laws of Nature, no other 
 Rule could take Place in the 
 Revolutions of the heavenly 
 Bodies. 
 
 [d) He ivas the firjl that 
 applied a Telefcope to the Hea- 
 'vens, and by if s means difco- 
 <vered a great many neiv fur- 
 prizing Phenomena ; as the 
 Moons or Satellites of Jupiter, 
 and their Motions j the various 
 
 VOL. L 
 
 Phafes of Saturn ; the Increafe 
 and Decreafe of the Light of 
 Venus ; the mountainous and 
 uncertain Surface of the Moon ; 
 the Spots of the Sun ; atid the 
 Revolution of the Sun about 
 it^s o'vcti Axis : all <vjhich ivere 
 fyjl difco^jered and obferved by 
 this great Philofopher. Keill's 
 Aftron. Left. Pref. pag. 1 1 . 
 
 {e) From the later Obfer- 
 vations of Aftronomers it is 
 manifeft to our Sight, that al- 
 fo every Heavenly Body we 
 have any good Views of, is 
 turned round fome principal 
 Point, and alfo it's own Axis, 
 viz. hath the like Annual 
 Revolutions, and Diurnal Amo- 
 tions as thofe are which we 
 afcribe to the Earth ; yea even 
 the more mafty Globes of Sa- 
 turn and Jupiter, which feem 
 not in their own Nature more 
 fitted for fuch Rotations, 
 Wherefore we may certainly 
 conclude, that it is as pofTible, 
 and as probable, that this our 
 lefler Globe, fhould perform 
 it's Revolutions according to the 
 fame Law, which is obferved 
 in the reft of the Planets, 
 whereby the beautiful Order 
 and Harmony of Motions is 
 
 G every
 
 82 The Abfolute Part Sect. II. 
 
 5. IF we fuppofe the Earth placed betwixt 
 Mars and Venus, and alfo place the Sun in the Cen- 
 ter of the Syftem •, the Motion of each of the Pla- 
 nets will be exacftly in Proportion to their feveral 
 Diftances from that Center : But this will not hold 
 in the Ptolemaic Plypothefis, as is manifeft by 
 comparing the Motion of the Sun, Venus, Mercury, 
 &c. (/). 
 
 6. T H E Celeflial Phccno'/nena, mentioned in the 
 former Chapter, to prove the annual Motion of the 
 Earth, do likewife as effedually prove that this is 
 the right Place in which it ought to be moved, 
 viz. The Retrograde Motion, and feeming Immo- 
 bility of the Planets , the admirable apparent Mo- 
 tion [and Phafes] of Venus and Mercury, &c. (g). 
 For fince the annual Motion of the Earth is prefup- 
 pofed in this Place, or in fome other very near it ; 
 
 etery where preferred thro' the 
 Frame of Nature. 
 
 (fj Sir J/iiac Ke-ixtoti'i, De- 
 monllration, That the Squares 
 of the Planets Resolutions 
 are as the Cubes of their Di- 
 Jiances, every where takes place, 
 if the Sun be fuppofed the 
 Center of the Phmets about 
 him ; but does not hold at all 
 5n Relation to the Earth ; for 
 if the Moon revolve round the 
 Earth in (272 Days) a Periodi- 
 cal Month, as it certainly does, 
 the Sun, as being at a greater 
 Diftance, will take no lefs than 
 54700 Years, according to the 
 aforefaid Law, to make his Re- 
 volution about the Earth. But 
 dince this Law, is found to be 
 obferved not only in the pri- 
 mary Planets about the Sun, 
 but alfo in the Secondaries a- 
 bout Jupiter, Saturn, and the 
 Earth, it is an incouteftable Ar- 
 
 gument that the Sun is as much 
 the Center of the Earth and 
 Planets about him, as the Earth 
 is of the Moon. 
 
 {g) Thefe Obfervations, 
 which utterly overthrow the 
 Ptolemaic Hypothefis, are ow- 
 ing to later Allronomers. For 
 they, by their Glafles, have 
 found out that the fpherical Fi- 
 gure of Fenus and Mercury^ 
 feen from the Earth, will be 
 altered, and have the fame va- 
 riety of Phafcb as the Moon 
 hath, six. will appear opake, 
 horned, bifefted, gibbous, and 
 full, at proper Diltances from 
 the Sun, as explained upon 
 the Copernican Hypothefis ; 
 which certainly eftablifhes and 
 confirms that Order and Situa- 
 tion, namely that Venus and 
 Mercury revolve about the Sun 
 in OrlDits that are included 
 witiun the Earth's Orbit. 
 
 this
 
 Chap. 6. of Vnherfal Geography. 83 
 
 this Argument, in my Opinion, is the befl: to de- 
 fend it by ; fmce this fituation of the Earth cannot 
 be proved immediately from it's diurnal Motion ; 
 Becaufe it might poffels the Center of the Univerfe, 
 and have a diurnal Motion, tho' it wanted the an- 
 nual j as Origanus iuppofcd. 
 
 7. B Y this Hypoibejis likewife, the Variation of 
 the Diftance, of the Planets from the Earth is ac- 
 counted for. 
 
 THE Ptoletnaics^ on the other Hand, oppofe 
 the Pythagorean Opinion, and endeavour to prove, 
 that the 'True Place of the Earth is in the Center of 
 the World, by the following Arguments, i. That 
 heavy Bodies are all naturally carried towards the 
 Center ; but that the Earth is more ponderous 
 than the reft, therefore it ought to refide in the 
 Center (h). 2. Heavy Bodies would recede from 
 the Earth towards the Center of the World, if 
 the Earth itfelf was not in the Center. 3. The 
 Center is the bafcft Place, and the Earth the igno- 
 bleft Part of the Creation ; therefore it ought to be 
 placed in the Center. 4. If the Earth was placed 
 out of the Center of the World, and was not the 
 Center of the Stars and Planets Motion, then would 
 the Stars and Conftellations at fome Seafons of the 
 Year appear greater than at others Cij. 5. The 
 Medium of the Heavens could not always be percep- 
 tible, nor would Taurus rife when Scorpio fets. 6, 
 Neither would there be Equinoxes. 7. Nor would 
 the Moon fet, nor be eclipfed when the Sun was 
 rifing. 8. Neither could an equal Number of 
 
 {h) This Aflertion is falfe : far greater in the middle of 
 
 See the Note at the End of this their Regreffes than in the 
 
 Chapter. middle of their ProgrefTes, be- 
 
 (/) Tho' this does not hold caufe the Earth, in their Re- 
 in the fixed Stars, becaufe of greffes, comes nearer thefe 
 their immenfe Diftance ; yet Planets an entire Diameter of 
 all the fuperior Planets feem the Qrbu Mugaus. 
 
 G 2 Miles
 
 84 T^-^ Ahfohite Part Sect. II. 
 
 Miles on the Earth anfwer to each Degree in the 
 Heavens. 
 
 THE Copernicans eafily refute thefe Arguments 
 of the Arijlotelians. For the firlt and fecond is re- 
 jected, bccaufc the Motion ot heavy Bodies is not 
 towards tiie Center of the Univerle, but towards 
 the Earth, a homogeneous Body ; as is proved 
 from the Farts of the Sun and Moon^ and of the 
 Loadftone. In the third both tlie Afilimptions are 
 fiilfe ; lor the Centre is an Elonourable Place ; and 
 the Earth is no ways difhonourable. The reft of 
 the Arguments are eafily difproved by a Defcrip- 
 tion of the Syftem •, it being firft prefuppofed 
 that tho' the Earth's Diftance from the Sun be 
 very great, yet if compared with the Diftance of 
 the fixed Stars, it is fo Imall, that it hath no Pro- 
 portion to it ; which feems to fome a great Pojlula- 
 tum in the Copernican Ajirunom-j [k) 
 
 {k) To find this Variation 
 of the Diftance of the fixed 
 Stars (arifing from the annual 
 Motion of the Earth, and oi- 
 led their annual Parallax) hath 
 been often attempted by the 
 Copernican Aftronomers ; be 
 caufe that the annual Motion 
 of the Earth would thereby be 
 not only made probable, but 
 certainly denionilrated. This, 
 I fay, was attempted without 
 Succefs, 'till Dr Hook and 
 Mr Flamftead, by new inven- 
 ted accurate Inftruments, feem- 
 ed to have found out this an- 
 nual Pajallax to be at lea ft as 
 much again as the double of 
 the Sun's diurnal Parallax, 'viz. 
 47 Seconds. But Air Moly- 
 . nemix and Ivlx BraMty, by 
 -their late accurate Obfervati- 
 ons, could not, with all their 
 
 Skill, determine any fenfible 
 Parallax at all (^only they dif- 
 covered a feeming new Motion 
 of the fixed Stars, which (^al- 
 lowing the progreffive Motion 
 of Light^ does in fome mea- 
 fure demonftrate the annual 
 motion of the Earthy. There 
 appearing therefore, after all, 
 no fenfible Parallax in the fix- 
 ed Stars, the Anti-Copemicans 
 have ftill room, on that Ac- 
 count, to objed againft the mo- 
 tion of the Earth. And the 
 Copernicans are ftill obliged to 
 hold, that the Orbis Magnus, 
 is but a Point in Compari- 
 fon of the Diltance of the near- 
 eft fixed Stars ; which is cer- 
 tainly (71s our Author obferveth^ 
 a great Blot in the Copernican 
 Aftronomy, left to be wiped 
 out by future Ages. 
 
 IT
 
 Chap. 6. of Unherfa I Geography. 85 
 
 I T belongs to this Place to explain this Theorem; 
 that the Diltances of the fixed Stars, and fuperior 
 Planets, Mars^ Jupiter^ and Saturn^ are io great 
 from the Earth that it's Semidiameter hath no 
 fenfible Proportion thereto •, tho' it is not fo in 
 the Diftance of the Moon^ Mercury, and Venus : 
 And if there is any Proportion between the Earth's 
 Semidiameter, and the Sun's Diftance, it is fo very 
 fmall that we are ftill not able fenfibly to difcover 
 
 it(/). _ ...,..;,. : ■ 
 
 THIS Theorem is thus demonflrated. i . The 
 fixed Stars, and fuperior Planets appear to rife 
 the very fame Moment in our fenfible Horizon, 
 that they are found by Calculation to do, if we 
 were at the Center of the Earth ; therefore our 
 Diftances from the Center (or the Earth's Semidia* 
 meterj hath no Proportion to the Diftance of the 
 fixed Stars. 2, If we take the Meridian (or other) 
 Altitude of a fuperior Planet, or any of the fixed 
 Stars, with an Inftrument, we find it the fame as 
 if we had obferved it at the Center of the Earth : 
 Therefore the Semidiameter of the Earth is nothing 
 in refpedl of their Diftance. 3. If there were any 
 fuch Proportion, the Diftance of two fixed Stars 
 would appear lefs near the Horizon than at the 
 Meridian, where they are nearer the Earth by al- 
 moft it's Semidiameter. 
 
 THIS alfo is true in the Sun, whofe apparent 
 Diameter is not perceived greater in the Meridian 
 than in the Horizon. 
 
 (I) The quantity of the Pa- Diftances of the Planets from 
 
 rallax of Mars is determined, the Sun, we have, in efFeft, ac- 
 
 by M. CaJJinPs zxvd, FlamJieacT ^ quired the Parallax of the Sun 
 
 ObfervationSjto have been fcarce itfelf, and of the reft of the Pla- 
 
 30 Sec. when in Oppofition to nets, and alfo their Diameters 
 
 the Sun, and alfo in his Peri- and Distances from the Sun 
 
 helion ; from whence having and the Earth; of which fee the 
 
 tiie true ProDortjons of the Note at the End of this Chapter, 
 
 G 3 BUT
 
 26 
 
 The Abfohife Tart 
 
 E CT. 
 
 II. 
 
 BUT the apparent Diameter of the Moon is 
 found to be fomewhat enlarged in the Meridian ; 
 becaufe fhe is there nearer us, than when fhe is 
 in the Horizon, almoft a whole Semidiameter of the 
 
 Earth (w). 
 
 CHAP 
 
 (w) Here follow the Z)/- 
 fiances. Periods, Diameters, 
 Gravities, and ^lantities of 
 Matter, in thofe of the Cele- 
 ftial Bodies which have afford- 
 
 ed Means for determining the 
 fame, as Mr Whijlon has cal- 
 culated them from the lateft 
 Obfervations, by Sir Ifaac Nek- 
 tons Rules. 
 
 Mercury 
 
 Venus 
 
 The Earth 
 
 Mars 
 
 Jupiter 
 
 Saturn 
 
 Mercury 
 
 Venus 
 
 The Earth 
 
 Mars 
 
 Jupiter 
 
 Saturn 
 
 Mercury 
 Venus 
 The Earth 
 Mars 
 Jupiter 
 Saturn 
 The Sun 
 TJie Moon 
 
 The AToon 
 The Earth 
 The Sun 
 Jupiter 
 Saturn 
 
 1. Dijlances. 
 
 \s diftant from the Sun, Englijh 
 Miles, each 5280 Feet 
 
 2. Periods, 
 
 revolves about the Sun 
 in the Space of 
 
 32.000.000 
 
 59 000.000 
 
 81 .000.000 
 
 .123.000.000 
 
 '424.000.000 
 
 777.000.000 
 
 H. 
 
 M. 
 
 • 23- 
 
 16. 
 
 • '7- 
 
 49. 
 
 . 6. 
 
 9- 
 
 . 23. 
 
 27. 
 
 . 12. 
 
 20. 
 
 • 7- 
 
 36. 
 
 3. Diameters, 
 
 contams m 
 
 Diameter, 
 
 Miles. 
 
 Englijh 
 
 4. Benfities, 
 
 contains in Denfity, Parts, 
 
 5. Gravities.
 
 C H A p. 7- 9f 'Univerfal Geography, Sy 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Siibjlance and Conjiitutton of the Earth, 
 
 IN the preceding Chapters we have confidered 
 four general Properties of the Earth, without 
 Regard to it's Subftance or Conftitution : It will 
 therefore be here proper to confider what kind ot 
 Body the Earth is, that we may not be ignorant 
 how it's Parts cleave or are cemented together : 
 which tho' it feem more to belong to Phyftcs •, ne~ 
 verthelejs becaufe it renders the Knowledge of the 
 Earth more perfedb, we fhall here briefly difcufs 
 it ; leaving the accurate Theory thereof to Natural 
 Philofophers. 
 
 5. Gravities, 
 
 The Moon "^ (* o/a 
 
 rr.1. o C contains in Gravity, or quan- J ^ 
 
 The Sun > ,• c-kx .. -o^ >. <22q6oo 
 
 , ., f tity of Matter, Parts, ^ ^ „ 
 
 Jupiter I ^ y 208.72 
 
 Saturn J ^ 97-328 
 
 SSun is 24. Parts 
 Earth is i 
 ui>.c v/ii liiv ouiiatv*, Jupiter is i .99 
 
 of the ySaturn is i.y 
 
 ^Moonis o-S^S 
 
 C Sun is-- 25 Days 
 
 nM. r«» t ^^. x^Earth is i Day 
 
 7. The Time of the^j^^^^ j^ _ _ _ ^^^ 
 
 Rotation about its< ^ .^^^ .^ ^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 Axis, of the . - - - 'fulrs is - - 24iHou« 
 
 ^ Venus is --------- 23 Hours 
 
 G 4 F RO^
 
 88 ^he Ahfilute Fart Sect. 1L 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 ^o /hew of what fimpk or fimtlar Bodies the Earth 
 ma^ confijl, or be compounded. 
 
 TH E R E are feveral Opinions of Philofophers 
 concerning this matter. The Peripatetics reckon 
 four Elements in the Earth and the whole Sublu- 
 nary World, fufficiently known to every one, viz. 
 Fire, Jir, tVater, and Earth. Many of the An- 
 tients, as Dnnocritus, Leucippus, ^c. were of Opi- 
 nion, that tne whole World confided of very 
 fmali Iblid Particles, which only differed in Mag- 
 nitude ana Shape. Which Opinion is followed 
 by feveral of the Moderns ; and fome time fince, 
 des Cartes endeavoured to account for all the Phoe- 
 nomena of Nature upon this Hypothefis. 
 
 THE Chymifts imagine that there are three 
 Pmcz/)/^i of Nature, viz. SaJj., Sulphur^ sind Mer- 
 cury, to which Ibme reafonably add Caput Mortu- 
 urn. But there feems to me upon a thorough 
 Confideration of the Matter (to drop all ambiguous 
 terms and quibbles), to be five fiftiple Bodies which 
 are the firft Elements or Principles of all things, 
 viz. Water^ Oil or Sulphur, Salt, Earth, and a 
 fixed Spirit ; which fome call an Acid, and is per- 
 haps like the Mercury of the Chymifts {a). For 
 
 it 
 
 (a) The illuflrious Sir Ifaac * prop.ordoji to Space, as nioft 
 
 Neicton thus explains the true * conduced to the End for 
 
 Principles ofNature. "Itfeems • which he formed them ; and 
 
 * j^TohRhle to me fjliys /je J that * that thefe primitive Particles 
 
 * God in the Beginning form- ' being folid, are incompara- 
 
 * ed Matter in folid, niafly, ' bly harder than any porciis 
 
 * hard/ impenetrable, move- ' Bodies compounded of them: 
 
 * able Particle-*, of fuch Sizes * even fo very hard as hcver 
 
 * and Figuies, and with fuch * to wear or break in pieces: 
 f other properties;, and in fuch * no ordinary Power being able
 
 Chap. 7« of Unroerfal Geography. 8g 
 
 it is plain that all Bodies, and Parts of the Earth, 
 may be refolved into thefe five elementary Sub- 
 ftances. Nevcrthelefs I do not fuppofe them to 
 differ fo much in their particular Effences, as in 
 the Variety of their feveral Shapes and Magni- 
 tudes. 
 
 OF thefe Bodies, mixed after different manners, 
 is the whole Earth compofed -, from which pro- 
 ceeds fuch a furprifmg Variety in the Nature of 
 Bodies \ tho' they are apparently fimilar (h). But 
 fmce the more accurate Explication of thefe things 
 belongs to Phyfics, we fliall fay no more to them 
 here ; but handle them at large in another Place. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 The Earth is divided into dry and moift Parts, or in- 
 to Land and Water ; to which fome add the At- 
 tnofphere. 
 
 THIS is the common Divifion of Geography. 
 But then Water is taken, in a large Senfe, for 
 all forts of Liquids and Fluids ; and Land for the 
 ■whole dry and confiltent Parts of the Globe : whilfl: 
 
 to divide what God himfelf 
 made one in the firll Crea- 
 tion. While the Particles 
 continue entire, they may 
 compofe Bodies of one and 
 the fame Nature and Texture 
 in all Ages : But fhould they 
 wear away, or break in pie- 
 ces, the Nature of Things 
 depending on them would be 
 changed. Water and Earth 
 compofed of old worn Parti- 
 cles, and Fragments of Parti- 
 cles, would not be of the fame 
 Nature and Texture now, 
 .with Wat,er an4 Eerth cqm- 
 pofe4 of entire Particles in 
 
 ' the Beginning. And there- 
 
 * fore, that Nature may be 
 ' lailing, the Changes of Cor- 
 
 * poreal things are to be placed 
 ' only in the various Separa- 
 ' tions, and new AlTociations 
 ' and Motions of thefe perma- 
 ' nent Particles; compound Bo- 
 
 * dies being apt to break, not 
 ' in the midi> of folid Particles, 
 ' but where thofe Particles are 
 ' laid together, and only touch 
 ' in a few Points.' Ne-ivtons 
 Optics, Pag. 375. 
 
 (b) See the Notes below on 
 Prop, ,6, ajld 7. of this Chap. 
 
 both
 
 90 ^je Abfohite Part Sect. II. 
 
 both comprehend various Bodies of Different Na- 
 tures. To the Earth belong, i. Sand, Gravel, 
 Clay, and Mineral Earth; alfo Chalk, Minium, 
 Oker, 'Terra Sigillata, Earth of 5^ ww, Bole-Arme- 
 riiac, and feveral other Kinds of Earth. 2. Stones 
 of various forts. 3. Metals-, as Gold, Silver, Cop- 
 per, Tin, Lead, Mercury or Quick- filver, &c, 
 4. Sulphur, Salt, Nitre, Allum, Bitumen, Vi- 
 triol, Antimony, &c. 5. Herbs, Animals, &c. 
 
 TO the Water belong, i. the Ocean and Seas. 
 2. Rivers aJid frelli Waters. 3. Lakes and Marlhes. 
 4. Mineral Waters, as Hot Baths, Spaw IVaters^ ^c, 
 
 THE Atmofphere is a fubtile Body which fur- 
 rounds the whole Globe of the Earth, and in- 
 cludes the Air, Clouds, and Rain, (^c. So that 
 the Earth is belt divided into thefe three Parts. 
 
 PROPOSITION IIL 
 
 To explain how the Earth and Water cleave one to a- 
 nother -, and conjlitute the Terraqueous Globe. 
 
 THE Earth, that is the dry Part of the Globe, 
 is not terminated by an even and fmooth Surface ; 
 but is here and there hollowed into Cavities, and 
 in other Places elevated into Protuberances. In the 
 Cavities found all over the Earth is contained the 
 Ocean or Sea ; fo that this Part of the fuperficies 
 of the Earth is covered with Water, and the other 
 Part is railed and appeareth above the Waters. 
 Thefe Cavities are not deprefied into an equal hol- 
 lownefs, but are in fome Places rugged and rocky ; 
 and in others funk down into Gulphs and Whirl- 
 Pools. Alfo thofe Places of the Earth which are 
 raifcd above the Waters, have in the middle of 
 them, as it were, certain Navels or Eminences ; 
 and fome Parts are either raifed or deprefied more 
 than others. Hence the Water furrounding the 
 
 whole
 
 Chap. 7. of Lhtiverfal Geography. 91 
 
 whole Globe is hindred from covering the higher 
 Parts which appear above the Surface ot the Ocean ; 
 and are called IJlands : Whereof Ibme are great and 
 others are fmall. 
 
 BESIDES that continued Cavity or Channel in 
 the Surfice of the Earth, there are alfb within it's 
 Bowels innumerable Openings, Receffes, Fifilires, 
 Chafms, Mazes, Swallows, Water Paflages, and 
 vaft Receptacles *, fome ot which are filled with 
 fait Water, viz. fuch as are joined by fubterra- 
 neous Paflages to the Main Ocean •, others with 
 frefh Water, Rivers and Brooks •, in fome alfo 
 are fulphureous Vapours, and fmoaking Subftan- 
 ces. So that Seneca feems to be in the right when 
 he fays, 'That he trujls too much to his Sights who does 
 not believe there is a large ^mntity of Sea in the 
 hidden Recejfes of the Earth. Nor do I perceive 
 why there fnould not be much Sea Water receiv- 
 ed by thefe fubterraneous Swallows -, and formed 
 into Bays by Banks or Bounds. And from the fol- 
 lowing Oblervations we cannot doubt, that there 
 are a great many Cavities in the Bowels of the Earth. 
 For feveral fubterraneous Rivers are found in Places 
 where the Earth is dug to a confiderable Depth ; 
 as is common in Mines. 2. The Depth of the Sea 
 is in fome Places unfathomable. 3. There are in 
 feveral Places, Caverns difcovered near the Sur- 
 face of the Earth. Thus in the Weft part of the 
 Ifland of Hifpanioh-» there is a Mountain of a vaft 
 Height all hollowed within, into feveral Dens and 
 Openings, in which Rivers rufti precipitantly with 
 fuch a violent Torrent and Noife of Waters, that 
 they may be heard at five Miles diftance. 4. Se- 
 veral Whirl- Pools are found in the Sea, and called 
 in the Dutch Language Maelftroom. 5. Earth- 
 quakes alfo fhew that there are fuch fubterraneous 
 Caverns. 6. Several Rivers hide themfelves under 
 the Earth, 2,% ih^ Niger, Tigris^ C^c. 7. Brackifh 
 
 Fountains
 
 92 ^he Ahfolute Tart Sect. II. 
 
 Fountains are obferved in fevcral Places, moft of 
 which certainly flow from the Sea. 8. In many 
 Places the Ground trembles wiien People walk up- 
 on it, as at the Abby of S. Omer in Flanders ; and 
 in the Province ol Brabant upon Peel Marijh. 
 
 COROLLARY. 
 
 Hence it is evident, that the Opinion of thofe 
 old Philofophers, who maintained that the Earth 
 at flrft floated upon the Waters, is falfe ; for by 
 this Means there would be no Channels in the Sea, 
 but it would be every where of an immenfe Depth. 
 Some indeed of the Antients Cefpecially Democritus) 
 are faid to have been of the following Opinion, 
 ^72;. the Waters were formerly mixed with the 
 Earth ; and that the whole Mafs being perfc6lly 
 fpherical, was foftandofan indifferent Conflftence 
 betwixt wet and dry : But afterwards when the 
 Particles of Water were gathered into one Body, 
 according to the natural Property obferved in 
 AVater, the earthly Particles, being feparated from 
 the watery, came together and were curdled into 
 Earth and wrought into Chanels by the Water in 
 fcveral Places. The fime Hypothefis is embra- 
 ced by many modern Chriflian Philofophers, who 
 think thefe Words of Mofes (or rather of G D 
 delivered to us by Mofes) Let the Waters he gather- 
 ed together into one Place ^ and let the dry Land appear, 
 ought to be thus undcrfl:ood. But the Fathers of 
 the Primitive Church thought otherwife about this ; 
 for they judged that the Waters were feparated 
 from the earthy Particles [before the Creation'] and 
 covered the Face of the whole Earth ; and fo oc- 
 cupied their natural Place •, and then miraculoufly 
 receded, and uncovered the Earth by the Power 
 of thefe Words of Jehovah-, and that to this day 
 they are hindred and xeftraiDed, by the efpecial 
 
 l^rovidence
 
 Chap. 7* of Utiiverfal Geography. 93 
 
 Providence of God, from flowing back and cover- 
 ing the Face of the whole Earth as before ; fo that 
 the prefent Confticution of the Earth and Sea is by 
 them accounted a perted: Miracle. Buc that there 
 is no great Occafion to think it fo much a Miracle 
 we ihall prove in Chap, xiii, where we fhall fliew, 
 that the Inundation ol the Waters, or Ocean, up- 
 on the adjacent Land, is hindred by the Altitude 
 and Confiltence of the Earth, which if removed by 
 fome certain Caufcs, whereof there are many, the 
 Ocean will foon overflow the dry Land and cover 
 it: whence there is manifefl:ly, no need of a Mi- 
 racle in the matter. Neither does the beforemen- 
 tioned Opinion of the Antients want it's Defe6ts ; 
 for if the Earth and Water had been once mixed 
 into one Mafs -, why did not the earthly Particles 
 rather fubfide, and the Waters, being of lefs Gra- 
 vity, cover the whole Earth? This they are for- 
 ced to afcribe to a fortuitous Motion and Conjun- 
 (flion of the watery and earthy Particles. Thefe 
 things are faid, by the way, to gratify fome that 
 earneilly enquire into fuch matters ; tho' they do 
 not fo properly belong to Geography •, which hath 
 no Regard to the Opinions of the Antients, nor 
 need fly to Miracles in explaining the Properties 
 of the Earth (c) . 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The Superficies of the Earth is continued, hut not that 
 of the JVaters. 
 
 THE Superficies of that Part of the Earth 
 which is raifed above the Waters, is continued to 
 the Superficies of the Chanel of the Sea, and that 
 again to other elevated Parts of the Earth. Alfo 
 
 (c) See Dr Woodvjar^i PJfay towards a Natural Hifory of the 
 Earth, SiQ. 
 
 the
 
 94 1'be Ahjolute Part Sect. II. 
 
 the Ocean, Bays and Rivers have one continued 
 Superficies ; but aJl Waters have not , for there 
 are Ibme Lakes whofe Superficies are not joined 
 with that of the Ocean, as the Lake Farime^ and 
 the Cafpian Sea, ^c. 
 
 P RO P O S ITIO N V. 
 
 The Cov.fiitution of the Earthy far ivithin the Sur- 
 face (which is our Habitation) towards the Center^ 
 is uncertain, 
 
 SOME think that Water taketh up the loweft 
 Place about the Center -, but it is more likely that 
 dry Earth fhould occupy that Place (d). Gilbert 
 
 was 
 
 [d) The learned and faga- 
 cious Dr Halley, to account 
 for the Changes of the Needle's 
 Variation, hath fliewed a Pof- 
 fibility that the exterior Parts 
 of the terraqueous Globe are 
 formed inwardly like the con- 
 cave Surface of a petrified Shell i 
 and the internal as a Nucleus, 
 or inner Globe, included with- 
 in ours, with a fluid medium 
 between, which moves along 
 with it, as having the fame 
 common Center, without fenfi- 
 blyapproaching one Sideor ano- 
 ther, like the Globe of Saturn 
 environed with his Ring. * And 
 ' tho' (fays he) thefe included 
 
 * Globes can be of very little 
 ' Service to the Inhabitants 
 
 * of this outward World, nor 
 
 * can the Sun be of Service to 
 
 * them ; yet fince we fee all 
 
 * Parts of the Creation abound 
 
 * with animate Beings, why 
 
 * Ihould we think it Itrange 
 
 ' that the prodigious mafs of 
 ' matter, whereof this Globe 
 ' doth confilt, fhould be capable 
 ' of fome other Improvements, 
 than barely to ferve to fup- 
 port it's Surface ? Why may 
 we not rather fuppofe, that 
 the exceeding fmall quantity 
 of matter in refpeft of the 
 fluid ^ther, is fo difpofed 
 by the Almighty Wifdom, as 
 to yield as great a Surface 
 for the Ufe of living Crea- 
 tures, as can confill with the 
 Conveniency and Security of 
 the whole. 
 
 ' And tho' without Light 
 there can be no living, yet 
 there are many Ways of pro- 
 ducing Light which we are 
 wholly ignorant of: The me- 
 dium itfelf may be always lu- 
 minous after the manner of 
 our Jgnes Fatui : The con- 
 cave Arches may in feveral 
 Places ihine with fuch a Sub- 
 * lUnce
 
 Ch AP. 7* ^f Umverjai Geography, g^ 
 
 was of Opinion that the Body of the Earth with- 
 in is nothing but a very hard Loadftone ; and that 
 rhefe exterior Farts towards the Surface, which 
 are penetrated into by digging, and on v/hich 
 Herbs grow and we live, are but as it were the 
 Bark and Cruft of the Earth, and the Seat of 
 perpetual Generation and Corruption. Tlie Opi- 
 nion of Des Cartes is not much different from this ; 
 for he believed tliere were three Strata in the Bo- 
 dy of the Earth of divers Confillences. The firft 
 and innermoft poffeffing the Center, the fecond 
 of a denfe and opake Nature, confiding of the 
 minuted Particles i the third (being replete with 
 Men and Animals) he fuppofes to be compound- 
 ed of Particles not (ticking lb clofe together. 
 
 NEVERTHELESS, for want of Obfer- 
 vation, we cannot affirm any thing for Certainty 
 in this Matter ; and tho' it be true that in feverai 
 fubterraneous Places, there is a glowing Hear, 
 and that Smoke and fulphureous Fumes are ex- 
 haled from feverai hot Baths : and alfo tho* Tburn- 
 heufer affirms, that he found by Experience that 
 the nearer they digged to the Center of the Earth, 
 there was the lefs Water in Mines •, yet we are (till 
 in a Doubt, and cannot pofitively depend upon 
 his particular Obfervation. 
 
 * fiance as inverts the Surface ' been ; and a Notion not fo 
 ' of the Sun ; nor can we, with- ' much as ilarted in the World 
 
 * out a Boldnefs unbecoming a * before.' 
 
 ' Philofopher, adventure to af- Thils far Dr Hallcy. How 
 
 ' fert the Impoffibility of pe- he accounts for the Variation of 
 
 * culiar Luminaries below, of the Needle from this Hypothe- 
 
 * which we have no fort of fis j See the Notes upon Chap. 
 
 * Idea. 38. Prc/i. 4. of the Comparative 
 * Thus have I (hewn a Pof- Part, or Philof. Tra^ifaa. N'" 
 
 * fibilityofa much more ample 148. Pag. 208, and N'' lor. 
 
 * Creation than has hiUierto Pag. 564. 
 
 P R0~
 
 96 
 
 i:'be Ahfolutc Fart 
 
 Sect. It. 
 
 PRO PO S iriO N VI. 
 
 'The Confijlence or Coherence of the Particles of the 
 Earth is from Salt. 
 
 THE artificial Separation of the Particles of 
 Bodies demonftrate, that in the Compofition of the 
 whole there is a certain kind of Salt which is more 
 abundant in harder Bodies, as in Metals, Stones, 
 i^c. (a few oily Subilanccs only excepted) {e). 
 And ti;at all folid Bodies are concreted by Salt, 
 is manifeft from the artificial Petrefnolion of thofe 
 that are foft, to any Degree of Hardnefs by it. 
 
 (e) Tho' moft forts of Bo- 
 dies are replete with (aline and 
 vitriolic Particles, fuch as may 
 in fome means contribute to 
 their Coagulation and Confo- 
 lidation ; yet the primary and 
 naturally indiviiihle Corpukies, 
 of which the Particles of all 
 Bodies are compofed, are not 
 connected by fait or hooked 
 Atoms, as fome imagine ; nor 
 glewed together by Reit, which 
 is an occult Quality or nothing, 
 nor ftick together by confpiring 
 Motions, but rather cohere and 
 are united by mutual Attraction. 
 So that the fmalleji Particles 
 of matter j?iay cohere by the 
 jlrongejl Attraflions, and compofe 
 bigger Particles of 'v:eaker Vir- 
 tue ; and many of thefe may co- 
 here, and compofe bigger Parti- 
 cles nvhofe Virtue is fill ivea- 
 ker. See Nei.vtou^s Optics, pag. 
 370. 
 
 Hence Particles of Bodies 
 which touch one another in large 
 Superhcies's, by altrong mutual 
 
 Attraction of their Parts, com- 
 pofe a Body very hard; and if 
 thefe Particles are not fo ftrong- 
 ly attratled or entangled with 
 each other, the Body will be 
 brittle ; if they touch one ano- 
 ther in lefs Superficies, the 
 Body is not fo hard, but yet 
 may be more [olid; if they only 
 approach each other, without 
 Hipping one under another, the 
 Body is Elafic, and fprings to 
 it's former Figure ; if they flip 
 under each other the Body is 
 foft, and eafily yields to the 
 ftroke of the Hammer ; if they 
 fcarce touch one another the 
 Body \scruffibinig, orfuchwhofe 
 Parts may be ealdy feparated ; 
 if they are fmall, round, flip- 
 pery, and eafdy agitated hy 
 Heat, the Body is fluid; if 
 thefe Particles are of an unequal 
 Superficies, and hooked or en- 
 tangled one with another, then 
 is the Body flexile or pliant^ 
 &c. See Dr C larked Notes up- 
 on Rohault's Phyfla, 
 
 So
 
 G H A p. 7. of Unherfal Gcographf, 97 
 
 So that if Salt be feparated from Bodies, their 
 Particles will no longer be cemented ; but they 
 will become Powder, which cannot be brought 
 to a Coherence without the Admixture of faliiie 
 Particles, 
 
 PROPOSITION vit. 
 
 Various kinds of Bodies are fever al ways mined fO' 
 gether in the Globe of the Earth, 
 
 IN Mines there are found Particles of Gold, 
 Silver, Lead, i^c. not gathered into a Mafs and 
 feparate from others ; but fometimes mixed a- 
 mong themfelves, and fometimes with ufelefs 
 Earth, in fuch very fmall Particles that the bell 
 Judges in Metals cannot at firfl Sight difcover 
 what fort of Mineral is contained in fome Me" 
 talline Earths (/). Alfo in the Fields, Sand is 
 
 fometimes 
 
 (f) The indefatigable Dr 
 Woodward, in his EJfay towards 
 a Natural HiJIory of the Earth, 
 reafonably fuppofes all thefe 
 Commixtures of the Particles 
 of Bodies in the Strata of the 
 Earth, to proceed from thofe 
 Jlrange Alterations that were 
 every where made in the Ter- 
 reftrial Globe at the Deluge, 
 when the whole Globe was 
 diflblved, and the Particles of 
 Stone, Marble, and all other 
 folid Foffils diffevered, taken 
 up into the Water, and there 
 fuftained together with Sea 
 Shells, and other animal and 
 vegetable Bodies : thatat length 
 all thefe fubfided from the Wa- 
 ter, according to the Nature of 
 their Gra^vity ; the heavieft Bo- 
 dies firft^ then thofe that were 
 
 VOL. L 
 
 lighter; but all that had the 
 fame Degree of Gravity fettled 
 down at the fame time ; fo 
 that thofe Shells, or other Bo- 
 dies, that were of the fame fpe- 
 cific Gravity with Clay, Chalk, 
 Sand, l£c. funk down together 
 with them, and fo were in- 
 clofed in the Strata of Chalk", 
 Clay, Sand, or Stone, which 
 their Particles formed ; that at 
 the general Subfidence, Metals 
 and Minerals, as well thofe 
 which were amaffed into lumps, 
 as thofe which continued afun- 
 der, and in fingle Corpufcles, 
 funk down to the Bottom along 
 with Sand, Coal, A'larble, l^c. 
 and fo were lodged with the 
 Strata which the Sand, ^Vi 
 conftituted. That all the metal- 
 lic and mineral Matter which 
 
 H n
 
 98 "The AhjUute Part Sect. II. 
 
 fometlmes mixed v/ith Clay or Lime, and fome- 
 times with Salt, ^c. Not long fmce at vf;«/?^r^^w, 
 when the Eartii was digged up to the Depth of 
 two hundred thirty two Feet to m^ake a Well, 
 thefe kinds of Earth were gradually difcovered. 
 Firft feven Foot of Garden Mould, then nine 
 Foot of black combuftible Earth, which is called 
 Peat, (not like that they properly call Dutch Turf) 
 then nine Foot of foft Clay, then eight Foot of 
 Sand and four of common Earth, then ten Foot 
 of Clay, and again four of common Earth, next 
 that ten Foot of fuch Sand as the Foundations of 
 the Houfes in Amjlerdam are laid in, then two Foot 
 of Clay, next four Foot of white Gravel, then 
 five Foot of dry Earth, and one Foot of Mud, 
 again fourteen Foot of Sand, then three Foot of 
 iandy Clay or Mire, afterwards five Foot of Sand 
 mixed with Clay, and next four Foot of Sand 
 mixed with little Sea-Shells, then there was a 
 Slraium of Clay one hundred and two Foot deep, 
 and laftly thirty one Foot of Gravel, where the 
 Shaft was finiflied. 
 
 is now found in the FiiTures, ted Sirat.i, fome elevated and 
 
 or perpendicular Intervals of ihe ethers deprefTed, by which 
 
 Strata, was originally lodged in Means all the Inequalities of 
 
 fingle Particles among the Sand, the Globe, FifTures, Grotto's, 
 
 i^c. having been detached and Mountains, Vallie?, Iflands, 
 
 drawn thence by little and little the Chanel of the Sea, and all 
 
 by the Water, which continual- others, were formed, and that 
 
 ly pervades the Strata ; and thfi whole Terraqueous Globe 
 
 ihat Trees, which are found in (with all it's Materials) was, at 
 
 great Plenty in MoITes, Fens, the Time of the Deluge, put 
 
 orBogs, were depofited thereby nearly into tlie Condition that 
 
 the Deluge ; fo that the prelent we at this Day behold it. See 
 
 Earth was formed out of this lVoodward''s EJJay, or Phikfo- 
 
 promifcuous mixed Mafs of fopbical '{ran/aligns No 217. 
 
 Sand, Earth, Shells, and Me- p. 115. 
 
 Uls/ and of broken and difioca-
 
 C H A p. 7- of Univerfal Geography^ g^ 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. ' 
 
 1'he Cavities of the Earthy and the external and in^ 
 ternal Difpofttiofi, or Situation of u*s Parts^ are 
 not ■perpetually the fame, but different at different 
 Times. 
 
 THE Sea not only makes many Devaftations 
 and Changes in the Parts of the Earth, by fome 
 of it's Paliages being flopped, and others more 
 opened •, but alfo that fpirituous and fulphureous. 
 Subftance which here and there lies hid in the in- 
 terior Parts, when it begins to heat and evapo- 
 rate, impetuoufly fhakes the exterior Parts of the 
 Earth, raifing them up, as is ufual in Earthquakes. 
 And it is probable the like Eru6lations may of- 
 ten happen in the more interior Parts of the Earth ; 
 which for the moft part we have no Notion of. 
 
 W E fhall treat of the mutual Changes of Land 
 and Water in Chapter i8, hereafter. 
 
 The 1'erraqueoiis Glohe is divided into 
 
 Earth whofe J covered with Water, or raifed a- 
 Surface is \ bove the Waters ; and into fFater, 
 
 THE Superficies of that Part of the Earth 
 which appeareth above the Waters, is, by the In- 
 terflux of the Sea thus divided. 
 
 I. INTO large Continents, or great Iflands, 
 which we fuppofe to be four, 
 
 [ North by 
 the Hyperbo- 
 rean Frozen 
 and "Tartaric 
 Ocean, 
 H 2 r. The
 
 loo The Abjohite Part Sect. II. 
 
 Eaft by the 
 
 I . The Old r Europe -> and is Pacific and 
 
 World \v\{iz\\ ) yf/z^and >bouned <^ Indian Ocean. 
 
 containeth - |_ Africa ^ on ihe | South by the 
 
 Southern Oce- 
 an. 
 
 Weft by the 
 Atlantic, or 
 iVeJlern Oce- 
 ian. 
 
 f North by 
 
 Davis's 
 
 Streights. 
 
 Eaft by 
 
 theAtlan- 
 
 tic Ocean. 
 
 South 
 
 by the 
 
 Streights. 
 
 oi Magel' 
 
 Ian. 
 
 Weft by 
 thtPacific 
 Ocean. 
 
 3. THE ArBic Continent^ ovGroenland^is {\ir- 
 rounded on every Side with Seas and Streights. 
 
 4. T H E AnlarUic Continent, or l^erra Auftralii 
 Incognita. 
 
 2 . The New r North p .§ 
 TVorld which<^ and ^ | 
 containeth-- i^Sotitb j'^^ 
 
 is bound J 
 edonthe^ 
 
 II. INTO Peninfula^s, or CherfonefnJ/es, which 
 are Parts of thcfe Continents. 
 
 Of which fome f" Africa. 
 are of a round Fi- [ [North and South America] 
 gure,whofeLon- J Peloponnefus, or the Morea in 
 gitude and Lati- ] Greece, TauricaCherfbnefus, or 
 tude are almoft I Cri?n Tartary. 
 equal, as — -^ [ Camha^^a or Guzaratd 
 
 Others
 
 Others ob- 
 long of which 
 
 ny, as 
 
 Chap. 7. of Unherfal Geography. 101 
 " Cherfonefa d'or, or Malacca in Tfidia, 
 Cimhrka^ or Jutland^ contiguous to 
 
 Holjrein. 
 
 ""T''^^ J Corea contiguous to T^r/,3ry. 
 
 there are ma-^ .^ ^ ,.r • °i',^,^„ a.^ ri r r 
 ^ Cabfonna^ J. ucatan^ the Lberfonefus 
 
 of Roffiania. 
 
 ^ Ionia [as Smyrna'] Cnidus and Mindus: 
 
 '" //^/)? , Greece, and proper^(:i&^/d;. 
 
 Spain, Afm minor, and Arabia. 
 
 JSJorwa'j, with Sweden^ d.ndLaji- 
 land. J 
 
 Patagon near the Streights of 
 Magellan and iV(?w Guinea. 
 
 Indojlan, Cochinchina, New Bri- 
 tain, Monopatapa, Sec. 
 
 Others which 
 are almoft lilce 
 Peninfula's, which 
 are -_ 
 
 III. INTO Illands of which there are three 
 Clafles, viz. 
 
 [ Britain 
 i.[Ele- I *- Japan 
 ven] very <^ Iceland 
 large ones I James Ifland] 
 I Sumatra 
 
 L 
 
 2.\Eleven']\ r 1 j 
 I- -jji ) Ireland 
 
 or a middle <rrr • 7 
 e- }HiJ panic la 
 
 ( tub a 
 
 Luconia] 
 
 Madagafcar 
 
 Borneo 
 
 * Nova Zemhla 
 
 Newfoundland] 
 
 California. 
 
 Java 
 Celebes 
 Candia 
 Sardinia 
 
 Friejland 
 
 Ceylon 
 
 Mindanao 
 
 among the 
 
 {" Gilolo, Atnboina, 'Timor 
 Indian I (lands 
 3. {Nine']\ Corfica, Majorca, Cyprus, Negropont^ 
 iefler ones j in the Mediterranean 
 
 Zealand in Demnark, and "Jamaica ia 
 [ the Gulph of Mexico. 
 
 * See the Notes upon thefe Words in the ne;<:t Chapter.
 
 102 
 
 I'be Abjolute Tart 
 
 Sect. II. 
 
 Very many 
 imall ones, of! 
 ■which we rec-'S 
 kon 
 
 1. The moft remarkable Solitary 
 ones, are Rhodes^ Malt a ^ 
 Lcmnos^ Si Helena^ St Thomas^ 
 Madera^ &c. 
 
 2. The noted Clufters of Iflands 
 which lie near one another in 
 great Numbers are 
 
 The Canary Iflands 
 
 The Azores 
 
 Cape Verd Iflands 
 
 The AtiUlles 
 
 The Maldivia Iflands 
 
 The Comoro Iflands 
 
 The Molucca and 5^«- 
 
 dana Iflands 
 The Philippine Iflands 
 The Ladrons Iflands 
 Thofe in the jEgean Sea 
 The Britannic Iflands 
 The Iflands of Solo?non. 
 
 IV. JJibmui's or narrow Necks of Land. 
 
 That of" Suez, between Africa, and Afta. 
 That of Corinth, joining the Morea to Achaia, 
 That oi Panama, in A?nerica, longer than any of the 
 
 reft. 
 That between Jutland and Holjlein^ 
 J'hat joining Malacca to India, 
 
 f'l \ 
 
 SECT.
 
 C H AP. 8. of XJniverfal Geography, 103 
 
 SECT. III. 
 
 I?i ivhich the Confiitution of the Earthy or the 
 dry Fart of the 'Terraqueous Globe, is explai- 
 ned, in four Chapters. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the natural Divifion of the Earth into Parts hy the 
 circumfluent Ocean, 
 
 WH A T we Ihall exhibit in this Chapter, con- 
 cerning the Divifion of the Earth, and that 
 in Chap. xv. about the Diftribution of the Sea, will 
 be of great ufc to young Students, for underftand- 
 ing, and remembring the Bonds and Situation of 
 the feveral Countries on the Earth's Superficies : 
 wherefore thefe two Chapters ought to be read 
 throughout with great Attention, and compared 
 with Maps, or the artificial terreftrial Globe, We 
 faid before, in the preceding Chapter, that the 
 Terraqueous Globe, as to it's conftituent Parts, 
 may be bed divided into a Body of a firm Con- 
 fiftence as Earth, and a fluid matter as Water ; to 
 which may be added the Atmofphere as a circum- 
 ambient Fluid or Covering. 
 
 I N the firft Place, we fhall treat of the Earth, 
 or that Part of the Globe which hath Confi- 
 ftence. 
 
 H 4 P^O^.
 
 104 Tloe Abfolute Fart Sect. III. 
 
 PR0P0SI7I0N I. 
 
 Part of the Earth is covered ivith Water ^ and Part '■ 
 of it is raifed above the Superficies of the Water ^ 
 andfurrounded thereby. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition is manifeft from 
 Experience. Neverthelefs there are feme Places 
 which are now and then covered with Water, and 
 at other Times dry and confpicuous, as the Iflands 
 near Norway, Scotland, and other Countries, to 
 which may be added Sand-beds or Shelves, and Sea- 
 iliores ; but becaufc thefe are fo fmall in compa- 
 rifon of the reft, we fhall take no notice of them 
 at prefent. Nor fiiall we trouble our felves here 
 with difputing whether the greater Part of the 
 Superficies of the Globe be taken up by Land 
 or Water, but leave it to be difcuffed in Chap, 
 .xviii, and confider here only the apparent Parts of 
 the Earth which we call Iflands, 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 '^he Parts of the Earth, which are raifed above 
 the Waters, are not always joined together by one 
 continued Superficies, but often feparated one from 
 another, and formed into Iflands by the Interfiux of 
 the Sea. 
 
 THESE may be diftributed into five Clafles, 
 viz. Plats of Land, or Ifiands, that are great, and 
 Co«/:»(?«/j that are greateft ; fome fmall, and others 
 that are fmalleft ; and laftly fome of a middle 
 Size, 
 
 W E fhall treat of the Origin, and Caufc of thefe 
 Iflands ia the proper Place, Chap, xviii. 
 
 THO^
 
 C H A p. 8. of Unherfal Geography, lo r 
 
 T H O' all the feparate and apparent Parts of 
 the Earth ought to be called JJlands^ becaufe an 
 IQand is nothing but a Part of" the dry Land every- 
 where environed with Water •, yet, in the common 
 Way of fpeaking, this Word is feldom ufed to ex- 
 prefs thefe large Tradts of Land whofe Boundaries 
 by the main Ocean, (by realbn of their vaft Ex- 
 tent^ are not fo perceptible. Such as thofe are 
 frequently called the 'Terra frma, or great Conti- 
 nents, which peculiar name they ought to be di- 
 llinguiflied by on account of their Magnitude, in 
 refpect of the reft of the Iflands, which are very 
 fmall in comparifon of them. Therefore we fhall, 
 in what follows, call them the Terra fir ma ov great 
 Continents. But the word Continent is frequently 
 ufed to exprcfs feveral Parts of the Terra firma ls 
 well as the whole. And fometimes it is taken 
 ftridly for a Part of the Earth, on no fide conti- 
 guous to the Sea : Or in a large Senfe for a Country 
 bounded by the Sea on one fide, and on the other 
 joined to a large Tra(5l of the Terra firma. It is 
 alfo often taken in general for a Part of the Earth 
 joined to another, whether by a large or a narrow 
 Tra6t of Land. In thefe Senfes the Word Continent 
 differs from that in which it is frequently ufed to 
 exprefs large Iflands. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 Thefe large Tra^s of Land, Continents, or Terra fir- 
 ma, (which "jou will fie afe to call them) are accoun- 
 ted four in Number. 
 
 I. T HE old World. 2. The new World, or 
 
 America. 3. The Northern Continent, or Terra 
 Ar^lica. 4. The Southern Continent^ or Terra 
 Aufiralis, 
 
 i,t:he
 
 io6 ^be Ahfolute Tart Sect. III. 
 
 1. THE Old V/orld Cbeing the mod famous of 
 the four, which we inhabit, and which was only- 
 known to the AncientsJ is divided, by the Sea 
 into two Parts, which are only joined one to a- 
 nother by a fmall neck of Land, whereof one is 
 Africa ; while Europe and Afia jointly make the 
 other. lu is thus environed by the Ocean. 
 
 O N the North by the Ic^ or North Sea, the 
 White Sea, and the Tartaric Ocean. 
 
 O N the Eaft by the Great South Sea and Pa- 
 cific Ocean. 
 
 ON the South by the Indian Sea, t\\z Southern 
 and jEtkiopic Ocean. 
 
 O N the Weft by the Atlantic Sea. 
 
 THE aforefiid Divifion of this Continent is 
 made by tlie Mediterranean, and Arabian Gulph or 
 Red Sea. The Diftance cf thefe two Bays, or the 
 Breadth of the intervening Tract of Land being 
 about 40 Gtrman Miles; fo that Africa would 
 have been an entire Terra firma, and numbered 
 among the Coniinents, but for this fmall Iflhmus. 
 
 TEL E Old World is not far diftant from America 
 in the Eaft about the [^fuppofed] Streights of Anian 
 [or [/n>j,] if there be fuch ; but the \q2S^ [known'] 
 Diftance of Europe from America is between Nor- 
 way and Newfoundland. 
 
 THE Diftance between the Old World, and 
 the Arclic Continent is lliorteft about the [Icy Sea] ; 
 alfo the Old World is not far diftant from the South 
 Continent about New Guinea. 
 
 2 . THE New World, or America, thus encom- 
 pafted by the Ocean. 
 
 O N the North we are in Doubt whether there 
 be Sea or Land beyond the Streights of Davis. 
 
 O N the Eaft it is bounded by the Atlantic 
 Ocean. 
 
 O N the South by the Magellanic Streights. 
 
 ON
 
 Chap. 8. of Univerfal Geography. 107 
 
 O N the Weft by the Pacific Ocean. 
 
 THE New World is alfo nearly divided into 
 two Iflands at Panama and Nomhre de Dios, where 
 the Atlantic and Pacific Ocean are hindred from 
 meeting by a very fmall Ridge of Land. 
 
 AME RIC A'ls not far diftant from the Old 
 World about the Screights of Anian [or the Sea of 
 Japan] ; and not far again from the Ar6bic Continent 
 at Davii*s Streights, and feparated from the South 
 Continent only by the Streights [of la Maire] and 
 the Magellanic Sea. 
 
 THE Artlic and Antar5lic Continents are every 
 where environed with Sea, the former [as is fuppof- 
 ed] with the North Sea at the Streights of Davis, 
 \Uries or] Anian^ [and the Icy Sea] ; the later with the 
 South Sea, Pacific and Indian Ocean, and the Streighrs 
 [of la Maire]. 
 
 3. THE Ar5fic Continent is not far diftant from 
 the Old World [at the Icy Sea], nor from America at 
 Davii's Streights ; but it is feparated from the South 
 Continent by a vaft Interval. 
 
 4. T H E AntarBic Continent is not far removed 
 from the old World at the Peninfulaof A^j-ty Guinea, 
 and feparated from America by the Streights of M^- 
 gellan [and la Maire], 
 
 BUT we have not been able to find for certain 
 whether the Old iVorld, America, and the Northern 
 Continent, be each of them encompaffed with Sea, 
 and feparated one from another •, tho' it be very 
 probable that they are, by reafon of the feveral 
 Bays and Entrances of Streights that run in from 
 the Ocean to the Landward. Only the Southern 
 Continent hath been aftually failed round, and 
 therefore is certainly known to be environed on 
 all fides with Sea, and therefore feparated trom 
 the reft. But this has not yet been done by the 
 
 I other
 
 io8 ^he Abfolute Tart Sect. III. 
 
 other Parts ; for men have not failed about the 
 Old World much further than the Streights of Wai- 
 gats, tho' the whole Weftern, Southern, and Ori- 
 ental Shores have been vifited, and there is but a 
 fmall Part of the North \^Eajl'\ Coaft that remains 
 to be difcovered (a). America alfo hath been failed 
 
 round 
 
 [a] A!l the Attempts made 
 by the Europeans to difcovera 
 Nortb-Eajf-Pafaye to the Ori- 
 ental Countries have been hi- 
 therto unfucccfsful. The Rea- 
 son was formerly thought in a 
 great meafure owing to the 
 Difcoverers not fteering their 
 Courfe near enough the North 
 Pole ; being either mifled by an 
 Opinion, that that Part of the 
 Sea which lies betwixt Nova 
 Zembby and the Continent of 
 Canary, had been palTable ; or 
 that they might have coilted it 
 slong the North of Nova 7.emhla 
 2indTartary, till they had enter- 
 ed the Srreights oijejfi, which 
 could never be efledled by Rea- 
 I'on that moll of thefe northern 
 Coafts are frozen up many 
 Leagues from the Shore, efpe- 
 clally in the Winter, tho' in 
 the open Sea it is not fo, even 
 under the Pole itfelf; unlefs, 
 for Example, upon the Approach 
 of the Summer when the f roft 
 breaketh, and the Ice, which was 
 congealed near 40 or 50 Leagues 
 from the Shore, goes off from 
 the Land and floats up and 
 down in the Sea; whereby fe- 
 veral have been forced to quit 
 their Dcfign and Hand back for 
 their own Country. See Philof. 
 'I'ranj. No. 118. Pag. 41 7. Big 
 xviih this !aft notion our Coun- 
 ir^-'man Capt. John Wood, the 
 
 lateft Adventurer who attempt- 
 ed the NorthEaft PafTage, in 
 the year 1676, fleered direftly 
 NE from the North Cape of 
 Norway, in order to fall in 
 between Greenland and Nova 
 Tj'mbla : out he could find no 
 Sea or Lilet between thofe 
 Countries; on the contrary, he 
 oblerved the Ice to adhere im- 
 movably to the Coall oi Nova 
 Zembla, and that all the EngliJJ:> 
 and Dutch Pilots had been mif- 
 taken in their Conjeftures of 
 an open Sea thereabouts, for he 
 could pafs no further this Way 
 than to the 76 Degr. of Lati- 
 tude, on account of the Ice, 
 which mud have then taken up 
 fome Centuries to thaw. He 
 concludes therefore, that Green- 
 land and Nova Zembla muft be 
 the fame Continent, by Reafon 
 there was no Current found 
 there, but only a fmall Tide 
 which rifes about eight Foot, 
 and elribs back again. And if it 
 fhould be admitted, to the con- 
 trary, that the Continent o^Afia 
 zndJmerica^.rQ feparatedby the 
 Ocean, yet wc may now reft 
 fatisfied that the Difhculties to 
 be met with in a North-Eaft 
 PafTage are not be furmount- 
 ed, and pofEbly will never be 
 attempted again. Salr/icTi's Pre- 
 fent State of all Nations < Vo|. 
 6. Pag. 380. 
 
 [I forbear
 
 Chap. 8. of Univerjal Geography, 109 
 round except a Part of the Northern Shores, on 
 account of the Uncertainty of the Streights and 
 other Difficulties. This therefore is the Situation 
 of the four Continents. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 To enumerate the great IJlands difperfed over the Siir* 
 face of the Terraqueous Globe: viz. 
 
 i. BRIT A I N, comprehending England and 
 Scotland^ is fuppofed to be the greateft of thofe com- 
 monly called Iflands (thofe in the preceding Pro- 
 pofition excepted). It lies betwixt Europe and A- 
 merica, near France and Flanders. It is furrounded 
 by the Atlantic Ocean^ and it's Form is oblong. 
 
 2 . J AP A N, m Maps and Globes is reprefented 
 of a lefs Magnitude than it ought to be -, for they 
 that have been there affirm it to be larger, or at 
 lead no lefs, than Britain (b). It lies eaftward of 
 Afia not far from China. It is furrounded by the 
 Pacific Ocean, and is of a curve Figure. 
 
 3. LUCONI A, which is alfo called, from it's 
 Metropolis, Manilha, is the Principal of the /^Mf/j- 
 
 [I forbear CO enlarge upon an of JfJ/o, the Inhabitants of 
 
 Account given us lately, as ad- both Countries doubt; becaufe. 
 
 vices from Mi/fcoz'y, of an Ex- vaft and inacceffible Moun:ains 
 
 pedition entered upon, under interpofe, which hinder the 
 
 the Command of one Capt. 5^r- Communication. Neither doth 
 
 r/;?^, to find out this A^sr/f^-^^- it as yet clearly appear, whe- 
 
 Paffage, whofe Voyage is now ther this Land of Jeffo is a 
 
 faid to be Printing at Mo/cow ; Part of Tartary, or whether it 
 
 in which he affirms, that there is by an Arm of the Sea divid- 
 
 is a free and open Sea to about ed from it. The Chir.efe affirm 
 
 theNorth-Eaft Point of Ti^r/ijr);, that Tartary runs ^oo China 
 
 and believes it to be likevvife Leagues beyond their famous 
 
 open to the Sea oi China, or, as Wall ; fo that if we follow them 
 
 Tome Geographers call it, the the Country of Jejp, and alfo 
 
 Sea oijapan.'] Japan, may feem not to be 
 
 {b) Whether Japan be an Ifland but annexed to Tartary. 
 
 liland or annexed to the Land Phikfs Tranf. No 118. 
 
 ' ' ^ ftr.es t
 
 no llje Abjolute Tart S e c t. III. 
 
 fmes^ which are thef^jrtheft, of the Oriental Iflands, 
 on the Borders of Afia. Some will have it to be 
 larger than Britain ; but they who have been there 
 fay it is fomething lefs. It is encompalTed by the 
 {^reat South Sea,'] and is of a curved oblong Figure, 
 with many Inlets and Windings. 
 
 4. MADAGASCAR, or the Ifland of St 
 Laurence y lies on the eaftern Shore of Africa not 
 far from the Streights of [Babelmandel or] the Red 
 Sea. It is environed by the Indian Ocean (all the 
 Sea between Africa and India being now called by 
 that Name). It's Form is oblong. 
 
 5. S UM A'TR A, thought by fome Geogra- 
 phers to be the Taprobana of the Ancients, lies near 
 the Borders of Afia among the [Sunda Iflands] not 
 far from the Peninfula of Malacca (c). It ftretches 
 to a great Length, and is furrounded by the Indian 
 Ocean. 
 
 6. B O RN EOis fituated in the Indian Sea, not 
 far from Sumatra : it*s Form is almoft round. There 
 is a great Dilference among Authors about it's Ex- 
 tent ; fome make it's Circumference to be about 
 2100 Miles, and v/ill have it to be the greateft 
 among the Indian Iflands : others but about 300. 
 
 7. IC E LAND, Part of which is fituated in 
 the Temperate, and Part in the Frigid Zone, be- 
 twixt Greenland, and Norway, is encompafled by 
 the Northern Ocean and it's Form is oblong. 
 
 8. NEIVFOUNDLAND is an Ifland adjacent to 
 Canada, in North Atnsrica. It is fomething larger 
 than it is fliewed in our common Maps. It is en- 
 vironed by the Northern Ocean, and receiveth the 
 Sea in at a great many Creeks. 
 
 {c) Not Sumatra but Ceylon called by the Intiiatis Tenerajirtt 
 
 is thought, by all modern Geo- i. e. A Land of Delights, as 
 
 graphers, to be the Taprobane it was reprefented by the 
 
 «f the Ancients, And it is ftiil Ancients. 
 
 9. \JAMES'i
 
 C H AP. 8. of Vnherfal Geography. 1 1 1 
 
 9. \J AMES'S or Cmnber land's IJland] lies in the 
 Northern Ocean near the Arctic Continent^ between 
 Davii's and Hudfon's Streights. I liave not found 
 it in any Map before that of Vifcherus^ printed in 
 1594. It is a large IJland of an oval Figure. 
 
 10. NOVA Zeinbla is fituated between the Ardflc 
 Continent and the Land of the Samoieds and [OJliacs}. 
 It is bounded on the North by the Icy and [Mtifco- 
 vian] Sea, and feparated from Europe at the Land 
 of the Samoieds by the Streights oilVaygats (d). It's 
 Form is oval. 
 
 11. C^L/FORiV;^ may be added to thefe 
 if it be an Ifland, and not a Part of America (e). 
 The Dutch [ound in a Spani/Jj Ship a large Geogra- 
 phical Map, in which California was reprefented as 
 an IJland not contiguous to America, but furrounded 
 with the Sea. 
 
 [d) Mr Wit/en tells us, in 
 Vhilof.Tranf.^o loi. Pag. 3. 
 " That he had received out of 
 " Mufcovy, anew Map of Nova 
 " Zembla and Waygals, as it 
 •' had been difcovered by the 
 ** exprefs Order of the Czar ; 
 " by which it appears, that 
 " Nova Zembla is not an Ifland, 
 *' as hitherto believed, and that 
 *' the Mare Glaciale is not a 
 «' Sea but a Bay." Tho' Mr 
 Wit/en himfelf feems to be of 
 a contrary Opinion afterwards, 
 in another TranfaB'icn No 193. 
 Pag. 494.. where he fays. " I 
 " formerly thought Nova 
 *' Zembla a Continent ; but I 
 " have fince been better in- 
 *' formed. Therefore fince no 
 *' Ships have failed beyond it, 
 *' it may be both joined to the 
 *' Continent, and extended to 
 •' the Pole, for ought we can 
 " difcover.'* 
 
 [e] Cemelli tells us, that a 
 Provincial at Manilha, in the 
 year 1697. " Thought Cali- 
 " fornia a Part of the Conti- 
 '* nenr ; becaufe fome Fathers 
 " of the Society having gone 
 •• to the Mouth of the Streights 
 " which is 60 Leagues over, 
 " and run many Leagues up ir, 
 " found at laft that there was 
 *' but very little Water in the 
 " Chanel, and could go no 
 " further ; by which he guel- 
 " fed, that long Bay had no 
 ** Communication with the 
 " Northern Sea to make Ca- 
 " lifornia an Lland." Colleil. 
 Voyages and Travels. Vol. 4. 
 Pag. 420. Father Eufebius 
 Francis Kim is alfo of the fame 
 Opinion, as is underffood from 
 his Map communicated to the 
 Royal Society, Anno S708. Ne- 
 verthelefs it is generally repre- 
 fented in our Maps as an Ifland. 
 
 PROPO-
 
 1 1 2 "The Ahjolute Part Sect. III. 
 
 PRO P O SiriON V. 
 
 ^0 enumerate the IfMnds of a middle Size fcattered 
 over the Surface of the Globe: viz. 
 
 1. JAVA, one of the Sunda Iflands befw'ixt Afia 
 and New [lolland, is replenifhed with every Thing 
 fit for human Life, anci is a perfeft earthly Para- 
 dife. It is furrounded by the India Ocean ; and 
 it*s Form is oblong. 
 
 2. CUB A, one of the Antilles , betwixt Florida 
 and New Spain, is cncompafTed by the Atlantic Ocean 
 at the Entrance into the Gulph of Mexico. It's Form 
 is oblong. 
 
 3. HIS PAN 10 LA lies to the South o^Cuha^ 
 and is atmofi as large. It is furrounded by the 
 North, or Atlantic, Sea, where it flows into the 
 Gulph of Mexico. It is of an oval Figure, with fe- 
 verai Notches in ir. 
 
 4. IRELAND lieth near Britain, towards Atne- 
 rica. It is environed by the North Sea ; and it's 
 Form is oval. 
 
 5. C AND I A in the Mediterranean, near Greece ^ 
 is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 6. SICILTlks in the Alediterranean, near Itals, 
 It's Form is [fomewhat Triangular.'] 
 
 7. CETLON, near the furtheft Promontory of 
 Cormandel in India ; is furrounded by the Indian 
 Ocean, and is of a round Figure. Barrius will 
 have this to be the laprohana of the Ancients. 
 
 8. MINDANAO, one of the Philippine Iflands 
 in the Pacific Ocean, is of an oval Figure. 
 
 9. SARDINIA lies in the Mediterranean. It's 
 Form is oblong, 
 
 10. CELEBES, an I Hand not far from Borneo^ 
 is encompaflfcd by the Indian Ocean-, and is of an 
 oblong Figure. 
 
 I II. FRIES^
 
 G H AP. 8. of Wiiverfal GeogrdphyK 1 13 
 
 II. FRIESLJND, not far from Iceland^ may 
 alfo be referred to this Clafs. 
 
 PROPOSITION VL 
 
 'To enmnerate thefmall If.ands in the Globe's Superficies : 
 
 viz. 
 
 t. G ILOLO, one of the [Molucca I/Ian Js] is 
 furrounded with the [great South- Sea] and fliaped 
 like a Horfe-Shoe. 
 
 2 . J M BO IN /1, not hr from Gilolo in the fanje 
 Ocean -, is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 3. TIMOR, an Illand adjoining to [yfrw/^^wi 
 Land in] the Continent j it is one of the [Sunda 
 IJlands] and it's Form, is round. 
 
 4. J AMAIC A^ one of the [y^«/f//^j] in the 
 Gulph of Mexico, is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 ^. Z E L AND, an Ifland in Denmark betweeri 
 Jutland and Gotland. It is furrounded by the^ 
 North-Sea, as it flows into the Baltic, and is of 
 a round Figure. 
 
 6. N EGROPONT, neir Greece in the [Ar- 
 chipelago], is of an oblong Figure. 
 
 7. MAJORCA, in the Mediterranean, near 
 Spain, [is of a quadrangular Figure]. 
 
 8. CORSICA, [near Sardinia] in the Mediter^^ 
 ranean, [is of an oval Figure]. 
 
 9. C l^P ^ US , not far from the lejfer A fid in the 
 Mediterranean, is alfo of an oval Figure, 
 
 10. ISABELLA, one oi Solomon^ ^ Iflands, \n 
 the Pacific Ocean, 
 
 T H E R E are feveral other Iflands that might 
 be referred to this Clafs, but we fliall confiidef 
 them among the following. 
 
 VOL. I, I FRO->
 
 1.14 "^^'^ Ahfolute Part Sect. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 ^bere are almojl an innu7nerable .Multitude of very 
 little IJlands difperfed over the Surface of the 
 Globe ; among which thefe following deferve a par- 
 ticular Confideration. i. Ihe celebrated Solitary 
 ones. 2. ihofe that are colle tied into Clufers, and, 
 for their Affinity to one another ^ included under one 
 Name, 
 
 THE moll noted Solitary IJlands are, Thofe 
 in the Mediterranean ; viz. Rhodes, Malta, Tvica, 
 Minorca^ Scio, Cephalonia, &c. 
 
 THOSE in the Atlantic Ocean between Africa 
 and Brafil, St Helena, well know to Mariners, 
 Afcenfion IJle, St Thomas'' s Ifle, lying in the Equator. 
 
 MADERA which lies off the Streights of 
 Gibraltar, towards America. 
 
 ZOCOTR A lylnQbdorc the [Streights of Ba- 
 belmandel]. 
 
 GOTLAND lying in the Baltic. 
 
 PAR AD O N, fuppofed by the Portuguefe Sai- 
 lors (as Linfchoien relates) to lie about a hundred 
 Miles Weft ot the Canaries, hath this peculiar Pro- 
 perty, that it is fometimes perccptable, but for the 
 moft part invifible ; fo that feveral Geographers 
 difpute it's Exiftence. They tell us it's Fields are 
 green and fertile, and that the Inhabitants are 
 Chriftians, but they know not from what Nation 
 they are defcended, or what Language they ufe. 
 The Spaniards once made a Voyage from the Ca^^ 
 naries to feek it, but could never find it : There- 
 fore fome have thought it to be an Illufion, or: 
 Apparition ; others will have it to be feen only 
 fome certain Days of the Year, and at other 
 Times to be covered with a Cloud. The whole 
 Story feems to me fabulous and toolifli. 
 
 FLOAT-
 
 G H A p. B. of Unherfdl Geography. i 1 5 
 
 FLOATING IQands ought alfo to be rec- 
 koned among thefe, for which fee Chapter xviii, 
 
 PROPOSITION VIIL 
 
 To enttmerate the Clujlers of IJlands in the feveral 
 Farts of the Globe. 
 
 W E generally call thefe Clujlers of Iflands^ having 
 no better Name to exprefs them by, fuch as: 
 
 1. THE Canaries^ formerly called the For- 
 tunate IJlands, which lie in the Atlantic Ocean, near 
 the Wellern Shore o's Africa, over againft Mount 
 Atlas. They are [Seven'] in Number, not reckon- 
 ing the Salvages. 
 
 2. THE Azores, or Flandrian IJlands, betwixt 
 Europe and America, in the Weftern Ocean ; they 
 are accounted Nine in Number. 
 
 3. THE Iflands of Cape Verd, or the Hefpe- 
 rides of the Ancients, lie in the Atlantic Ocean^ 
 hear the Weftern Shore of Africa, over againft 
 Cape Verd. Thefe are 'Ten in Number. 
 
 4. T H E Maldivia IJlands lie in the Indian Ocean ^ 
 not far from the Coaft o\ Malabar in India, and ex- 
 tend Nor th-lVeJi from the fecond Degree of South 
 Latitude, to the feventb Degree of North Latitude, 
 Their Number is very uncertain, fome reckoning them 
 one Thoufand, and others tzvelve Thoufand. Narrow 
 Chanels, which feem to be worn by the Currents ^ 
 feparate them one from another, of which fome drs 
 not a Stone' s-cajl over. 
 
 5. \T HE Antilles comprehendi?ig\ i. The Lucaioi 
 or Baha?na IJlands, fituated between Cape Florida 
 and Cuba, are remarkable in being one of them 
 {viz. St Salvador) the firft Land feen by Cohunbus^ 
 the firft of the Europeans that difcovercd Afnerica^ 
 The Chief of them is Lucayo, from v^'hence the 
 reft are named ^sing of the larger fort^ about feven 
 
 I 2 in
 
 i 16 1'he Abjolute Fart S E CT. IIL 
 
 m Nm?iher]. 2. [The Virgin Caribee, or Leeward 
 JJlands'] between Hifpaniola and the Old World. 
 3. [The Stotovento and Bermudas I/lands'] to which 
 are referred all thofe in the Gulph of Mexico. 
 
 6. THE [Comoro and Admirally IJlands~\ lie be- 
 tween Madagafcar and Africa. 
 
 7. T H K Molucca [and Sunda] IJlands are many 
 in Number, of which five are particularly called 
 \Spice IJlands], They are furrounded by the Indian 
 Sea. 
 
 8 . T H E [old and new] Philippine IJlands near 
 the remote Parts of A/ia, are al mod innumerable. 
 
 9. T H E Banda IJlands, and others betwixt Ja- 
 va and ['Timor]. 
 
 10. THE j^gean IJlands, or thofe in the Arebi- 
 f el ago. . , 
 
 11. T U'E Japan Ifiands. 
 
 12. [P RINCE mUiam's IJlands] ovihok of 
 Solomon in the Pacijic Ocean. 
 
 13. THE Ladrone IJlands, in the fame Ocean. 
 
 14. THE Britijh IJlands, or thofe about Eng- 
 land and Scotland. 
 
 IS' THE. Iflands of Terra del Fuego, between 
 the Streights of Magellan and thofe of la Maire. 
 
 T O thefe may be referred fuch Iflands as are 
 found in large Rivers, as thofe in the Nile in Afri» 
 €a, the JVolga, St Laurence in Canada, and in other 
 Rivers: Alfo thofe obferved in Lakes or MoralTes, 
 fuch as are in the Morals of Lamhre in Africa, and 
 in the L.akes of South America. 
 
 W E do not here reckon thofe Iflands, that in. 
 great Numbers are flretched along the Shores of 
 fome Countries, as Norway, China, Bra/il, Davis''sr 
 SlreightSy &c. 
 
 PRO'
 
 C H A p. 8. of Vniverfil Geography. 1 1 7 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 Befides thefe IJlands there are other Parts of the EaJ^th, 
 whofe Surfaces are different in Shape or Figure i. 
 fuch as Peninfula*J and Ifthmufles, 
 
 A Peninjula, called by the Greeks Cherfonefus, is 
 a Part of the Earth joined to another by a narrow 
 Neck of Land, and on every Side elfe encompaf- 
 fed with the Sea. That narrow Trad or ftrait Paf- 
 fage, whereby one Country hath communication 
 with another by Land, is called zn Ijlhmus. We 
 rrjuft alfo here obferve thofe Parts of the Earth that 
 are flretched out into the Sea, but are joined by a 
 larger Tratfl: to the main Land, for fuch extended 
 Parts from a Species oi'Pemnfula's and may in fome 
 fenfe be fo called. 
 
 S U C H are Italy, Spain, part of England, Greece 
 and proper Achaia, Afia minor, Norway with Sive- 
 den and Lapland, Indoflan, New Guinea in the South 
 Continent, [New Holland] New Britain, and [New 
 Scotland] in America, Cambodia, Patagon, the ex- 
 trean^ Parts of Africa, Sec. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 To enumerate the Peninfula^s. 
 
 THESE Peninfula's are oblong, viz. 
 
 1. CHERSONESA d'or, or Malacca, conti- 
 guous to India. 
 
 2. CIMB RIC A, or Jutland, contiguous to 
 Holflein. 
 
 3. CALIFORNIA, on the Weflern Shore 
 of No rth America, ' is thought, by fome, to be a 
 Peninfula \ but commonly reprefented in our Map* as 
 an Ifland, 
 
 I 3 4. I've AT AN
 
 1 1 8 ^'e Ah/QJute Part Sect. III. 
 
 4. TUCATA Ny in the Bay qf Mexico, contigu- 
 ous to New Spain. 
 
 5. T H E Clierfonefus of Romania, near the Hel- 
 
 leffont. 
 
 6. CORE A^ was formerly thought to be an 
 Ifland, and not a Peninfula. In fome Maps I have 
 feen it joined to Tartar'^, and in others furrounded 
 with the Sea. Nevertlielefs, the latell Obfervations 
 rnake it a Peninfula j but even now it is not fettled 
 among Geographers. 
 
 7. T O thefe may be added the three fmall ones 
 of Ionia in kjfer Afia [or S?nyrna'j, Melajfo, and Hali- 
 carnajfiis. 
 
 THESE Six Peninfula's are roundifh, viz. 
 
 1. AFRICAagreu Part of the old World, 
 furrounded by the Mediterranean, Atlantic, Althio- 
 pc, Indian, and Red Sea. It is joined to Afia by 
 a narrow Neck of Land near /Egypt. 
 
 2. 3, NORTH and South America v\z. Mexico anc^ 
 Peru. They are joined together by the Streights 
 of Panama. 
 
 4. PELOPONNESUS, noTV called the Morea^ 
 a Part of Greece. 
 
 5. 1'AURICA Cherfonefus, now called \Crim 
 'fartary'] in the Black Sea, near the Streights ofCaffq. 
 
 6. C A MB AT' Ay or Guzarat, in India, 
 
 P RO PO SiriON XL 
 
 STxerd are as many Ifthmus's as Pcninfula'3. Thofe of 
 moji note are, 
 
 •4. T H A T of Suez, which joins Africa to A/ta. 
 
 2. THAT cf Corinth, which joins the [Morea 
 p Achaiaf\ 
 
 3. THAT o^ Panama, which joins North j^mer 
 rica to South America. 
 
 4. T PI AT joining Malacca to India. And, 
 
 5. THAT joining [Crirn to Precop Tartary.] 
 
 CHAP.
 
 C H A p. 9- of Vniverjal Geography, 1 1^ 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 O/ Mountains in general. 
 
 MANY Things occur worthy of particular 
 Notice, in explaining the Natue of Moun- 
 tains, and therefore they are copioufly handled by 
 Geographical Writers, efpecially the Computation of 
 their Altitudes^ becaufe they feem to many to make 
 againft the Earth's Rotundity. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 A Mountain is an elevated Part of the day Land, over- 
 topping the adjacent Country ; and a Hill or ClifF 
 is a /mall kind of Mountain. A Promontory, is a 
 Mountain Jlretching itfelf into the Sea,, and Rocks 
 are Stones raifed above the Sea or Land, in the 
 Form of Mou?itainJ. 
 
 W E muft know that all the Parts of the Earth 
 which appear plain, are not exadtly of the fame 
 Altitude, but commonly elevated towards the In- 
 land Parts, and depreffed towards the Sea Shores, 
 as is manifeft from the Origin and Courfe of Ri- 
 vers ; for that Part towards which they flow, is al- 
 ways more depreffed than that where they fpring ; 
 and Fountains feldom are increafed into Rivers, 
 unlefs they take their Origin from Mediterranean 
 or inland Countries: which fhews, thatthofe Coun- 
 tries are more elevated than the Maritime Parts. 
 Sq Bohemia is known to be higher than Holfiein, be- 
 
 I 4 cau.re
 
 120 ^he Abfoliite Tart Sect. Ill, 
 
 Caufe the River Elbe rifes in the former, and falls 
 into the later. Alfo from the Dtwuhc^ and IVefer, 
 the Rhine, and the Mofelle^ we perceive the greater 
 Altitude of thofe inland Countries, from whence 
 they flow. For this reafon, Switzerland and the 
 Country of the Grifom, are accounted the highefb 
 Lands in Europe \ becaufe the Rhine, the Danube^ 
 and the Rhone, derive their fource from them. 
 Moreover, the inland Countries are elevated above 
 the maritime Parts, according to the different De- 
 (cijyityand Rapidity of the Rivers. 
 
 HERE follow fome Problems, by which we 
 may form, a Judgment upon the controverfial Wri- 
 tings handed down to us, about the different Alti- 
 tudes of Mountains. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 to take the Height of a Mountain by Jllimelry. 
 
 THIS is perform^ed the fame Way as we 
 take the Height of a Tower, provided the very 
 Top of the Mountain be perceptible by any 
 Mark. 
 
 LET AB (Fi^^. 12.; be the Altitude of a 
 Mountain, A the Foot of it, B the Mark feen at 
 the Top. Take the Line FC at a convenient 
 Diftancc, fo that neidier of the Angles A F C or 
 ACF may be very acute, but nearly equal. Let 
 the Angles BFC and B C F be obferved ; and 
 the Sum of their Degrees being taken from i8o 
 the Remainder will give the Angle CBF (a). 
 Then let C F the Diftance of the two Stations be 
 .accurately meafured -, which done, fiy, as the Sine 
 of the Angle FBC, to the Sine of the Angle 
 PFB: (orofFCB: if you would find F B) fo 
 
 (rt) Bj Article 14. of Chap. ii. fihv^.
 
 C H A p. 9- (^f Unherfal Geography. 1 21 
 
 is F C to B C the Diftance of the Top of the 
 Mountain trom C. Then ['iviib a Tele/cope fixed 
 to a ^tadrant or othsrwife] take the Angle B C A, 
 and you will have alfo the Angle ABC, becaufe 
 the Triangle C A B is redangular *. 
 
 THEREFORE in the Triangle A B C, As 
 the Radius 1 0000000, is to the Sine of the Angle 
 B C A : fo is the Diftance B C, to the perpendi- 
 cular Altitude of the Mountain A B. 
 
 FO R Example, Let us fuppofe that Xenagora^^ 
 the Son of Eumelus, ufed fonie fuch Method as 
 this to find the Height of the Mountain Olympus, 
 which he is faid to have meafured exadly. Where- 
 fore if he found the Angle B F C 84 degr. 18 mv?. 
 and the Angle BCF 85 degr. 34 miu. then was 
 C BF 10 degr. 8 w/«. And fuppofe, by meafuring, 
 or fome other Method, he found F C 1 200 Grecian 
 Feet, or 2 Furlongs. Therefore as the Sine of 
 the Angle CBF 10 degr. 8 min. 17594 is to the 
 Sine of the Angle B C F 85 dtgr. 34 mift. 99701 : 
 fo is C F 1 200 Feet to B F 6800 Feet, the Diftance 
 from the Top. Likewife the Angle B F A being 
 found, by fo7ne Jnjtrument then in Ufe to be 6-^ degr, 
 30 min. by faying, in the Triangle FAB, As 
 Rad. looooo to the Sine of the Angle BFA 89500 : 
 fo is FB 6800 to A B 6096 Feet, the Altitude 
 of Mount Olympus. But 600 Feet make a Grecian 
 Furlong ; therefore dividing 6096 by 600, the 
 Quotient, 10 Furlongs 96 Feet, is the Height 
 of Mount Olympus in Grecian Mea^jre, as Xena- 
 goras found it. Note, Each of thefe Furlongs is aboiit 
 h of a German Mile. 
 
 /^ RIS TO TL E and feveral others affirm, that 
 this Mountain, Olyinpus^ is fo high, that there is 
 no Rain, nor the leaft Motion of Air upon the 
 yop of it } which he, and the Ancients underftood 
 
 f Bj Article 14 of Chap. ii. al>Q-'je, 
 
 from
 
 122 The Abfolute Part Sect. III. 
 
 from their finding the Draughts of Letters made 
 in Afhes, which had been regularly fcattered, to 
 remain entire and frefh as they were at firft, with- 
 out being either confufed or defaced in many 
 Years -, therefore they fuppofed it to be raifed a- 
 bove the fecond Region of the Air. 
 
 THERE is alfo another Method of taking 
 the Altitude of Mountains, by two Stations in the 
 fame Plane, with the perpendicular Height of 
 the Mountain -, but this is fubjeft to Error becaufe 
 of the fmall Difference of the Angles {b). 
 
 ALSO 
 
 {b) There i$ a very pleafant 
 and expeditious A'lethod of tak- 
 ing the Height of Mountains by 
 thz Barometer, thus : It is to 
 be obferved how many Inches 
 or Parts of Inches the Quick- 
 filver is depreffed at the Top of 
 the Mountain, we have a mind 
 to meafure, below the Altitude 
 it hath acquired, at the fame 
 Time, at the Bottom or Su- 
 perficies of the Sea ; from 
 whence the true Height of the 
 Mountain is found by an efta- 
 bhfhed Proportion. This Pro- 
 portion may be known by the 
 T^ble we have added below to 
 Chap. xlx. Prop. 7. Alfo, by 
 this Table, the Height of the 
 Quickfilver at the Surface of the 
 Sea may be found, by obferving 
 it's Height at any Place, whofe 
 Altitude above theSca is known. 
 But this is to be obferved, that 
 the Altitudes found this way 
 will be more accurate, the near- 
 er the Height of the Quickfilver 
 is to 28 French Ir,ches or to 
 
 Jurin*s Appendix. 
 This Way of taking the 
 Hsigbl of Mjun/aim, is verjr 
 
 expeditious and pleafant, as 
 Dr "Jurin faith, and with due 
 care may be very ufeful to fe- 
 veral purpofes ; particularly in 
 meafuring the Height of IJlands 
 above the Sea, by two Obfer- 
 vers, with well adjufted Baro- 
 meters ; and at the fame Inflant 
 of time, obferving the Baro- 
 metrical Heights, by the Sea- 
 fide, and on the higheft Part 
 of the Jfland. So alfo it may 
 ferve to give an Eftimate of the 
 Height of a fountain, or Ri- 
 ver, that we would have con- 
 veyed to fome Miles Diftance. 
 But in all thofe Experiments, it 
 is necefTary thst the Barometer 
 (as I faid) fhould be well adjull- 
 ed, and (if two Obfervers) 
 that the Obfervations fhould be 
 made at the fame time, to pre- 
 vent errors that may arife from 
 errors in the Barometer, or 
 from the Alteration of th« 
 Weight of the Jtmofpberei 
 which fometimes changes in 
 the very time of Qbfervation, 
 if we are not fpeedy therein. 
 
 For the Difcovery of a Moun- 
 tain's or any other, Height, Df 
 Halley (from Barometrical 
 Obferva-
 
 Chap. 9. of TJnherfal Geography. 127 
 
 ALSO having the Height of a Tower given, 
 and it's Diftance from the Mountain, we may 
 more accurately find the Height of the Mountain 
 itfelf ; thus, fuppofe F to be a Tower 300 Foot 
 high, and from it's Top, or fome convenient 
 Phice, let BFP be obferved to be 83 degr. 30 min, 
 then will BP be found to be 5796 Feet, to which 
 the Height of the Tower is to be added : P A. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 ^be p^rfpicuous Altitude of a Mountain being given, to 
 find what Diflance we are frotn it j by a ^adrant 
 [Theodolite] or any other Surveying Infirument^ 
 for taking Heights or Angles. 
 
 LET the Height of the Mountain AB be 
 known beforehand, by the Obfervations of others, 
 to be 10 Grecian Furlongs 96 Feet, or 6096 Feet. 
 And let the Place of Obfervation be at F ; (Fig. 
 13.J the Diftance FA is fuppofed to be required. 
 Let the Angle B F A by a Quadrant or [^heodolite'] 
 be found 63 degr. 30 min. Then in the right- 
 angled Triangle B A F, where three Things are 
 given, it will be as the Radius 1 00000 is to the 
 Tangent of the Angle A B F 26 degr. 30 min. 4985 8 : 
 fo is AB 6096 to AF 3040 Feet, or 5 Furlongs 
 
 Obfervations in Snotvdin-HUl) with excellent Inftruments at 
 
 concludes, that the Quickfilver divers Altitudes in St Faul''s 
 
 defcends a Tenth of an Inch, Dcme, and when the Barometer 
 
 every 30 Yards of Afcent. And was at a different Height, he 
 
 Dr Derham (by good Obferva- found, at near 90 Feet, the 
 
 lions on the Monument in Lon- Quickfilver funk ro, and at 
 
 don) reckons %z Feet for every fomewhat lefs than double, and 
 
 tenth of an Inch, Vid. l,iw treble that Height, fo and ro» 
 
 thorp'' s Abridg.YoX. z- p. 13, according to Dr i^/^Z/^j's Table, 
 
 |!s)V. But by very nice Obfer- ihid. p. 16, and Mr CoJJini's 
 
 ■yapons he afterwards made referred to in this iVo/^ (/>). 
 
 40 Feet
 
 124 ^'Ij^ Ahfolute Tart Sect. III. 
 
 40 Feet, the Diftance required between the Place 
 of Obfervation and the Mountain. 
 
 THERE are fome Inftruments by which you 
 may perform this, without making ufe of the 
 Canon of Sines, &c. as is apparent from their De- 
 scription, but the Refult is this way lefs accurate, 
 for Want of Exadtnefs in the Lines of Propor- 
 tion. 
 
 Nole. In both thefe Problems we have taken 
 the Diftance F A for a right Line, becaufe of the 
 fmall DilTerence between it and a Curve j but 
 fliall confider it as ■ Part of the Periphery of the 
 Earth in the following Methods. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 Having the Dijiance between a Mountain and the 
 Place where it's Top may be firjl feen, given : to 
 find Geographically the Height of the Mountain. 
 
 LET us take, for Example, the prodigious 
 high Mountain in the Ifland of Tenerijf, one of the 
 Canaries^ commonly called the Pike of Teneriff. 
 Let AFC, {Fig. 14.) whofe Center is R, be the 
 Periphery of the Earth, or the Meridian of the 
 Mountain, and let A B be the Mountain ilfelf. 
 Draw from B the right Line B F a Tangent to the 
 Periphery, and F will be the firft or laft Point 
 from which the Top of the Mountain can be feen. 
 CThen Draw R ¥) Mariners affirm, that they firft 
 difcover the Top of this Mountain when they are 
 4 Degr. of the Meridian diftant from it (and they 
 need not be at a lofs for finding the Diftance from 
 any Mountain in Degrees when they are failing 
 under the fame Meridian it is in). Therefore, fup- 
 pofing their Relation to be true, and the firft 
 villial Ray B F to come in a diredl Line from 
 the Top B, let us endeavour to find out the Alti- 
 
 tv,dQ
 
 Chap. 9« of Univerjal Geography. 12^ 
 tude of the Mountain. In the Triangle B R F there 
 are three Things known, i. R F the Sennidiame- 
 ter of the Earth. 2. The Right-angle B F R. Ani 
 3. Becaufe the Arch FA is 4 Degr. the Angle 
 B R F is alfo 4. Degr. Therefore fay, As the Ra- 
 dius (looooooooj is to the Secant of the Angle 
 BRF 4 Degr. (10024419) fo is R F (3440 Italiaii 
 Miles or 860 German Miles) to R B (3448 Italian 
 Miles or 860 German Miles) ; fubftradl R A ('3440 
 or 860) and there will remain B A (8 Italian Miics^ 
 or 2 German Miles, for the Height of the Moun- 
 tain \which is extraordinary, and even above the 
 Computations of the Antients]. Therefore we mull 
 know that there are two Things affumed as Truths 
 which are actually falfe. i . It is fuppofed that the 
 Ray of Light which firfc ftrikes the Eye, comer 
 from B in a right Line, when it is knov/n on the 
 contrary to be curved, or refra6led, by Reafon of 
 the Denfity of the Atmofphere. For a Right 
 Line cannot be drawn trom the Top B to F (F A 
 being 4 Degr.j without paffing thro' a Part of 
 the Earth, and therefore the Top B cannot be 
 feen in a right Line from the Place F, but by 
 the bowed Ray B T F, being the firft of the re- 
 fra6i:ed Rays that can touch F. From whence 
 we way reafonably infer, that this Refra<5lion caufes 
 the Mountain to be difcovered fooner by i Degr. 
 (or 15 German Miles) than if there had been no Re- 
 fradion at all ; fo that fuppofing A F but 3 Degr. 
 the Height of the Mountain will be found but 40 
 Furlongs, or 5 Italian Miles. 2. It is to be con- 
 fidered, that Sailors allow themfelvcs a Liberty of 
 fpeaking largely, efpecially about their Diilances ; 
 if therefore, in Confideration of this, we dedudt 
 half a Degr. more, and fuppofe the Top firft ittn 
 at 21 Degr. or 38 German Miles equal to jF A -, 
 then will the Altitude of the Mountain A B be 
 2 found
 
 126 Th^ Ahjoiiite Fart Sect. III. 
 
 found by the former Galcuiation to be a Mile, 
 or thereabouts. 
 
 I F a Mountain be firft feenat 2 Degr. diftance. 
 (letting afide the Refradion) it will be found 2 ItaUan 
 Miles high % but if at i Degr. or 15 German Miles^ 
 Jt will be half an Italian Mile, or 5 Furlongs high. 
 
 2o this Purpofe is calculated the following Table. 
 
 If the Altitude of 
 a Mountain be 
 
 ,Ger. 
 
 m\i 
 
 1 
 7 
 
 1 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 J 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 'i'henitwillbefecn 
 at the Diftance of 
 
 14^ 
 
 '52 
 
 17 
 
 i8i 
 
 21 
 
 24 
 
 29 
 
 41^ 
 
 BUT thefe are all to be underftood without 
 Refraction, v/hereby the apparent Height and 
 Diftance is generally increafed, as may be feen 
 by the Figure ; where the refrafted Ray T F being 
 produced to N, gives the apparent Altitude N A. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Having the Altitude of a Mountain given, to find 
 Geographically il^s Dijlance from the PlacCy whence 
 it ?nay he firft feen. 
 
 THIS is but the converfe of the laft Propofi- 
 tion, and may be had fro.m the foregoing Table i 
 but Calculation will give a more accurate Solution. 
 
 L E T therefore A B be the Height of a Moun- 
 tain given, and fuppofe it to be firft feen at F, to 
 iind the Diftance A Y. (Fig. 14.) In the right an- 
 gled Triangle BF""R, the Angle F is a right An- 
 gle, and the two Sides F R, R B are given, the 
 former beijig the Semidiameter of the Earth, and 
 the later the fame added to A B, which fuppofe 
 half a German Mile; fo that RForRAbeing 
 
 2 860
 
 Chap. 9« cf Univerfal Geography, iiy 
 
 860 Miles, BR will be 86oi. Tlierefore fay, as 
 RB 86oi istoFR 860 : foisthe Radius 1 0000000 
 to the Sine of the Angle RBF 9994186. 88 degr. 
 2 min. 40 fee. Wherefore B R F or the Arch A F 
 will be I. degr. ^7 ^^^. "i-o fee. which being turned 
 into Gertnan Miles make 292, the Diftance from 
 whence a Mountain whofe Altitude is half a Mile, 
 may be firft feen without any Refraftion, upon 
 which Account we may add 8 Miles, fo that it may 
 be aftually feen '2,y\ Miles off. But the Refraftion 
 varies according to the different Altitude of the Sun, 
 or the different Denfity of the Air, when the Sun, 
 is below the Horizon -, as we fhall fhew more at 
 large, when we come to treat of the Atmofphere % 
 and in the third Part of this Book, where we (hall 
 difcourfe of the vifible Horizon, 
 
 PROPOSITION VL 
 
 ^he Length of the Shadow of a Mountain^ and the: 
 Altitude of the Sun at the fame "time, being given g 
 to find the Altitude of the Mountain. 
 
 W E propofe this Problem more for the Anti- 
 quity and Elegancy of it, than for any Accuracy 
 we believe to be in the Method. Plutarch and 
 Pliny have writ, that Mount Athos, on the Mace- 
 donian Shore, is fo high, as that it overfliadoweth 
 the IQe of Lemnos, [}tow called Stalimene] as far as the 
 Market-place of the City of Myrrhina [or Lemnos]^ 
 when the Sun is in the Summer Solftice ; where the 
 ancient Inhabitants for the Curiofity of the Appear- 
 ance erected a Brazen Calf, at the termination of 
 the Shadow, as is teftified by the old Greek Mo= 
 noflich, which may be thus EngliJJjed. 
 
 Mount
 
 128 The Abfolute Tart Sect. IIL 
 
 Mount Atho's Shadow covers half 
 The Bulk o/ Ltmno'i molten Calf, {c) 
 
 FLINT writes, that the Diftance betwceit 
 Jltbos and the IQe of Lemnos, was accounted 87000' 
 Paces, or 87 Italian Miles, but neither he nor any 
 other Author have determined the Altitude of the 
 Sun^ at the Time of this Shadow, tho* it is pro- 
 bable, it was projedted upon the Town of Myrrhina 
 when Mount Atbos., a little before Sun-fet, began 
 to intercept their View of the Sun- Beams •, the 
 Sun being then in tl« lame vertical Circle, which 
 pafieth over Athos and Myrrhina (becaufe Athos is 
 fituated weftv/ard of Myrrhina). We may fup- 
 pofe the Sun to have been almoft in the very Ho- 
 rizon of Myrrhina F O, and fo the Ray O F, paf- 
 fing the Top of the Mountain, to have projedied 
 the Shadow AF {Fig. 15). Here O F is a Tan- 
 gent to the Periphery, and from having the Angle 
 FB R given, and alio F R, (or FA in the Trian- 
 gle, BAF taken as a right lAne) BA will be 
 iound to be 8 Furlongs, or i Italian Mile for the 
 Height of a Mountain. But becaufe in this Por- 
 tion of the Sun, the Shadow would be infinitely 
 continued, and therefore it's Extent could not be' 
 obferved ; and as the Interpofition of the Houfes- 
 in the Town, would alio intercept the neighbour- 
 ing Rays, to thofe that bounded the Shadow •, there- 
 fore, we muft allow the Sun to have been elevated 
 at leaft 2 Degr. above the Horizon of Myrrhina ; 
 
 (^) 'A^votf Kcthv^-ei 'TsKiv^a. f.uv the Shadow of the Pike of 
 
 Kr^iy.v'iA? (io'oi- Tirwr/jf upon the Sea reaching 
 
 Mr Salmon looks upon this to over the Iflind Gomcrti, and the 
 
 be a very ridiculous Afleriion, Shadow of the upper Part, viz. 
 
 and tells us that there never was oi \.\\e Sugar loaf to ha imprinted 
 
 a Shadow difcernahlcat !0 Miles like another /^;^^ in the Sky it- 
 
 Diftance from theHill that made felf. See Salmon's Prefent State 
 
 it. But, in oppofition to this, of all N/it.Fol. ^. Pag. -^(^S. and 
 
 Mr Edens fays, that he aaually Philof. Jmnf No ^^S-P^^S- 3 » 7- 
 
 Far
 
 C H A p. 9- 9f Univerjal Geography. 129 
 
 For Example, to S ; fo that S F O may be 2 Dc gr. 
 and S F a Ray ot the Sun pafiingrhe Vertex cf the 
 Mountain T, and terminating the Shadow in F. 
 
 T H E R E F O R E in the oblique angkd Tri- 
 angle RFT, the Angle TFR 92 Dcgr. and 
 F RT I degr. 6 min. (i.e. the Diftance FA %'] Ita^ 
 llan Miles, turned into Degr. ) hence F T R 86 d^qr. 
 p^\min. and alfo the Semidiamcter F R, 860 Ger- 
 man Miles, being all given -, the Side T R may be 
 found by this Proportion. As the Sine of the An- 
 gle FT R 86 degr, 54 m'ln. is to the Sine of the An- 
 gle T F R 92 .■%. fo 'is F R 860, toRT86i Ger- 
 man Miles. So that AT, the Altitude of Mount 
 ylthoi., is I German Mile, or 32 Furlongs, which 
 is too much ; for the Grecians account it not above 
 J I Furlongs. 
 
 IF we afllime the Altitude of the Sun to be but 
 one Degr. the Altitude of the Mountain will be 
 found but 20 Furlongs. 
 
 BUT PUn'j^ I fuppofe, has given us too large 
 a Diftance betwixt Athos and Myrhina., which may 
 perhaps be a Reafon, that too great a Height arifes 
 froni this Calculation : and in moft of our modern 
 Maps of Greece, the Diftance FA feems to be but 
 about ss Italian Miles j wherefore the Angle F R T 
 will be but about P)P, min. So that fuppofing the 
 Sun's Altitude to be i degr. 30 ?7tin. the Angle TFR 
 will be 91 d^gr. 0,0 min. and FT R 87 degr. ^^ min. 
 Therefore in the Triangle FRT, as the Sine of the 
 Angle FRT 87 degr. 35 min. is to the Sine of the 
 Angle TFR 91 degr. 30 ?nin. fo is F R 860 to RT. 
 
 OR in the Triangle TFA right angled at A, 
 T FA will be i degr. ^o min. and FA, fuppofed 
 a right Line, ^5 Miles, from whence the Height 
 TA will be found by this Proportion. As the Ra- 
 dius is to the Tangent of the Angle TFA, i degr. 
 30 min. fo is FA ^^ Miles to AT, the Altitude of 
 the Mountain. 
 
 VOL. I. K TO
 
 130 I'he Abfolute Part S e c t. III. 
 
 T O this Place belongs the Solution of this Pro- 
 blem, viz. Having the dillerence of Time be- 
 tween the Sun's rifing ("or letting) on the Top of a 
 Mountain, and it's hril Appearance to for Occul- 
 ration fromj an Obferver at the Bottom, to find, 
 if required, the Height of the Mountain •, and con- 
 verfly, having the Height of the Mountain, to find 
 this difference of Time. Arijlotle and P/iwj, have, 
 by this Method of Calculation, fuppofed fome 
 Mountains to be of incredible Altitudes, as ap- 
 pears from their Writings. However, fince the 
 Solution of thefe Problems depends upon another, 
 which we have referred to the fecond Part of this 
 "Work, we fhall refer them to Chapter xxx. 
 
 P RO PO S I'TION VII. 
 
 The highejl Mountains have no fmfihle Tro portion to 
 the Se?nidiaj?ieter of the Earth ; or fo little, that 
 their Altitude no 7nore affecls ii*s Rotundity, than a 
 fpeck or particle of Dufl upon the Surface of the 
 artificial Globe does it's Rotundity. 
 
 W E have (hewed, that the Mountain in the 
 Ifland of Teneriff, called the Pike, is at moft no 
 higher than a Gerjnan Mile, or a German Mile and 
 a half-, and we are affured, that there are but few 
 Mountains in the World higher than that : There- 
 fore fince the Earth's Semidiameter is 860 fuch 
 Miles, the Altitude of this high Mountain is to the 
 Earth's Semidiameter as i to 860. But few Moun- 
 tains are of this Height, moft of them not exceed- 
 ing a quarter of a Mile ; wherefore they no more 
 obftruft the Earth's fpherical Figure, than the 
 fmall inequality obferved in Globes turned artifi- 
 cially, does their Rotundity 5 and Nature hath not 
 3 yet
 
 C H A p. 9- ^f Univerfal Geography. 1 3 1 
 
 yet been able to produce a Body of an exad Geo- 
 metrical Roundnefs {d). 
 
 P RO PO S mON VIII. 
 
 To explain the Origin of Mountains. 
 
 THIS is a great Queftion with feme Philofo* 
 phers, but others think it lliperfluouK, and not lie 
 to be enquired into •, becaufc they fuppole Moun- 
 tains to have had a Being ever fince the Creation. 
 Neverthelefs Hiilory acquaints us, that not a few 
 Mountains have been undermined by interior 
 Ruins, and funk down into fubterraneous Chafms 
 and Receptacles, or wafted by fome other Means ; 
 fo that fmce we can perceive a natural Decay and 
 Corruption of them, we may judge they do noc 
 proceed from a fupernatural Origin. Moreover, 
 that feveral Mountains were railed fuccelTively, and 
 at feveral Times, is apparent from the Quantities of 
 Sea-fhells that are found in fome of them, as in thofe 
 of Gelderland^ &c. Such Mountains as thefe feemi 
 to be generated by a rapid Wind, carrying Sand 
 and Gravel by Degrees into the form ot the Moun- 
 tain, which is afterwards foaked and made folid by 
 the Rain. This is to be underffcood in little Moun- 
 tains, as to the very large ones it is probable, they 
 
 {d) Tho' the Body of tlie when fhe is viewed thro' a good 
 
 Moon be three times as little as Telefcope, we can fee the out- 
 
 the Earth, and the Protuberan- ward Edge of her Difk notched 
 
 ces or Mountains upon her Sur- and made rugged, by the Tops of 
 
 face, three times as high as the the Mountains rifing far above 
 
 higheft upon the Earth's Surface; the other Parts of tiie Surface ; 
 
 yet when fhe is at the full, and which need not feem ilrange, 
 
 obferved with the naked Eye, when the beft poliflied Globe 
 
 we cannot perceive that thefe that ever was made, being 
 
 vafl: Mountains in the leaft ob- viewed thro' a good Microf- 
 
 ftruft, or deface her apparent cope, is found n>jt to be free 
 
 Rotundity. On thg contrary, from fuch Rugolities. 
 
 K 2 are
 
 '13 2 ^he Abjolute Fart Sect. III. 
 
 are of the fame Age and Origin with the Earth it- 
 iti'i. They that argue more Theologically, fup- 
 pofe the Globe of the Earth to have been at firft 
 created perfectly round, and v/ith a foft Surface, 
 without any eminent Farts or Mountains, without 
 any EilTures or Grottos ■, and afterwards, when 
 GOD commanded the Waters lo be gathered together 
 in one Place, then there were Chanels made to re- 
 ceive the Waters, and tlie Earth that was removed 
 out of thefe Chanels, was converted into Moun- 
 tains. But we leave it to d:iem to prove, whether 
 the Mountains be fo many, and fo large, as to fill 
 all the Chanels of the Sea (c). 
 
 • PRQPOSiriON IX. 
 
 ^0 explain the Caufes, why Rain, Mijls, and Snows, 
 are frequent upon the Tops of the Mountains ; when 
 in the neighbour ing Fallies, the Air is Jerene and 
 calm without any fuch Meteors. 
 
 W E are informed by thofe, that have travelled 
 over the Mountains of /Jfia, Peru, and other Coun- 
 tries, 
 
 {e) ' Dr WocdxL-ard, in his * them all, and conftituted a 
 
 * Eflay towards a Natural Hi- ' fluid Sphere environing the 
 
 * flory of the Earth, propofes * whole Globe. That after 
 ' to prove, that the Strata at * fome Time the Strata were 
 
 * firit, whether of Stone, of ' broken on all fides of the 
 
 * Chalk, cf Coal, of Earth, or ' Globe : that they were dif- 
 ' whatever other Matter they * located and their Situation 
 
 * confided of, (lying each up- * varied, being elevated in 
 
 * on other) were all originally * fome Places, and depreffed 
 
 * parallel: tlmt they were plain, ' in others. That the Inequa- 
 
 * even, and regular; and the ' lities and Irregularities of the 
 
 * Surface of the Earth like- * Terreftrial Globe, v.ere cauf- 
 
 * wife even and fpherical : that * ed by this Means: date their 
 
 * they were continuous, and * Original from this Difrup- 
 
 * not iiuerrupted or broken : * tion, and are entirely owing 
 
 * and that the whole Mafs of * unto it. That the more 
 
 * tlie Water lay then above * eminent Parts of the Earth, 
 
 * Mountains
 
 Chap. 9- of Univerfal Geography, 133 
 tries, that while they were on their Tops, they 
 were frequently :ittacked with Showers of Rain, 
 Snow, and thick Fogs ; but defcending thence in- 
 to the neighbouring Vallics, they obferved no fuch 
 Meteors, but enjoyed a ferene and pleafant Air. 
 We alfo obferve the fame in the Mountains of our" 
 own Country. 
 
 SOME fiy, the Caufe of this Phasncmenon Is 
 owing to an occult Power that Mountains have 
 of attradling Air, Clouds, and other Meteors ; 
 but fince they cannot explain this Power, they fay 
 nothing to the Purpofc (/). The following Ex-. 
 plication feems to me the mod rational, viz. That 
 Vapours and Exhalations being condenfed into 
 fmall Drops, in the middle Region of the Air, finto 
 which the Tops of feveral Mountains rifej begin to 
 defcend and tall upon the Tops of the fubjacent 
 Mountains which are nearer them than the Vallies, 
 and coming there firft to Ground, they leave their 
 Places in the Air, which are prefently taken up 
 by the fmall Drops that are next them •, thefe be- 
 ing preffed and forced downwards by others, ei- 
 ther to avoid a Vacuum, or becajafe it is the Na- 
 
 * Mountains and Rocks, are fure^ condenfed by Winds, or 
 ' oniy the Elevations of the ether external Cnufes, they ga- 
 
 * Strata ; thcfe wherever tiiey ther themfelves into Clouds and 
 
 * were folid, rearing againft Alifts, and by their own fpeci- 
 
 * and fupporting each other in fie Gravity, fall downwards, till 
 
 * the Pollure wherein they they meet with fuch Air as is 
 
 * were put, by the burfting or heavy and able to fupport them, 
 
 * breaking up of the Sphere of with which they mix and fwim 
 
 * the Earth.' f^oodivard's EC- about, and are every way dif- 
 fay, P^g. 90, 91, 92. perfed in it, whereby the Sky 
 
 {/J The Air in Vallies is is made ferene and clear : but 
 
 muchheavier than the Vapours, if they meet not with fuch 
 
 and therefore fitted to fupport Air, Dr light upon the Top 
 
 them better than that light Air of a Mountain before they 
 
 which is upon the Tops of high come at fuch Air, then they 
 
 Mountains. Therefore when the are formed into Drops, and 
 
 Vapours are put into a violent fall dowjl to the Ground. 
 Agitation, and, in fome mea- 
 
 K ^ tur^
 
 134 ^^ Ahjolitte Fart Sect. III. 
 
 tare of Water to flow to the lowefl Place, or to 
 that Place where the Flux was firft begun. 
 
 FROPOSIT^ION X. 
 
 ^h9re happen to Mountains^ Rums^ Ruptures^ Tranf- 
 fofitlons^ Sec. 
 
 I T is but feldom fuch Accidents happen, yet 
 feme Inftances are found in Hiftory, efpecially of 
 Ruptures, whereof we fhall give Ibme Examples 
 in the following Chapter. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 WheTher the Superficies of a Mountain he more ca- 
 pacious than the Plane whereon it /lands ? 
 
 T H AT it is larger is proved from Geometry : 
 But whether it can fupport a greater Number of 
 living Creatures, or produce a larger Quantity 
 of Corn is another Qacllion j to which I anfwer 
 in the Affirmative. For tho* every thing placed 
 upon the Surface of the Mountain, is fuppofed to 
 ftand perpendicular to the fubjacent Plane, yet 
 there is a greater Quantity of Earth, and a larger 
 Superficies, 
 
 PHAP.
 
 Chap. 10. of Univerfal Geography, 135 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Of the Differejice of Mountains and their Ex^ 
 tent, and particularly of Burnijig Mount aiiis, 
 
 PR P S IT ION I. 
 
 Some Mountains are of /mall Extent, and others run 
 out to a great Dijlance, 
 
 TH E latter Sort, called Ridges, or Chains of 
 Mountains, are found almoft in every Country 
 throughout the World ; and fuch might be account- 
 ed one continued Mountain, if it were not for fmall 
 Breaches or Paflages that fometimes intervene. 
 They are indifferently extended feveral Ways % 
 fome from North to South, others from Eaft to 
 Weft, and fome to other Points collateral to the 
 four Cardinal ones. 
 
 THE moft celebrated Ridges of Mountains 
 are, 
 
 I . THE Alps, which feparate Italy from the 
 neighbouring Provinces, extending themfelves over 
 vaft Tratfts of Land, and ftretching out their 
 Arms, or Branches, into diftant Countries, viz, 
 thro* France to Spain, where they are called the 
 Pyreneans ; and thro* Rhcetia, [i. e. the Country of 
 the Grifons'] where they are called the Rhetian 
 Mountains ; alfo thro* Hungary, where they are 
 named the Hungarian Mountains ; and above DaU 
 matia, where they receive the Name of the Dal- 
 matian Mountains , from whence they are ftretch- 
 
 K4 cd
 
 136 ^he Ahfolute Tart S e c T. III. 
 
 ed thro' Macedonia into \Romania\ and even to 
 the Coaft of the Black-Sea. But bccaufe there is 
 in Daimatia a confiderable Space between the Alps 
 and the DalmaUan Mountains, the former is reck- 
 oned by fome to end here. Neverthelefs they fend 
 out one continued Ridge, which paffeth, with a 
 winding Courfe, in the Form of a Half-Moon, 
 thro' the whole Length of 7/^/)', and divides it 
 into two Parts even to the Streights of \MeJjuia\ ; 
 tho' it does not run every where directly for- 
 ward in one Trad, but here and there fends out 
 collateral Branches that run fideways from it. Se- 
 veral ot thefe Mountains are diftinguifhed by par- 
 ticular Names, by Reafon of their Altitude, or 
 for fome other Caufe, as Monte MaJJo, GauruSy 
 Monte di Capua, the burning Mount Vefu- 
 'viiis. Sec. 
 
 2. THE Ridge of Mountains in Peru [called 
 the Andes] is the longeft in the World. They run 
 in a continued Tra<5l about 800 Gennan Miles, 
 (whereof 15 rrjake a Degree j thro* all South Ame- 
 rica, from the Equator to the Streights of Ma- 
 gellan, and feparate the Kingdom of Peru, from 
 other Provinces. And fo high are the Tops of 
 thefe Mountains, that they are reported to tire the 
 Birds in their Flight over them ; there being but 
 one only Paffiige over them as yet difcovered, 
 and that very difficult. Many of them are covered 
 with perpetual Snow, as well in Summer as in 
 Winter. The Tops of others are hid in the 
 Clouds, and fome are raifed above the middle 
 Regionof the Air. StwtvdX ol t\\z Spaniards, with 
 their Horfes, have fuddcnly expired upon the 
 Tops of thefe Mountains, in their Paffage from 
 Nicaragua to Peru, and growing ftifF with the 
 Coki, they, in a Monnent, became immoveable 
 as Statues. The Caufe of which feems to be 
 sp other than the y/ant of fuch Air as was fit 
 
 3 ^P^
 
 Chap. io. of Unherfal Geography. 137 
 
 for Refpiration. There are alfo found among this 
 Ridge of Mountains feverai that are fulphureoui and 
 fmoaking. 
 
 3. T H E R E are many other Ridges of Moun"- 
 tains between Peru and Brafi!^ which are ilretched 
 out thro' unknown Countries as far as the Streights 
 of Magellan^ where their Tops are covered with 
 continual Snow, tho' they lie in the Latitude of 52 
 Degrees. " 
 
 4. T O thefe may be added the Ridges of Moun- 
 tains in Canada^ and Nezv England, whofe Tops 
 are alfo perpetually covered with Snow, tho' they 
 are not fo famous as the reft. 
 
 5. MOUN'T Tatirus, in ylfia, was antiently 
 thought to make a Part of the largeft and nobleft- 
 Ridge of Mountains in the World. It begins to 
 fhew itfelf in the hcjfdr Afia near \lhe Gulpb of 
 Statalia], and runs from Weft to Eaft, under fe- 
 verai Names, thro' divers large Kingdoms, and 
 Countries, even to India •, whereby all Jfia is di- 
 vided into two Parts, of which that on the North 
 Side is called Jfia intra Taiirum, and that on the 
 South, Afia extra Taiirum. This Ridge is as it 
 were fenced on either Side with feverai others that, 
 accompany it, among which the moft celebrated 
 arc the Greater and Lejfer Antitaurus, which fepa- 
 rate the Greater Armenia from the hejjer ; alfo 
 where Taurus itfelf paffes between Armenia and 
 Mefopotamia, it fends forth many Branches towards 
 the North and South. 
 
 6. T H E Mountain If?iaus is extended North 
 and South, and alfo Eaft and Weft, in the Form of 
 a Crofs. The North Portion of it, is now called 
 Alkai : It is ftretched out fouthward as far as the 
 Borders of India, to the very Head of the River 
 Ganges, and is computed in Length about 400 Gd-r- 
 f.»?^» Miles, It divides [ Aft atic Tartar -j] into two 
 
 Parts
 
 138 The Abfolute Part Sect. III. 
 
 Parts, formerly calJed Scyibia intra & extra L 
 mailm. 
 
 7. THE Mountains of Caucafus are about 50 
 Miles in Breadth, and extend themfelves length- 
 way from the Confines of the Cafpian-Sea towards 
 the Euxine-Sea. They are a fure Sea- Mark to thofe 
 that fail in the Cafpian-Sea^ to fteer their Courfe 
 by. An Arm of them reaches to Mount Ararat 
 in Armenia, upon which it is faid, in Sacred Scrip- 
 ture, the Ark of Noah reded j and the Turks and 
 Perfiam will have it to be preferved there to this 
 very Day. Ararat is alfo not far from Mount 
 Taurus^ v/here all thefe Mountains are contiguous. 
 We fhall treat of the Height of Mount Caucafus 
 in Chapter xxx. 
 
 8. THE long Range of Hills in China, which 
 comprehends the Damafian Mountains of the An- 
 tients towards the Weft, and the Ottorocoran to- 
 wards the North, This Range is compofed of a 
 vaft Number of Mountains, not altogether conti- 
 nued, but here and there affording a Paffage be- 
 tween them. The Mountains of Cambodia feem al- 
 fo to be a Part of this Range. 
 
 9. T H E Mountains of Arabia are drawn out 
 in three Ranks, whereof the holy Mount Sinai is a 
 Part. 
 
 10. MOUNT Atlas, m Africa, is made famous 
 by the innumerable Fi6lions of the Greek Poets. It's 
 Rife is near the weftern Shore of Africa, from 
 whence it ftretches itfelf to the eaftward as far 
 as the Confines of Egypt. Moft of the Rivers in 
 this Continent take their Rife from it ; and tho' it 
 lie in the Torrid Zone it is cold and covered with 
 Snow in feveral Places. 
 
 11. THE Mountains of the Moon, near Monomo- 
 tapa in Africa, fendeth out feveral Branches, which 
 furround almoft all Monomotapa, and are diftin- 
 guiflied by divers Names, as Zethy [Gil^el, Caph,]
 
 Chap, i o. of Untverfal Geography. 130 
 
 &c. There are almoft innumerable other Branches 
 in Africa^ feparated one from another only by nar- 
 row Pafiages, infomuch that they all feem to be 
 Parts of the fame Range of Mountains. 
 
 12. THE Riphean Mountains, in Europe^ run 
 from the White-Sea^ or Mufcovian-Bay^ to the 
 Mouth of the River Oh'j •, from whence they are 
 called fometimes by that Name. The Mufcovites 
 call them IVeliki Kamefiypoys^ 1. e. ihe great fiony 
 Girdle ; becaufe they fuppofe them to encompals 
 the whole Earth. Near thefe there is another 
 Ridge of Mountains, which the RuJJtans call Joe- 
 goria ; they reach from the South Borders of Tar~ 
 tary to the Northern Ocean, Several Rivers take 
 their Rife from them, viz. Witfagda, Neem^ Wiffera, 
 and Petfiora. Thefe are none of them well re- 
 prefented in Maps, and very often totally omit- 
 ted. Alfo between Ruffia and Siberia there are, 
 befides thefe, a triple Range of Mountains run- 
 ning from North to South. The firft of thefe the 
 Ruffians call Cofvinfcoy Camen^ v/hich is two Days 
 in pafTing over. The next to this (fome Vallies 
 intervening) is called Chirginfcoy Camen, v/hich is 
 alfo two Days Journey over. The third, being 
 higher than the refb, is named Podvinfcoy Camen^ 
 and in feveral Places is all the Year round co- 
 vered with Snow and Fogs, fo that a PafTage is, 
 with great Difficulty, obtained in four Days. 
 The Town of Vergateria, in Siberia, is near this 
 Range. 
 
 13. [THE D of rine Hills,] which kpavdtt Swe- 
 den from Norway, arife near the South Pro- 
 montory of Norway, and proceed in feveral 
 Ranges to the fartheft Part of Lapland, being al- 
 fo diftinguifhed by feveral Names, as Fillefel, Do' 
 frefiel, &c. 
 
 14. THE Hercynian Mountains in Gertnany 
 [ now Fiechtelherg Mountains] furround Bohemia ; 
 
 and
 
 1 40 ^be Ahfolute Tart Sect. III. 
 
 and various Ways extend themfelves into divers 
 Countries where they have different Names. In 
 the Dukedom of Brunfwic they retain fomething 
 of their antient Name, being called Der Hark 5 
 Mount BruBcrm is a Part of this Kidge. 
 
 PROPOSITION 11. 
 
 In inofl IJIandSy and Parts of the Continent that run 
 out into the Sea, the Ridges of Mountains are fo 
 fituated as to take their Courfe thro' the middle of 
 them, and divide them into two Parts. 
 
 I N Scotland the Grampian Mountain for Granf- 
 lain as the Inhabitants call it) runs from Weft to 
 Eaft tho' the middle of" this Peninfula •, and di- 
 vides it into two Parts, which very much differ 
 both in the Nature of the Soil, and the Inhabi- 
 tants. So in the Iflands of Sumatra, Borneo, Lu- 
 conia, Celebes, Cuba, Tlifpaniola, &c. Chains of 
 Mountains are found which arife gradually to a 
 great Height, from the Sea-Shore to the Inland 
 Parts. 
 
 THUS the Mountain Gate, in India, begins 
 at the Extremity of Mount Caucafus, and reaches 
 to Cape Comorin -, whereby the Peninfula of India 
 is divided, from North to South, into two Parts, 
 whereof that Part which lies on this Side Gate, 
 towards the Weft, is called Malabar -, and the other 
 beyond the Mountain towards the Eaft is called 
 Cormandel. Part of the fame Ridge of Mountains 
 is alfo ftretched out into that Part of India which 
 is now called Bengal, and from thence thro' Pegu, 
 Siam, to the extream Parts of Malacca. 
 
 THERE is the like Ridge of Mountains in 
 the Peninfula of Cambaya, and in the Ifland, or 
 Peninfula, of Cahfornia ; alfo in the procurrent 
 Parts of Africa, there is a Ridge v/hich reaches 
 
 from
 
 Chap, i o . of TJniverJal Geography. 141 
 from the Morafs of Zaire to the Cape of Good-Hope. 
 In Italy there are the Apennine Mountains ; and 
 the like in Corea^ i^c. 
 
 A S to the Origin of thefe Ridges, whether they 
 are of the fime Date with the Earth, or were af- 
 terwards generated from natural Ciufes, is uncer- 
 tain ia). 
 
 -■ -, PRO. 
 
 (a) The learned DrTif 05^- 
 <:ard, in his Effay abovemen- 
 tioned Page 2oO, proves, 
 that there were Rivers as well 
 as Sea in the Antediluvian 
 Earth, from the great quan- 
 tities of River-Shells that were 
 then brought forth, and left in- 
 clofed among others in the 
 Strata of Stone, is'c. And 
 if there were Rivers, there 
 muft needs alfo have been 
 Mountains ; for they will not 
 flow unlefs upon a Declivity, 
 and their Sources be raifcJ a- 
 bovethe Earth's ordinary Sur- 
 face, fo that they may run 
 upon a Defcent. Mofe$ alfo, 
 treating upon the Deluge, 
 faith in Gen. vii. 19. i^c. 
 And the nvaters pre~oaileci ex- 
 ceedingly upon the earth ; and 
 all the high hills that <v:ere 
 under the <vjhole heaven ivere 
 cavered. Fifteen cubits up- 
 nvard, did the nxaters prevail', 
 and the mountains nvere cover- 
 ed. And all fiejh died: — - 
 all in mihofe nojlrils vuas the 
 breath of life. Here he 
 , plainly makes thefe Antedilu- 
 ; vian Mountains the Standards 
 ' and Meafures of the Rife of 
 
 • the Water; which they could 
 
 • never have been, had they not 
 ' been Handing when it did fo 
 [ rifeand overpower the Earth. 
 
 His Ip.tention, in the whole, 
 is to acquaint us, that all 
 Land Creatures whatever, 
 both Men, Quadrupeds, 
 Birds, and Infefts, periflied, 
 and were deflroyed by the 
 Water ; Noah, only excepted, 
 and they that ivere nviih 
 him in the ark. And at the 
 feme Time to let us fee the 
 Truth and ProbaLility of the 
 Thing : to convince us there 
 was no Way for any one to 
 efcapc, and particularly thac 
 none could fave themfelves 
 by climbing up to theTops of 
 the Mountains that then were» 
 he allures us that they, even 
 thehigheftof them, were all 
 covered and buried under- 
 water. Now to fay that 
 there was then no Mountains 
 and that this is meant of 
 Mountains that were not for- 
 med 'till afterwards, makes it 
 not intelligible, and indeed 
 hardly common Senfe." 
 Thus far Dr JVoodvjard. But 
 at the univerfal Deluge, the 
 Mountains in general were de- 
 faced, levelled, anddiflblved, as 
 it were, and promifcuoully mix- 
 ed with the Waters, which ran- 
 facked and tore up their very 
 Foundations, fo as to make one 
 common confufedMafs. There- 
 fore thefe Mountains ofour pre- 
 fent
 
 142 1'he Ahjolute Fart Sect. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 To enumerate the Mountains famous for their Height. 
 
 I. THE PikeofTeneriff, which the Inhabitants 
 call Pico de Terraira, is accounted the higheft 
 Mountain in the World ; and it's Top is plainly 
 perceived at Sea 60 Miles before we come up 
 to it, as v/as faid in the preceding Chapter. There 
 is no afcending it but in the Months of July and 
 Augujt, for at other Times it is covered with 
 Snow, tho' there is never any feen in the rell of 
 the Ifland, or in the neighbouring Canaries. It's 
 Top doth plainly appear to be above the Clouds, 
 which are often feen to furround the middle Part -, 
 but becaufe it is ufually covered with Snow, it 
 is certainly, not elevated above the middle Region 
 of the Air. It requires three Days to afcend this 
 Mountain, whofe Vertex is not fharp pointed but 
 plain ; from whence, on a clear Day, one may 
 lee diftinftly the reft of the Canaries, tho' fome of 
 them are fifty Miles remote from it. In the two 
 Months abovemention'd great QLiintities of ful- 
 phureous Stones are dug out of the Side of this 
 Mountain, and carried into Spain. Scaliger writes, 
 that this Mountain continually vomited out burn- 
 
 fent Earth, are not the fame juft as the fubfiding Waters 
 with the Antedihivian Aloun- happened to dafh out, or pile 
 tains, but were formed at the up, their Particles, by wafhing 
 Deluge, out of the confufed and hollowing their Sides, or 
 Heaps of feveral forts of Mat- carrying the loofe and unfet- 
 ter, which (when the Caufe of tied Earth, towards the Drains 
 the general Devaftation ccafed) and Sluices which were natu- 
 began to curdle as it were, and rally formed to carry the Wa- 
 fettle in innumerable Forms and ter downward to the Ocean. 
 Shapes ; fomc extending them- How the Antediluvian Moun- 
 felves into long Ridges, others tains were formed fee Chapter 
 into round and rugged Shapes ; vii. Note (/) above.
 
 Chap. 10. cf U?iiverfal Geography. 14^ 
 
 ing Coals formerly (b). I am ignorant from what 
 Author he had it, and never found any fuch Thing 
 in thofe I have read. 
 
 2. IN one of the Jzores, or Weftern Iflands, 
 near the Ifland Fa^al^ there is found a Mountain 
 called the Pike of St George ^ from whence the Ifland 
 itfelf is called Pico. It is fliid to be as high as the 
 Pike of Teneriff, or fomething higher. 
 
 3. T HE Ridge of the Cor<^i/fr«j, ov Andes, in 
 South- America J which feparates Peru from other 
 Countries, is one of the vafteft and higheft Moun- 
 tains in the W orld. It is extended from the Streights 
 of Magellan to Panama. 
 
 4. AE T N A, a. Mountain in Sicily ; when it caft- 
 eth forth Fire the Sparks are ken from the IHand 
 of Malta, from whence it is fuppofed to be at lead 
 a [German] Mile high -, but that this is a Decep-- 
 tion of Sight we have lliewed in the preceding 
 Chapter. 
 
 5. HECLA a Mountain in Iceland. 
 
 6. P ICO de Adam in the Ifland of Ceylon. 
 
 7. MOUNT Bru5ieru5 and Abnoba in Germany.. 
 
 8. MOUNT Figenojamma in Japan is thought 
 to reach above the Clouds. 
 
 9. MOUNT Caucafus was thought to be of 
 an incredible Height by the Antients. 
 
 [h) It is very likely this fine Brimftone, or Sulphur, 
 
 Mountain might burn former- llicking to them. Alfo at the 
 
 ly, for there is a Crattr, or Bottom there are Stones which 
 
 'i "unnel, on the Top, that pro- fhine, and look like Drofs that 
 
 duceth a fort of fulphureous comes out of a Smith's Forge ; 
 
 Earth, which, being rolled up which, without Doubt, was 
 
 long-ways, and put to a Can- occafioned by the cxtream Heat 
 
 die, will burn like Brimftone ; of the Place they came from, 
 
 and feveral Places upon the This is teftilied by Mr Edan 
 
 Ledges of the Pike are even who made a Journey thither in 
 
 now burning or fmoaking ; and the Year 171 5, which fee in 
 
 infome Places, if you turn up Philof. Tranf. No. 345. Page 
 
 the Stones, you wiU find very 317. 
 
 10. PELION
 
 J 44 ^^'^ Abjolutc Part Sect. III. 
 
 10. PELION [now Pctras] a Mountain in 
 Macecbnia. Plut^ lays, that the Mathematiciaa 
 Dicearchus Slculus meallired this Mountain by the 
 Command, and at the Expencc, of fome Princes, 
 and found it to be 1250 Paces, that is 10 Fur- 
 longs, or 7 of a German Mile : and Geminus tells 
 us, that the flime Dicearchus found the Mountain 
 Cyllene to be of the fame Altitude. 
 
 11. MOUNT Jihos was thought by Mela 
 to be lb high as to rife above the higheft Clouds, 
 and therefore never to be rained upon. This O- 
 pinion had it's Rife from the Alhes which were 
 left upon the Altars, erected at the Top of it, 
 being not wafhed av/ay, but found upon a Heap as 
 they had been left. It runs out with a long Ridge 
 into the Sea. Xerxes, when he made his Expedi- 
 tion to Greece, cut thro' this Mountain in that 
 Place where it is joined to the Continent, and let 
 the Sea in at the Breach, whereby it was made 
 navigable. 
 
 12. MOUNT Olympus in /#r Jfia, of which 
 we have treated in the preceding Chapter. 
 
 13. CASIUS [now Lifon] a Mountain in yf- 
 Jia, which is faid by PUny to the four Miles high. 
 
 14. MOUNT H^jnus [now Balkan'] is faid by 
 Martianus Capella to be fix Miles high. 
 
 15. THE Rock of Stjimethra, Strabo tells us, 
 was found to be fifteen Furlongs high •, and the 
 Rock Sodiane twice the Height. 
 
 16. MOUNT Atlas in Africa, which v/e 
 fpoke of before. 7 he Poets feigned it fo high, 
 that it fupported the Heavens upon it's Shoulders ; 
 but Experience hath taught us that it's Height is 
 not fo very confidcrable. 
 
 PRO^
 
 Chap. io. of JJjiiverfal Geography. 14^ 
 
 PROPOSIl^ION IV. 
 
 To enumerate the remaining Differences cf Mountains» 
 
 I N the former Propofitions we have explained 
 three Differences, viz. 
 
 1. SOME are extended in a long Trad, o- 
 thers are bounded with narrow Limits. 
 
 2. SOME run thro' the middle of Countries, 
 others are extended here and there in them. 
 
 3. SOME are of a remarkable Altitude, o- 
 thers of a middle, and fome very low. To thefe 
 we may add, 
 
 4. SOME are fandy, others rocky, fome 
 chalky, and others of Clay, i^c. 
 
 5. SOME produce Fountains and Heads of 
 Rivers, others are without them. 
 
 6. SOME are adorned with Woods, others 
 are bare and deftitute of Trees. 
 
 7. S O M E are burning and fmoking, others 
 without Fire or Smoke. 
 
 8. SOME Mountains yield Metals, as Gold, 
 Silver, Iron, &c. others produce 110 fort of 
 Metal. 
 
 9. S O M E are continually covered with Snow, 
 others have none in Summer. 
 
 P RO P O SITTO N V. 
 
 To enumerate the lurning Mountains, and fuch as, caji 
 out Fire. 
 
 SUCH Mountains are called Vulcanos, a Name 
 lirft ufed by the Portuguese Sailors, and now they 
 are commonly fo called. 
 
 I. TH E moft famous of thefe is Mount jEtna^ 
 {now Gibe!) in Sicily, whofc Eruptions of Flame 
 
 VOL. I. L and
 
 146 ■ 'J'he Abjhlute Part S e c T . 1 1 1 ^ 
 
 and Smoke are difcovered at a great Diftance, by 
 tlioie that fail on the Mccliterrarida/i, even as far as 
 the HiirboLir of Malta^ which is 40 German Miles 
 trom the Shore of Sicil-j. Tho' Fire and Smoke 
 are continually vomited up by it, yet at fome 
 particular Times, it rages with greater Vio- 
 lence. In the Year 1536 it fliook all Siaiy, from 
 the firft: to the twelfth of Maj : after that, there 
 was heard a molt horrible bellowing aiKl crack- 
 ing, as if great Guns had been iired : then were 
 a great many Houfes overthrown throughout the 
 whole Ifland. When this Storm had continued a- 
 bout eleven Days, the Ground opened in feveral 
 Places, and dreadful Gapings appeared here and 
 there, from which ifilied forth Fire and Flame 
 •with great Violence, which in four Days confumed 
 and burnt up all that were within five Leagues of 
 JEtna. A little after, the Funnel, which is on the 
 Top of the Mountain, dilgorged a great Quantity 
 of hot Embers and Allies, for three whole Days 
 together, which v/ere not only dilperled through- 
 out the whole Ifland, but alio carried beyond Sea 
 to //^/y ; and feveral Ships that were fiiiling to Ve- 
 mce^ at 200 Leagues diftance fuffered Damage (c). 
 Farellus hath given us an Hirtorical Account of the 
 Eruptions of this Mountain, and fays, that the 
 Bottom of it is 100 Leagues in Circuit. 
 
 2. HECLA^ a Mountain in /cv/tfw J, rages fome- 
 times with as great Violence as /Etna, and cafts out 
 great Stones. The imprifoned Fire often, by want- 
 ing Vent, caufcs horrible Sounds, like Lamenta- 
 tions and Rowlings, which make fome credulou* 
 People think it the Place of Hell, where the Souls 
 of the wicked are tormented. 
 
 _ (<:) Mr Olknherge hath alfo na, which fee in Philof. Treuif- 
 
 given us an Hiltorical Account, No. 48. Pag. 967. 
 of the Eruptions of Mount ^t- 
 
 3 3. VESUVIUS
 
 Chap. io. of XJniverfal Geography. 147 
 
 0. VESUVIUS {nozv Monte de So?na) in Cam- 
 fania, not far from the Town of Naples tho' it be 
 planted with mod fruitful Vines, and at other 
 Times yieldeth the beft Mufcadd Wine ; yet it is 
 very often annoyed with violent Eruptions {d), 
 
 Dion 
 
 {rf) TJjp.t the Reader may 
 ha<ve a letter Idea of thefe bui n- 
 ing Mountains, and their dreci l- 
 ful Eruptions . I Jhall tranfcrlhe 
 (from Philof. Tranf. No. 3 :4. 
 Pag. 708.^ an ExtraSI of a La- 
 ter of Mr EdwarJ Berkeley 
 from Naples, gi-uing an Account 
 of the Eruptions of Fire and 
 Smoke, from Mount Vefuvius. 
 Comjnunicated to the Royal So- 
 ciety hy Dr John Arbuthnot, 
 M. D. and R. S.S. as follo-j:s : 
 
 ^ Jprili-j. i7i7.Withmuch 
 
 * Difficulty I reached the Top of 
 
 * Fefwvius, in which I fawa vail 
 
 * aperture full of fmoke, which 
 
 * hindred the feeing it's Depth 
 
 * and Figure. I heard within 
 
 * that horrid Gulph certain odd 
 
 * Sounds, which feemed to pro- 
 
 * ceed from the Belly of the 
 
 * Mountain ; a fort of Murmur- 
 
 * ing. Sighing, Throbbing, 
 
 * Churning, dalhing (as it were) 
 
 * of Waves, and between whiles 
 
 * a Noife like that of Thunder 
 
 * or Cannon, which was con- 
 
 * ftantly attended with clatter- 
 
 * ing, like that of Tiles falling 
 
 * from the Tops of Houfes on 
 
 * the Streets. Sometimes as the 
 
 * Wind changed, the Smol:e 
 
 * grew thinner, difcovering a 
 
 * very ruddy Flame, and the 
 
 * Jaws of the Pan, or Crater, 
 
 * ftreaked with red, and feveral 
 
 * ftiades of Yellow. After an 
 
 * Hour's ftay, the Smoke being 
 
 * moved by the Wind, givs 
 ' us lliort and partial Pro? 
 ' fpefts of the great Mollovv in 
 ■ the flat Bottom, of which I 
 ' cculddifcern two Furnaces, al- 
 
 * m( 11 contiguous; that on the: 
 
 * left, feeniing about 3 Yards 
 
 * in Diameter, giOwed-'A'ith red 
 
 * Flame, and th.'-ew up red hot 
 
 * Stones, with a hideous Noife, 
 
 * which as they fell back caufed 
 ' the foreinentioned clatWinp-, 
 
 * May 8. In the Morning I af- 
 ' cended to the Top of Vefwvi' 
 ' us a fecond Time, and found 
 
 * a dilForent Face of Things. 
 ' The Smoke afcending up- 
 
 * right, gave a full Profpefl of 
 ' the Crater, which as I cou'd 
 ' judge, is about a Mile ia 
 ' Circumference, and a hun- 
 ' dred Yards deep. A conical 
 ' Mount had been formed fince 
 ' my laft Vifit in the middle 
 ' of the Bottom- This Mount 
 ' I could fee was made of the 
 ' Stones thrown up and fallen 
 ' back again into the Crater. 
 ' In this new Hill remained 
 
 * the two Mouths or Furnaces 
 ' already mentioned : that on 
 ' our left Hind was in the Fer- 
 ' tex of the Hill, which it had 
 ' formed round i":, and raged 
 ' more violently than before, 
 ' throwing up every three or 
 ' four Minutes, witii a dread- 
 
 * ful bellowing, a valt Num- 
 
 * ber of red liot Stones, fome- 
 
 L 3i times
 
 148 I'he Ahfolute Tart Sect. III. 
 
 Dion CaJJius relates, that in the Reign o^ Vefpafiariy 
 there was fuch a dreadful Eruption of impetuous 
 Flames, that great quariticies ot Afhes and hilphu- 
 reous Smoke v/ere carried not only ro Ro;fie by the 
 Wind, but alio, beyond the Mediterranean, into 
 
 Africa 
 
 times, in Appearance, above 
 1000, and atlealt 300, Foot 
 higher than my Head as I 
 llood upon the Brink. But 
 there being little or no V/ind, 
 they fell b.i.ck perpendicular- 
 ly into the Craier, increaiing 
 the conic'.I Heap. The other 
 Mouth was lower in the Side 
 of the fame new formed Hill, 
 I could difcern it to be filled 
 with red hot liquid Matter, 
 like that in the Furnace of a 
 Glafs-houfe, which raged 
 and wrought, as the Waves 
 of the Sea, caufirg a fiiort a- 
 brupt Noife, like what may 
 be imagined to proceed from 
 a Sea of Quickhlver, dafhing 
 amnng uneven Rocks. Tliis 
 Huff would fometimes fpew 
 over, and run down the con- 
 vex Side of the conical Hill, 
 and appearing at firll red hot, 
 it changed Colour, and hard- 
 ned as it cooled, ihewing the 
 firft Rudiments of an Erup- 
 tion, or, if I may fo fay, an 
 Eruption in Miniature. Elad 
 the Wind driven in our Face, 
 we had been in no Anall 
 Danger of Itifling by the ful- 
 phureous Smoke, or being 
 knocked, on the Head, by 
 lumps of molten Minerals, 
 which we faw had fometimes 
 fallen on the Brink of the 
 Crater, upon thofe fhot from 
 the Gulph at the Bottom. 
 
 But as the Wind was favour- 
 able, I had an Opportunity 
 to furvey this odd Scene for 
 above ar: Hour and a half to- 
 gether; during which it was 
 very obfervable, that all the 
 VoIHesof bmoke. Flame, and 
 burning Stoi.Ci, came only out 
 of the Hole to our left, v/hile 
 the liquid fluff in the other 
 Mouth wrought and over- 
 flov.ed, as hath been already 
 defcribed. June 5. After a 
 horrid Noife, the Mountain 
 was fecn at Naples to fpew a 
 little out of the Crater. The 
 fame continued the 6th. The 
 7th, nothing was obferv.d 
 till within two Hours of 
 Night, when it began a hi- 
 deous bellowing, which con- 
 tinued all that Night, and 
 the next Day till Noon, cauf- 
 ing the Windows, and, as 
 fome affirm, the very Houfes 
 in Naples to fliake. From 
 that time it fpewed valt 
 Quantities of molten Stuff" to 
 the South, which llreamed 
 down the Side of the Moun- 
 tain, like a Pot boiling over. 
 This Evening I returnd from 
 a Voyage thro' Apulia, and 
 was furprized, paffmg by the 
 North Side of the Mountain, 
 to fee a great Quantity of 
 ruddy Smoke lie along a huge 
 Traa of Sky over the River 
 of moltea §tuft', wjiich was 
 itfelf
 
 Chap. io. 
 
 Africa, and 
 
 were 
 
 ofVniverfal Geography^ 149 
 
 even into F-g'^pt. Moreover, Birds 
 fuffoCated in the Air, and fell down dead 
 upon the Ground, and Fillies periflied in the 
 neighbouring Waters, which were made hot and 
 intecled by it. There happened another Eruption 
 
 in 
 
 itfelf out of Sight. The 9th, 
 Vefwvius raged lefs violently ; 
 that Night we faw from 'Na- 
 ples, a Column of Fire fhoot 
 between whiles out of it's 
 Summit. The loth, when 
 we thought all would have 
 been over, the Mountain 
 grew very outrageous again, 
 roaring and groaning molt 
 dren.dfully. You cannot form 
 a jufter Idea of this Noife, in 
 the violent Fits of it, than 
 by imagining a mix'd Sound 
 made up of the raging of a 
 Tempeit, the murmur of a 
 troubled Sea, and the roaring 
 of Thunder and Artillery, 
 confufed all together. It was 
 very terrible, as we heard it 
 in the further End of Naples, 
 at the Diftance of above i 2 
 Miles. This moved my Cu- 
 riofity to approach the .Moun- 
 tain. Three or four of us 
 got into a Boat, and were fet 
 alTiore at Torre del Greco, a 
 Town fituated at the Foot of 
 Vefu'Vius to the South Weft, 
 whence we rode four or five 
 Miles before we came to the 
 burning River, which was a- 
 bout Midnight. The roaring 
 of the Vulcano grew exceed- 
 ing loud and horrible as we 
 approached. I obierved a 
 mixture of Colours in the 
 « Cloud over the Crater, green , 
 « yellow, red, and blue; there 
 f was lil^ewife a ruddy difmal 
 
 Light in the Air over that' 
 Trai'-.l of Land, where the 
 burning River flowed; Af>es 
 continually fhovvered on us 
 all the Way from the Sea- 
 Coaft. All which Circum- 
 ftances, fet off and augmen- 
 ted by the horror and iiience 
 of the Night, made a Scetie 
 the moil uncommon and a- 
 lloniihing I ever faw.? which 
 grew ftill more extraordinary 
 us we came nearer the Stream. 
 Imagine a vail Torrent of li- 
 quid Fire rolling from the 
 I'op down the Side of the 
 Mountain, and with irrefilli- 
 ble Fury bearing down and 
 confuming Vines. Olives, 
 Fig-trees, Floufes, in a word, 
 every Thing that flood in it's 
 Way. The largeft Stream 
 feemed half a Mile broad at 
 leail, and five Miles long. I 
 walked fo far before my Com- 
 panions up the Aiountain, a- 
 long the Side of the River of 
 Fire, that I was obliged to 
 retire in hafte, the fulphure- 
 ous Steam having fuprized 
 me, and almoft taken away 
 my Breath. During our Re- 
 turn, which was about threa 
 o'clock in the Morning, we 
 conftantly heard the murmur 
 and groaning of the Moun- 
 tain, which between whiles 
 would burft out into louder 
 Peals, throwing up huge 
 fpouts of Fire, and burning 
 
 ti 3 ♦ Stones,
 
 150 ^he Abjohte Fart Sect. III. 
 
 in MarUaW Time, which he elegantly dcfcribes 
 in one of his Epgrams^ and laments the fiid Change 
 of the Mountain, which he faw firft in it's Ver- 
 dure, and imm.cdiately after black with Afhes and 
 Embers. When the Burning ceafed, the Rain and 
 Dew watered the Surface of the Mountain, and 
 made thefe fulphureous Afhes and Embers fruitful, 
 fo that they produced a large Increafe of excellent 
 "Wine-, but when the Mountain began to burn 
 again, and to difgorge Fire and Smoke afrefli 
 (which fometimes happened within a few Years^ 
 then ^were the neighbouring Fields burnt up, and 
 the High-v/ays made dangerous to Travellers. 
 
 4. A Mountain in Java, not far from the Town 
 of Panacura, in the Year 1586, was fhattered to 
 Pieces by a violent Eruption of glowing Sulphur, 
 ftho' it had never burnt before) whereby fas it was 
 reported) looco People perifhed in the underland 
 Fields : it threw up large Stones, and caft them as 
 far as Pancras, and continued for three Days to 
 throw out fo much black Smoke, mixed with 
 
 * Stones, which falling down 
 
 * a^in, refemblcd the Stars in 
 
 * cur Rockets. Sometimes I 
 
 * obfcrved two, at others three, 
 
 * dillinft Columns of Flame, 
 
 * and fometimes one vafl one, 
 
 * that feemed to fill the whole 
 
 * Crater. Thefe burning Co- 
 
 * lumns, and the fiery Stones, 
 
 * feemed to be fhot 1 000 Foot 
 ^ perpendicular above the Sum- 
 
 * mit of the Vukano. The 1 1 th 
 
 * at Night, I obferved it from 
 ^ a Terrafs at Naples, to throw 
 
 * up inceflantly a vaft Body of 
 
 * Fire and great Stones, to a 
 f furprifing Height. The i zth 
 f in the Momingj it darkened 
 
 * the Sun with Afhes and 
 f Snipke^ paufinc a fort of E- 
 
 clipfe. Horrid Bellowings, 
 this and the foregoing Day, 
 were heard at Naples, whi- 
 ther Part of the Allies alfo 
 reached. On the 13th, the 
 Wind changing, we faw a pil- 
 lar of black Smoke fhoot up- 
 right to a prodigious Height. 
 The 15th in the Alorning, 
 the Court and Walls of our 
 Houfe in Naples were covered 
 with Allies. In the Evening, 
 flame appeared on the moun- 
 tain thro' the cloud. The 1 yth, 
 the Smoke appeared muchdi- 
 minifhed, fat and greafy. The 
 1 8th, the whole Appearance 
 ended^ the Mountain remain- 
 ing perfedlly quiet without a- 
 * ny vifible Smoke or Flame.' 
 
 Flame
 
 Chap. 10. of U?iiverfal Geography. 151 
 
 Flame and hot Embers, that it darkened the Face 
 of the Sun, and made the Day appear as dark as 
 the Night. 
 
 5. MOUNT Gonnapi, in one of the Bandci 
 Iflands, when it had burnt for 1 7 Years together, 
 in /Ipril 1586, broke out with a terrible bellowing 
 Noife, and difgorged fuch large Quantities of great 
 Stones, and thick i'ulphureous burning Matter all 
 over the Sea and Land, that it threatned Deftru- 
 dtion to all that were near it. Hot AHies and Em- 
 bers were vomited out with fuch a Force, and in 
 fuch great Quantities, that they covered the great 
 Guns of the D/z/c/?, which were planted upon the 
 Walls of their Citadel, and rendered them unfer- 
 viceable. Red hor Stones above a Span long, 
 were call into the Sea, and fuch a Number of little 
 ones, that fmall Ships had fcarcely a free PafTage 
 out of the Harbour. The Water near the Shore 
 was heaved up, and feemed to boil for feveral 
 Hours, as if it had been fet over a Firej and 
 feveral dead Fillies were found floating upon the 
 Surfiice. 
 
 6. MOUNT Balaluanufn in Sumatra, vomi- 
 teth Flame and Smoke as jEtna doth. 
 
 7. T H E Ground in feveral Places in the Mo- 
 lucca Iflands belches out Fire with a raging Noife ; 
 but none are fo terrible as the Spiracle in the 
 Ifland Ternata. The Mountain, which is deep 
 and difficult to afcend, is covered towards the 
 Bottom with thick Woods, but the Top which is 
 elevated to the Clouds, is made bare and rugged 
 by the Fire. The Funnel is a vaft Hollow, which 
 goes Ihelving down, and by Degrees becomes lefs 
 and lefs, like the infide of an Amphitheatre ; from 
 whence, in Spring and Harvell Time, or about 
 the Equinoxes, when fome particular Winds blow, 
 efpecially from the North, there are caft forth, with 
 «a rurnbling Noife, Flames mixed with black 
 
 L ^ Smokcj
 
 152 ^be Ahfolute Part S e c T . 1 II. 
 
 Smoke, and hot Embers •, whereby all the Places 
 far and near are ftrewed with Afhcs, The Inhabi- 
 tants vifit it at fome certain Times of the Year, to 
 gather Sulphur, tho' in fome Places the Hill can- 
 not be afcended, but by Ropes faftned to Iron 
 Hooks. 
 
 8. There is an IQand about 6o Leagues from 
 the Moluccas^ (being one of thofe that belong to 
 the Aloors) which is ofcen all together fhaken with 
 Earthcjuakes and Erudations of Fire and Afhes in 
 abundance; fo that whole Rocks and Mountains 
 are often made red hot by the Heat of the fubter- 
 raneoas Fire, and burning Stones are blown up in- 
 to the Air, as large as the Trunks of Trees. 
 When there is a brifls.er Wind than ordinary, fuch 
 Clouds of Aflies are blown all over the Country, 
 that People labouring in the Fields are forced to 
 haften Flome, half covered with them •, and 
 Boars, and other living Creatures, are found buried 
 in them, alter the Storm is over. Fifhes near the 
 Sea Shore are poifoned with the Aflies, and fo are 
 the Inhabitants if they tafce any of the Water 
 wherewith they are mixed. This difafterous black 
 and poifonous Fire breaketh our, from the Top of 
 a Mountain, with a difmal rumbling Noife like 
 Thunder-claps, or the report of great Guns, and 
 bringeth up with it abundance of Aflies, and burnt 
 Pumice Stones. 
 
 9. T H E R E is a Mountain in Japan, which 
 continually vomiteth forth Flames ; where it is re- 
 ported the Devil fhews himfelf, furrounded with 
 a bright Cloud, to fome particular Perfons after 
 they have, for Performance of their Vows, kept 
 themfelves lean for a long Time. 
 
 10. THERE are feveral others Vulcanos in 
 the Japan Iflands ; about feventy Miles from Fi- 
 rando there is one, and in a fmall Ifland between 
 Tafiaxima and the Seven Sifters (Iflands fo named) 
 
 3 there
 
 Chap. io. of JJniverfal Geography. 153 
 
 there is another, which now and then is obferved 
 to burn, and at other Times to fmoke, 
 
 11. NEAR the Cape Spiritu San5io in Tandaya, 
 one of the Philippines^ there are found fome fmall 
 Vulcanos •, and one in Marinda, which is a Pare 
 of thefaid Iflands. 
 
 12. IN Nicaragua a Province of America^ thirty 
 Leagues from the Town of Leon, there is a Moun- 
 tain, of a vafl Height, which difgorgeth fuch 
 quantities of Flame, that they may be perceived 
 at ten Miles diftance. 
 
 13. IN the Peruvian Range of Mountains 
 Ccalled the Cordilleras) there are in feveral Places 
 burning Rocks and Mountains, fome vomiting 
 Fire and Flame, and others fmoaking ; efpecial- 
 ly thofe in Carrapa a Province o^ Popaiana^ which 
 are perceived in clear Weather to emit a deal of 
 Smoke. *" 
 
 14. NEAR Arequipa, a Town in Peru^ 
 about ninety Leagues from Lima, there is a Moun-* 
 tain which continually vomits fulphureous Fire, 
 which, the Inhabitants are afraid, will fome Time 
 or other buril and overthrow the Town adjacent 
 to it. 
 
 15. IN Peru, near the Vale CTiWt A Mulah alio ^ 
 about fifty Leagues from ^ito, there is a Vulcano, 
 or fulphureous Mountain, which, fome Time fince, 
 burft and threw out great Stones, with a dreadful 
 Noife, which frighted People even at a great Di- 
 ftance. 
 
 16. IN one of the Iflands called Papoys, which 
 La Maire difcovered Ctho' perhaps it be not an 
 Ifland, but is joined to the eaftern Shore o^ New 
 Guinea) there is a Mountain which, at that Time, 
 burnt and fmoked. 
 
 17. THERE are feveral Mountains (as the 
 ^ufc(Hji(es tell us) in the Country of the T'on-Gui- 
 
 fins^
 
 154 The Abjbluie Part Sect. III. 
 
 fins, upon the Eaft of the River Jenifia, fome 
 Weeks Journey from the River 03), which pro- 
 duce Vulcanos and fmoking Mountains. 
 
 1 8. THERE are alfo fome of this fort near 
 the River Fefida beyond the Country of the T^on- 
 Guifins. 
 
 ig. THERE is a Mountain in Fez, called 
 Beni-Gua-zeval, which hath a Cave in the Side 
 of it, that vomiteth out Fire. 
 
 20. IN Croatia y not far from the Sea- Shore 
 near the Town of Apollania, there is a rocky 
 Mountain, from whofe Top there often breaks out 
 Fire and Smoke -, and, in the adjacent Places, 
 ieveral of the Springs are hot. 
 
 THERE are alfo fome Mountains which 
 have left off burning -, fuch as that in the Ifland 
 ^ehnoda upon the Shore of Brafil, not far from 
 the Mouth of the Silver River, or Rio de la Plata, 
 which burnt formerly, but now ceafes. Likewife 
 the Mountains in Congo or Angola *, alfo thofe in the 
 Azores fefpecialy in 'Tercera and 5"/ Michael) which 
 ufed formerly to burn in feveral Places, but at 
 prefent only emit, now and then. Smoke and 
 Vapours -, whence they are annoyed with more 
 frequent Earthquakes. The IQand of St Helena 
 and Afienjion produce Earth which feems to be 
 compofed of Drofs, Afhes, and burnt Cinders j 
 fo that in Time pad it is probable the Mountains 
 in thefe Iflands bjrned ; and further, becaufe in 
 thefe, as well as in the Azores, there are found 
 fulphureous Earths and Slags, like the Recrements 
 of Smithy Coal, which are every Way fit to take 
 Fire, and make Smoke ; it will be no wonder if 
 new Vulcanos ihould, fome Time hence, be kind- 
 led and break forth in thefe Iflands •, for the Caufc 
 of thefe burning Mountains is a fulphureous and 
 
 bitumi»
 
 Chap, i o. of Ujiiverfil Geography. 1 5 r 
 
 bituminous Matter, which is contained and kind- 
 led in them {e). 
 
 [e) Earthquakes and Vulca- 
 nos are both produced from the 
 fame Caufe ; which may be thus 
 explained. Thofe Countries 
 which yield great ftore of Sul- 
 phur and Nitre, or where Sul- 
 phur is fublimed from the Py- 
 rites, are by far the moil inju- 
 red and incommoded by Earth- 
 quakes; for where there are fuch 
 Mines they muft fend up Exha- 
 lations, which meeting with fub- 
 terraneons Caverns, they muft 
 Hick to the Arches of them, as 
 Soot does to the Sides of our 
 Chimnies, where they mix 
 themfelves with the Nitre or 
 Saltpeter, which comes out of 
 thefe Arches, in like manner as 
 we fee it come out of the In- 
 fide of the Arch of a Bridge, 
 and fo makes a kind of Cruft 
 which will very eafily take Fire. 
 There are feveral ways by which 
 this Cruft may take Fire, njiz. 
 I . By the inflammable Breath of 
 the Pyrites, which is a kind of 
 Sulphur thatnaturally takes Fire 
 ofitfelf. 2. By a Fermentation 
 of Vapours to a degree of Heat, 
 equal to that of Fire and Flame. 
 3 . To the falling of fome great 
 Stone, which is undermined by 
 Water,and ftrikingagainft ano- 
 ther, produces fome Sparks 
 which fet Fire to the combufti- 
 ble Matter that is near ; which 
 being a kind of natural Gun- 
 Powder, at the Appulfe of the 
 Fire, goes off (if I may fo fay) 
 
 with a fudden Blaft or violent 
 Explofion, rumbling in the 
 Bowels of the Earth, and lift- 
 ing up the Ground above it, 
 fo as fomctimes to make mife- 
 rable Havock and Dellruftion, 
 'till it gets Vent or a Difcharge. 
 Burning Mountains and Vulca- 
 nos are only fo many Spiracles 
 ferving for the Difcharge of 
 this fubterranean Fire,when it 
 is thus preternaturallyaflembled. 
 And where there happens to be 
 fuch a Strufture and Confor- 
 mation of the interior Parts of 
 the Earth, that the Fire may 
 pafs freely and without Impedi- 
 ment from the Caverns therein, 
 it alTembles unto thefe Spiracles, 
 and then readily and ealily gets 
 out, from Time to Time, with- 
 out fliaking or difturbing the 
 Earth. But where fuch Com- 
 munication is wanting, or the 
 Paflages not fufficiently large 
 and open, fo that it cannot come 
 at the faid Spiracles without firft 
 forcing and removing all Ob- 
 ftacles, it heaves up and fhocks 
 the Earth, till it hath made it's 
 Ways to the Mouth of the Vul- 
 cano; where it ruftieth forth, 
 fometimes in mighty Flames, 
 with great Velocity, and a ter- 
 rible bellowing Noife. See 
 Woodward's EJfay Page 157, 
 IK^^. RohauWs Phyfics Part ^. 
 Chap. 9. 5ea. 23, 24. Philof- 
 Trail/. No 157. Pag. 512. 
 
 PRO'
 
 156 fhe Abfilute Tart Sect. III. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Some Ranges of Mountains afford no Apertures, as 
 others afford many, andfoine are difcontinued but 
 in one or two Places. 
 
 THESE Streights, or PafTages, were for- 
 merly called Thermop-jl^, of which the mod fa- 
 mous are, i. The 1hertnop)l^ of Mount Oeta [or 
 Bamna] in 'Thtffaiia, [now called Bocca de Lupo] 
 which gave Name to the reft. 2. The Cafpian 
 Streights, thro' which there is a Pafiage between 
 the Cafpian Mountains. 3. The Paflage liiro' the 
 Ridge of the Cordilleras in Peru. 4. The Paffage 
 thro' the Mountains on the Weft-fide of the Ara- 
 hian Gulph, by which Merchandize is carried from 
 Ah\ffinia into Arabia. 5. The two Paflages thro' 
 Moynt Caucafus^ ^c. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 lyhen a Mountain runs out into the Sea, or feems 
 \to Mariners'^ to overtop the reft of the Country, 
 it is called a Promontory, Cape, or Head -land, 
 The moft famous are^ 
 
 1 . T H E Cape of Good Hope at the extream 
 Point of Africa, which muft be doubled by thofe 
 that fail into India. 
 
 2. CAPE Vi^ory at the further end of the 
 Streights of Magellan. 
 
 3 . CAPE Verd, the moft weftern Point of Africa^ 
 where the Coaft begins to wind towards the Eaft. 
 
 4. CAPE Vincent in Spain. 
 
 5. THE Promontory of Atlas was, Tome 
 Ages ago, called a Head-land by Mariners, be- 
 caufe they fuppofed it unpaffable, or that if any 
 
 failed
 
 Chap. io. of Univerfal Geography. i^y 
 failed beyond it they could not return fafe ; where- 
 fore is was the utmoft Bound of their Navigation 
 on the African Coaft. Ocher Promontories may 
 be feen in Maps. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 To Mountains are oppofed Cbafms, deep Pits, and 
 Caves, which are found in fome Places of the 
 Earth, 
 
 T H E R E is a {linking fulphureous Cave in 
 Ireland, which was tbrmerly very famous, now- 
 called St Patricks Purgatory ; and in Italy there is 
 that called Grot t a del Cane (/). Leo Africanus 
 mentions one which emits Fire on a Mountain in 
 Fex, called Beni-gua-zeval. 
 
 I N Bardefay, an Ifland adjacent to the Princi- 
 pality of fVales in Britain, there is a Rock near 
 the Sea in which there is a Cave, unto which 
 if you apply your Ear, you will hear the Strokes 
 of a Hammer, the blowing of Bellows, and the 
 filing of Iron, as if it were in a Smith's Shop. 
 
 NOT far from the Town of Bejfe in Aquitain, 
 there is a Cave, called by the Natives Du Souley, 
 in which there is heard a Noife like Thunder in 
 the Summer Seafon. 
 
 I N feveral Places there are found among 
 Mountains, Vallies of fuch a prodigious Depth, 
 that they ftrike the Beholders with Horror, and 
 caufe a Giddinefs in the Head. 
 
 (f) See Sturmius Philof- pours which would otherwife, 
 
 Exercit. II. de Terra Mot. being imprifoned, occafion fre- 
 
 Chap. 3. where feme of the moft quent Succuflions, and dreadful 
 
 eminent Specus's are enumera- Con^ulfions of the Earth. See 
 
 ted, and fome of their Ufes, the Note abo^e. And for more 
 
 'viz. that they ferve for Spiracles to this purpofe, fee the Phih- 
 
 and Funnels to the Countries fophical Tranfadions, and French 
 
 where they are to vent and Memoirs ; pa£im. 
 difcharge the Damps and Va- 
 
 CHAP.
 
 1 3^ l^he Abfolute Part Sect. III. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Of Mines ^ Woods , and Defarts. 
 
 MINES, TVoods, 3.nd Dtfarls, make feveral 
 Tra6ls of the Earth remarkable, of which, 
 the' but little can be faid, yet it will not be unne- 
 ceffary for the more perfect Knowledge of the Parts 
 of the Earth's Superficies, to confider thefe Places, 
 and to trace out their Situations, which we fhall 
 briefly do in this Chapter. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 Mines are Places in the Earth, out of which Metals^ 
 Minerals, and other Kinds of Earth are dug. 
 
 S O many different Kinds of FolTils as there are, 
 fo many various Names have their Mines, viz. 
 Gold' Mines, Silver- Mines, Copper- Mines, Iron- 
 Mines, Coal- Mines, Salt- Mines, and fuchas produce 
 Gems, &c, 
 
 THE moft celebrated Gold and Silver-Mines, 
 are. 
 
 I. THOSE oiPeru, and Caftella del Oro, which 
 are the richefl in the World, yielding Gold and Sil- 
 ver in abundance, and not being deftitute of other 
 Metals i infomuch that the Natives of Peru, and 
 the Spaniards, ufed to boafl, that this Kingdom was. 
 fgunded upon Gold and Silver. Girava, a Spanifh 
 
 Writer
 
 C H A p. 1 1 . of JJ?iiverfal Geography. j ^^ 
 
 Writer affirms, that there were formerly Mines 
 about the Town of ^dto, which produced more 
 Gold than Earth. And when the Spaniards made 
 their firft Expedition into this Golden Country, they 
 found leveral Houfes, efpecially in the Regal City 
 CufcOy which were all covered over within and with- 
 out with Plates of mafTy Gold. And the Officers 
 of the Peruvian Forces, not only wore Silver Ar- 
 mour, but all their Arms were made of pure Gold. 
 I'he moft rich and advantageous Mine of Silver is 
 in the Mountains of Potoji^ wl^kere 20000 Work- 
 men are daily employed to dig it, and carry it up 
 at le^ll 400 Steps. Thefe Mines produce that valt 
 Quantity of Gold and Silver, which the King of 
 Spain receives out of America every Year, to the 
 Mortification of other Kings and Potentates i and 
 which, he therefore keeps fortified with ftrong 
 Forts and Garrifons. 
 
 2. T H E R E are excellent rich Mines of Silver 
 in the Japan Iflands, whence they are called by the 
 Spaniards^ the Silver Iflands. There are alio Ibme 
 Mines of Gold found there j but thefe are not fo 
 rich as formerly. 
 
 3. THERE were more plentiful Gold-Mines 
 formerly in Arabia^ than at prefent. 
 
 4. I N the Mountains of Perfta, and in China^ • 
 there are fome Silver-Mines. 
 
 5. I N Guinea there are feveral Mountains, that 
 produce Gold, but they are remote from the Shore, 
 and the Gold- Dull that is brought from thence, is 
 not dug out of the Ground, but gathered up and 
 down by the Natives. Their in-land Kings are how- 
 ever faid to pofTefs each his Mine, the Produdt of 
 which he fells to the Neighbouring Merchants, and 
 they again to others, till it reaches the Sea-Shore, 
 where it is exchanged with the Europeans, 
 
 6. IN
 
 1 60 The Ahjhlute Fart S e c T. III. 
 
 6. I N Monornntapa, there are found rich Mines 
 of Gold and Silver, and alfo in Angola, both which 
 are thought to be Parts ot one continued Vein. 
 
 7. GER MA NT excels the reit of the King- 
 doms oi Europe tor plenty of Mines, of which fome 
 produce fmall Quantities of Gold, others abundance 
 of Silver, and a great many of them Copper, Iron, 
 Lead, Vitriol, Aniitnony, &c. about which confulc 
 the Defcriptions of Gcr?nany. 
 
 8. SlVEDENh enriched with the heft Co;)- 
 per-Mine of any hitherto difcovered ; it is in a vaft 
 high Mountain, which they call Kopferberg, out of 
 which as much Copper is dug as makes up a third 
 Part of the King's Rev.^nue. Here are alfo Iron- 
 Mines, and fome Silver- Mines, but they fcarcely 
 defray the Expence of digging them. 
 
 9. THERE are Mines of precious Stones found 
 in the IQand of Ceylon, and alfo in Congo (where 
 there is a filver-Mine, and fo much Marble, that 
 the Earth under Ground is thought to be all Mar- 
 ble) and in Peru, about Portovejo in Smaragdina) 
 and in Guiana, near the Coafl of which there is a 
 fmall lOand, called St Maria, which yields abun- 
 dance of Gold, even 100 Pound Weight every 
 Year, if we may believe the Dutch. In the" King- 
 dom of Golunda, there is a Mine which yieldeth 
 precious Stones, particularly Diamonds in abun- 
 dance, but it is not now dug. 
 
 10. I N Chili, there are Mines yielding Gold, Sil- 
 ver, and Gems, but the warlike Inhabitants, fet- 
 ting more by Iron Weapons than Gold or Silver, 
 have partly killed, and partly driven away, the Spa- 
 tiiards, and demoliihed the Mines that were but 
 newly begun. 
 
 11. THE Ifland Madagafcar abounds in Iron 
 and I'in, with a moderate Quantity of Silver, a little 
 Gold, but no Lead. Wherefore the Natives value 
 Lead Spoons above Silver ones, 
 
 12. IN
 
 C H A p. 1 1 . of Vniverjal Geography. 1 6 r 
 
 12. IN the IHand o^ Siunatra, it is reported, 
 that there are rich Mines of Gold, Silver, Brafs, and 
 Iron; and that the King in one Year {viz. 1620) 
 received into his I'rearure 1000 Pound Weight of 
 Gold. 
 
 13. IN the Philippine \^2ir\6iS^ and in Java, Hi^ 
 fpaniola, Cuba, and others i there are found Mines 
 of Gold, Silver, Copper, and Iron : and in the 
 Mountains of Siajn there is got Gold, Silver, and 
 Tin. 
 
 14. THERE are Mines ofSalt in Poland at Poch- 
 nia, four Miles from Cracow -, (where huge Lumps 
 of tranfparent white Salt are cut out ot the Ground^ 
 in Tranjttvama, in the County of 'Tyol in Spain^ in 
 Lejffer Ajia, and in Places near the Cafpian Sea, not 
 far from the River JVolga, over-againft the I (land 
 Kijlowat, where the Ruffians dig their Salt and boil 
 it to a more pure Subilance, and after tranfport it 
 to all Parts of RuJJia. In Cuba, there is a whole 
 Mountain of Salt. All the Mountains in the Ifland 
 oi Ormus, at the Mouth of the Perfian Gulph, are 
 of Salt, which may be gathered in any Part of them, 
 in fuch great Quantities, that the very Walls of their 
 Houfesare built of cryftalline Salt. In a Valley in 
 Peru, about eighteen Miles from Lima to the North- 
 ward, are found deep and large Pits of Salt, 
 where every one may take away what Quantity he 
 plcafcs, becaufe it continually increafeth, and feem- 
 eta impodible to be exhaufted. In Africa there is 
 no other Salt ufed, but fuch as is dug out of Pits, 
 or Quarries, like Marble, of a white, greenifh, or 
 A;h, Colour. All India fetch their Salt from the 
 great Salt- Mines of Bagnagar in Cormandel, &c. 
 We iTiall treat of Salt-Springs in another Chapter. 
 
 VOL- L M PRO*
 
 1 62 The Ahfolute Fart Sect. III. 
 
 PROPOSiriON II. 
 
 A Wood is a 7millilude of Trees extended over a large 
 Tracl of hand ^ '•johich fpr'ing up -ujiihout plantingy 
 and groiv ivithout being cidlivated. 
 
 SEVERAL Woods produce only one fort of 
 Trees, from which they receive their Names -, fo 
 that as there is a great Variety in Trees, there is 
 alfo the lame in Vv'oods, viz. Palm Woods, Oak 
 Woods, Ofisr Woods, Beech Woods, &c. Groves and 
 Forefts, are alfo thus diftinguifhed. Divers Coun- 
 tries, efpeciaily thofe more remote, produce diffe- 
 rent Sorts of Woods. In Africa, about Cape Verd^ 
 there are whole Woods or Lemon and Orange- 
 Trees, which the Sailors may pluck for a very 
 fmall Matter. In France, there are whole Woods of 
 Chefnut-Trees : In Ceylon there are Woods of 
 Trees, whofe Bark yieldeth Cinnamon : In the Mo- 
 lucca Iflands, there grow Clove-Trees : In the 5^«- 
 <^.'? IQands, there groweth plenty of Nutmegs: In 
 ^r^zf/ there groweth a hard fort ofVv^ood, which 
 we call Brazil Wood : In Africa, efpeciaily in Nu^ 
 midia, there grow Grapes, of which are made'Rai- 
 fins of the Sun : In the Idand Madagafcar, and in 
 other Places of India, there are Trees which bear 
 Tamarinds : In Mount Lebanon tliere are Cedars, 
 and whole W^oods of them in Japan ; of which they 
 make Mafts of Ships. In Spain, France, and Ital)\ 
 there are whole Woods of Olive and Myrtle Trees. 
 In Germany there are Woods that produce Fir, 
 Oak, Alder, Beech, Pine, Juniper, Maple, Po- 
 plar, Afli, and Elm. 
 
 THE mofl noted Woods are, the Hercynian 
 Foreft, which formerly overfpread almoft all 
 Germany, and at this Day taketh up large Trafls of 
 Land in feveral Countries, and under feveral Names. 
 
 I Thp
 
 Chap. II. cfJJniverJal Geography. 163 
 
 The ancient Caledonian Wood in Scotland^ with feve- 
 ral others in other Countries •, cfpecially in Nor- 
 way, where there grow more large Trees than in 
 any other Country, and from whence all Europe 
 procures Malh ior their Shipping. Lithuania is 
 alfo overlpread with Woods and Forefts -, from 
 whence large Taxes are raifed for the king of Po- 
 land. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 Defarts are vafi Tra5is of Land uninhabited by Men; 
 
 THESE are of two forts, fuch whofe Soil is 
 barren and unfruitful, properly called Defarts ; and 
 fuch whofe Ground is fertile enough, but are never» 
 thelefs faid to be defart, becaufe they are unculti- 
 vated by Men, In Mufcovy^ and in Places near the 
 Cafpian Sea, along the Banks of the JVolga, there 
 are large Trads of fertile and fat Meadow Ground, 
 which lie defart and uncultivated ; in the former 
 Place, by reafon of it's Plenty, and tlie Lazinefs of 
 the Inhabitants : And in the latter, by the Wars of 
 Tamerlane, when thefe Countries were laid wade, 
 and depopulated. But fuch as thefe are impro- 
 perly called Defarts. 
 
 T H E R E are four kinds of Defarts (properly 
 fo called j viz. fandy Defarts, marfhy Defarts, Jlony 
 Defarts, and heathy Defarts ; which lad produce 
 Woods and Forefts in feveral Places, and are 
 more ufeful and eafy to be cultivated. 
 
 I . T H E Defarts of Africa are almoft all fandy, 
 and there is not any part of the Earth fo much 
 over-run with Defarts. Thofe in Libya furround 
 all Egypt ; and are accounted the largeft upon • 
 Earth. 
 
 U% 2.THE
 
 164 The Ahfilute Fart Sect. III. 
 
 2. T H E Defarts of yfr(3ift^, are fome of them 
 fandy, and others ftony : the greateft is vulgarly 
 called the Sand-Sea. 
 
 3. THE Defarts about the Mountain Imaiis. 
 The fondy Defart of \_Xaino] in Mongai, where the 
 rich Kingdom o'i Cathaia formerly was (tho' falflyj 
 fuppofed to be. 
 
 4. THE Defarts of Cambodia, 
 
 5. THE rocky Defarts o^ Nova Zemhla. 
 
 6. THE Defarts of Norway , Lapland^ Sweden^ 
 and Finland. 
 
 7. THE Defarts of Germany, are all Heath; 
 hence thofe in Lune?jburg, are called Lunenburg- 
 Heatby die. 
 
 SECT,
 
 Chap. 12. of JJnherfal Geography'. 
 
 16 s 
 
 SECT. IV. 
 
 Containing HYDRO G RAF HT; which is 
 explained in fix Chapters. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Divifion of the Ocean by the the Interpofition of 
 Lands. 
 
 HAVING treated of the Divifion of the Earth, 
 and Ws Parts, in the foregoing Chapters i 
 Order requires that we alfo confider the Situation 
 and Divifion of the I'VATERS, which make 
 the other Part of the Terraqueous Globe, and 
 explain fuch of their Properties as belong to Geo- 
 graphy. 
 
 I N the fecond Propofition of Chapter vii, we 
 divided the Waters into four Species, viz. i . The 
 Ocean and Seas. 2. Rivers and frefh Water. 
 3. Lakes and Marfhes. 4. Mineral Waters. In 
 this Chapter we fhall Difcourfe of the Divifion 
 of the Ocean. 
 
 P RO P O SITION I. 
 
 ^he Ocean., in a continued Extent, encompaffeth the 
 whole Earth, and all it" s Parts, nor is it's Superficies 
 any where interrupted, or altogether broken by the 
 inter pofed Earth ; only a larger TraEl of Sea, or a 
 wider Communication is in fame Places wanting. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition cannot be 
 
 proved but by Experience, which is chiefly gained 
 
 M 3 by
 
 1 66 I'he Abfolute Part S e c t. I V^. 
 
 by failing round the Earth, which had been often 
 attempted and happily accomphfhed •, firft by the 
 Spaniards under Capt. Magellan, who firft difcove- 
 ed the Streigbts, called by his Name ; then by the? ^ 
 EngliJJj, viz. by Sir Francis Drake, Sir 'Thomas Ca- 
 vendiJJj, and others ; after by the Dutch, 8cc. 
 
 T H E Antients never doubted that the O- 
 cean was thus continued -, for they fuppofed the 
 old World to be raifed above the Waters, and 
 every where furrounded thereby (and fome of them 
 thought it floated). But when America was dif- 
 covered (which is extended in a long Tradl from 
 North to South, and feems to hinder the Conti- 
 nuation of the Ocean) and alio the Ard:ic and 
 Antardlic Continent, then they began to think o- 
 therwife ; for they imagined, that ^;«mr^ was join- 
 ed to ibme Part of the South Continent (which 
 was not unlikely) in like Manner as moft of our 
 modern Geogr.iphers, fuppofe that North America 
 is joined to Grocnland. If both thefe Conjectures 
 had been true, then indeed the Ocean had not en- 
 compaiTed the whole Earth. But Magellan removed 
 all Doubts and Scruples about it, by difcovering, in 
 the Year 1520, the Streights between America and 
 the South Continent, which join the Atlantic to the 
 Pacific Ocean. What therefore the Antients hap- 
 pened to ftumble upon, by a wrong way of ar- 
 guing, we have found out to be a real Truth by 
 Experience. Tlie fame may be faid about Africa ; 
 for the Antients, without any Hefitation, fuppofed 
 it to be bounded to the Southward by the Ocean, 
 and not to be extended fo far beyond the Equa- 
 tor, as it really is •, but when the Portuguefe had fail- 
 ed along the weftern Coaft of Africa, and found 
 it to be extended a great way beyond the Equator, 
 it was queftioned whether Africa could be failed 
 round ffo far as to afford a Paffage to India)y 
 that is, whether Africa was extended Southward or 
 
 encora-
 
 'Chap. 12. of TJniverfal Geography. 167 
 
 encompafled by the Ocean. But this Doubt was 
 alfo removed by Vafco di Gramma -, who, in the 
 Year 1497, firll failed round the mod Ibuthern 
 Promontory of Africa, called. The Cape of Good- 
 Hope ; which Name it had received from John II, 
 King of Por/«^^/, in the Yeaf 1494, when Bar- 
 thel Diaz (who fird returned from it, tho' he did 
 not double the Cape for w^ant of Provifions, and 
 by Realbn of tempeftuous Weatherj had given 
 him a large Account of the ftormy troubled Sea 
 about this Promontory. 
 
 P RO P S I'TIO N II. 
 
 The Ocean, taken altogether, is formed by the Land 
 into fever al Portions, of which there are three Spe- 
 cies, viz. I. Oceans, or great Seas. 2. Bays or 
 Gulphs. 3. Streights. 
 
 1. THE Word Ocean is taken in a double 
 Senfe, fometimcs for that general CoUetftion of Wa- 
 ters which furround the whole Earth •, and very of- 
 ten for a Part of that Colleftion, v/hich is joined 
 on both fides to other Parts by broad Trads. 
 Thus we fay. The /Illantic Ocean, The German 
 Ocean, The Ethiopic Ocean, and Indian Ocean. We 
 fhall here ufe the Word Ocean fometimes in the 
 later Senfe according to Cuftom, inftead of Sea ; 
 which alfo is a Part of the whole Ocean, becaufe 
 the Word Sea is often ufed in a fomewhat dif- 
 ferent Senfe, as will be fhewed by and by. 
 
 2. A BAY, orGuIph, is a Part of the Ocean 
 which flows between two Shores, and is every where 
 environed with Land, except where it communi- 
 cates with other Bays, or the main Ocean. It is 
 very often called a Sea. 
 
 A STREIGHTisa narrow PafTage, ci- 
 ther joining a Gulph to. the Neighbouring Ocean, 
 M 4 or
 
 1 68 The Ahjolute Part S e c T. IV. 
 
 or one Part of the Sea or Ocean to another. I'hefe 
 Differences are found in the Ocean, as will appear 
 from what follows. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 The main Ocean is divicbd into four large and parti^ 
 cular Parts^ which are alfo each of them called Oce~ 
 anSy and anfwer to the four Continents^ or great 
 Ijlands of the Earth. Thefe are, 
 
 1. THE Atlantic Ocean, which is placed be- 
 tween the weftern Shore of the old World, and the 
 eaftern Shore of the new World. It is alfo called 
 the weftern Ocean becaufe it lieth to the weftward 
 of Europe. It is heft divided into two Parts, by 
 the Equator •, whereof the one is contiguous to the 
 Hyperborean Ocean, the other to the Icy or South 
 Sea. 
 
 2. THE Pacific Ocean, or great South Sea, 
 which is placed between the weftern Shore o^ Ame- 
 rica and Jfia^ and is extended to China, and the 
 Philippine Iflands. 
 
 3. THE Hyperborean y or northern Ocean, a- 
 bout the ArSIic Continent. 
 
 4. THE fouthcrn Ocean, about the South 
 Continent, of which the Indian Ocean is a Part. 
 
 OTHER Geographers divide the main Ocean 
 into four Parts, after this Manner: They make 
 the Atlantic one Part, but do not extend it beyond 
 the Equator, where they begin the Ethiopic: They 
 alfo reckon with us the Pacific, and add thereto 
 the Indian ; but we, in our Divifion, have more 
 regard to the four great Continents. Some make 
 but tJiree Parts, viz. The Atlantic, Pacific, and In- 
 dian -, but then they extend the Atlantic further. 
 Let every one ufe what Divifion he likes beft, it is 
 
 no
 
 Chap. 12. of XJniverfal Geography, 169 
 
 no great matter which ; for thefe are not made by 
 Nature, but contrived by the Fancy. 
 
 P RO PO S II'ION IV. 
 
 S^jne Parts of the Ocean borrow a Name from the 
 Countries which they bound. 
 
 T H U S we fay the German Ocean, the Britifb 
 Sea, the Indian Ocean, the Gulph of Venice, &c. 
 
 P RO PO S IT'IO N V. . 
 
 So?ne Bays are oblong, others broad; fome primary .^ 
 and others fecondary ; the former flow out of the 
 Ccean, the latter out of fo?ne other Bay : and fuch 
 may be called Arms or Branches, Ihe oblong arcy 
 
 I. THR Mediterranean Sea, which breaks out 
 from the Ocean, between Spain and Barbary ; and 
 runs a long fpace between Europe and Africa, even 
 as far as Syria, Afia-fninor and Thracia. The entrance 
 is called by way of Eminence the Streights. Hence 
 to fail up the Streights, is to vifit by Se2i,Italy, Greece, 
 Syria, Sicily, Venice, and the reft of the Countries 
 that lie upon the Coaft of this Bay. 
 
 THERE are feveral fecondary Bays, or Arms, 
 which proceed from it, viz. the Adriatic Sea, or 
 Gulph ot Venice, the Archipelago, &c. 
 
 I T may be reafonably enquired, whether the 
 Euxine Sea be a Part of this Bay. Of which fee 
 Chap. XV. 
 
 THE Mediterranean had divers Names from 
 the feveral Coafts it reaches ; on the North it hath 
 Spain, France, Italy, Sicily, Sclavonia, Greece, Can- 
 dia, Romania, Afia-minor -, on the South it hath 
 Morocco, Fez, Tunis, Tripoli, Egypt. From whence 
 it is called the Gulph of I.)'t7«j, theTufcan Se^, the 
 
 Ionian
 
 170 "The Ahfolute Fart Sect. IV, 
 
 Ionian Sea, the Levant, Sec. It is extended from Weft 
 to Eaft, and receives into it many Rivers. 
 
 2. T H E Bailie (or Eaft Sea, improperly fo cal- 
 led) breaketh out from the Ocean between Zeeland 
 and Gotland^ part of the Continent of Sweden, and 
 alfo between Zeeland and Jutland, from whence it 
 flows a long way to the South-Eaft, and afterwards- 
 winding to the northward^ it reaches a prodigious 
 length between the Provinces of Mecklenburg^ Pome- 
 rania, Courland, and Livonia, on the Eaft -, and on 
 the Weft, Sweden and Lapland. It fends out two 
 Arms, viz, x.\\q Bothnic 'Qiy , and the Gulph of i^t;z- 
 land ; to which may be added the Livonian Sea, or 
 Gulph of Riga. It receiveth feveral great Rivers. 
 
 3. THE Arabian Gulph, or Red Sea, floweth out 
 of the Indian Ocean between Aden, a Town in Ara- 
 bia, and Cape Mufledon in Africa, having Africa on 
 the Weft, and Arabia on the Eaft. It runs to the 
 Eaftward as far as the Ifthmus of Africa, to the 
 Town of Suez, where there is a Harbour for the 
 'turkifh Fleet, and receiveth only a few fmall Rivers, 
 but not one out of Africa. It is extended from the 
 South-Eaft to the North- Weft. 
 
 4. THE". Perfian Gulph [or Gulph o^ Balfora'] 
 fioweth out of the Indian Ocean, near the Ifland of 
 Or?nus, from the South-Eaft to the North- Weft, 
 between Perfia on the Eaft, and Arabia on the Weft, 
 as fir as the ancient ChaldcBa, where it receiveth the 
 Euphratei and Tigris, joined a little before in one 
 Chanel \ but few Rivers of note befides. 
 
 5. T H E Gulph of California, or Red-Sea, runs 
 from South to North, between the Weft of Mexico 
 in America and California, and ends at Tato?jleac, an 
 unknown Part of America. Modern Difcoverers 
 will have California to be an Ifland -, and this not to 
 be a Gulph or Bay, but a Streight or Sea (a). 
 
 [a] See Note [c) Chap. viii. 
 
 6. THE
 
 Chap. 12. of Ufiivcrfal Geography. lyi 
 
 6. T H E Gulph of Nankin [or Gang] runs north- 
 ward, between Corea and China, towards Tartary, 
 where fome place Tenduc, in the Kingdom of Ca- 
 thaia: others will have Corca to be an Illand. Ic 
 receiveth but a lew Rivers. 
 
 T O thefe may be added feveral lefTer Bays, fuch 
 as the Gulph Cambaya, &c. Only the two firll of 
 thefe, viz. The Mediterranean and the Baltic^ aftbrd 
 fecondary Bays. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 The broad and open Bays arefeven in Nmnber, viz. 
 
 1. T H E Gulph or Seaof Mexico, which flows 
 out of the Atlantic Ocean from Eaft to Weft, be- 
 tween North and South America, where it is flop- 
 ped by the long Ifthmus that joins thefe two Conti- 
 nents, and feparates the Atlantic from the Pacific 
 Ocean. It receiveth a great many Rivers, and for 
 Multitude of Iflands may compare with the Archi^ 
 f el ago. 
 
 2. THE Gulph of Bengal, or Ganges, ftrikes 
 out from the Indian Ocean, towards the North, be- 
 tween India and the Peninfula of Malacca \ it is 
 bounded by Orixa, Bengal, Pegu, &c. Kingdoms 
 of India, and receives, befides the Ganges, a great 
 many famous Rivers. 
 
 3.. THE Bay of Siam, between Cambodia and 
 Malacca, is extended northward to the Kingdom 
 of Sia7n. 
 
 4. TPIE JVhite-Sea, or Rujfian Gulph, flows 
 from the Northern Ocean towards the South, be- 
 tween Lapland, and the remote Shores of RuJJia. It 
 ftretcheth out an arm towards Lapland, and endeth 
 at Archangel in Mufcovy •, v/hich is a Mart much 
 frequented by the Englijh and Dutch, It receives 
 feveral great Rivers. 
 
 5. THE
 
 172 The Abfoliite Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 5. THE Lantchidal Sea, is a Bay between [New- 
 Holland] and New Guinea; two Peninfula's of 
 the South Continent. It is extended fouthward, 
 and terminated at Carpentaria. 
 
 6. THERE is another Gulph a little to the 
 weftward of the laft, between [Nuyt's Land] and 
 Van Diemen's Land ftwo Sea Captains, by whom 
 thefe Parts were difcovered). 
 
 7. HUDSON'S Bay is bounded by New Britain, 
 New France, New Denmark, &c. and runneth out 
 of the Northern Ocean. To which may be added, 
 Baffin's Bay, the Bay of Bifcay, &c. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIL 
 
 Str eights either join the Ocean to the Ocean ^ or the 
 Ocean to a Bay, or one Bay to another, 
 
 O F Streights we reckon fifteen, viz. 
 
 1. T H E Streights of Magellan, tho' they may- 
 yield to others for Antiquity, are neverthelefs, ac- 
 counted very fimous for their exceeding long Reach, 
 thro' which there is a free Paffage from the Atlan- 
 tic to the Pacific Ocean. The Streight is in Length, 
 from Eaft to Weft one Hundred and ten Leagues ; 
 but the Breadth is various, in fome Places two 
 Leagues, one League, and in fome Places but a 
 quarter of a League. Magellan firft difcovered it, 
 and failed thro' it in the Year 1520. Tho' it is re- 
 ported, that Vafcus Nunnius of Valboa, had before 
 {viz. in the Year 15 13) taken notice of it when 
 he failed that Way, to make Difcoveries to the 
 Southward, It lieth in 52 degr. 30 min. South La- 
 titude, between Patagon, a Part of South America 
 on the North, and the Iflands of Terra del Fuego 
 on the South. 
 
 2. A little further, to the fouthward, are the 
 Streights of La Maire, which are much fhorter than 
 
 thofe
 
 C H A p. 1 2 . of Univerfal Geography. 173 
 
 thofe of Magellan. They have a Part of the South 
 Continent on the Eaft, and the Iflands of Terra 
 del Fuego one the Weft. A PafTage is more expediti- 
 oufly made thro' thefe into the great South-Sea, 
 than the other. They lie in 54 degr. 30 min. South 
 Latitude. 
 
 3. THE Streights of Manila, between Luconia 
 and Mindanao, and others of the Philippine Iflands, 
 are faid to be one hundred Leagues in Length, and 
 are a very dangerous PafTage to Ships, by reafon 
 of dreadful Quick- fands in feveral Places. They 
 are extended from Eaft to Weft, and join, in parr, 
 the Pacific to the Indian Ocean, which are alfo not 
 far from thence, joined by broader Streights in ma- 
 ny Places. 
 
 4. T H E R E are feveral other Streights among 
 the Indian Ifles, and between them and the Conti- 
 nent j as between Ceylon and India ; between Suma- 
 tra and Malacca ; between Sumatra and Java, &c. 
 
 5. THE Streights of Waygats, thro' which 
 there is fuppofed to be a PafTage from the RufTian 
 or North Sea, into the Tartarian Ocean ; but it is 
 fo fhut up with Ice, that it never could be failed 
 thro' by the Europeans {h). It lies between Samoie- 
 da and Nova Zembla. 
 
 6. T H E Icy Sea, between Nova Zembla and 
 Spitfbergen, or New Greenland. 
 
 7. DAVIS's Streights, between North America 
 and Greenland, have not been yet failed thro' ; there- 
 fore we are in a doubt, whether it be a Streight or 
 a narrow Sea. 
 
 8. F O R B I S H E R's Streights, which afford a 
 PafTage from the Atlantic Ocean into Hudfon's Bay. 
 
 9. THE Streights of Anian, between North 
 America and Tartary in Afia, through which there 
 is faid to be a PafTage between the Tartarian Ocean, 
 
 ih) See Note (d) Chap viii, 
 
 and
 
 174 ^fj^ Abfolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 and the Pacific Sea ; but this is as yet unfettled. 
 They who have failed in that Part of the Pacific 
 Ocean pretend to be certain, thai there are 
 Streights, or Sea, both between America and Tar. 
 tary, and alfo between America and Greenland^ by 
 reafon that for fcven hundred Leagues from Japan 
 towards North A>nerica, the Currents fet ftrongly 
 from the North North- Weft, tho' ihe Wind be va- 
 riable, and blow from other Points of the Compafs : 
 but when they are come within one hundred Leagues 
 of New Spain, thefe Currents ceafe, ^r-A others fiow 
 to the Northward, as if it were to fome broad Sea 
 on the North of New Spain. Alfo in tht^c itw^n 
 hundred Leagues fiiling, Whales are daily feen, 
 and other forts of Fifli, that are known to delight 
 in Streights and narrow Seas, which it is proba- 
 ble, come from the Streights of Atiian, to that Part 
 of the Pacific Ocean ; becaufe they are not found 
 elfewhere [c). However, feverai of our modern 
 Geographers take no notice of thefe Streights, but 
 place a vaft unknown Ocean, between Tartar^ or 
 Corea and America. 
 
 1 o. T H E Streights of Gibraltar .^ thro* which 
 the Atlantic Ocean gufheth into the Mediterranean 
 Sea. They lie between Spain and Afirica^ and are 
 about two Leagues over at the flraireft Place, but 
 much longer. The Ancients believed that there 
 
 (c) It is certain the Sea of Whale paffed from SpUjIyerg 
 
 Corea and Japan, is annexed thro' tlie neareH: Arm of the 
 
 to the Tartaric Ocean, and alfo Sea, rather than thro' the more 
 
 to the Sea of Greenland; be- remote. But be it how it will, 
 
 caufe that fome Hollajtders af- we may hence fafcly conclude, 
 
 firm, (who were fhipwreck'd that the Sea which lies beyond 
 
 upon Corea, a Peninfula of Japan and Spitjherg, is pafla- 
 
 Chir.ci) that they faw there a ble ; and thro' more perhaps 
 
 Whale, upon whofe Back lluck than one Arm or Chanel, by 
 
 a Harpon Iron of Gafcony, which they ccmmunicite. See 
 
 which not being qucllioned Note [a) Ch^^. \v.\.3.nA Philof. 
 
 by any, it is mofl probable Tratifail. 2hndgciihy Loiv thorp. 
 
 to be conjectured, that this Vol. iii. Page 612. 
 
 were
 
 Chap. 12. of TJnherfal Geography. 175 
 
 were no fuch in the firft Ages of the World, but 
 that they were made by the breaking of the Seiv 
 upon the L,and. 
 
 11. THE Streights of Denmark [or the Sound] 
 lie between Xeeland and Schonen^ thro' which the 
 Atlantic, in part, flows into the Baltic, where they 
 areftraited. They are about half a German Mile 
 over. Near to this there are two other fmail 
 Streights, the one between Zceland and Funen, and 
 the other called the Belt, between Funen and Jut' 
 land, 
 
 12. THE Streights of Bahelmandel, at the 
 Mouth of the Arabian Gulph, near the Sea- Port 
 Aden, thro' which there is a Paflage out of the 
 Indian Ocean into the Red-Sea. - ♦ 
 
 13. THE Streights [of Ormus] at the MoutH 
 of the Perftan Gulph, are not properly fo called, 
 becaufe they are but little narrower than the Gulph 
 itfelf. 
 
 14. THE Hellefpont, a Streight famous among 
 the Grecians, thro' which there is a Paflage from 
 the Archipelago to the Propontis ; near to this there 
 is another narrow Sea, called the Tbracian Bofpho^ 
 rus, which joins Propontis to the Euxine Sea. 
 
 15. T¥i^ Faro, or Streights, o'i MeJJina, be- 
 tween Ital"^ and Sicil-j, 
 
 MANY have been of opinion, that there were 
 Streights fomewhere northward of Virginia, which 
 is in 40 degr. North Latitude, whereby the Atlantic 
 is joined to the Pacific Ocean, and thro' which they 
 might find a free and open Paffage to China, and 
 t\\Q Philippine Id'xnd.^: but this, in the Year 1609, 
 was in vain attempted thro' Hudfon's Streights. 
 
 THUS have we explained and pointed out the 
 Parts of the Ocean, diftinguifhed by the Situation of 
 the Land, in like manner as in Chapter viii, we de- 
 fcribed the different Plans of Countries, occafioned 
 by the breaking in of the Ocean. That the Geo- 
 grapher
 
 176 ^he Ahfolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 grapher may keep all thefe in his Memory, it will 
 pot be unferviceable to him to trace out the Peri- 
 meter of the Sea Coaft, and to take a tranfient 
 View of the Shores and Bounds of each Country, 
 and alio how they are fituated, and joined one to 
 another. 
 
 . PROPO SIl'ION VIIL 
 
 [To trace out the Sea Coajls, that environ the four 
 ^tartenofthe Earth, viz. "The old and new Worlds 
 and the North and South Continent.'] 
 
 I. T H E old World, fcomprehending Europe, 
 Afia, and Africa,) is extended northward to the 
 Streighcs of Waygats, adjoining to Samoieda -, up- 
 on the Weft of which is the Kingdom of Mufco- 
 vy, where the White Sea is received into ?, l^rge 
 Bay from the North •, on the further Side of which 
 is Lapland, and next to that, on the Weft, Norway, 
 whofe Shore runs North and South ; then winding 
 to the Eaft, we came to the Shore of Gotland and 
 Schonen, where there is a Gulph that receiveth the 
 Baltic Sea, which is bounded by Sv/eden, Finland, 
 Livonia, Pruftia, Courland, Pomerania, Mecklen- 
 burg, Holftein, and Jutland ; then turning fouthward 
 on the further Side ot Jutland and Holftein, we find 
 the Shores of Weftphalia, Holland, Flanders, France, 
 and Spain -, where there is another Lilet that re- 
 ceives into a vaft Bay the Mediterranean Sea, which 
 is hemmed in by Spain, France, Italy, Sclavonia, 
 Greece, Romania, Afia minor, Egypt, Barbary, and 
 Morocco, over-agai[ift the Spanifti Shore ; then we 
 turn along the Weftern Shore of Africa, to Cape 
 Verd j and from thence the Shore bends eaftward 
 along Guinea, and fouthward by Congo and Angola, 
 to the Cape of Good Hope -, where it is again refle- 
 (fted northward, and gives Bounds to Sofala, Zam- 
 
 I guebar.
 
 Chap. 12. of XJniverfal Geography. 177 
 
 guehar, and [ Anian ] -, here the jirabian Gulph, or 
 Red Sea, is extended to Egypt, which is joined to 
 the Arabian Shore, and to the Shores ot the Perfian 
 Gu]ph : upon the Eaft of thefe, are the Shores ot 
 Perfia, Ca?nbaya, Indojtan, Malacca in India, Bengal^ 
 Cambodia, China, Tartar^ at Corea, to the Streights 
 of Uriei ; where follow the unknown Coaft of Nor- 
 thern Tartar'^, and the Samoieds, which is [very like- 
 ly] joined to the Streights of V/a^gats, where we 
 began. 
 
 2. AMERICA is thus encompafied by the 
 Ocean. On the North at the Streights of Davis, 
 there is Hudfon\ Bay, from whence follow in order 
 to the fouthward the Shores of New- Britain, New- 
 England, New-France, Firgima, Florida, Mexico, 
 and New- Spain, on the Ifthmus ; then New-Cajlle, 
 Guinea, Brafil, and Patagon, at the Streights of 
 Magellan, where the Shore from running fouthward 
 begins to turn towards the Weft; thence from 
 South to North are extended the Shores of Chilij 
 Peru, New-Spain and New- Mexico, which is bound- 
 ed by the Gulph o^ California •, [where follow the un- 
 known Shores of Mozemhec, &c. (bounded perhaps 
 by the Streights of Anian) which may be contiguous 
 ffor any thing that we know) to thofe of Davii*s 
 Streights.] 
 
 3. THE Arcfic Continent is extended to Davis^s 
 Streights, and from thence begin the Shores of 
 Greenland, which run a little to the South, and then 
 return northward to Spiljherg, where they are called 
 the Shores of New-Greenland: thefe are ftretch- 
 ed out over againft Nova Zembla, and the North 
 of Tartary ; from whence the refl of the Shore to 
 Davii's Streights is unknown. 
 
 4. THE South Continent flretches to the 
 Streights of La Maire, whence the Shore is per- 
 haps continued to New-Holland, where the Lant^ 
 chidol Sea is received into a Gulph, on the other 
 
 VOL. I. N Side
 
 178 He Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 Side whereof is New Guinea^ which [very proba- 
 bly] is contiguous to the Shores at the Streights 
 of La Maite. 
 
 LET us now trace out the Perimeter of the 
 Ocean. Between Davii's Streights, and Nova 
 Zemhla there is the northern Ocean, and Icy Sea, 
 or Sea of Greenland •, which is continuc^d till be- 
 tween Europe and America^ where it is called the 
 German Ocean, the Britijh Ocean, the French and 
 Spanijh Ocean, and, in the whole, the Atlantic 
 Ocean ; (and maketh three Bays, viz. the Mediter- 
 ranean, the Baltic, and the Mexican Gulph j which, 
 when it comes between the Coalfs of Africa and 
 Brafil, is called the Ethiopian Sea on the one 
 Hand, and on the other the Sea of Magellan : fur- 
 ther to the Eaft, between Africa and the South Con- 
 tinent, is the fouthern Ocean, and between Afia 
 and the fame Continent the [eaftern or] Indian 
 Ocean ; alfo between Afta and South America is 
 the Pacifc Ocean [or great South Sea] which is 
 extended northward to the Streights of Pf^aygats 
 and Anian, and fouthward to the Streights of 
 Magellan [and La Maire] by which it is joined to 
 the Atlantic. It goes under feveral Names along 
 the C-oaft of America, as the Sea of Chili, Peru, 
 Mexico, Califorma, &:c. 
 
 The Terraqueous Globe is divided into Land 
 and Water. Again Water is divided into 
 the main Ocean, Lakes, Moraffes, and Ri- 
 
 > vers. The main Ocean is formed by the 
 Earth into three forts of Portions. 
 
 I. The Ocean, whofe prifne Parts are four. 
 
 I. The
 
 Chap. 12. of TJnroerfal Geography, 17^ 
 
 I. The Atlantic [or 
 weftern Ocean] with 
 the Ethiopic Sea, be- 
 tween Europe and A-C The Britannic Ocean, 
 fricaon the one Hand,< The German Ocean, 
 and America on the o- d The Spanijh Ocean, ^c. 
 ther. It obtains vari- 
 ous Names from the 
 Places it watereth, viz. 
 
 2. THE Pacific Ocean, or great South Sea, 
 between the furtheft Parts of Afui and the Indian 
 Iflands, on the one hand ; and the weftern Shore 
 of America on the other. 
 
 3. THE northern Ocean, about the Ar5lic 
 Continent, fometimes called the Icy Sea, Tarta- 
 rian Ocean, iJc. 
 
 4. THE fouthern Ocean, about the Antarctic 
 Continent, a Part of which is the Indian Ocean. 
 
 2. Bays or Gulphs. 
 
 I [The Tyrrhene 
 ^ I. The Mediterraneanrz\ Sea. 
 
 Sea between Europe j'^ J ThQ Ionian 
 and Africa as far asS^\ Sea. 
 Afia minor . . C f* / The Levant, 
 
 C &c.-\ 
 
 fecondary S Vt^ ^ff" f ^'""'"'^ 
 Bays ^^^<^^^ ^'-'^^^P^H^^ 
 '' C The Euxine Sea,- i^c. 
 
 2. The Baltic Sea with it's fecondary Bays, 
 <( viz. the Bothnic Bay, the Gulph of Finland^ 
 
 the Livonian Sea, t^c. 
 
 3. The Arabian Gulph, or Red-Sea, between 
 Africa and Arabia. 
 
 4. The Perfian Gulph, or Gulph of Balfora^ 
 between Arabia and Perfia. 
 
 5 . The Sea of California^ between California 
 and New- Mexico. 
 
 6. The Gulph of Nankin, between Corea and 
 China^ N 2 Thefe 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 
 
 o
 
 iS< 
 
 c 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 a. 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 c 
 
 r» 
 
 rS 
 
 CO 
 
 4— > 
 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 bp 
 
 rt 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 00 
 
 <u 
 
 4^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ri 
 
 c- 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 C 
 
 
 «J 
 
 -a 
 
 > 
 
 
 tii 
 
 ri 
 
 0^ 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 -C 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 1< 
 
 "the Abjoliite Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 1. The Gulph of Mm<:^, between North 
 and South America. 
 
 2. The Gulph of .fic'w^^/, between Indojlan 
 and Malacca. 
 
 3. The Bay [of 6"/^;«] between Malacca 
 and Cambodia. 
 
 4. The Wliite Sea, between Lapland and 
 
 5. The Lantchidol Sea, between New-HoU 
 land and New-Guinea. 
 
 6. The Gulph between Nuyi^s Land, and 
 /^''rt^ Dieffien^s Land. 
 
 7. H u dj cn^s Bay ; bttw ten New-France and 
 New-Denmark. •:-" ' 
 
 3. Sir eight 5. 
 
 1. THE Streights of Magellan., which join the 
 Atlantic to the Pacific Ocean. Thefe are longer 
 than any of the reft. 
 
 2. THE Streights of La Maire near thofe of 
 Magellan^ and of the flime ufe. 
 
 3. THE fuppofed Streights of Anian, which 
 join the Pacific to the Tartarian Ocean. 
 
 4. DAVIS'S Streights which join [Baffin's 
 Bayl to the Atlantic, near which are Forhijhefs 
 Streights. 
 
 5. TH E Streights of Pi^aygats, which join the 
 Icy Sea, perhaps, to the Tartarian Ocean, if the 
 Ice do not interpofe. 
 
 6. T HE Streights o^ Gibraltar, which join the 
 .Atlantic to the Mediterranean Sea. 
 
 7. THE Streights of Denmark, or the Sound, 
 join the Atlantic to the Baltic. 
 
 8. T H E Streights of Babelmandel, at the mouth 
 of the Arabian Gulph. 
 
 9. THE Streights of OrmuSy at the mouth of 
 the Perfian Gulph. 
 
 10. THE
 
 C H A p. 1 3 . <f XJniverfal Geography. 1 8 r 
 
 10. THE Belief pom and Bofphorus, which join 
 the At'chipelago to the Euxine or Black Sea. 
 
 WjH ETHER the Cafpian Sea be a Lake or 
 a broad Bay, which is joined to the main Ocean 
 by Ibme fubterraneous Streights, is not lettled a- 
 mong Geographers. 
 
 CHAP. xiir. 
 
 Of the Ocean^ and certain Properties of ifs 
 Parts. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 ^he Surface of the Ocean, and of all other Liquids, is 
 round and fpherical : Or the Surface of the watery 
 Part joined to the Surface of the dry Part, do both 
 together make up the Superficies of the terraqueous 
 Globe. 
 
 TH E Truth of this Theorem is proved from 
 the Arguments ufed in Chapter iii, to prove 
 the fpherical Figure of the Earth, for they hold as 
 well here as there ; but becaufe thofe Proofs are 
 chiefly built upon the Phsenomena that are rea- 
 fonably fuppofed to proceed from fuch a Figure, 
 that is, rather from the Effefls than the Caufe ; 
 we (hall propofe, in this Place, a Demonftration 
 which is wholly founded upon natural Caufes, and 
 by which Archimedes proved the Superficies of all 
 liquid Bodies tp be fpherical : in order to which he 
 
 N 3 took
 
 i $ 2 ^he Ahjolute Tart S e c T . I V . 
 
 took for granted the three following Poftulata: i. 
 That the Earth hath a Center, and is therefore fphe- 
 rical. 2. That it is the Nature of all Liquids, 
 whofe Parts are continued and lie at equal Di- 
 ftances from the Center, that the Parts lefs pref- 
 led are expelled from their Places by thofe that 
 are more preffed, as is manifed from Experience. 
 3. That every Part of the Liquid is preffed by 
 that Part which is above it, perpendicularly to- 
 wards the Center of the Earth, if the whole be de- 
 icending, or is preffed by any other Body. Befides 
 thefe Poftulata, Archimedes ufes a Geometrical 
 Propofition which is not found demonftrated any 
 where in the Elements ; and therefore he demon- 
 ftrates it himfelf, which is this : If a Superficies be 
 cut by feveral Planes, all paffing thro' one Point, 
 and each Seflion be the Periphery of a Circle, 
 whofe Center is that one Point, then will the Su- 
 perficies be fpherica], and that Point the Center of 
 the Sphere ; as iseafily demonftrated. 
 
 LET the Superficies of any Body be cut by 
 the Plane IFKEP (F^. 16.) thro' D, and let the 
 Perimeter of the Seftion I F K E P be circular, ha- 
 ving D for it's Center ; alfo let every other Seftion, 
 made thro' D, have circular Perimeters, and D 
 for their Center. It is to be fhewn, that the 
 Superficies of this Body is fpherical, and that D 
 is it's Center ; i. e. that all the Points in the Su- 
 perficies are equidiftant from D. For we may 
 imagine feveral right Lines to be drawn from D 
 to other Points of the Superficies, and we muft 
 prove them to be all equal. We may ibppole 
 a Plane to pafs thro' any of them drawn from 
 D to the Superficies, and alfo thro' D F (for two 
 right Lines cutting one another, or meeting, are 
 in the fame Plane by Euclid Lib. ii. Prop. 2.) and 
 the Periphery of the Seftion will be circular (>y 
 the Hypothcfis ; therefore, the fuppofed Line 
 3 drawn
 
 P/aJi IV 
 
 []:,„. 1-,.jS^. ^y./8/p./6. 
 
 y F '
 
 C H A p. 1 3 • of Vniverjal Geography. 183 
 
 drawn will be equal to D F, and fo v,'ill all other 
 Lines drawn from D to the Superficies be in like 
 manner equal to D F (a). Hence we prove the 
 Superficies to be fpherical, having D for it's Cen- 
 ter (b). This being premifed, the Superficies of 
 all Liquids are thus demonftrated to be fpherical. 
 Let us fuppofe a Liquid at Reft, in the form of 
 EFGH, [fig. 17.) and let the Earth's Center be 
 D, and imagine this Liquid' to be cut by a Plane 
 palling thro' D, fo as the Sedlion may be repre- 
 sented in the Superficies by EFGH. We a^e 
 firft to prove that this Line EFGH is circular, 
 or an Arch of the Periphery of a Circle, whofe 
 Center is D. If it were pofilble not to be c r- 
 cular, then would two I/mes, drawn from D to 
 it, be unequal. Let the unequal Lines D E, D G 
 be drawn, viz. let DG be greater than DE, alfo 
 let the one be the leaft, and the other the 
 greateft that can be drawn from D. Then draw 
 another right Line D F to E F G Fl, bifeding the 
 Angle G D E, fo as to be longer than D E, but 
 fliorter than D G. With this D F as a Radius up- 
 on the Center D, defcribe in the fame Plane the 
 Arch I FK H, which will cut the Line D E pro- 
 duced in the Point I, and the Line D G on this 
 Side G, in the Point K. 
 
 LIKEWISE with the Radius D L, fomething 
 lefs than DE, upon the Center D, defcribe the 
 Arch LM N within the Liquid in the fame Plane 
 I F K H. Then are the Parts of the Liquid within 
 the Arch LM N continued, and at equal diftances 
 from the Center D : but the Parts between M N 
 are more prefTed than thole between L M , having 
 above them a greater Quantity, and therefore a 
 greater Weight of Water. 
 
 (a) By the Definition of a 
 
 (h) By the Definition of a 
 
 Circle Chap. ii. Article 3. Globe Chap. ii. Article 12. 
 
 N 4 AND
 
 I S4 "The Ahjolute Tart S e c T. IV . 
 
 AND the Parts of the Liquid within L M, 
 being lefs prefled, are driven out of their Places by 
 thofe within MN which take them up, and put 
 the Liquid in Motion. But it was before fuppofed 
 to lie in this Form at Reft, and ftill : So that the 
 Liquid, by this, will be both at Reft and in Mo- 
 tion, which is inconfiftent. Wherefore the right 
 Lines, drawn from D to EFGH, are not une- 
 qual, but equal \ and fo the Line E F G H is an 
 Arch of a Circle, whofe Center is D. The fame 
 m.iy be demonftrated in all Planes cutting the Su- 
 perficies of the Liquid, and pafting thro' D, liiz. 
 that the Secflion is an Arch of a Circle whofe Center 
 is D. Therefore fince, in the Superficies of Li- 
 quids, all Planes paffing any how thro' D, are 
 found to produce circular Sections, it will follow, 
 from the foregoing Propofition, that the Super- 
 ficies of all Liquids is fpherical ; having the Point 
 D, that is, the Center of the Earth, for their Cen- 
 ter ; as v/ill more manifeftly appear from the Proof 
 of the following Propofition. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 ^he Sea is not higher than the Land, and therefore 
 the Earth and Water are almojl every where of the 
 fame Altitude^ high Mountains excepted, 
 
 THE Truth of this is demonftrated by the 
 preceding Propofition. For if the Superficies of 
 the Ocean be fpherical, and have the fame Center 
 with the Superficies of the Earth, and alio if the 
 Sea, near the Shore, be no higher than the Land, 
 neither will the middle of the Ocean be elevated 
 above the Earth, becaufe both their Surfaces make 
 lip the Superficies of one and the fame Sphere. 
 But fome perhaps will not believe the former Pro- 
 pofition, by Reafon of the alTumed Hypothefis ; 
 '? tl'icrefore
 
 C k A p . 13. of Unwerfal Geography. 18^ 
 
 therefore we fliall fhew the Truth of this Theorem, 
 without that, from it's known Effeds. 
 
 1. WE know, by Experience, that Water, if 
 it is not hindred, will flow from a higher to a lower 
 Place. If therefore there were about the Shore 
 any Place lower than the middle of the Ocean, the 
 Water would continually fettle from thence to- 
 wards the Shore, and be always flowing, and in 
 Motion J but the contrary is obferved when the 
 Weather is calm. 
 
 2. IF the Ocean, far remote from the Shore, 
 was much higher than the Sea Coaft, it might be 
 feen at a greater Diftance than if it were fphe- 
 rical, even over all the intervening Parts that 
 were of a lefs Altitude. But Experience fheweth 
 to the contrary, that when we come from the In- 
 land Parts nearer the Shore, we difcover by little 
 and little the more remote Parts of the Sea, and 
 the nearer we approach the Shore, the further we 
 can fee upon the Ocean. Therefore the remote 
 Parts of the Ocean are not elevated above the Sea 
 Coaft, but are of the fame Altitude with them and 
 the Earth. 
 
 3. SAILORS cannot difcover any Difi^erence 
 between their Altitude, at the Sea Coaft, and in 
 the middle of the main Ocean, tho' they ufe the 
 moft accurate Inftruments, which certainly they 
 might, if the remote Parts were elevated above the 
 reft, as a Tower, or a Mountain. For as we can 
 find the Altitude of a Mountain, or Tower, above 
 the Places of Obfervation by Inftruments, fo might 
 they Cif there were any j find the fuperior Altitude 
 pf the middle of the Ocean above the Parts 
 next it, by fuch accurate Inftruments as are now in 
 Ufe. 
 
 4. THERE are found, in feveral Places, 
 great Numbers of Iflands, which are, fome of 
 khem, cjctended far into the main Ocean, and 
 
 others
 
 J 86 ^he Abfolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 others almoft contiguous to the Continent. There- 
 fore no Pare of the main Ocean is higher than the 
 Land ; becaufe it is not higlier than the Shores of 
 thefe I Hands. 
 
 5. 1' H E Waves upon the Ocean never keep 
 long upon a Heap, but are naturally diffufed 'till 
 they make a fmooth Surface : wherefore it is un- 
 reaionable to fuppofe, that the Water fhould be 
 heaped up tov/ards the middle of the Ocean, 
 
 6. I F the Waters in the main Ocean are higher 
 than the reft, why do they not flow into the Chanels 
 of the Rivers, whofe Waters are more deprelTed ? 
 for we find, by Experience, that Water naturally 
 flows trom the Place where it is, to any other that 
 is lower, which is the Caufe of fo many Inun- 
 dations. 
 
 FROM the whole I think it fufficiently appears, 
 that the Sea is not higher than the Shores ; and 
 but very few Shores are elevated to the Height 
 of the Inland Parts, for thefe are often obferved 
 to rife gradually above the other, 'till they be- 
 come high Mountains : from whence we conclude 
 that no Part of the Ocean is higher than the Su- 
 perficies of the Earth. That the Inland Parts are 
 more elevated than the Sea Shores, appears alfo 
 from the Rife and Currents of Rivers, which, for 
 the moft part, break out, and are diredled, from 
 rhefe Mediterranean Places, towards the Ocean. 
 Thefe Places therefore are higher than the mari- 
 time Parts, becaufe they pour down their Waters 
 upon them. Not but that there are fome Countries 
 which are fituated a little lower than the Surfice 
 of the Ocean, but then they are defended either 
 by the Altitude of the Shores, or by Banks, or 
 long Ridges, of interpofed Ground. Some Coun- 
 tries alfo are not fenced with Banks, becaufe they 
 fear a calm and fettled Sea fhould overflow them, 
 but left, when it is ruffled with Winds and made 
 
 impetuous.
 
 \ • 
 
 Chap. 13. of U?tiverfal Geography, 187 
 
 impetuous, it fhould violently break in upon 
 them. 
 
 CO ROLL ART. 
 
 I T is therefore in vain to tell us, that the Sea is 
 higher than the Land, and that by a miraculous Pro- 
 vidence it is kept from overflowing the whole Earth, 
 and caufing another Univerfal Deluge ; for we have 
 fnewed, that both Land and Water are included 
 within our fpherical Superficies, and that mod 
 Parts of the jEarth, at lead the Shores are higher 
 than the middle of the Ocean, which for that Rea- 
 fon cannot overflow Countries, or caufe a Deluge, 
 unlefs the Shore or Banks are wafted, and their 
 Height diminiflied, or a greater Quantity of Wa- 
 ter force them open, or overpower them, and then 
 indeed there may happen an Inundation. Neither 
 is it impoflible, or contrary to Nature, that the 
 whole Earth by fuch Means might be overflowed, 
 as will be made evidently appear at the End of this 
 Chapter. 
 
 P ROPOS ITIO N m. 
 
 ^hy the Ocean ^ f^en from the Shore, appears to rife 
 md fwell to a greater Altitude, by how much the 
 more remote it is, 
 
 THIS is a Deception of Sight, or to fpeak 
 more accurately, in the Eft:imation, which hath 
 brought many into an Error, and by which divers 
 have fuppofed the Sea to be in fome Places feve- 
 ral Furlongs higher than the Land. But it is a 
 wonder they have never taken notice of a common 
 Experiment, which is to be met with every Day, 
 "whf.reby this Fallacy is eafily detedled. If we look 
 UDon a long Pavement, or Area, or upon a row of 
 
 Pillars,
 
 1 8 8 I'he Abfolute Tart S e c t. I V. 
 
 Pillars, the Parts that are remote, will appear 
 higher than thofe that are near, and the whole 
 Pavement, or Area, will Icem to be elevated by 
 little and little, as it's Parts are more remote from 
 us, notwithitandiiig, in Truth, it be every where 
 of the fame Alticude. After the fame manner we 
 eftimate the Height of the Sea ; for if we take a 
 levelling Inftrument, and obferve from the Shore 
 the remote Parts of the Sea, we fli.dl find it not to 
 be elevated above us, but rather deprelTed below 
 the Horizon where we ftand. 
 
 THE Caufe of this Deception is thus explained 
 from Optics. Let the Eye at A obferve a Pave- 
 ment, or the Superficies of the Water, a pretty way* 
 extended a e (Fig. 1 8.). Let the Angle a A e b di- 
 vided into four equal Parts, or Angles e Ad, dAc, 
 c Ab^ b A a^ by the right Lines A ^, A f , Ad, ,' 
 Thefe will divide the right Line ae into four un-^ 
 equal Parts, ab, be, c d^ de, of which the more re- 
 mote will be the largeft, as appears by the Figure, 
 viz, E d larger tharl d c, and d c larger than be, and 
 be than a b. Altho* thefe Parts are very unequal, 
 yet, by a Deception of the Sight, they will be judged 
 to be all equal, and at an equal Diftance from the 
 Eye ; fo that Ab, Ae, Ad, A ^, will feem to 
 be A/, A^, Ah, Ak, where ^/, fg, gh, hk, are 
 equal j and thus the Parts be, cd^ de, feem ele- 
 vated, as if they were fg, gh, hk. 
 
 O R jljorter thus. Becaufe the Eye is raifed to 
 fee things at a Diftance, and deprefled to view 
 things near, therefore things at a Diftance feem ele- 
 vated, and things near depreffed. Or becaufe we 
 meafure the Diftance of the Parts that are near by 
 the Elevation of our Eye, and therefore they feerii 
 low •, but we cannot do fo by the Parts at a Di- 
 ftance, and therefore they feem not low, but raifed 
 more than they really are. 
 
 HENCE
 
 C H A p . 1 3 • of Univerfal Geography. 189 
 
 H E N C E we gather, that tho* the Ocean may 
 feem to be raifed above the Shore, and the more 
 the further off, yet we are not to think that it is 
 really fo. 
 
 SOME imagine the Ocean to be higher than 
 the Earth, becaufe unlefs it was fo, they think it 
 impoITible that Water fhould flow from it to the 
 Heads of Rivers Cwhich are commonly placed very- 
 high in inland Countries^ fince it never flows, but 
 from a higher to a lower Place. But we fliall dif- 
 cufs this Point, when we treat of the Origin of 
 Springs. 
 
 OTHERS may infer, that the Pike of Tene- 
 r'lff is not fo high as to be feen on the Ocean at fo 
 great a Diftance as fixty German Miles, or four 
 Degrees, unlefs either the Foot of the Mountain, or 
 the Ocean itfelf, be higher than the Sea upon the 
 Coaft of Teneriff; the like may be faid of other 
 Mountains. What is to be anfwered here appears 
 from Chapter ix, where we treated of the Altitude 
 of Mountains. 
 
 PROPO s n:ioN iv. 
 
 To explain the Caufe and Origin of Bap andStreigbts. 
 
 B AY S, properly fpeaking, are in the Earth and 
 not in the Sea, and therefore they ought to be cal- 
 led the Arms, Branches, or procurrent Parts, of 
 the Ocean. For thofe are more properly called 
 Bays of the Ocean, where it receives Peninfula's, 
 fuch as Malacca^ Jutland, &c. 
 
 BUT cufl:om hath obtained that the word Bay, 
 fhould, contrary to it*s Signification, belong to 
 the Ocean, and be the ume as an Arm or Branch 
 of it. 
 
 THESE Bays or Gulphs are thus produced. 
 When a part of the Sea Shore is by Ibme external 
 
 Caufe
 
 190 The Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 Caufe fhattered and rent in two, fo as to leave an 
 Opening, whofe Surface is lower than the Surface 
 of the Ocean, the Water naturally gufheth in be- 
 tween the Cliffs, and is not flopped till it meet 
 with more elevated Ground, by which it is bound- 
 ed, and formed into a Bay. 
 
 S T R E I G H T S are from this Caufe alfo pro- 
 duced. 
 
 THE reafon why thefc Parts are now and then 
 fo miferably torn in Pieces, as to admit Inundati- 
 ons (by which Bays and Streights are formedj is 
 the impetuous Motion and violent dalhing of the 
 Waves againft the Shore, being forced by Winds, 
 or fome other Caufe, almoft daily, to wafh away 
 and wafte them : whereby, in procefs of time, the 
 Earth is broken and disjoined, and made unfit to 
 refill the rufhing of the Ocean. But this is more 
 likely to happen if the Shore be low, and confift 
 of loofe and crumbling Earth, eafy for the Sea to 
 work upon, which will with fmall refiftance burft, 
 and make room for a whole Bay of Water, 
 
 I T is manifeft, that fome new Bays and Streights 
 are thus produced, but we muft not thence con- 
 clude, that all which are at this Day found in the 
 Earth were fo generated : for it is very likely, that 
 a great many of them are of the fame Date with 
 the Earth and Ocean ; and the rather, becaufe 
 none, nor any thing like them, have been produ- 
 ced in the memory of Man. Tho* the ancient 
 Grecians have fuch Fables ; and tell us, that the 
 Mountain Calpe upon the Spanijh Shore, and Ah^le 
 in Africa were formerly joined, bur afterwards fe- 
 parated by Herculei \ from whence thefe Mountains 
 were called Herculei'^ Pillars, and the Streights, 
 Hercuki's Streights (a). 
 
 IT 
 
 (a) There are a great many veral other Reafons, to induce 
 Teftimonies of Authors, andfe- us to believe, that Britain was 
 
 not
 
 C H A p. 1 3 • 'rf Vniverfal Geography. 191 
 
 IT was a common Opinion of the Ancients, 
 that the Streights between Italy and Sicily^ were 
 made by the Irruption of the Sea, which we do 
 not fo much doubt of : nor do we think it impof- 
 fible, that the hke fmall Streights have been and 
 are ftill generated. Streights alfo may be turned into 
 Bays, and Bays into Streights -, as if, for Example, 
 the Mouth of the Streights of Magellan or Manilha^ 
 fhould be flopped on the one fide or the other, 
 they would be changed into long Buys : or if (on 
 the other hand) the IJlhmus between Africa and 
 y^fia^ fhould be removed, then the Red-Sea would 
 be joined to the Mediterranean, and they both be- 
 come Streights, and afford a PafTage to the Indian 
 Ocean. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Whether the Ocean be every where of the fame 
 Altitude, 
 
 I T appears from the firfl Propofition, that the 
 Face of the Ocean in it's natural Situation, and when 
 no ObflacLe hinders, is every where of the fame 
 Altitude, having, as was there proved a fpherical 
 Surface, and being conccntrical with the Earth : 
 but it may be here doubted, whether for fome 
 Reafons, it may not in one Place be higher than 
 in another ; which is very worthy of Obfervation, 
 and of great Moment to be well underflood, by 
 
 not an Ifland from the Begin- every Day on both Sides, wa$ 
 
 ning, but was formerly joined wore away and waited. The 
 
 to France by an IJlhmus y be- great Dr IVallis was of this O- 
 
 tween Do'ver ?indi Calais, and pinion, and fo was DrMoy^r^ny/?. 
 
 that this IJlhmus, in procefs of See both their Arguments in 
 
 Time, being continually beat Philof.Tranf.dL\)Tidge6.hy Motte. 
 
 upon by two impetuous Tides Part 4. Page 35, 40. 
 
 thofe
 
 192 The Ahfolute Part Sect. IV, 
 
 thofe that propofc the cutting thro' of Ifthmus^^ 
 and joining one Part ot the Ocean to another. 
 
 SEVERAL will have both the Sea and Land 
 to be higher towards the Northern Parts, than about 
 the Equator, and this was JriJiotle*s Thought fin 
 Lib. 2. Chap, ii. de Ccelo) (c). The Reafon they 
 bring for it is, that the Ocean feems to flow from 
 the Northern Parts as from a Fountain ; but this 
 does not prove it's fuperior Altitude there : for 
 whether the Northern Countries, or rather the Nor- 
 thern Chanels, be higher or lovver than the Cha- 
 nels near the Equator (as is yet doubtful, or at lead 
 not fufficiently proved from that Motion which is 
 not generally found in all the Northern Parts) it 
 does not follow, if they were fo admitted, that the 
 Ocean is there higher ; becaufe that to lower that 
 fuperior Height, and to make the other equal with 
 it, the Ocean is conftantly flowing towards the 
 Equator. Arijlotle in the forecited Place adds ano- 
 ther fabulous Reafon, taken from the Poets, which 
 is not worth an Anfwer, viz. that the Sun when it 
 fets, hides icfelf beyond the great Bulk of the Nor- 
 thern Regions. 
 
 THIS Opinion of the fuperior Altitude of the 
 North Pole, feems to arife from hence -, that when 
 we turn our Faces that way, we imagine the Pole 
 to be raifed above the Horizon of the Place we are 
 in, and therefore judge the Countries thereabouts 
 to be elevated above us. 
 
 SOME think the Indian Ocean to be higher 
 than the Atlantic^ which they endeavour to prove 
 from the Flux of the Sea in at the Streights of Gi- 
 braltar^ znd of tht Arabian Gulph : but then, this 
 doubt is to be confidered, whether the Altitude of 
 " Bays, efpecially in their extream Parts, be the lame 
 
 (c) The Earth and Ocean are higheft about the Equator. See 
 the Note [i) on Chap. iii. 
 
 with
 
 C H A p. 1 3 • of JJniverjal Geography, 193 
 
 with that of the Ocean, or leis •, and chlefiy thofe 
 Bays which are joined by very narrow Sircights to 
 the Ocean, 
 
 T H AT the Atlantic and Indian Ocean are 
 higher than theextream Parts of the Mediterranean^ 
 near Egypt and AJia minor^ none need doubt ; for 
 unlefs the Streighcs of Gibraltar (where the Atlantic 
 floweth into the Mc'diterranean) were fomething 
 lower than the Ocean, there would not be fuch a 
 ftrong Current there as it is. Perhaps at the 
 Streight's mouth there may be but little difference j 
 but then further, to continue the Flux all over that 
 large Trad: between Europe and Africa, the depref- 
 fion of the Bay mull by Degrees be greater, other- 
 wife the Water could not flow when it is lb often 
 obftrufted by Rocks, Iflands, Peninfula's, and o- 
 ther Obftacles, which repel the Current of the Wa- 
 ter, and diminilh the Force of the Influx. We 
 need not doubt of this, if it be true what is record- 
 ed of Sefojlris, Darius, and other Kings of Egyft^ 
 by fome Authors of good Credit, how they at- 
 tempted to cut a Chanel between the Red-Sea and 
 the Nile, that out of the Indian Ocean, and thro' 
 the Red- Sea, they might fail that Way from the 
 Mouth of the Nile into the Mediterranean ; which 
 would be of great Advantage to Egypt and other 
 Countries upon the Coaft of the Mediterranean. But 
 they were forced to defifh from this Enterprife, 
 when the Red-Sea was difcovered by the Artificers 
 CO be much higher than the Inner Egypt. If there- 
 tore the Red-Sea be higher than the Land of Egypt ^ 
 it will be alfo higher than the Water of the Nile 
 and the Mediterranean icfelf, into which the Nile 
 flows •, and confequently the Red-Sea, and alfo the 
 Indian Ocean, are both higher than the Mcditerra^ 
 nsan, efpecially thefurthefl: Parts of it about Egypt, 
 Romania, and the Archipelago, 
 
 V O L. I. O M ORE-
 
 194 ^^^ Ahjolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 MOREOVER, other Kings of Eg^pt of old, 
 and of late the Egyi4iaii Sultans, and Turhjlj Em- 
 perors, had frequent Confultations about cutting 
 through that Ijlhtnus that joins Ajrka to /-///^, and 
 feparates tlie Miditerranean from the Red-Sea \ but 
 the Reafon, as we are told, why they did not fet 
 about it was, that the Indian and Red- Sea were found 
 to be much higher than the Shorts of the Mediter- 
 ranean : and therefore it was feared, that the /^^i- 
 •S(?^rfhou Id overflow them, efpecially £^)'/>/, which 
 is reckoned by every one to be a very low Coun- 
 try. 
 
 I'll AT the Red Sea h higher than the Medi- 
 terranean appcareth troni thele Obfervations ; but 
 tliis, not without Caule, may be doubted by fome, 
 bccaufe they are both Bays, the one of the Atlan- 
 tic and the other of the Indian Ocean. Therefore 
 to give a plaufible Reafon, why the one fhould be 
 higher than the other, it will not be amifs to con- 
 fider, that tho' they are both deprefled more than 
 the Seas from which they t^ow •, yet the Difference 
 is lei's fenfible in the extream Part of the Red-Sea, 
 which is nearer the Indian Ocean, than the extream 
 Parts of the Mediterranean are to the Atlantic. For 
 I cannot think that the Indian Ocean is higher than 
 the Atlantic, as Ibme imagine. 
 
 I F therefore the Illhmus was cut through, no 
 doubt but a great Quantity of Water would flow 
 from the Red-Sea into the Mediterranean •, but I can- 
 not think fo much as to bring Egypt, and other 
 Places about the Levant, into danger of being over- 
 flowed : becaufe if the Indian Ocean poured in more 
 Water, the Atlantic, woukl very likely emit lefs, 
 that fo they might each retain the fame Altitude in 
 Proportion. ■ '"'•-.'" ' 
 
 BESIDES this, I tuppofe the Sultans of Egypt 
 
 an4. tlie I'urks, were induced by other Political 
 
 -iA/. . w\ - , v^ Caufes
 
 Chap. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 19^ 
 
 Caufes and Reafons to omit cutting through this 
 Ifthmus. 
 
 THE firfi: fcruple was no doubt the greatnefs 
 of the Work, for it would be no Anall Labour and 
 Expence to cut thro' an lllhmus, whofe Breadth at 
 the narroweft Part is at leaft forty German Miles, 
 and the Earth rocky •, befides there muft have been 
 Dams and Wears made in feveral Places, which 
 could not have been done without PKillful Work- 
 men, which thofe Nations have always wanted. 
 
 THE fecond Reafon was, becaufe they fup- 
 pofed the Chriltian Nations in Italy ^ Venice, France^ 
 Spain, Sec. would receive greater Benefit than they 
 themfelves from this Canal, by failing thro' it to 
 Perjia and India, and bringing thence thofe pre- 
 cious Commodities, which the Turks and Egyptiam 
 at prefcnt carry at their own Prices by Land, and 
 for which they receive large Duties, which bring 
 confiderable Revenues into the Grand Seignior's 
 Coffers. See Maffeus^s Hiftory of India, Book iii, 
 where he tells us, how much the Sultans of Egypt 
 were formerly offended at the Portuguefe failing and 
 trading into India. 
 
 A third Caufe why they neglefted this was per- 
 haps, becaufe they knew the Chriltians excelled 
 them in Navigation ; and were theretore afraid left 
 they fhould invade thofe Streights, and the adjacent 
 Countries, or even Medina itfelf, the Sepulchre of 
 Mahomet. For a confiderable Fleet v/ould in a 
 fhort tim.e tranfport a great Army of Men, and all 
 neceffary Provifions from Europe to Arabia^ by this 
 Canal. 
 
 BUT Alphonfus Albuquerce, Governor of the 
 Portuguefe Indies, was of another Opinion, when 
 he had intended to have turned the Nile from 
 Egypt, by cutting a Chanel thro' Ahyjjinla (which 
 borders upon Egypt, only a few Delarts interpo- 
 fing) to the Red-SeUj that by this means he migKt 
 O 2 reader
 
 196 "The Ahfohite Fart S e c t. IV. 
 
 render Eg-j-^t barren and unfruitful to the T^urh ; 
 but he died before he could undertake it. 
 
 THUS far, concerning the Altitude of the 
 Mediterranean compared with that of the Red-Sea^ 
 ^tlantk^ and Indian Ocean. We were obliged 
 to explain it •, becaufe from thence fome take Oc- 
 cafion to argue the unequal Altiiude ol Ibme Farts 
 ot the Ocean. 
 
 "BUT ihelc things may be comfirmed by ano- 
 ther Example, if we may compare groat I'hings 
 with fmall. I'he German Ocean, which is a Part 
 ot the Allantk^ running between Fnejland and Hol- 
 land^ forms a Bay •, which tho' it be but fmall, in 
 comparilbn ol thefe iamous ones juft now men- 
 tioned, yet it is called a Sea, and watereth Am- 
 jlerdam the Capital of Holland. Not far from thence 
 is the Lake of Ilnrlem, which is alfo called the 
 Sea of Harle^n : this is as high as the foremen- 
 tioned Bay, and fends out a Branch to Lc\den\ 
 where it is divided into feveral lefTer Canals. And 
 becaule neither the Lake nor the Bay overflows 
 the bordering Country fwhen they are fettled and 
 at quiet, and they have Bulwarks provided againft 
 a Storm) it appears that they are not higher than 
 the Lands of Holland. But that the German Ocean 
 is higher than thefe Countries, hath been experien- 
 ced by the Inhabitants of he-^den., when they under- 
 took to cut a Canal from their City to the German 
 Shore, near the Town of Caiwic^ which is about 
 two Holland Miles in Length •, fo that the Sea be- 
 ing let in, they might fail into the German Ocean, 
 and from thence to other Countries. But when 
 they had finiflicd a great Part of it, they were for- 
 ced to leave ofi^, having at length found, by Ob- 
 fcrvation, that the German Ocean ^vas higher than 
 the Ground between it and Leaden •, from whence 
 the Place where they left off is called by the Dutch, 
 lUt malic Gal. i. e. unprofperous. Therefore the 
 .3 German
 
 C H A p. 1 3 • rf Ufihcrja! Geography. i gj 
 
 German Ocean is fomething higher than [the Zuy 
 der Zee or] the Bay of Holland. 
 
 BUT all Bays are not deprefled below the 
 Ocean, for thole that run out into the Land at 
 broad and open Pallages, fuch as thofe o'i Mexico^ 
 Bengal^ &c. are, without doubt, of the fame Al- 
 titude with the Ocean itfelf : tho' I know the Spa- 
 niardi doubted this (whether the Pacific Ocean was 
 higher than the Bay of Mexico) when they confult- 
 ed about cutting thro' the Illhmus of Panaina^ 
 that they might with more Expedition fiiil to Peru, 
 China, and the Indian Iflands. But bsfides this 
 Sufpenfe, we underftand that they had a Political 
 Reafon for not doing it •, they were afraid left the 
 Englijh, Dutch, and other Nations fhould make 
 ufe of it, and lie in wait at the Entrances, or in- 
 vade Peru. For the Engli/Jo and Butch would not 
 care to make fuch long and dangerous Voyages 
 thro' the Streights of Magellan or La Maire, when, 
 with a well furnifhed Fleet, they could force their 
 way thro' thofe Streights, and perhaps take PerUy 
 or at leaft crufh the Force of the Spaniards there. 
 
 T H AT we may put an end to this, it is beft 
 to determine, that the divers parts of the Ocean 
 and broad Bays are all of the fame Altitude, (as 
 was proved in the firft Propofition) but long Bays, 
 and chiefly thofe produced from narrow Streights, 
 are fomewhat deprefTed, efpecially at their extream 
 Parts: but I could wifh there were more diligent 
 and accurate Obfervations made by thofe who have 
 the Opportunities of making them, to remove, 
 if pofTible, the following Doubts, viz. i. Whether 
 the Indian, Atlantic, and Pacific Ocean are of the 
 farne Altitude, or the Atlantic be lower than the 
 other two. 2. Whether the northern Ocean, near 
 the Pole, and within the Frigid Z,one, be higher 
 than the Atlantic. 3. Whether the Red-Sea be 
 higher than the Mediterranean, 4. Whether the 
 O 3 Pacific
 
 198 "The Abjolute Tart S e c T. IV. 
 
 Pacific Sea be higher than \.\\q, Mexican Bay. 5 . Whe- 
 ther the Baltic be as high as the Adanlic. And 
 thefe Dilfcrences ought to be obfcrved in Hudfon^s 
 Bay, the Streights of Magellan, and others. We 
 fhall treat of the Euxine Sea in Chapter xv. 
 
 THE continual Flux and Reflux of the Sea, and 
 Currents, make the Face of the Ocean mutable, 
 and it's Parts of a difterent Altitude, at different 
 Times -, but thefe arife from external Caufes, and 
 we here only confider the natural Conftitution of 
 the Water : befides, they do not feem to alter the 
 Altitude fo much in the middle of the Ocean, as 
 near the Shores. 
 
 COROLLARY, 
 
 THEREFORE we cannot aflfent to Papyius 
 Fabianus and Cleomedes, who determined the great- 
 eft Height of the Ocean to be fifteen Furlongs, or 
 half a German Mile ; unlefs they mean the Depth, 
 which is not at all well expreflcd by the Word Alti- 
 tude, as it appears in the Tranflation of Arijlotle, 
 Book i. Meteor. Chap. xi. at the end, where fistSea 
 7K islvT^ is explained of the Altitude of the Sea. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 The Depth of the Sea, or Ocean., in mofi Parts ma-^ 
 be tried with a founding Lead ; and there are hut 
 few Places where the Bottom cannot be reached. 
 
 THE Depth of the Ocean varies according to 
 the greater or leflTer Deprcffion of the Chanels ; 
 being found io of a German Mile, 20, ro, i, 1, 
 i^c. deep i and in a few Places a whole German 
 Mile or more, where the Line was commonly not 
 long enough to try how much, tho* even there 
 it is jikcly the Bottom is not at a vaft Diftance, 
 
 unlefi
 
 Chap. 13- of Vniverfal Geography. igg 
 
 unlefs perhaps in fome Places there may be deeper 
 Pits than ordinary, or fubterraneous PalFages. 
 
 THE Depth of Bays is not io great as that of 
 the Ocean, and their Chanels are lefs hollowed by 
 being nearer the Land : for the fame Reafon the 
 Ocean is not fo deep near the Shore, as in remote 
 Places ; which happens by reafon of the concave 
 Shape of the Chanel. . :, 
 
 S A I L O R S find the Sea's Depth witii a found- 
 ing Lead, in the Shape of a Pyramid, of about 
 twelve Pound Weight, taftened to a Line about 
 two hundred Perches long, tho' fome require a 
 Lead of a greater Weight: yet they may be fome- 
 times deceived in this Obfervation if the Line 
 fhould be carried away by a Current or Whirl- 
 pool, fo as not to defcend perpendiculurly, but 
 obliquely. 
 
 BUT when the Depth is fo great that no Line 
 is fufficient to found it, fome have thought of a 
 Method to try it thus (d). In the firft Place they 
 obferve, how long a known Weight of Lead will 
 be in defcending a known Depth , then they faften 
 O 4 a Cork 
 
 [J) The learned Dr Hooihis 
 given us a Method (much like 
 the following) to ibund the 
 Depth of tlie Sea without a 
 Line, which, becaufe it pro- 
 mifeth Succefs, we fhall here 
 defcribs from the Fhihf. Tranf. 
 N° 9. Page 147. 
 
 Take a Globe of Fir, or 
 Maple, or other light Wood, 
 as A; (Fig. ig.) let it be well 
 fecuredby Varniih, Pitch, oro- 
 therwife, from imbibing Water ; 
 then take a Piece of Lead, or 
 Stone, D, confiderably heavier 
 than will fmk the Globe : let 
 there be a long wire Staple E 
 in the Ball A, and a fpringing 
 
 Wire C, with a bended End F, 
 and into the faid Staple, prefsin, 
 with youi" Fingers, the fpring- 
 ing Wire on the bended End : 
 and on it hang the Weight D, 
 by it's Hook E, and fo let the 
 Globe and all fink gently into 
 the Water, in the Poilure repre- 
 fented in the Figure, to the 
 Bottom, where the Weight, D, 
 touching firft, is thereby flop- 
 ped ; but the Ball , being by 
 the Impetus it acquired in def- 
 cending carried downwards a 
 little after the Weight is flop- 
 ped, fuffers the fpringing Wire 
 to fly back, and thereby fet? 
 jtfelf at Liberty to re-a(cend, 
 A»«
 
 2 CO l^te Abfolute Part S r c t. IV. 
 
 a Cork or a blown Bladder to the Lead, fo as it 
 niay be dilciigagcd from it, as foon as the Lead 
 fhall touch the Bottom : this being done, they let 
 down the Lead, and obferve the time between it's 
 touching the Bottom, and the Cork's rifing to the 
 Surface of the Sea -, irom whence by comparing this 
 with the alorefaid Obfervations, and flated Pro- 
 
 And by obferving the Time of 
 the Ball's flay under Water, 
 (which may be done by a 
 Watch, or a good Minute 
 Glafs, or beft of all by a Pendu- 
 lum vibrating Seconds, (which 
 muft be three Foot three Inches 
 and one fifth of an Inch long) 
 you may by the help of fome 
 
 Tables, come to know any 
 Depth of the Sea. Which Ta- 
 bles may be calculated from the 
 following Experiments made by 
 the Lord Vifc. Brounker, Sir 
 Robert Murray, and Mr. Ihok^ 
 in the Chanel at Sheermfi ; 
 mentioned in Philof. Tranf. N° 
 24. P«^M39- 
 
 A wooden Ball A weighed - 
 Another wooden Ball B — 
 
 A Lead A 
 
 Another Lead B — — - 
 
 Oz. 
 
 Gr. 
 
 ^^h 
 
 00 
 
 30 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 00 
 
 30-^ 
 
 00 
 
 The Ball B and the Lead B 
 were let down at fixteen Fa- 
 thoms ; and the Ball returned 
 in forty eight f:ngle Strokes 
 of a Pendulum, held in the 
 Hand, vibrating fifty eight fm- 
 gle Strokes in a Minute. 
 
 A fecond time repeated with 
 the fame Sutccfs ; wherefore 
 the Motion was four Foot every 
 Second . 
 
 Again the Ball A, and the 
 r.cad B, whofe Nail was bend- 
 ed into a fhaper Angle ; the 
 Ball returned in thirty nine 
 Strokes, A fecond time repeat- 
 ed with the fame Succefs, at 
 the fame Depth. 
 
 Ball A, Lead A, ate^ght Fa- 
 thoms and one Foot, returned 
 at twenty ; repeated at eight 
 I'athoms returned at nineteen. 
 'I'ried the third time at ten 
 
 Fathoms four Foot, returned 
 at twenty eight. 
 
 A fourth Tryal at the fame 
 Depth, jufl the fame. 
 
 A fifth, at ten Fathoms five 
 Foot, returned at twenty feven. 
 
 A fixth Tryal, juft the fame. 
 
 A feventh at twelve Fathoms 
 five Foot, returned in thirty- 
 feven. 
 
 An eighth Tryal juft the fame.' 
 
 But if it be alledged, that it 
 muft be known, when a light 
 Body afcends from the Bottom 
 of the Water to the Top, iii 
 what Proportion of Time it 
 rifes; it may beconfidered, that 
 in thefe Experiments theTimes 
 of the Defcent and Afcent are 
 both taken and computed to- 
 gether ; fo that for this Pur- 
 pofe, there needs not the Nice- 
 ty which is alledged. 
 
 portions.
 
 Chap. 13. of Unherfal Geography. 201 
 
 portions, they find the Depth of the Ocean. But 
 there isfuch a Nicety required in making thefe Try- 
 als, and the time of Obfervation is fo Ihort, that 
 it is very rare to find the true Depth by this Me- 
 thod. However it appeareth, that the Depth of 
 the Ocean is every where finite, and not extended 
 to the Antipodes •, becaufe if two Portions of Earth 
 were divided by any Part ot the Ocean, which 
 might be continued thro* the Center to the oppo- 
 fite Side of the Globe, unlefs they were fupported 
 with Arches, they would immediately fall together 
 at the Center, becaufe the Earth is heavier than the 
 Water. Befides, the whole Bulk of Earth and Wa- 
 ter is finite and fpherical ; and therefore the Depth 
 of the Ocean cannot be infinite. 
 
 MOREOVER, from the Obfervations of the 
 Depth in divers Places, it is manifeft, that the Cha- 
 ttels in Depth are nearly equal to the Mountains 
 and inland Parts in Elevation, that is, as much as 
 the one is raifed, fo much the other is deprefled, 
 and as the Altitude of the inland Parts is gradually 
 increafed from the Shore, fo is the Sea deeper and 
 deeper towards the Middle of the Ocean, where 
 the Depth is for the moft part greateft. 
 
 THE Depth of the Sea, is in the fame Place 
 often altered by thefe or the like Caufes. i. By the 
 Flux and Reflux. 2. By the Increafeand Decreafe 
 of the Moon. 3. By the Winds. 4. Bythemoul- 
 dering and fubfiding of the Shores ; whence the 
 Chanel is made higher in procefs of time by Sand 
 and Mud. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 '.03 TtlV^ 
 
 The Ocean doth not flow from Springs, lut is contained 
 within the Cavities of the Earth ; tho' it is not aU 
 wa\^ numerically the fame, hut mitinually increaftng 
 and diminijhing. 
 
 WE
 
 202 T^he Abfolute Fart S e c t . I V. 
 
 W E know by Experience that the Water of 
 Rivers is produced by Springs, and becauie it hath 
 been To for many Ages paft, it neceflarily follows, 
 that the Water which is continually flowing to the 
 Sea, returns again to the Fountains, either by fub- 
 terraneous Duds, or fome other way. The Phi- 
 lofophcrs ot old werealfo of Opinion, that the Sea 
 iflued forth at feveral Springs ; neither could the 
 Magnitude nor the Perpetuity of it's Bulk convince 
 them of their Error, for they faid, that it was con- 
 veyed by fubterraneous Fillures to thefe Fountains, 
 which therefore kept continually flowing. Ariflotle 
 fBook ii. Meteor. Chap. \\.) endeavours to prove 
 the contrary, and to refute the Arguments of the 
 Ancients, but fays very little to the Purpofe j we 
 think thefe following will be more efl^edual to dif- 
 prove them. If the Ocean have Springs they muft 
 either be in the raifed Parts of the Earth, or in that 
 Part which is covered with the Ocean, that is in 
 the very Chanel of the Sea. That there are no 
 fuch upon the dry Land is apparent, becaufe there 
 were never yet found any •, and to fay that they 
 are in the unknown Countries towards the North 
 or South Pole is to take a Thing for granted with- 
 out any manner of Reafon for it, becaufe mofl: of 
 thefe Countries are covered with Ice continually, 
 and as many as are difcovered of them afix)rd no 
 Springs at all. Neither can they pretend to fay 
 that they are in the Chanel of the Sea -, for if they 
 were, they would be no further diflant from the 
 Center than the Ocean itfelf •, and therefore the 
 Water in them would not flow, but be at Reft, 
 becaufe it is againft Nature that it (hould afcend 
 from a lower to a higher Place •, and the Springs 
 of all Rivers are higher than the Waters they emit. 
 Some indeed may objed that this Motion is vio- 
 lent, becaufe that the Bottom of the Ocean, being 
 ])f*rforated into Dufts, Meanders, Fiflures, or Ca- 
 2 nals,
 
 J H A p. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 203 
 
 rals, Cwhich you'll pleafe to call themj is not ter- 
 minated in the Earth's Bowels, but exrended to a- 
 nother Fart of the Bottom of the Ocean by more 
 Intercourfes than one ^ fome of which convey the 
 Water one way, and fome another, io that it iffu- 
 eth out of each, as if they were fo many Springs. 
 And fince (fay theyj it is not contrary to Reafoii 
 to fuppofe many of thefe Padliges or Intercourfes, 
 nothing hinders but that there may be alfo as many 
 Springs in the very Chanel of the Ocean. But 
 thefe are all vain Fancies, and no way agreeing 
 with the Nature of Water ; for tho' the Water be 
 continued thro' thefe Orifices, it will not flow thro' 
 one or the other, but be at Reft, unlefs it be ur- 
 ged by fome external Caufe i and tho' it be prefTed 
 by the incumbent Water on this fide the Intercourft, 
 it will not difcharge itfelf at the other ; becaufe it is 
 as much prefTed by the incumbent Water there, 
 which keeps it in jEquilibrio, and at Reft, as may 
 be proved by Experiment thus : 
 
 Let A B C D {Fig. 20.) be a Veffel full of Wa- 
 ter, and A B it's fpherical Superficies. Let R P E F 
 be a hollow Beam of Wood, lying obliquely un- 
 der Water, fo that the whole at g under A may be 
 higher than the Hole at h under B. Then the 
 Water will flow in at both ends of the Beam 'till 
 the hollow Part be full -, but there will be no Flux 
 at either Orifice ; not at g becaufe it is higher nor 
 at h, becaufe, tho' it be lower than g, yet the 
 greater Weight of the Water about B will ftop the 
 Flux (e). 
 
 ^fj For, by the Laws of Hy- of Water under A, and it's 
 
 droftatics, the Weight of the own relative Gravity in the 
 
 greater Column of Water un- declining Bore is to prefs it 
 
 <ier B is of the fame force to downwards at the Hole g ; 
 
 prefs the Water upwards at the therefore it remains in uSqui- 
 
 ^ole /'j as the leffer Column /il^rh, and at Reit. 
 
 IF
 
 204 The Ahfilutc Tart S e c t. I V. 
 
 I F it fhould be again objeded, tliat the incum- 
 bent Water upon the one Orifice is of a lefs Alti- 
 tude, and therefore not of fo great Force to repel 
 the Flux of Water, which is immitted at the other : 
 We anfwer, i. That liich a thing may be, if the 
 Superficies of the Water, which prelTeth one Orifice, 
 be feparated, or not continuous to the Superficies of 
 the Water that prelleth the other Orifice ; but if 
 thefe two Surfaces are continuous, the Water will 
 fooner defcend by that Continuation to the lower 
 Place, than by this fubterraneous Dudl. 2. If what 
 was objeded be allowed, this Motion would in a 
 Ihort time ceafe, 'ulz. when fo much Water was 
 run out by the Intcrcourfe from the higher to the 
 lower Place, as to make both their Surfaces of an 
 equal Altitude. And further, fuppofe one part of 
 the Ocean was perpetually higher than the other, 
 there could be no Reafon given, why the Water 
 fhould circulate, or interchangeably be poured from 
 one Part into another. 
 
 FROM whence it is evident, that the Ocean 
 hath no Springs, but is a vafl Colledtion of W^aters 
 contained in Chanels. 
 
 YET there are fome things to be taken no- 
 tice of, which are commonly obje6led againft this, 
 viz, 
 
 I. T HAT our Proof is built upon a Suppofi- 
 tion, that the Ocean, as to it*s natural Conftitution, 
 is continually at Reff, without taking notice of it's 
 being moved by any external Caufes : but there is 
 no time in which the Ocean is not in Motion, either 
 by the Wind or Tide, or fome other violent Agent, 
 which caufes the Altitude and Quantity of the Wa- 
 ter to be greater fometimes in one Place and fome- 
 times in another \ and then the Water which is more 
 elevated, is poured into thofe fubterraneous Interr 
 courfes, and rufhes towards the Parts that are of a 
 lefs Altitude, and where the incumbent Water is 
 
 lefs
 
 Chap. 13- of Univerfal Geography. 205 
 
 lefs able to refift the Eruption. To which I an- 
 Iwer, that rho' this is poflible, yet it cannot be prov- 
 ed either by Reafon or Experience, fo neither can 
 the contrary, therefore this Problem is a Dilemma, 
 or doubtful. That there are indeed fubterraneous 
 Receptacles and Cavities in fome Parts of the 
 Bottom of the Sea we cannot deny, becaufe in fome 
 Parts it is of an immenle Depth, where the neigh- 
 bouring Places are but fhallow ; but if this were 
 admitted, it v/ill not follow, that the Water runs 
 thro' thefe PafTages, or that they extend from one 
 Chanel of the Ocean to another : or even if they 
 were, fince they are not in all Places, and fince 
 thefe external Caufes operate fometimes in one, 
 and lometimes in another Part of the Ocean, it will 
 not be granted, that there are perpetual Springs of 
 the Ocean in any one Place, but that the Water 
 flows fometimes from one Part of the Chanel, and 
 fometimes from another, according to the Place 
 and Continuance of the external Caufe. 
 
 2. SOME may thus argue, that there is a con- 
 tinual Current of the Sea from North to South, be- 
 tween both Sides of America and the Old IVorld ; 
 but that we cannot perceive a Current in any Place 
 whereby the W^ater is conveyed towards the Nor- 
 thern Regions : therefore fince the Flux is perpetual, 
 and hath no apparent Source there, nor Convey- 
 ance thither, it is probable, that the W^ater fiov.'s 
 to the North thro' fubterraneous PafTages, and ifTu- 
 eth out at the Holes in the Bottom ot the Chanel, 
 as out of a Spring •, from whence it returns again to 
 the fouthward. There is another Caufe taken from 
 the former, viz. That the Sea- Water in the Tor- 
 rid Zone is much heavier than in the Northern Re- 
 gions, as we fhall prove in Propofition 8, and 12; 
 and therefore there is a greater PrefTure and Force 
 to pufh forward the Water thro' the Paflages there, 
 than there is to refift it at the Northern End of the 
 
 Intercourfcs,
 
 2o6 T^he Ahfolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 Intercourfes, where, tor want ot an equal Preffure, 
 it breaks out at the Holes in the Bottom of the 
 Chanels. To this we anfvver, that the Flux of the 
 Ocean from the North is not fo great as is fup- 
 pofed, and as the Ancients imagined ; (who would 
 have the Water to flow from the Pole thro' four 
 Chanels, as is reprefented in fome old Geogra- 
 phical Maps ;) nor are the Currents conftant, but 
 only frequently obfcrved, by reafon of the frequent 
 North-Winds, and the great quantities of Snow 
 and Rain which very often raile the Waters, 
 and caufe them to flow towards the South. And 
 further, in other Parts another Motion of the 
 Sea is obferved, ot which fee the following 
 Chapter. 
 
 3. IT is no Notion, but a real Truth, that all 
 the Springs of Rivers, which flow into the Sea, 
 are Springs of the Ocean : For flncc there is in Pro- 
 cefs of a Time a vaft: quantity of Water poured 
 into the Sea, no doubt but it returns from the 
 Ocean to the Heads of the Rivers thro* fubteraneous 
 Paflages, or by Dew and Rain. We fliall not con- 
 tend about this •, for we do not, in the Propolition, 
 mean fuch Springs as thefe •, but whether there 
 are Springs in the Caverns of the Earth, under the 
 Chanel of the Sea, which fupply the Ocean with 
 Water. 
 
 4. IT appears probable, that there are fuch 
 Springs in the Chanels of the Sea ; becaufc there 
 is found, in fome Places, frefh Water at the 
 Bottom of the Sea, which muft: certainly arife from 
 Springs in the very Chanel. Unfchoten tells us, 
 that in the Gulph of Ormus, near the little Ifland 
 Barey'riy there is brought up frefh Water, by the 
 Divers, at four or five Fathoms depth ; and the 
 like Springs are found at the Bottom of the Seas 
 and Bays. To this we anfwer ; that there are but 
 few fuch Springs found, and thofe not fufficient 
 
 to
 
 C H A p. 1 3 • rf Univerfal Geography, 207 
 
 to fupply the Ocean with Water -, befides the 
 Qucdion is not about fuch, as we fiiid before. 
 
 FROM thefe Things it appears, that the Sea 
 may be rightly faid to have Springs in lome Senie, 
 tho' different from what we mean by the Springs 
 of Rivers ; in which Senfe this Propofition ought 
 to be underftood. Flence alfo we know what to 
 think of the Queftion ; Whether the Ocean be al- 
 ways one and the fame, and conftantly remains fo, 
 or whether it be a Body whofe Parts are confumed 
 and renewed again perpetually. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 The Salt nefs, or Salt Tajle^ of the Sea-Water proceeds 
 from the Particles of Salt which are mixed witb 
 it : but whence thefe Particles proceed^ or how they 
 are continued and increafed^ is uncertain. 
 
 EXPERIENCE proves the firfl Part of this 
 Propofition, for every Body knows that Salt is 
 made either by evaporating Sea Water with the Sun, 
 or by boiling it with the Heat of our Fires. In 
 Germany^ and other Countries, they make ufe of 
 Fire to feparate the Water from it. But in France^ 
 where the Sun is hotter, the Sea-Water is let into 
 Pits or Ponds, where in a few Months, by the ex- 
 tream Heat of the Sun, it's frefli Particles are ex- 
 haled or evaporated, and it's fait ones are concre- 
 ted and formed into Grains of Salt. Alfo upon 
 the Shores of feveral Countries, as England, &'c. 
 there is gathered abundance of Bay-Salt, which 
 the Sea (continually overflowing them) leaves daily 
 in moifl: Particles, from whence the moft fubtile, 
 or frefh. Parts are exhaled, and what is left be- 
 comes Heaps of Grains of Salt, whofe Blacknefs is 
 taken off by boiling -, tho* this fort of Salt is 
 walhed away and diflblved from many Shores by 
 
 tha
 
 2o8 The Ahfolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 the Violence of the Ocean, and therefore is not 
 found upon all Shores. And fince this is a com- 
 mon Experiment which every one knows, Arijlotls 
 need not have inltanced a falfe one (by letting 
 down a Vefiel of Wax into the Seaj to prove the 
 Truth of this PropoHcion. 
 
 HENCE it appears, that the true Caufe of 
 the Saltnefs of Sea Water, is the Particles of Salt 
 which are contained in it, and mixed with it. 
 Therefore the Ariftotelians, with their Mafter, fpeak 
 improperly, and obfcurely, when they aflert that 
 this Saltnefs is caufed by the Waters being ex- 
 treamly heated by the Rays of the Sun ; but of this 
 we fhall fame more by and by. 
 
 BUT the chief Controverfe is about the other' 
 part of the Propofition, 'uiz. wiience thefe Parti- 
 cles of Salt proceed ? 
 
 ARISTOTLE was of Opinion that the dry 
 Exhalations, or Fumes, (which he thought were 
 burnt, and of a faline Naturej being elevated from 
 the Earth, and mixed with moid Particles, when 
 they are turned into Rain, fall down with it into 
 the Sea, and that from thence proceed the faline 
 Particles, and the Saltnefs in the Sea- Water. Thefe 
 are his exprefs Words in Lib. ii. Chap. vii. Meteor. 
 And he takes a great deal of Pains to defend this 
 Opinion, becaufe by it he could fnew a Reafon 
 why the Sea continues always falc. 
 
 OTHER Peripatetics (who alfo pretend to 
 have Arijlotk on their Side) aifert, that the Sea 
 is flit in itfelf, by reafon of it's being perpetually 
 fcorthed with the Sun-Beams -, and for this Reafon 
 they fay i^. is frefher towards the Bottom, and falteft 
 at the Surface, 
 
 BOTH thefe Opinions labour under fuch great 
 Difficulties and Abfurdities, that it is a Wonder fo 
 many learned Men and Philofophers could be fa- 
 tisfied v»'ith them. 
 
 THESE
 
 Chap. 13. of XJniverJal Geography. 209 
 
 THESE things may be objediled againft 
 yf/7/?o//<?*i. Hypothefis ; i. That Ruin- Water, ac- 
 cordii g to this, ought to tafte fait, upon the O- 
 cean, which is contrary to Experience, for it is 
 found not to tafte fait at all. And Scaliger'^ Re- 
 medy for this is infutHcient, who fays, that it 
 ought not to tafte fo at firft, becaufe the hoc 
 Vapour hath not had time to be condenfed, being 
 more rare, and alfo having lately defcended from 
 a colder Region of the Air ; but fuch Rain-Wa- 
 ter hath been preferved feveral Days by Mariners, 
 in which time it would certainly liave tafted fait, 
 if it had held any in it. 2. The lefs it rained thq 
 lefs fait would the Sea-Water tafte, which is found 
 to the contrary. 
 
 THE other Opinion hath thefe Abfurdicies : 
 I. It is falfe that the Sea is not fo brackifti 
 nearer the Bottom ; for this only happens where 
 Springs of frefti Water rife from the Bottom of 
 the Chanel. 2. Experience fliews that frelh Water 
 doth not become fait by long boiling, or by be- 
 ing long expofed to the Sun. Scaliger likewife 
 endeavours to obviate this Objedion by a iubtile 
 Argument. He fays that this happens fo by reafon 
 of the fmallnefs of the quantity of that Water 
 which is ufed in the Experiment, which doth not 
 thicken but is difiblved. But let us take ever fo 
 great a Quantity, and put it over a gentle Fire, 
 that the Diflblution finto Vapours as he means) 
 may be hindred, yet the Water will tafte no more 
 brackifh than it did at firft. 3. Lakes and Marlhes, 
 though they are conftantly heated by the Sun- 
 Beams, yet do not grow fait. Scaliger alfo 
 would wave this Obje<5lion, faying, that this 
 happens becaufe of the continual Succeflion of 
 frefh Water. But if we obferve Lakes and Mor 
 rafles that are fed only by Rain and melted Snow, 
 where there is no fuch Succefliojj, we Ihall find 
 
 VOL. L P them
 
 2 10 1'be AhJohHe Part S e c T. 1 V. 
 
 them rather to dry up, thro' a long want of 
 Rain, than to become brackifh, or be turned in- 
 to Salt. 
 
 THEREFORE, rejeding thefe falfe Opi- 
 nions concerning the Origin of Salt in the Ocean, 
 let us lay hold of fome otiicrs that feem more pro- 
 bable f/). 
 
 I. THESE 
 
 - (f) "Tl^e moR probable Ca.ufe 
 of the faltnefs of the Ocean is 
 thus explained by Dr Hallcy, 
 n Philof. Tranf. N° 344. 'I 
 have obferved (fays he) that 
 all the Lakes in the World, 
 properly fo called, are found 
 to be lalt, fome more fome 
 lefs than the Ocean Sea, 
 which, in the prefent Cafe, 
 may alfo be elleemed a Lake ; 
 fince by that Term I mean 
 fuch {landing Waters as per- 
 petually receive Rivers run- 
 ning into them, and have no 
 Exit or Evacuation. 
 * The number of thefe Lakes, 
 in the known Part of the 
 World, is exceeding fmall, 
 and indeed, upon enquiry, I 
 cannot be certain there are in 
 all any more than four or five, 
 <V2z. I. The Cafpian^cdi. 2. 
 The Mare Mortuum, or Lacus 
 JfphaltiUi. 3. The Lake on 
 which ftands the City of 
 Mexico ; and 4. Titicaca a 
 Lake in Peru, which, by a 
 Chanel of about fifty Leagues, 
 communicates with a fifth and 
 fmaller, -called the Lake of 
 Pciria, neither of which have 
 any other Exit. Of thefe the 
 Cafpian, which is by much 
 the grcateft, is reported to be 
 ibraewhat lefs fak than the 
 
 Ocean. The Lacus Afphal- 
 tiies is fo exceeding fait, that 
 it's Waters feem fully fated, 
 or fcarce capable to difTolve 
 any more ; whence, in Sum- 
 mer time, it's Banks are in- 
 cruftated with great Quan- 
 tities of dry Salt, of lome- 
 what a more pungent Nature 
 than the Marine, as having 
 a relifh of Sal Ammoniac ; as 
 I was informed by a curious 
 Gentleman that was upon the 
 Place. 
 
 ' The Lake of Mexico, pro- 
 perly fpeaking, is two Lakes 
 divided by the Caufways that 
 lead to the City, which is 
 built m Iflands in the midil 
 of the Lake, undoubtedly for 
 it's Security ; after the Idea, 
 it is polfible. it'sfirft Founders 
 borrowed from their Beavers, 
 who build their Houfes 
 in Damms they make in the 
 Rivers after that manner. 
 Now that part of the Lake 
 which is to the northwards 
 of the Town and Caufways, 
 receives a River of a confider- 
 able Magnitude, which being 
 fomewhat higher than the o- 
 ther, does with a fmall fall 
 exonerate itfelf into the fouth- 
 ern Part which is lower. 
 Of thefe the lower is found 
 * to
 
 Chap. 13. ofJJniverfal Geography, 2 1 1 
 
 1. THESE Particles are coeval with the O- 
 cean itfclf, and therefore in is the lame thing to en- 
 quire about the Origin of the terraqueous Globe, 
 and the Fabric of the whole World, as to difpute 
 how the Ocean came to be fait. 
 
 2. I F this Opinion do not pleafe, we will propofe 
 another, ij'iz. that thefe Particles were, in times 
 pad:, waflied and disjoined from the Earth, and 
 diflblved in the Water ; for we need not doubt 
 but that there are feveral Mountains and Rocks 
 of Salt in the Chane! of the Sea. The Ifland of 
 Ormm is nothing but white hard Salt, of which 
 they make the Walls of their Houfes, and there 
 
 to be fait, but to what De- 
 gree I cannot yet learn ; 
 tliough the upper be almoft 
 frefh. 
 
 ' And the Lake of Titicacn, 
 being near eighty Leagues in 
 Circuinfeience, and receiving 
 feveral confiderable frefh Ri- 
 vers, has it's Waters, by the 
 Teftimony of Herrera and 
 Acojia, fo brackifh as not to 
 be potable, tho' not fully fo 
 fait as that of the Ocean ; 
 and the like they affirm of 
 thatof P<3;7<7, into which the 
 Lake of Titicaca does in part 
 exonerate itfelf, and which 
 I doubt not will be found 
 much falter than it, if it were 
 enquired into. 
 
 * Now I conceive, that as all 
 the Lakes mentioned do re- 
 ceive Rivers, and have no 
 Exit or Difcharge, fo 'twill 
 be neceiTary that their Waters 
 rife until luch time as their 
 Surfaces are fufficiently ex- 
 tended, fo as to exhale in 
 Vapour that Water that is 
 poured in by the Rivers ; and 
 P 
 
 confequently that Lakes mult 
 be bigger or lelTer according 
 to the Quantity of the frefh 
 Water they receive. But ths 
 Vapours thus exhaled are per- 
 feftly frelh, fo that the faiine 
 Particles that are brought in 
 by the Rivers remain behind, 
 whilil: the frefh evaporates ; 
 and hence 'tis evident, that 
 the Salt in the Lakes will be 
 continually augmented, and 
 the Water grow falter and 
 falter. But in Lakes that have 
 an Exit, as the Lake of Gen- 
 mfaret, otherwife called that 
 of Tiberias, and the upper 
 Lake of Mexico, and indeed 
 in moft others, the Witer be- 
 ing continually runningofF, is 
 fupplied by new frefn River- 
 Water, in which the faiine 
 Particles are fo few as by no 
 means to be perceived. 
 * Now if this be the true 
 Reafon of the Saltnefs of 
 thefe Lakes, 'tis not improba- 
 ble but that the Ocean itfelf 
 is become fait from the fame 
 Caufe, i^c. 
 
 is
 
 2 12 The Ahfolute Fart Sect. I V . 
 
 is not one Spring of frefli Water in the whole 
 Jn.'ind. There are alio fcveral Mines of Salt in 
 the Earth, as every one knov/s, fome of which 
 we have defcribed in Chapter xi. But there is 
 ro need of particular Examples ; let us confider 
 the whole Earth, and we fhall find a great Part 
 of it to be nothing but Salt ; it's Coherence and 
 Compofition is by Salt, and, as Chemi lb and Na- 
 tural Philofophers rightly obferve, all folid Bo- 
 dies are concreted and joined by Salt \ which Ex- 
 perience alio proves •, for if any hard Body be 
 burned and confumed to Allies, much Salt will be 
 found in it. 
 
 N O T H I N G can be alledged againft this O- 
 pinion of any Weight, and which may not be 
 eafily refuted. Some have thought it impoffible 
 that thefe fait Particles of the Earth (hould per- 
 petually fuffice, and fliould not at fome time be 
 quite wafhed away by the Water of the Ocean, 
 which conilantly takes away fome Part of them : 
 To which we anfwer •, that the Salt, thus wrought 
 upon, is not fo much kflened as to need great 
 recruiting ; and if any be disjoined, or fhaken 
 from the reft, it is not carried without the Ocean, 
 but laid up in fome other Place. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 IVheihtr the ^ca-Water be frejher nearer the Bottom? 
 and why, in fome P laces , frejh Water is drawn 
 from the Bottom of the Ocean ? 
 
 T O thefe Qiieftions I anfwer ; That we have not 
 found it frefher near the Bottom, except in fome 
 particular Places ; where, it is very probable, 
 there are Springs of frefh Water. For it is againft 
 Nature that Salt Water ftiould float above frefh, 
 when it is heavier. 
 
 T^OSE
 
 Chap. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 213 
 
 THOSE Places of the Sea where there feeni 
 to be frefh Water Springs, at the Bottom, the 
 Studious may colled out of Geographical Au- 
 thors (/). 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 Tbe Water of the Ocean is lefs fait by how much il is 
 nearer the Poles, and faltejt about the Equator, 
 or in the Torrid Zone. 
 
 THIS is only to be underftood of mofl: Parts 
 of the Ocean, for the Proportion admits of fome 
 few Exceptions. 
 
 THERE are feveral Reafons for this unequal 
 Salcnefs, viz. 
 
 I. TH AT the Heat of the Sun in the Torrid 
 Zone exhales more Vapours than in the northern 
 Countries, and thefe Vapours are all frefli Water 
 for the Particles of Salt are not fo eafily evapora- 
 ted by reafon of their Gravity •, and therefore the 
 
 (/) That the Curious may 
 not be at a Lofs to examine the 
 Saltnefs of the Water at feveral 
 Depths, Dr Hook invented an 
 Inftrument to fetch it up at any 
 Depth, which is defcribed in 
 Pbi/o/. Tran/. N° 9. Page 149. 
 and N° 24. Page 447. or in 
 Lonvthorp's Abridgment y Vol. 2. 
 Page 260. Thus : 
 
 Let there be made a fquare 
 wooden Bucket C, [Fig. z i .) 
 whofe Bottoms E E, are fo con- 
 trived, that as the Weight A 
 finks the Iron B, to which the 
 Bucket C, is fallened by two 
 Handles D D, on the end of 
 which are the moveable Valves 
 or Bottoms E E, and thereby 
 draws dowo the Bucket i the 
 
 Refiftance of the Water keeps 
 up the Bucket in the Pofture 
 C, whereby the Water hath, 
 all the while it is defcending, a 
 clear Paflage through; whereas, 
 as foon as the Bucket is pulled 
 upwards by the Line F, the Re- 
 finance of the Water to that 
 Motion, beats the Bucket down- 
 wards, and keeps it in the Po- 
 fture G, whereby the included 
 Wat^'r is kept from getting out, 
 and rhe ambient Water kept 
 from getting in. 
 
 By the advantage of this Vef- 
 fel, you may know the Con- 
 ftitution of the Sea- Water ia 
 feveral Depths j and whether 
 it be falter at, and towards, the 
 Bottom. 
 3 Water
 
 z 1 4 T^he Abfolute Part S e c T . 1 V . 
 
 Water that is left in the Ocean ought to be more 
 fait about the Equator than towards the Poles, 
 where there is liOt fo much frefh Water exhaled 
 becaufeof the weak Heat ot the Sun. 
 
 2. A fecond Caufe is the Heat and Coldnefs 
 of the Water •, for the fame Water, fait Meat, 
 pickled Beef, Pork, ^c. tafte falter when hot than 
 when cold, as every one knows from his own Ob-' 
 fervation : becaufethe Heat, or the Particles of Fire, 
 agitate and fharpen the Particles of Salt contained 
 in fuch Meat, and feparate them one from ano- 
 ther •, fo that they ftrike and prick the Tongue 
 more fharply. Therefore, becaufe the Sea- Water 
 near the Equator is hotter, and coldeft towards 
 the Poles, it follows, that tho* every Part of the 
 Ocean were admitted to be of equal Saltnefs, yet 
 it ought to tafte filteft about the Equator, and 
 frefhell near the Poles. 
 
 3. A third Caufe is a greater or jefs quantity of 
 Salt in divers Parts of the Chanel of the Seaj for 
 as we find not Mines of Salt all over the dry 
 Land, nor a like quantity of Salt in the Places 
 where they are found, the fame may be fuppofed 
 at the Bottom of the Ocean, where fome Shores 
 and Chanels are not fo full ot Salt as others. 
 Therefore where there is a greater quantity of 
 Salt at the Bottom of the Ocean, there the Sea- 
 Water is more fait, becaufe there is greater Plen- 
 ty of this Mineral imbodied or foaked in it, as 
 is eafy to conceive. For this Reafon the Sea- 
 Water near the Ifle of Ormus is extream fait, be- 
 caufe the Ifland itfelf is all Salt. But whether 
 there be a greater quantity of Salt Mines under 
 Water in the Torrid Zone than about the Poles is 
 uncertain for want of Obfervations ; but fome 
 think it probable (becaufe of the greater Heat of 
 the Sun whereby the frefh Particles are exhaled) 
 
 thac
 
 C H A p. 13 • of Vniverfal Geography. 2i^ 
 
 that there is more Salt in the former ; tho* this be 
 but a weak Reafon. 
 
 4. A fourth Caufe is the frequency and fcarcity 
 of Rain or Snow. In the northern Countries they 
 have both very frequent : but under the Torrid Zone 
 they have no Rains at all for fome Parts of the- 
 Year, and at other Times they are aimoft conftant. 
 Therefore, in thefe Places, the Ocean, near the 
 Shores, is not fo fait in rainy Months as it is in 
 dry ones. Yea in feveral Places on the Coafl of 
 Malabar^ in Jndia^ the Sea- Water taftes fweet in 
 the rainy Months, by reafon of the vaft quantity 
 of Water which flows from off Mount Gale^ and 
 falls there into the Sea. This is the Reafon why, 
 at different Times of the Year, the fame Parts of 
 the Ocean are of different Degrees of Saknefs. But 
 becaui'e in the northern Countries there are con- 
 ftant Rains and Snow aimoft throughout the whole 
 Year, therefore the Sea there is lefs fait than in 
 the Torrid Zone. 
 
 5. A fifth Caufe is the different quality of the 
 Water to difTolve and mix the Salt with it •, for 
 hot Water diffolves Salt much fooner than cold : 
 and therefore the' there were the fame quantity 
 of Salt under Water in the Chanels of the Sea, 
 near the Poles, as about the Equator •, yet becaufe 
 the Water is cold there, it cannot fo quickly dif- 
 folve it into minute Particles and mix with 
 it, as the Water in the Torrid Zone which is 
 hotter. 
 
 6. A fixth Caufe is the great and many large 
 Rivers that empty themfelves into the Sea -, but 
 thefe only caufe an Alteration upon the Coafts -, 
 for the main Ocean is not fenfibly affefted by them. 
 Mariners relate that upon the Coaft of Brajil where 
 the Rio de la Plata empties itfelf into the Sea, 
 the Ocean lofes it*s fait Tafte, at aimoft fifteen 
 Leagues Piftance from the Shore :, and the fame 
 
 P 4 miiy
 
 2 1 6 "Tloe Abfolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 may be faid o\ the African Ocean on the Coaft 
 of Congo, and in feveral other Places, as about 
 Malabar in India, (as was obferved before) (j^c. 
 To thcfe Caufes we may add the fpringing up of 
 frefh Water in fome places Irom the Bottom of the 
 Sea. 
 
 THESE Caufes ^whether feparate or united J 
 make a great variety of Saltnefs in different Parts 
 of the Ocean, and by thefe that variety is explain- 
 ed and accounted for. 
 
 HENCE there is given a Reafon why the 
 Water of the German and northern Ocean will not 
 yield fo much Salt by boiling, as the Water of the 
 weftern Ocean about Spain, the Canary Iflands, 
 and Cape Verd in Africa, (from whence the Dutch 
 fetch abundance of Salt and tranfport it to fev^ral 
 northern Countries, viz. to PruJJia, Poland, &cj 
 becaufe thefe Coafls are nearer the Torrid Zone than 
 the other -, tho' perhaps both their Chanels may 
 contain an equal quantity of Salt. 
 
 THE Sea- Water in the ^//^/o/Zc Ocean, over 
 againft Guinea, yields white Salt, wirh once boiling, 
 as fine as Sugar, fuch as neither the Span'ijh Ocean, 
 nor any other in Europe will produce at once 
 boiling. 
 
 ,,,^ P ROPOS iriO N XI. 
 
 Why Ram- Water catcbed in the widdle of the Ocean 
 is found to le fweet and frejh, when it proceeds 
 from the Vajours which are exhaled from the Sea ; 
 whereas the Water, which, by boiling or diflilling, 
 we feparate from the fait Water of the Sea, is 
 found to be fait, 
 
 THOSE that have diligently fearched into 
 the Secrets of Nature, I mean the learned Che- 
 mifts, fnot thofe ignorant Pretenders to ChemiftryJ 
 
 have
 
 C H AP. 1 3- ^f Unherfal Geography. 2 17 
 have hitherto laboured in vain to find out a Me- 
 thod of diililling or extrading Irefh Water from 
 the Sea- Water, which would be of great ufe and 
 advantage to Navigation {g). And tho' both by 
 Decodion and Diftillation, which are in Efitd: 
 the lame, there is Salt left in the Bottom oi the 
 
 [g) Mr Hauton firft found 
 out the Secret of making Sea- 
 Water fweet. It confills firft 
 in a Precipitation made with the 
 Oil oi Tartar f which he knows 
 to draw with fmall Charges. 
 Next he diftils the Sea- Water ; 
 in which the Furnace taketh 
 up but little Room, and is fo 
 made, that, with a very little 
 Wood or Coal, he can diftil 
 twenty four French Pots of Wa- 
 ter in a Day ; for the cooling 
 of which he hath this new In- 
 vention, that inftead of making 
 the Worm pafs thro' a Veffel 
 full of Water (as is the ordi- 
 nary Praftice), he rrjaketh it go 
 thro' a Hole, made on purpofe 
 out of the Ship, and to enter 
 in again thro' another ; fo that 
 the Water of the Sea perform- 
 eth the cooling Part; by which 
 means he faveth the Room 
 which the common Refrigerium 
 would take up ; as alfo the La- 
 bour of changing the Water 
 when the Worm hath heated 
 it. But then, thirdly, he joins 
 to the two precedent Operations 
 Filtration, whereby perfeftly to 
 correft the malignity of the Wa- 
 ter. This Filtration is made by 
 means of a peculiar Earth, which 
 he mixeth and ftirs with the di- 
 ftilled Water, and at length fuf- 
 jfers to fettle at the Bottom. 
 
 He maintains that this diftil- 
 led Sea- Water )s altogether fa- 
 
 3 
 
 lubrious : he proves it from Ex- 
 perience, it having been given 
 to MenandB.afts, withoutany 
 ill Effeft at all upon them. 
 Secondly, from Re.Jon grounded 
 on this, that that peculiar Earth, 
 being mixed with the diftilled 
 Water, blunts the Points of the 
 volatile Spirits of the Salt, and 
 ferveth them for Sheaths, if I 
 mayfofpeak, taking away their 
 Force and malign fharpnefs. 
 Philof. Trmif. abridged by Loav- 
 thorp. Vol. 2. Page 297. 
 
 I have been credibly inform- 
 ed by experienced Sailors (par»- 
 ticularly fome that had an En- 
 gine on Board) that Salt-Wa- 
 ter made frefh by Diftillation, 
 would not quench Thirft ; but 
 that, when they had drank as 
 much as they could get down, 
 their Thirft, was not at all a- 
 bated. So neceflary are the 
 Impregnations, which the 
 Waters receive in their paf- 
 fages about the Earth, to make 
 them nutritive. And the richer, 
 and more fulphureous, thofe 
 Impregnations are, fo much the 
 richer, and better, fuch Wa- 
 ters are accounted. An in- 
 ftance of which we have in 
 the Richnefs and Spirituoufnefs 
 of the Thames Water at Sea, 
 which no doubt it receives 
 from it's Impregnations by the 
 Soil, and Filth, of the London 
 Xennels. 
 
 VeffeJ,
 
 2 1 8 ^je Abjhlute Part S e c T. I V. 
 
 Veflcl, yet the Water thus feparated is ftill fait, 
 and not fit for drinking, which fcems ftrange to 
 thofe that are ignorant of the Caufe of it. This 
 is taught by Chcmiftry (which is the trued Philo- 
 fophyj, by the help of which there are found two 
 kinds of Sak in all Bodies, which tho' they per- 
 tedly agree in tafte, yet they exceedingly diifer in 
 other Qjalitics: Artills call the one fixed Salt, the 
 other volatile. The fixed Sak, becaufe of it's Gra- 
 vity, is not evaporated by Diftillation, but re- 
 mains in the Bottom of the VeiTel : but the vola- 
 tile Sak is fpirituous, and indeed nothing but a 
 mod fubtile Spirit, which is eafily raifed with a 
 very gentle Fire ; and therefore in Diftillation af- 
 cends with the fweet Water, and is well mixed 
 with it by Reafon of the lubtiky of it's Particles. 
 This fixed and volatile Sak is found, by Chemifts, 
 to be not only in Sea -Water, but almoft in all 
 Bodies, tho' more in fome than in others ; in Herbs 
 that tafte fharp there is more, but in oily and in- 
 fipid Things lefs. The Difficulty therefore lies 
 in feparating the volatile Salt, or the fait Spirit, 
 from the Water ; for it is this which hath render- 
 ed all the Efforts hitherto fruitlefs. 
 
 BUT why Rain- Water fhould be as fweet and 
 Frefh on the main Ocean as it is at Land, when 
 it is generated from Exhalations, which arife 
 from the Sea by the Heat of the Sun, or is exhaled by 
 the Force of fubterraneous Fire, which Evapora- 
 tion no way differs from Diftillation, there feemeth 
 to be a lourfold Caufe. 
 
 I. A Qow and gentle Evaporation, by which 
 only the more fubtile Part is exhaled out of the 
 Ocean, which tho* it contain the volatile Spirit 
 of Salt, yet it is in a lefs quantity than when the 
 Evaporation is made by a ftrong Heat. 2. The long 
 Space whicli this Vapour paffes thro* before ic 
 arrives at that Region of the air where it is con- 
 ... - z denfed
 
 Chap. 13. of Univerfal Geography. 219 
 
 denfed into Rain : in which Paflage it is poflible 
 that the faline Spirit inay be by degrees feparaied 
 from the watery Particles. 3. The Mixture of 
 other frefli Particles of Water that are in the Air. 
 4. The Refrigeration and Coagulation or Conden- 
 fation of the Vapour. For thefe Vapours in their 
 afcent from the Ocean become, by degrees, colder, 
 and mixing with others in their Way, they are 
 condenfed and turned into Clouds •, and in this Re- 
 frigeration and Condenfation the faline Spirits fly 
 away, with fiery Particles, into a higher Place of 
 the Air. 
 
 BUT why this doth not happen in Diftilla- 
 tion (where the Vapours exhaled become more 
 cool and condenfed^ proceeds from hence : i . In- 
 this ihort Paflage the faline Spirit fl:icketh clofe 
 to the watery Particles. 2. The Vapour is kept 
 in a Veflel which doth not admit the Spirit to fly 
 thro* it. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 Sea-lVater is heavier than frejh ; and Sea-Water in 
 one Place is heavier than in another {h). 
 
 THE Reafon of this is plain from what we 
 have faid before, viz. that the Sea-Water contains 
 a fixed Salt which is a much heavier Body than 
 
 (h) Mr Boyle having recom- * increafe in Weight the nearer 
 
 mended this Matter, among o- ' he came to the Line, 'till he 
 
 thers, to a learned Phyfician that * arrived at a certain Degree 
 
 was failing to America, and fur- * of Latitude ; as he remembers 
 
 nifhedhim vvitha fmull hydro- * it vvas about the 30^^; after 
 
 ftatical Inftrument to obferve, ' which the Water feemed to 
 
 from time to time, the differ- • retain the fame fpecificGravity 
 
 ences of Gravity he might meet * ''^xXWitcamtX.o Barbadces, or 
 
 with ; this Account was retur- ' Jamaica. Loivthorp's Ahridg- 
 
 ned him ; ' that he found, by ' nunt oiPhilof. Traiifad. Page 
 
 "■ theOlafs, the Sea- Water to * 297, Vol. 2. 
 
 frefh
 
 220 ^je Abfolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 frefh Water : and we have fhewn that there is a dif- 
 ferent Quantity of Salt in different Parts of the Sea ; 
 "which muft caufe the Gravity of the Water to be 
 unequal. But feme Sea- Water may happen to tafte 
 more fait than others, and yet be not more weigh- 
 ty ; becaufe it perhaps contains a greater Quanti- 
 ty of volatile Salt, which does rather diminifli 
 than increafe it's Weight, tho' it make it more 
 fait. 
 
 P RO PO S I'TION XIII. 
 
 Sea-Water doth not fo eafily freeze as frejh ; or a grea- 
 . ter Degree of cold is required to congeal Sea-lVater, 
 - than to congeal freJh. 
 
 EXPERIENCE fhews this, contrary to the 
 Opinion of the Peripatetics^ who mentioned that by 
 how much Water is more pure, it is lefs liable to 
 freeze, and that Sea- Water being more elemen- 
 tary than frefh will freeze the fooner j which is 
 falfe. 
 
 BUT the Caufe is, that in Salt there is a certain 
 Spirit which refills Coagulation, and this being fe- 
 parated from it, will not congeal in the hardeft 
 Froft, as is well known to Chemifts : for they 
 frequently make ufe of this Spirit of Salt (i). 
 
 (/■) TTie Particles of two dif- tion. So that Water mixed 
 
 ferent Bodies, which would be with Salt, is more in Motion 
 
 Ciore at Rell when feparate, than Water alone ; and there- 
 
 when they are mixed are put fore the Particles of Sea- Water 
 
 intonewMotionsby Attraftion, are not fo eafily congealed, or 
 
 which adls upon them only made to reft, as the Particles of 
 
 when they approach one ano- frefh, which do not refift the 
 
 ther ; and caufes them to meet cold withfuch violent Motions., 
 
 and clafh with great Violence, See Nen.<jtoni, Optics. Pag. 355. 
 iT.d to keep hot with the Mo- 
 
 PRO'
 
 C H A p. 1 3 • of TJniverfal Geography, 221 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV, 
 
 fVhy the Ocean is not enlarged when it receives fo 
 matiy Rivers, 
 
 THE Caufe is ; i . The Water returns from 
 the Sea, thro* fubterraneous Fiflures to the Heads 
 of the Rivers. 2. Plenty of Vapours are raifed 
 from the Ocean, a great Part of which being turn- 
 ed into Rain, fall partly into the Ocean, and part- 
 ly on the dry Land {k). 
 
 PRO' 
 
 [i) Since the Ocean con- 
 flantly receives a prodigious 
 quantity of Water, both from 
 Rivers that exonerate them- 
 felves into it, and alfo from the 
 Air, in Dew, Rain, and Snow, 
 that fall ; it is impofilble but it 
 fhould be enlarged, and increafe 
 to an immenfe Bulk, unlefs it 
 be as much leflened fome other 
 way. And feeing there hath 
 not been obferved any fuch 
 great increafe in the Sea, and 
 that the bounds of the Earth 
 and Ocean are found to be in 
 all Ages the fame, it remains 
 that we inquire by what means 
 the Ocean lofes fo much Wa- 
 ter as it receives from Rain 
 and Rivers flowing into it. 
 There are two Hypothefes a- 
 mongPliilofophers; oneis, that 
 the Water of the Sea is car- 
 ried, by fubterraneous Conduits 
 to the Springs of Rivers, and, 
 in it's draining thro' the Fif- 
 fures. lofes it's Saltnefs : the o- 
 theris, thatithappens by the Va- 
 pours that are drawn up from it's 
 Surface. The former is now re- 
 
 jefted by mod, it being difficult, 
 ifnotimpoffible, to explain ho,v 
 the Water of the Ocean, being 
 more deprefled than the very 
 Mouths of the Rivers, can come 
 up to their Springs, which are, 
 for the moft part, on very high 
 Alountains; butinthelatterHy- 
 pothefis we have no Occafion to 
 explain this, neither to hinder 
 the Growth of the Ocean, nor 
 to fupply the Springs with Wa- 
 ter ; both which may be more 
 eafily done by the Vapours, 
 which we certainly know to be 
 drawn up from the Surface of 
 the Sea. 
 
 The quantity of Vapours 
 drawn up from the Sea was 
 tried by Dr Halley, who made 
 the following Computation, 
 ?hilof. Tranf. N° 1 89. Page 
 366. 
 
 By an Experiment made with 
 great Care he found that Wa- 
 ter, falted to the ferae Degree 
 as is common Sea- Water, and 
 heated to the fame Degree of 
 Heat, which is obferved to be 
 that of Air in our hotteft Sum- 
 mers,
 
 222 llje Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Some Parts of the Ocean differ in Colour from others. 
 
 W E obferve that towards the North Pole, the 
 Sea feems to be of a black Colour, and in the l^or- 
 rid Zone of a duiky Colour, and in other Places of 
 a green Colour. Upon the Coaft of 'New Guinea^ 
 
 the 
 
 mers, to exhale the thicknefs 
 of a fixtieth Part of an Inch 
 in two Hours. From whence 
 it appears that a Bulk of Wa- 
 ter a tenth Part of an Inch 
 high will be exhaled into Va- 
 pours in twelve Plours. 
 
 So that if the Superficies of 
 the whole Ocean, or a Part of 
 it, as the MediterrancaJi Sea be 
 known, it may alio be known 
 how much Water arifes in "\'a- 
 poiir from it every Day ; fup- 
 pofir.g the W^ater to be equally 
 hot with the Air in Summer. 
 
 " For from what hath been 
 ** laid down, a Superficies of 
 " ten fquare Inches emits daily 
 " a cubic Inch of Water ; 
 " one fquare Foot, half a 
 *' Pint ; a Square v/hofe fides 
 *' are 4 Feet, one Gallon ; a 
 •* fquare Mile, 6914 Tuns; 
 " and one Degree iquare, (fup- 
 *' pofed confining of 69 Eng- 
 " lijh Miles) 33 Millions of 
 " Tuns." 
 
 This learned Gentleman 
 cftimates the Mediterranean to 
 be about forty Degrees long, 
 and four broad ; allowances be- 
 ing made for the Places where 
 it is broader by tliofe where it 
 ia narrower, fo that it's whole 
 
 Superficies may be accounted 
 one hundred and fixty fquare 
 Degrees ; and confequently the 
 whole Mediterrafiean mull lofe 
 in Vapour, according to the 
 foreilated Proportion, in a Sum- 
 mer's Day, at leall five thoufand 
 two hundred and eighty mil- 
 lions of Tuns. For what quan- 
 tity of Water i^ licked off the 
 Surface by the Winds, (which 
 is even more fometimes than 
 is exhaled by the Heat of 
 the Sun) feems impofilble to be 
 reduced to any Rule. 
 
 It remains that we compare 
 this quantity of Water with that 
 which is carried daily into the 
 Sea by the Rivers, which is 
 very difficult to do, when we 
 can neither mcafure the Breadth 
 of the Chanels of thcfe Rivers, 
 nor the Velocity of the Cur- 
 rents. One thing is left, that 
 a Comparii'on being made be- 
 tween thefe and the River 
 Thames, and by iuppofing them 
 rather greater than thc/ are, we 
 may have a greater quantity of 
 Water than is really poured by 
 them into the Mediterranean . 
 
 The Mediterranean receives 
 
 thefe nine confiderable Rivers ; 
 
 the Iherusf the Rhone, ihcTiher, 
 
 the
 
 Chap. 13. ofUmverfa! Geography. 223 
 
 the Sea in fome Parts appears white, and in others 
 yellow : In Strcights, or narrow Seas, it appears 
 ■whitilh. Upon the Coaft: of Congo^ not far troni 
 Ba^^a d* Aharo, where the fmall River Gonzales 
 falls into the Sea, the Water is of a reddifli Colour 
 which Tindure it receives from a red mineral 
 Earth, thro* which the River flows. But the moft 
 famous for it's Colour is the Arabian Gulph, being 
 therefore called the Red Sea. Some will have ic 
 to be only a bare Name, and taken from Erythrus, 
 fome time King on that Coaft ; others will have ic 
 to be called red from a certain Brightnefs peculiar 
 to it, which is caufrd by the refledled Rays of the 
 Sun(/). But the moft probable Opinion, and which 
 
 the Po, the Danube, the Neifer, 
 the Bonjihenes, the Tanais, and 
 the TSUit ; all the reft being of 
 no great Note. Eachofthefe Ri- 
 vers, this ingenious Gentleman 
 fuppofes to be ten times greater 
 than the Thames^ not that any 
 of them is fo great in Reality, 
 but to comprehend with them 
 all the fmall Rivulets that fall 
 into the fame Sea. 
 
 He fuppofes the River 
 Thames, at Kingjiofi Bridge, 
 where the Flood feldom reaches, 
 to be in breadth about lOO 
 Vards, and in depth 3 ; and the 
 Water to run two Miles an 
 Hour. If therefore thebrcadth 
 of the Water, 100 Yards, be 
 multiplied by 3, the depth, 
 and the Produtt 300 fquare 
 Yards by 48 IViiles, or 84480 
 Yards, which the Water runs 
 every Day, the produd will be 
 25344000 cubic Yards of Wa- 
 ter, or 20300000 Tuns that are 
 carried every Day into the Sea. 
 
 Now if each of the af oreiaid 
 nine Rivers yield ten times as 
 
 much Water as the 'Tha?ncs ^ 
 it will follow, that each, of 
 them carries every Day into 
 the Sea 303 Millions of Tuns: 
 and the whole nine, 1827 
 Alillicns of Tuns in a Day. 
 
 But this is but little more 
 than one third of what is pro- 
 ved to be raifed, in Vapour, 
 out of the Mcditcn-anean in 
 twelve Hours time. Hence it 
 appears that the Mediterraman 
 is io far from increafing or o- 
 verflowing by the Rivers run- 
 ning into it, that in a ftiort 
 Time it would rather be eva- 
 porated, and drawn out, un- 
 lefs the Vapours that it exha- 
 led returned in V^&h or Rain 
 upon it. 
 
 'Jurins Appendix. 
 
 (/) Some will have this to 
 be the fame with Efau or E- 
 do?n, who frll inhabited Idu- 
 m^ea, a Country near the Ara- 
 bian Gulph, from whence, fay 
 they, it came to be called the 
 Red-Sea, 'viz. from Edom, i. e. 
 Red. 
 
 is
 
 224 'I'he Abfolute Fart S e c T . I V. 
 
 is confirmed by Experience, is, that it came to be 
 fo called from the red Sand that lies upon the Shore, 
 and is often contrary to it's Nature, mixed with 
 the Water by the vehement Flux and Reflux of the 
 Sea, which, is extraordinary in this Gulph ; info- 
 much, that it tofles it to and again like Afhes, and 
 keeps it trom falling to the Bottom by it's violent 
 Agitation. This is related by Sailors, who tell us, 
 tliat it fometimes appears as red as Blood ; but if it 
 be kept in a Veflel without fhaking, the red Sand 
 will fubfide, and may be feen in the Bottom. It 
 very often happens, that violent Storms blowing 
 from the /^^(i-6V(^, towards y^r^^/'^ or y://r/V^, carry 
 with them fuch Heaps of red Sand, as to cover 
 whole Caravans, or Troops of Men and Beads, 
 whole Bodies in time are thus converted into true 
 Mummy. There are other Opinions among Au- 
 thors, about the Name of this Gulph, but they are 
 all of no Weight, as appears from Experience. 
 
 WHETHER the fame or fome other Caufe, 
 hath urged Mariners to call the Gulph of Califor- 
 nia or {f^ermejo) the Red-Sea^ I have not yet found 
 obferved by Authors. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 There are certain Peculiarities obferved in fome Parti 
 of the Ocean. 
 
 THE Sea called by the Portuguefe di Sargaffo^ 
 begins about the Salt Iflands, nor far from Cape 
 Verd^ and extends itfelf from the 20*** Degr. of 
 North Latitude, and to 34 Degr. South. It feems 
 to be of a green Hue, tho' this be not it's proper 
 Colour, but owing to a certain fmall leaved Herb, 
 fnot unlike Water-creflesJ which we call the Sea- 
 Lentile, or fmall leaved Parfly, but the Portuguefe 
 Sargr.ffo, The Leaves of this Weed are fo mu- 
 tually
 
 C H A p. 1 3 • ^f 'Umvcrfal Geography. 225 
 
 tually intermixed one with another that they cover 
 the Surface of the Ocean in this Place ; fo that the 
 Water can fcarceiy be feen, and Sailors afar otF 
 take it to be an Ifland or green Fields ; nor can 
 they fail thro' this Knot of Herbs unlefs they be 
 driven by a tolerable "Wind. The Herb bears a 
 fmall Berry, not unlike our red Cji rants, but infi- 
 pid and hollow within. Whence they proceed is 
 uncertain, not from the Land for that is too far 
 off this Sea, nor from the Bottom fas I think^ 
 becaufe the Ocean is here of a vaft Depth and in 
 many Places unhithomable. 
 
 BETWEEN the Cape of Good-Hope and the 
 IQands of I'rijtan de Ciinha^ there are feveral long 
 Stalks like Reeds of a confiderable thicknefs, found 
 floating on the Water, and thefe very often are en- 
 tangled with Sea-Alkanet, or with Sargaflb. The 
 Sailors call them Thrombs, and they take it for a 
 fure Sign if they meet with it at Sea, as they are 
 failing to India^ that either they are near the Cape 
 of Good-Hope^ or have paffed it. 
 
 UPON the Coaft of the Ifland o^ Madagafcar^ 
 the Ocean calls out red and white Coral, which 
 grows like a Shrub under Water : and tho' they 
 are fott in fome Places, yet between Madagafcar 
 and Africa, there are faid to be Rocks of hard 
 Coral (vi). 
 
 UPON the Coafl: of PruJJia in the Baltic, the 
 Sea cafts up excellent Amber, which the Inhabi- 
 
 [m) Air Guifofiy is of Opi- alledging tliat he can Oiew a 
 
 nion, that Coral is fo far from Salt of Coral, which, being call 
 
 being a Plant that 'tis a meer into Water, and there dif- 
 
 Mineial, compofed of much folved, upon the Evaporation 
 
 Salt, and a little Earth ; and that of that V/ater by a gentle Heat, 
 
 it is formed into that Subltance is prefently coagulated and con- 
 
 bya Precipitation ofdivers Salts, verted into ilore of fmall Sticks 
 
 that enfues upon the Encoun- refembling a little ForelL Phi- 
 
 ter of the Earth with thofe Salts, lof. Tranf. abridged by Lo-m- 
 
 'I'his Sentiment he conjirms by thorp. Vol. 2. Page 493. 
 
 V O L. I. ' Q^ tants
 
 2 26 1'be Abjohite Fart S e c T. IV. 
 
 tants are taught to draw to the Shore with Nets of 
 Wiie, when certain Winds blow. 
 
 THE Ocean cafts up Ambergris only in the 
 "Torrid Zone, (if we may believe fome Authors) 
 viz. at the Shore of Brafil (where a Dutch Soldier 
 once found a Piece weighing five hundred Pound, 
 and prefentcd it to Count Maurice of NaJJau) ; 
 alfo at Madagafcar, at the Cape of Good-Hope^ at 
 the Ifland ot Maurice (by the Portugueje called de 
 Cerne)^ at Samatra^ and other Indian Iflands. Garcias 
 relates, that there was a Piece one time found of 
 two thoufand Pound Weight, and that fome Iflands 
 are all of Ambergris •, but he does not tell us 
 where they are fuuated («). 
 
 THE Ethiopic Ocean, at Guinea, Cofigo^ and 
 Angola, has this peculiar Property -, that Shells as 
 green as Grafs ftick to the Sides and Keels of 
 Ships i while they remain or fail there, which re- 
 tard their Courfe and eat out the Timber. 
 
 UPON the Coafl of Bretagne in France, wild 
 Fowls are generated on the Sides and Keels of Ships, 
 being at firfl unfhapely, but afterwards are formed 
 by degrees, and having their Bills faflened into the 
 Wood, they begin to move, and at lafl pull them- 
 felves off, and fwim in the Sea like Ducks. [Thefe 
 we call Barnacles.] 
 
 (fi) Ambergris is found in Some will have it to be the 
 
 feveral other Places ; as at Wax or Honey of fome living 
 
 Cape Cowom/, there was taken Creature; others fay it iflues 
 
 up a Piece of three hundred out of the Root of a Tree, 
 
 Weight, and another weighing that grows in the Sea, like 
 
 fifteen hundred Pound ; at Jm- Gum ; others that it is a Bi- 
 
 bergris-Poiut in "Jamaica there tumen, and comes from the 
 
 was found a Piece one hun- Entrails of the Earth, which is 
 
 dred and i^hy Pound Weight ; the moft likely Opinion. See 
 
 and in feveral Places without P/^/Vo/ 7/««/ N ^ 9 2 . Page 6 1 i . 
 
 the Torrid Zone, as upon the N° 232.Page 71 i,andN°263. 
 
 Coaft of Nevj-En^land, on the Page 573. 
 
 weflrrn Coall of Ireland^ &c. 
 
 THE
 
 Chap. 13. of XJniverfal Geography, 227 
 
 ' .' THE Excrement of the Ocean, which we call 
 Froth, is oblerved to float in feveral Places, and 
 more in fome than in others. 
 
 THERE are found Water Lentils in feveral 
 Parts ot the Ocean, as between England and France^ 
 upon the Coalt ot the South Continent, and tl^c- 
 where. 
 
 O N the Coafl: of Malabar and Ca?nhaya there 
 are found Serpents upon the Surface of the Water : 
 from whence Sailors guefs at their approach to 
 thefe Countries. 
 
 ABOUT four Leagues from New-Spain, fe- 
 veral Roots, Reeds, and Leaves, like thofe of 
 the Fig- Tree, float to and again, upon the Wa- 
 ter, which they commonly eat ; and their Tafte 
 is fomething like Cabbage. 
 
 W E read in the firit Voyage of the Dulcb to 
 the Streights of Magellan^ that on the twelfth of 
 January 1599, the Water of the Ocean, not far 
 from the Mouth of the Silver River, {Rio de Plata) 
 appeared of a red and bloody Colour ; but when 
 they had drawn up a Bucket, and obferved it 
 more narrowly, they found in it an innumerable 
 Multitudeof little Worms of a red Colour, which, 
 being taken into their Hands, leaped up and down 
 like Fleas. Hence the Seamen call them Sea- 
 Fleas *, and believe that they are vomited by 
 Whales, at a certain Time of the Year, Others 
 think they proceed from an innumerable Company 
 
 of 
 
 * Dr Derham in his Phyf. Months, as to change the Wa- 
 
 Theol. lib. iv. c. 1 1 , Note (») ter red, or yellow, according 
 
 faith, the Infefts that for the to the Colour they are of. 
 
 moil part difcolour the Waters, Of which Dr Florerrce Schwfl 
 
 are the fmall Infedls of the told Snvammerdam this merry 
 
 Shri/np'Ktnd, called, by S^vam- Story, ' Fhat one day, when 
 
 merdam, Pulex aquaticm ar- ' he was very intent in his 
 
 borcfcens. Which are fometimes ' Study, he was diiturbed with 
 
 fo numerous in the Summer * a horrible Rumour ; and 
 
 0^2 * whcu
 
 ^228 "The Abfoliitc Fart S e c T. I V. 
 
 of fmall Crabs, that fill the Sea towards the South 
 Concinent, fo that in a weak Light, as in the 
 Morning and Evening Twilight, the Ocean ap- 
 pears to Sailors of a bloody Colour. 
 
 BUT this is not the Place for treating of A- 
 nimals of different Kinds that are found in dif- 
 ferent Parts. 
 
 PROPOSiriON XVII. 
 
 IVh'j the Sea appears brighi a»d Jlmnng at Night ; ef- 
 pecially if the IVaves are violentl'j agitated with a 
 Storm. 
 
 - THIS Phacnornenon requires the Knowledge 
 of that difficult Point, the Caufe of Colours. The 
 Opinions of Philofophcrs are divided about it. 
 They that explain Colours by certain and various 
 Motions belt folve the Phitnomenon ; the more ac- 
 curate Explication of which belongs to Phyfics {o). 
 
 * when he was fcarce gotten up 
 ^ to enquire what was the 
 
 * matter, his Maid, half dead 
 
 * with the fright, came run- 
 
 * ning, and fighing told him, 
 
 * that all the Water of Leyden 
 
 * was changed to Blood.' The 
 Caufe of wiiich, upon exami- 
 nation, he found to be from the 
 numerous Swarms of thofc Pu- 
 lices. 
 
 The Caufe of this Concourfe 
 and Appearance of thofe little 
 Infedls, Dr Derhafn fays is for 
 their Coitus. At which time 
 they are very A'enereous, friflc- 
 ing, and catching at one ano- 
 ther ; and many of them con- 
 joined Tail to Tail, with their 
 Bodies inclined towards one 
 another. 
 
 (o) The following Query of 
 
 Sir Ifaac Ne-iuton will perhaps 
 give us the beft Notion of this 
 Appearance. ' Do not (fays he) 
 ' all fixed Bodies, when 
 ' heated beyond a certain De- 
 ' gree, emit Light, and (hine ? 
 
 * And is not this Emifhon 
 ' performed by the vibrating 
 ' Motions of their Parts : And 
 ' do not all Bodies, which a- 
 ' bound with terrellrial Parts, 
 ' and efpecially fulphureous 
 
 * ones, emit Light as often as 
 ' thofe Parts are fufficiently a- 
 ' gitated, whether that Agita- 
 ' tion be made by Heat, or by 
 ' Fridlion, or Percuflion, orPu- 
 ' trefadtion, orby any vital Mo 
 
 ' tion, or any other Caufe ? as 
 ' for Inflance ; Sea-Water in a 
 
 * raging Storm, ii:c. Optics 
 
 * P^^e 314. 
 
 PRO-
 
 II A p. 13. of U?iive}fal Geography, 229; 
 
 PRO FO S ITI ON XVIII. 
 
 The Ocean^ and indeed all Waters, cajl on the Jljore 
 terrefirial Bodies, efpecially about the Time of Full-' 
 Moon. 
 
 I T is not difficult to explain the Rcafon of 
 this Property, which is found to be true by Ex- 
 perience. For the Water being in Agitation con- 
 tinually, either one way or other, carries with it 
 the terrefirial Bodies towards that Part whereto 
 it is moved : which is always towards fome Shore, 
 ■where the Motion ceafing they are left upon the 
 Sand. 
 
 BUT this Agitation of the Ocean is greatefl at 
 the Full-Moon. 
 
 THEREFORE their Opinions are abfurd 
 who believe the Ocean to be a fenfible living Crea- 
 ture, and that it continually purgeth itfelf of Dregs 
 and terrefirial Bodies. The Reafon of is here 
 plain. 
 
 a 
 
 CHAP.
 
 23© 
 
 ^he Abfolute Part 
 
 Sect. IV. 
 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 Of the Met ten of the Sea in general -, and of 
 it's Flux and Refux in particular. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 Water has hut one natural Motion, hy iihich it moves 
 from a higher to a lower Place. .-Ind if th' ad- 
 joinii/g Places are of an equal Altitude , or higher 
 than the Superficies of the IVater, it naturally refls^ 
 and li not moved cut of Ws Pi,aLe but by fame exter- 
 7Jal Caufe. • • • •_ _ 
 
 CI O M M O N Experience ma'^ifpfts the Truth of 
 ! this Propoficion. For if you take a Vcfld of 
 Water and move it, the Water will Buduate, and 
 be in Motion, 'tiJI no part ot it be higher than ano- 
 ther i that is, 'till it's Superficies be ipherical, as 
 was faid in Chapter xiii. And akhough perhaps 
 this Motion may proceed from an external Caufe, 
 viz. the PrelTure of the Atmofphere, or the Mo- 
 tion of the Air round the Globe ; yet bccaufe 
 there are great Difputes about this Caufe, and the 
 Motion is fo apparent in the Water itfelf, that it 
 doth not feem to proceed from any external Agent, 
 therefore it may be called natural, to diftinguifh it 
 at leaft from other Motions of the Water. And 
 this Motion is towards that Part which is more de- 
 preficd. 
 
 PRO'
 
 C H A p. 14- f>f Vniverfal Geography, 23 r 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 iVhen an"^ Part of the Ocean is moved, the whole is 
 moved, or all the other Parts of the Ocean move 
 fucceffivel-j j but the Motion is greater by how much 
 it is nearer the Part firft moved. 
 
 BECAUSE when one part of the Ocean is 
 moved, it neceflarily changes it's Place, and leaves 
 that it was in, to be taken up by the Water that 
 was next it •, whofe place is again fupplied by the 
 Water next that, and fo on. But the Motion be- 
 comes lefs in the more remote Parts •, becaufe that 
 there the Water was firfl moved, the next to it 
 rufhes in, not from one Part, but all round about i 
 fo that it leaves a round Space like the Periphery 
 of a Circle, which is fupplied from a larger Peri- 
 phery, and that again from a larger, and fo on. 
 But the greater the Periphery is from whence the 
 Water flows, the lefs is the progreflive Motion in- 
 wards, being difl:ributed into a larger Space. Juft 
 as, when a Stone is thrown into the Water it 
 forces it into a Round, and that forces the next 
 Water to it into a larger Round and fo on ; and 
 the further thefc Peripheries are from the Immer- 
 fion of the Stone, their Motion is diminifhed and 
 lefs fenfible ; and the* there may at laft feem to be 
 none all, yet there will be flill fome very fmall 
 Undulation, except it be hindered by another 
 Motion of the Water. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 To fnd which way the Current of the Sea fets. 
 
 CHUSE a Time, if poflible, when no great 
 
 Winds arp ftirring, and caft a Body into the Wa- 
 
 0.4 tef
 
 232 ^he Ahfoliite Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 ter of almofl the fanie Gravity with it ; mark the 
 Place where it was thrown in, and let a Boat re- 
 main there immoveable ; then, when the Body is 
 carried by the Current a little way from the Place 
 where it was dirown in, let another Boat be placed 
 there \ and obierve how the one Boat bears from 
 the other ■., and you have the Point of the Compafs 
 toward which the Current lets {a). 
 
 F Ro po s n:ioN iv. 
 
 The Motion cf the Sea is either dire5f, vortical^ or 
 tremulous. 
 
 1 call the Motion dired, when the Water runs 
 towards a certain Point i and vortical, when it turns 
 round in a Whirl-Pool, and is at Times abforbed 
 and vomited up ; and tremulous, when it quakes, 
 and is troubled without the leall Wind. We fhall 
 defer the Confideration ot the two laft to the end of 
 this Chapter ; and treat, firft, of the dired Mo- 
 tion, which we lliall call, in general, the Motion 
 of the Sea. 
 
 . PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Of the Motions ive ohferve in the Sea, fome are gene- 
 ral, fome -particular, and others accidental. 
 
 'a) The Method tliat Sailors rent, and ride as firmly as if 
 
 commonly ufe, in the Ciulph of it were fallened by the ftrongefl: 
 
 Mexico, to keep the Boat im- Cable and Anchor to the Bot- 
 
 snoveable where the Sea is deep, torn ; this Method will perhaps 
 
 und perhaps not to be founded fiicceed in feveral other Places 
 
 is this. They finkdown aPlum- where there are nnder-Currents, 
 
 ■met of Lead about forty or fifty fuch as have been obfer\'ed in 
 
 Pound Weight, to a certain the Do-vns, at the Streights- 
 
 luimber of Fathoms deep, as Mouth, and in the Baltic. See 
 
 they are taught by Experience, Dr Stuhb'^ Obfervations in a 
 
 and thu' the Lead is nothing Voyage to the C^r/^^f^ Iflands. 
 
 near the Bottom, yet will the PhUof. Tranf. N° ZJ, 
 iJoat turn Head againlt the Cur- 
 
 , , I call 
 
 1 ..v
 
 C^H A p. 14« rf Unherfal Geography. 23 3 
 I call that a general Motion of the Sea, which is 
 oblerved in all it's Farts, and at all Times. 
 
 I call thoie proper or particular Motions, where- 
 by only Tome Parts of the Ocean are moved, which 
 are twofold, either perpetual or anniverfary ; the 
 former continue without CefTation or IntermifTion -, 
 the latter are inconllanr, and only obferved at fome 
 certain Months or Days. 
 
 THE accidental Motions of the Sea are fuch as 
 now and then happen, without any regular Orders 
 and "fuch as thefe are infinite. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 The Winds caufe the accidental Motions of the Sea, hy 
 blowing the Waters toward fome oppofite Point j nor 
 is the Sea ever free from fuch Motions, 
 
 THE Wind, being nothing but a violent Mo- 
 tion of the Air, and a Preflure of it towards the 
 Earth, endeavours to impel the Water of the Sea 
 out ot it's Place ; and becaufe the Sea is a Fluid, 
 and cannot refift the Force and PrcfTure of the Air, 
 it is hereby moved out of it's Place, towards the 
 oppofite Point, and drives the adjacent Water 
 before it, and that again the Water before it, and 
 fo on. 
 
 AND fince there is always fome Wind in the 
 Air towards one Point of the Compafs or another, 
 and very often towards different Points, in divers 
 Countries, at the fame Time j it follows, that fome 
 of thefe Motions continually affeft the Sea, but 
 more fenfibly where the Wind blows hardeft ; be- 
 caufe it being a Fluid is loon put in Agitation by 
 fo violent an Agent. 
 
 FRO^
 
 234 ■ ^h^ Abjolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 P ROP O S Il'ION VII. 
 
 The general Motion of the Sea is twofold ; the one is 
 conjtant, and from Eafi to IVejt : the other is com^ 
 ;pofed of two contrary Motions^ and called the 
 Flux and Reflux of the Sea^ by whicb^ at certain 
 HourSy it flows towards the Shores, and at others 
 back again. .,■.. . . ..■ 
 
 T HAT the Ocean is continually moving from 
 Eaft to Weft, is chiefly proved from the Motion 
 of the S.a which lies between the Tropics in the 
 Torrid Zone ; where it is Itrongeft, and lefs impe- 
 ded by other Motions. 
 
 THIS Motion of the Sea is manifeftly per- 
 ceived by thofe that fail from India to Madagafcar, 
 and Africa •, alfo in the Pacific Ocean between New- 
 Spain and China, and the Moluccas ; likewife in the 
 Ethiopic Ocean, between Africa and Brafil. 
 
 THUS the Currents fet ftrongly, and run 
 with a rapid Motion, from Eaft to Weft, thro* 
 the Streights of Magellan -, which induced the firft 
 Difcoverer (whether Magellan, or fome other be- 
 fore him) to conjedure, that there were Streights 
 thro' which they might fail out of the Atlantic 
 into the Pacific Ocean. Ships are carried by the 
 Currents, from Eaft to Weft, thro' the Streights 
 of Manilha, and alfo thro' the little Chanels be- 
 tween the Maldivies. The Sea runs impetuoufly 
 into the Gulph of Mexico, between Cuba and Tu~ 
 catan, and flows out again, thro* a rapid Chanel, 
 between Cuba and Florida. There is fo rapid a 
 Flux into the Gulph of Paria, that the Streights 
 are called the Dragon's Jaw. This Monon is 
 alfo remarkable at the Land of Canada. The Sea 
 feems to run oiit of the Tartarian Ocean thro* the 
 Streights of IVaygats, as appears by the fetting 
 
 of
 
 C H A p. 1 4« rf TJnlverfal Geography. 23^ 
 
 of the Current, and the great Flakes ot Ice which 
 are commonly found in tnefe Sireights. Upon ihe 
 northern Coaft of America^ the Pacific Ocean flows 
 towards the Streights of Anian \ there is alfo a 
 Current from Ja^an towards China ; and another 
 from Eaft to Weft, thro* the Streights of Ma- 
 cajfer. In fhort, the whole Atlantic Ocean makes 
 towards the Shores of America^ and the Pacific from 
 them, as is moft remarkable about Cape CorrenteSy 
 between Panama and Lima. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 The JVinds frequently change the general Motion of the 
 Sea, efpeciaily thofe called Periodical PVinds, or 
 MonfuonSj which we Jljali treat of in Chapter xxi. 
 
 BECAUSE thefe Winds blow moft frequent- 
 ly from the North or South, or from other col- 
 lateral Points, they muft needs obftruft the ge- 
 neral Motion ot the Sea, which is from Eaft to 
 Weft, and caufe it to turn afide, from the Weft, 
 towards the North- Weft, or South- Weft. And 
 even the conftant, or Trade- Winds, v/hich fel- 
 dom blow diredlly from the Eaft, but from 
 fome other collateral Points, change this general 
 Motion of the Sea in many Places. Alfo the 
 North Winds make a moft fenfible Difference in 
 this general Motion in the northern Ocean, where 
 thefe Currents are not ftrong, except in a few 
 Places. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 The Caufe of this general Motion of the Sea from 
 Eaji to IVefi ii uncertain, 
 
 THE
 
 236 "Hje Abfolute Tart S e c T. IV. 
 
 T 11 E Arijlotelians (tho' neither they, nor thei^ 
 Mallier, nor any European Philolbpher, had the 
 leatt Notion of thefe lliings, before tlie Portu- 
 guefe failed thro' the Ocean in the Torrid Zone) 
 i'uppofe, that it is caufcd by the Prime Motion of 
 the Heavens, which is common not only to all the 
 Stars, but even, in part, to the Air and Ocean -, 
 and by which they, and all things, are carried 
 from Eaft to Weft. Some Copernkans fas Kepler, 
 i^c.) altho' they acknowledge the Moon, to be 
 the prime caufe ol this Motion, yet they make the 
 Motion of the Earth not a little contribute to it, 
 by realbn that the Water, being not joined to the 
 Earth, but contiguous only, cannot keep up with 
 it's quick Motion towards the Eaft ; but is retard- 
 ed and left towards the Weft ; and fo the Sea is 
 not moved from one Part of the Earth to another, 
 but the Earth leaves the Parts of the Sea one after 
 another. 
 
 OTHERS, who are fatisfied with neither of 
 thefe Caufes, have recourfe to the Moon •, which 
 they will have to be the Governefs of all Fluids, 
 and therefore to draw the Ocean round with her 
 from Eaft to Weft. If you afk, how fhe per- 
 forms this ? They Anfwer, it is, by an occult 
 Quality, a certain Influence, a Sympathy, her 
 Vicinity to the Earth, and fuch like. It is very 
 probable indeed the Moon, Ibme way or other, 
 caufes this Motion, becaufe it is obferved to be 
 much more violent at the New "and Full Moon, 
 than about the Quadratures, when it is, for the moft 
 Part, but fmall. 
 
 THE ingenious Des Cartes mechanically 
 explains how the Moon may caufe this Motion, 
 both in the Water, and the Air. He fuppofes, 
 according to his general Hypothefis, that 
 there are an infinite number of Atoms, which re- 
 volve about the Earth, and fill up the Space be- 
 tween
 
 Chap. 14. of Vnherfal Geography. 237 
 
 tvveen it and the Orbit of the IVIoon, fo as not 
 to leave any Vacuum ; this Space he calls the 
 Earth's Vortex (b). Let FEHG (Fig. 22. j be the 
 Earth, 2143 the Water, 6587 the Air, BADC 
 the Vortex of the Earth, and B the Moon. Now, 
 fays he, if there was no Moon in the Vortex 
 BADC, it's Particles would without any Impe- 
 diment revolve about the Center T •, but fince 
 the Moon is there, the Space, thro' which the cele- 
 ftial Matter flows, is narroweft between B and T ; 
 therefore this Matter flows fwifter between B and 
 T, and by that means prefixes both the Super- 
 ficies of the Air at 6, and of the Water at 2, 
 more than if the Moon had not been in the Dia- 
 meter of the Vortex B D : and becaufe both the 
 Air and the Water are Fluids, and eafily give 
 
 [b) The Flux and Reflux of 
 the Sea, which Des Cartes has 
 endeavoured to explain, by 
 an imaginary Plenum and Vor- 
 tices, may be more eafily and 
 fully explained upon other 
 Principles (as fhall be fhewn 
 hereafter) ; for thefe are mere 
 f iflions, and no way agreeable 
 to Nature and Motion, as ap- 
 pears from the following Ar- 
 guments. 
 
 I . U fome \'acuities were 
 not fuppofed to be interfperfed 
 among the Particles of Bodies, 
 it would be very hard to con- 
 ceive how Motion could be 
 any way performed. For if 
 we fuppofe every Place to be 
 abfolutely full, a fmall Body 
 cannot move ever fo little, with- 
 out moving all the Bodies in the 
 Univerfal, and whither, or to 
 what Place, they Ihould move, 
 when all Places are already fnU 
 i^ not eafv to conceive. 
 
 * 2. Since Comets are carried 
 
 * with acontinual Motion thro' 
 ' the heavenly Spaces, from 
 ' every Part, and all Ways, and 
 ' to all Parts ; it is evident 
 
 * from thence, that the heavenly 
 
 * Spaces mull be void of any 
 ' fenfible Refi fiance, and con- 
 ' fequently of any fenfible 
 
 * Matter. Ne-ivtons Optics, 
 
 * Page 3 10. 
 
 3 . The Flypothefis of \"or- 
 tices, and a Plenum, direftly 
 contradifls the Allronomical 
 Pha-nomena, and tends moi-e to 
 confound the celellial Motions 
 than to explain them. See 
 Ne^ivtous Princip. Book 2. 
 Schol. to Prop. 53, and the 
 general Scholium at the end ; 
 and Clarke^ Notes upon Ro- 
 bault's Phyfics. Part i . Cliap. 
 8. Art. 2. and on Part 2. Chap, 
 zc. Art. 22. 
 
 way
 
 238 1'he Abfolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 way to PrelTure, they ought to become lower un- 
 der B, at 2, and higher under A, at i. And 
 while the Earth is turned from E, by F, towards 
 G, or from Weft to Eaft, the fwelling of the 
 Water 412, and of the Air 856, which is now 
 higheft at E, moves by little and Httle to the weft- 
 ward, and in fix Hours time is higheft at the Part 
 of the Earth H, and after twelve Hours at G. 
 Hence it follows, that both the Water and the 
 Air are perpetually moving from Eaft to Weft. 
 Thus far Da Cartes, The ftrefs of his Demon- 
 ftracion lies here; that the Earth EFGH, and 
 "Water 1^34, are revolved round the Center T, 
 together with the cel.-ftial Matter in the Vortex, be- 
 tween B \DC and 6587 ; but the Moon, being in 
 B, makes the Space B6 narrower, whereby the ce- 
 leftial Matter is fqueezed thro*, and in it*s Paflage 
 preiTes the Air and Water below B, at 6 and 2, 
 towards 5 and 1 , and while E pafles beneath B, 
 it is preflcd towards H and F, and fo round. 
 Nor doth this celeftial Matter, ftrained between 
 B and 6, rebound upward being fupprefted, be- 
 caufe all things are full of Matter, And tho' it 
 prefs the Air and Water from 62F not only 
 towards the Weft E 15, but alfo towards the Eaft 
 73G, yet becaufe the Parts between F and G, to 
 the eaftward, are, by degrees, removed from the 
 Streights B6, and the Parts towards E, to the 
 weft ward, do more and more approach it, there- 
 fore this Force is chiefly received by thefe. 
 
 BUT the following Particulars feem wanting 
 in this ingenious Explanation. 
 
 I. IT fliould then follow, that the Sea would 
 fettle when the Moon approached it, and rife 
 in thofe Places that are diftant a Qu.:drant, 
 or fix Hours, from it, 'v'lz. it would tall at 2, 
 where the Moon is vertical, and rife at 6. But 
 this is contrary to Experience ; for at 2, under 
 
 the
 
 Chap. 14- of Univerfal Geography, 239 
 
 the Moon, it rifes, and at i it falls. How this 
 Abfurdity may be avoided, we fhall fliew in the 
 foJ lowing Propofition. 
 
 2. IT is not plainly fhewed (Des Cartes himfelf 
 totally omitting ir) why, when the celeftial Matter 
 in the Streight B6 prefTes the Air at 6, and the 
 "Water at 2, it is not equally moved towards G'^y^ 
 feeing that the Earth, and Air, and Water, are 
 all carried that way, as well as the celeftial Matter, 
 which fliould therefore enforce the Air and Water 
 rather towards the Eaft than the Weft, 
 
 3. THE Moon approaching any Sea, there 
 fhould a ftronger Wind blow from Eaft to Weft: 
 than at other Times ; but this feldom happens. , 
 
 4. I T is more likely that the Sun ftiould caufc 
 this Motion of the Air, and thefe conftant Winds, 
 becaufe in many Places they are obferved to blow 
 freflier a little before, or about, Sun-rifing, when 
 it is diftant a Quadrant from the Vertex of the 
 Place {c). Thefe things are worthy to be confi- 
 dered in the aforefaid Explication, not to fay any 
 thing for or againft the Hypothefis itfelf. 
 
 I very much doubt whether this Motion of the 
 Sea has any relation to the general, or Trade- 
 Winds ; becaufe thefe Winds, in the Torrid Zone^ 
 are conftant •, and therefore fhould caufe the Mo- 
 tion of the Water to be conftant alfo (d). Indeed 
 when the Wind blows harder the Motion is per- 
 ceived to be greater ; but this is no Argument 
 that they have a Dependance, or proceed one from 
 another. What hinders is, that there appears to be 
 
 (c) See the Notes upon ftant one, without doubt, is ef- 
 
 Chap. xxi. Prop. 2. below, fefted by the Trade- Winds, 
 
 where the Caufe of thefe Trade- which conftantly blow from Eaft 
 
 Winds is explained. to Weft, tho' notwithftanding 
 
 (rf) As periodical Currents the Moon may interfere, and 
 
 are produced by the fliifting alter or divert it's ordinary 
 
 'Wixidii or Monfoons; fo this con- Courfe. 
 
 a Corre-
 
 240 The Ahfolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 a Correfpondence between tlie Motion of the Sea, 
 and that oF the Moon, for when this approaches 
 the other, it caufes it to fwell at 2, and the Cur- 
 rents are obferved to fet ftronger to the weftward 
 at the New and Full Moon, than at the Quadra- 
 tures. This laft is excellently explained by Des 
 Carles^ s Method •, for fince the Moon is nearer the 
 Earth at the New or F"ull than when fhe is in the 
 Quadratures, the Paffage for the celeftial Matter, 
 Bb, is then made narrower, and therefore the 
 Prefilire is greater (e). 
 
 I F any fliould alledge, that perhaps the greater 
 Light of the Moon, at Full, caufes the greater 
 Intumefcence -, I anfwer, that at the Change all 
 her Light is taken away -, which fhews that Light 
 is not the Caufe of this Motion, but rather that 
 Prefilire of Des Cartes, which we fhall further ex- 
 plain below. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 The fecond general Motion of the Sea is ii's Flux and 
 Reflux, by which, in about twelve Hours and a 
 half^s Time, the Water is found to flow towards 
 the generality of Shores, and to ebb back again, viz. 
 to flow when the Moon approaches the Meridian 
 
 t Circle above or below ; and to ebb when it departs 
 from thence towards the Horizon. 
 
 (e) ' Neither the Aloon's * it is al\va)'s in the Conjuu- 
 
 ' greatelt Dillance, nor her ' (ftions and Oppontions, or 
 
 * Icaft, falls in the Quadratures * pafTeth thro' the Center of 
 ' but both there and in the ' the Sun, and the greater 
 ' Conjunftion or Oppofition ; ' in the Quadratures. Which 
 
 * contrary to the Opinion of ' Aflertion is very wide of thc 
 
 * A'j CW/ri; who aflerts, that ' Truth. IfhiJIotPi Aftrono- 
 the Orbit is elliptical indeed, * mical Lefturr-, Page 107. ' 
 
 but fo that the lefler Axis of 
 
 ' f. 
 
 WK
 
 Chap. 14. ofJJniverJal Geography. 241 
 
 W E are firft to enquire whether the Sea flows 
 towards one certain Point by this Motion, viz. from 
 Eall to Weft, or from Weft to Eaft. 
 
 F O R the Shores of Bays, and the Chanels 
 of Rivers, where this Fhix and Reflux is chiefly 
 obferved, more than in the main Ocean, are di- 
 vers ways extended ; feme from Weft to Eaft, 
 as the Mediterranean Sea, and others from South 
 to North, as the Arabian Gulph, ^c. And in all 
 thefe the Water flows thro' the Strcights towards 
 the furtheft Point of their extent ; and therefore 
 in different Bays, this Flux ot the Ocean tends 
 towards divers Points of the Compafs. We muft 
 therefore firft be refolved, whether this Flux, or 
 Motion, tends indifferently to any Point, or only ■ 
 obferves two, viz. the Weft in flowing, and the 
 Eaft in ebbing ; or even only the Weft in both ebb- 
 ing and flowing? In my Opinion the laft is trueft, 
 viz. that the whole Ocean is moved from Eaft 
 to Weft, both in it's Flux and Reflux, and that 
 the difference is, that in it's Flux it is moved with 
 greater violence and in a greater Quantity : but 
 in it's Reflux (or more properly it's Dcflux) tho* 
 it be not moved a contrary Way, yet it feems to 
 be fo, becaufe there flows a lels Qtiantity of 
 Water. 
 
 HENCE we may determine, that the Flux 
 and Reflux of the Sea is no way diftinft from 
 that general Motion, which we explained in the 
 former Propofition, whereby the Ocean is perpe- 
 tually moved from Eaft to Weft -, for it is only a 
 certain Mode or Property of that Motion. And 
 therefore if this Motion be obferved, and rightly 
 confldered in the main Ocean, where it is not ob- 
 ftrufted, we fhall find it not to be fo much a 
 Flux and Reflux of the Sea, as a Flux and De- 
 flux, or fthat we may diftinguifti, by proper Terms, 
 the Quality of the Motion or Flux from the Mo- 
 VOL. I. R tion
 
 242 ^be Ahfolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 tion or Flux itfeli ), it is inoft aptly called tiie 
 Swelling and Swaging ot the Sea. 
 
 FOR the Sea perpetually flows from Eaft to 
 Weft, and only ieems to flow back again, when it's 
 more violent Force is flackened and wafted, which 
 a little before was quickened and augmented. But 
 this is called the Reflux, becaule the Sea ieems, 
 on Shores and in Bays, to approach and retire by 
 lits, which is not owing to the quality of the Mo- 
 tion itfelf, but to the Situation of the Shores and 
 Bays, which requires that the Water fhould fall 
 back to the contrary Point ; but the fettling of the 
 Sea in general doth not proceed from the Situation 
 of the Shores, but from the quality of the Motion 
 of the Water. 
 
 BUT the Motion of the Sea can by no means 
 be eftimated by it's approach to the Shores, for 
 whatever this Motion be, or to what Point foever 
 it is made, it will always fluftuate towards the 
 Shores ; which happens by reafon of the fluid Na- 
 ture of the Water. 
 
 T H AT the Sea moves towards the fame Point, 
 that is, from Eaft to Weft, both in the Flux and 
 Reflux for Swelling and Swaging), and never 
 moves the contrary way, appears from the fol- 
 lowing Obfervations. i. In the main Ocean be- 
 tween the Tropics, there is no other Motion per- 
 ceived than this from Eaft to Weft. 2. In 
 Streights that join the Parts of the Ocean and run 
 directly Eaft and Weft, as the Streights of Magel" 
 Ian, Manilha, Java^ and others among the Indian 
 Iflands •, in thefe, I fay, the Sea rifes and fettles in 
 1 2 Hours Time, but in fettling it doth not flow 
 back out of the Streights to the eaftward ; but is 
 carried by other Paflages, ftill to the weftward ; 
 which is a plain Sign that this Ebbing and Flow- 
 ing are not two contrary Motions, but a Modifi- 
 cation of the general Motion from Eaft to Weft. 
 
 So
 
 Chap. 14- of Unhcrfal Geography. 24-7 
 
 So that Scaliger and all the reil are deceived, who 
 reprefent this as a double Motion to and again. 
 
 IT is to be underftood, that when we fay this 
 Motion is from Eaft to Weft, we do not mean 
 punduaily the two cardinal Points, but include all 
 their Collaterals, even to the North and South 
 Poles, towards which however the Motion is 
 weaker. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 To explain the Caufe of the Swelling and Swaging of 
 the Sea, vulgarly called it^s Flux and Reflux {f). 
 
 THERE 
 
 (f) Sir Ifaac Neivtojz moll 
 fuccefsfully explains as well the 
 Flux and Reflux of the Sea, as 
 moil: other Appearances of Na- 
 ture, from his u?iiverfal Princi- 
 ple of Gratify or Attraftion. 
 Gravitation is a certain Force im- 
 printed on all Bodies by the Au- 
 thor of Nature, by which they 
 mutually endeavour to accede ; 
 but how this Force is exerted 
 we know not. Thus the Globe 
 of the Sun and Planets gravitate 
 mutually towards each other in 
 proportion to their feveral Mag- 
 nitudes, and Dillances from one 
 another. As to this Earth of 
 ours, it hath but little Commu- 
 nication with the other Planets, 
 whofe Bodies are too fmall to 
 affeft us much, at fuch a vail 
 Dillance; only the Sun and 
 Moon are refpefted by it, the 
 one becaufe it is placed fo near 
 us, and the other by reafon of 
 the Bulk of it's Body; which 
 tho' it be at a vaft Dillance, 
 yet afts with a ilrong attraftive 
 Force. For a Body is more 
 
 forcibly attracted by how much 
 the Dillance of the Attrahent 
 is nearer, or it's Bulk greater. 
 I. Thus J Let L (Fig.z-},.) 
 be the Moon, fuppoled to be 
 above any Part of the Earth, 
 covered with the Ocean ^sh; it 
 is evident that this Place, being 
 nearer ihe Moon than any o- 
 ther Part of the Earth, is more 
 flrongly drawn thereby, and 
 fwelleth up towards it : But 
 the Water in the Place a be- 
 ing diametrically oppolite to the 
 Place b, and further off from 
 the Moon than the reft of the 
 Earth, hath a lefs Tendency 
 towards it than the other Parts; 
 and therefore, being left as it 
 were by the Earth, is lifted up, 
 or fwelled, the contrary Way in 
 a. Hence the Water flowing 
 from d io e towards A and B, 
 makes two Protuberances in the 
 Ocean, the one in B direflly 
 under the Moon, the other in 
 A juft oppofite to it; and thefe 
 always Ihift and accompany the 
 Moon in it's feeming Motion 
 R 2 about
 
 244 I'he Ahjhliite Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 THERE is no Phjcnomcnon in Nature that 
 hath lb much txerciled and puzzled the Wits of 
 
 Philofo. 
 
 about the Earth, and occafion 
 thereby two Floods and Ebbs 
 in the fame Place, every five 
 and twenty Hours. 
 
 2. Of thefe two Tides that 
 happen in the Time of one di- 
 urnal Revolution in any Place, 
 that is the greateil:, wherein 
 the Place cometli neareil the 
 Eminence of the Water A or 
 B. Thus, in fuch a Figure as 
 the laft, let, Vp (Fig. 24.) be 
 the Poles, JE Q^the Equator, 
 FG a Parallel to it, which a- 
 ny place defcribes by it's diur- 
 nal Motion ; it appears that the 
 two High-waters happen in the 
 Place, when it is fituated in G 
 or F, having the Moon in the 
 Aleridian; but the higheft Tide 
 is found in the Point G, wliich 
 comes nearcft the Eminence of 
 the Waters in B. It further 
 appears from the F'igure, that 
 the Moon, in the Time of the 
 higheft Tide, is above the Hori- 
 zon of the Place, if Ihe is on the 
 famefideof the Equator with the 
 Place itfelf: butif fhe decline the 
 contrary Way, fhe is under the 
 Horizon in the Point A, at the 
 Time of the higheft Tide. For 
 Example, in Europe x\\e ^'mn\?\ 
 Tides are the higheft of the two 
 when the Moon is found in 
 the elevated Semicircle of the 
 INIeridian, or in the Northern 
 Signs of the Ecliptic; but the 
 loweft when llie is in the South- 
 ern Signs. 
 
 Moreover, the Height of the 
 Tides is varied generally all over 
 the Earth, accordingtotheday 
 
 of the Month and the time of 
 the Year. 
 
 3 . F"or, becaufe the attractive 
 Force of the Sun reaches the 
 Earth as well as that of the 
 Mc's?r, when both thefe Forces 
 confpire, or are united, they 
 raife the Waters higheft, and 
 make what we cdWSpring Tidts; 
 but when the 5"«« deprefles whnt 
 the Moon heaves up, then hxip- 
 pen the loweft or 'Neap Tides. 
 Thus we obferve higher Tides 
 when the Sun and Moon in Con- 
 jundlion or Oppofition, are right 
 over any Place B, or diametrical- 
 ly oppofite over A and B, than 
 when they are in the Quadra- 
 tures, 'vi'n. when the Sun is in 
 the Point FI or I, and the Moon 
 in the intermediate Point A or 
 B. But the F'orccof the Sun is 
 final 1 compared \\ ith that of the 
 Moon ; becaufe the Semidia- 
 meter of the Earth CB, by 
 which the Water in B is nearer 
 the Sun than the Center C, is 
 fcarcelenfible, if compared with 
 the immenfe Diftance of the 
 Sun. 
 
 4. Since the Eminences of 
 Water are carried round the 
 Earth by the diurnal Motion, 
 the Motion, Agitation, and 
 Heighth, of the Tides, are the 
 greater, the larger the Circle is 
 in which the Waters revolve. So 
 the Moon being in the Equino- 
 ftial, and leading about the two 
 oppofite Eminences of Water in 
 theEquator,makcsgreaterTides 
 [co'tcris paribus) than when fhe 
 ib in the Tropics. 
 
 Hence
 
 yy<//c V
 
 Chap. 14. of TJniverfal Geography. 24^ 
 
 Philofophers and learned Men as this. Some have 
 thought the Earth and Sea to be a living Creature, 
 which, by it's Refpiration, caufeth this ebbing and 
 flowing. Others imagined that it proceeds, and is 
 provoked, irom a great Whirlpool near Norway ^ 
 which, for fix Hours, abforbs the Water, and 
 afterwards difgorges it in the fime fpace of Time. 
 Scaliger, and others, fuppofed that it is caufed by 
 the oppofite Shores, efpecially of America, where- 
 by the general Motion of the Sea is obftrudted and 
 reverberated. But mod Philofophers, who have 
 obferved the Harmony that thefe Tides have with 
 the Moon, have given their Opinion, that they 
 are entirely owing to the Influence of that Luminc^- 
 ry. But the Queftion is, what is this Influence? 
 To which they only anfwer, that it is an occult 
 
 Hence alfo both the Lumi- 
 naries, placed in the Equinodtial 
 at the Time of their Conjun- 
 ftion orOppoiition, which hap- 
 pens near the Equinoxes in 
 March, or September, produce 
 the higheft Tides in the whole 
 Year. 
 
 Which Experience alfo con- 
 firms, becaufe the Sun is a 
 little nearer the Earth in the 
 Winter than in the Summer } 
 therefore the highell Spring 
 Tides happen a little before 
 the Vernal Equinox, and a lit- 
 tle after the Autumnal, niiz. 
 in February and OSlober, rather 
 than precifely upon the Equim- 
 ilial Days. 
 
 5. The librating Motion of 
 the Waters, which are apt to 
 retain the Motion imprefled up- 
 on them, and continue to move 
 tho' the Actions of the Lumina- 
 ries ceafe, make the greateil 
 ?nenjirual Spring Tides (explain'd 
 
 R 
 
 in Artie. 3.) not precifely on the 
 Ne^^TLXiA. Full Moons, but gene- 
 rally they are the third Tides 
 after them. 
 
 6. Things would happen con- 
 ftantly and regularly thus, if the 
 whole Earth were covered with 
 very deep Sea ; but by reafon of 
 great and fmall Iflands which 
 flop the Tide, and the Streights 
 between them, alfo the Shelves 
 and Shallows along which the 
 Tides are to be propagated, the 
 \'arict)' of this Phenomenon is 
 almoft infinite, and fcarcely to 
 be explained by this Theory ; 
 but vv'hen juft Obfervations are 
 diligently made, all thefe parti- 
 cular Caufes may be found out 
 and known. See Newton's 
 Prin. Math. Phil. Book 3. Prop. 
 24. Greg. Phyf. and Geometr. 
 Altron. Book^. Prop. 64,65. al- 
 fo HalleyV Dijfertation in Phil, 
 Tranf. N° 226. 
 
 J urines Appendt^f. 
 
 3 Quality,
 
 2 46 ^hc Abjolute Part S e c t . I V . 
 
 Quality, or Sympathy, whereby the Moon at- 
 tracts all moill; Bodies. But thele are only Words, 
 and fignify no more than that the Moon does it by 
 Ibme means or other, but they do not know how : 
 Which is the Thing we want. 
 
 DES Cartes explains it by his general Hypo- 
 thefis thus : In the lorementioned Figure ot Pro- 
 pofition 9, let A BCD be the Vortex, with the 
 Earth in it's Center, and which, with the Earth 
 and Moon in it, is carried in a larger Vortex a- 
 bout the Sun. Let M be the Center of the firft 
 Vortex, EFGH the Earth, 1234 the Superficies 
 of the Sea, which tor plainnefs we will fuppofe to 
 cover the whole Earth j and 5678 the Superficies 
 of the Air furrounding the Sea. If therefore there 
 were no Moon in the Vortex, the Point T, the 
 Center of the Earth, would coincide with the Point 
 M, the Center of the Vortex -, but fince the Moon is 
 about B, the Center of the Earth muft be between 
 M and D -, becaufe, fince the celeftial Matter of 
 this Vortex moves fomething fwifter than the Earth 
 or Moon, which is carried only with it, unlefs 
 the Point T were a little further diftant from B 
 than from D, the Prefence of the Moon would 
 hinder it from moving fo freely between B and 
 T, as between T and D •, and feeing the Place 
 of the Earth in the Vortex is not determined, but 
 by the equal Force of the circumambient celeftial 
 Matter, it is plain that it ought therefore to ap- 
 proach fo me what towards D. And for the fame 
 Reafon, when the Moon fhall be in C, the Center 
 of the Earth ought to be between M and A, fo 
 that always the Earth may recede a little from the 
 Moon. Moreover, fince we fuppofed the Moon 
 to be about B, not only the Space between B and 
 T, but alfo that betv/een T and D, thro' both 
 which the celeftial Matter flows, is made fome- 
 thing narrower ; hence it follows, that the ceJe- 
 
 ftiaj
 
 Chap. 14. ofVniverfal Geography. 247 
 
 ftial Mat:er flowcth fader tliere, and therefore 
 prefTeth more, both the Superficies of the Air at 
 6 and 8, and of the Water at 2 and 4, than if 
 the Moon had not been in the Diameter of the 
 Vortex BD. Now feeing the Air and Water arc 
 both Fluids, and eafily give way to the Preffure, 
 they muft be more deprelleJ about F and H, than 
 they would be if the Moon were not in this Diame- 
 ter B D ; and alfo more elevated towards G and 
 E, where both their Superficies bulge or are pro- 
 minent. And further, bccaufe the Part of the 
 Earth at F, under B, where the Sea is now loweflr, 
 in fix Hours Time will be at G, under C, where 
 it is now higheft, and atter other fix Hours in H, 
 under D, and fo on : or rather, becaufe the Moon 
 is moving a little in the mean Time from B towards 
 C, and fo as to perform the whole Revolution 
 ABCD in a Month, by which the part of the 
 Earth that is now in F under the Moon's Body, 
 will be in fix Hours, twelve Minutes Time, or 
 thereabouts, a little further than G, in that Diame- 
 ter of the Vortex, which is 90 Degr. diftant from 
 the Place into which the Moon in the mean Time 
 hath moved •, therefore the Water will in that Time 
 increafe and be higheft at F, and in other fix 
 Hours, twelve Minutes, when the Moon is got 
 beyond D, will fettle and be loweft there, i^c. 
 Hence it is plain, that the Water of the Sea mufb 
 conftantly ebb and flow in the fame Place, every 
 twelve Hours, twenty four Minutes Time. 
 
 THIS is Des Cartes's Demonftration, which is 
 very ingenioufly contrived to account both for the 
 Tides that happen when the Moon is in the Me- 
 ridian of the Place, and thofe alfo that occur when 
 fhe is in the oppofite Point of the Meridian Circle 
 under the Horizon. 
 
 R4 BUT
 
 24S • ^he Abfoliite Fart S e c t. IV. 
 
 BUT according to what we obferved in the 
 ninth Propofuion, there are feveral Imperfections 
 in this Dcmonftration. As iirft, it is a wonder 
 that Des Cartes did not confider, that, according 
 to his Demonftration, the Water ought to ebb 
 at 2 and 4, when the Moon approaches the Me- 
 ridian B : and, on the contrary, to flow, when the 
 Earth or Moon [viz. either ot them j is removed fix 
 Hours from each other ; but this is contrary to Ex- 
 perience, for when the Moon approaciies the Meri- 
 dian of any Place, the Waters flow in that Place, and 
 ebb, back again, at it's departure. But both Des 
 Carte^^s Words and Figure fliow the contrary -, fo 
 that to take away the Abfurdity ("and in Da Cartes's 
 Method) let us fuppofe the Vortex of the Earth 
 ABCD, and the Waters 1234, to be interfperfed 
 equally about the Center T without any Protube- 
 rance, and to revolve with the Earth and the cele- 
 Ifial Matter between ABCD and 5678. Let us 
 fuppofe again the Moon to happen into this Vortex 
 at B, and therefore the Space T B to become nar- 
 rower, and the Water at 2 to be prefled towards E 
 by the celefhial Matter fqueezing thro' it. 
 
 THEN while the Water is expelled from 2 
 to E, I afk where the greateft fwelling will be, 
 whether in the Place E, which is diftant a Qua- 
 drant from F (where the Moon is vertical), or in 
 the Place next to F towards E? If you anfwer, 
 tlie fwelling is greateft about the former Place E, 
 I deny it, becaufe it is contrary to Experience ; 
 but Experience fliews the latter to be true, and 
 even Reafon convinces us, that when the Moon 
 is over the Place F, the Water will be forced 
 from 2 towards i, which happens becaufe the 
 greatefl: fwelling is about 2, not about i, for here 
 it will be leaft -, hence the Places to the wefl:ward have 
 their Tides later, as we know by Experience. And 
 lieafoJi *ind the Laws of Hydrofl:atics require this. 
 
 For
 
 Chap. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 249 
 
 For if Water be poured in at 2, that it may flow 
 towards E, there will be the greateil quantity of 
 Water at 2, and a little lefs in the next Place, but 
 leaft of all at E -, and the fame Thing will happen 
 if it be expelled or driven towards E. But by the 
 Circumrotation of the Earth, E comes into the 
 Place of F, where at length there will be the great- 
 eft Protuberance at E, and the Water will be re- 
 pelled towards H. 
 
 THEREFORE Df J Carte.'^ Figure and De- 
 monftration is to be changed, that the fwelling may 
 arife fomewhere about 2, viz. where the Moon is 
 vertical. What more might be faid here we refer 
 to our Treatife upon Des Carles's Phyfjcs. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 The general Motion of the Sea from Eafl to IVefl is 
 Jlronger^ and the Tides are higher at New and Full 
 Moon, than at the ^adratures, 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition appears from 
 Experience. For People that ufe the Sea teftify, 
 that at New and Full Moon, the Face of the Ocean 
 is conftantly rough and troubled, but calm and 
 quiet at the Quadratures. This is eafily accounted 
 for by the atorefaid Hypothefis ; for when the 
 Moon is at the New or Full, fhe is nearer the 
 Earth than at any other Time of her Age, and is 
 furtheft diftant in her Quadratures, as is fliewn 
 by Aftronomers {g). But when the Moon is 
 nearer the Earth, that is, when the Space B T is 
 lefs, the celeftial Matter being hindered, or ob- 
 ftruded, prefi.es with greater force the Water from 
 2 towards i. But happens otherwife in the Qua- 
 drat-yres. 
 
 (g) This is falfe. Bee the Note (e) above. 
 
 YET
 
 250 ^he Ahjoliite Tart Se ex. IV. 
 
 YET in fome Places there are higher Tides 
 at the Full Moon than at the New, which I can- 
 not account for, unlefs they be the Efredls of 
 it's greater Light at that time. Nor can it be o- 
 therwife explained, why at the Full Moon Vege- 
 tables and Animals arc impregnated with a greater 
 quantity of Sea Moifture. than at the New, tho* 
 even then the Tides are every whit as high. It 
 is very wonderful what one Twiji, a Dutchman, 
 relates in his Dcfcription of India. He fays, that 
 in the Kingdom of Guzarat (where he lived many 
 Years) their Oyflers, and Crabs, and other Shell- 
 Fifli, are not fo fat and juicy at the Full Moon 
 as at the New, contrary to their Nature in all 
 other Places. Nor is it lefs admirable, that on 
 the Coatl of the lame Kingdom, near the Mouths 
 of the River Indus, the Sea fwells, and is troubled, 
 at the New Moon, when not far from hence, viz, 
 m the Sea of Calicut the greateft Rife of the Wa- 
 ters is at the Full. But it is requifite that we 
 fliould have repeated Enquiries and Obfervations 
 about thefe Matters, before we pretend to folve 
 their Phsenomena. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 ^he Flux and Reflux of the Sea varies with the Sea^ 
 fons of the Tear, and the 'Tides are ohferved to be 
 highejl about the Equinoxes j i. e. at the Spring 
 and Fall ; but lowejl at the Soljlices. 
 
 D E S Carter pretends to account for this Phae- 
 nomenon by his Hypothefis, but I cannot ap- 
 prehend his Meaning by his Words, nor how it 
 can be deduced from it (h). It is probable, that the 
 Sun and the general Winds may contribute much 
 
 (b) See the /rue realhn of this in Artie 3- of Note (f) above. 
 
 to
 
 Chap. 14. of Vniverfal Geography. 251 
 
 to raife thefe Tides, when, in the Equinoxes, the 
 Sun is vertical to the Ocean in the middle of the 
 horrid Zone, and therefore may caufe both the 
 Wind and Water to rage, and the former to a- 
 gitate the latter. The contrary of which may 
 happen about the Solllices, Or we may fay, that 
 thefe extraordinary Tides then happen by the fame 
 Reafon, and proceed from the fame Cauie that fre- 
 quent Rains and Inundations proceed from in thefe 
 Seafons. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 Jn fome Parts of the Ocean, Bays, and Shores, the 
 Tides ehb and flow very high ; and in others hut 
 low : and in fome few Places there are no fenfibls 
 Tides at all. 
 
 THOSE Places have the greatefl; Tides ; i. 
 which are in the Torrid Zone between the Tropics, 
 where the Moon, being almoft conftantly vertical, 
 prelTes the Water with greater force ; 2. thofe 
 which lie diredlly Eaft and Weft with their Col- 
 laterals ; 3. thofe Bays that are long and narrow ; 
 4. thofe Places where there are but few Iflands or 
 Forelands. 
 
 THE Tides are therefore greater or lefs in 
 a Place, according as it is fituated or extended. 
 
 THE greateft known Tides are obferved in 
 the Bay of Guzarat, at one of the Mouths of the 
 River Indus, and has ftruck many with Admira- 
 tion, The Water there recedes from the Shore 
 very quick, and leaves it uncovered for a great 
 Space •, fo that this Bay is, not without Reafon, 
 thought to be the fame into which Alexander the 
 Great failed, when he attempted to tranfport his 
 Army by Sea into India, but was hindered, as 
 it is reported, by the Sea which retired quick 
 3 from
 
 252 TheAhfolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 from the Shore, and left all his Ships a-ground, 
 fo that he could not proceed further, but thought 
 that the Gods had there fixed Bounds to his Expe- 
 dition. This Story is reported for a Truth by the 
 Inhabitants of Camba^a. The Caufe of this is the 
 iliallownefs of the Chanel, which makes the Water 
 in it's Ebbing leave fo much more Ground unco- 
 vered, tho' perhaps fome other Caufe may confpire 
 with this. 
 
 AT the Town of Daman^ not far from Surat 
 in India^ the Tide rifes and falls two Fathoms and 
 a half, and the Sea recedes from the Shore half a 
 German Mile. 
 
 I N the Bay of Camhaya the Tide flows five 
 (or as fome fay feven) Fathoms high, which vio- 
 lent Flux caufes many Ships to be loft by unex- 
 perienced Seamen -, for at the Ebb, when the Wa- 
 ter falls back, they are frequently fplic upon the 
 Rocks. 
 
 UPON the Shores and Bays at the Magellanic 
 Streights, there is no conftant Time obferved be- 
 tween the Tides, which ebb and flow irregularly, 
 fometimes in three Hours, and fometimcs in twelve 
 Hours ', which variety is caufed by the violent 
 breaking of the Sea into thefe Streights, and the 
 frequent Agitation of it by the Winds. 
 
 PRODIGIOUS high Tides are obferved a- 
 bout Malacca, and in the Streights of Sunda. 
 
 I N the Arahian Gulph, or Red-Sea, the Tide 
 of Ebb is fo great, that as fome of the Antients 
 have writ, fquotcd by Scaliger) Mofes, and the 
 Jfraelites, might, at low Water, have paflfed thro' 
 it without a Miracle. But this is falfe, for it ne- 
 ver ebbs fo much as to leave the Chanel dry. 
 
 I N Butlon's Bay, near Hudfon's, Streights, when 
 Mr T'homas Button, an Englijhmau, wintered there 
 in the Latitude of ^y Degr. North Latitude, he 
 obferved the Tide of Flood to rife fifteen Foot and 
 
 above •
 
 Chap. 14. ofJJniverfal Geography. 253 
 
 above: and in the Latitude of 60 Degr. the Summer 
 after, he found it to come up to the Uime Height ; 
 tho' in neither Hudfon'^ nor James's Bay it rifes 
 much above two Foot. 
 
 THERE are prodigious high Tides upon the 
 Coaft of China, and about the Iflands of Japan. 
 
 A T Panama, a Town on the Coall of America^ 
 the Pacific Sea flows very high, and immediately 
 ebbs again; at the Full Moon the Agitation is lb 
 great that it drives the Water into the Houfes of the 
 Town. All along this Shore the Tides ot the great 
 South Sea are ftrangely high ; fo that in their Re- 
 flux they retreat two Miles of Ground, and in ibme 
 Places the Water falls ofi^'out of Sight. 
 
 I N the Bay of Bengal, on the Shore of Sia?n, the 
 Tide rifes fifteen Foot. 
 
 BUT in xht Mediterranean Sea, which flows 
 from Wefl: to Eafl thro' the Streights of Gibraltar ^ 
 there is no fenfible Tide at all ; becaufe it's En- 
 trance is fituated oppofite to that Point, to which 
 the Ocean Sea in general flows. It may perhaps 
 increafe a little, but in the main it is not fenfible, 
 only in the Gulph of Venice there is a fmall Agi- 
 tation perceived, by reafon of the great length 
 and narrownefs of the Bay, which, in the broader 
 Parts of the Mediterranean, is no were perceptible. 
 Therefore the Flux and Reflux of the Sea was un- 
 known to the Grecians, and alfo to the Rojnans in 
 the Time of Scipio Africanus -, and therefore when 
 they found it in other Places, accounted it a Mi- 
 racle ; as appears from the forementioned Expe- 
 dition of Alexander the Great, and the Wars of 
 Scipio with Carthage ; but in Cicero's Time this 
 was well enough known to the Romans. A fmall 
 Tide is obferved at Marfeilles in France, and an 
 inconfiderable Rifing is perceived along the Coaft 
 of Bartary. 
 
 IN
 
 254 ^^^ Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 I N the Baltic Sea, and all over the northern. 
 Ocean beyond England and Norway^ the Tides 
 are not in the leaft perceptible ; nor in the northern 
 Parts of the Pacific Ocean [i). The Reafon is not 
 well known, unlefs we iix it upon the great Di- 
 flance thefc Seas are from the way of the Moon, 
 and their being extended from Weft to Eaft, and 
 North-eaft, with the many Iflands and Forelands, 
 all which confpire to obftruft the Flux of the Tides 
 in thefe Places. But this cannot be faid of Hud/on* s 
 Bay ; which is properly extended from Eaft to 
 Weft, to receive the Flux of the Tides ; and there- 
 fore it is no Wonder if they are mucli more re- 
 markable here than in the Bailie, or in the northern 
 Ocean. . - - 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Tbs Flux of the Sea is forced by aflrorg h)ipidfe ; hut 
 the Reflux is the natural Motion of the Water, 
 
 THE Flux is caufed by the Prefllire of the 
 Moon, or the celeftial Matter, between it and the 
 Sea, and continues no longer than the Caufe forces 
 it : but in the Ebb, the Sea only flows from a higher 
 to a lower Place, which is the natural Motion of 
 the Water. 
 
 (/) The Tides are very fmall on the Coafl of Ko'va Zevibla the 
 
 in feveral Parts cf the Northern Water was obferved by Capt. 
 
 Ocean, yet they may be felt in M^ood to rife eiglit Foot. See 
 
 fome particular Places. Thus Note [a] on Chap. 8. above. 
 
 LEMMA
 
 Chap. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 255 
 
 LEMMA, 
 
 'The Place of the Moon in the Zodiac being known^ 
 from an Ephejueris, or by Calculation^ or Aftrono- 
 rnical Obfervation, and alfo it*s Latitude, and the 
 Hour oj the Day ; to find, on the Terrejirial Globe^ 
 what Place the Moon will be vertical to at the 
 given Hour^ and to Jloew all the Places that the 
 Moon will pafs over, one after another, that Day , 
 
 THIS Problem is of great Ufe for obferving 
 the Flux and Reflux of the Sea. You will find 
 the Method of folving it in Chapter xxx. Propo- 
 fition 14. where it is more commodioufly explain- 
 ed. However the more knowing Reader may 
 anticipate it here, or learn it aforehand from the 
 Rules there delivered, 
 
 PROPOSITION XVL 
 
 The Tides are highefi in thofe Places over which the 
 Moon is vertical, unlefs fame of the Obflacles above- 
 7nentioned in Propofition 14 hinder ; but the fur- 
 ther any Place is from that, the Ufs (casteris pari- 
 busj is the Flux and Reflux. 
 
 BECAUSE thofe Places are more prcffed, 
 and the fwelling of the Sea is greater, over which 
 the Moon fqueezeth the celeftial Matter, where- 
 by greater Tides are produced : but where the in- 
 cumbent Matter is lefs fqueezed, and other Caufes 
 confpire, the Alteration will be lefs. 
 
 PRO'
 
 256 The Ahjoliite Fart S e c T . I V . 
 
 PRO PO S IT^IO N XVII. 
 
 The Altitude of the Tides are divers in the fame Place 
 at different Times, and they are high and low, ac- 
 cording as the Moon is further from or nearer to 
 the Zenith of the Place. 
 
 SINCE the Moon every Day changes her 
 Place in the Ecliptic, fhe will be vertical now to 
 one Place, and then to another, and confequently 
 varies her Diftance from the Zenith of any particu- 
 lar Place. Which being granted, it follows, as a 
 Corollary of the laft: Propoficion, that the Tides in 
 any one Place are conftantly altering, whether their 
 Variation be fenfible, or inlenfiblc. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIII. 
 
 The greatefi fwelling of the Ocean, or High-JVater, 
 ought to he in that Place when the Moon is in the 
 Meridian Circle {above or below) •, but in divers 
 Places it is HighlVater when the Moon is otherwife 
 ■pofited. 
 
 SINCE the Moon, in the Meridian, is nearer 
 any Place than when flie is in the Horizon, (be- 
 caufe the Hypotenufe of any right angled Tri- 
 angle is longer than the Perpendicular^ it follows 
 (by Proportion 16, of this Chapter) that then it 
 ought to be High- Water in that Place f where fhe 
 is full Southj. And when fhe is full North, or in 
 the lower Part of the Meridian Circle, it ought to 
 be alfo High- Water in the fame Place, becaufe, 
 tho' fhe be not there, yet the oppofite Part of the 
 Vortex of the Earth is ftraitened, and hath the fame 
 Kfiect, as if the Body of the Moon itfclf were pre- 
 fcnt. 
 
 BUT
 
 C H A p. 14- ^f Utuverfal Geography. ±^^ 
 
 BUT there are many Places and Shores where 
 it is not High- Water precileiy at the Time of thcJ 
 Moon's fouthing or northing in the Meridian Circle, 
 (as the Philofophers of the former Age thought^ 
 but perhaps a little before, or after, flie makes her* 
 appulfe to the Meridian, viz. when fhe approacheth 
 a Vortex fomething diftant from it, Eait or Well. 
 Neither doth a tull Tide always happen when 
 the Moon is in the fame Azimuth j but it is very 
 often High- Water, efpecially at the New and 
 Full Moon, a little before the conftant Time, or 
 before the Moon approaches that Azimuth. At 
 London it is High-Tide when the Moon is three 
 Hours from the Meridian, or South- Weft, and 
 North-Eaft (k). On the Shore of China, m the 
 Harbour of Maccao, a Portuguefe Sailor thus fta- 
 ted the Time of High- Water, The Elevation of 
 the Pole, or the Latitude of the Place, is 22 degr^ 
 20 min. In the Year 1584 on the nineteenth Day 
 o^ Seplemper it was Full Moon, and the fime Dayj 
 it was High- Water half an Hour, or three quar- 
 ters, paft Eight in the Morning-, fo that the 
 Moon was then three Hours and a quarter diftant 
 from the Meridian -, hence the Azimuth, or Point 
 fhe was then in, may be found by a Problem in 
 Chapter xxx. 
 
 IN the Year 1585, iv^n/^r)! the third, which 
 was alfo the third from the New Moon, it was 
 obferved to be High-Tide a little after twelve ; and 
 therefore at the New Moon, which was February 
 the firft, it was full Sea about forty Minutes af- 
 ter Ten. 
 
 HENCE the Azimuth the Moon was then in 
 may be found. 
 
 (k) See the Note (m) beloiv, 
 
 VOL.1. S IN
 
 258 'The Abfolute Part S e c t. I V. 
 
 IN the Year 1585, February the fixteenth, it 
 was oblerved to be High-Water, at Full Moon, 
 almoft at Noon, viz. at half an Hour paft Eleven. 
 IN the Year 1585, June the lecond, which 
 was the fourth Day after the New Moon, it was 
 High-Tide exat5lly at twelve, therefore at the 
 Conjundlion it was High-Tide at nine in the Fore- 
 noon. 
 
 THE flime Sailor adds, that the Time of High 
 and Low-Water doth not agree with the Time 
 that is computed irom the Motion of the Moon, 
 except for five Days before and after the New 
 Moon. But there is fome Ambiguity in thefe 
 ■ Words, and others following, which we have there- 
 fore omitted. But the Caufe of this Variation is, 
 that the Sea rifes nine Hours in the Port of Mac- 
 cao, and ebbs only three, as is obferved in the next 
 Propofition. 
 
 FI E R E follow fome Obfcrvations made by a 
 - Dtilch Sailor of the Time of High- Water, on the 
 Days of the New and Full Moon, at different 
 Places. 
 
 AT twelve o'Clock fon the New and Full 
 Moon Days) it is High- Water along the Shore 
 of Flanders^ at Enckhuyfen in Hoildnd, at Hoorn, at 
 Eindcn in Eaft Friejland, at the Mouth of the 
 River Elbe^ at the Mouth of the Eyder^ at the 
 Iflands of Jutland, at Dover in England, &c. 
 
 AT forty five Minutes paft twelve, at Flujhing 
 in Zealand. 
 
 AT half an Hour pafl one, at the weftern 
 Shore of the Ifle of PVight, at Calais, at the Mouth 
 of the River Thames in England, along the Shores 
 of Zealand, at the Mouth of the River Schelde, in 
 the Meufe, at [Gorcum']. 
 
 A T three o'Clock, at Amjlerdam, Rotterdam., 
 Vortf and Newcaftle in England, before the Fle- 
 mjh Sand- Banks, at Armentier in Flanders, at the 
 
 Mouth
 
 Chap. 14- ofUnherfal Geography, 25^ 
 
 Mouth of the River Garonne^ along the South Shore 
 of England^ on the Coaft of France^ Gafcotgne^ Bif- 
 cay^ Galliciay Portugal^ and Spain ; on the weflern 
 Shore of Ireland, all the way to Shetland. 
 
 AT a quarter before four in the Afternoon, 
 at Rohan in France, in the Maefe, at Rochelle in 
 France, in the River Garonne, in the Bays upon 
 the Shore of Spain, Portugal, Gallicia, m the Bays 
 on the Southern Shore of Bretagne in France, on 
 the Shore of Gafcoigne, on the weftcrn Shore of 
 Ireland. 
 
 AT half an Hour pad four, from the 1'exel to 
 the fouthern Shore of Ireland. 
 
 AT a quarter paft five, in all the Ports on thf! 
 South of Ireland, at Plymouth in England, and at 
 other fouthern Places between that and pyales. 
 
 A T fix o'clock in the Morning and Evening, 
 at Hamliirgh in the Elbe, at Bremen, on the Ealt 
 fide of the "Texel, at Antwerp, in the Englijh Cha- 
 nel as far as the Scilly Ifliinds. 
 
 AT a quarter before feven in the Evenings 
 at Falmouth, and in Brijlol Chanel, at St Nicolas 
 and Podejfamke, as far as IVeymouth and Hartpool. 
 
 AT half an Hour pafl: feven at the Road in 
 the Texel, at Kilduy?ja, in the middle of the Cha- 
 nel, befide Plymouth, and as far as the Foreland of 
 the Lizard- Point. 
 
 A T a quarter paft eight in the Evening, about 
 the IJIe of IVight, at the Weft fide of the Flie 
 Ifiand. 
 
 AT nine o'Clock, at the Mouth of the River 
 Eems in Friejland, on the Eaft fide of the Flic 
 Ifland, along the Shores of Friefiand, and on the 
 eaftern Shore of the Ijle of Wight. 
 
 A T half an Hour paft ten, at the Mouth of 
 the River Thames^ on the Shore of Normandy and 
 
 S 2 AT
 
 26o I'heAbfokte Part Sect. IV. 
 
 AT a quarter pad eleven, in the River Thames, 
 and other Places in England. 
 
 IT is very difficult to explain the Caufe of thefe 
 wonderibl, and extraordinary DiiTerences of the 
 Tides in all Places, tho' it properly belongs to 
 Naturalifts, and Geographers, to do it. It is like- 
 ly that the various windings of the Shores, and 
 their different Situation to the Sea- ward, the Re- 
 fiftance of the Iflands, the Concurrence of feve- 
 ral Tides, the Diftance of Places from the Moon*s 
 Way, the various Winds, chiefly thofe that arc 
 general and conftant, the Declivity and Shoalnefs 
 of the Shores, and other things, very much con- 
 tribute to this furprifing Diverfity. For Ex- 
 ample, at the Port of London the Tide rifes 'till 
 the Moon comes to the South- Weft, when fhe hath 
 South Latitude, and only then begins to ebb, 
 not when fhe approaches the Meridian : for which 
 we give this Reafon, viz. that while the Moon is 
 moving from the Meridian of London towards 
 Brafil (or from Brafil towards London) the Water 
 ought not to fettle, but ft ill to rife, becaufe the 
 Shore of America repels the Water towards Ejig- 
 land, which is drawn thitherward by the Moon, 
 fince there is no Paffage for it to proceed any fur- 
 ther. But it may be afls;cd why, when the Moon 
 hath North Latitude, it fnould happen to be High- 
 Water before ftie approaches the Meridian of 
 I^ondon, viz. when flie i» in the South- Eaft Point ? 
 To which I anfwer, that when the Moon hath 
 North L-atitude flie is much nearer England than 
 when fhe hath South, and therefore raifes up the 
 Water fooner ; and the Reafon why the Flux is not 
 continued fo long as till the Moon approaches 
 the Meridian is, becaufe fhe impels the Ocean 
 more towards the American Coaft, and Hudfon's 
 Bay, where the greateft Floods are then obferved. 
 
 AND
 
 Chap. 14. of Univerjal Geography. 261 
 
 AND for this Reafon it is High-Water along 
 the Coafts of China, before the Appulfe of the 
 Moon to the Meridian, becaufe the continual Eall: 
 Winds drive the Sea towards the Well. 
 
 BUT all thefe Allegations are not fiifBcient to 
 fatisfy me in thefe Matters, and therefore I would 
 have the curious Naturaliits examine them with 
 greater Scrutiny. For to find the true Caufe, it 
 is requifite, that we be furnifhed with accurate 
 Obfervations how the Tides ebb and flow in dif- 
 ferent Places, and what Azimuth the Moon is in 
 when it is High- Water in thofe Places ; and how 
 her Bearing varies according to her Place at the 
 Change and Full -, efpecially in thofe Places where, 
 the Moon is vertical, and thofe that bear from them 
 direaiy Eaft, Weft, North, and South (I). It is . 
 alfo to be diligently obferved, what height the 
 Tides flow at thefe times ; when the Moon is in 
 the North Part of her Orbit, and moves not over 
 fo much Sea, but over that vaft Tra6t of Land 
 which lies between China, and the weftern Shore 
 of Africa. For fince flie preflfes not the Water 
 diredly when flie moves over thefe Mediterranean 
 
 (I) The following Direftlons 3. Obferve the Increare and 
 
 are of excellent ufe for obferv- Decreafe of the ^^elocity of the 
 
 ing the Tides, given by Sir Ro- Currents. 
 
 bert Murray, in Philof. Tranf. 4. Meafure the Height of 
 
 N° 17. every utmolt High- Water and 
 
 1 . Obferve the Situation of . Low- Water, from one Spring 
 the Place of Obfervation, 'uiz. Tide to another. 
 
 what Currents, Seas, Iflands, 5. Meafure the exaft Height 
 
 Bays, Shores, Shelves, b'f. are ofSpringTidesandSpringEbbs. 
 near it. 6. Obferve the Pofition and 
 
 2. Obferve in what proportion Strength of the Wind, the State 
 the Increafes of the Tides from of the Weather ; the Height of 
 the Neap to the Spring Tides, the Barometer, b'r. 
 
 and their Decreafes, and the Ri- 7 . Calculate the Moon's Age 
 
 fmgs and Fallings of the Ebbs, and Place in all Refpefts. 
 happen t© be in regard of one See Lowthorp's Ahidgtnent 
 
 another, o/^Philof, Tranfadl. p. 260. 
 
 S 3 Places,
 
 ^62 "lihe Jhfolute Part S e c t. IV. 
 
 Places, I fuppofe this will caufe a fenfible Variar 
 tion of the Motion of the Water. Likewife thefe 
 Phsenomena are to be obferved when the Moon 
 is in the South Part of her Orbit, and moves 
 over BrafiU or South America. For without a 
 perfefl Notion of thefe Occurrences, we fliall 
 icarce be able to find out the true Reafon or 
 Caufe of the Tide. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 ^he Sea flows to mofi Shores in twelve Hours twelve 
 Minutes, and ebbs back again in as man-^, 
 
 IN fome few Places it takes more Time in flowi- 
 ing than in ebbing -, and, on the contrary, in others 
 it flows in lefs Time than it ebbs : yet fo that the 
 Time of the Flux and Reflux for the Time be- 
 tween the two full Seas) make together twelve 
 Jlours, 24t Minutes, and two of thefe Times 
 fnake twenty four Hours 484: Minutes, or almoft 
 twenty five Hours. So that High- Water happens 
 every Day later by almofl: an Hour than the Day 
 before, becaufe the Moon comes later to the Ver-^ 
 tex, or Meridian of any Place, by almoft an Hour 
 (fifty Minutesj every Day. 
 
 WE have fufficiently explained this Propofi- 
 tlon in our Demonftration of the eleventh -, tho* 
 in that we accounted it to be full Sea, when the 
 Moon is in the Meridian of any Place ; but be- 
 caufe, as we fhewed in the laft Propofition, it 
 is found to be High-Water in feveral Places when 
 the Moon is not in the Meridian, we do not, 
 jn this Propofition, reckon the forementioned 
 Hours from the Time the Moon is in the Me- 
 ridian of thefe Places, but from the Time fhe 
 is found, by Experience, to be in that Vertex 
 y/))en it is high Water, Neverthelefs this Period 
 . 2 ^ of
 
 Chap. 14- of Vniverfal Geography. 263 
 
 of the Flux and Reflux is not performed exaft- 
 ly in twelve Hours, twenty tour Minutes, (or 
 in twenty four Hours, fifty Minutes) but fome 
 Times fooner or later, becaufe the Moon con- 
 ftantly changing her Didance from the Zenith, 
 returns at unequal Times to the fame Vertex ; 
 but this Difference is fmall. 
 
 THEREFORE tho* the Flux and Reflux 
 together be performed, in all Places, in about 
 twelve Hours, twenty four Minutes (when there 
 are no ScormsJ ; yet in fome, the Time is equally 
 divided betwe-n the Flood and Ebb •, and in others, 
 the Time of flowing is more or lefs than that of 
 ebbing. 
 
 THE Garonne^ a River in France^ is {tytw 
 Hours in rifing, and but five in falling. And in 
 the Port of Maccao^ upon the Shore of China, the 
 Tides flow nine Hours, and only ebb three, or 
 lefs if the Eaft: Winds blow. 
 
 O N the contrary, in the River Senegal, in iV^- 
 groland, the Sea flows four Hours, and ebbs eight. 
 
 I T is hard to aflign Reafons for this Diffe- 
 rence. Some attribute it to the ftrong and fwift 
 Current of certain Rivers, or to their ordinary 
 Flux. Thus the River Garonne refills the Influx 
 of the Sea with it's ftrong Current and hinders 
 it ; but helps the Reflux, and haftens it. Others 
 will have the Flux to be prolonged another Hour, 
 becaufe the return of the Flood from the northern 
 Seas, hinders it's Egrefs at the Mouth of the Ga- 
 ronne, and rather forces it forther up the River. 
 But it is my Opinion, that the River pours itfelf 
 into the Sea, to a confiderable Difl:ance, with a ra- 
 pid Motion, which is obftruded in part by the 
 Tide, and made to ftand, fome Time before the 
 Moon forces the Sea up into the very Chanel. 
 
 THE Reafon why the Sea flows only four 
 Hours into the River Senegal, is either becaufe 
 
 S 4 it's
 
 264 "The Abfilute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 it's Chanel is extended from Weft to Eaft, or be- 
 caufe the fwifcnefs of the Stream, may hinder the 
 FJujc for two Hours. There may be perhaps o- 
 ther Caufes which we are ignorant of, tor want of 
 Obfervations \ for we are not certain whether it 
 really leffens all the eight Hours, or only fix, and 
 is ftagnant the other two, by Reafon of the Equa- 
 Jity of the Current and the Tide. 
 
 W £ are alfo to confider that low Places have 
 apparently a longer Flux, and a fhorter Ebb. 
 
 . PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 Whether it he Flood in any Place at the Injlant the 
 Moon is in the Horizon of that Place ? 
 
 THEY commonly fay it is ; tho' it be not true in 
 thofe Places where it is full Sea when the Moon 
 is in the Meridian. For when the Moon declines 
 from the Equator fouthward, fhe approaches the 
 Meridian in lefs than fix Hours, and therefore 
 the Flux muft have begun when the Moon was 
 depreflfcd below the Horizon : on the contrary, 
 when the Moon has a North Declination, fhe 
 requires more than fix Hours to move from the 
 Horizon to the Meridian, and therefore it is 
 Ib'lood when Ihe is elevated above the Horizon, 
 or is in the Horary Circle of the fixth Hour ; 
 and fo it is obferved in moft Places, tho' it be 
 otherwife at London^ as we obferved above. It 
 fcems indeed reafonable that, tho' the Moon has 
 a North Declination, the Flux fhould begin when 
 fl^e is horizontal, becaufe llie is then ninety De- 
 grees diftant from the Vertex of the Place, and 
 therefore the Prefilire of the Ocean ought firft to 
 touch here. But Obfervations are wanting to con- 
 firm this,
 
 Chap. 14- of TJni'oerfal Geography, 26 c 
 
 p Ropo s n:ioN xxi. 
 
 Having the 'Time of High or Low-JVater given, on 
 the Day of the Change or Full, in any Place where 
 the Sea ebbs and flows regularly, (viz. in twelve 
 Hours, forty eight Minutes) to find, at any Age of 
 the Moon, the Time of High and Low-Water {in). 
 
 WE 
 
 (w) The true Time of the 
 Tides, at all Ages of the Moon 
 is not well computed by Sea- 
 Men and Aftronomers ; moft of 
 them reckoning, thattheMoon 
 being upon a let Point of the 
 Compals, or fo many Hours pall 
 the Meridian, makes High-Tide 
 in fuch and fuch a Point at all 
 Times of the Moon. As for in- 
 ftance, a South-well Moon 
 makes a full Tide at London, that 
 is, when the Moon is three 
 Hours pall the Meridian. Now 
 this is true indeed at the New 
 and Full Moon, but not at any 
 other Times of the Moon, 
 which few take any notice of. 
 
 But obferving more narrow- 
 ly, I find that at London the 
 Tides fall out at leaft two Points 
 that is, an Houranda half foon- 
 er in the quarters than in the 
 New and Full Moon, and the 
 true Time of the Tides is found 
 to be fomewhat Ihorter and 
 Ihorter from the New and Full 
 Moon to the quarters, yet not 
 in an equal manner, neither 
 
 fradually decreafing from the 
 lew and Full Moon till the 
 quarters j but rather that there 
 was fome little Difference of 
 AUera^iofi both at the New and 
 
 Full Moons, and alfo at the 
 quarters, and that the greateft 
 Difference fell out in the midft 
 between them, agreeing very 
 well to a circular Proportion 
 vafter this manner. 
 
 1 . Divide a Circle into 1 2 
 equal Parts, or Hours, accord- 
 ing to the Moon's Motion, or 
 Diilance from the Sun, from 
 the New Moon to the Full. 
 
 2. Let the Diameter of the 
 Circle be divided into 90 Parts, 
 or Minutes, that is, according to 
 the Time of the Difference be- 
 tween the New or Full Moon, 
 and the quarters, which is one 
 Hour and a half. 
 
 3. Make perpendicular Lines 
 crofsthe Diameter of the Circle 
 from Hour to Hour. 
 
 4. Reckon the Time of the 
 Moon's coming to the South in 
 the Circumference of the Cir- 
 cle, andobferve the perpendica- 
 larLine that falls from that Point 
 upon the Diameter ; and the 
 proportional Minute cut there- 
 by, will fhew how many Hours 
 or Minutes are to be fubftrafted 
 from the Time of High Tides at 
 the New and Full Moon, that 
 fo you may have the true Time 
 of the Tides that prefent Day
 
 266 "The Abfolute Fart Se ct. IV. 
 
 WE cbferved before, that the Time of High 
 and Low-water (if we reckon by tlie mean Mo. 
 tion of the Moon from the Sun) is every Day 48^ 
 Minutes, or more accurately 487-7;) and every 
 half Day 241 Minutes later than the preceding. 
 
 I F therefore it be High- Water in any Place, 
 on the Day of the New or Full Moon, at twelve 
 o'clock, it will be full Tide on the fubfequent 
 Days of the Lunation, as in the following Table ; 
 
 \W.\ 
 
 Moon's 
 Age 
 
 Hours. 
 XII. 
 
 Minutes. 
 
 I 
 
 48 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 37 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 27 
 16 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 4 
 4 
 
 5 
 bo 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 44 
 34 
 
 9 
 10 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 23 
 12 
 
 1 1 
 
 9 
 
 I 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 51 
 
 n 
 
 10 
 
 40 
 
 14 
 
 1 1 
 12 
 
 29 
 Midnight. 
 
 '5 1 
 
 12 
 
 Noon. 
 
 THAT 
 
 'Example. At I^nJon, on the 
 Day of New and Full Moon, it 
 is high Tide at three of the 
 Clock, that is when the Moon 
 is three Hours part the Meridian, 
 and fo by the common Rule the 
 Moon being about four Days 
 old it will be South about tlirce 
 of the Clock, and it will be 
 high. Tide three Hours after- 
 
 wards, that is at fix o' Clock. 
 But now by this Rule, if you 
 count this Time of the Moon's 
 coming to the South in the Cir- 
 cumference, the perpendicular 
 Line which comes from three to 
 nine, cuts the Diameter at 45 
 Min. which fhews that fo much 
 is to be abated from the Time 
 of High-Tide in the New an<J 
 Full
 
 Chap. 14. of TJniverfal Geography. 267 
 
 T H A T is, at the end of the firft Day of the 
 Moon's Age it is High-Water later by forty eight 
 Minutes, X^c. 
 
 BUT 
 
 Full Moon ; fo that it is High 
 Tide 45 Min. before fix ; that 
 js, at five Hours i 5 Min. and 
 not at fix, according to the 
 common Rule. 
 
 The like you may do for any 
 other Port, or Place, knowing 
 the Time of High Water at the 
 New and Full Moon in that 
 Place : And you may do it the 
 more readily, if you fet down 
 the Time of High water at the 
 New and Full Moon under the 
 Diameter, as I have done for 
 London where it is high Tide at 
 
 three of the Clock : So when 
 the Moon is fouth at three of 
 the Clock or nine, the Perpen- 
 dicular cuts the Diameter at two 
 Hours I 5 Min. which, added to 
 the aforefaid three or nine, gives 
 the Time of High Water as a- 
 bove. 
 
 Thus you may cafily make a 
 Table which by the Southing 
 of the Moon fliall readily t?ll 
 you the Time of High Tide in 
 any Place. The following is 
 for London. 
 
 Moon 
 
 ride 
 
 Moon 
 
 ride 
 
 
 Moon 
 
 Tide 
 
 
 Moon 
 
 ride 
 
 South. 
 
 Land. 
 
 
 Sou 
 
 ib. 
 
 Land. 
 
 
 South. 
 
 Lond. 
 
 
 South. 
 
 Lond. 
 
 H. M 
 
 H. 
 
 M. 
 
 H. 
 
 M.H. 
 
 M. 
 
 H. M. 
 
 H. M. 
 
 H. 
 
 M. 
 
 H. M. 
 
 XII c 
 
 3 
 
 c 
 
 Ill 
 
 09 
 
 It 
 
 VI 
 
 7 30 
 
 IX 
 
 
 
 II 15 
 
 IC 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 105 
 
 21 
 
 
 IC 
 
 7 40 
 
 
 
 IC 
 
 II 29 
 
 2C 
 
 3 
 
 li- 
 
 
 
 20 5 
 
 2- 
 
 
 20 
 
 7 52 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 II 43 
 
 3c 
 
 i 
 
 2- 
 
 
 
 305 
 405 
 
 505 
 
 33 
 
 
 30 
 
 8 4 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 II 57 
 
 4c 
 
 3 
 
 3^ 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 40 
 
 8 15 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 12 10 
 
 5<^ 
 
 _) 
 
 4c 
 
 
 
 4b 
 
 
 50 
 
 8 25 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 I 2 24 
 
 I c 
 
 3 
 
 54 
 
 
 IV 
 
 05 
 
 52 
 
 
 VII 
 
 8 36 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 12 37 
 
 IC 
 
 4- 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 105 
 
 59 
 
 
 10 
 
 8 48 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 12 50 
 
 2C 
 
 1- 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 20 6 
 
 6 
 
 
 20 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 I 3 
 
 3c 
 
 4 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 3o'6 
 
 13 
 
 
 30 
 
 9 13 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 1 16 
 
 4c 
 
 4 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 4o|6 
 
 20 
 
 
 40 
 
 9 26 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 I 29 
 
 50 
 
 4- 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 506 
 
 2K 
 
 
 5° 
 
 9 39 
 
 
 
 5'=' 
 
 I 42 
 
 II c 
 
 4 
 
 37 
 
 V 
 
 o;6 
 
 36 
 
 viii 
 
 9 53 
 
 XI 
 
 c 
 
 I 54 
 
 IC 
 
 4 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 106 
 
 44 
 
 
 10 
 
 10 6 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 2 3 
 
 20 
 
 4 
 
 ?o 
 
 
 
 206 
 
 53 
 
 
 20 
 
 10 20 
 
 
 
 2C 
 
 2 16 
 
 3c 
 
 4 
 
 57 
 
 
 
 30' 7 
 
 2 
 
 
 3c 
 
 lo 33 
 
 
 
 3c 
 
 2 27 
 
 4C 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4^ 
 
 7 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 4c 
 
 10 47 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 2 3^ 
 
 5c 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 5<^ 
 
 7 
 
 2C 
 
 
 50 
 
 1 1 I 
 
 
 
 5c 
 
 2 49 
 
 If
 
 268 Tlje Ahfolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 BUT for Pradlice, it is fufficient to add to the 
 Time of High-Water at the New Moon. 
 
 For the firfl Day after the Change. Hours o*; 
 
 For the iecond . • . 1 1 
 
 For the third — — > i\ 
 
 For the fourth . — 3^ 
 
 For the fifth • . — — . 4 
 
 For the fixch • 5 
 
 For the feventh ■ ■ 5|- 
 
 For the eighth . 6^ 
 
 For the ninth 7} 
 
 For the tenth 8^ 
 
 For the eleventh . . 9 
 
 For the twelfth 9^ 
 
 For the thirteenth ■ > io\ 
 
 For the fourteenth ■ • 1 1 } 
 
 For the fifteenth 12^ 
 
 BUT this Calculation fuppofes the Motion of 
 the Moon, from the Sun, to be equal, tho' it be 
 not -, for when fhe is in her Perigee fhe moves 
 much fwifter than when flie is in her Apogee •, 
 and therefore in the iormer Cafe fhe prolongs the 
 Time of the Tides, and in the later fliortens them. 
 Befides, fome of the L.unar Months exceed thirty 
 Days, and others are lefs than twenty nine, but the 
 mean is twenty nine Days, twelve Hours, forty 
 four Minutes. 
 
 BUT in thofe Places where it is Higher Low- 
 Water when the Moon approaches fome certain 
 
 If you find the Difference not in Fhilof. Tranf. N° 34. ni:hich 
 
 fo much between tlie Neap thd it be foiaid Fault nxith by 
 
 Tides, and the Spring l^ides, Mt-Flamfiead (i»tfje/ameTran/. 
 
 the Diameter mult be divided N'^ x^^i) yet by many it is /aid to 
 
 into fewer Parts. This is Mr attfiver 'vety tvell, and therefore 
 
 Henry Philips'^ ^way, delivered ive have tranj'uibed it. 
 
 - - -— - . Azimuth,
 
 Chap. 14. of Univerfal Geography. 269 
 
 Azimuth, tho* the Times may be computed by 
 this Method, yet they are not fo accurately found. 
 
 NEITHER do the Conjunflions of the Sun 
 and Moon happen at the fame Time every Change. 
 
 W E fhall fhew in Chapter xxx, how this may 
 be done by the terreftrial Globe. 
 
 W E may ule a Method fomething like this, for 
 thofe Places where the Time of the Flux is more 
 or lefs than the Time of the Reflux ; fuppofing 
 the Difference be conftant. But the Confideration 
 of the Thing itfelf, and Experience, will fooner 
 teach thefe Particulars than Difcourfe. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXII. 
 
 ^he Winds very often hinder, or promote, the Courfe 
 of the Tides in all Places ; and not only the Winds 
 that blow in thofe Places, but even thofe in others 
 may have the fame Effe^. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition is fo clear, 
 that it needs no Demonftration. 
 
 PRO PO S Il'ION XXIII. 
 
 JVhen any Part of the Ocean hath a proper, or par- 
 ticular. Motion, it is called a Current. Currents 
 are various and direHed towards different Parts of 
 the Ocean, of which fame are conftant and others 
 periodical. To enumerate the moft famous conftant 
 ones, 
 
 I. THE moft extraordinary Current of the 
 Sea is that by which Part of the Atlantic or 
 African Ocean moves about Guinea from Caps 
 Verd towards the Curvature or Bay of Africa^ 
 which they call Fernando Poo, viz. from Weft to 
 Eaft, which is contrary to the general Motion. 
 
 And
 
 270 'fl^e Abfilute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 And fuch is the Force of this Current, that when 
 Ships approach too near the Shore it carries them 
 violently toward that Bay, and deceives the Ma- 
 riners in their Reckoning. Hence it comes to 
 pals, that Ships which lail in two Days Time 
 from the Shore of Mouree to Rio de Benin^ [or 
 For?nofa'] which is one hundred Dutch Miles, re- 
 quire fometimes fix or feven Weeks to return 
 from Benin to Mouree^ unlefs they run out into 
 the main Ocean, which is not eafily done, be- 
 caufe the Current fees to the North-Eaft, and runs 
 fwiftly from the Ifland of St Thomas^ towards tiie 
 Bay of Fernando Poo, carrying in with it the 
 Ships tho' they have a fair North-Eaft Wind ; and 
 they can fcarcely get from the Shore, unlefs they 
 be driven by thefe fudden Storms which break 
 from the Clouds (called Travados^ which feldom 
 happen, and in fome Months not at all. This 
 Current dcftroyed feveral Ships before Mariners 
 were well aware of it ; as being either unadvifedly 
 driven upon the Rocks and Shoals, and periflied 
 by Shipwreck, or detained in the Bay 'till they 
 died with Hunger. 
 
 BUT this Current affefts not the whole Etbio- 
 pc Ocean, only that part which is adjacent to 
 the Shore of Guinea, to the end of the Bay, and 
 to about one Degree of South Latitude. It is 
 obferved not to exceed the Diftance of fourteen 
 Miles from the Shore ; therefore Ships are very 
 careful left they fhould approach fo near, when 
 they fail along thefe Coafts ; which would hinder 
 their intended Courfe, and drive them to a Place 
 they would not care to vifir. 
 
 IT is no eafy thing to find out the Caufe of 
 
 this Current fo near the Shore, when the main 
 
 Ocean thereabouts moves the contrary Way from 
 
 Eaft to Weft. Two Things may be faid for it : 
 
 . , . I. THE
 
 C H A p. 1 4« tf Univerfal Geography. 271 
 
 1. THE Ocean being repulfed by the Ame- 
 rican Shore moves flowly to the Eaftward, but 
 this Motion is not felt in the Main, becaufe the 
 other deftroys it, and renders it lefs fenfible, only 
 near the Shore it runs fwiftly towards Fernando 
 Poo, which, being ftretched a pretty way into the 
 Land is fitted to receive it ; and the Reafon why it 
 is not felt in other Places upon the Shore of A- 
 frica (as at Congo) is, becaufe the Rapidity of the 
 Rivers breaks and ob(lru6ls it. 
 
 2. THERE may be fome fubterraneous Re- 
 ceptacle in the Bay oi Fernando Poo, into which 
 the Sea perhaps may fall and draw the reft of the 
 Ocean. But this may feem lefs probable ; they 
 that have opportunity of obferving it better may 
 give better Rcafons. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIV. 
 
 \To point out the Place of the fecond perpetual Currentl» 
 
 THE Ocean moves fwiftly from about Stima^ 
 tra into the Bay of Bengal, from South to North ; 
 fo that it is probable this Bay was made by the 
 Rapidity of the Current ; by which alfo perhaps 
 the Peninfula of Malacca was feparated from India. 
 I do not know whether the Caufe may be owing to 
 the many Iflands, and to Cape Mabo, upon the 
 South Continent, whereby the Ocean in it's Paffige 
 weftward may be diverted northwards : or there 
 may be a fubterraneous Receptacle in the Bay it- 
 felf. 
 
 B E it how it will, I fuppofe the Current doth 
 not fet diredly to the North, but rather to the 
 North-Weft. This fame Current is felt between 
 Java and the South Continent, and therefore when 
 the IDutch fail to the Indies^ they iirft make to- 
 wards
 
 272 ^^^ Ahfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 wards the South Continent, and then dired their 
 Courfe from South to North to come at Java, 
 
 PROPOSITION XXV. 
 \T^o point out the Place of the third perpetual Cur rent"], 
 
 BETWEEN Madagajtar and the Cape of 
 Good-Hope, and more efpecially between Terra de 
 Natal and the Cape, there is a ftrong Current 
 which fets from North Eaft to Soutli-Wcft (the 
 fame way as the Shore runs) and is carried with 
 fuch a rapid and extraordinary Motion, that Ships, 
 with a brifl<: Wind, can hardly weather it, or fail 
 againft it, to Madagafcar -, on the contrary, they 
 that fiil out of the Chanel, between Madagafcar 
 and Africa, towards tlie Cape of Good-Hope, are 
 carried thither without the Help of the Winds, 
 purely by the Force of the Current. 1 fuppofc 
 this to be the Caufe, that the Indian Ocean, be- 
 ing forced towards the African Sliore, and there- 
 by diverted from it's direft Courfe, naturally flows 
 towards the Cape of Good-Hope ; where it finds a 
 Paflage. For in the main Ocean, remote from the 
 Shores, this Motion is not oblique but diredt, 
 from Eaft to Weft. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVI. 
 
 [To point out the Place of the fourth perpetual Current], 
 
 I N the Pacific Ocean, along the Shores of Peru^ 
 and the reft of America, the Sea flows from South 
 to North i which, no doubt, is owing to the con- 
 ftant South Winds which blow upon thefe Coafts ; 
 for neither thefe Winds, nor the Currents are ob- 
 ferved out at Sea. 
 
 PRO"
 
 Chap. 14. of XJniverJal Geography, 273 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVII. 
 
 [To oh fern) e the Place of the fifth perpetual Current']. 
 
 THIS is obferved to flow from Cape St Au- 
 guftin^ in BrafU, along the Coaft of America, a~ 
 moi g the Antilles in the Bay of Mexico, towards 
 Florida, which is from South to North. For the 
 Sea being driven by it's general Morion againft 
 the Shore of Brafil, is there repullcd, and car- 
 ried northward, where the Clianel is broader 
 and more open, which very ]ikely caufes this Cur- 
 rent. The like Motion northwards is found ai 
 the Mouth of the Streights of Manitha, one of 
 the Philippines, Likewife in Japan there is a very 
 fwift Current from the Port of Xibuxia towards 
 Arimia. •■■ • ,-•■ 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVIII. 
 
 \ToJhew the Place of the fixth perpetual Current], 
 
 THIS is in the Streights of La Maire, where 
 the Sailors in the Najfau Ship obferved the Current 
 to fet to the Eaft •, but this we cannot give fo much 
 Credit to, fince La Maire himfelf writes to the 
 contrary. 
 
 THERE are other Currents near the Shores 
 of feveral Countries, but not yet accurately enough 
 obferved or defer ibed. 
 
 VOL. L T PRO'
 
 274 The Ahjoliitc Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 P RO P S iriON XXIX. 
 
 'To thefc perpetual Currents ma-j he referred fuch as 
 are made bj large Rivers^ where the^j exonerate 
 themfeivei into the Sea. 
 
 AT the Shore of Loango, tt;n or twelve £)«/<:/& 
 Miles from Congo in Africa^ there is a ftrong Cur- 
 rent from the Land towards the Welt j becaufe 
 of the many vail Rivers, (of which the Zaire is 
 the greateft) which tall headlong into the Sea, 
 and repel the Water j being helped by the general 
 Motion. Therefore it requires fome Days before 
 Ships can come up to thefe Shores, tho* but a 
 Dutch Mile or two from them. 
 
 SO at the Ifland of Lamton., upon the Coaft of 
 China, the Sea moves from the Shore to the eaft- 
 ward, contrary to the general Motion, which is 
 from the Eall to China. This Current is caufed 
 by the ftrong Efflux of the great River Thoncoan 
 [or la] and is not obferved out at Sea any further 
 than the BaJJoee Iflands. 
 
 THUS far concerning the conftant Currents; 
 we fliall add fome what about thofe that are ftated 
 or anniverfary. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXX. 
 
 'There is a great variety of JJAfting Currents which do 
 not lafiy but return at certain Periods ; and thefe 
 do fnofi of thein depend upon, and follow, the an- 
 mverfarv PFtnds, or Monfoons, which by blowing 
 in one Place may caufe a Current in another, 
 
 A T Java, in the Streights of Sunda, when the 
 Monfoons blow from the Weft, viz. in the Month 
 
 of
 
 Chap. 14. of XJniverfal Geography. iy t 
 
 o^ May, the Currents fet to the ealtvvard, contrary 
 to the general Motion i^n). 
 
 ALSO between the Ifland of Celebes and Ma- 
 dura, when the weftern Monfoons fet, viz. in De- 
 cember, January, and February (or when the Winds 
 blow from the North- Weft or between the North 
 and Wellj, the Currents fee to the South- Haft, or 
 between the South and Eaft. 
 
 A T Ceylon from the middle of March to OSfober 
 the Currents fet to tne fomhward, and in the other 
 Part of the Year to the noithward j bccaufe at this 
 Time the fouthern Mo^ioons fet, and at the other 
 the northern. 
 
 BETWEEN Cochin- China and Malacca when 
 the weftern Monfoons blow, viz. from April to 
 Augujl, the Currents (c\l eaft ward, againft the ge- 
 neral Motion : but the reft of the Year fet weft- 
 ward ; the Monfoon confpiring with the general 
 Motion. They run fo ftrongly in thefe Seas, that 
 unexperienced Sailors here fuppofe the Weaves to 
 beat againft fome Rocks. 
 
 S O for fome Months after the fifteenth of Fe-- 
 hruary, the Currents fet from the Maldivies towards 
 India, on the Eaft, againft the general Motion of 
 the Sea. 
 
 O N the Shore of China and Cambodia, in the 
 Months of Ootobsr, Nove?nber, and December^ the 
 Currents fet to the North-Weft, and from January 
 to the South- Weft, when they run with fuch a 
 fwift Morion about the Shoals of Parcel, that it 
 feems fwifter than that of an Arrow. 
 
 (n) Thefe Currents conflant- Chap. xxi. below; from whence 
 
 ly follow the Winds and fet to may be formed a better Judg- 
 
 the fame point the Monfoon or mentof the Timeof the fetting 
 
 Trade Wmd does, out at Sea. of thefe Currents than froni 
 
 See an accurate Hi ftory of thefe what our Author delivers in 
 
 in Note (a) upon Prop. II. of this Propofition, 
 
 T 2 AT
 
 276 "The Abjoliite Fart S e c T. IV. 
 
 A T Piilo Condore upon the Coaft of [Cambodia] 
 tho' the Monfoons are fliifting, yet the Currents 
 let ftrongly towards the Eaft, even when they blow 
 to a contrary Point. 
 
 ALONG the Coafts of the Bay of Bengal^ as 
 far as the Cape [Ro?nama] at the extream Point ot 
 Malacca^ the Current runs fouthward in November 
 and December. 
 
 WHEN the Monfoons blow from China to 
 Malacca, the Sea runs fwittly from Pido Cajiibi to 
 Pulo Condore., on the Coaft of Cambodia. 
 
 THERE are feveral other Examples to be 
 found in Sailors Journals ; tho' lefs accurately 
 given. 
 
 I N the Bay of Sans Bras, not far from the Cape 
 of Good-Hope, there is a Current particularly re- 
 markable, by which the Sea always runs from Eaft 
 to Weft to the Landward •, and the more vehe- 
 mently the more the Winds oppofe it from the op- 
 pofite Point. The Caufe is no doubt owing to 
 tome adjacent Shore which is higher than this. 
 
 ' 'PROPOSITION XXXL 
 
 ^he Gyrations of the Sea, which we call Vortices, or 
 JVhirlpools, are of three Kinds, 
 
 SOME Whirlpools only turn the Water in a 
 Round -, others at Times abforb, and emit or vo- 
 mit it up ', and fome again fuck it in, but do not 
 eaft it out. And doubtlefs there is a fourth Kind 
 fomewhere in the Chanel of the Sea, which may 
 throw out Water but takes none in. I do not 
 remember any fuch to be recorded by Authors ; 
 only upon the dry Land there are feveral obfer- 
 ved. The Butch Mariners call thefe Whirlpools 
 Maelflroom. . . . 
 
 3 THERE 
 
 : r
 
 Chap. 14. of Unlverfal Geography. 277 
 
 THERE are but very few of thefe, at lead, 
 that have been taken Notice of. 
 
 B E T W E E N ISegropcnt and Greece there is a 
 flimous Whirlpool ; called the Euripus^ much talk- 
 ed of becaufe of the fabulous Story of Anjlotle^s 
 dying there (0). Scaliger endeavours to explain it 
 thus. It is not much amifs fliiys he.) to fuppofe 
 the Water, received into the Caverns, in the Cliffs 
 of the Rocks below, iffueth from thence ; for by 
 the continual running in of the Water the little 
 rocky Bays are filled, and being full, they emit 
 what they received, thro' winding and fubterraneous 
 PalTages ; whofe Capacity is fuch, that they pour 
 out the Water for lb many Hours, whereby the 
 Tides are now obftrufted or repelled, and a little 
 after forwarded or helped. But any one may per- 
 ceive the infufficiency of this Caufe. 
 
 THE Maeljlroom on the Coaft of Norway, is 
 the fwifteft and largeft known Vortex ; for it is fa id 
 to be thirteen Dutch Miles in Circuit; in the mid- 
 dle of which there is a Rock, which the People 
 thereabouts call the Moujke. This Whirlpool, for 
 fix Hours, fucks in whatever approaches it, or 
 comes nigh it ; not only Water, but Whales, load- 
 ed Ships, and other Things •, and in as many Hours 
 difgorges them all again, with a hideous Noife, 
 
 (0) There are on each fide the Euripus is regular, and ten 
 
 the Euripus fix or feven in which it is irregular, «-y/z. five 
 
 Gulphs, wherein the Water Days before and after the New 
 
 fliuts itfelf up to illue from and Full Moon, in which there 
 
 thence as often as it enters there; are nine or ten Changes of the 
 
 and the Situation of thefe Courfeof theWaterevery Day : 
 
 Gulphs perhaps contributes to and in each of thefe Changes the 
 
 this fudden Flux and Reflux, of Water flows about a Foot, and 
 
 which the Moon feems to be ebbs back again. The Phano- 
 
 the principal Caufe. menon is very wonderful, and 
 
 There are twenty Days of each it's Caufe dubious. See Philof. 
 
 Moon in which the Courfe of Trauf. N° 71. Pag. 215. 
 
 T 3 Violence,
 
 278 The Jbfolute Tart S e c T. I V . 
 
 Violence, and whirling round of the Water. The 
 Caule is latent. 
 
 B E 1' W E E N Nonnand) in France, and Eng- 
 land, there is a Whirlpit, towards which Ships are 
 drawn with an increaible Celerity ; but when they 
 come near the middle ot the Swallow, they are, 
 with the fame Force, thrown out again. 
 
 FRO PO SITIO N XXXII. 
 
 I'be concujfion or trembling of the Sea proceeds from a 
 certain Spirit^ ivhich agitates not only the Earth, 
 hut alfo the very plater, and caufes it to bubble. 
 
 IN the Bay oi' Bifcay, not far from Bayonne, there 
 is a Place, called by the Inhabitants Cape-Breton^ 
 where the Sea fometimes grows fo turgid, without 
 the lead Wind, that the adjoining Shore fetms to 
 be in danger of being overflowed ; and on a fud- 
 den grows calm again. There is the like raging 
 in a Lake in Scotland, called Loch Loumond, which 
 is alfo caufed by a fubtcrraneous Spirit. 
 
 THE Portugiiefe, about the Year 1523, obfer- 
 vcd a Percufllon of the Water in the Sea of Cam- 
 haya. In the greatefl Calm, when there was not 
 the lead Breath of Wind fas Maffeus relates) the 
 Waves on a fudden began to fwell up from the 
 Bottom •, and immediately the Ships feemed to nod 
 as it were to one another ; then tlieir Joints crack- 
 ed, and their Sides and Bottoms gave way. The 
 Sailors, being llruck with a fudden Fear, and 
 thinking the Fleet had run upon Quickfands, were 
 in the greateft Confufion : Some began to found 
 with the Lead, others to pump, but they that were 
 more wary bethought themfelves of efcaping, and 
 laid hold of Barrels to fwim upon : but it was af- 
 terwards found to be an Earthquake, which had 
 put them into that Conflernation at Sea, 
 
 PRO^
 
 C H A P. 14. of Univerjal Geography. 279 
 
 PROP O S iriO N XXXIII. 
 
 JVby the Pacific Sea is more Jlill mid cabn^ and with- 
 out high IVaves ; and ijohy it is eafily agitated by 
 the IVinds. 
 
 THECaufe, no doubt, is, that it's Motion to 
 the Weft, is not obftrufted by the Lee- Shores •, as 
 it is in the Atlantic. 
 
 T 4 
 
 CHAP.
 
 28o 
 
 I'he Ahfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Of Lakes, Ponds, and Morajfes or Bogs, 
 
 PR O PO S ITIO N I. 
 
 Definition. 
 
 AL A K E is a Collection of Waters contained 
 in fome Cavity in an inland Place, of a 
 large Extent, and every where furrounded with 
 Land, having no Communication vvirh the Ocean. 
 
 PONDS are little Lakes, which neither re- 
 ceive nor emit Rivers. Some Geographers, or 
 learned Men, may perhaps define them otherwife, 
 but it is no great Matter ; we fliall not ftand to 
 argue about Words : what we have done is to the 
 belt of our Judgment. 
 
 A Morals, or Bog, is an inland Handing Wa- 
 ter, having Earth raifed and appearing above it 
 here and there, or even Earth, or Mud, mixed 
 with it. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 Lakes are of four Kinds. 
 
 I. SOME neither receive nor fend forth Ri- 
 vers ; and if fuch are fmall, we call them Ponds ; 
 >)\it ^f large, and of a valj; Extent, they acquire 
 
 phe
 
 Chap. 15. of XJjiherfal Geography. 281 
 
 the Name of Lakes. 2. Some again emit Rivers, 
 but receive none. 3. Others receive Rivers, but 
 have no Evacuation. 4. Others again, both re- 
 ceive and emit Rivers : of thefe feme emit more 
 Water than they receive, fome lefs, and others an 
 Equality. Again fome fend out their Rivers al- 
 moft in a ftreight L.ine with thofe they receive, 
 others difcharge them other Ways, or towards 
 other Points. Likewife fome receive more Rivers 
 than they fend out, others not fo many, and fome 
 an equal Number. 
 
 PROPOSI'TION III. 
 
 J'o explain the Origin^ and Continuance^ of thofe 
 Lakes that neither receive nor emit Rivers. 
 
 S O M E of thefe are large, others of a moderate 
 bignefs, and fome but fmall. Of the two lall fome 
 are always full of Water ; others are dried up in 
 Summer, and when it is conllanily lair Weather -, 
 both thefe Sorts are called Ponds. As to thofe 
 that are dried up, it is eafy to fhew their Origi», 
 inz. abundance of Rain, which gathers and Itag- 
 nates in fome Cavity, or depreffed Place. For if 
 any Pit be fituated in the middle of a defcending 
 Ground, the Rain- Water every way drains thither, 
 and makes a Pond. 
 
 THERE are feveral fuch Ponds as thefe in 
 India^ made by the Induftry of the Natives, of 
 which fome are a Mile, and fome two in Circuit •, 
 they are furrounded with a ftone-Wall. and are 
 filled in the rainy Months, to fupply the Inhabi- 
 tants, in the dry Seafons, who live a great Way 
 from Springs or Rivers. 
 
 I N like manner Pools or Ponds are made by the 
 Inundation of the Sea, or the Overflowing of the 
 Rivers. 
 
 TPIUS
 
 282 ^je Abfolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 1' H U S the Nile and the Niger ^ the one water- 
 ing Nrgroland, the other Egypt, when they over- 
 flow their Banks and are decreafed, they leave their 
 Water in leveral Ponds ; which the Inhabitants 
 fence and fortify to preferve the Water *till fuch 
 times as they have occafion for it. By this means 
 in Mufcovy, Finland^ and Laplandy in the Spring, 
 Summer, and Autumn, they have many Jit[le 
 jLakes, which are generated partly by the Rains, 
 and partly by the melting of the Ice and Snow. 
 
 BUT tho' fome of thefe Ponds may happen to be 
 dried up in Summer, or when it hath not rained for 
 a long Time ; yet we are not thence to conclude, 
 that they are wholly fupplied with Rain-Water •, 
 for they may be dried up, tho' there are Sources, 
 or Springs, in the Bottom, which perhaps, are fo 
 little that the Heat of the Sun, in Summer, dif- 
 fipates the Water, and turns it into Vapour. 
 
 AS to thofe that admit no Rivers, and yet are 
 not dried up, they may wholly proceed from Rain 
 if their Chanels are deep and capacious, and in 
 which fo much Rain-Water may be contained, 
 that the Heat of the Sun cannot confume the whole 
 before more Rain fall to replenifh them ; tho* it 
 is very likely, that many of thefe are fupplied 
 by Sources under Ground, which continually e- 
 mit as much Water as is exhaled ; efpecially thofe 
 Takes that are found upon the Summits of Moun- 
 tains, 3.S u\')on Bru Merits, Cenis, Sec. Some of them 
 have perhaps been left, at firft, by an Inunda- 
 tion, and are continually fupplied and kept up 
 by Rain-Water : And we need not doubt but 
 that thofe Salt- Water Takes, or Ponds, that are 
 lound near the Sea, were made at firfl by the In- 
 undation, or ImmilTion, of the Sea- Water, fome 
 way or other ; as the Take of Harlej?i, and others 
 in Holland. There are alfo feveral fait Takes in 
 Peru. 
 
 THERE
 
 C H A p. 1 5- rf Unhef'fil Geography. 283 
 THERE is but a fmall luimbcr ot thefc Lakes 
 to be iound. Some little ones are obferved in 
 Mufcovy and Finland^ the Lake Locafda m yEpirus^'] 
 the Lake Bufaranda, in /Imajia-, one in Larnwlay 
 called the Ztrchnitzer Sea •, a round one in China ; 
 another called Hila in Ccchin-China ; one in 'Zan- 
 haga in Africa ; two in Mexico^ in America^ the one 
 of them leven Leagues long, and the pther near as 
 big. All thefe are but Imall ones, except that in 
 China, which is of a moderate Bignefs, 
 
 BUT the only one great Lake in the whole 
 Earth of this fort is the Lake Parime in America, 
 lying diredly under the Equator. It is in length 
 from Eaft to Weft, about three hundred and jpve 
 German Miles, and, in the broadeft Place, one 
 hundred Miles over, or thereabouts •, fo that it 
 may be compared with, ii it do not exceed, any 
 Lake in the World for magnitude ; yet it neither 
 receives, nor emits any Rivers. It may reafonably 
 be doubted how this Lake was produced, whether 
 by fome former Inundation of the Ocean, or by 
 fubterraneous Springs and Sources ? And whether 
 it is fed and kept up by Rain-Water, or the like ? 
 It feems probable that there are Springs in the 
 Bottom which fupply it with as much Water as 
 is daily evaporated by the Heat of the Sun. For 
 Lakes feem to have the fame Origin as Rivers, 
 only they differ in the Situation of their Springs, 
 and the quantity of their fpringing Water. Eor 
 if a Spring be furrounded with rifing Ground, and 
 run into a deep and broad Chanel, and alfo fend 
 forth but a fmall quantity of Water, it doth not 
 run, but is evaporated as faft as it fprings. There 
 is no Difference therefore, in the main, between 
 Springs, Lakes, and Rivers, only in fome Circum- 
 Itances \ and there are found feveral Springs which 
 do not emit Water ; but fuch are more properly 
 called Wells. 
 
 PRO-
 
 284 1'he Abfolute Fart S e c t. I V. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 'To explain the Origin and Supply of fiich Lakes as 
 emit Rivers but receive none. 
 
 THERE is an infinite Number of thefe Lakes, 
 and very many Rivers flow from luch, as out of 
 Citterns •, efpecially thofe that have their Rife in 
 Miifiovv, Finland^ Lapland, i^c. where their Springs 
 being fituatecl low in the middle of a hollow Place, 
 lirft fill the Cavity and make it a Lake, which be- 
 ing liOt capacious enough to hold all the Water, 
 it overflows the adjacent Places and forms a River. 
 And we need not doubt but fuch Lakes have their 
 Rife and Maintenance from Springs at the Bottom, 
 whether they be real Fountains, or apparent ones, 
 viz. Water brought thither by fubterraneous Paf- 
 iligcs from fome other Places •, which laft is more 
 likely in fome Lakes that immediately produce vafl: 
 Rivers. 
 
 O F fuch fmall Lakes as thefe there arc, as I 
 fiiid before, a great Number •, as the JVolga at the 
 Head of the River IVolga •■, the Lake Odium, at the 
 Head of the Tanais ; the Jdac, from whence one 
 of the Branches of the River Tigris flows •, the Ozera 
 [or fFbite Lake] in Mufcovy, that gives Source to 
 the River Shackfna^ which is poured into the IVolga, 
 and many more little ones-, we fhall here only 
 reckon fome of the larger fort that are more re- 
 markable. 
 
 I. THE gre^xt L.3.ke. Chaamay in the Latitude 
 of thu'ty one Degrees North, not far from India, 
 ro the eaftward of the River Ganges. Out of this 
 Lake flow four very large Rivers, which water and 
 fertilize the Countries of Sia7n, Pegu, &c. viz. the 
 Menan, the Jfa, the Caipoumo, and the Laquia. 
 
 Some
 
 Chap. 15- of U?tiverjal Geography. 285 
 
 Some Mips exhibit a imall River that runs into 
 this Lake. 
 
 2. THE Lake [Singhay'] upon the Eaft Border 
 ofChi/7a, fends out a great River [Ibuthward,] which 
 being joined to another enters China. 
 
 3. THE Lake Tiiicaca, in [Los Charcas] a Pro- 
 vince in South America., is eighty Leagues in Cir- 
 cuit, and emits a large River, which is terminated 
 ini another Imall Lake, and is no more feen. There 
 are feveral Towns and Villages difcovered about 
 this Lake, 
 
 4. T H E Lake Nicaragua., in a Province of 
 the fame Name, in America., is only four German 
 Miles from the Pacific, or South, Sea, and above 
 one hundred from the Atlantic, into which it is 
 difcharged at broad Flood- Gates. 
 
 5. T H E Lake Frontena., in Canada., out of 
 which ifilies the River of St Lawrence. 
 
 6. T H E Lake Annibi, in Afia, in the Latitude 
 of fixty one Degrees. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 I'd explain the Rife and Maintenance of thofe Lakes 
 which receive Rivers, hut emit none 
 
 IT is manifeft that thefe Lakes were at firft 
 formed, and are dill fupplied and fed by the Rivers 
 which they receive, or which difburden themfelves 
 into them. For when Rivers in their Courfe meet 
 with a broad Plat of low Ground, they are there 
 coUeded, and form a Lake -, which (if the Soil be 
 light, and porous to tranfmit the Water to the ad- 
 jacent Fields, or if there be a fubterraneous Re- 
 ceptacle, or, which is mofb likely, if the Water 
 work it's way under Ground) never overflows but 
 lofes, infenfibly, one way or another, as much 
 Water as it receives. 
 
 X'il ERE
 
 286 l^je Ahfihite Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 T HERE are not many of thefe Lakes taken 
 Notice of. 
 
 1. IN the foregoing Propofition we obferved 
 that the Lake \Tiiicaca\ difcharges a River into a 
 fmaller called Paria, which therefore may be re- 
 ferred to this Clafs, viz. to fuch as receive Rivers 
 but emit none. 
 
 2. THE Lake Jfpballiies, which is alfo called 
 the Dead Sea, receives the River Jordan, but e- 
 mits none. It's length, from North to South, is 
 feventy German Miles, and it's breadth five, as 
 fome make it. 
 
 3. T H E R E is one in the lefTer J/ia. 
 
 4. THERE is a fmall one in Alacedonia, cal- 
 led Janna, which receives two little Rivers. 
 
 5. THE Lake of Geneva. 
 
 6. ONE in Perfia near Calgtjlan. 
 
 7. THE Lake Soran, in Mufcovy, receives 
 two fmall Rivers. 
 
 8. THE River G^ir, in Africa, is reported, 
 by Leo Africanus, to lofe itfelf in a Lake, and 
 fome Maps fo reprefent it \ but others join it to 
 Nubia. 
 
 PROPOSITION VL 
 
 To explain the Origin of thofe Lakes that both receive 
 and emit Rivers. 
 
 THEY are of three kinds, as was faid be- 
 fore in Propofition 2, and either emit more Water 
 than they receive, or an equal quantity, or lefs. 
 If they emit more, it is evident they have fome 
 hidden Springs in the Bottom : If Itifs, the Earth 
 is either fpongy, or there are fubterraneous Aque- 
 ducts, whereby the Water is conveyed under 
 Ground: If an equal quantity, it is a Sign that 
 there are neither Springs nor Swallows at the Bjt- 
 ....»* torn.
 
 Chap. 15. of Univerfal Geography. 287 
 
 torn. Their Origins therefore arc partly explained 
 in Propolition 4, that is, are owing to a low Ground 
 where there happens to be Springs, and into which 
 Plenty of Rain- Water is drained. 
 
 SUCH as are generated by the Influx of one 
 River, and afford a Faffage lor it in at one Side, 
 and out at another, are found in many Places. 
 Thus the Niger makes three Lakes in it's Courle, 
 and runs upon the Side ot another. The Nile makes 
 feveral more Lakes than are Ihewed in our com- 
 mon Maps. The River Duina at leads runs thro' 
 fix, or feven. Lakes. And there are fome Rivers 
 in Mufcovy and Finland^ that make, as may be 
 feen in our large Maps, at leaft fixteen Lakes be- 
 fore they exonerate themfelves into the Sea. We 
 fhall only here enumerate fuch as produce other 
 Rivers than thofe they receive. 
 
 I. THE Zaire^ a Lake, or Morafs, in the 
 Foreland of Africa^ lies between the fecond and 
 ninth Degree of South Latitude, and therefore 
 is about one hundred and five German Miles long. 
 In the middle of it there is an Ifland ('befides feve- 
 ral fmall ones) fo large and populous, that the 
 Inhabitants can raife an Army of Thirty thoufand 
 Men. This Ifland almofl divides the Lake into 
 two Parts, which have each a peculiar Name; 
 that to the fouthward is called Zamhre. Out of 
 this Lake flow three large Rivers, the Nile^ [or 
 rather the Zeehe'\ the Coanza^ and the Zaire (a). 
 There are fome fmall Rivers that run into it ; 
 
 {a) ' Our Author, according ' Defcription may be more a- 
 
 * to the Opinion of the Geo- * grecable to the modern Dii- 
 
 * graphers of hisTime,maketh ' covcr'ics of the Portugu/ife ye- 
 - the Nik to flow out of this ' /m'ts. A more jufl: and mo- 
 
 * Lake ; but here {avd in other ' dern account of the Rile and 
 
 * Placei) we have taken the Li- ' Courfe of the Nile is given in 
 ^ berty to alter the Text (tho' ' the Note [g) upon Prop. 20. 
 
 * as little as pofTible) that the * Chap. xvi. 
 
 but
 
 2 88 The Abfolute Fart S e c T . I V. 
 
 but thefe do not feem able to fupply even the Lake 
 kU U wi[h Water, and therefore doubtlels there are 
 Springs at the Bottom •, tho' the Inundation of the 
 Rivers is owing to the great quantities of Rain that 
 iall in the wet Seafons. 
 
 2. THE Lake Zajian^ not far from Zaire ^ lies 
 between the third and ninth Degree of South 
 Latitude •, and theretore is about ninety German 
 Miles in length. It receives and emits fome fmall 
 Rivers. 
 
 3 . T H E Lake Zachaf^ not far from Zaire^ to- 
 wards the Cape of Good- Hope ^ emits a River, 
 which being joined to others, is called St Efprit, 
 or Delagoa. 
 
 4. THE Lake ^quilunda receives a Branch of 
 the Zaire^ and pours many Rivers into the King- 
 dom of Congo. 
 
 5. THE Lake Onega., in Finland., lies between 
 fixty two and fixty four Degrees of Latitude, and 
 is about twenty live German Miles long, but fcarce 
 half fo broad. It receives feveral conliderable Ri- 
 vers from other fmall Lakes, and difcharges one, 
 called the Sueri., into the Lake Ladoga. 
 
 6. THE Lake Ladoga is about thirty German 
 Miles long, and fifteen broad ; it receives the River 
 Sueri., out of the Lake Oz/t'^^^, and other lefler ones 
 from other Places •, alfo a confiderable one from the 
 famous Lake Ihnen in Mufcovy. It difcharges one 
 River into the Gulph of Finland. 
 
 7. [THE White LakeJ or Ozero., receives fome 
 fmall Rivers, and difcharges the River Shackfna 
 which falls into the IVolga. 
 
 8. T HE Lake or Morafs called [Enare Trejk'] 
 in Lapland, is about forty German Miles long, and 
 fifteen broad. It receives the River Avila^ and 
 fends one called [Paefreka'] into the Sea o{ Lapland. 
 
 9. T H E Lake Ula in [Finland] is thirty Ger^ 
 man Miles long, and half as broad. It hath an 
 
 Ifland
 
 Chap. 15. of Univerfal Geography. 289 
 
 Ifland in the middle like the 7.aire^ and receives 
 a River which pafftth thro* fcveral Lakes, and 
 dilcharges a large one into the Bolhmc Bay. Inhere 
 are feveral other l^akes in Mufcov^^ Finlajid^ and 
 Norway. 
 
 10. 1 N China there arc four remarkable Lakes 
 that receive Rivers, and difchargc others, various 
 Ways. 
 
 11. IN Brafd there is a great Lake, with ma- 
 ny Iflands in it, called Xarryes^ which difcharges 
 the Rio de la Plata, and the River Miary. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIL 
 
 Moji Lakes are filled with freJJj Waaler, only a few 
 have fait or Sea-fFater in them. 
 
 THOSE that are produced by Rain or Rivers, 
 or fuch as are remote from the Sea, and are ted by 
 their own proper Springs, for the molt part con- 
 tain fweec Water : but fuch as were formed by 
 the Inundation of the Sea, or are fupplied with 
 Sea- Water, by fome fubterraneous Meatus, or have 
 fait Springs at the Bottom, produce fait Water. 
 Thus the Lake of Harlem^ and others in Holland, 
 are fait ; and tafte like Sea- Water. There is a fait 
 Lake alfo in Madagafcar^ and another in l^eru ; 
 there is one in Cuba, about two Leagues in Cir- 
 cuit, firuated not far from the Sea, which tho' 
 it receives fome frefh Water Rivers, and breeds 
 Fiih and Tortoifes, yet is fait. The Lake tfpbal- 
 titcs, tho' it fwallows the fweet Water of the Ri- 
 ver Jordan, yet is not fweet itklf, but exiiales fjcli 
 a poifonous and (linking Vapour that che Fields 
 thereabouts, for half a Mile round, are rendered 
 barren. 
 
 V O L. I. U PRO^
 
 290 I'he Ahjohitc Fart S e c T. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 'J(j determine whether the Cafpian Sea he a Lake or 
 a Bay of the Ocean. 
 
 . S O M E will have it to be properly called a Sea ; 
 as a Sea, properly fpcaking, is an extended Part of 
 the Ocean, or is joined to it by a continued Tradt 
 of Waters. But tiiey will have it to be joined to 
 the Ocean by fome fubterraneous Intercourie. Some 
 indeed of the Antients wrote, that it was joined 
 by an open Streight, to the Indian Ocean •, others, 
 to the northern Ocean ; but both were deceived, 
 as we are well aflured by Experience. Whether 
 there be fubterraneous Intercourfes we do not 
 know -, only there fecm to be fuch, becaufe fo many 
 and fo large Rivers exonerate themfelves into it, 
 and are conftantly pouring in their Waters, where- 
 by, in procefs of Time, the Chanel would be fil- 
 led and run over, unlefs there were fubterraneous 
 FilTures and Meatus's, thro' which it might eva- 
 cuate it's fuperfluous Waters into the Ocean {b). But 
 others think thefe Waters are diftributed among 
 the adjacent Mountains, and fupply them with 
 that vaft number of Springs which isobferved here- 
 abouts. Scaliger and others were of Opinion, that 
 this Cafpian Sea runs under Ground into the Euxine 
 Sea, but he gives no Reafon for it ; this may be 
 fald, that the Euxine S£3. is continually difgorging 
 a large quantity of Water thro* the Bofphorus, 
 and fome think this is more Water than the Rivers 
 pour into it ; therefore it may perhaps receive it 
 
 (b) By what means the Caf- flowing into it ; is difcufled 
 
 plan Sea (and all others) lofe in the Note (k) upon Prop. xiv. 
 
 as much Water daily, as they Chap. xiii. n-KiJ/tih fee. 
 receive from the many Rivers 
 
 from
 
 C H A p. 1 5- of Univerfal Geography. 2 9 1 
 
 from the Cafpian Sea. It feems to me to have no 
 Communication any way with the Ocean, and 
 therefore ought rather to be called a Lake, than a 
 Sea. How it came at firft is another Queftion. 
 Some avouch that there are found feveral Moun- 
 tains of Salt in the Bottom, whereby it hath ac- 
 quired fuch a Degree of Saknefs j and that it is re- 
 plenilhed by the many Rivers that exonerate them- 
 felves into it. But it feems more teafible, (i;-vV 
 thefe Rivers may contribute to it's Repletion) that 
 this Sea hath, a great many Ages ago, been joined 
 to the Ocean, and that it's Streights, by fome 
 means or other, were filled up and flopped, per- 
 haps by interjacent Iflands which gained upon the 
 Shores, in a manner which we (hall explain here- 
 after. And very likely, by the fame Caufe, the 
 Euxine Sea may, fome time or other, become a 
 Lake ; the Bofphorus being filled up or obftruded. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. = 
 
 To make a Lake in any Place., if it be pojfible, 
 
 THIS may be done if there be a River near, 
 or a Spring upon the Place, and if the Place itfelf 
 be depreffed j tho' fmall Lal<:es may be made upon 
 the very tops of the Mountains. Firft the Place 
 is to be hollowed, and dug to fuch a Depth and 
 Extent as we defire, and the Sides are to be fo;:i- 
 fy'd with Wood- Work, if we fee occafion. Then 
 a Chanel is to be made, by which the River is to 
 be let in ; but if there be a Spring upon the fpot, 
 there is no occafion for fuch a Chanel, 
 
 U 2 F RO.
 
 292 "the Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 'To drain a Lake. 
 
 THIS may be done two Ways ; i . If the bot- 
 tom of the Lake be a little higher, or almoit of the 
 fame Altitude with the adjacent Places, dig a Cha- 
 nel, and let out the Water ; and by throwing in 
 Heaps of Earth, together with the Heat of the 
 Sun, it will in a fhort time be left dry. 
 
 2. IF the bottom of the Lake be lower than the 
 adjacent Ground, it is to be firft furrounded with 
 a Ditch, leaving here and there fome Canals, or 
 Apertures, in it •, to thefe apply Water- Engines 
 and work out the Water ; then cover the Ground 
 with Dung, and fow in it fuch Seeds as are of a 
 quick Growth, viz. Muftard-feed, Coleworts, and 
 the like. The Dutch are very expert at draining 
 Lakes by this Method -, and often convert them into 
 fruitful Meadow- Ground. At this time they are 
 confulting how to drain the Lake of Harlem^ and I 
 do not doubt but it will be, fome time or other, at- 
 tempted 5 becaule this Lake covers much Ground 
 which by draining would be of great life to the In- 
 habitants. 
 
 PROPOSITION XL 
 
 Morajfes, or Leaches, are of two forts ; fome are 
 oozy and confifi of Earth and Water mixed together^ 
 
 ,.. fo as not to bear the Footjteps of Men : others are 
 Ponds, or fcanty Colle5Iions of Water, intcrfperfed 
 here and there ivitb f?nall Spots of Land. 
 
 THOSE of the former kind neither receive 
 
 nor emit Rivers, we call them Sloughs or Bogs ; 
 
 there are many in Holland. In Brabant there is a 
 
 3 iarge
 
 Chap. 15. of XJnivei-fal Geography. 29:5 
 
 large one called Peel-marjh. There are alfo feveral 
 in r/ejlphalia of both Sorts. Thole of the later 
 kind are chiefly found at the Heads of Rivers, 
 whence fome call thcfe H^ads Morajfes ; as the 
 MorafTes of Tatiais in Mufcov^^ and of the Nile. 
 There are feveral of thefe in the Province oi' Savo- 
 lax in Finland^ which cover vail Trads oi^ Ground ; 
 alfo thofe [called Enare-Trejk] in Lapland ; ihe 
 Marfhes of Chelours in ylfrka^ the Morafles thro* 
 which the Euphratei runs in Chaldcsa^ i^c. fuch as 
 thefe are alfo found in Woods and heathy Defarts, 
 and are made by the Rain-water gathered into hol- 
 low Places, whereby the Earth is foaked and moi- 
 ftened, and the Rays of the Sun are hindered fioni 
 drying it up, by the Leaves of the Trees and the 
 Heath. Thefe are found chiefly in Germany and 
 Mufcovy. 
 
 TPIE narrovver fmall Lakes, like the larger Sort, 
 do fome of them both receive and emit Rivers ; 
 fome only receive, others only emit, and the red 
 neither receive nor emit any. 
 
 THE firft Ibrt are formed and fed, partly by 
 Springs under Ground, and partly by Rain water 
 which ftagnates for want of a Chanel to carry it otW 
 Of this fort there are many in Mufcovy and Finland. 
 The fecond fort are generated from fmall Springs, 
 and are fed by them and Rain-water. 
 
 ARISTOTLE calls the Sea of Mcvotis a 
 Lake, which is truly fo. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIL 
 
 Bogs contain a fulphureouSy bituminous y and fat ^ Earib. 
 
 THIS is apparent from the black Colour of the 
 
 Turf that is got out of them, which eafily takes 
 
 fire, (as in Holland and other Places) by reafon 
 
 this fort of Matter is contained both in the Rain 
 
 U 3 and.
 
 294 ^^^^ Abfolute Part S e c T . I V . 
 
 and in the Ground, where thefe Lakes are fitu- 
 ated. But all Bogs have not that fort of Earth: 
 and where the Ground is hard and rocky we lel- 
 dom find any Lakes ; and therefore molt part of 
 them contain a foft fpongy and fulphureous fort of 
 Earth. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIIL 
 
 'To drain, or dry itp, a Beg. 
 
 THO' fome Bogs are of a great Depth, yet 
 no more is required than to drain them to a certain 
 level, which may be done feveral ways; i. By 
 making a Chanel to carry off the Water. 2. By 
 throwing in plenty of dry Earth, when they are al- 
 moft dried up by the Heat of the Sun. 3. By fet- 
 ting their Surfaces on Fire, 4. By turning the 
 "Water that feeds them, another way. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 Chap. 1 6. of TJmverJal Geography. 293; 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 Of RIVERS in general 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 This PropofitioJt contains fotne necejjar^ 'Dejinitions. 
 
 I, A RIVER is a Flux of Water continued 
 x\_ thro* a long narrow Chanel, from one part 
 of the Earth to another. The Chanel is a Cavity, 
 or hollow Place, made lower than the Banks, for 
 the Water to run in. 
 
 2. A Brook is a little River, which is neither 
 broad nor deep enough to carry a fmall Ship of 
 Burden. A Navigable River is capable of carrying 
 all forts of Ships, great and fmall ; but thefe and 
 the other fort are generally called great and fmall 
 Rivers, according as they are in bignefs. A Tor- 
 rent is a violent Flux of Water trom the top of a 
 Mountain. 
 
 3. A Confluence, Concurrence^ or Conflux, is a 
 Place where two Rivers meet. 
 
 4. B RANCHES of Rivers are the Brooks 
 that run into them, and mix with them -, or when 
 a River is divided and runs in two Chanels, they 
 are called it's Arms or Branches. Where the River 
 is thus divided, it is called the Place of Parting or 
 Divarication,
 
 296 ^he Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 5. A Spring is the Place where running Water 
 fprings out of the Ground. A IVdl is where the 
 "Water rifcs and runs not forward, but is kept upon 
 the Spot. / 
 
 P RO P S II'IO N II. 
 
 Torrents and Brooks are fometimes generated from 
 Plenty of Rain and melted Snow. 
 
 I N the elevated or mountainous Parts of the 
 Earth, there, are lound many Receptacles, fmall 
 Lakes, and Pond^s. And when the Rain is poured 
 into thcfe, or the ir.elted Snow, in fuch Quantity, 
 that they are not large enough to contain it, they 
 overflow and difcharge the luperPiuous Water into 
 the under-land Places. This being done every 
 Year, the Water in time makes icfelf a Chanel 
 (tho' it fometimes flows without any certain Cha- 
 nel). Thus a great many Torrents and Brooks, 
 being fed only by Rain, or Snow melted from off 
 the Mountains, before they have run their Courfe, 
 become moderate Rivers ; efpecially if they pro- 
 ceed from a long Range of Mountains ; as thofe in 
 the Foreland of /Ifrica^ India^ Peru, Sumatra, i^c. 
 And what is remarkable, fuch Torrents flow in the 
 Day-time only. 
 
 PR PO S iriON III. 
 
 Mojl Rivers have their Rife from Springs. 
 
 THE great as well as the middle fized Rivers, 
 proceed either from a Confluence or Collection of 
 Brooks and Rivulets, or flow from Lakes and Mo- 
 raflTcs. But no River of confiderable Magnitude 
 (fuch as the Elbe, tht Rhine, &c.) flows from one 
 Spring or one Lake, but is augmented by the ac- 
 
 cefllon
 
 Chap. i6. of Unherfal Geography, 297 
 
 ceffion of others, flowing from other Fountains and 
 Lakes. The IVolga or Rha receives above two 
 hundred Rivers and Brooks, before it exonerates 
 itfelf into the Cajpian Sea •, and the Danube receives 
 no lefs, before it enters the Euxine Sea. 
 
 AND tho' Plin'^ and Cardan tell us, that no 
 Rivers flow into the Kile^ yet Experience fhews 
 the contrary -, as they that have travelled into 
 Ah)ffinia allure us. 
 
 THIS Propofition may be proved by innume- 
 rable Examples. 
 
 THE Springs of Rivers are fome of them found 
 on the tops of Mountains, and fome on the Planes *, 
 and thofe Rivers that proceed from Lakes, have 
 their Fountains (as was faid in the laft Chapterj at 
 the bottom, or in the Chanel, of tiiofe Lakes that 
 produce them, which like Ciilerns contain the effu- 
 fion of Water, 'till in a greater Quantity it be 
 poured into it*s proper Chanel. Hence fome F'oun- 
 tains are covered with Earth or Water, and others 
 lire open. 
 
 THE Springs of the Rivulets which begin the 
 Tan'ias and the Elhe^ are on Planes, to which others 
 are afterwards joined. We might here add feveral 
 Examples, but thefe are fufficient. 
 
 C ARDAN is of Opinion, that thefe Fountains 
 do not flow immediately from the Plane itfelf, but 
 are conveyed by fubterraneous Aquedu6ls from the 
 adjacent Mountains ; however, 1 believe they tirlt 
 make a Lake or a Morafs -, for the Tanais docs not 
 feem to flow immediately from a Spring, but from 
 a Morafs or fhallow Lake. 
 
 THE Springs of moft Rivers are upon Moun- 
 tains, as thofe of the Rbine^ the Po, the Danube^ 
 the Niger, ^c. 
 
 SEVERAL flow from Lakes, as the Nile^ 
 the IVolga, and the great River of Si Lawrence in 
 Canada. 
 
 A great
 
 298 "The Ahfihte Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 A great R.iver may happen to flow from one 
 Spring, if the Spring icfelf be fuuated high (as moft 
 arej and a great part of the Chanel low, or but a 
 little higher than it's mouth •, fo that the Water 
 flowing with a fwifc Courfe at firft, and by degrees 
 flower, is increafed in the Chanel and becomes a 
 large River, becaufe it difcharges not fo much Wa- 
 ter at it's mouth, as it received from it's Spring 
 when it iirfl began to flow. 
 
 p Ropos irio N IV. 
 
 Rivers are fnuch augmented by frequent Rains or incited 
 Snow, and at particular Times oj the Tear. 
 
 I N the Country of Peru and Chili there are forrtft 
 Rivers fo fmall, that they do not flow in the Night- 
 time, but only in the Day ; becaufe they are fed 
 by the Snow upon the Mountains of the Andes, 
 which is then melted by the Heat of the Sun. 
 There are alfo feveral Rivers upon both fides of 
 the extream Parts of Africa, as in Congo, Angola, 
 &c. which are greater by Day than by Night. The 
 like are found both in Malabar and Cormandel in 
 India. The Rivers alfo in thefe Places are almoft 
 dried up in Summer, but fwell and overflow their 
 Banks in Winter, or the wet Seafons. Thus the 
 IVolga in M^v and June is filled with Water, and o- 
 verflows it's Shelves and Iflands ; which at any other 
 time of the Year is fo fliallow, that it fcarcely af- 
 fords a Paflage for loaded Ships. For the Snows 
 being melted at this time of the Year, on the 
 Mountains, from whence the Rivulets (being more 
 than an hundred^ flow into the Wolyi, caufe this 
 Inundation. The Kile, the Ganges, the Indus, (s^c. 
 are fo much fwelled with Rain, or melted Snow, 
 that, In like manner, they overflow their Banks. 
 But thefe Deluges happen at divers times of the 
 
 Year,
 
 Chap, i 6. of Unherfal Geography. 299 
 
 Year, becaufe they proceed from various Caulls 
 and difFerenc Places. Thole that are Iwclled with 
 Rains, are higheft in Winter •, becaufe thefe arc 
 tiien more frequent than at other tinnes of the Year ; 
 but if they proceed from Snow, which in fome 
 Places is melted in the Spring, in others in Sum- 
 mer, or between both i the Deluges of the Rivers 
 happen accordingly, viz. in the Spring, Summer, 
 £f?f. or at any time when the Snow is melted upon 
 the Banks of the Rivulets that form thefe Rivers. 
 Moreover fome Rivers, efpecially the large ones, 
 flow from Places at a great Dillance, where it is 
 Summer at the fame time it is Winter in the Places 
 where they pafs through •, and for this Caufe they 
 overflow their Banks at different times of the 
 Year. But moft of them caufe an Inundation in 
 the Spring, becaufe the Snow is then melted in 
 mofl: Places. We fliall explain the Caufe of their 
 different Properties in the particular Defcription of 
 each River. 
 
 W E (hall alfo in the next Chapter treat of that 
 remarkable Spring in Ja^an, which only flows for 
 two Hours every Day. 
 
 PRO PO S iriON V. 
 
 To explain the Origin of Springs (a), 
 
 THIS is eafier to conceive than when It is 
 propofed thus ; From "johcnce are Rivers generated ? 
 
 For 
 
 (a) Since by Dr Halhys Cal- be no hard matter, feeing thert 
 
 culation it appears, that the Va- is fuch an overplus of Water, to 
 
 pours which are drawn up from find enough from thence to fup- 
 
 the Sea exceed almoft three ply Fountains, according to the 
 
 times the Quantity of Water dif- Opinion of the fame learned 
 
 charged into it by Rivers, \ai Gentleman. 
 <was Jhenjjti in the Note ( k) upon For thefe Vapours being car- 
 
 Proj>. xiw C/;ap^. xnl] it will riedevery wayby the Wind, ne- 
 
 ceflarih
 
 500 HjeAhfolufe Part Sect. IV. 
 
 For when we fee fuch great Rivers as the Rhine, the 
 hlbey 6c£. we more admire whence they proceed 
 
 • • '. , becaufe 
 
 cefTarily meet with the high 
 Ridges of Mountains that are dif- 
 perfed over various Trads of the 
 Earth: each of which far fur- 
 paffes tJieufual Height to which 
 the Aqueous Vapours of them- 
 telves afcend, and on the Tops 
 of which the Air is fo cold, and 
 rariiifd, as to retain but a fmall 
 part of thofe Vapours that fhall 
 be brought thither by tlieWinds. 
 The \'apours meeting with thele 
 Ridges of Mountains are there 
 compelled by the Stream of the 
 Air to mount up with it to their 
 Tops, where meeting with more 
 rarified Air, they naturally fall 
 down in Drops, pervading the 
 Crannies and Fifiures of the 
 Karth, and glecting into the Ca- 
 verns of the Hills, the Water 
 thereof gathers into the Bafons 
 of .Stone,orClav, it finds, which 
 being once filled, all the over- 
 plus of Water runs over, and, 
 where it can find a Pafiage, 
 breaks out at the Sides of the 
 Hills, and forms Fountains ; 
 many of thefe, running down 
 the Vallies, or Guts, between 
 the Ridges of the Flills, and 
 coming to unite, from Rivulets 
 or Brooks ; niany of thefe again 
 being united into one common 
 Chanel, form vafl: large Rivers, 
 as the Rhine, or the Danube. 
 
 This Theory of the Caufe of 
 Springs the fame excellent Per- 
 ion proves by Experience. For 
 he fays, that when he was in 
 the Ifland of 5/ Helena, taking 
 Aftronomical Obfervations in 
 the Night-Time, on the Top of 
 
 the Hillsabout 800 Yards above 
 the Sea, he found fuch a Con- 
 denfation of the Vapours, that 
 in 7 or 8 Min. Time, tho' there 
 was a clear Sky, the Glafles of 
 the Telefcopes he ufed were co- 
 vered with little Drops, and the 
 Paper on which he wrote his 
 Obfervations would immedi- 
 ately be fo wet with the Dew 
 that it would not bear Ink. 
 
 This Hypothefis he thinks 
 more reafonable than that of 
 thofe who derive all Springs 
 from the Rain-Waters, which. 
 yet are perpe'^ual and without 
 Diminution, even when no 
 Rain falls for a long Space of 
 Time : Or than that which de- 
 rives them from a Filtration or 
 Percolation of the Sea Waters, 
 thro' certain imaginary Tubes 
 or Pafiiiges within the Earth, 
 wherein they lofe their Saltnefs. 
 This Opinion labours under this 
 principal Abfurdity, that the 
 greatelt Rivers have their moll 
 copious Fountains farthell from 
 the Sea, and where fo great 
 quantities of freili Water cannot 
 reafonably be derived any other 
 way than in \ apour. See Philof. 
 Tranj: N^ 192. Pag. 468. 
 
 Notwithltanding it is very 
 probable that all Fountains have 
 not the fame Origin ; but that 
 fome proceed from Rain penetra- 
 ting the Fiffures of the Earth, and 
 flowly gleeting thro' the Inter- 
 ftices to the Orifices of Springs i 
 and others, efpecially thofe that 
 are fait, and placed near the Sea 
 Shore, take their Rife from the 
 Sea
 
 C H A p. 1 6. of Uni^erfal Geography. 301 
 
 becaufe of the Quantity of their Water, than when 
 we look upon fmall Brooks. But we have fhewcd 
 in tlie two laft Propofitions, that Rivers proceed 
 partly from Rain and melted Snow, and partly 
 trom Lakes and Concurrences of Brooks and Rivu- 
 lets ; and therefore we do not enquire lb much here 
 about the Sources of Rivers, as about the Origin 
 and Permanency of Springs. 
 
 THE Opinions of Naturalifts and Geographers 
 are various about this Matter. 
 
 I. SOME think that all Rivers and Springs re- 
 ceive their Water from Rain, or melted Snow ; and 
 this they bring for a Reafon, that Rain and melted 
 Snow fometimes augment Rivers to fuch a degree, 
 that they overflow their Banks, and lay whole 
 Countries under Water : But in the Summer Sea- 
 fon, when no Rain has fallen for a long Time, 
 
 Sea Water percolating thro' the 
 Sands ; but the greatei: pare of 
 Fountains, efpecially fuch as 
 break from the fides of high 
 Hills, derive their Waters from 
 Vapours, as was faid above. 
 
 The learned Dr/'/'jort'iu^rrt', in 
 his Natural Hijlory of the Earth, 
 explains the Origin of Fountains 
 otherwife. He imagines, that 
 there is a great Abyfs,orPromp- 
 tuary, of Waters, inclofedinthe 
 Bowels of the Earth, which, com- 
 municating with that of the 
 Ocean, is continually exhaled 
 into Vapours, by the Force of 
 a fubterraneous Heat which he 
 proves by many Arguments to 
 be in the interior Parts of the 
 Earth ; and that as thefe make 
 their way upwards, they pervade 
 the Fiifures, and Intervals of 
 the Strata of the Earth, per- 
 meating alio the very Interftices 
 of the particles of fand, earth and 
 
 Stone, 'till they come near the 
 Superficies of the Earth, where 
 they are condcnfcd with cold, 
 and come together by Drops, 
 which, being collected, break 
 out at fome Aperture or other, 
 and form Fountains. But when 
 the Heat above the Superlkies 
 of the Earth, is as intenfe as that 
 in the interior Parts thereof, 
 it takes the rifing\''apour, where 
 it penetrates the Superficies of 
 the Earth, and bears it up into 
 the Air, or at leail diminifhcs 
 greatly. 
 
 They who would fee thisHy- 
 pothefibiiiore accurately explain- 
 ed, let them confult the learned 
 AuthorinhisBook: Itisenough 
 for us only to mention it, ac- 
 counting Dr Halltys Theory 
 much more clear, and built up- 
 on a better Foundation. 
 
 Jurifis .appendix. 
 
 the
 
 30 2 l^je Ahjoliite Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 the great Rivers grow lefs, and the fmall ones arc 
 moltly dried up, becaufe the Chanels of the later 
 are too fhallow to contain any large quantity of 
 Water ; but the former, whole Chanels are deep, 
 do not ceafe running, nor are dried up, becaufe 
 they have collected fo much Water from the for- 
 mer Rain and melted Snow, that it cannot all be 
 exhaled into Vapours, except it be by a lafting and 
 conftant Heat. 2. Becaule there are the teweft. 
 Rivers where it feldom raineth, as in the inland 
 Parts of Africa there are but few Springs. 
 
 BUT thefe Allegations do not folve the Pro- 
 pofition, which doth not enquire about the Ori- 
 gin of Rivers, but from whence the Water of 
 Springs proceeds ; therefore they that take this to 
 be a Solution do not underftand the Senfe of the 
 Proportion, as we obferved before. And even the 
 Property they propofe to prove it by is not uni- 
 verfal ; for there are Rivers found in Places where 
 they have feldom any Rain and no Snow, tho* 
 what they fay is true concerning the Rivers in £- 
 g^pt and Peru. Befide, Rain- Water doth not pe- 
 netrate into the Ground beyond the depth of ten 
 Foot i whereas feveral Fountains fpring from a 
 greater Depth. 
 
 2. OTHERS think, that we are not to en- 
 quire about the Origin of the Water of Springs, 
 fince it is an Element as well as the Earth, Air, and 
 Fire, whofe Origins are not enquired into. This is 
 Seneca's way of arguing. But thefe Authors cut the 
 Gordian-knot when they cannot untie it ; for we do 
 not difpute about the Principles of Water, but en- 
 quire how it flows to the Heads of Rivers, rather 
 than to any other Place. Moreover, the Earth is 
 not a Fluid as Water is •, and to fay, that the Air 
 and Fire are not enquired into, is falfe. 
 
 3. THE Peripatetics follow the Opinion of 
 their Mafter AnJlotUy delivered in Chapter xi. 
 
 3 Book
 
 Chap. i6. of Unherfal Geography. 303 
 
 Book i. de Meteor, where he endeavours to prove, 
 that the Water of Springs is generated from Air 
 contained in the Bowels ot the Earth. Thefe are 
 his Reafons ; i. The Air, furrounding the Earth, 
 is turned into Water, viz. into Rain •, and tlierefore 
 fince there is alfo Air in the Bowels of the Earth, 
 and the fame Caufe to condenfe it, viz. Cold, it 
 is contrary to Reafon to think that Water is not 
 produced from Air there. 2. Experience teaches 
 us, that great Drops gather from fmall ones under 
 Ground, and therefore the Heads of Rivers are 
 only a great many Springs gathered into one Place. 
 For this Reafon, they that make Aqueduds, ufe 
 to draw the Water thro' narrow Trenches and 
 Pipes, which diftils, as it were, from the moift 
 Earth, Drop by Drop. 3. Becaufe moft Foun- 
 tains, efpecially of great Rivers, are found on 
 mountainous Places, and but few upon Planes, it 
 is a Sign that their Water proceeds from conden- 
 fed Air or Vapours, which naturally tend towards 
 high Places ; and Mountains are Sponges, as it 
 were, lying upon the Planes. Thefe are Arijlotk^s 
 Reafons, to which this following may be added of 
 no lefs Force than the reft, viz. that when the Air 
 is clouded and filled with Vapours, acid Fountains 
 tafte fweeter, which is a Sign they are augmented 
 by the Air. 
 
 4. C A RD y^ A^and others are of Opinion, that 
 the Water of Fountains proceeds from little Drains 
 or Guts collecting the condenfed watery Vapours 
 both above and under Ground ; but thefe feldcm 
 become Rivers, without being increafed with Rain 
 and melted Snov/. His Reafons are tliefc ; i. If 
 you obferve the Mountains in the Morning you will 
 find them full of Moifture. 2. Rivers in the Morn- 
 ing are found to fwell, and the more the nearer 
 they are to their Springs. 
 
 BUT
 
 3 04 The Ahfolute Part S e c t. I V. 
 
 BUT the perpetual bubbling and fpringing up 
 of the Water from Fountains, without any inter- 
 mifTion, does not feem to be produced by {o weak 
 and inconftant a Caulc. Neither is there much 
 Difference between Anjlotle^s Opinion and this of 
 Cardan •, only Arijlotle fiys, Fountains proceed 
 from Air condenfed, and Cardan, from Vapours ; 
 and there is but little Difference between Air and 
 Vapours. 
 
 5. SOME of the Antients were of Opinion, 
 that Rain- Water is hoarded up in the internal Ca- 
 verns of the Earth, from whence it iffues, as out 
 of a great Promptuary, and that all Rivers are 
 fupplied from one common Fund, or fpring one 
 from another ; alfo that no Water is difperfed over 
 the Earth but fuch as is colleded in the Winter 
 Seafon, and referved in thefe Receptacles, to be 
 poured in due Time into innumerable Rivers. For 
 this Caufe, fay they, Rivers are greater in Winter 
 than in Summer ; and fome are perennial, others 
 not. Their Reafons are the fame with thofe given 
 for the firft Hypothefis. But Arijlotle and his 
 Followers rejedl this Opinion, becaufe there is 
 more Water poured out of the Mouth of one Ri- 
 ver in a Year, than the whole Bulk of the terra- 
 queous Globe. 
 
 6. M A N Y of the modern Philofophers, with 
 the Antients, fuppofe the Earth to fuck in as much 
 Water as it exonerates into the Sea, thro' the 
 Mouths of Rivers i and that the Sea Water, by 
 draining thro' the hidden Receffes of the Earth, 
 and by being drained thro' the Mazes and Fiffures, 
 and thro' the Interftices of the Sand and Grave), 
 lofeth it's Saltnefs, and becomes pure Water. 
 
 I am alfo of this Opinion, and think it mod 
 reafonable, but do not exclude the Caufes repea- 
 ted in the firft and third Place. The Reafons for 
 ic are : 
 
 / I. BECAUSE
 
 Chap. i6. of Univerfal Geography. 305 
 
 1. BECAUSE more than a thoufand Rivers 
 exonerate themfelves into t\\Q Sea, and the larger 
 fort produce fuch quantities of Water, that what 
 each of them pours in a Year's Time into the Sea, 
 exceeds the Bulk ot the whole Earth i as what the 
 JVolga pours into the Cafpian Sea, and others. So 
 that it is impoffible but that t!ie Water fhould b^ 
 refunded out of the Sea into the Earth, and carried 
 to the Heads of Rivers ; elfe we could not conceive 
 why the Sea is not increafed to an immenfe Bulk, 
 or why Springs do not ceafe to emit Water. Nei- 
 ther can any one obje6t that there is as much Wa- 
 ter exhaled from the Sea in Vapours, as it receives 
 from the Rivers •, for Rain alone returns thefe 
 Vapours, and if the Water of Rivers were con- 
 tinually turned into Vapours, it would produce 
 more than thofe exhaled from the Sea. 
 
 2. THIS Opinion is alfo thus proved, becaufe 
 that Springs near the Ocean are falc or brackifh, 
 and the nearer they are the Sea, the more they are 
 fated with Salt i as on the Shore of Jfrica^ and in 
 India^ chiefly on the Shore of Cormandd^ where 
 no Vines grow, and all their Wells tafte fait. 
 Near the Town of Sue^,^ at the end of the Red Sea^ 
 their Springs are all fait and bitter j and even the 
 Water which is fetched two German Miles from the 
 Shore, taftes a little brackifh. Alfo in feveral 
 fmall Iflands there are no frefh Water Springs, but 
 all fait ftho* fomething lefs fated than the Ocean^ 
 as in the Ifland of St Vincent^ and others. In the 
 low Countries of Peru ^ that border upon the Ocean, 
 their Lakes are falteft, becaufe of the Vicinity of 
 the Sea. And in the maritime Parts of feme ealiern 
 Countries their Cocoa-nuts are obferved to tafte 
 brackifli. Not to mention the Salt Springs that 
 are found in inland Countries, as in Lorrain^ Lunen*. 
 burg^ i^c. 
 
 VOL. L X 3. BECAUSE
 
 3o6 The Abfolufe Part Sect. IV. 
 
 3. BECAUSE it is certain, that the Sea fends 
 ii's Water thro' iubterraneous Conduits to the lalc 
 Springs of Lumnburg, Hall^ &:c. whofe Feeders 
 are obfeived to contain perfect Sea- Water under 
 Ground. 
 
 , 4. B EC A USE if we dig to a great Depth, 
 as is oiten done in Miiies, we lliall find plenty ot 
 Water, which can neitlier proceed from Rain nor 
 Air. 
 
 BUT by what means the W^ater is carried 
 from the Sea to the Fountain-Heads, and how, in 
 the PalTage, it becomes fweet, we have already 
 explained ; and fhewed that the Bottom of the Sea 
 not being in every Place rocky, but here and 
 there fandy, gravelly, and oozy, imbibes the Sea- 
 Water, and letteth it into the Earth ('after the 
 fame manner as when we throw Water upon Sand, 
 Beans, Peas, Wheat, or other forts of Grain j thro* 
 whofe Interfticcs it is brought by degrees to a 
 great Diftance from the Sea, where at length the 
 Imall Drops come together, efpecially in Itreight 
 Places, as are Mountains, (^c. and having found 
 an Aquedudl they difcharge themfelves at a Spring. 
 But if the Cavity, where they are colle<5led, be 
 covered and bound up with the Earth, then tlie 
 W^ater will take another Courfe, where it can with 
 greater Eafe infmuate itfelf, and fpring up at an 
 Aperture in another Place •, which is not the real 
 Fountain, but a Conveyance of the fubterraneous 
 R iver to a Place above Ground. And if the Water 
 can find no Way out of the Receptacle, and hath 
 not force enough to make itfelf one, it is not 
 jncreafed, but the fubfequent Particles of Water 
 are turned another Way. For it is the nature of 
 all Liquids and Fluids, that their Parts or Par- 
 ticles flow towards that Place where the Flux 
 is made. Thus if you fill a Veflel with Water 
 'rill it rife above the Brim, tho* all the raifed Parts 
 
 of
 
 Chap. i6. of Univerfal Geography. 307 
 
 of the Water equally prels the Brim, and have an 
 equal Tendency and Power to run over at the next 
 Side, yet if on one Side of the Vcficl any part of the 
 incumbent Water be made to flow, the reft will 
 forfake their refpedive Sides, and move (as if they 
 were drawnj towards that Side where the Flux is 
 begun fthe Caufe of which it belongs to Ph'^fics to 
 explainj (b). Or if you put one end of a Piece 
 of Bread into Water or Wine, you will fee the 
 Water move upwards and diffufe itfelf thro* the 
 Part above Water. Moreover the Sea eafily 
 pervades the Fifllires of the Earth, and therefore 
 with the fame eafe may glide out of them ; except 
 we had rather afcribe this to Evaporation, where- 
 by the Particles are carried upwards, and con- 
 denfed into Drops, v;hen they meet with narrow 
 Places. 
 
 BUT becaufe there are fome Arguments, which 
 may feem to render this Opinion lefs probable, we 
 will difcufs them here, left they Ihould feem lil^e 
 Blots upon our Hypothefis. 
 
 1 . S P R I N G- Heads are more elevated than the 
 Superficies of the Sea, and for the moft part arc 
 feated in mountainous Places •, therefore it is con- 
 trary to the Nature of Water to move from the 
 Sea up to thefe Places ; for Water always runs 
 downwards, as is manifeft from Rivers and Drains. 
 
 2. THO' the Bottom of the Sea be fandy, 
 gravelly, and fpongy, fo that the Water may eafi- 
 ly pervade the Interftices ; yet for what Reafon 
 Ihould it not rather moiften the fnbjacen: Parts of 
 the Earth, than afcend upwards, and glide to the 
 Duds of Fountains, when the Earth near the Sur- 
 
 (h) We gather from S\r Ifaac the Parts of one another; Thus 
 
 Ne-iJutons Principles, that it is Water attratSteth Water, and 
 
 the Nature of Fluids (and of ail the Particles that firft begin to 
 
 the Matter in the Univcrfe] mu- flow, drrAVthe next Particles to 
 
 tually toattra6tthemfelves, and them, and thefe the next, ^c. 
 
 X 2 face
 
 3o8 "The Abfolute Fart S e c t. IV, 
 
 tace is commonly rocky and ftony, as in the Moun- 
 tains of the Ifland of 5/ Helena ? 
 
 3. \V E have no Reafon afligned why the Wa- 
 ter as it flows from the Sea to remote Fountains, 
 does not break out in fome intermediate Place. 
 And we are as much in the dark, why there is 
 none or very little Water found in deep Mines, as 
 we are told by Thurnheuferus, 
 • 4. SPRING fFaie/muit be fait, if it proceed 
 from the Sea. 
 
 THESE are the chief Arguments which feem 
 to invalidate our propoled Hypothefisj for I pafs 
 by thofe of iefs moment alledged by others, as 
 that the Sea cannot fupply fo many Rivers : and 
 then again, that Rivers would never leflen, if they 
 proceed from whence we lay they do. Thefe two 
 are foon anfwered •, for firft, the Sea receives the 
 Water it emits into Fountains, from the Rivers ; 
 and the other, as we obferved before, is not the 
 Quellion, for we are not arguing, that all the Wa- 
 ter of Rivers proceeds from the Sea, but only the 
 Water of Fountains, which of themfelves make 
 Rivers, as we faid before ; where we alfo afTened, 
 that Fountains are augmented by Rain and Dew, 
 which fink down into the Earth and either foke and 
 moiften it, or are drawn towards the Fountain- 
 heads by the EfBux of the Water, as we fliewcd 
 by other Examples. Let us therefore return to ex- 
 amine the other four Arguments which feem to be 
 of fome Weight. 
 
 THE firft is thought to be the ftrongeft, as 
 being taken from Experience, and therefore the 
 Learned have contrived feveral Anfwers to it. 
 They come offeafieft who aflert that the Ocean is 
 higher than the Earth, and confequently higher 
 than the Fountain-htatls ; wherefore fay they. 
 Water naturally flows to the Fountains, becaufe 
 they are of a kfs Altitude dian the Ocean. Olea- 
 
 rius
 
 Chap. i6. oJU?iiverfal Geography. 309 
 
 rius alfo in his Defcription of his Travels into Per- 
 fia relates, that having arcended one of the Moun- 
 tains which bordereth upon the Cajpian Sea, he tried 
 the Altitude of it above the Superficies of that Sea 
 with an Aftrolabe (or rather a Surveying Inftrumcnt) 
 and found none ; but oblerved, that the extreain 
 parts of the Sea feemed to be in the fame horizontal 
 JLine, or even a little elevated above it ; and there- 
 fore the bulging of the Sea made it as high, or 
 even a little higher, than the top of the Moun- 
 tain, where he took the Obfervaiion. But this So- 
 lution notwithflanding cannot be admitted, becaufe 
 we proved in Chap, xiii, that the Superficies of the 
 Ocean is not higher than the Land, or than Moun- 
 tains, but rather lower, as appears alfo from fre- 
 quent Obfervations made by expert Mathemati- 
 cians. As to Oleariui\ Obfcrvation, it is not to be 
 infifted upon here •, for the Cafpian Sea is not higher 
 than it's Shores, much lefs than the Mountains,- as 
 appears from the many Rivers that exonerate them- 
 felves into it. We muft therefore fuppofe, that 
 Refraftion obftruded Oleariui^s Obfcrvation, and 
 made the Surface of the Sea appear higher than it 
 really is ; and perhaps the flu(ftuating of the Waves 
 might increafe the Caufe, or the Mountain which 
 he afcended was of no great Height. - - 
 
 THE Weaknefs therefore of this Solution being 
 expofed, others propofe this ; that the natural Place 
 of the Waters is about the Earth, and therefore they 
 ought to furround or cover it, becaufe they are 
 lighter ; and becaufe they are hindered from pof- 
 fefllng their natural Place by the Mountains and 
 Hills, and the Elevation of the inland Places, that 
 part of the Ocean which fhould be where the Moun- 
 tains and high Parts are, being thruft out of it's 
 natural Place, violently pre fifes the Water under- 
 neath it, which tho' it be in it's natural Pofture, 
 yet being fqueezed and prefifed towards the bottom, 
 X3 by
 
 3 I o . ' The Abjolute Fart S e c t. I V . 
 
 by the fuperincumbenc Water, it is forced to give 
 way, ana tindirig no place to flow to, it retires to- 
 wards, the Sides, and pervades the P'ouncations of 
 th€ Mountains \ where being colleded, as in a Ci- 
 flern, it is. Itill urged forwards towards the tops of 
 the Mountains by the incumbent Water of the O- 
 cean. As we may obferve in a Tankard that has 
 a Pipe on the fide (reaching to the very bottom) 
 made to pour Wine thro' into Glafies j if, I fay, 
 we drop a Stpne into fuch a Veflel, whether it be 
 full or half full of Liquors it will fpout out at the 
 Orifice of the Pipe. 1 his is Scaliger's Subtility, but 
 it is too grofs to pafs. For the Water is not thus 
 forced towards the tops of the Mountains, fince 
 Experience fhews us the contrary in Mines ; and if 
 it were fo, the Water of all Springs would be fait ; 
 befides, it is falfe to fay that the Water is not 
 in it's natural Place, and therefore prefles upon the 
 Water underneath, for this is allumed without 
 Proof, and is contrary to Experience. Water does 
 not prefs upon the Parts below, unlefs it's Surface 
 be of an unequal Altitude, but the Surface of the 
 Ocean is fpherical and confequently at Reft. More- 
 over, if the Waters were moved by any Preflure, 
 it would be towards the Shores, where the PafTage 
 is more open than the fmall Fiflures of the Earth. 
 And tho' there be great oudets at the bottom of the 
 Sea, for the Water to f^ow through, yet fince it is 
 fait, it cannot make frefli- water Fountains. I think 
 the true Anfwer to this Argument is not far to 
 fttchy if, we confider how Water is conveyed to 
 Fountains, not by any Chanel or Pipe from the bot- 
 tom of the Sea, or the Root of the Mountain Cby 
 which means it would ftill keep it's Saltnefsj, but 
 by a continual diftilling, gleeting, and draining of 
 the watery Particles thro' the terreftrial Matter, till 
 they find a Receptacle fit to colled and condenfe them 
 ^nro Drops, where being continually fucceeded by 
 A others.
 
 C H AP. i6. of Vniverfal Geography. 3 1 1 
 
 others, they have recourie to fome Conveyance, 
 and through it break forth at a Fountain. And wc. 
 obferve this very thing in Mines dug to a vaft 
 Depth, how that Water on every Side is continu* 
 ally dropping, and colledling itfelf into imall Guts, 
 which they call Veins of Water j and if feveral 
 luch Guts or Runnels as thefe concur in one Re- 
 ceptacle, they form a Fountain, as they who make 
 Drains, to bring Water into Wells, very well 
 know. For in moft Draw- Wells the Water is col- 
 Jeded from the dropping of the Earth, round 
 about into the bottom of the Well -, and they that 
 make Aquedudls dig fmall Furrows in Gutters 
 to colled the Waters, and then convey it in a 
 large one to the intended Place. If it be objcded, 
 that many Fountains are obferved to fpring up a- 
 mong Rocks, where it is likely the watery Par- 
 ticles can fcarce be admitted j I anfwer, That this 
 confirms our Opinion ; for thefe Rocks are not 
 continued to the foot of the Mountain (upon which - 
 fuch Springs are found) but only cover the Sur- 
 face to a fmall Depth, and the Earth is lighter 
 and lefs rocky within, or at lead fit to give 
 Admifiion to the Water, which, when it comes to 
 the Strata of the Stones, can penetrate no farther, 
 but is there impeded and colleded into Drops, and 
 breaks out into a Fountain among the Rocks, if it 
 can find any Aperture. Moreover, the rocky 
 Mountains in the Ifland of St Helena^ and in moft 
 other Iflands, are not within fo denfe and obdurate, 
 as appears from the Cinders, Afhes, and fulphu- 
 reous Earth j which fhews that thefe Mountains 
 fpme time or other burnt or fmoaked. And to 
 this we may add, that the Fountain is not always- 
 in the Place where the Water breaks out, which is 
 conveyed very often from a higher Place, by a Cha- 
 nel under Ground, and this caufes it to break forth 
 with greater Violence, as is very often obferved. 
 
 X4 We
 
 312 Tloe Ahfilute Tart S e c t. I V. 
 
 We may be further convinced of the Truth of 
 thefe Things, by confidering that Fire will tend 
 downwards thro' a Continuation of Matter, tho' 
 dt it's own Nature, when it is free from Matter, 
 it tends upwards. Thus if you put one End of a 
 B^r of Iron into the Fire, it will penetrate thro* 
 the whole, and heat the other End, tho' it be 
 turned downwards. And this is fufficient to con- 
 vince any one of the Invalidity of the firft Argu- 
 ment-. 
 
 T O the Second we anfwer. That the Reafon 
 why the Sea- Water doth not penetrate and fink 
 into the Earth towards the Center, fo much as into 
 the Mountains, is, btcaufe the Earth there is den- 
 fer, and full of Metals, as we find by Experience ; 
 but where it is not fo obdurate, the W^ater glides 
 in, and therefore if there are Receptacles under the 
 bottom of the Sea, we do not deny but that there 
 may be fome frefh and fidt Water Lakes there. 
 But bccaufe there are few fuch Receptacles, and 
 the Earth every where is denfe and metalline, un- 
 der the bottom of the Sea, it cannot conftantly im- 
 bibe Water ; but when it is faturated it receives no 
 more, and then the overplus Water diflils towards 
 the higher Places. And the Sea conftantly chang- 
 ing it's Altitude, and fiudluating backwards and 
 forwards, may contribute much to elevate the Wa- 
 ter ; for where it is higher than ordinary, it muft 
 certainly prefs the Water into the Earth, and drive 
 it to the Fountain-Heads. And fince the Surface 
 of the Ocean in every Place is conftantly agitated, 
 and made higher and lower, not only by Storms, 
 but alfo by the Tides, therefore fuch a Preflure as 
 fhis muft happen every Day. But I queftion whe- 
 ther this can do much. 
 
 TO the third Argument we fay, That this is 
 owing to the Difpofition or Situation of the Strata 
 <t>f rhe Earth, or of the Earth itfelf, and that it is
 
 C H A p. 1 6. of Jj7iiverjal Geography. 313 
 
 the natural of all Fluids to gather to a Head, where 
 there is a Flux. I think there is no need of faying 
 any more to this. 
 
 BUT the fourth is not fo eafily anfwered, for 
 we do not perceive Salt to be feparated from Sea- 
 Water only by Percolation or Straining. Befide, 
 there are two kinds of Salt in Water Cwhich the 
 Arijlotelians did not confider) the one of which is 
 very well named, by Chemills, fixed, and the 
 other volatile. The fixed Salts may indeed, by 
 continual draining, or boiling, or diftilling of the 
 Sea- Water, be feparated from it ; but the vola- 
 tile Salt is fo full of Spirit, that it flies up with the 
 Water, and cannot be feparated from it, neither 
 by frequent Diftillations nor any other Art hither- 
 to ufed. Therefore it is very difficult to fhew how 
 this volatile Spirit of Salt is feparated from the Sea- ■ 
 Water, in it's PaflTagefrom the Ocean to Fountain- 
 Heads. The following Accounts v;ill ferve our 
 Turn. I. Tho' we have not found out the Art of 
 feparating the volatile Spirit of Salt from Sea- Wa- 
 ter, yet we cannot deny but that it may be done, 
 fince we fee it feparated by Nature, when it rains 
 frefli Showers in the main Ocean, tho' they pro- 
 ceed from Vapours exhaled from the Sea. 2. The 
 Particles of fait Water which pervade the Fifiures 
 of the Earth, before they come to their Fountain, 
 ar€ mixed with other frefh Water, which proceeds 
 from Rain and Vapours condenfed there, whereby 
 the fmall Degree of volatile Salt that remains in 
 them is rendered infenfible, 3. It is not true that 
 all Fountains are entirely deprived of Saltnefs, for 
 there are fome fait Springs, as we faid before, a- 
 bout two Miles from Suez, and in feveral other 
 Places not fo far from the Sea. Therefore to fe-> 
 parate the volatile Salt from the Water, a long 
 Tranfcolation, and a gentle Evaporation is requir- 
 ed, and thus it is to be feparated by Art ; and 
 
 thus
 
 314 ^^ Abfohite Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 thus alfo is Rain- Water generated and made frelh ; 
 tho* fometimes faltilh Showers are obferved to fall 
 into the Sea. 
 
 THE Water of Springs therefore proceeds part- 
 ly from the Sea, or fubtcrraneous Water, and partly 
 from Rain and Dew that moiftens the Earth. But 
 the Water of Rivers proceeds partly from Springs, 
 and partly from Rain and Snow. „ i.;;, 
 
 "' 'proposition VI. 
 
 Some Rivers in the middle of their Courfe, hide them. 
 /elves under Ground^ and rife up in another Place^ 
 as if the^ were new Rivers, 
 
 THE moft famous are : 
 
 1. THE Niger, a River in Africa, which fome 
 antient Cofmographers would have to proceed 
 from the Nile, by a fubtcrraneous Chanel, becaufe 
 it overflows it's Banks at the fame Time of the 
 Year, and after the fame manner that the Nile 
 does : and they could not fhew a better Caufe for 
 it's Inundation. This River meeting with the 
 Mountains of TV^Z»/^, hideth itfelf under them, and 
 emerges again on the Weft Side of the Moun- 
 tains {c). 
 
 2. THE Tigris in Mefopotamia, after it has 
 pafTed the Lake Arethufa, meets with Mount 'Tau- 
 rus, and plunges itfelf into a Grotto, and flows 
 out at the other Side of the Mountain j alfo after 
 
 (c) This River hides itfelf taken for the upper Part of the 
 
 no where under Ground that Kile) meeting with the Moun- 
 
 we know of; tho' perhaps we tains of Nimeamay, is faid to 
 
 are not certain whether it do divide itfelf into feveralllreams, 
 
 or no, becaufe no European has and immerge under them, and 
 
 traced it to it's Fountain : Only to emerge again on the North 
 
 the 7.eebe, a large Branch of it, fide of the Mountains. But 
 
 (which proceeds from the Lake I do not write this as a Cer- 
 
 V.aire, and was fome time fince tainty. 
 
 it
 
 Chap, i 6. of Univerfal Geography. 3 i ^ 
 
 it has run thro' the Lake Tofpia it again immerges, 
 and being carried under Ground about fix German 
 Miles, it breaks out again. Our modern Maps 
 feldom exhibit fuch Receptacles. 
 
 3. ARISTOTLE (in Book i. Chap. xi. M:/^^r.) 
 writes, that there were feveral fuch Brooks in the 
 Peloponnefus about Arcadia ; Tome of which are 
 mentioned by the Poets. The two following, viz. 
 L-jcus and Erafinus^ are excellently defcribed by 
 Qvid in the following Verfes. 
 
 So Lycus /wallowed by the yawnifig Earth, 
 Takes in another Place it's fecond Birth: 
 Great Erafinus now feems lojf, but yields s 
 
 His rifwg Waters to ///Arcadian Fields. 
 
 M O R R I C E. 
 
 4. THE Alpheus, a River in Greece, is fwal- 
 lowed by the Earth, and, as the Greek Poets 
 write, takes it's Courfe under both Sea and Land 
 into Sicily, where it rifes, as they fay, on the ^*)'- 
 racufian Shore, and is the fame with the River cal- 
 led Arethufa in Sicily (d). This they were induced to 
 think, becaufe that this River, every fifth Summer, 
 did cafl up the Dung of Cattle, at the fame Time 
 that the Olympic Games were celebrated in Achaia, 
 when the Dung of the flain Vidims was thrown 
 into the Alpheus, which was therefore carried with 
 a dire6l Courfe into Sicily. 
 
 5. T H E River Guadiana, between Portugal 
 and Andalu/ia, (formerly called Anas) hideth itfelf 
 
 (</j This (and alfo the former) Mountain ^'/tw/.W///, and run- 
 are thought to be meer Poetical ning all it's Courfe above 
 Fiftions, for no fuch Rivers are Ground, receives a great Nuni- 
 found to exill at prefent. That ber of Rivers, and afterwards 
 which was anciently called J/- falls into the Gulph of CaJieJ 
 pheus is now named Carbon or di Ternefe. 
 Orfea, which rifes from the 
 
 under
 
 3i6 '77;^ Ahfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 under Ground, near the Town of Medelin, and 
 gufhes out again about eight German Miles from 
 that Place (e). 
 
 6. THE Brook Dan (which together with Jor 
 makes the River Jordan) emerges Jbme Miles be- 
 low it's real Fountain the Lake Pbyala ; for Chaff 
 being thrown in here is caft up at the other end 
 of the OriHce, or where the Fountain feems to 
 be. 
 
 FLINT and others have wrote that the Nile, 
 in fome Places, runs under Ground i but we know, 
 by Experience, that it runs it's whole Courfe a- 
 bove Ground. Arijlotle alfo tells us, that the Po, 
 a famous River in Ital'j^ hideth itfelf for fome 
 Space under Ground -, but Experience fhews the 
 contrary. 
 
 THE Reafon why thefe Rivers hide themfelves 
 under the Earth and appear again, is, becaufe they 
 meet with elevated Ground which they cannot over- 
 flow, and therefore are forced to glide into the next 
 Grotto they meet with : or make themfelves a fub- 
 terraneous Chanel, if the Earth be foft and eafy to 
 penetrate. 
 
 T H E R E are alfo fome Rivers that hide them- 
 felves under Ground, but do not appear any more ; 
 as we fhall fhew prefently. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 Moji of the /mall Rivers, many of the middling 
 ones, and all the large ones, exonerate themfelves 
 into the Sea, or into a Lake ; and the Place where 
 they difcbarge their Water is called their Mouth, 
 Some Rivers alfo have one Mouth, fome two, fo?ne 
 
 (e) TKis River is at prefent merly) by all the Spaniards that 
 faid, not to bury itfelf under have mentioned it. 
 Ground (as was reported for- 
 
 3 three.
 
 Chap. i6. of Univerfal Geography, 317 
 
 three^ and others more. Several of the middlings and 
 fmall Rivers difcharge t hem/elves into the great ones: 
 the rejl either Jiagnate, or are /wallowed up by the 
 Earth. 
 
 CONCERNING the great Rivers the thing 
 is manifeft, as the Rhine, the Elbe, the Danube, the 
 IVolga, &c. The Danube difcharges itfelf at five 
 Mouths into the Euxine Sea -, the IVolga is reckoned 
 by feme to have at leaft feventy Mouths j the Nile 
 feven, and, when it overflows, more (f). 
 
 THE Reafon why thef'e great Rivers exone- 
 rate themfelves into the Sea is their fwift Courfe, 
 and their Plenty of Water -, and why at more 
 than one Mouth is, i . [The Situation of the Coaft]. 
 2. The Shelves and Sand-Banks, which are gather- 
 ed in their Mouths, and in Procefs of Time be- 
 come Iflands ; and if there happen to be but one 
 of thefe, the River is divided into two Branches, 
 and is faid to have two Mouths ; if more, the 
 Mouths are increafed accordingly. By this means 
 the Land often gains on the Sea ; and few great 
 Rivers are found without fome Iflands before their 
 Mouths. 
 
 THE Ancients tell us, that the Nile formerly 
 difcharged it's Water at one Mouth only, which 
 they called the Canobian Mouth. To thefe two 
 Caufes therefore a third may be added, viz. Hu- 
 man Induftry. For People often draw Canals 
 from Rivers, or turn them thro* a new Chanel, in- 
 to the Sea, partly to . water their Fields, and 
 partly for the Ufe of Navigation, and in procefs of 
 Time thefe arc made larger by the Current. And 
 therefore we may believe the Antients, when they 
 tell us, that all the Mout-hs of the Nile, except that 
 at Canohus, were made by Human Induftry. But 
 
 (f) See the next Note below. 
 
 of
 
 3 1 8 lie Abfilute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 of this more fully in the next Propofition, where 
 we fhall explain how it comes to pafs, that one 
 River flows into the Chanel of another. 
 
 THE River IVolcoff^ in Mufcovy^ ("not Wolga) 
 arifes from one Lake, and runs into another, 
 
 RIVULETS, or Brooks, that neither run in- 
 to the Sea, nor into other Rivers, are either pe- 
 culiar Rivers, or Branches of others. They that 
 are the Branches of other Rivers probably ftagnate, 
 and do not run under Ground ; and the Reafon why 
 they do not reach the Sea is, i . Becaufe their Cha- 
 nels lie low, and contain but little Water. 2. Be- 
 caufe they meet with rocky Ground, which hin- 
 ders their Progrefs. 3. Several of them are made 
 by Art, to moiften the Ground, and for the Ufc 
 of their Water. 4. Perhaps their Mouths are 
 flopped or obftru(2:ed, by intervening Land, which 
 is gained from the Sea, or by Shelves, which are 
 increafed to fuch a Bulk as to flop their Current ; 
 fo that they are forced to retreat towards their 
 Fountain, or to the Place where they divaricated. 
 Thus a Branch of the Rhine^ which formerly ran 
 into the German Ocean, at the Hw^i le Britain^ near 
 Catwick, is now choaked up with Sand, and flag- 
 nates between Catwick and Ley den. 
 
 BUT fuch as are proper Rivers, and neither 
 run into others, nor exonerate rhemfelves into the 
 Sea, but fpring up in one Place, and are fwallowed 
 up in another, are few in Number, and very fmail ; 
 as thofe that flow from the Mountains of Peru, In- 
 dia^ and Africa, arc buried in the Gravel, or fuck- 
 ed up by the fandy Soil. Alfo at Meten fa Village 
 near the Arabian Gulph) there is a fmali River 
 whofe Chanel is full of Gravel, under which the 
 Water in Summer- Time hiJes itfelf, and glides a- 
 long out of Sight. If thefe Rivers find no fub- 
 terraneous PafTage they run into fmali Lakes, or 
 Bogs •, but fome of them fpring fo flowly, that 
 
 they
 
 Chap, i 6. of Unherfal Geography, 3 1 g 
 they are exhaled into Vapours, alnioll: as fait as 
 they fpring, and thus they are dried up, and nei- 
 ther make Lakes, nor run under Ground. There 
 are Teveral of" theie in Mufcovy ; as the Co?ikra, the 
 Salie, the Marefsa^ the Jdeefa, and others taken 
 Notice of in larger Maps. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 To determine whether the Cbanels, in which Riven 
 flow, were originally made by Art or Nature. 
 
 IT is probable the Chanels of thofe Rivers, 
 which are not of the fame date with the Earth it • 
 felf, were made by Induftry, for thefe Reafons : 
 I. We arc well affured that when new Fountains 
 break forth, the running Water does not make ir- 
 felf a Oianel, but diffufes it's Streams over the 
 adjacent Country, and therefore wants to be 
 brought to a Chanel by Art. 2. Becaufe there 
 are feveral Canals even now cut by Hand. So 
 the Chinefe have cut a Canal for the Water to run 
 out of the yellow River into another. There are 
 feveral other well known Inftances which I omit. 
 3. Becaufe fuch Lakes and Marfhes found a- 
 bout the Fountains of feveral Rivers, viz. of the 
 Nik^ the TaniaSy the fVolga, ^c. confirm this. For 
 fince thefe Lakes, without doubt, were made by 
 the Effufion and fpreading of the Fountain- Water, 
 the Inhabitants, to drain it from their Fields, which 
 were in danger of being overflowed, made a Cha- 
 nel to contain it, and carry it off. The fame is to 
 beunderftood of Rivers, whofe Heads are in Moun- 
 tains. 
 
 THERE is a Queftion like this ; viz. Whether 
 the Rivers which exonerate themfelves into others, 
 have of themfelves made their way thither, or have 
 been brought thither by Chanels made with hands ? 
 
 The
 
 320 ^he Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 The latter is more probable for the Reafons afore- 
 faid. The fame may be faid of fuch Branches of 
 Rivers as make and enclofe Iflands in the Tanais, 
 ihe IVolga^ and others. So one Branch of the Eu- 
 phrates^ gliding thro' the Marfhes of Cbaldaa, was 
 formerly carried that way into the Sea, but after- 
 wards it left it's Courfe, being choaked up with 
 Sand, and pardy difperfed it's Streams among the 
 innumerable Canals which were made by the Inha- 
 bitants to water the Fields ; and partly by a new 
 Chanel mixed it's Waters with the Tigris. And this 
 feems to be the Cafe of other Rivers which do not 
 now reach the Sea, but ftagnate ; tho* perhaps they 
 might have had a Paflage into it formerly. 
 
 ' . PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 To explain why there are no fait Rivers, tho* there arc 
 fo many fait Springs. 
 
 THE Reafon is, becaufe Mankind have no 
 occafion for fait Water, and therefore do not col- 
 left it into Chanels, fince they can have Salt at an 
 eafier rate. But if Chanels were made as for other 
 Rivers, we fhould have fait Rivulets, fuch as are in 
 Lunenburg, and Hall, under Ground. And no doubt 
 but there are feveral fuch fubterraneous fait Rivers 
 in other Parts of the World. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 The Chanels of Rivers the nearer they are to their Foun- 
 tains, are ge7ierally fo much the higher ; andmojl of 
 them are deprej/ed gradually towards their Mouths. 
 
 1 H O' it may fomctimes happen, that the 
 Parts of the Chansl which are more remote from 
 the Fountain, are higher than the Places that are 
 
 nearer
 
 C H A p. 1 6. of XJniverfal Geography, 321 
 
 nearer it i for they are not always even throughout, 
 but have here and there Hills and Vallies, as we 
 may call them, interfperfed. Notwirhftanding no 
 part of the Chanel is higher than the Fountain- 
 head. 
 
 THE Propofition is plain from the Nature of 
 Water, which never flows but from a higher to a 
 lower Place, and therefore every Part of the Chanel 
 (efpecially the Mouth of the River) mud of Ne- 
 ceflity be lower than the Fountain ; elfe the Water 
 would flow back again to it's Source. But it is true 
 alfo, that the parts of the Chanel are elevated either 
 way, becaufe in many Places there are Whirlpools 
 •\Vhich draw the Water downwards \ befides Shoals, 
 Ridges, and Sand-banks, which increafe the Alti- 
 tude of the Chanel, and make it higher in fome 
 parts than in others nearer the Fountain •, yet the 
 River flows forward from the Fountain towards it's 
 Mouths, and fills the hollow Places with a greater 
 Quantity of Water, fo that their Superficies are fl:ill 
 higher than the Shoals, Sands, i^c. which would 
 otherwife obfl:ru6t it's PaflTage. And there are 
 fcarce any Rivers but what have fuch Inequalities 
 in their Chanels, efpecially the 'Nile and the iVolga 
 which in fome Places are almoft choaked up with 
 Sand. 
 
 WHEN the Water of a River falls from a high 
 to a low Place, if the Fall be fl;eep, and if it guflies 
 down fwiftly and with great Force, it is called the 
 Cataract of the Rivers. And there are feveral fuch 
 Qatar a^i in great Rivers j efpecially in the Kile ; 
 two of which are extraordinary, where the Water 
 gufhes between the Mountains with fuch Rapidity 
 and Noife, that the Inhabitants, within the found 
 of them, are faid to be all deaf 
 
 THE [fVokoff] a fmall River in Mufcovy, hath 
 alfo two Catara^s near Ladoga, 
 
 V O L, L Y THE
 
 322 "The Ahjolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 THE haire alfo in Congo hath a Catara^ about 
 fix Gerfnan Miles from the Sea, where it wholly falls 
 from a Mountain. The Rhine hath two dangerous 
 ones at Schafflju-jfen and Lauffenhurg^ where the 
 whole River falls with a dreadful Noife, from the 
 lops of Rocks. 
 
 BUT they that are fkilled in Hydraulics obferve, 
 that if the Chanel of any River be deprefied one 
 Pace in 500, it is fcarcely navigable, by reafon of 
 it's Rapidity ; and fmce all great Rivers are navi- 
 gable, it fhews that their Chanels in no Place are 
 deprefied fo much as one Pace in 500; except 
 where there are Cataraflsand Whirlpools. 
 
 THE Deprefllon of one part of a River below 
 another, is called it's Level i and the difference be- 
 tween the Altitude of the Fountain-head of a River 
 and it's Mouth, is called the Depth of the Level of a 
 River. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 'To explain why Rivers are broader in one Part than 
 
 another. 
 
 THE Caufes are -, i . If the Bank, or Shore, be 
 iower than ordinary. 2. If the Ground be foft and 
 mouldering, and give way to the violent beating 
 of the Waves, or to the Rapidity of the Water. 
 3. If the Chanel be (hallow or full of Shelves and 
 Sands. 4. If the Water flow from a Catara<fl, it 
 fpreads and makes the River broader. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 To explain why, the Chanels of Rivers are more deprejfed 
 ^ in foms Places than in others» 
 
 RIVERS
 
 Chap. 1 6 . of TJniverfal Geography. 323 
 RIVERS become fhallow by chefe Accidents ; 
 X. If Sands are gathered. 2. If the River run 
 broad. 3. If it run flow. 
 
 O N the contrary they become deep, if the cur- 
 rent runsftrong, efpecially from a Catara(5l j or if 
 the Chanel be narrow, or if the Bottom be foft and 
 mouldering. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 To explain why fome Rivers run with a fwift Current 
 and others /low : and why the fame River (for ex- 
 ample the Rhine) acquires dijferent Degrees of Ra- 
 pidity in fever al Places. 
 
 THE Caufes are i i. The Altitude of the 
 Fountain. 2. The Declivity of the Chanel, or 
 the Depreflion of the Mouth of the River; for 
 if the Chanel be deprefied one Pace in five hun* 
 dred, the Current is fo rapid that Navigation be- 
 comes dangerous (as was obferved before) -, there- 
 fore Rivers flow with thegreatefl: Rapidity where 
 there are Catarafts ; and thofe Torrents are moil 
 impetuous which fall from the highefl: and fteepefl: 
 Mountains. 3. The narrownefs of the Chanel, 
 and the abundance of Water •, as where a River 
 runs between two Mountains, or Forelands. 
 
 RIVERS famous for their fwifc Courfe are ; 
 the 'J'igris, the Indus, the Danube, the Trtifcb in 
 Siberia, the Malmiflra in Cilicia ; which lafl: makes 
 fuch a dreadful Noife, that it may be heard a 
 great way otf. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV« 
 
 [JVhen the Mouths of Rivers are Iroad and /hallow 
 
 and difcharge but a fmall quantity of Water, and 
 
 thai /lowly, they are eafily flopped or choakcd up. 1 
 
 Y 2 FOR
 
 324 'tljc Ahjolute T art S e ct. IV^ 
 
 FOR thefe Caufes make it flow with lefs Force, 
 fo that it cannot difgorge the Sand and Earth 
 into the Sea, but lets them fettle in it's Mouth, 
 whereby it is foon flopped. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Few Rivers run in a dire^ Courfe from their Foun- 
 tains to their Mouths^ but turn various ways, and 
 make innuinerahle PFindings and Curvatures. 
 
 THE Caufe is partly owing to the Induftry 
 of Man, and the Motion of the Water •, and part- 
 ly to the Rocks that impede and divert the direct 
 Courfe. 
 
 THE winding Rivers are ; i. The [River of 
 the Amazons'] in South America, which makes in- 
 numerable Curvatures, fo that it's Chanel is ac- 
 counted above fifteen hundred Gerfnan Miles long, 
 tho' it be only feven hundred Miles from the Foun- 
 tain to the Mouth in a direft Line. 
 
 2. THE River Madre in NatoUa is faid to 
 have fix hundred Curvatures. 
 
 3. THE River Tara in Siberia is interrupted 
 by fo many windings and turnings, that the Ruf- 
 fians and Siberians, when they fail on it, often car- 
 ry their Boats and their Burdens, by Land, from 
 one Reach to another, to fave Time and La- 
 bour. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVL 
 
 To determine whether the Lakes that fome Rivers 
 feem to ;pafs through, be made by the Rivers them- 
 felves, or are fed by their own proper Springs^ 
 and increafe the Rivers: or whether the Riven 
 that flow from thefn, he the fame that flow into 
 them, 
 
 THERE
 
 Chap. i6. of TJniverfal Geography. 325 
 
 THERE are but fome few Rivers that pafs 
 thro* fuch Lakes ; the Nubia in y^fric^ huh five, 
 the Niger four, and the Rhofie has the Lake of 
 Geneva^ i^c. 
 
 WE faid of thefe Lakes in the foregoing 
 Chapter, that the River which runs in, mult 
 be compared with that which runs out •, and if 
 this be larger than the other, there are certainly 
 Springs in the Bottom which feed that Lake, and 
 the River: but if it be ]efs, or of the fame big- 
 nefs, then is the Lake made and fed by the River 
 which runs into it; and the Caufe of this Lake is 
 the Breadth, Depreflion, and Concavity, of the 
 Chanel i and a Lake may be thus made in any 
 River, as we faid before. 
 
 A ND if the River which runs out, be in a 
 dired; Line with that which runs in, it is to be 
 accounted the fame, or a Part of the fame River, 
 tho' perhaps it may be greater or even lefs, yet I 
 think it is not to be doubted but that it is ftill 
 a Part of the fame. 
 
 YET the Rhone enters the Lake of Geneva^ 
 and flows thro' it, but doth not make or feed 
 it; as appears for the different Colour of the 
 Water of the Lake, and of the River, (and other 
 things) neither doth the Rhone make any Lakes, 
 but is wholly fed by Springs and Rivulets. Tho* 
 I do not fay this is certainly true. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIL 
 
 The further Rivers have run from their Fountains, 
 the more they increafe in Breadth ; and are hroadeji 
 at their Mouths, 
 
 T H E Reafon is ; i. Becaufe that other Rivers 
 
 mix with them, and continually increafe them. 2. 
 
 Becaufe the Declivity of the Chanel is not fa 
 
 y 3 great
 
 326 ^be Ahfohite Fart Sect. IV, 
 
 grejit near the Mouth. 3. Becaufe that Sea-Breezes 
 frequently b!ow the Water np into the River near the 
 Mouth, butdor.otafFe6l it in Places near the Foun- 
 tain. 4. The Sea- Water alfo enters the Mouth of 
 the River when fuch Breezes blow, and makes it 
 wider by it's violent Agitation. 
 
 THE fewer Mouths any River hath, the 
 broader they are. 
 
 RIVERS remarkable for their broad Mouths 
 are ; the great River of the Amazons in South 
 /America, iheKivcr of Si Laurence in Canada, the 
 Zaire in Jfrkdy and the Rio de la Plata in BraftL 
 This laft is faid by fome to be forty Leagues bread 
 at the Mouth, tho* others fay but twenty ; perhaps 
 the former take in the other Mouths of this River. 
 They that have been in Congo relate that the Mouth 
 of the Zaire is twenty eight German Miles broad. 
 Such Rivers as thefe pour fuch vaft quantities of 
 Water into the Ocean, that they take away the 
 Salcnefs of the Sea near the Shore, and difturb 
 it's Motion, for twelve or fixteen German Miles, 
 round them» 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIII, 
 
 Rivers often carry along with them Particles of various 
 Metals and Miner cils y as alfo of Sand, and of fat 
 and oily Bodies. ^-^* '^'' ■ 
 
 THE following Rivers are auriferous, that is, 
 have Grains of Gold mixed with their Sands, 
 viz. I. Some in Japan. 2. Some in the adjacent 
 Iflands to Japan. 3. A Brook called Jrroe\ which 
 iprings from the Foot of the Mountains of the 
 Mooii \n Monomotapa {where there are Gold Mines)^ 
 and falls into the River Magnice. 4.. Some in Guinea^ 
 where the Negroes gather the Grains, and fepa- 
 rate them from the Sand to exchange with the 
 
 2 Europeans,
 
 C H A p. 1 6. of Vniverfal Geography. 327 
 
 Europeans, who fail thither for that Purpofe. If the 
 Particles are very fmall they call it Gold-Duft, 
 which is the bed, and needs but Httle cleanfing. k. 
 Inall the Brooks about the Q\iyo\ Mexico^ there are 
 found Grains of Gold, efpecially after Showers of 
 Rain ; but there are feldom any found but in the 
 rainy Seafons. 6. In Peru. 7. In Sumatra. 8, In 
 Cuba. 9. In Hifpaniola, and other adjacent Iflands. 
 10. In Guiana^ a Province of South America. 11. 
 In the Rivulets of the Caribbees, there are found 
 great Lumps of Gold after Showers of Rain. The 
 Inhabitants caft Nets into the Rivers when thefe 
 are out, and catch the Sand, from which they 
 can eafily feparate the Gold. 12. There are fe- 
 veral Rivers and Fountains in the Countries near 
 the Alps in Germany., particularly in the County 
 of Tyroly from whofe Waters they extrafl Gold 
 and Silver, tho' there be no Grains of either Metal 
 to be perceived in the Water, they lie in fuch fmail 
 Particles or Atoms. The Rhine alfo, and the 
 Elbe has golden Clay in feveral Places. The 
 'Tagus, OT Tago., a moft celebrated River in 5';)^2>/, 
 was formerly famous for carrying Gold-Sands at 
 the Bottom: but there are none now j nor do I 
 hear of much Riches got that way out of any River 
 in Europe, tho' fome boaft of a fmall Rivulet in 
 Hejffc, which has Gold mixed with it's Sand j but 
 I have not read it in any Author of Credit. 
 
 NO Rivers, which in like manner produce SiU 
 ver, are taken Notice of by Authors ; yet it is 
 not to be doubted but there are as many if not 
 more of this Sort alfo; only becaufe Silver is not 
 fo eafily difcerned from the Sand, and no great 
 Profit is expected to requite the Pains of extra- 
 cling it, no Body has thought it worth their while 
 to take Notice of it. And for this Reafon there 
 hath been no mention made of thofe Rivers that 
 carry Grains of Iron, Copper, Tin, ^c. except 
 ¥4 «f
 
 328 "The Ahjolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 of fome few-, iho' without doubt there are great 
 Numbers of them in the World, at whofe fur- 
 prizing effedls Men are amazed; and fuperficial 
 Philofophershave here recourfe to occult Qualities. 
 If we obferve the River in Hi^ Germany which 
 turns Iron intoCopper fas iscommonly thought), we 
 admire that a Horfe-fhoe of Iron fhould, by hang- 
 ing in it for fome Time, be turned into one of 
 perfe«fl Copper. Bur, in truth, the Iron is not 
 changed into Copper (as is vulgarly fuppofed), but 
 the Grains and Particles of Copper and Vitriol 
 that are in this River, moving with the Water, 
 corrode the Iron, whofe Particles being removed, 
 thofe of Copper fucceed in their Places. 
 
 NEITHER is there much Notice taken of 
 fuch Rivulets as are impregnated with various kinds 
 of Earth, Salt, and other Foflils, but we fliall treat 
 largely of mineral and metallic Springs, in the fol- 
 lowing Chapter. 
 
 FROM this Mixture of different Particles pro- 
 ceeds a ftrange Diverfity of Waters, in Rivers 
 and Wells. Some Water if you boil Meat in it, 
 makes it black, which is a Sign that it is impreg- 
 nated with Iron ; nor will Peafe boil foft fo foon 
 in this, as in other Water that is fomething fat 
 and oily. Neither can the fame Beer be made of 
 different Waters. That Water which hath Par- 
 ticles of Iron in it we call hard Water; but if it 
 be mixed with fat and oily Particles, we call it foft 
 Water. The Elbe is a foft Water River, as we 
 may call it, which fas Experience fhewsj is owing 
 to the clayey and fruitful Ground it wafhes. And 
 every other variety of Water arifes from the dif- 
 ferent forts of Earth, thro' which the Spring or 
 River is carried, whether it be clayey, rocky, c,r 
 metallic, i^c, 
 
 PRO-
 
 Chap. i6. of Unherfal Geography, 329 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 ^he Waters of mojl Rivers differ in Colour ^ Gravity, 
 and other ^alities. 
 
 FOR fome Waters are black and fome dufky, 
 fome incline to a red Colour, and others to a 
 white. 
 
 AND this difference is bell obferved when two 
 Rivers meet, where we can difcern the V/ater of 
 each diftindly, after they have run fome Paces 
 in the fame Chanel ; alfo by this we may perceive 
 their different Gravity, by Reafon that one tends 
 more to the Bottom of the Chanel than the other. 
 
 THE Water of the River Ganges is accounted 
 very light and wholefome, and the Emperor of 
 Guzarat, or the Great Mogul, in whatever place 
 he is, takes care that this Water be carried along 
 with him in Bottles, of which he alone drinketh. 
 Others will have the Nile to produce the fofteft 
 and mod wholfome Water. Heavy Water is for 
 the moft Part impregnated with Iron or Mercury. 
 
 TO underftand the Nature of great Rivers we 
 muft look into the Rivulets that compofe them ; 
 (for the Rhine receives many mineral Rivers, and 
 the Danube takes in fuch as carry Gold, Iron, 
 Vitriol, ^c.) from whence their different Quali- 
 ties arife, tho' moft Fpuntains have fomething of 
 thcfe in them. 
 
 PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 Some Rivers, at a fet Time of the Tear, rife beyond 
 their Banks, and overflow the adjacent Countries. 
 
 THE firft and moft celebrated among thefe is 
 the Nile J which fwells to fuch a degree that ic covers 
 
 all
 
 330 ^oe Abfolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 all the Land of Egypt, except the Hills. The 
 Deluge begins about the feventeenth of June j and 
 increafes forty Days, and decreafes as many, fo 
 that at this Time, all the Cities, which are moft 
 of them built upon Hills : appear like fo many 
 Iflands. Antiquity hath given a large Account 
 of this Inundation, becaufe in that Part of the 
 Earth which was then known (before the eaftern 
 and'weftern Parts were difcovered) no River wa^ 
 found to be the fame, except the Niger, which 
 therefore wasfuppofed ro communicate with the 
 Ntk under Ground. Seneca has defcribed the In- 
 undation of the Nile the beft of all the Antients, 
 and therefore I cannot but give it in his Words. 
 'THE Nile (fays be) isincreafed in the middle 
 
 * of Summer, from before the rifing of the little 
 
 * Dcg-Star, to beyond the Autumnal Equinox. 
 < Nature hath placed this moft noble River in the 
 
 * Sight of all Mankind, and ordered it fo, that 
 
 * it fhould overflow -Eg)'/)/ at aTime when the Earth, 
 
 * being drieft with the Summer Heat, might fuck 
 
 * in more of it's Water, and fufficiently quench 
 
 * it's annual Thirft. For in that part of Egypl 
 ' which lies towards Ethiopia there are few or no 
 
 * Showers, and thofe that fall do not refrefli the 
 
 * Earth, which is unaccuftomed to Rain-Water. 
 
 * Egypt builds her whole hope upon this, and 
 
 * is fertile, or barren, according as the River af- 
 ' fords it more or lefs Water. The Hufband- 
 ' man never minds the Heavens, and the Poet 
 
 * Oviddoe^ not jeft when he fays. 
 
 T'he Herbs hefeech not Jove to pour 
 \x ■ Himfelf upon them in a Shower. 
 
 * If we knew where it begins to increafe, we might 
 « perhaps find out the Caufe of it's Increafe. But 
 s after it had wandered over vaft Pefarts, and 
 J * made
 
 C H A p. 1 6. of Univerfal Geography, 331 
 
 « made it's way thro' Fens and Marfhes, and un- 
 ' known Countries, it collefts it*s diforderly Wa- 
 
 * ters about Philas. The Ifland of Philai being on 
 ' every fide rocky and rugged, is waflied by two 
 
 * Rivers whicii there come together and furround 
 ' the whole Ifland.Thefelofing their formerNames, 
 ^ mixtogether and are called the Nile, v/hich being 
 ^ increafed in breadth, glides gently from thence 
 
 * thro* Ethiopia, and the fandy Defarts that afford 
 
 * a Paffage to the Commerce of the Indian Sea. 
 •* The Cararafls afterward receive it, which fill the 
 
 * Eye with fomething great and amazing •, there the 
 
 * Nile rufhes againft the broken Mountains in it*s 
 ^ way, and is forced in to the narrow Paflages 
 
 * and Hollows that are made in the hard Rocks, 
 
 * dafliing againft the Stones that obftrud: it's Cur- 
 
 * rent, and overflowing fometimes all the obftacles 
 « that interrupt it. Here it's Courfe is obftru(fled, 
 
 * which makes it rife in waves and furges : and 
 
 * there it is confined between two Rocks, and frets 
 « and foams to be enlarged •, fo that it's Waters, 
 
 * which before glided gently along, beingnow put 
 " into a violent Agitation, rufh from one Rock 
 
 * to another, and make it appear more like a 
 
 * Torrent than a River. Now it looks thick, mud- 
 
 * dy, and troubled, and half covered with Froth, 
 
 * which is not it's natural Colour, but owing to the 
 
 * Injury of the Places it fiowed thro'. At length 
 
 * having freed itfelf from all Obltacles, it falls on 
 
 * a fudden from a prodigious Height, and with 
 
 * a Noife dreadful to the Country thereabouts; 
 
 * which a Colony that were placed there, by the 
 
 * Perfians, could not endure; their Ears being 
 
 * fo ftunned with the continual Noife, that they 
 
 * were forced to tranfport themfelves to more 
 
 * quiet Habitations. The incredible Boldnefs of 
 
 * the Inhabitants is reported among the Miracles 
 ? of thi$ River, They get into their Boats by 
 
 * pairs
 
 332 ^he Abfolute Part Se c T. IV. 
 
 pairs, the one guides it, and the other throws 
 out the Water, and after they have tumbled 
 feme Time among the raging Waves of the 
 Nile^ they get into the narroweft Chanels, and 
 avoid as much as pofTible the dangerous Creeks 
 in the Rocks ; then guiding the Boat with their 
 Hands, they are carried headlong down the 
 middle of the Current, by the force of the 
 whole River, and when the Specftators are in 
 great Fear, and begin to lament, believing they 
 are overfet and drowned by the great Weight of 
 the Water, yet they are in an inrtant feen failing 
 a great way from the Place where they fell down, 
 being carried as fwift as a Stone out of an Engine. 
 Nor does the Boat in it's Fall overfet, but is 
 carried fafe into the fmooth Water. The firft 
 rifing of the Nile is perceived about the fore- 
 mentioned IQe of PhiiaSy a little way from whence 
 it is divided by a Rock (called, by the Greeks, 
 Ahaton) which none ever afcend but their Ru- 
 lers : there the rifing of the River is obferved 
 and marked upon the Sides of the Rock. A 
 great way below this there are two eminent 
 Rocks, called, by the Inhabitants, the Veins of 
 the Nile, from which a great Force of Water 
 floweth i yet not fo much as to do any harm to 
 Egypt. The Priefts throw Offerings in at thefe 
 Mouths, and the Governours Gifts of Gold, 
 while the holy Rites are performing. From this 
 Place the Nile feems as if it had got new Strength, 
 and is rolled along a narrow and deep Chanel, 
 being hemmed in by the Mountains on each 
 Side, and hindered from enlarging it*s Breadth, 
 When it comes to Memphis, it is again at Li- 
 berty, and wanders over the Country, dividing 
 itfelf into Rivulets, and diifufing it*s Streams 
 over ^\[ Egypt, thro' innumerable Canals, made 
 by Art as commodious as pofllble. At firft it
 
 Chap. i6. of TJniverfal Geography. 33^ 
 is divided, but the Waters being continued, ic 
 ftagnates and appears like a large troubled Sea. 
 The Breadth of the Country, thro' which it is 
 extended, breaks the Violence of it's Current, 
 being no lefs than the whole Land of Eg-jpK 
 As much as the Nile increafes, fo much do their 
 Hopes for that Year ; and the Hufbandman is 
 not deceived who computes his product by the 
 Meafure of the River. It brings troubled Wa- 
 ter and Mud upon the fandy and dry Soil, and 
 leaves it's Dregs and Filth upon the Ground 
 that is moft chapped with Drought, and what- 
 ever clammy Fatnefs it brings along with it, 
 is fprinkled upon the drieft Places ; fo that ic 
 manures the Ground two ways, by watering it, 
 and covering it withMud •, but the Places it doth 
 not reach are bare and unfruitful. If it increafe 
 above fuch a height it does not fo well. The 
 Nature of this River is alfo wonderful ; for when 
 other fmall Rivers wafte and walh out the Fat- 
 nefs of the Earth, the Nile, by how much it ex- 
 cels others in Greatnefs, is fo far from wafting 
 and eating out any Thing, that it rather adds 
 new Vigour to the pining Ground, and at lead: 
 puts it into a better Temper, by faturating 
 the fandy Places with Slime and Mud i fo thac 
 Egypt does not only owe the Fertility of it's 
 Soil to the Nile, but even alfo the Soil itfelf. 
 When it overflows the Fields, it makes a plea- 
 fant appearance, for the Plains and Vallies lie 
 hid under the Water, and the Towns, appearing 
 like Iflands, are only to be feen ; and they have 
 no Commerce one with another in the inland 
 Places but by Boats ; the lefs alfo the People 
 fee of their Lands, the more they rejoice. When 
 the Nile is confined within it's Banks, it is poured 
 into the Sea thro' feven Mouths, and every one 
 
 * of them hath the appearance of a Sea, befides 
 
 ' feveral
 
 334 *^^ Abjolute Tart S e c t. I V. 
 
 * feveral other fmall Branches and Canals that arc 
 ' cut from one Shore to another. Moreover it 
 
 * breeds living Creatures, equal in Bulk and 
 
 * Noxioufnefs to any at Sea, from whence one may 
 
 * judge of it's greatnefs, by it's affording Room 
 
 * to play in, and Suftenance fufficient for fuch 
 
 * vaft Animals. BabilluSy the beft of Men, and 
 
 * Ikilled in all kinds of Learning, relates, that 
 
 * when he went Governour into Egypt he faw 
 
 * at the Heradeotic Mouth of the Nile Cwhich is 
 
 * the greateft) a Company of Dolphins coming 
 
 * from the Sea, that were met by a Troop of 
 
 * Crocodiles from the River, as it were to give 
 " one another Battle. The Dolphins, tho' they 
 
 * are harmlcfs Animals, and do not bite, yet 
 ' they were too powerful for the Crocodiles, 
 *■ whofe Backs are hard and impenetrable even 
 ^ to the Teeth of larger Animals than themfelves, 
 ' but their Bellies and lower Parts are foft and 
 ^ tender -, into thefe the Dolphins, fwimming un- 
 ^ der Water, thruil their long Spikes, or prickly 
 ' Fins, which they carry upon their Backs, and 
 ' wounded them fo that they let out their Bowels, 
 
 = by which feveral of them being killed, the reft 
 ' turned their Tails and fled. They are Crea- 
 
 * tures that fly from the bold, and purfue the timo* 
 ' rous i nor do the Inhabitants of Tentyra over- 
 come them lo m.uch by their natural or fupe* 
 
 ■ rior Valour, as by their Raflmefsand Contempt 
 of them i for they follow them of their own 
 Accord, and drive them into the Snares of Nets 
 that are fpread for them -, tho' a great many of 
 them, that have not Courage enough to purfue 
 like the refl:, aredeftroyed. Theophrajius rclsiteSf 
 that the Nile once brought down Sea-Water ; 
 and it is certain that when Cleopatra reigned it 
 did not rife for two Years, viz in the eleventh 
 and twelfth Years of her Reign ; which they fay 
 
 * portended
 
 C H A p. 1 6. of Ufiivejfal Geography, 3 3 j 
 
 * portended bad Fortune to two great Perfons, 
 
 * viz. to Aniori'j and Cleopatra^ who foon after 
 
 * Joft their Empires. Callimachus relates, that the 
 
 * Nile in former Ages did not overflow for nine 
 
 * Years. 
 
 ' N O W I come to enquire into the Caufe of 
 
 * the Nile*^ overflowing in Summer, and I fhall 
 
 * firft begin with the Opinions of the Antients. 
 
 * Jnaxagoras was of Opinion, that the melted 
 ' Snow is poured down, from the Mountains of 
 
 * Ethiopia into the Nile, and makes it overflow ; 
 ' and all the Antients believed this to be the 
 ' Caufe ; JEfchylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, have 
 
 * taught the fame. But this is evidently falfe 
 
 * for feveral Reafons: Firft Ethiopia is the 
 ' hotteft Country upon Earth, as appears from 
 ' the tawny or Sun-burnt Colour of the Inhabi- 
 ' tants, and the Troglodytes vfho build their Houfes 
 ' under Ground: the Rocks alfo are as hot as 
 
 * Fire, not only at Noon but even at the clofe 
 
 * of the Day 1 the Duft under foot is fo hot that 
 ^ Men cannot walk upon it ; Silver is unfoldered ; 
 ' the Joints of Images are disjoined, and what- 
 ' ever is laid on them for Ornament diflblves or 
 ' is peeled off-, the South Wind, which blows 
 ' from thefe Places, is immoderately hot, and 
 ' thofe Creatures, as Serpents, (^c. that elfewhere 
 ' ufe to hide themfelves in the Winter, never 
 ' withdraw there, but arc found in the open Field 
 ' all the Year. There is no Snow nor heavy 
 ' Rain falls at Alexandria, which is a great way 
 ' removed from thefe immoderate Heats. How 
 ' therefore fhould a Country fubie<5i: to fo much 
 ' Heat, be covered with Snow all the Winter ? 
 
 ' Some Mountains indeed may have Snow on them 
 
 * there, but no more than the Ridges of Thracia 
 
 * or Caucafus ; and the Rivers that flow from thefe 
 ' lafl:, fwell in the Spring, and the beginning of 
 
 * Summer,
 
 336 'The Abfolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 * Summer, and are lefs again in Winter; becaufe 
 
 * that in the Spring the Snow is waflied down 
 
 * by the Rain, and if any is left it is melted by 
 
 * the firll Heat of the Sun. Neither the Rhine, 
 
 * RhojiCj IJler, nor Cayjler, are fubjedl to this ; they 
 ' only are out a little in Summer, tho* the Snows 
 
 * are very deep on the northern Mountains. The 
 
 * Phafis and the Boryjihenes would alfo rife at that 
 
 * time, if the Snow could produce great Rivers 
 
 < againft Summer. Moreover, if this were the 
 
 < Caufe of the Increafe of the Nile, it would flow 
 ' mofl: at the beginning of Summer j for then 
 ' the Snow^ being large and entire, is melted in 
 ' greater Quantities. But the Nile is in it's Gran- 
 ' dure four Months, and is then always the fame. 
 ' If we may believe 'Thales, the anniverfary North 
 « Winds refifl the Defcent of the Nile, and hinder 
 ' it's Courfe, by driving the Sea in at the Mouths 
 ' of it's Chanels, fo that being repulfed it runs 
 
 * back upon itfelf ; and is not increafed, but be- 
 ' caufe it cannot find a Paffage, it overflows and 
 ' breaks out in every Place where it can make 
 ' it's Way. Euthyinenes, of Marfeilles, fides 
 ' with him, and gives this Tefl:imony : I have 
 ' failed, fays he, in the Atlantic Sea ; whence the 
 
 * Nile flows larger as long as the anniverfary 
 ' North Winds blow, becaufe that then the Sea, 
 ' being urged by the Winds, replenifh it's Stream •, 
 ' but when they ceafe, the Sea grows calm, 
 ' and the Nile returns with lefs Force. Befides, 
 ' the Sea- Water is alfo fweet, and the Monfters 
 ' in it refemble thofe of the Nile. But where- 
 ' fore then, (fay I) if thefe Vv^inds make the Nile 
 
 * fwell, doth it rife before they begin to blow, 
 ' and continue after they are over ? alfo why 
 ' doth it not grow greater when they blow ftrong- 
 
 * er.'' for it is not increafed or leflened, when 
 ' they blow more or lefs, which it fliould be, if 
 
 2 « it
 
 Chap, i 6. of Vniverfal Geography, 337 
 
 it depended upon their Force. Moreover, thefe 
 Winds blow againft the Shores of Egypt^ and 
 the Nile dcfcends the contrary Way againft them, 
 but why (hould it not flow from whence they 
 blow, if it hath it's Origin from them ? Befidcs, 
 it would flow from the Sea pure and green, 
 not troubled and muddy as it doth now. Add 
 to this, that innumerable Witnelfes contradicSb 
 this Teftimony, and tho' Men might lie fafely 
 and put any Fables upon us, as long as the 
 Coafts were unknown ; but now the foreign 
 Coafts are frequented by Merchant-Ships, yet 
 none of them mention the green Colour of the 
 Nile^ or that the Sea hath any other Tafte than 
 ufual ; which is alfo difagreeable to Nature, for 
 the Sun evaporates the lighteft and frefiiefl: 
 Particles. Befides, why doth it not increafe in 
 Winter, when the Sea is fometimes raifed with 
 greater Winds than thefe annual ones, which 
 are commonly moderate -, and further, if it pro- 
 ceeded from the Atlantic Sea it would cover 
 Egypt at once, and not by Degrees as it does. 
 Oenopides of Chios fays, that in Winter the Heat 
 is kept under Ground, and therefore Dens and 
 Caverns are then hot, and Fountain- Water is 
 warm alfo, that the Veins of the Earth are dried 
 up by the internal Heat ; but in other Countries 
 the Rivers are repleniflied with Rain : only the 
 Nile^ which is not fupplied with Rain, is lefTened 
 in Winter, and increafes in Summer, when the 
 interior Parts of the Earth are cold, and the 
 Fountains are frefh and cool. But if this were 
 true, all the Fountains would increafe, and riini 
 over in Summer. Befides, the fubterraneous 
 Heat is not greater in Winter, tho' Water, Caves, 
 and Wells, are then warm, becaufe they do not 
 admit the external cold Air ; fo that they are not 
 abfolucely hot, but only exclude the cold : for 
 L. L Z * this
 
 338 lie Abfolute Fart S e c t . 1 V . 
 
 *• this Reaibn they :ire cold in Summer, becaufe 
 ' the hot Air is kept from them. Diogenes Jpollo- 
 ' niates lays, that as the Sua draws Moilture to it, 
 ' fo the dry and parched Earth draws it from the 
 ' Sea and other Waters ; for it is impofiible that 
 ' one Part of the Earth Ihould be dry, when ano- 
 ' ther is moiil, becaufe it is all over perforated and 
 ' full of Intercourfes, thro' which the dry Places 
 « draw Moilture from the wet, other wife they 
 ' would long fince have been burnt up. Eor this 
 
 * Reafon, the Sun draws the Waters to it, and the 
 
 * meridian Places that have moil need of it -, alio 
 *■ where the Earth is mofl dried, it draws moft 
 ' Moifture to it. As in Lamps, the Oil runs to- 
 
 * wards the Place where it is confumed, fo the Wa- 
 ' ter runs towards that Place where the Earth is 
 
 * parched up with Heat. From whence therefore 
 *• fnould it come but from the cold northern Parts? 
 
 * Does not the Proponiis for this Reafon conftantly 
 ' flow into the lower Seas, not as others do by a 
 
 * Flux and Reflux, but by a conftant and rapid 
 ' Courfe towards the fame Point ? And unlefs by 
 
 * the/e Intercourfes, Places that wanted were re- 
 ' pleniihed from thofe that abounded, the Earth 
 ' would be foon dried to Duft, or laid under Wa- 
 ' ter. I would willingly afic Diogenes^ why, fince 
 ' the Sea and all Rivers meet together, they are 
 ' not larger in all Countries in the Summer ? The 
 ' Sun fcorches Egspt more than other Countries, 
 ' and therefore the Nile increafes more : and in 
 ' other Parts of the Earth there is alfo fome in- 
 ' creafe of the Rivers. But I afl< him, why then 
 
 * is there any Part of the Earth without Moifture, 
 ' fince the hotter it is in any Place the more Moi- 
 ' (lure it draws from other Countries ? And laftly, 
 ' why is the Nile fo fweet, if it receives it's Water 
 ' from the Sea ? For no Water is fo fweet as the 
 
 * Water of the NiU: 
 
 FROM
 
 C H A p. 1 6, of V?iherfal Geography. 339 
 
 FROM this Paficige of Seneca we gather 
 the Opinions of the Ancients (efpecially of the 
 Greek Philofophers) about the Caufe of the In- 
 undation of the Nile. But none of them are true, 
 becaufe in thofe times no Body had travelled out 
 of Europe, fo far as the Springs of the Nile, or 
 had vifited the Nations that border on them, which 
 are very remote from Egypt. But the Matter 
 is now well fearched into, and the true Caufe 
 is found out, fince the Portuguefe, and alfo the 
 Englijh and Dutch, trade with the Nations that 
 border upon thefe Springs, in the Kingdoms of 
 Congo ^ Angola, Sofala, Moza?nbique, (^c. (g). From 
 
 thefe 
 
 {g) Since we feem to have a 
 better Account of the Nik than 
 our Author had in his Time, it 
 will not be amifs to tranfcribe a 
 New Defcription of it from Mr 
 Salmon'' s Prefent State of all Na- 
 tions, Vol. 5. Pag. 10, II. 
 
 * The River Nile, or Ahayics, 
 
 * which in the Aby£me Lan- 
 
 * guage fignifies the Father of 
 
 * Rluers, hath it's Sources as is 
 
 * generally held, in ii or 12 
 
 * Degr. of northern Latitude in 
 
 * the Empire of Abyfjinia : but 
 
 * whether the /*or///^«f/^Jefuits, 
 
 * as is pretended, or any other 
 
 * Perfons, have difcovered the 
 
 * very Fountains it ifllies from, 
 
 * is very much queilioned. I 
 
 * perceive, the Country where 
 
 * it rifes, as fome of the Natives 
 
 * relate, is covered with valt 
 
 * impenetrable Woods. This 
 ' River runs a Coarfe of about 
 
 * Fifteen hundred Miles from 
 
 * South to North for the molt 
 
 * Part, and a Hrtlebeiow Ctz/r;;, 
 
 * dividing itfelf into two Bran- 
 ' ches, oncinclining to the Fail: 
 
 and the other totheWcil, fall 
 into the Mediterranean ; the 
 two Mouths being about a 
 Hundred Miles afunder. As 
 for any other Branches of this 
 River our Modern Travellers 
 take no Notice of them, and 
 probably thofe that have been 
 mentioned by antient Writers 
 were only Canals cut from one 
 of thefe,particularly theC««i?/ 
 which was made to convey the 
 Water from the River to Alex- 
 andria feems in our Maps to be 
 laid out for one : However cer- 
 tain it is, that there are no o- 
 ther Branches navigableat this 
 Day than thofe of Damietta, 
 and Rojfctto. W'hile the River 
 is contained within the Bounds 
 of the ordinary Chanel, I do 
 not find it is broader at Old 
 Cairo than the Thames at Lon- 
 don, and in the dryefl Seafcn 
 of cheYearisfordablein many 
 Places. In the upper Parts of 
 the Stream there are feven 
 Cataratls, where the Water 
 falls iniheets from a very great 
 Z 2 ♦ Height»
 
 340 ^?"^'^ Ahjhlute Fart S e c t. IV. 
 
 thcfe we iinderftand that the Fountains of the 
 ]>iilc are in the great Lake Zaire^ ficuated in the 
 Foreland ot ^jrica^ in the middle between the 
 cailern and weftern Shore, as was laid in the for- 
 mer Chapter. Near to this Lake are feveral 
 Ridges ot Mountains, particularly thofe called the 
 M cunt ains of the Moon ^ and of «St'/Zj, between v/hich 
 the Lake licth as in a Valley among the Moun- 
 tains. And becaufe thefe Places lie on the South 
 Side of the. Equator, the Motion of the Sun re- 
 quires that it fhould be Winter with them when 
 it is Summer with us •, but by Reafon of their 
 fmall Diftance from the Equator, they have little 
 or no cold Weather, but Rain (inftead of Snow) 
 for two Hours before and after Noon, every 
 Day, in the Kingdom of Congo. And the 
 Clouds (fcarcely ever permitting them to fee the 
 Sunj feem to cover the Tops ot the Mountains, 
 and pour down continual Showers of Rain upon 
 thofe mountainous Places ; which flow from thence 
 like Torrents, and have their Confluence in the 
 Lake Zaire ; from whence they are difcharged 
 into the Chanel of the A%, Coanza^ Zaire^ and 
 other Rivers, which have their Rife from this 
 Lake *, but they do not overflow fo much (tho* 
 the Zaire makes an Inundation every Year in the 
 fame manner) as the N'lle^ becaufe their Chanels 
 are deeper, and after a fhort Courfe they exone- 
 rate themfelves into the Sea ; yet all of them in- 
 creafe at the fame time, and difgorge a vafl: 
 quantity of Water into the Ocean. Therefore it 
 
 * Height, caufing a prodigious * fwcUed by thofe hea-vy Rains 
 
 * Noife, but thro' Z,otiw £^_}/)/ * which conflantly fall within 
 ' it Aides along with a very ' the Tropics in the beginning 
 
 * gentle Stream, and Paffengers ' of the Sutniner ; and thefe 
 ' arefeldom furprized by Tcm- * are the Occafion of it's over- 
 ' pells on it. 'Tis oblcrved, ' flowing the low Lands of 
 
 the Water is very thick and ' Egypt annually.' 
 tr.uddy, efpecially when it is 
 
 appears
 
 CiiAP. 1 6. of Unhcrfal Geography. 341 
 
 appears that the Inundation of the Nile is caufcd by 
 the valt quantities of Water it receives from tiicle 
 continual Rains ; but the Caufe of thcfc Rains is 
 unknown, tho' it be likely they proceed from the 
 (lime that generates Rain and Snow with us in 
 Winter, which make Inundations not orJy in the 
 Nth but in our Rivers, when they fall in a greater 
 quantity than ordinary, as every one knows from 
 his own Obfervations. 
 
 THE Time when the Nile begins to overflow, 
 and alio when it ends, agrees with this Caufe ; 
 for the Winter, or rainy Seafon, in Congo and the 
 mountainous Places, begins in our Spring, about 
 the middle of March or April fwhich is the Time 
 of Autumn to them, viz. from Ma-j the Twenty 
 firit to Jiore the Twenty firft) but is not fo ve- 
 hement as in iW-3}', June., and Jul'^ : in Aiigujl and 
 Seutemvsr it isalfo moderate, and ends in the mid- 
 dle of September. The rifing'of " the A%, as was 
 faid before, begins about the feventeenth of June 
 in this Age. But Herodotus teftifies that the Nile^ in 
 his Time, was a hundred Days in rifing, and 
 as many in falling •, therefore it began to increafe 
 fome Weeks fooner, viz. about the firft q\ June., 
 or in May., and before that it muft have rained 
 fome Time upon the Mountains, bordering upon 
 the Lake, that is, from March to May or June. 
 But the Reafon why it begins to overflow not fo 
 foon now as formerly {viz. in the Time of Hero- 
 dotus., when it feems to have begun in April) is 
 becaufe the Nile, by bringing down Mud and ter- 
 reft rial Matter, hath made the Ground, which it o- 
 verflows, higher, and therefore the Chanel is lower 
 and deeper (as well by this as by being fcoured 
 by the rapid Current) and contains more W^ater 
 than formerly, which is the Reafon that it doth 
 not fo foon overflow it*s Banks. And no doubt 
 but the Nile^ in a great many Ages, rnay not 
 Z 3 overflow
 
 342 I'be Ahjolute Part S e c t. IV. 
 
 overPiOW ii's B.mks at all ; for, by a continual 
 walliing down of the Earth, the Country is raifed 
 and the Banks and Shores grow iiigher, and in 
 Time may make a Chanel big enough to con- 
 tain all the Water of the River when it is at it's 
 Height. 
 
 B U T we have liiid too much of the Nile, and 
 more than we intended, 
 
 THE fecond of thefe Rivers, that overflow 
 the adjacent Countries at a certain Time of the 
 Year, is the Niger, a River in /Ifrica, of no lefs 
 Courfe that the Nile, iho' not fo famous. It over- 
 flows at the fame Time that the Nile does. Leo 
 Jlfricanus fays, it begifis to rife on the fifteenth 
 of June, and incrcafcs forty Days, and decreafes 
 as many. When it is at the Height, People may 
 fail in Boats all over Negroland, tho* not without 
 great Danger. 
 
 T H E third River that overflows is the Zaire 
 in Congo, as v/as faid before •, and to this may be 
 referred other Rivers in the fame Country. 
 
 THE fourth overflowing River, is the Rio de 
 la Plata in Braftl, which waters the adjacent Fields 
 at the fame Time with the Nile, as Maffem ob- 
 ferves. 
 
 THE fifth is the Ganges. 
 
 THE fixth is the River Indus. Thefe two lafl: 
 pour out their Waters upon the Earth in the rainy 
 Seafon, viz. in June, July, and ^ugujl, when the 
 Inhabitants gather the Water into Ponds, and pre- 
 ferve it, that they may be fupplied at other Times 
 of the Year, when there is almoft no Rain. This 
 .Inundation makes the Land very fruitful. 
 
 THE feventh includes a great many, viz. four 
 or five that flow from about the Lake Caamay m 
 moderate large Chanels, and exonerate themfelves 
 into the Bay of Bengal, flowing thro' Pegu, Siam, 
 and other Places. That River which waters the 
 
 Royal
 
 Chap. i6. oflJniverfal Geography. ZW 
 
 Royal City of Siam is called Mcnam^ and over- 
 flows in 'September., Ooiober^ and November^ at 
 which Time the Fields and Streets in the City 
 are all covered with Water, fo that the People are 
 forced to make ufe of Boats to iail from one Houfe 
 to another. This alfo cauics an exceeding Fer- 
 tility. 
 
 1' H E eighth is the River [^Mccon'] in Cambodia^ 
 which overflows in Summer j but is not right placed 
 in Maps. 
 
 TFIE ninth is the River [^Paraguay., which is a 
 Part of the Rio de la Plata] and overflows at the 
 fame Time with ir, and the Nile. 
 
 THE tenth includes thofe in Cormandel in /;/- 
 dia, which overflow in the rainy Months, and 
 are fed by the Rain that is poured from mount 
 Gate. 
 
 THE eleventh is the Euphrates, which over- 
 flows Mefopotamia on fome particular Days of the 
 Year. 
 
 THE twelfth is the River oz/;, or Agus^ in Sufa ; 
 which overflows in Winter. 
 
 I do not remember to have read of any other 
 Rivers, befldes thefe, that overflow annually at a 
 ftated Period, tho' there are feveral that do it mofc 
 Years, as the Oby, the [^Hoambo'] or Tellow River 
 in China, ^c. 
 
 THERE are many Rivers that overflow with- 
 out keeping a fet Time, and indeed fcarce any 
 of the larger Sort but what break over the Banks, 
 at one Time or other, as the Elbe, the Rhine, the 
 JVefer, i^c. And if it were not for the Depth and 
 Capacity of the Chanel, all great Rivers would 
 annually overflow •, for moft of them are vaftly in- 
 creafed in the Spring. And it may fo happen, 
 that a River which did not ufe to overflow may 
 begin to do it yearly, if any Part of the Chanel be 
 raifed higher by Sands, or otherwife, fo as almoft 
 
 Z 4 to
 
 344 ^he Ahfclute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 to equal the Height of the Banks. But to pre- 
 vent this. Men commonly raile the Banks in pro- 
 portion. 
 
 T H E fole Caufe of thefe Deluges is the great 
 quantity of Water which in fome Places is drain- 
 ed from the melted Snow, and in molt others, 
 proceeds from frequent Rains and violent Showers. 
 Yet it is to be admired why the Indus and the 
 Games fhould not overflow at the fame Time that 
 the neighbouring Rivers do, which proceed from 
 the Lake Chaamay ; tho' it may be thought per- 
 haps that this ditierence of Time, is partly owing to 
 the annivcrfary Rains in the adjacent Places, and 
 partly to the Mountains that furround the Sources 
 or Spring- Heads, as we faid of the Nik ; but to 
 avoid Prolixity, we lliali forbear examining every 
 Particular. 'Phe River [Aifiw'] near Parh^ m 
 France^ fometimes fwells lb much, without any 
 more Rain than ordinary, as to ovtifiow the 
 Suburbs of St Marcellus, and do a great deal of 
 Damage. 
 
 THE Reafon why almoft all thefe Deluges 
 make the Fields fertile, is becaufe the Water that 
 overflows them is either melted Snow or Rain, 
 which being light and fpirituous, and containing 
 fulphureous Matter mixed with it in the Air, is 
 more prevalent to make the Ground fruitful, and 
 alfo more wholefome than mineral Water -, and 
 that Rain-Water contains fuch Sulphur and Spirit, 
 appears, i . From the Worms that are bred in it. 
 2. From it's quick Putrefaction. 3. p>om the 
 chemical Diftillation of it. Yet there are fome 
 Rivers that do not make the Land fruitful by their 
 Inundation but rather barren, as the Loire in France ; 
 whilfl: the Seyne, with it's fat and foft Waters^ 
 makes the Land fertile.
 
 Chap, i 6 . of Univejjal Geography. 345 
 
 PROPOSITION XXI. 
 
 51? explain ho'HJ Springs break out oj the Earth. 
 
 WE have fhewed in the fourth Propofidon, 
 whence the Water proceeds that flows out at 
 Fountains ; we now come to enquire how the 
 Colleflions of Waters are made to fpring out of 
 the Earth, which one would think could not be 
 done without a violent Perforation of the Ground. 
 But there are various Caufes that make way for 
 a Spring : i. If there be a Cavity, or Receptacle, 
 in any Place, the Water, of it's own Nature, and 
 without any other Caufe, will diftil and drain 
 into it, and, in procefs of Time, by conftantly 
 pervading the Crannies and Pallagcs, will make 
 them larger, 'till at laft the Cavity be lull, and 
 overflow into a Rivulet ; and the lame may hap- 
 pen if there is no Receptacle, if the Sprirg be up- 
 on the Side of a Mountain, or even upon the Tc p 
 of it. For this Caufe there are feveral Springs 
 found in Woods, and fliady Places, where the 
 Rain- Water moiftens the Earth ; and becaufe it is 
 not fo foon evaporated by the Heat of the Sun, or 
 a free Air, it draws to it by degrees the fecret 
 Water of a future Fountain. 2. The Spirits that 
 are mixed with the Waters yet in the Earth, and the 
 Rarefa6tion of them whereby they take up a larger 
 Spice, often remove the Earth, and make way 
 for Fountains ; for Water is more fpirituous while 
 it is hid under Ground : fubterraneous Fires alfo 
 contribute much to it's Rarefadion. 3. Foun- 
 tains arc brought to Light by Showers of Rain, 
 which pervade the Pores of the Earth, and en- 
 large them, and by mixing with the fubterra- 
 neous Water, draws it to a Head, by a tnutual 
 Coherence or Attraction. 4. Sometimes Foun- 
 
 l. tains
 
 34^ 'T'he Ahfilute Part Se CT. IV. 
 
 tains are opened by Earthquakes ; as the River 
 Ladon which run formerly between Helii and 
 Megalopolis was difclofed by an Earthquake. 5. 
 Sometimes they are dilcovered, by chance, as the 
 Ground is digging. 6. Several have been difco- 
 vered by Animals rooting up the Earth with 
 their Snouts. Thus the firit of the Salt-Springs in 
 Lunenburg was dilcovered by a Hog's rooting up 
 the Ground, and making a Gutter, into which 
 the Water fpouted up, and filled it, and he fac- 
 cording to the nature of them) laid himfelf down 
 in the Water ; when he had got up again, and 
 the Sun had fufRciently dried his Back, fome bo- 
 dy difcovered a certain whitenefs upon him, 
 which, being more narrowly obferved, they found 
 to be white Salt ; then they fought for the Place 
 where he had laid down, and found it to be a 
 Spring, producing Salt ; which made them begin 
 to feek for more, and they foon difcovered feverai 
 others. From this the Town acquired all it's 
 Riches and Splendor, and to this very Day there 
 is kept in the Stadt-houfe of Lunenburg the fame 
 Hog quartered and fmoaked hanging upon a Beam, 
 whofe Parts are grown fo thin, by length of Time, 
 that they feem to be only Pieces of Leather. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXII. 
 
 >f place being given in the Earthy to know if a Fouri' 
 tain or Well may be made in it. 
 
 VITRUFIUS in his Architedure (Book vn'i. 
 cap. J.) learnedly alTigns the Marks by which we 
 may know this, from whom Pliny and Palladia 
 have borrowed what they wrote upon this Subject. 
 Be/onus hath added to it in his Book publifhed the 
 fame Year 1569. We (hall here give Fitruvius's 
 own Words. 
 
 'i * IF
 
 Chap, i 6. of Wtiverfal Geography. 3 47 
 
 ' I F Cfays he) your Fountains do not flow, yoa 
 
 * are to leek out their fubterraneous Feeders, ai.d 
 ' colledl their Waters together, which are thus to 
 
 * be found. A little berore Sun-rifing, lie wjlIi 
 
 * your Face dole to the Earth, in thofe Places where 
 
 * the Water is fought for, and fupporting your Face 
 ' with your Chin upon the Ground, look round the 
 
 * Country -, for by this means the Sight, being uo 
 
 * higher than it ought to be, will not miftake, but 
 ' fee as much of the Country as is upon the fame 
 
 * level -, then where you obferve the Vapours to 
 
 * vibrate backwards and forwards, and to rile up 
 ' into the Air, there you may dig -, for this Sign is 
 ' never obfefved in a dry Place. Moreover, they 
 ' that fearch after Water, ought to confide r the 
 ' Soil, for there are different Sorts of Water in 
 ' different Soils. In chalky Ground the Water is 
 
 * fmall and weak, of no great Depth ; and not of 
 
 * the fweeteft Tafte ; in loofe gravelly Ground it 
 ' is alfo weak, and if it be drawn from a great 
 
 * Way under Ground, it is muddy and bitter •, in 
 ' black Ground, there are found feveral fmall 
 ' Drains and Runnels, the Water of which, being 
 ' colle6ted into Ponds, made in firm and folid 
 ' Ground, has an excellent Tafle \ in Tandy Ground, 
 
 * or among Grit, there is moderate Water, buc no 
 
 * Veins of it found, yet what there is in it is very 
 ' good J in hard gravelly Ground, mixed with Par- 
 ' tides of Coal, you are fure to find excellent, 
 
 * well tailed. Water •, in red flony Ground there is 
 ' plenty of good Water, if it do not fink into 
 ' the Interfaces and wafte away the Stones ; at the 
 ' roots of Mountains, and among Flint Stones, 
 
 * there is the coldeft and moft wholfome Water, 
 
 * and the greateft Plenty of k ; but Springs that 
 
 * are found in low champain Ground, are fair, 
 
 * heavy, warm, and unwholefome ; unlefs they 
 
 * come in fubterraneous Faffages from the Moun- 
 
 ' tains.
 
 348 I'he Abjoliite Part Sect. IV. 
 
 tains, and break out in a part of the Plain 
 that is well fliaded with Trees, for then they 
 excel the Mountain Springs in fweetnefs. There 
 are feveral other Si^gns to find Water by, befides 
 thofe already mentioned •, as if there be found 
 growing in any Place, (lender Bull-rufl-res, wild 
 Willows, Alder Trees, Agnus cajlus^ Reeds, Ivy, 
 or the like, which cannot grow or be nourifhed 
 without moifture (tho' thele alfo ufe to fpring 
 up in Ditches, into which the Rain- Water is 
 drained from the adjacent Fields in Winter, and 
 is there preferved longer than ordinary, but you 
 mud not truft to fuch Placesj only in thofe 
 Countries or Places which have no Ditches, and 
 where thefe Signs appear growing naturally. 
 Water may be lought for. And in thofe Coun- 
 tries where there are no fuch Signs ; to find the 
 Water, let there be dug a Place about three 
 Foot broad every way, and no lefs than five 
 Foot deep, and let there be placed in it, about 
 Sun-fet, a brafs or pewter Difh or Bafon Cwhich 
 is at hand) upfide downwards, bcfmeared all o- 
 ver on the infide with Oil •, let alfo the top of 
 the Place be covered with Leaves or Reeds 
 caft upon the Earth -, the next Day let it be o- 
 pened, and if there be Drops, or a Sweating, 
 in the VefTel, there is certainly Water there. 
 Alfo if there be put in the fame Place a Veflel 
 made of Chalk not boiled, the VefTcl will be dif- 
 folved, or at leaft very moift it there be Water 
 there i if a Fleece of Wool be placed there 
 over Night, and if the next Morning Water 
 may be wrung out of it, it is a Sign that there 
 is plenty of Water in that Place. If a trimmed 
 Lamp, full of Oil and kindled, be put cover- 
 ed into that Place, and the Oil is not fpent the 
 next. Diy, but fome Relicks both of the Oil and 
 
 -the Wick fomething moift is left, it (hews that 
 
 ' there
 
 Chap, i 6. of JJniverfal Geography, 349 
 
 * there is Water there -, becaufe all Heat draws 
 » moilture to it. If a Fire be made there, and the 
 ' Earth be throughly warmed and burnt, and a 
 ' Cloud of Vapours arife, that Place affords Wa- 
 ' ter. When thefe Things are tried, and the fore- 
 
 * mentioned Signs appear, a Well may be funk 
 
 * there, and as foon as Water is found, Chanels 
 
 * may be dug round about to bring it to a Head. 
 ' But thefe are to be fought for chiefly in Moun- 
 ' tains and northern Countries, where the Water 
 ' is more pleafant, wholefome, and plentiful •, for 
 ' they are turned from the Courfe of the Sun, and 
 ' are frequently covered with Woods and Trees, 
 ' and the Mountains themfelves afford cool Shades, 
 ' fo that the direft Rays of the Sun do not reach 
 
 * the Earth to draw out it's moifture. The Val- 
 ' lies between the Mountains alfo receive a greater 
 ' fhare of the Showers, and the Snow is longer pre- 
 ' ferved under the fhade of Woods and Mountains ; 
 ' which being melted, pervades the Pores and Veins 
 ' of the Earth, and is carried to the very Roots 
 ' of the Mountains -, where it feeds fome Fountain 
 
 * or other with Water. But, on the contrary, in 
 ' plain champain Countries, they have feldom 
 ' plenty of Water, and if they have, their Springs 
 
 * cannot be fweet, becaufe the vehement Heat of 
 ' the Sun, being uninterrupted by any Shade, fucks 
 
 * up the moifture-, and if there be any fine, light, 
 ' and wholefome. Water above Ground it is eva- 
 
 * porated by the Heat of the Air, and the hard, 
 ' heavy, and unwholtfome Particles arc only left 
 
 * in thefe Fountains.* 
 
 BU T at this Day, without regarding any Signs, 
 they dig up the Ground fomctimestoa great Depth, 
 where there are, for the moft part, found Veins of 
 Water, or Spring-heads, or Receptacles of Water^ 
 or fubterraneous Rivers. 
 
 OTHERS
 
 3 50 ^v Ahjolute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 OTHERS fuperftkioufly take the Branch of 
 
 a Hazle-Tree, cut down at certain Afpedts of the 
 Planets, and pretend to know thereby where Wa- 
 ter lies concealed. 
 
 PRO PO sit: JON XXIII. 
 
 ^0 make a Well or Fountain in a given Place y if it he 
 
 ^q[fible, 
 
 LET us again ufe the Words of Vitruvius, 
 becauie he was a Perfon well verfed in thefe Af- 
 fairs ; and I myfelf never pradifed any fuch Bufi- 
 nefs. 
 
 ' REASON (fays he in Chapter vii.j mud not 
 ' be defpiled in digging of Wells ; and the na- 
 « ture of Things is to be diligently fearched into,, 
 
 * becaufe the Earth hath feveral Sorts of Matter 
 < in it, and is (as all other Things are^ compo- 
 
 * fe i of four Principles, of which the Earthy Part 
 ' itf.lf is one ; and Moifture, from whence Foun- 
 
 * tains proceed, is another : alfo Fire and Heat, 
 « from whence proceed Sulphur, Alum, and 
 
 * Bitumen, and the thick Spirits of Air, which 
 ' pervading the Pores, Interftices, and Fiffures 
 « of the Earth, gather to the Place where the Well 
 
 * is funk, and fend the natural Vapour they bring 
 ' along with them into the Noftrils, and ftop the 
 ' Motion of the animal Spirits, fo that unlefs 
 » they can quickly get out they immediately 
 ' perifh. But to prevent this, they fliould let 
 
 * down a lighted Candle, which if it continue 
 ' burning, there is no danger in going down -, 
 ' but if it be put out, by the ftrength of the 
 ' Vapour, then they mull dig in other Places 
 ' near this Shaft, and make Tubes Cthat the Earth 
 « may have Noftrils as it were) to difcharge the 
 ' noxious Vapours out of it's Bowels. When thefe 
 
 ' are
 
 Chap. i6. of Vniverfal Geography. 351 
 
 ' are finifhed, and you are come to Water, Jet 
 ' the Well be built round within, but not iot as to 
 « flop the Veins from running ; but if the Earth 
 
 * be hard, and the Veins not quite at the Bottom, 
 
 * then muft Plaiiter-work be made to receive the 
 ' Water from the Ledges and upper Places. To 
 ' make your Plainer durable, let the fineft and 
 
 * hardefl Sand be got, and a certain Weight of 
 
 * Flint broken to powder ; mix the Sand with the 
 
 * belt quick Lime, two Parts of the one to five of 
 ' the other, and add to this the Cement or Powder ; 
 
 * with which plaifter the Sides of the Well to the 
 ' intended Depth, and faften it with Beams of 
 ' Wood nailed into it, left it Ihould fall in. This 
 
 * being done let the Earth in the Bottom be clean 
 
 * taken out as far as the Plaifter-work goes, and 
 ' when it is levelled, ram the fame fort of Plaifter 
 ' upon it, to what thicknefs you pleafe. If this 
 
 * Work be repeated over and over, and the Plai- 
 ' fter laid on thick, the Water, by being ftrained 
 
 * thro* it, will be more refined and made more 
 
 * wholefome ; for the Mud by it's fubfiding will 
 
 * make the Water clearer ; and it will keep it's 
 ' Tafte without any noifome Smell ; otherwife it 
 ' may be needful to add Salt to refine it. 
 
 PROPO S ITION XXIV. 
 
 To know whether Fountain -Water he wholefome, 
 
 OF this Vitruvius writes thus (Book viii. Chap, y.) 
 
 ' The Proof or Trial of Fountains is to be made 
 
 * in this manner. If they bubble out of the Earth 
 
 * and flow, let the Inhabitants that live near the 
 
 * Fountain-Heads be obferved, and if they have 
 
 * ftrong Conftitutions and healthy Bodies, are well 
 ' coloured, without diftortcd Limbs or blear 
 
 * Eyes,
 
 352 I'he Abfolute Part S E c T. IV. 
 
 * Eyes, the Waters are certainly good. In like 
 *- manner if a Well be new funk, take fome of the 
 ' Water and fpr inkle it upon a Veflel made of the 
 ' belt Br.ifs, and if it leave no Spots or Stains, it 
 ' is the bell: of Water. Let it alfo be boiled in a 
 ' brazen Kettle, and if, after it is fettled and pour- 
 
 * ed out, there be no Sediment of Sand or Slime 
 ' at the Bottom, the Water is certainly good. If 
 ' Peafe or Beans be quickly boiled foft in it, it is a 
 ' Sign the Water is good and wholefome. Like- 
 ' w:f if it appear clear and tranfparent in the Foun- 
 
 * tiin, and no Mofs or BuU-rufhes grow in any 
 ' Pfice where it flows, alfo if the Places be no 
 ' way corrupted with Filth, but are of a fine fort 
 ' of Earth ; thefe are all Signs that it is light and 
 ' wholefome Water/ 
 
 PRO PO SIT'ION XXV. 
 
 To make an artificial Fountain in any Place if it he 
 poj/ible. 
 
 A Fountain is faid to be artificial or only appa- 
 rent, when it is fed by a fubterraneous Chanel con- 
 veying Water from a higher Place ; as we fliewed 
 in Propofition V. Such an one as this may be 
 made, if there is any Lake, River, or Fountain 
 near, viz. by cutting a Chanel under Ground from 
 the Place propofed to one of thefe, whereby to 
 convey the Wuter •, as we fliall ftiew in the next 
 Propofition. 
 
 PRC^
 
 Chap. 1 6. cfUniverfal Geography, 353 
 
 PRO FO S iriQ N XXVl. 
 
 'To bring a River from a given Fountain^ or River^ 
 to a ^lace appoi?ited. 
 
 I F the Fountain or River is higher than the 
 pro^ored Place, it will be eafily done by thofe 
 Initruments that are ufed for levelling Places, to 
 convey Water from a certain Hcighc to fuch or 
 fuch a Level. Let there be therefore a Chanel 
 cut from the Fountain or River to the Place pro- 
 pofed, and let it incline, or be more or lefs le- 
 velled, according as you would have the Water to 
 run flow or fwih, for you are not dinted by this 
 Problem. To make Aquedudls that will convey 
 Water with a moderate Celerity, they commonly 
 deprefs the Chanel no lefs than half a Foot in 
 five hundred, otherwife the Water will run too 
 flow, or not at all. Vitruvius requires no lefs 
 than half a Foot in one hundred and no more 
 than a Foot, or at moft a Foot and a half, o- 
 therwife the Courfe will be too fwift and rapid : 
 But if the Fountain be not higher than the given 
 Place, you muft ufe Engines for raifmg the Water, 
 for the making of which you muft confult Mecha- 
 nics : and other things are to be confidered in this 
 Affair. Some -of the Fr^'^r^ write, that the River 
 Seine^ in running from the Arfenal at Paris to the 
 royal Gardens of the Tuilleries, which is five hundred 
 Fathoms, fails fcarce one Foot ; but it is to be con- 
 fidered that in fome Parts of the Chanel there is 
 no need of fo great an Liclination, the Water 
 having acquired fome Force already. By this 
 Problem Rivers are alfo joined, and Canals cut 
 from one to anotiier for the Ufe of Navigation ; 
 as from the Tanais [or Vofi] into the IP^'olga, and 
 V O L. L A a from
 
 3 54 "^^^ Ahjolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 from the Hoambo^ or Yellow River, to the [Kiarn 
 or] Blue River ia China, &c. 
 
 ■PROPOSITION XXVII. 
 
 Some Rivers are remarkable for their long Courfes, 
 others for their Breadth, fome are fa?nous for their 
 Szviftnefs f andothers for the peculiar Nature of the 
 JVater they carry, and fome again for two or more 
 of thefe Prosper ties. 
 
 THIS Propofition requires no Proof. We 
 need only enumerate thofe of the larger fort, viz. 
 that have a long Courfe, and are famous for their 
 Breadth : of fuch there are but fixteen hitherto 
 difcovered. The Nile, Oby, Jenifa, [the River of 
 the Amazons], Rio de la Plata, Parana, Miary^ 
 Oroonoque, Ganges, Danube (h), St Lawrence in 
 Canada, Niger in Jfrica, Nubia, IFolga, the blue 
 and the yellow River m China. 
 
 THOSE famous for Breadth, tho* not of fo 
 long a Courfe, are about twenty. The Indus, Zaire, 
 Coanza, thefe from the Lake Chaamay, the Eu- 
 phrates, Tanais, Petzora, [Maia] Tobol, and Trtifch 
 in Siberia, St Efprit in Africa, Amana in the Ame- 
 rican Cajlile, Magdalen, Julian in Chica, St Jaques 
 in Peru, the Rhine, Elbe, Maes, Boryjlhenes, and 
 Totonteac m New- Britain. 
 
 W E lliall here only trace the Courfe of ten of 
 the largeft Rivers, leaving the more accurate Ex- 
 plication of them and others to fpecial Geography. 
 
 THE Nile, Niger, and Ganges, run almoft in 
 a (Irait Courfe, the reft have many and large Cur- 
 vatures. 
 
 I. THE Nile has it's Fountain in the Lake 
 Zaire, in fix Degrees of South Latitude, and it's 
 
 (kj The Danube i= faid to | Miles in a ftralt Line, from 
 ytrform a Courfe of above 1500 | it's Rife to it's Fall. 
 
 Mouth
 
 Chap. i6. (fXJnlverfal Geography. 3 ^ <• 
 
 Mouth in thirty one Degrees of North. It flows 
 from South to North, and is in fome Places very 
 broad -, but in others narrow, and hath two great 
 Catarads. The length of it's Courfe is about fix 
 hundred and thirty German Miles, or Two thou- 
 fand five hundred and f^ tray Italian; which we 
 may reckon to be Three thoufand for it's Curva- 
 tures. It overflows every Year. 
 
 2. THE Niger (f), a River in Africa, Cfometimes 
 called Senegal) arifes from a Lake of the fame 
 Name, in 5 Degr. of North Latitude. Some have 
 formerly thought it to proceed from the Nile by a 
 fubterraneous Paflage, becaufe it annually over- 
 flows at the fame Time with the Nile. One of it's 
 Mouths is in 1 1 Degr, of Latitude, but the fur- 
 theft is 15 Degr. diftant from the Equator. It 
 flows from Eaft to Weft, and in one Place hides 
 itfelf under Ground, and again emerges. It's 
 Courfe is about 600 German Miles, but lefs if you 
 neglect it's greateft Curvatures, and more if you 
 include them. 
 
 3. TH^ Ganges, m Afia, has it's remote, and 
 not well known, Fountain a great way up in Tar- 
 tary ; fome place it in 35 Degr. of North Latitude, 
 and others further North. It has it's Mouth in the 
 
 (/) De I'lJIe in hisMaps makes in thofe Maps ; and that it is a 
 
 the River l^iger to lofe it's barr'd River, and capable of 
 
 Name at the Lake de Guarde, admitting nothing larger than 
 
 and from thence to the Sea Barks up to the French Settle- 
 
 which in a ftrait Line is 700 mcnts, above which, only flat- 
 
 'Britijh Miles, is called Senegal; bottom'd BoHts can float fo high 
 
 and makes the River Ga/nbia to as Galium: Whereas the Gambia 
 
 have no Communication with isnavigablefor Ships of any Bur- 
 
 th.Q Niger; but we have no luf- then about 50 Leagues above 
 
 ficient Proof that there is any the Englip Settlements, and for 
 
 fuch River as the M^?/-.- But Mr Vefll-lsof 100 Ton up to Bar- 
 
 .Snoiv, late Governour oi James raconda, and fomething higher, 
 
 Fort on Gambia Kivtr, informs (for fo far the Tide prevails) and 
 
 me, that the Senegal hzxh noi is near 1 50 Leagues abovey^iwa 
 
 fo long Courfe as is reprefented Fort. Templemans Sur-vtj. 
 
 A a 2 Latitude
 
 356 The Ahjblute Fart S e c t . 1 V. 
 
 Latitude of 22 Degr. and flows from North to 
 South. It's Courfe is about 300 German Miles, and 
 every Year it overflows it's Banks. 
 
 4. THEO/^), a great and every where broad 
 River in Jfia^ has it's Fountain in the Lake Kan 
 Kifan^ among the Mountains of Tartar-j^ in the 
 Latitude of forty eight Degrees North. It has it's 
 Mouth in fixty nine Degrees of Latitude, and runs 
 a Courfe of about tour hundred German Miles, 
 without It's Curvatures. It divides itfclf in Siberia^ 
 into two Branches, or rather fends forth an Arm 
 which makes a Curvature, and returns to it again, 
 and fo forms an Ifland, in which there is a City 
 built by the Mufcovites and Siberians^ called Jor- 
 
 5. THE Jenifa, a River in Jfia^ hitherto un- 
 known to our Geographers, but taken Notice of by 
 the Mujco-vites. It is faid to be much greater than 
 the Oh), from which it is diftant eaflward, about 
 ten Week's Journey, towards 'Tartar'^. There is 
 a Range of Mountains runs for a great Way along 
 it's eaftern Banks -, and the weftern Shore is inhabi- 
 ted by i\\c\Ton-Gnifins^, It overflows the weftern 
 Shore leventy German Miles every Year in the 
 Spring, when the Inhabitants are forced to betake 
 themlelves, with their Cattle and Tents, into the 
 Mountains on the eaftern Shore. Where it begins 
 and ends is not known, but it is thought to run as 
 long a Courfe as the Oby. 
 
 6. [T H E Maia or Lena'] is far diftant from the 
 Jenija caftward. The eaftern Branches are laid to 
 proceed from the Borders ot China, and the King- 
 dom of Cathaia •, if there be fuch a Place. It's 
 Fountain and Mouth are unknown ; and it is not 
 reckoned one of the largeft fort of Rivers •, 011 ly 
 we are willing to mention it here, becaufe it lias 
 not been taken notice of by any Geographer, no 
 more than tlie Jcnifa and Trtifch, 
 
 .' - . .. 7. THE
 
 Chap. i6. of Ufiherfal Geography. 357 
 
 7. THE River of the AmazotiSy (or Rio de O- 
 rellana from Franafco Orelli) in America^ is thought 
 to be one of the greatelt Rivers upon Earth. It's 
 Fountain is in the Province of ^ulo in the Kingdom 
 ot Pdru^ near the Equator, and it's Mouth, being 
 15 Leagues broad, is in 2 Degr. ot South Latitude. 
 It is laid to run a Courfe of 1500 Spamjh Leagues, 
 by reafon of it's great number of Windings, tho* 
 it extends not above 700 in a llrait Line. Some 
 confound this with, or wi-U have it to be, a Branch 
 of the Aliary. h is in fome Places four or hve 
 Leagues broad, but it receives ii's Water not fo 
 much from Fountains, as from the Rains that fall 
 upon the Mountains of Peru ; and therefore is no- 
 thing nigh fo broad in the dry Seafons. This 
 makes Travellers difligree in their Dcfcriptions of 
 it. 
 
 8. THE River of P/^/<^, Jrgyropolamus^ov Rio 
 de la Piala, in Broji!^ hath it's Fountain in the Lake 
 Xarayes^ and receives a Branch from about Potfijiy 
 and it's Mouth in 37 Degr. of South Latitude, 
 which is faid to be twenty Leagues broad *, but 
 when it overflows, it has a great many Mouths, 
 which are accounted but as one ; for at other times 
 it hath not much Water in it. The Inhabitants call 
 it Paranaguafa^ i. e. 1'be River like a Sen, as iome 
 obferve. 
 
 9. T H E Omardnan is likewife a River of Bra- 
 fil, flowing thro' a long Trade from the Mountains 
 of Peru. Thefe three great Rivers of Bra/il^ viz. 
 the Orellana, the Rio de la Plata, and the 0?nard- 
 nan, meet in certain mediterranean Part?, of Brafd, 
 fo as to form Lakes, from which they again rife fe-= 
 parate. 
 
 10. THE River of St I.azwence flov;s between 
 Canada and New-Holland, in North Amej'ica, and 
 hath it's Fountain in the Lake [Frontenac or] Iro- 
 
 A a 3 " j«o/i.
 
 35S fJoe Jbjolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 quois. It*s Courfe is no lels than 600 German 
 Miles. 
 
 PRO PO S iriON XXVIII. 
 
 There are IVhirlpooh and deep Pits found in fome 
 Rivers. 
 
 THUS in the River Soame in Picardy^ between 
 Amiens and Abbdville^ there is a blind IVhtrJpool, into 
 which the Water rufhes with fuch Violence, that 
 it's clafhing may be heard feveral Miles off. There 
 are many others of this kind. 
 
 .PROPOSITION XXIX. 
 
 River IVater is lighter than Sea IVater, 
 
 THE Reafon is, becaufe Sea Water hath much 
 Salt in it. From whence it happens, that fome 
 things fink to the bottom in Rivers that floated up- 
 on the Sea ; as very often heavy loaded Veflels, 
 which were born up at Sea, fink in the Harbour. 
 However, the Proportion between them is various, 
 and they both differ in Weight in divers Places. 
 We commonly fay, they are as 46 to 45, i. e. 46 
 meafured Ounces of River Water equiponderate 
 45 of Sea Water. 
 
 C HAP,
 
 Chap. 17- of Vniverfal Geography, 359 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 Of Mineral Waters^ hot Baths, and Spates, 
 
 " INCE there are feveral Species of liquid 
 _3 Bodies, or Waters, whofe peculiar Pro- 
 perties feem furprifing, it has given Occafion 
 to Geographers to treat thereof j but all of 
 them hitherto, except a bare Recital of their 
 Names, and a fhort Account of fome of the 
 mofh extraordinary Fountains, have added no- 
 thing to give us an Infight into their Caufe. 
 But we fhall here treat of them more fully, 
 and explain their Caiijes, and alfo fet them in 
 a clearer Light. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 No Water is pure and elementary •, hut contains other 
 Particles mixed with it, fucb as are found in ter- 
 rejlrial Bodies ; and thefe are not only earthy^ hut 
 alfo of various other kinds, as Oil, Spirits, ^c. 
 But that is called Mineral Water zvhich contains 
 fo many of thefe Particles different from the Nature 
 of Water itfelf that from them it acquires fuch re- 
 markable Properties, as affect our Senfes, and 
 makes us take notice of it. 
 
 A a 4 THE
 
 3 6o The Abfolute Part S e c T. I V. 
 
 THE Truth of this Propofition is apparent 
 from Experience, and is proved as well iiom the 
 different Tafres of the Waters as from Diflillation ; 
 and all Naturalilts agree that there is no fuch thing 
 in Nature as pure or fimple Water, or any other 
 Element fcparatcd from others, becaufe oi the con- 
 ilant and various Agitation of the Panicles of 
 Bodies. But in mineral Waters fthat we may ccme 
 clofer to our Suhjed) the caufc of this Mixture 
 is their receiving the fpiriiuous Particles of he- 
 terogeneous Bodies ; for Rain and the very Air itfelf 
 that covers the Water, is impregnated with many 
 different forts of Particles. 
 
 ALL Waters therefore have a Mixture of Par- 
 ticles of another Nature, tho' all have rot the 
 fame Quantity of them ; and tho' there fiow into 
 the Rhuidy the Danube^ and the Elbe, and into all 
 great Rivers, feveral Rivulets impregnated with 
 mineral Particles in fuch Quantities as to affecl 
 tlie Senfes -, yet becaufe, befides thefe, there are 
 many other Brooks that flow into the fame Rivers 
 which are not impregnated with a fenfible Quan- 
 tity of heterogeneous Particles ; and becaufe mod 
 of their Water proceeds from Rain and Dew, 
 therefore thefe heterogeneous Particles are not ea- 
 fily difcovered in fuch great Rivers, tho* they are 
 received by them -, but require to be feparated by 
 Art, if we would., know their Taffe and Qualities. 
 We therefore call that mineral Water which hath 
 fome remarkable Property more than what is ob- 
 ferved in common Water, or hath fo large a Mix- 
 ture of heterogeneous Particles as fenfibly to alter 
 ii's Tafte, 
 
 x^.. ,^^,.u . PRO-^
 
 Chap. 17. of TJniverJal Geography. 361 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 Mineral IVatcrs are of three kinJs. 
 
 SOME are corporeal, (we want a better Word 
 for itj others Spirituous, and the reft both corpo- 
 real and fpirituous. Thofe we call corporeal mi- 
 neral Waters do contain fixed and folid Particles 
 of Minerals and Foffils, which can be Separated 
 from the Water, and ittn with the naked Eye ; 
 and fuch as thefe are of two forts : Some carry large 
 Particles of Minerals and FofTils, whicii may be 
 perceived with little or no trouble in the Water 
 itfelf ; nor are they properly fpeaking mixed with 
 the Water : Such as thele we treated of in the fore- 
 going Chapter, and have in them Grains of Gold, 
 Silver, Cffc. and therefore are called auriferous, 
 argentiferous, ^c. But fuch are not properly called 
 mineral Waters, becaufe they have not thefe Par- 
 ticles mixed with them, but feparate -, neither do 
 they receive any Property or Qiiality from them : 
 yet becaufe Men admire fuch Rivers and their 
 Explication hath a great Affinity with the Defcrip- 
 tion of mineral Waters properly fo called, wc 
 thought fit to mention them under the fame 
 Head ; to which may be added bituminous Foun- 
 tains, ^^c. 
 
 BUT corporeal mineral Waters are more pro- 
 perly fuch as indeed contain lolid Particles of Foffils, 
 but fo fmall and minute that they are entirely mix- 
 ed, and cannot quickly be dillinguifhed by the 
 Sight, unlefs they are made to fubfide by Art, or 
 a long fpace of Time -, or by Concretion are brought 
 to a vifible Mafs, fuch as Salt and fulphurcous 
 Fountains, &c. and chemical Waters in which 
 Metals are diffolved. 
 
 SPIRITUOUS
 
 362 llje Abfilute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 SPIRITUOUS Waters are thofe that con- 
 tain only a volatile Spirit, fuch as is found in Mi- 
 nerals ; but have no rtxcd Particles in them •, and 
 therefore their Compofition can never be made 
 vifible. 
 
 W E call thofe Waters both corporeal and fpi- 
 rituous, which contain not only fixed and folid 
 Particles of Minerals, but alfo volatile and fpiri- 
 tuous : Of all which we Ihall give Examples in the 
 following Propofitions. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 To explain how mineral IVaters are generated.- 
 
 1. IF the Water be carried under Ground with 
 a rapid Courfe among metalline and mineral Earth, 
 which is eafily loofened, it is evident that it wafhes 
 Particles from it, and may carry along with it Grains 
 of thefe Minerals ; and this is the Gener.uion of 
 thefe corporeal mineral Waters that hold Grains in 
 them. 
 
 2. IF the Minerals are imperfecfl and not fo 
 clofely joined, as Vitriol, Sulphur, i^c. or even 
 Salt, which of their own Nature eafily mix with 
 Water -, and if a Rivulet, or Gut of Water, runs 
 thro* Beds or Mines of fuch Minerals, or be fbrain- 
 ed thro' them Cwithout a Chanel or Dudt in fuch 
 a Manner as we explained in Propofition V. of 
 the preceding Chapter) the Water when it breaks 
 out at the Fountain will have fmall Particles of 
 thefe Minerals mixed with it, and will be cor- 
 poreal mineral Water, of a fubtile Compofition, 
 according to the fmallnefs of the Atoms. Now 
 whether the Water can in like manner diflblve or 
 unite with itfelf the Particles of Metals, is to be 
 queftioned, becaufe they are hard and folid, and 
 therefore are not eafily blended with Water. I 
 
 ^ acknowledge
 
 Chap. 17. of Umverfil Geography. 363 
 
 acknowledge this may be done, but not with fimple 
 or common Water, but by a vitriolic and la!t 
 Ipirituous Water, like the yiqua Fortu of the Che- 
 niifts 1 for as Aqua Forth diiiblves Metals into A- 
 toms, and eafily unites them with itfelf, fo that 
 they do not fubfide at the Bottom, unlcfs they be 
 feparated by^Art: in like manner when fuch VVa- 
 ter runs thro' a metallic Earth, it may difTolve the 
 metalline Particles and unite them with itfeif -, and 
 thus are the corporeal mineral Waters of the fecond 
 Sort, accounted for and explained. 
 
 3. BEFORE Metals are formed in the Bowels 
 of the Earth, Steams and Vapours are condenfed 
 about the extant Corners of the Rocks, to which 
 they ftick fall ; being at firft but of a foft Sub- 
 ftance, though they are afterwards hardened by 
 degrees ; if therefore the Water fhould run or 
 gleet thro' the Places where fuch Vapours are in 
 Commotion, it is impregnated with them -, and 
 thus ipirituous mineral, and metalline, Waters are 
 produced. Imperfedl Minerals alio make mineral 
 Waters of their own Nature, alter another Me- 
 thod ; vix. when, being heated by a fubterraneous, 
 or their own proper, heat, they fend forth Spirits 
 and Vapours, as Sulphur, Vitriol, Salt, Coal, i^c. 
 And fuch Fumes and Exhalations are always ftir- 
 red up where there are fuch Minerals ; among 
 which the permeating Water is impregnated with 
 that Spirit. Some think thefe fpirituous Waters 
 may be generated by being only carried thro' a 
 metallic Earth, or by having their Receptacles in 
 it, or in their Mines ; but it is found to the con- 
 trary by Experience, that Water receives no Qua- 
 lity from Metals and Minerals, tho' they fiiould 
 be immerfed in it a great many Years. There- 
 fore, rejefling this Opinion, it is mod reafonable 
 to fuppofe, that thefe Waters receive a certain Spi- 
 rit, from the Seeds of Metals, or firft Principles, 
 
 as
 
 364 1^^(^ Akfolnte Tart S e c t. IV. 
 
 as we may call them ; or we may fay that fuch 
 "Waters are impregnated with the lubtile Spirits of 
 Vitriol, Salt, i^c. by the help of which a Spirit is 
 extra<5ted from hard Metals •, but I do not lay fo 
 great Strefs upon this latter caufe ; for a Queftioni 
 will arife again about the Generation of this fpiri- 
 tuous, mineral, vitriolic, and fait Water. 
 
 FROM thefe together it appears, how mine- 
 ral Waters, both corporeal and fpirituous, are ge- 
 nerated. 
 
 P RO PO S IT'IO N IV. 
 
 There are innumerable Kwds of mineral IP^alers, ac^ 
 cording to ihe Variet\ and Diverjjty of the Particles, 
 they receive from different Minerals. 
 
 WE have fhewed and explained in the former 
 Propofition, how mineral Waters receive thefe 
 Particles ffrom which their extraordinary Qualities 
 arifej from Minerals, or Fofiils. Now becaule there 
 are divers Kinds of Minerals, it hence follows, that 
 mineral Waters are various, and almoft infinitely 
 different in their Qualities-, not confifting of one 
 kind of Water impregnated with only one fort of 
 Mineral, but of various Kinds, mixed with various 
 Sorts. Wherefore mineral Waters are either fimple 
 or mixed i and the Mixed have two, three, four, 
 or more, forts of FofTils in them. 
 
 HENCE are, i. Metallic Waters, as of Gold, 
 Silver, Copper, Tin, Lead, Iron, &?r. 
 
 2. SALT Waters, as of common Salt, Nitre, 
 Alum, Vitriol, i^c. 
 
 3. BITUMINOUS Waters, fulphureous, 
 antimonial, as of Coal, Ambergris, ^c. 
 
 4. WATERS proceeding from various kinds of 
 Earth and Stones, viz^ Limeftone Waters, (which 
 
 receive
 
 Chap. 17. of Univerfil Geography. 365 
 
 receive Particles of Lime- Stones) Chalk, Oker, 
 Cinnabar, Marble, Alabafter, ^c. 
 5. MERCURIAL Waters, i^c. 
 ALL thefe kinds of Waters are to be under- 
 ftood three Ways, as was faid in the fecond Pro- 
 pofition (as all other mineral Waters are), viz. 
 I. Some of them are corporeal, cither fenfibly fo, 
 or by a refined and fubtile Commixture. 2. Others 
 are ipirituous. 3. Others are both corporeal and 
 fpirituous. Thefe Ditt'erences may be applied to 
 the feveral Kinds of mineral Waters. For Lxample : 
 There are Golden Waters which are, i. Corpo- 
 real, that carry Grains of Gold, of fuch Magni- 
 tude, that with fmall Trouble they are difcernable, 
 by reafon of their grofs or courfe Mixture. 2. Cor- 
 poreal, that carry very minute Particles of Gold, 
 well mixed with them ; and tho' the fmalleil Par- 
 ticles of Gold, do of their own Nature fink to the 
 bottom in Water, yet that there are fuch, appears 
 from the Aqua Regia of the Chemifts, in which 
 Gold is diffolved into Atoms ; but this Aqua Regia 
 is not a Simple Water, neither does any Water 
 carry Atoms of Gold in it, unlefs it be before im- 
 pregnated with other mineral Particles. 3. Spiri- 
 tuous golden Waters, that have engendered a Spi- 
 rit and Vapour in the Earth from which Gold is 
 produced. 4. Golden Waters that are both corpo- 
 real and fpirituous, viz. that have both Atoms of 
 Gold, and the Spirit that produces it. 
 
 THUS we are to apply this four- fold Variety 
 to all forts of mineral Waters, whether fimple or 
 mix'd (from whence innumerable Species are pro- 
 duced; for either the Bodies of Fofiils, or their Spi- 
 rits, or the Body of one FofTil with the Spirit of ano- 
 ther, are mixed or engendered in the Water) : fo Lea- 
 den Waters are ot four kinds, viz. i. Vifibly cor- 
 poreal. 2. Corporeal by a fiibtile Mixture. 3. Tin- 
 diured by the fpirit of Lead. 4. Im.pregnaied both 
 
 with
 
 ^66 ^e AhfoJute Tart Sect. IV. 
 
 with the Body and Spirit of Lead. And thefe four 
 Participations ot Minerals are to be apph'ed to mer- 
 curial Waters, i^c. and more efpecially to fait, 
 vitriolic, and fulphureous Waters, becaufe in thefe, 
 Nature icfelf difplays a four-fold Variety ; tho' it 
 is to be doubted, whether there be corporeal Par- 
 ticles of a fubtilc Grain in metalline Waters. Spiri- 
 tuous metallic Waters are alfo very rare ; but the 
 Water of Salt, Sulphur, ^c. both corporeal and 
 fpirituous is very common, becaufe thefe Foflils are 
 found in more Places of the Earth, and in greater 
 Plenty, and their Particles are alfo fooner dafhed 
 to Atoms, and diffolved by the Water ; befide 
 they frequently emit Steams and Vapours. 
 
 LET us explain this four-fold Variety of Par- 
 ticipation by one Example of Gold. 
 
 I. IN the preceding Chapter, Propofition xvi, 
 we enumerated thofe Rivers that carry Grains of 
 Gold, and with this Treafure glad the Hearts of 
 the Natives upon their Banks •, as in the County of 
 ^yrol, and the neighbouring Places, there are fe- 
 veral fuch -, and as we fiid before, the Rhine, the 
 Elbe, the Danube, and feveral other great Rivers, 
 carry Grains of Gold in feveral Places (and alfo 
 other Metals and Minerals) which they receive'from 
 auriferous Rivulets, T. he Rhifie carries Grains of 
 Gold, mixed with Clay and Sand, in many Places, 
 but efpecially at thefe, viz. i. Near Coire, in the 
 Grifons Country. 2. At Mayenfelci. 3. At EgUfau. 
 4. At Sokings. 5. At the Town of AugPl, not far 
 from Bafil. 6. At Newhurg. 7, At Seltz. 8. At 
 JVormu 9. At Mentz. 10. Az Bacherach, 11. At 
 Bon, i^c. The auriferous Rivulets, which the Rhir.e 
 receives, the Reader may fee in Tburnheuferus ; and 
 alfo thofe that run into the Danube, and Elbe. 
 Small Grains of Gold are found in the Elbe in 
 thefe Places : i. At Lolomcritz in Bohemia. 2. At 
 Purn. 3 . At Drefdcn in Mcifen, 4. At Torgaw. 
 
 5' At
 
 Chap. 17. of Utiiverfal Geography. 367 
 5. At Magdeburg. 6. At Lavenburgb Tower, five 
 Miles from Hamburgh. Several otiier auriferous 
 Rivers are given an Account of in the forecitcd 
 Book of '■thurnheufcrm ; and fuch as carry other 
 Metals and Minerals. And thefe are auriferous 
 corporeal Waters, of the firft kind, carrying vifi- 
 ble Grains, which are not fo properly called Mine- 
 ral or Golden Waters, becaufe the Gold Grains 
 are not mixed with the Water, bur only carried in 
 it by it*s rapid Motion ; the Water itfelf being un? 
 compounded with it. .^, j 
 
 2. CORPOREAL Golden Waters of fine 
 Mixture, whofe Atoms arc united with the Atoms 
 of Gold, like the Aciua Rcgia of the Chemifts, 
 which diffolves Gold, and unites it by Atoms to it- 
 felf. For fmce it is pofTiblc that there may be in 
 Nature fuch Water as this of the Chemifts, which 
 may run thro* Golden Earth, or Gold Mines, it 
 is reafonable to fuppofe, that it eats out Particle? 
 and difTolves them into Atoms, and unites them 
 to itfelf; and from this Caufe proceed thofe Cor 
 fuch like) Golden Rivulets as are defcribed by 
 "ithurnheuferus^ in his Account of the Danube^ Rhiney 
 
 3. SPIRITUOUS Golden Waters are but very 
 ^Qw, fome of which perhaps are enumerated among 
 the reft by Thurnheuferus ; but thefe are not (o 
 much known or regarded, becaufe Golden Earth 
 and Gold Mines are very fcarce ; befides where there 
 are fuch Mines, there is fuch a Mixture of other 
 Minerals, that they are not percvptible. Ncver- 
 thelefs there are fome Rivulets in the high Jlpsof 
 Bohemia, that are faid to participate of thefe Gol- 
 den Spirits, as in the Fiechtelberg Mountains in Si- 
 lefia. The Hoi Baths alfo in the Bifliopric of Coire^ 
 are believed to be impregnated with this kind of 
 Spirit, yet becaufe of the Mixture of other Mine- 
 rals
 
 368 TJje Abjolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 rals in a greater Quantity, this quality is rendered 
 Icfs percepcible. 
 
 4. GOLDEN Waters that carry both the 
 Atoms, and Spirit of Gold, are Ibme of thofe 
 Rivulets mentioned by the above-named fhurnheu- 
 ferus. 
 
 L ET us alfo give an example of fait Waters. 
 
 1. CORPOREAL fait Water, which carry 
 grofs and undigefted Particles of Salt, are found in 
 many Places, and fufficiently known ; as Foun- 
 tains, whofe Waters produce Salt •, and Sea- Water 
 from which Salt is extracted by boiling. 
 
 2. SUBTLE corporeal fait Waters, which 
 contain Salt diiTolved into the minuteft Atoms, are 
 fuch as are very fait, and yet very clear, as many 
 fait Fountains are, and Sea-Water that is thin and 
 fine ; tho* there is a great Difference in this fubtile 
 Mixture. Hereto may be referred the Urine of all 
 Animals. 
 
 3. SPIRITUOUS fait Waters, which do 
 not contain the Particles of Salt, but only the Spi- 
 rit of it, are of fuch a Nature, that if feveral Tuns 
 be ever fo much boiled, they will not yield any 
 Salt. There are a great many of thefe in Germany, 
 and other Places, but they are feldom without 
 Mixture. 
 
 4. CORPOREAL and fpirituous fait Wa- 
 ters, which contain the Particles and Spirit of Salt. 
 Almoft all corporeal Waters have feme fmall Por- 
 tion of filine Spirits in them, but few of them any 
 Quantity. Thlrs the Fountains about the City Salt- 
 xmge^ near the Rhine^ are filter than other fait 
 Springs, and yet yield lefs Salt, becaufe their fharp 
 and brackifii Tafre is heightened by a Spirit or vo- 
 latile Salt, which flies away in the boiling. 
 
 HENCE it appears how this four- fold Va- 
 riety of Participation is to be applied to tlie feve- 
 3 ral
 
 C H A p." 1 7 • of XJnivcrfal Geography. 369 
 
 ral kinds of mineral Waters, viz. to vitriolic, A- 
 lum, and Lead Waters, l£^c. 
 
 p Ro p s irio Kr y'. 
 
 To enuimrate ihc itiojl remarkable Varieties cf mineral 
 JVaten. 
 
 I N the foregoing Propofitions, we have ex- 
 plained the Kinds and Differences of mineral Wa- 
 ters, taken from their Nature, which confill in 
 having mineral Particles in them, which they carry 
 or with which they arc impregnated j but becaufe 
 thefe Varieties are not fo perceptible to the Senfes, 
 and there are feveral Mixtures of Minerals that 
 caufe various, and almoft unaccountable, Properties 
 in the Waters, therefore they are not io eafily 
 known and diftinguifhed by the Vulgar j for Wa- 
 ters (and other Bodiesj become famous among Man- 
 kind, and receive their Names from their manifeft 
 Qualities which flrike and afFed the Senfes, whofe 
 Caufe and Explication is to be deduced from their 
 Compofition and Participation. There are there- 
 fore ten Species of Waters, or Liquids, that flow 
 out of the Ground, which are commonly taken No- 
 tice of by the Vulgar. I, Acid Waters. 2. Bitter. 
 3. Hot. 4. Very cold. 5. Fat and oily. 6. Poi- 
 fonous or deadly. 7. Coloured. 8. Boiling. 9. Wa- 
 ters that harden Bodies, change their Colour, or 
 otherwife alter them. 10. Saline. 11. To thefe 
 may be added, fuch as are in veiled with other 
 uncommon Properties. All kinds of Waters defcri- 
 bed by Authors, may be referred to one or other 
 of thefe Heads. W^e fhali here briefly explain their 
 Generation and Differences ; and give fome Ex- 
 amples. 
 
 VOL. I. Bb PKO^
 
 37Q ^be Abjolute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 ■"" P RO POSIT 10 N VI. 
 
 To explain the Onghi^ or Compofition^ of acid JVaters^ 
 tbeir Dijj'trence and r^al Species. 
 
 THESE Tour Waters, called by the Germans 
 Saitr-Brunncn^ iire celebrated in moft Countries. 
 They proceed from a Mixture ot the Spirit of 
 Vitriol, Salt, and Alum •, which Minerals are found 
 partly fimple, and partly mixed, with others more 
 or lels, in the Bowels of the Earth, elpecially with 
 Steel and Iron. We prove this to be the true 
 Caufe of Acidiilce. i. Becaufe almoft wherever 
 thefe acid Fountains break our, there are found 
 Mines of Vitriol, Salt, and Sulphur. 2. Becaufe 
 the Spirits of Vitriol and Sale are acid, and alfo the 
 Spirit of Sulphur, as appears from Chemiftry. 
 3. Becaufe no acid Body can be drawn from thefe 
 AcidulcBy but only a Spirit which is no way unlike 
 the Spirit of Vitriol, Salt, i^c. 
 
 THERE is plenty of Jcidulce in moft Coun- 
 tries, efpecially thofe that abound in Mines. In 
 Germany alone, their Number amounts to almoft 
 one thoufand. Their Caufe is an acid Spirit which 
 is found in moft Bodies, and in all Herbs and Fruits. 
 
 T H E diflerence o'i Aciduhe is remarkable : Some 
 are fo acid, that Men ufe them inftead of Vinegar ; 
 fuch a Fountain as this is found in the Province of 
 Nota^ m Sicily ; and another of a remarkable four- 
 nefs at Elbogen in Germany, Other Fountains are 
 called vinous becaufe they come near the grateful 
 Relifh of Wine ; of which kind there is a famous 
 one at Schwalbach, in the County of Catzenellebogen 
 in Germany {a). There is a Spring near St Bal- 
 
 domar, 
 
 (a) Such like Chalybeates or Acididiv or Zour Waters ; for 
 ^«wi art not fo properly called they do not contain any rough, 
 
 vitriolic
 
 Chap. \j. of Univey-fal Geography, 371 
 
 dotnar, in the Province of Lionnoii in France^ cal- 
 led la Fontaine forte^ whicli lupplics the w:int of 
 Wine i for if one fourth Part of it be mixed with 
 Wine, it will want nothing of it's right Talte and 
 Relilh ; if it be poured on Flower, it will imme- 
 diately ferment ; tlicy can boil no Meat in it, be- 
 caufe through the Subtility of it's Spirit, it foon 
 evaporates i it is fo extraordinary whcUfome^ that the 
 Inhabit arJi thereabouts feldom Jland in need of a Phy^ 
 fician. 
 
 N O T far from the Town of Bazas in Guienne, 
 there is fuch a Fountain, of a fharp vinous Talle, 
 whofe Waters, if they are mixed with a fixth Pare 
 of Wine only, will drink like neat Wine, without 
 the leaft mixture of Water. Near Ro7ne there is 
 a fliarptafled Alum-Fountain, whofe Waters being 
 mixed with Wine, make a very agreeable Liquor. 
 There is a great Number of liich Jcidtilce in High 
 Germany ; fome Part of which flow into the Danube 
 and fome into the Rhine. There are feveral of thefe 
 in the fore- mentioned County of Catzenellebogen^ 
 m the Ele6lorate of Triers^ in Tyrol^ in the Grifons 
 
 vitriolic, or acid Salts to make 
 them taile fliarp or four, but ra- 
 ther leave a Iweetifh Flavour or 
 Farewel behind ; and tho' at the 
 firfl: thought one would afcrrbe 
 a fharp or ibur Tafte to the Pyr- 
 mont, Spai.v, or Tunhridge^ Wa- 
 ters, yet if they be rightly con- 
 fidered it is their iniart briflc 
 Tafte that mifleads us to think 
 them acid or truly four. Thus 
 Cyder and foft Ale when bot- 
 tled will give the like Pungency 
 to the Tongue, and fuch an 
 acute AfFeftion to the Palate, 
 when it is far from being four. 
 T^hli is pro'ved from federal Ex- 
 periments by Dr Slave. See more 
 
 to this purpofe in a late Book 
 entitled AVxu Experiments and 
 Ohfernjations upon Mi?teral Wa- 
 ters, by Dr Shavo. See alfb 
 Philof.Tranf. N° 1 3 7. Pag. 247. 
 and N^ 351. Pag. 564. 
 
 The mofl: celebrated SparjjSy 
 Mi?ieral or Medicinal Waters in 
 England, are at thefe Places ; 
 viz. at Bmk, and Timhridge ; at 
 Farington in Dorfetjhire ; at 
 IJlington, Hamfyjled, and Pari' 
 eras, in Middlcfex \ at Scar- 
 borough, Harro^-wgate, and Cock- 
 grave, \n YorkJInre; S/ Winifred's 
 Well in Flint/hire ; at D:eln.vic^ 
 in Surry' ; at Butterbj in the 
 Biiliopric of Durham, iSc 
 
 Bb 2 
 
 Countryj
 
 372 77r Abfolute Tart S e c T. I V. 
 
 Country, in Bavaria ^ and a famous one called //d/- 
 burn, near Anderna. Near the Village Valentiolay 
 in the Territories of Toledo in Spain, there are Foun- 
 tains that are acid, and have a vinous Tafte, near 
 the Botiom, but are Iweet at the Surface •, which 
 Baccius thinks proceeds from the fubfiding of the 
 acid and nitrous Particles •, but 1 believe (\i the Re- 
 lation be true) that it proceeds rather from a fub- 
 tile Spirit, which by coming to the Surface, quick- 
 ly expires. 
 
 OTHER acid Fountains are aftringent, and 
 contra<5l the Palate, which is a Sign or a Mixture 
 of the Particles of IVon, or of Vitriol and Alum, 
 
 THE Water of thefe Fountains, is obfcrved to 
 be not fo four in cloudy and rainy Weather, which 
 is a fign that condenfed Air is mixed with it. Alfo 
 if it be expofcd to the Sun, or fland tor ibme Hours 
 in an open Vcflel, or be carried in the cold from 
 one Place to another in Bottles not well corked, it 
 lofes iL*s Acidity ; which is a certain fign that this 
 Acidity proceeds from a fubtile Spirit, 
 
 THEY have alfo the veiy Atoms of Vitriol, 
 Alum, Iron, Salt, Ink, ^c. and of Clay and Gra- 
 vel, i^c. as appears from the Matter that fticks to 
 the Canals thro' which they flow. 
 
 THE Studious may colled a great many Ex- 
 amples from Authors. There are no lefs than two 
 hundred acid Fountains or Rivulets, that flow into 
 the Rhine \ but becaufe of the Subtility of their 
 Spirits, the Rhine does not tafte acid in the leaft. 
 
 I F any fhonld enquire. Why there are no acid 
 Fountains in the northern Countries } I fuppofe the 
 Caufe is owing to the want of fubterraneous Hear, 
 and to rhe great Denfity of the Earth -, and for this 
 fatrse Caufe there is little or no Gold found in thofe 
 Countries. 
 
 o PRO.
 
 Chap. 17. of Univerja I Geography, 373 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 To explain the Caufe of hot Bath^, and to enunidrate 
 the mojl fainoui ones. 
 
 THERE is a Fountain in Iceland^ which is 
 thought to be hotter than any oF the reft, lb that 
 it*s Waters differ not from thole that are heated to 
 the h.igheft Degree by Fire {b) •, but Caronius writes, 
 that in Japan there is a Spring lb hot, that no Wa- 
 ter can be brought to the fame Degree of Heat, by 
 the mofl vehement Fire ; it alfo retains it's Heat 
 three times longer that our common Water heated. 
 It flows not conftantly, but twice a Day for an 
 Hour, with a great Force of Spirits, and makes a 
 Lake, which fas another Aurlior tell^ usj is called 
 by the Inhabitants Singacko^ i. e. Hell. 
 
 NEXT after thefe, the Baths at Baden in Swit'' 
 xerland are famous for their Heat. To thefe fuc- 
 ceed the Aponenfian Baths in Italy. There are a 
 great Number of common ones in High-German'^ 
 and other Places {c). In Scotland there is a Lake 
 
 called 
 
 (b) ' Dr Pauliis Biornonius 
 ' tells (In Phihf. Tranf. N° 
 ' III. Pag. 238. J that fome 
 ' Fountains in /cf/flWarefo hut 
 ' that in a quarter of an Hour 
 ' they will fufficiently boil great 
 ' Pieces of Beef, which is thus 
 ' ordered : they hang the Kettles 
 
 * with cold Water, over them 
 ' in which they put the Meat to 
 
 * be boiled ; for fear of either 
 ' burning or throwing up the 
 
 * Meat by the fervent, and ve- 
 
 * hement Ebullition of the Hot 
 
 * Water.' 
 
 (c) Thereisa veryhotSpring 
 of Mineral Waters in Jamaica 
 
 which comes out of a Rock in a 
 freili Current, near to. a fine 
 Rivulet, of good cool Water, 
 but is fo hot that it foon boils 
 Eggs, Crawfifn, Chickens, feV. 
 The B;iths at Baden in Aujhia 
 are tolerably warm, and tinge 
 Meta's with other Colour^. 
 ' Thofe at the Town of Bath in 
 
 * ^oinerfetJJnre are not fo very 
 
 * hot (even the hotteil of tlie'.ii) 
 ' as to harden an Egg ; yet there 
 ' is a Spring in the King's B uh 
 ' fo hot that it is fcarcc fafll-r- 
 
 * able, fo that they are fain to 
 ' tarn much of itaway, for feu- 
 
 * of inflaming the Bath. Tiie 
 
 B b 3 Queen's
 
 374 "The Abfoliite Part Sect. IV. 
 
 called Kefs that difchargcs iJelf into a River of 
 that Name -, which tho' they be neither of them 
 hot yet ihey never freeze, but ftill fmoak in froily 
 Weather. 
 
 T H M Caufe and Generation of hot Baths is, 
 I. A Mixture of fulphureous Particles which are 
 gleaned by the Water as it is carried thro' the fub- 
 terraneous PafTages, or rather as it gleets thro' the 
 Sulphur Mines to the Receptacles about the Foun- 
 tains, 2. Fumes, Vapours, and Exhalations in the 
 Bowels of the Earth, where there is pure or impure 
 Sulphur, FoIIil- Coals, Amber, Qc. For thefe 
 
 fo that It is likely the Springs 
 are brought thither by Art : 
 Whence probably was the Ne- 
 cromancy which the ]*copI,i of 
 anticnt times believeJ, and re- 
 ported to have contrived, and 
 made thefe Baths ; as in a very 
 antient Manufcript Chronicle 
 J find thefe Words : When Lud 
 Midi bras was dead, Blidud a 
 great Nigromancer was made 
 King; he made the Wonder 
 of the Hot Bath by his Nigro- 
 mancy, and he reigned twenty 
 one Years, and after he died, 
 and lies at the NeivTrcy. And 
 in another old Chronicle 'tis 
 faid: That King Bladud fent 
 for the Necromancen to A- 
 thens to eff^ed this great Buji- 
 jiefs ; who, 'tis likely were 
 no other than cunning Arti- 
 ficers well fkillcd in Archilec- 
 iure and Mechanics.^ this 
 from Mr jfofeph Glan-viTs De- 
 fcriptio?i of Bath, in Philofoph. 
 Tranf. N'^ 49. Dr Bro-':n fays, 
 the natural Baths at Buda are 
 the noblell in Europe, not only 
 for their variety of liot fprings 
 but alfo for the Magnificence 
 of their Buildings. 
 
 Bodies 
 
 Queen's Bath is not fo hot, 
 having no Springs of it'sown, 
 but receives it's Water from 
 the Kings. The Crofs-Bath 
 is fomething colder than the 
 others, and eats out Silver ex- 
 ceedingly ; a Shilling in a 
 W-eek's time has been to eaten 
 by it that it might be wound 
 about one's finger. InSum- 
 mer they purge up a green 
 fcum en the top, and in Win- 
 ter leave a Yello^w one on the 
 Walls. The Walls that keep 
 in the hot Springs are very 
 deep fet, and large ; ten Foot 
 thick, and fourteen deep from 
 the Level of the Street. The 
 Cement of the Wall is yellow 
 Clay, Lime, and beatcnBricks. 
 In the Year 1659, the Hot 
 Bath (one particularly fo cal- 
 led of equal Heat with the 
 Kings Bath) was much im- 
 paired with the breaking 
 out of a Spring which the 
 Workmen at lafl found, and 
 reftored. In digging they 
 came to a firm Foundation of 
 faftitious Matter which had 
 Holes in it like a Pumicejicne, 
 thro' wliich the /f«/rr plaid ;
 
 Chap. I/, of Univerfal Geography. 375 
 
 Bodies conftantly emit hot Smoke, which warms 
 the Water as it pafles fuch Places {d}. Nevcr- 
 thelefsin moft Baths there is a Mixture of the Par- 
 ticles ot Alum, Iron, or Niire, which give them 
 an altringent and tanifli Tafte. Mol\ Baths tliat 
 we krrow of, flow without ceafing, except the fa- 
 mous Pepper- Batlis not far from Ccirem the Grifotn 
 Country in Germany, whofe Waters contain, befide 
 Sulphur, fo me Gold, and not a little Nitix. They 
 begin to fpring yearly about the third of A4ay, and 
 ceafe to flow about the fourteenth of September. 
 The mod celebrated Baths in Germany are, the 
 leaden ones in Louvain -, the EmfcJibades above Cou- 
 Jlance- •, thofe near Geherfweil in Aljatia \ thofe in 
 the Marquifate of Baden ; thofe in the Dukedom of 
 Wirtemherg, called V/ildhad •, the Cellenfian Baths ; 
 the Blafiaman Baths, near Tubingen, (ffc. There 
 are many in Japan and the Indian Iflands: and 
 fome in the Azores fo hot that Eggs may be boiled 
 hard in them. : , .-, ;. 
 
 , PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 T(3 explain the Caufe and Generation of oily and fat . 
 Liquids that flow out of the Earth, and to enume- 
 rate the Places in which the chief of them are 
 found. 
 
 SOME Fountains pour out a bituminous Li- 
 quor, others a fat Water, or Water in which 
 Drops of Oil fwim about. Tv/o Miles from £- 
 
 (d) They befl account for which Commixture arifes a 
 
 the Heat of thefe Fountains, great Fermentation that caufes 
 
 who fuppofe, that two Streams Heat, as we fee in Vitriol and 
 
 having run thro', and imbib- Tartar^ which when minified 
 
 ed certain Sorts of different caufe an intcnfe Heat and 
 
 Minerals, meet at laft, and -Ebullition. See the laji men- 
 
 mingle their Liquors ; from tioved Philof Tranfadl. 
 
 B b 4 dinburgb
 
 ^yS The AhjohteVart S e c T. I V. 
 
 Sinburgh i;i Scotland there flows a Fountain upon 
 the Superficies of which fwim Drops of black Oil, 
 which the Inhabitants ule to foften their Skins, 
 and to remove Scabbinefs f^J. Among the -An- 
 tients a River in Cilicia calkd Li pans was famous,- 
 in which they that wafhcd themfclves, were there- ' 
 by anointed as if tht^y had been in Oil -, but I 
 doubt whether there be any fuch River now. aiJ^ 
 likewife there was a Lake in Ethiopia which anomi2 
 tetl thofc that fwam in it. Jn India aha there.' 
 was a Fountain which, in a clear Sky, fert out 
 abundance of Oil. At Carthage there was a Foun- 
 tain upon which floated an Oil tiiat ftnelled like 
 the Saw-duft of a Citron- Tree : this they made 
 ufe ot to anoint their Catile with. Vitruvim tells 
 us, that there were Fountains in the Ifland of 
 Zant^ and about D\rrhachiia?2, now Durazzf), and 
 Jpollonia^ that vomited out a great deal of Pitch 
 with the Water. Near Babylon there was a vallly 
 
 (e) Pliny faith, that the Salo- 
 nian Fountain, and Andrian 
 Spring flow with Oil and Wine. 
 
 * Toljdytus relates, that ncar 
 
 * Soli a City of Cilicia there 
 
 * wasa Spring that fupplied the 
 
 * Place of Oil. 'Jhcophrafiui 
 
 * fays, that there was a Spring 
 ' in Ethiopia which had the 
 
 * fame Faculty ; that the Wa- 
 
 * ter of the Spring Lycos would 
 
 * burn by putting a Candle to 
 
 * it ; and tiie fame is reported 
 ' of Echatava? Clarke upon 
 Rohaulis Phyf. Vol , z . Pag. 20 1 . 
 Many fuch Fountains of Petro- 
 hum, and oily Subflances, are 
 now to be met with up and 
 down ; as at Pitchford in Shrop- 
 pire, and in the Ifland oi7,ant, 
 
 very plentifully ; in the Valta- 
 liiie, fubj'cl to the Grijans ; at 
 tjie Foot of Mount Zebia in the 
 
 Duchy of Modena ; at Gahian 
 in the Road from MontpeUier 
 to Bt'z.iers in Langucdoc. The 
 Inhabitants living near thefe fat 
 oily Springs, take Caretogather 
 and ieparate the Bituminous fub- 
 ftance frojn the Water ; They 
 gather it with Ladles, and put- 
 ting it into a Barrel, feparate the 
 Water from the Oil by letting 
 out the iirft at a Tap towards 
 the Bottom of the Vefi'el. In 
 the Ifland o{ Barhadocs there is 
 a Rivulet, called Tugh Ri'ver, 
 which hath upon it's Surface in 
 many Places a certain oily Sub- 
 ftance, which being carefully 
 taken off, and kept a little 
 Time, is fit to burn in Lamps 
 like ordinary Oil. Near Cape 
 Hclenc in Peru there are Foun- 
 tains of Rofm (orfomethinglike 
 it) which flow in Abundance. 
 
 broad
 
 Chap. 17. of U?iiverfal Geography. 2>77 
 
 broad Lake, called Jf/JjalUUs Limne, that had a 
 liquid Bitumen fwimming upon it, with which 
 Stmiramis cemented the large Brick- Walls which 
 furrounded Babylon. At this Day there is a Foun- 
 tain near Degemfce^ a Monaftery in Bavaria^ whofe 
 Surface is covered with Oil, whicli is daily carried 
 away by the Natives. There are alfo great Lakes 
 in Syria and Africa which fend forth Heaps of Bitu- 
 men. The Acidul(B at Schwaibach if they be kept 
 quiet in a Veifel for fome Hours, there will be 
 Imall Drops ot Oil fwimming on the Top of them. 
 A greater quantity of fuch Drops are found in a 
 Fountain called Oelbriam near the Village Lam- 
 ferfchlocb not far from Hagenaiv. And in mofb 
 Baths there are found bituminous Particles, after 
 they have (lood to fettle for fome Time -, as in the 
 Petrolean Baths in the li.\v\^yf\o\vio^ Naples. 
 
 THERE are alfo great Numbers of Foun- 
 tains which do not produce Oil on their Surfices, 
 but pour out ameer fat or bituminous Liquor. 
 Near Gerfiach in the Valley called Lrbrrflhal., there 
 flows from an old exhaufted Mine a thick Oil or 
 Bitumen, which the Country People ufe inflead of 
 Greafe to the Axle- Trees of their Wheels, but 
 they are ignorant of it's fuperior Virtues ^ for 
 I'hernheuferus itWs us, that an excellent Balfam may 
 be prepared from it. In the Ifland Sumatra there 
 is a Fountain which pours out a kind of liquid 
 'Petroleum: ibme lay it is a kind of Baliam •, there 
 are faid to be alfo Fountains of Ambergris there. 
 They find a bituminous Fountain in Peru near the 
 Sea, which emits a fmall Rivulet into it, and is ufed 
 by the Inhabitants inftead of Pitch -, neither have 
 they any other fort of Matter fo like it. Not far 
 from Schimachian in Perfia, at the Foot of the high 
 Mountain Barmach, there are about thirty Fountains 
 that fend out a Naphtha or bituminous Subffance :, 
 but they lie low, and fpring with great Violence 
 
 into
 
 378 "^he Ahjolute Fart S e c T. I V. 
 
 into Wells about two Ells deep, which are made 
 wiih wooden Steps for the Conveniency of dcfcend- 
 sng. They emit a ftrong fulphureous Spirit, which 
 is of two Colours \ in lome places red, and in o- 
 thers white •, the later is of a more plealant Smell. 
 
 THE Caufe of thele bituminous Fountains is 
 a fulphureous and bituminous Matter melted in 
 the Bowels of the Earth, and preffed upwards by 
 a hot Spirit. Their Differences arife from the dif- 
 ferent fat Minerals that fupply them ; as Amber- 
 gris, Amber, the Oil of Petrol, Pitch, Naphtha, 
 Bitumen, ^c. 
 
 n.-T PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 2o explain the Origin of Waters that tajie hitter ; and 
 to enumerate the Places of the Earth in which they 
 are found. 
 
 O N the Shore of Cormandel in India there are 
 feveral Springs and Wells whofe Waters are bitter 
 tho' they fpring up among the Rocks. In Pontus, 
 a Province ol" y^fta miner, there is a fmall Rivulet 
 at the Town of Callipade, called Exampean, whofe 
 Water is bitter ; this makes the River H\panis alfo 
 bitter, into. which it flows. The Reader may col- 
 left feveral more Examples. 
 
 THEY come from an impure Sulphur, Bitu- 
 men, Nitre, Copperas, Copper-, as Water by long 
 flanding in a Copper Vefiel, acquires a bitter tafte. 
 But I cannot credit what Molina delivers in his 
 Defcription of Gallicia, viz. that there is a Lake 
 in Ireland whofe Waters are one half of the Day 
 fweet, and the other half bitter. 
 
 THE Lake /ffphaltites, which is alfo called 
 the D-jad Sea, in Pale/line^ hath bitter Waters, 
 becaufe of an impure Bitumen mixed with them, 
 ib that by right it belongs to the fat Waters in 
 
 the
 
 Chap. 17. of Univerfal Geography. .379 
 
 the laft Propofition. It fends forth a naufeous link- 
 ing Vapour. Every thing without I.ife is there 
 drawn to the Bottom : but it fuffcrs no living Crea- 
 ture to fink ; neither does it grow fweeter tho' it 
 abforbs the v/hole River Jordan that conftantly 
 flows into it. It's Waters are poifonous by reafon 
 of it's containing Arfenic (/). 
 
 P RO P O S IT I ON, X, ' 
 
 To explain the Caufe of very cold Springs, and to 
 enumerate the Places of the Earth in which tbe-j 
 are chiefly found. 
 
 NOT fiir from Vienne m the Province of 
 Dauphine in France there is a Fountain fo cold, 
 that it fwells the Mouth of thofe that drink it -, 
 nor can any one endure his Hands in it. It is 
 not diminillied when Water is 3rawn out of it, 
 nor augmented by pouring it in. On the Coaft 
 o^ Abex in Ethiopia (formerly inhabited by the 
 Troglodytes) there are extream cold Fountains, tho' 
 the Sun be excefTive hot there. Four Miles from 
 Gratz in Stiria, are Fountains bpiiing up in a low 
 Place, fo cold that none can drink the Water run- 
 ning or drawn from thence. About a Mile from 
 Culma there is a Fountairi that, pours out Water 
 with a ftrong Spirit as if it were boiling, tho' it 
 be very cold, which makes them call it the Mad- 
 Water, mnm 
 
 (f) Our Countryman Mr and it bore iiis Body in' fwirp:;^ 
 
 Maundrell ohkrvedi x.\\h Lake mingwitiian uncommon Force; 
 
 narrowly upon the Spot ; but but as to the Report of a Man 
 
 could not perceive any Smoak wading into it as high as his 
 
 or Vapour afcending above the Navel, will be buoyed up by 
 
 Surface of the Water, as is de- it, thia he found not to be true, 
 
 fcribed in the Writings of Geo- Salmm^ 
 graphers. He alfo went into it, 
 
 THE
 
 380 ' I'he Ahjfhlute Fart Sect. IV. 
 
 T H E Caufe of their Coldnefs is, i. A Mixture 
 of Nitre and Alam, alfo ot Mercury and Iron, i^c. 
 2. The great Depth from whence they fpring, fo 
 that they want the Rays of the Sun, and the ful- 
 phurcous Heat under Ground. 
 
 THERE are alfo Fountains that are cold 
 and hot by turns. In Catalonia there is a faJc 
 Fountain and Lake, which are extream hot in the 
 Winter and as cold in Summer. This is common 
 to feveral other:. I fuppofe the Caufe of it is, that 
 the Pores of the Earth, being open in Summer, 
 \&t our the fubterranean hoc Spirit thro' them : 
 which being (hut in during Winter, keep it as in 
 a Furnace or Oven, to warm the W^ater. Thus 
 fome Fountains are hotter in the Night than in the 
 Day. 
 
 2i •'1 
 
 PROPOSITION XL 
 
 'To explain the Origin of thofc Waters that feem to turn 
 Bodies into other Species ; and to enumerate the 
 Places of the Earth in which they are found. 
 
 T H E R E are fome Waters which petrify Wood 
 or turn it into hard Stone. A little above the 
 City of Ar?nagh in Ireland^ there is a fmall Lough, 
 in which if a ftick of Wood be fixed, and con- 
 tinue for fome Months, the Pare that is faft in 
 the Mud becomes Iron, and that in the Water 
 turns to a Whctfbone, and that above Water con- 
 tinues to be Wood. This is reported by Giraldus 
 and Maginus : but Brietius^ by what authority I 
 know not, fays that it is a Fable throughout (g). 
 
 In 
 
 (g) There is certainly no fuch fying quality ; but upon due ex- 
 Lough as this in Irelnnd-y their amination it is found, that the 
 famous LoHgh Neagh was for- faid quality is tobeafcribed to 
 merly tliought to have a petri- the Soil of the Ground adjacent 
 
 to
 
 Chap. 17. of Univerfcil Geography. 381 
 
 In the North Part of Vlfier fa Province in Ire- 
 land) there is a Fountain, in which if Wood be 
 immerfed feven Years it will be petrified. There 
 aie Lochcs of Water in the Province of Beavjfe 
 in France^ that petrity every thing thrown into 
 them. At the Town ot Sem in \Champagne\ near 
 
 to the Lake, rather than to the 
 Water of the Lake itfelf. Tiitre 
 are fome Waters in 5cotln7id\.\\-A\. 
 petrify : As in Gk-vely, at a Place 
 called Achigniglium, there is a 
 Rivulet which fo turns Holly in- 
 to a greenifh Stone, that they or- 
 dinarily make Moulds of it for 
 calling of Balls for Fuzees ; and 
 Tinkers that work in Brafs, 
 make both their Moulds, and 
 melting Pots of it, and Wo- 
 men their round Wharh for 
 fpinning. Alfo upon the 
 north Side of the Firth of forth 
 there is a Cave, from the Top 
 of which drops Water that in 
 falling n^.akes long Columns re- 
 femblmg the Pipes of a Church 
 Organ, and fome of different 
 Figures. Sec Phil of. Tj-anf. a- 
 bridged by Lonuthorp. Vol. ii. 
 Page 321, 325. * There is a 
 
 * River in Thrace which if you 
 
 * drink of it, will turn your 
 
 * Bowels into Stone, and cafes 
 
 * with Marble whatever is put 
 ' into it. Concerning which ^z»- 
 
 * tieca'Ctiwi 'i f.aks in hlsNatural. 
 
 * Sllio-J}. Bed 3. Chap. 20. the 
 ' Mudofitis of thatNaturethat 
 
 * it glues Bodies together, and 
 
 * hardens them. As the Dull of 
 
 * Piiieoli, if it touches the Wa- 
 
 * ter, it becqmes Stone ; fo, on 
 
 * the contrary, this Water, if it 
 
 * touches any thing f(ilid,{licks, 
 
 * and cleaves to it. Hence it is 
 
 * that Things thrown into this 
 
 ' Lake are afterv/ards taken cut 
 ' and converted into Stonei. 
 ' The lame J'hing happens in 
 ' fome Parts oi Italy, if you put 
 ' in a Rod or a green Leaf, in a 
 ' few Days after, you takeout 
 ' a Stone. And Plifiy Book ?.. 
 
 * Chap. 103, lays, ' In the 
 
 * Cicous River, and in the Lake 
 ' oiVelinus, m the Countrv of 
 ' Mai-ca di Anco7ta, Wood call 
 ' in is covered over with a flony 
 
 * Bark, and alfo in Sarins a 
 
 * River in Colchis ; fo that a 
 
 * hard Bark commonly covers 
 ' over the Stone ftill. So like- 
 ' wife in the River Silarius, be- 
 ' yond5<7?;r?;/«w,not onlyRods 
 
 * put in, bu'L.ilfo Leaves turn in- 
 ' to S one ; the Water is other- 
 
 * wife very wholefometodrink. 
 Clarke itp07i Rohaulth Phsf. \q\. 
 ii. Pag. 202. In the Ifland of 
 Haynan near China there is a 
 Water of fuch a ftrang equality, 
 that it petrifies feme fort of 
 Fifhes vviien they unfortanatel/ 
 chance to enter into it. Among 
 thc^uckjil-vcr Mines in Guiaiui- 
 I'ilica in Peru, is a Fountain of 
 hot Water whofe Current hav- 
 ing runa confidcrabic way, tarns 
 at iafl into a foft kind of Rock, 
 which being eafily cut, i.n<l yet 
 very laP.ing, is ufually employ- 
 ed for building of Koufes there- 
 abouts. There arc feveral pe- 
 trifying, and incruftating Wa- 
 ters in ri>-gima, &rc. 
 
 a Lake,
 
 382 1'he Ahjohite Fart S e c t. I V. 
 
 a Lake, there flows a petrifying Fountain. Vitru- 
 v'lui tells us that there is a broad Lake, between 
 Mdzacca and Tuana in Cappadocia, which changes 
 a Reed or a ftick of Wood, in one Day, into 
 Stone. There is a Fountain near Charles's Baths 
 in Bobetnia, in which if Wood lie long it is turned 
 into Stone. Such as thefe are iound in divers other 
 Places. Other Waters are thought to change Iron 
 into Copper, which in fad they do not, only be- 
 caufe thefe Waters carry the Spirit and Particles of 
 Vitriol and Copper, they eat out, and by little 
 and little dilTolve, the Particles of Copper as they 
 flow along with the Water. 
 
 THE Caufe why thefe Waters turn Wood into 
 Stone is, i. Some do not change the Wood itfelf 
 into Stone ; but the earthy, ftoney, faline Par- 
 ticles contained in the Water flick to the Wood, 
 and only incruftate it with a ftony Cruft. 2. O- 
 thers do not change the Wood into Stone, but 
 give it a hardnefs equal to that of Stone. 3. If 
 any Water have a true petrifying Quality, I fup- 
 pofe it may be accounted for thus (h). The chief 
 
 Difference 
 
 (h) ' In the Summer of the ' Twigs, and Mofs laid for that 
 
 * year 1729 I happened to fee ' Purpofe on the Edge of it, it 
 ' the famous petrifying Spring ' is diftuicd all over the Stone, 
 
 * CciWciXDroppins^WelliitKfiarcf- ' and partly gleets down the 
 
 * borough xnTorkjhire. It arii'es ' fides, and partly falls perpen- 
 
 * fome yards from the Top of a ' dicularly in Drops upon fome 
 
 * Break of hard marly Earth (I * Pebbles, where there is a 
 ' cannot call it a Rock, it being ' fmall Matter of Water below. 
 ' feveral Degrees more foft,and ' This Well doth by no means 
 
 * crumbling than our common * petrify Wood, A'lofs, ^c. 
 ' /?i;g^«/f Stone) made, I fuppofe, ' put into it, but only incrufts 
 
 * fome lime or other by the Ri- ' them all over with a llony 
 
 * vcr fsilcl which flows very ' Crull; Neither hath it this in- 
 ' near to it. The Current, ' crufting quality (at the Spring 
 
 * which is but fmall, runs to ' Head) before it comes to the 
 ' the Breakwards, where be- ' Break,and runs down, or drop, 
 ' ing interrupted with Sticks, * from the foft marly Stone. 
 
 I am
 
 Chap. 17. of XJniverfal Geography. 38^ 
 
 Difference that can be perceived by tJie Eye be- 
 tween Wood and Stone is, that in tlie Wood there 
 are as it were long Fibres in which it's Parts co- 
 here, tho' not very clofc. But in Stone the Particles, 
 being as it were Sands or Atoms, arc not joined 
 by any extended Fibres. It therefore it be the 
 Nature of any Water to difTolve, and, as it were, 
 grind the long fibrous Particles of W^ood, that 
 they do no more cohere after this Manner, but 
 are ftill more condenfcd, the DiMerence between 
 it and Stone will not be fo great as to be dif- 
 cerned by the Eye ; yet it is probable that thele 
 
 * I am the larger upon this, 
 becaufe it feems to point out 
 the truereafon of Petrifaclion; 
 for is it not hence reafonable 
 to fuppoie ? that the Water 
 gleeting down the fides of the 
 Toft Stone, corrodes the minu- 
 teil of it's Particles, and is im- 
 pregnated with them ; which 
 are again feparated from the 
 Water, by putting iticks of 
 Wood into it, (by the Power 
 of Attrafting) as we fee fome 
 kinds of Salt feparated from 
 Water by the like Means, 
 and other Bodies feparated 
 fromthofe that are compound- 
 ed with them, by fuch as are 
 found by experience to attraft 
 their Particles. Now when 
 thefe Particles are fo minute 
 and fubtile, as to intrude with 
 the Water into the Pores of 
 the Wood, inprocefsof'1'ime, 
 when it is throughly foaked, 
 the Intcrllices will be quite 
 filled with ftony Particles; and 
 .if any thing ligneous remain, 
 it is ib well guarded and in- 
 cruilated by thefe Particles 
 that it is not perceptible, nor 
 
 to be adled upon by Fire : but 
 if (as in the prefent Cafe} the 
 Particles are not fo minute as 
 to penetrate the Pores of the 
 Wood, they only Hick clofe 
 to theoutfide of it, and parget 
 it over (as it. were) by degrees 
 to a confiderab'e thicknefs. 
 
 * What ftrengthens this Opi- 
 nion very much is ; that tlie 
 Particles of the Cafe or Crull, 
 when ground to powder, are, 
 to all appearance, like the 
 Particles of the Stone from 
 whence the Water drops, 
 only the later is Ibmething 
 whiter and rounder. 
 
 ' Is not therefore fuch fub- 
 terraneous Earth as this, thro' 
 which tJie Water, of fuch 
 like Qualities, runs, the 
 Caufc of Fetrifadion ? 
 
 ' Becaufe we may gather 
 from hence the Reafons why. 
 Fountains petrify fome forts 
 of Wood throughout, but 
 not others ; alfo why fome 
 petrify only the Bark, Sap, 
 or foftclt Part, and others 
 only incale it, i^,c. 
 
 mineral
 
 384 'The Ahjolute Part Sect. IV. 
 
 mineral Waters communicate fome Subftance even 
 to Wood itfelf. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 To explain the Caufe of poifonous or lethiferous Wa- 
 ters \ and to enumerate the Places of the Earth in 
 which thc-j are found, 
 
 THE Lake Jfphaltiles is one of thefe, having 
 Arfenic mixed with Bitumen in it [i). The Foun- 
 tain of Neptune, near Terracina in the Country 
 of the Volfcians was famous of old, becaufe all that 
 drunk of it immediately loft their Lives •, and 
 therefore it was filled up with Stones by the In- 
 habitants, At Chycros m Thracia there was a Lake 
 that killed not only thofe who drunk of it, but 
 even thofe that waflied in it. There is a Foun- 
 tain in Thejfaly which Cattle are iiot fuffered to 
 tafte, nor any kind of Beaft to come near it. Vi- 
 truvius relates, that there is fuch deadly Water 
 as this near the Sepulchre of Euripides m Mace- 
 donia. As to the Spring and River Styx in the 
 
 (;') Near Efperies in Vpfier ' and well ftored with delicate 
 Hungaty are two deadly Foiin- ' Fifli ; yet in the three Sum- 
 tains whofe Waters fend forth ' nier Months, Ju^ie, yu/y, 
 fuch an infeflious Steam, that it ' and ^«j«y?, it becomes every 
 kills either Beaft or Bird ap- * Year green in the middle 
 preaching the fame ; for the * with an hairy EfHorefcence ; 
 preventing of which they are ' which green Subftance being 
 walled round and kept always ' by fome violent Wind forced 
 covered. In Ireland there is ' aftiore, and with the Water 
 a Lake which commonly fends ' drunk by any Cattle, Dog, or 
 up fuch a pcftilentious Vapour, ' Poultry, caufeth certain and 
 Jis frequently kills Birds that en- ' fudden Death'. See Mr Kiri- 
 deavour to fly over it. * Ne.ir hys Obfervations upon it in 
 ' Dantzk there is an inland Philof. Tranf. N° 83. Beyond 
 * Sea made by the Conflaenceof the Falls of P.apahanac in Vir- 
 ' three Rivers, whofe Waters gi/iia there are faid to be poi- 
 « arc fwcet and wholefome, fonous Waters, 13" c. 
 
 .■•K>--'- Mountaia
 
 Chap. 17- of Ujiiverfal Geography. 385 
 
 Mountain Nonacris in Arcadia •, the Aniients write 
 that it fprings oat of the Rocks, and is fo cold 
 and venomous that it is called a Rivtr of Hell ^ aifo 
 that it can be contained in no fort of Vcflel made of 
 Silver, Bra'fs, or Iron, but only in the Hoof of a 
 Mule. Some Pliftorians write, that Alexander the 
 Great was poifoned with this Water, by Jolla the 
 Son of Antipater, not without a Sufpicion of Ari- 
 Jialle's being concerned in it, Fitruvius writes, that 
 there was a Water, in the Kingdom of Coitus on 
 the AlpSy which whoever tafted immediately fell 
 down dead. At this Day there are feveral poi- 
 fonous Springs found on or about the Alps, but 
 the greateft Part of them are (topped up with 
 Stones ; fo that they are not fo much as takea 
 Notice of. 
 
 THE Caufe of fuch Waters is their running or 
 gleeting thro' arfenical, mercurial, and antimonial 
 Earths, whereby they are im.pregnated with their 
 Fumes ; for as the Smoke, or Fume, of Arfenic 
 kills living Creatures, fo Waters impregnated with 
 fuch a Fume do the fame. 
 
 P ROPOS ITIO N XIII. 
 
 To explain the Caufe and Differences of coloured Wa- 
 ters ; and to enumerate the Places of the Earth in 
 which they are found. 
 
 AT the Town of Chinon in Touraine fa Pro- 
 vince in France) there is a yellowifh Spring gufhcs 
 out of a Cave, and as it flows is concreted into 
 a Stone. In the Kingdom of Congo in Africa there 
 is a River of a red Colour that flows into the 
 Sea. In the Valley of 6'/ George near Sultzmat in 
 Alfalia there is a Fountain of red Water, called 
 Rothwaffer. The Rubicon y (lb called from it*s red- 
 nefs) now Pifatello, in Italy^ flows from the top 
 
 VOL. I. Gc of
 
 3 86 The Abjhlute Part S e c t. I V. 
 
 of the higheft; Alps. There are lb me Fountams ot 
 black, greeniCh, and other coloured Waters, but 
 thcle are very rare (k). 
 
 THE Cauie of the Colour of thcfe Waters, is 
 the Colour of the Earth thro' which they run, be- 
 fore they come to the Fountain-Head. 
 
 ,.. PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 'To explain the Origin of fait JVaters ; and to enu?ne- 
 rale the Places in which they are found. 
 
 THEY are owing to two Caufes. i . Some 
 proceed from the Sea in fubterraneous Pallages, to 
 the Superficies of the Earth, where they fpring up. 
 2. Others are generated from the Salt contained 
 in the Bowels of the Earth, by pervading the Pla- 
 ces where it lies, and mixing with it's Particles and 
 Spirits, before they come to the Fountain. Salt 
 Fountains are very common, and known to every 
 one. In Germany there are thofe at Hall^ in the 
 County of Tyrol^ at Hall in Upper Saxony., at Hall 
 in Swabia, and at Hallen in Bavaria \ likewife thofe 
 in the Archbifliopric of Salizburg, in the Duchy 
 of Magdeburg^ at Saltzburg in Lorrain -, and feveral 
 others in other Places, which make up almoft one 
 Iiundred. We need not lay any more to them 
 here, fmce we alfo treated of them in the laft 
 Chapter-, and ey.ery one knows whence they pro- 
 
 fij In the Province of Los /.^am, in Koitbumberhr/id, tliere 
 
 Carcas in Peru, tliere is a Foun- is Water comes from an old 
 
 tain, out of which iiliies a con- Drift, formerly made to drairl 
 
 fulerable Current, of a Colour Coal-Pits, which has an atra- 
 
 almoft as red as Blood. Near mentous Quality, and is turn- 
 
 I'eo^ille in Somerfetjhire, there ed as black as Ink, by an In- 
 
 is a Pool which contains a fufion of Galls. There are fe- 
 
 greenifh fort of vitriolic Water, veral of thefe atramentous 
 
 At Bafil, there is a Spring of Springs in other Countries. 
 a bluciih Colour. At EgUiig- 
 
 ceed,
 
 C H A p. 1 7- of Vniverfal Geography. 3 8^ 
 
 ceed, 'v'vz, irom hidden Quantities of Salt, lying 
 here and there under Ground 5 it being iticlr aa 
 •Element. ,., , 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 I'd explain the Caufe of boiling Fountains, and thofe 
 that break out of the Ground with great Force ; and 
 to enumerate the Places uf the Earth, in which they 
 are found. 
 
 THE Caufe is partly a fulphurcous, and part- 
 ly a nitrous Spirit, mixed with the Waters under 
 Ground -, if it be fulphureous, the Waters are hot *, 
 if nitrous, they are cold -, but all that boil and 
 bubble up like hot Fountains are not io, but fe- 
 veral of them are cold -, as that near Culma, called 
 the Mad fVater, which we mentioned in Prnpofi- 
 iion'K., The River T'^w.^^^, mGalluia, riles froni 
 a Lake, and at it's breaking out, makes an odd 
 kind of bellowing Noife, for fome Months of the 
 Year (/). The flrange hot Fountain in Japan, 
 
 which 
 
 f/J There is a boiling Foun- 
 tain at Pefoul, not far from 
 Montpellier, that heaves and 
 rifes in i'mall Bubbles ; which 
 manifeftly proceeds froni a Va- 
 pour, breakingout of the Earth; 
 for upon digging any wliere 
 near the Ditch, and pouring 
 other Water upon rhe dry Place 
 newly dug, it produces the fame 
 boiling. The like bubbling of 
 Water is found round about 
 Peroul, upon the Sea-Shore ; 
 and in the Etang itfelf. There 
 is a fiimous boiling or filming 
 Well near Wigan in LancaJ}:>lre, 
 with which you may boil an 
 Egg, and upon theapproac'iing 
 
 of a lighted Candle, it takes 
 Fire. One like this was difco- 
 vered in the Year i 7 1 1 , at 
 Brofelffy, near Weitlock, in tlie 
 County of Salop : It was hrll 
 found out by a terrible uncom- 
 mon Noife in the Night ; tlic 
 Noife was fo fjreat, that it a- 
 wakcned feveral People in their 
 Beds, that lived hard by, who 
 got up to fee what it was, and 
 found the Earth to rumble and 
 fhake in a Place near the Se- 
 <i>ei'ii, and a little boiling up of 
 Water tiirough tlic Grafs. T'hey 
 took a Spade, and digging up 
 fome part of the Eirth, imme- 
 diately the Water ilssV upagr:3at 
 C c 2 Heig;ht,
 
 388 The Abjhlute Fart S e c t. IV. 
 
 which (as we oblerved in Propofition VII J only- 
 flows twice daily, and at each time about an Hour. 
 When it begins to flow, it is cafl: out with fuch 
 Force and Vehemency of Spirits, as to heave up 
 great Stones laid on it's Mouth, and flies three or 
 tour Yards high, with a Noife relembling the Re- 
 port of a great Gun. In IVeJlphalia^ there is a 
 Fountain called Bolderbom^ becaufe of the great 
 I'Joife it makes in fpringing. 
 
 AC I DUL /E^ and inoft hot Baths, break out 
 alfo with a great Force of Spirits, and boil up as 
 if they were boiling hot ; in Baths it is caufed by a 
 fulphureous Spirit, and in Spaws and AcidulcE^ by 
 the Spirit of Vitriol and Nitre, ^c. 
 
 Height, and a Candle that was 
 in their Hand fet it on Fire. 
 To prevent the Spring being 
 dellroyed, there is an Iron Ci- 
 ftern placed about it, with a 
 Cover upon it to be locked, 
 and a Hole in tlie Middle there- 
 of, that any who come may fee 
 the Water through. Ifyou put 
 a lighted Candle, or any thing 
 of lire to this Hole, the Water 
 takes fire, and burns like Spi- 
 rit of Wine or Brandy. Some 
 People out of Curiolity, after 
 they have fet the Water on Fire, 
 have put a Kettle of Water 
 over the Ciflcrn, and in it a 
 Joint of Meat, and boiled it 
 much fooner than over any ar- 
 tificial Fire that can be made. 
 Yet what is molt ftrange, the 
 Water of itfelf is as cold as any 
 Water can be, even juil when 
 the Fire is put out. Of the 
 iame fort is that near Gremble 
 
 in Daupbiwi that near Htrmcn- 
 jladt in Tranjyl'vania ; that near 
 Chermay, a Village in Sixitzer- 
 land; that in the Canton of 
 Fribiirg, and that not far from 
 Cracovj, in PolaJid. There are 
 many hifhng Springs, bubbling 
 at the top, in S^j.'itzerla7/d, and 
 in other Places ne;ir the Rhine. 
 There arc fome boiling Waters 
 that are hot to feveral Decrees, 
 fo as to boil Eggs, and other 
 things put into them ; as thofe 
 near the Solfatera, not far from 
 Naples ; as alfo upon the top of 
 Mount Zebio, in the Duke of 
 Modeuas Territories, not far 
 from this FiJla, near Saffah ; in 
 the Source of the Emperor's 
 Bath at J^c/i, in the County of 
 ju/iers, iffc. This in part from 
 Dr Tancred Robin/on i, Obferva- 
 tionsupon boiling F'ountnins, in 
 Lonx thorp's Abridgrnetit y Vol. \l. 
 Pag. 329. 
 
 PRO^
 
 Chap. 17. of Unherfal Geography. 389 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 To enumerate the JVatcrs that have other Jlrange Pro- 
 perties, and to enquire into the Caufjs of them. 
 
 HITHER ought all fuch to be referred, as 
 cannot be conveniently reduced to the iormer Clafs. 
 There is a Fountain at Cadima ('eight Leagues trorn 
 Coimbra) in Portugal, which i\vallows up whatever 
 is thrown into it ; and there was formerly near to 
 this, one that vomited up whatever was thrown in- 
 to it, but it is now flopped. Eiifebius JS'ierember- 
 gius relates, that there is a Lake not tar froni Gil':- 
 daiana in Andalujia, which foretels a Storm, for 
 when a Storm is approacliing, it breaks out witii 
 horrible Roarings and Howlings, which may hi 
 heard at eighteen or twenty Miles diftance*. Ihcre 
 is a Well near Calais, [in Picardie'] into which if 
 you throw a Stone, you'll hear a Noifj in the Ca- 
 vity, like a prolonged Thunder-Clap. There arc 
 fame Wells on the Alps, wliofe Waters cjufc thoie 
 that drink of them, to have great Swellings abouc 
 their Necks. There is a Fountain near the Tow 1 
 of Anteque in the Province of Granada, which is of 
 fuch a Nature, as to diffolve Rocks. 
 
 NEAR Tours, a Town in France, People vi- 
 fit the dropping Caves, (called les Caves gout tiercs) 
 from whofe Concavity Drops of Water tall in leve- 
 ral Figures, as that of Nuts, Almonds, Life. 
 
 T LI E hot Fountain in Japan, fcorches and con- 
 fumes every thing put into it, Iron, Fleih, Cloth, 
 
 THERE was formerly a Fountain at Clitor^ 
 a Town in Arcadia, whole Water, being drunk 
 
 * There is faid to be one like this near Guada!axa-a In Neiii 
 Cajlile, 
 
 C c 3 ^ by
 
 390 Tie Ahjolute Fart S e c t. IV. 
 
 by any Perfon, made him have an Averfion to 
 "Wine. 
 
 THERE was a Spring in the Ifland of C/j/oj, 
 made thofe that tafted thereof ftupid •, and at ^ufa 
 in Perfidy there was a little Well, which made their 
 Teeth flill out that drank thereof. The Studious 
 may colle6l feveral other flrange Properties of 
 Fountains, in reading of Authors, Their Caufes 
 proceed from the Situation, or peculiar Properties 
 of the Places where they are found (w). 
 
 PROPOSITION XVII. 
 
 To enumerate thofe Fountains that flow cnh at certain 
 Time^^ or thai chb and flow i and to explain their 
 
 Caufe. . 
 
 THIS Propofition belongs to tiie preceding 
 Chapter, becaufe it is about marvellous Waters, 
 and being then omitted, it fliall be explained here. 
 
 fmj yofipous, the Hii\or']d.n, 
 tellsus ofa River, which for fix 
 jpays runs violently fwift, aiid 
 refteth on the feventh always ; 
 wherefore it is called t/je River 
 of the Sabbath. 'Tanjcrnier tells 
 «fa Well at Schirns in Perjia, 
 which is fifteen Years rifing to 
 the top, and fifteen Years fink- 
 Jing to the bottom. * About 
 
 * two Leagues from Paikrbor>i, 
 
 * is a treble Spring called Me- 
 ' /forr, which has threeStrcams 
 
 * two whereof are not above a 
 ' Foot and a half diftant from 
 
 * one another, and yetof fo dif 
 ' ferent Qualities, that whereas 
 
 * one of them is limpid, blue- 
 
 * iih, lukewarm, and bubbling; 
 ' the other is Ice-cold, turbid, 
 
 * whitilli, and heavier than the 
 
 * former, and alfo killeth all 
 
 * Poultry that drink of it. As 
 ' to the third Stream that lies 
 
 * lower than the other two, a- 
 
 * bout twenty Paces dillant from 
 ' them, is ofa greenifh Colour, 
 ' \-ery clear, and of a four Aveet 
 ' Taite, pleafing enough.' P/6/- 
 lof. Trcnf. N^ 7. Pag. 133. 
 At the City of Toledo in Spain^ 
 there is a Fountain, whofe Wa- 
 ters near the bottom, are of an 
 acid Tafle, but towards the Sur- 
 face e.x'treamly fweet. Near to 
 Sanyenga (a Village not far from 
 Rio de la Grace, in Kegroland) 
 is a Well of ten Fathom deep^^ 
 whofe Water is naturally fo \'t.' 
 ry fweet, that in Tafle it comes, 
 nothing fiiort of ordinary Su- 
 gar, CcrdoH.
 
 C If A p. 1 7« of Umverfal Geography. 3 9 1 
 
 I N JVales, not far from D'mevowr Cadle [iiear 
 Carmarthen^'] there is a Fountain which ebbs and 
 flows every day with the Sea, and obfervesit's Hours. 
 THE like Flux and Kellux, is obfervcd in ano- 
 ther on the top of a high Hill, in the Province of 
 Connaugbt in Ireland^ and yet the Water is fvveet ; 
 the fame is oblerved in the Fountain Lou Zara^ 
 upon the Chabretian Mountains in Gallicia^ twenty 
 Leagues from the Sea ; alfo in the Village Mar face 
 in Guienne, there is a Fountain that follows the I'ides 
 at Sea, and flows at the fame Time with the Garomic 
 at Bourdeaux. There are other Fountains that are 
 faid to increafe and decreafe contrary to the 'iides, 
 fuch as Strabo and Mela report to have been in the 
 Ifland of Gades {Cadiz) («). 
 
 I N JVales, near the Mouth of the River Severn, 
 there is a Pool called Linligitna^ which fwallows up 
 the Water of the Flood Tides, as long as they 
 flow (but is not increaled thereby) : but when they 
 begin to ebb, then it begins to rife, and to vomic 
 out the Water with great Vehemence all round it's 
 Banks. 
 
 I N Cantabria {Bifca\) there are the Tamarician 
 Fountains, of which three out of the tour, are dri- 
 ed up twelve times every day, fo that there fcems, 
 
 (}i) At a fmall Village called Tranf.'H° 1 04. Pag. 909. [TXtv^ 
 
 'Ncvjton, in Glamorgan/hire , is are tavo Founlains in Craven in 
 
 a remarkable Spring nigli tlie Yorkfhire, ^^vhich chhandfio^vy 
 
 Sea, which ebbs and flows con- one at Gigglcfweek, called 
 
 trary to the Tides. ' Lay-Well, Ebbs and Flows, 'vjhich does 
 
 * near Torhay, ebbs and flows fj regularly e-very Day ; the o~ 
 ' very often every Hour, vi- ther at fiebden, called Thruf- 
 
 * iibly enough ; fometimes fix- kil, nvhlch fi/netimes (even in 
 
 * teen, fometimes twenty times, a great Drought, n^'hen there 
 
 * The Dillance between high has been no Rain for a Month) 
 
 * and low Water Mark, is a- breaks out ivith a great Force, 
 
 * bout five or fix Inches. It is of Hxhltijh, muddy, troubled 
 ' vefy pleafant to drink, and Water ; though at other timfs 
 
 * feems to have no Communi- it runs 'very clear, and affords 
 
 * cation with the Sea.' Philof. excellent fweet Water. 
 
 C c 4 to"
 
 392 Tlje Abfolute Tart S e c t. I V. 
 
 to be no Water in them. Tl'in-j relates this, but I 
 queftion whether fuch are to be found now. 
 
 I N the Dukedom of Anjott, above Saumur^ 
 there is a Village called Vantas^ from whence a 
 Rivulet flows twice daily, and twice ceafes or (lag- 
 rates. 
 
 I N Savoy ^ there is a large Spring called the 
 Wonderful Fountain^ which ebbs twice every Hour 
 and flows twice, making a great Noife before it 
 begins to flow. It runs into the Lake Bourgct. 
 
 N the Mountains of Foix (m LanguedoCy a 
 Province of France) near the Village Beilejlade, is 
 the fource of the River Lers^ which in Jiinr, Ju- 
 ly^ and Auguj}^ ebbs and flows twenty four times 
 every Day. Bertius relates this from Papyrius. 
 
 I N the part of fFejlfbalia, called Padcrhorny 
 there is a Fountain that ebbs and flows twice every 
 Day, tho' it emits as much Water as, a little below 
 the Fountain, turns three Mill-wheels. It breaks 
 out with a great Noife, and therefore ^^s v^e faid 
 before) is called Bolderborn \i. e. the boijlrous 
 S/ri^g]. 
 
 1 N the Town of Villanova in Portugal, there is 
 a Fountain, commonly viflted, that flows only from 
 the beginning of May^ to the beginning of No- 
 vemher^ and then leaves ofl ; as Eujebius Nicrem^ 
 hergiui relates. 
 
 I N the County of Valais, in Germany, not far 
 from the Baths called hcuckerhad, there is a Foun- 
 tain called .SV Mary*s Well; it ceafes to fpring 
 on St Mary's Day in Autumn, and returns in 
 May. 
 
 I N [Carniola,'] not far from Lauhacb, there is 
 a Lake that is fo dry in Summer, that it is fo^cd 
 and mowed {o). The Water returns in Autumfi, 
 
 and 
 
 (o) This Lake is fo \'ery re- | Defcripfion here, which we ihall 
 markable, tliatitwilldefcrve a | give from Fhihf. Tranf. No 
 
 54^
 
 C H A p . 1 7 • of Vnherfal Geography. '^93 
 and brings Filh with it. Not far from hence, 
 there is a Fountain that hath the fame Property. 
 
 SO 
 
 54, 109, 191. It is called the 
 Zirchnitztr Sea, from Zirc/j/n/z, 
 a Town upon it's Banks, of a 
 bout three liundredHoufes. T'he 
 Lake is near two German Miles 
 long, and one broad. It is fur- 
 rounded everywhere with moun- 
 tain?, and no where runs over. 
 In June, 'July, and fometimes 
 not till Augiijl, the Water runs 
 away, and finks under Ground, 
 not only by Percolation, or fal- 
 ling through the Pores of the 
 Earth, but by retiring under 
 Ground, thro' many great Holes 
 at the bottom ; the little, if any, 
 that remains in the hilly or rocky 
 Part, is evaporated ; and in O^o- 
 ber or No^^emb. it moll common- 
 ly returns again (though not at 
 any certain Time) and foon co- 
 vers the Tradl of Earth again. 
 This Return and Afcent is fo 
 fpeedy, and it mounts at the 
 Holes with fuch Violence, that 
 it fprings out of the Ground, to 
 the height of a Pike. 
 
 The Holes are in the fhape of 
 Bafons or Cauldrons, which are 
 notofthefameDepthorBreadth, 
 being from twenty to h.xty Cu- 
 bits more or lefs broad, and from 
 eight to twent)- Cubits deep. In 
 the Bottom of thefe are feveral 
 Holes, at which the Water and 
 Filhes enter, when the Lake 
 ebbs away. Thefe are not in 
 foft or loofc Earth, but com- 
 monly made in the folid Rock. 
 
 The Lake being thus every 
 Year wet and dry , ferves the In- 
 habitants for many purpofes. 
 For iiril, while it is full of Wa- 
 
 ter, it draws to it feveral forts 
 of wild Geefe and Ducks, and 
 other Water-Fowl, which may 
 be Ihot, and are very good 
 Meat. 2. As foon as the Lake 
 is emptied, they pluck up the 
 Rufhesand Weeds, which make 
 Litter for Cattle. 3. Twenty 
 Days after it is fully dry, they 
 cut a great Quantity of Hay upon 
 it. 4. After the Hay is in, they 
 plow it, and few Miller, which 
 generally comes to jMaturity. 
 5. There is great Variety of 
 Hunting ; there coming cut of 
 the neighbouring Woods and 
 Mountains, plenty of Hares, 
 Foxes, Deer, Swine, Bears, ^V. 
 fo foon as the Water is gone- 
 6. When it is full, one may 
 Fi{h in it. 7. All the Time 
 when the Water goes awav, it 
 yields great abundance of Fifh, 
 which they catch in the Pits and 
 Places, where the Holes are not 
 big enough to admit them un- 
 der Ground. Laflly, when the 
 Water returns, it brings a fort 
 of Ducks with it, which are 
 bred under Ground, and when 
 they hrll come out can fwim well 
 enough, but are ilark blind, and 
 have few or nofe-Tthers on them. 
 They foon fee after they come 
 into the Light, and in a fmall 
 time get their Feathers, being 
 much like Wild-Ducks, and are 
 of a goodTafte,and eafilycaught. 
 The Caufe, or rather Modus^ 
 of all thefe wonderful Phxnome- 
 ne in this Lake, is fuppofed to 
 be, a Lake {"jiz. a fubterrancou^ 
 cnr) under the Bottom of this
 
 394 7?'^ Ahfohte Fart Se CT. IV. 
 
 SO the Pool or Lake of Maron^ between the 
 Sea ot Galilee^ and the City Delena^ is lb dry in 
 Slimmer^ that it brings forth tall Herbs and Shrubs, 
 yielding fiieker to Lions, Wolves, and other wild 
 Beai\s. 
 
 i N Guienne, near the Church of St Jean ^ An- 
 gdi, there is another that hath almoft no Water in 
 It in V/inter^ but abundance in Summer. 
 
 THE like is found in Spain^ about twelve 
 Miles from Valladolid, which begins to flow in Ma^, 
 and sives over in November. 
 
 ALL hot Baths flow without ceafing, except 
 thofe, already mentioned, in the Grijom Country. 
 
 with which it communicates by 
 the feveral Holes defcribed. 
 There are alfo one or more 
 Lakes, under the bordering 
 Mountain yavomkk, but whofe 
 Surface is higher than that of 
 the Lake of Zirchnitz. This 
 upper Lake is poflibly fed by 
 foraeofthemany Rivers, which 
 in this Country bury them- 
 felves under Ground. When it 
 rains, efpccially in Thunder- 
 fhowers, which are the moft 
 hafty, the Water is precipita- 
 ted with great Violence down 
 the fleep Vallies, in which 
 
 are the Chanels of thefe Ri- 
 vulets ; {o that the Water in 
 this Lake being increafed by 
 the fudden coming of the 
 Rains, fafter than it can empty, 
 fwells prel'ently, and finding 
 feveral Holes or Caverns in the 
 Mountain higher than it's or- 
 dinary Surface, it runs over by 
 them into the fubterraneous 
 Lake under that of 7ArchnitZy 
 into which the Water comes 
 up by the feveral Holes or Pits 
 in the Bottom thereof, as like- 
 wife by vifible Paffages above 
 Ground. 
 
 SECT.
 
 Chap, i 8 . of Univerfal Geography. 39^ 
 
 SECT. V. 
 
 Containing o?ie Chapter. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 Of the Changes on the terraqueous Globe, viz. cf 
 Water into Land^ or hand into Water. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 I'd enquire how much of the Surface of the terraqueous 
 Globe, the Earth and Water ftverall'j take up. 
 
 IT is impoflible to know this accurately, becaufe 
 we are ignorant of the Situation of the Earth 
 and Ocean, about the North and South Pole, and 
 becaufe their Superlicies are terminated by irregular 
 and crooked Lines, not eafily computed or mea- 
 fured. But fo far as we can guefs, from a bare 
 Infpe(5lion of the Globe, it feems that the Super- 
 ficies of the Earth and Water are nearly equal ; 
 each taking up half of the Globe's Surtace. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 ^he Surfaces of the Earth and Waters, are not always 
 equally extended, hut fometimes more, and fotnetimes 
 lefs ; and what the one lofes the othir gains. 
 
 THE Sea frequently breaks in upon the Land 
 in feveral Places and overflows it, or waftes it by 
 degrees, and wafhes it away j by which means 
 
 it's
 
 396 Tl.-^e Ahfohte Fart S e c t. V. 
 
 it*s Superficies is enlarged according to tlie bignefs 
 of the Plane of Earth it overflows; fuch an In- 
 undation happened of old in Thejffahj^ ^c. But 
 the greateft that we know of have made no fen- 
 fible Alteration in the Surface of the Globe, tho* 
 it is pofTible that, fome Time or other, there v/ill 
 happen fuch as may j as we Ihall fliew in Propo - 
 fition xviii. . 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 7(7 compute bow much Earth and Water the terraque- 
 ous Globe contains. 
 
 T O find this accurately there ought to be 
 known exaftly the Surtace of the Water -, and ii*s 
 Depth in different Parts of thf; Sea, and alfo the 
 Bulk of the fubterraneous Waters. All which 
 we are ignorant of, and have no method to find 
 them ; and therefore are at a lofs in finding the 
 true quantity of either Earth or Water. We may 
 form an Hypothefis, and take the Superficies of 
 the Water for half the Superficies of the whole 
 Globe, and alfo I'uppofe the Sea to be a quarter 
 or half a Mile deep. Cone Place with another) 
 not reckoning the Water in fubterraneous Ca- 
 verns. 
 
 T H ES E being granted, the quantity of Wa- 
 ter is found thus : Take a quarter or halt a Mile 
 from the Semidiameter of the Earth, and find the 
 Solidity of a Sphere, whofe Semidiameter is equal 
 to the Remainder. This Solidity being taken from 
 the Solidity of the whole Globe, half the Remain- 
 der is the quantity of Water. This lafl being a- 
 gain fubftraded from the Solidity of the Globe, 
 leaves the quantity of Earth, to which, for the 
 Mountains, you mud add a fourth or fifth Part 
 of the Bulk of the Water, or even a half: yet 
 
 all
 
 Chap. i8. of Vniverfal Geography. 297 
 
 all this is but guefs-work, and not to be depended 
 upon for Truth, 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The IFater viaj leave the Shore, and the Places of 
 the Earth which it covered before, for fever al Rca- 
 fons ; fo that the dry Land ?)iay appear where it 
 was IVater or Sea before^ and a new Plat of Eartb 
 may feem to be formed. 
 
 T R A C T S of Water are feven-fold ; r. The 
 Ocean. 2. Bays. 3. Seas or Streights. 4. Rivers, 
 5. Lakes. 6. Ponds. 7. Bogs. 
 
 THAT Bogs or Marjfhes may be drained, ci- 
 ther by letting off the Water, or drying it up by 
 continual Fires, or by throwing dry Earth into 
 them, none need doubt ; for in feveral Places and 
 Countries there are fertile Fields, where there were 
 formerly nothing but Bogs and Marfhes ; as in 
 JVeflphalia, Gelderland, Brabant, Holland, Muf- 
 covy, i^c. So xht Peloponnefus in Greece was, in 
 the Time of the Trojans, barren and marlhy 
 Ground, but was made fertile in AriJlotU^ Time 
 by draining it. 
 
 THE fame may be faid of Pools and Ponds, 
 which are not very different. 
 
 PR POSITION V. 
 
 Rivers leave their Shores [or part of their Chancls) dry, 
 and form new Parcels of Ground in many Places. 
 
 I. I F their Water bring down a great deal of 
 Earth, Sand, and Gravel out of the high Places, 
 and leave it upon the low, in prccefs of Time 
 thefe will become as high as the other, from 
 
 whence
 
 39^ ^he Abjhlute Fart Sect. V. 
 
 whence the Water flows : Or when they leave this 
 Filth in a certain Place on one fide of the Chand, 
 it hems in and raifcs Pare of the Chanel v/hich be- 
 con-^es dry Land. 
 
 2. IF a River take another Courfe, made by 
 Art, or Nature, or fome violent Caufe, as the 
 Wind, or an Inundation, it leaves it's former 
 Chanel dry. 
 
 3. IF the Fountains that feed a River are ob- 
 ftra6ted, or ceafe to fend out their Waters, be- 
 caufe of the Earth falling in, or by being ftopped 
 with Heaps of Sand driven in by the Wind from 
 the adjacent Places, the Chanel of that River be- 
 comes dry. 
 
 EXAMPLES of Rivers, whofe Chanels arc 
 now dried up either wholly or in Part, are frequent- 
 ly met with among Authors; not of any great 
 Rivers, but of thofe of the fmaller fort, and fome 
 Branches of the great ones; thus that Branch of the 
 Rhlne^ which formerly run by Leyden into the Ger- 
 man Ocean, fome Ages ago foribok it's Chanel, 
 which is now dry Land, and ftagnates between 
 Leyden and Calwic. 
 
 W E have alfo feveral Examples of Shores that 
 have been left dry by Rivers making themfelves 
 deeper and narrower Chanels than they ufed to run 
 in i alfo of Rivers that are not navigable now, 
 which have been fo formerly, their Chanels being 
 made fhallower, and, in procefs of Time, maybe 
 quite choaked up, as the Scbelde^ &c. Therefore 
 the Rulers of Countries take care that the Sand- 
 Blinks, Filth, and Sediment, be continually re- 
 moved out of fuch Rivers, fo that diey may be 
 kept open and navigable as much as poiTible. 
 
 BUT great Rivers arc not dried up, or turn- 
 ed into dry Land in a great many Ages, or even 
 Myriads of Ages, bccaufe a vaft number of fmall 
 
 ones
 
 Chap, i 8. of Unherfal Geography. 3 9^ 
 
 ones flowing tiom diilerent Parts make up their 
 Waters and feed them ; lb that if one or two of 
 them be dried up, or change their Courfe, it will 
 be a long time before luch an Accident happen to 
 them all. One fingle Sand- Bank indeed might per- 
 form Wonders, in choaking up the PafTage of a 
 River, and make it take a new Chanel, whereby 
 the former is dried up -, but the River itfelf con- 
 tinues to flow, becaufe it's Fountains and Branches 
 .are not obltrucfted. Neverthelefs it is certain, that 
 neither the Nile, the Tanah^ the Elbe, nor tlie 
 Rhine, &c. did or will always flow in the fame 
 Places, but their Chanels were formerly dry Land, 
 and in future Ages will be fo again. 
 
 PROPOSJ'TION VI. 
 
 Lakes are dried up and turned into Earth. 
 
 I F the Lake be fed by Rivers flowing into it, 
 the Change is made by turning the Rivers another 
 Way, or by their ceafing to flow, together with 
 Evaporation. If it receive it's Waters from the 
 Ocean or Sea by fabterraneous Intercourfes, thefe 
 are to be fl:opped or diverted ; and fo the Lake 
 at firft is changed into a Fen or Bog, and after- 
 Vv'ard into dry Ground. Arijlotle (fpeaking of 
 Lakes fed by Riversj f\ys, it is certain that the 
 Force of the Water bringing Mitd» or fuch like 
 Matter, into any Lake, changes it into a Fen 
 or Bog, and afterwards into dry Ground .; for the 
 Water fl:agnating, is in Time dried up. Thus 
 the Mud and Sand, which the many Rivers bring 
 down into the Lake of the M^eotis, have made it 
 fo ihallow, that it will not admit fuch large Ships 
 now, as failed upon it about fixty Years ago. 
 ^ Of
 
 40 o "TJje Ahjhlute Fart Sect. V. 
 
 Of finall Lakes that are turned into dry Land we 
 have leveral Inllances, efpecially in Holland. 
 
 PROPO S iriON VIL 
 
 Streights are dried up and turned into IJihmus*s, or 
 Parts of Continents. 
 
 THIS is caufed by the contuiual gathering and 
 fubfiding of the Mud and earthy Matter, which 
 in Time choaks up the Streight, and ftops the In- 
 tercourfe ot the Water. 
 
 THUS it feems very probable that the Ifth- 
 mus between Africa and Jfta^ which parts the 
 Red'Sea from the Mediterranean^ was formerly a 
 Streight and joined them. The Depth of the Sea 
 in feveral Streights is alfo found to grow lefs, and 
 the Water to become (hallower than it ufed to be, 
 which is a certain Sign that fuch a Streight, fome 
 Time or other, will be left bare, and be turned 
 into dry Land. So that Bay in the Atlantic Sea 
 which the Hollanders called the Zuidcr Sea^ and the 
 Streiglits of the Texel, will not now admit of load- 
 ed Ships of the firft or fecond Rate, as they ufed 
 to do formerly ; and as the Water evidently leffens 
 and becomes fhallower every Year, it is likely the 
 Texel, will one Time or other, become dry Ground : 
 and that Streight which they call Ulie will, very 
 likely, have the n\me Fate. 
 
 PROPOSITION vm. 
 
 Bays may he in time dried up, and turned into firm 
 Groufid. 
 
 THIS may happen from a two-fold Caufe : i. 
 If the Streights which join the Bay to the Ocean 
 become an Ifthmus, or be choaked up with Sand 
 
 and
 
 Chap. i8. of Unherfal Geography. 401 
 
 and Mud (that fuch a thing may happen, we fhew- 
 cd in the laft Propofition^ 5 by this means the Bay 
 is cut off from the Ocean, and becomes a Lake, 
 which is turned into a Fen, or Bog, and then into 
 dry Ground. 2. If the Chanel of the B.iy be 
 heightened continually by the Sand and Grave), 
 brought down by the Rivers into it, it will in 
 Time be higher than the Ocean, and receive no 
 more Sea- Water. 
 
 THUS the MedlterranecVi^ Baltic^ Red-Sea, 
 Perfian Gulph, ^c. which are now Bays, may bs 
 changed, one Time or other, into dry Land i as 
 we fhall further prove in the next Propofition. 
 
 PROPOSiriON IX. 
 
 The Ocean in fame Places forfakei the Shores^ fo that 
 it becomes dry Land where it wai formerly Sea, 
 
 THIS is caufed by thefe Means: i. If the 
 force of the Waves dafhing againft the Shore, be 
 broken by Cliffs, Shoals, or Rocks, fcattered here 
 and there, under Water, the earthy Matter con- 
 tained in the Water, as Slime, Mud, &c. is made 
 to fubfide, and increafe the Height of the Sand- 
 Banks, whereby the Violence of the Ocean is more 
 and more refilled, which makes it yield more Se- 
 diment ; fo that at length the Sand-Banks, being 
 raifed to a great Height and Bulk, entirely ex- 
 clude the Ocean and becomes dry Land. 2, It 
 contributes much to heightning the Shores if they 
 be (andy and rocky, for then the Sea dafhing a- 
 gainft them, and withdrawing, carries little or no- 
 thing away from them, but every Time it ap- 
 proaches them it brings Dregs and Sediment, 
 whereby they are increai'ed in the Manner afore- 
 faid. 3. If fome neighbouring Shores confift of 
 light, mouldring, porous. Earth, which is eafily 
 
 V OL I. D d wallied
 
 402 ' ■ The Abfolute Part S e c t. V. 
 
 wafiied away by the Flux of the Sea, it is mixed 
 with the Water, and left upon fome other adjacent 
 Shore that is harder ; bcfides, when the Sea en- 
 croaches upon one Shoie, it rclinquifhes another 
 not tar oif. 4. Large Rivers bring down vaft 
 Quantities of Sand and Gravel to their Moutlis, 
 (where they exonerate themfelves into the Sea) 
 and leave it there, partly becaufe the Chanel is 
 wider and fhallower, and partly becaufe the ^ea 
 refills their motion ; but this is chiefly obferved 
 in Countries, whofe Rivers annually overflow their 
 Banks. 5. If frequent winds blow from the Sea 
 to the Shore- wards, and the Shore itfelf be rocky 
 or of rough Earth without Sand, it gathers Slime 
 and Mud, and becomes higher. 6. It the Tide 
 flow quick, and without great Force, but ebb 
 flowly, it brings a great deal of Matter to the 
 Shore, but carries none away. 7. If the Shore de- 
 fcend obliquely into the Sea for a great Way, the 
 Force of the Waves are broke and lefTened by 
 Degrees, and the Sea leaves it's Filth and Slime 
 upon it. 
 
 THERE are feveral Places of the Earth, which, 
 it is certain were formerly covered by the Ocean. 
 Wiiere Egypt is now, it was formerly Sea, as ap- 
 pears both from the Teftimony of the Antients, 
 and Experience ^ tor the AV/c, flowing from the 
 remote Regions of ELhiopia, when it over- 
 flows it's Banks, covers all Egsjl for a Time, and 
 then fettling by Degrees, it leaves the Dregs, Mud, 
 Dirt, and earthy Matter, which the fwilt Courfe 
 of the River had brought down •, by this means Eg'spt 
 becomes annually higher and higher. But before fuch 
 a Quantity of Matter was brought down to the 
 A7/i?, the Sea covered the Land of Egvpt, tho' it 
 be repulfed and hemmed in now by the Earth's ac 
 quired Altitude. Arifiotle^ among others, aflferts 
 this, and fays : This Place, and the whole Coun- 
 3 try
 
 C H A p. 1 8. of JJniverfal Geography. 403 
 
 try fmeaning Egsipt) were formed by the pouring 
 in of the ISile, and feems to gain Firmncls every 
 Year. But fince the neighbouring Inhabitants, by 
 Degrees, began to culcivate the Marfnes and Bogs 
 as they dried up, it is impoffibk to gucfs at die 
 Time of this Mutation. However, it feems that 
 all the Mouths of the Nile have been made by 
 Hand, and not by the River, except that of Ca^ 
 nopus. It is tiirther evident, that all old Eg'^pt 
 confifted only of one Town, which they called 
 'Thebes. Homer dechrcs this, who flouriflied (I may 
 lay) not long after thefe Changes ; for he men- 
 tions that Place as if there were then no flich City 
 as Memphii^ at leaft not fo large. Seneca explains 
 this better thus: Eg^pt (fays he) arofe wholly at 
 firft from Mud •, and if we may credit Homer ^ the 
 Ifland of Pharos was fo far diliant from the Con- 
 tinent, as a Ship, with all her Sails fpread, could 
 fail in a Day, but now it is joined to the Continent; 
 for the Nile flowing muddy and troubled, and car- 
 rying dov/n much Slime and Dirt, leaves it about 
 it's Mouths, whereby the Continent is annually en- 
 larged, and Egypt is flretched further and further 
 every Year. Hence comes the Fatnefs and Ferti- 
 lity of the Soil, and alio it's Evennefs and So- 
 lidity ; for the Mud fettles and grows dry and 
 hard, and the Ground becomes firm by what is 
 laid upon it. 
 
 THE Ganges and hidus^ both famous P^ivers in 
 Ifididy do the fame as the Nile, by their Inunda- 
 tion ; alfo the Rio de la Plata in Brajil. And 
 it is very probable that China v/as formed by 
 this means, or at leaft enlarged •, bccaufe the 
 impetuous River, called the Hoamho^ flowing cue 
 of Tartar^ into China^ and frequently overflowing 
 it^s Banks, tho' not annually j hath fo much Sand 
 and Gravel in it, as to make a third Fart of it's 
 Waters. 
 
 Dd 2 THESE
 
 404 The Ahfolute Tart S e c t. V. 
 
 THESE Examples demonftrate the fourth 
 Caule, viz. that Rivers make the Sea toriake the 
 Shore •, but the Sea it fell, in leveral Countries, is 
 the Caufe of it's own retiring, by bringing to the 
 Shore, and there leaving Sediment and Matter 
 enough to increafe the Altitude of the Coaft \ fo 
 that it fullers not the Sea to overflow it any longer. 
 Thus Holland^ Zeeland.^ and G elder Ian d^ were formed -, 
 for the Sea covered thefe Countries formerly, as is 
 known both from the antient Monuments mention- 
 ed in Pliftory, and the Quality of the Soil itfelf. 
 In the Mountains of Gelderlandy not far from Ni- 
 meguen, there are found Sea- Shells, and at a great 
 Depth in Holland are dug up Shrubs and ouzy mat- 
 ter i add to this, that the Sea itfelf is higher than 
 thefe Countries, and would overflow and cover 
 them, but that it is reftrained by Banks and Dams. 
 On the other hand, there are fome that think Hol- 
 land and Zeeland arofe from the Mud and Sand 
 brought down by the Rhine d.nd the Maes\ nor is this 
 unlikely. PruJJia alfo and the adjacent Countries 
 daily become larger by the Sea's retiring. 
 
 P RO P O S iriON X. 
 
 To explain the Origin or Rife of Sand- Banks. 
 
 B Y Sand-Banks we underftand large Colledions 
 or Cliffs of Sand in the Water, (landing up above 
 the Chanel of a River, to fuch a Height as to hin- 
 der the PafHige of Ships. The Dutch Sailors call 
 them een Droogte, een Banck, een Rifs ; the Portuguefe^ 
 j^brothes, and Baixes. They differnot from Rocks, 
 only that Rocks are hard, folid, and coherent in 
 their parts ; whereas Sand-Banks confiftof grains of 
 Sand, that ftick more loofely together. The* 
 thefe two are often confounded. 
 
 THESE
 
 Chap. 1 8. of Vniverfal Geography. 405 
 
 THESE Sand Banks Jie either in the Chantls 
 of Rivers, as frequently in the Eihe^ ainl the IVol^a j 
 or at the Mouths of Rivers, as is alfo frequent in 
 the two Rivers juft mentioned; or on the Sea 
 Shores, or in the middle of the Sea. The manner 
 of their Generation is the fame as in the foregoing 
 Propofitions we obferved of the drying up the 
 Courfe of Rivers, and the Shores of the Sea. For 
 it generally happens, that the Ocean, before it 
 leaves any part of the Land for good, firfl pro- 
 duces thefe Sand- Banks near the Shore ; then recedes 
 by degrees, and leaves the Sand- Banks a part of 
 the Continent. And after the fime manner it hap- 
 pens in the Chanels of Rivers, before they dry up, 
 and are totally forfaken by the Waters. The moll 
 common Caufe is the increafing of the Rivers with 
 Rain, or melted Snow, fb that they rufh down 
 violently, and wafh off their Banks, where they 
 are narrow, Slime and Mud •, which is carried 
 down a great way from their Fountains, till 'tis 
 brought to fome wide Place, where the Motion is 
 not lb violent ; and here it fubfides and forms a 
 Bank of Sand, or Mud. 
 
 NOR can any greater Evil happen to the moft 
 rich and flourifhing trading Towns, whofe loaded 
 Ships have been ruined by them •, not to mention 
 Towns, that thro' Time are quite forgot, there are 
 the Cities Slavorcn in Frief.and \ Arncmudc, or ^r~ 
 mugen^ m Zedand \ and Dordracu??i in Holland » 
 Antwerp in Brabant ; and Slada^ in the Bifnopric 
 of Bremen •, all which have had this. Fate. 
 
 NOR is there fcarce any trading Sea-Port free 
 from the Danger. Thefe Sand- Banks in th.c Elbe^ 
 have loft a great many Ships to the Hamhurghcrs^ 
 which had efcaped many Dangers on the Ocean i 
 and in other Places, efpecially the Tcsel^ and the 
 Ulie at A?njlerda?n. 
 
 D d 3 -M A N Y
 
 40 6 1'he Abjohte Fart Sect. V. 
 
 M ANY of thele Banks are feen on the Sea- 
 Shore ol Flanders^ and Friejland^ and at low Wa- 
 ter Teem to be parts of the Continent, having fo 
 little Water above them at high Tide, as not to 
 admit of Ships, The Sand-Bunks that are famous 
 or infamous among Sailors for Shipwrecks, are 
 I . Thofe found all in one Place, at cKe Shore of 
 Brafil^ extending in a Trat5l of feventy Miles, 
 Vv'hich they that go to the bidies^ ought carefully 
 to beware of, when they are fliiling that way to 
 avoid being bcc;dmt;d on the Guinea Shore, tho* 
 ihey come as near them as they can, to get the 
 more Wind •, but ought to take Care they do not 
 tall in between thofe Banks, and the Shore, 2. 
 I'hofe of St Ann, not hv from Guinea in Africa^ 
 in fix Degrees of North Latiiude : the Ships once 
 carried among them, are not brought eafily from 
 them -, but detained for feveral Days, when the Sea- 
 men think they have got rid of them ; for they 
 do not lie clofe together, but are parted by Gulphs 
 and deep Places-, fo that when they are in ten Yards 
 Water, they on a fudden fliall found but three 
 Yards. 3. Thofe between Madagafcar, and Ara- 
 bia^ and Jfric a, c^WcdthcBdixasofJihliza: they 
 are fharp, ragged Rocks of Coral, of various Co- 
 Jours, 4. Thofe about China. 5. Thofe towards 
 Flanders ; and feveral others that may be feen in Sea 
 Charts. 
 
 W E have fhown one Way how they are formed, 
 viz, by the fubfiding of the Matter which the Sea 
 carries with it •, we may add a fecond Way, and 
 that is, by the Sea's coming in upon Land, that hath 
 heaps of Sand on it, which, being covered, are 
 Sand-Banks under the Surf^e of the Water, Thus 
 at the Shores of Gelderland, and Holland, there are 
 feveral fuch, which they call Dunen ; they are in 
 a Jong Tradt raifed above the Land, on the 
 
 Shore ;
 
 Chap. i8. ofUfiiverfalGeograpbw ^^oy 
 
 Shore -, and if the Sea break in, then thefe. Hills 
 become Sand Banks. 
 
 T H E Y are frequently at the Mouths of Rivers 
 where they are broadert, and where their Motion 
 is not fo rapid but the Matter can fubfide, and the 
 Waves of the Sea beat back the River-Water, 
 which ftops it's Force. It is worth while to dillii.- 
 guifli and confidcr thefe two ways. 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. ' 
 
 To judge "^belter the Sand-Bank^ uot far from the 
 i>bore will become a ■part of the Continent. 
 
 W E fhowed, in the preceding Propofition, that 
 they are formed two ways •, one by the fabfiding 
 <;!■ Matter, and the other by Heaps of Sand that 
 are overflowed: if they happen in the firll: way, 
 and they be found to incrcale (till, it is likely thty 
 will be joined to the Continent •, but if in the fecor.d 
 way, and they are not increafed, then it is not like- 
 ly they will be joined, but rather that the Sea v/ill 
 come further : but this we only guefs, 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 IJIands are formed in the Sea and Rivers^ the fame 
 wax that Sand-Bankiare['ivhiJj may become JjJandi)^ 
 and alfo another way, 
 
 FOR if there be gathered in any part of ti-.e' 
 Sea, Sand, Gravel, Slime, or Clay, it will in time t 
 become an Ifland ; and if the Sea break in upon 
 the Land, and furround Hills, they become lilands ; 
 and thus 'tis likely thofe were formed which are 
 very high, as St Helena, the I fie of Afcenf:on^ l^c, 
 efpecially if they be rocky and fiony. 
 
 D d 4 AND
 
 4o8 Tie Ahjoliite Part S e c T. V. 
 
 A N D to thele belong thofe which the Sea 
 cuts off from the Land that juts out into it ■, thus 
 antient Writers tell us, that ^icii^ was cut off from 
 //rt/)', by the breaking in of the Sea violently ; 
 and the Verfes of the Poet on this Subjed are well 
 known, 
 
 B Y the firft way, viz. by fubfiding and ga- 
 thering of a great many earthy Particles, were 
 formed the Iflands of Zeeland^ Denmark^ and Ja^ 
 fan't and alio the Ifles of Molucca: for there 
 were found, by thofe that dug the Ground there 
 a little way down, a great quantity of 'Sand and 
 Snells. 
 
 THE Inhabitants of the Ifland of Ceylon fay 
 their Ifland was fcpaiatcd from India, and it is ve- 
 ry likely. Thus the Ifland of Sujnatra is thought to 
 have joined Milacca -, and it is probable, becaufe 
 of the feveral Banks and Qiiick-Sands there. It is 
 certainly believed it was the golden Chcrfonefus^ 
 and was counted to be a Peninfula, for it appears fo 
 at a diftance, and to be joined to Malacca. 
 
 THE Indians, on the Alalabar Shore, tell us, 
 that the Ifles of Maldives ^ were of old joined to 
 India, in one Continent, and are now a great 
 way from it, and divided into eleven thoufand 
 Iflands i and it is probable they will all in time 
 be joined in one Ifland, they being not diflant 
 in fomc Places above four or five Yards. The 
 narrow Seas will become narrower, and fo join 
 one to another. And indeed all the oriental Iflands, 
 between the Continent of Afia and Magellan, feem 
 to arife from the Sea's breaking in violently on 
 the Land, and feparating one part from another ; 
 for the Pacific Sea moves v/ith a continual force 
 to the Eajl from America to thefe Ifles, and the 
 'Wind blowing conftantly that way increafes the 
 force ; it is not therefore unlikely that, feeing all 
 thefe Iflands are in the Torrid ZonCy Jfia did of 
 
 old
 
 Chap. i8. of Vniverfal Geography. 409 
 
 old join the Magellanic^ or South Land, the Earth 
 being broke olf here and tlicre by the Sea, 'till 
 at latt it made it's way to the Indian Ocean, and 
 formed many Iflands ftrangely fituated dole toge^ 
 ther, as Java^ the Celebes, Borneo, Madura, Atn- 
 boyna, i^c. 
 
 W E may judge the fame of the Iflands in the 
 Gulf of Mexico, and at the Streight of Magellan. 
 
 I T is uncertain whether the Iflands of the jEgean 
 Sea were broke off the Land by the Sea, the 
 Waves from the Euxine and Mediterranean Sea 
 meeting one another, or by the fubfiding of the 
 Matter which v/as brought from the Euxine to the 
 Propontis \ tho' the former is more probable : and 
 perhaps this was the lamous Deluge of Deucalion. 
 It is certain the Ifle of Eubaa, or Negroponte, joined 
 Greece, as famous Writers relate ; for the Sea be- 
 tween them is fo narrow as to have a Bridge over 
 it. 
 
 V\^ E have feveral Inftances of Iflands made by- 
 Sand- Banks. Thus thofe in the Nile, and in the 
 'R.'xwtx oi St Lawrence in North America, were Sand- 
 Banks. The Rivers make Iflands alfo when they 
 difcharge a Branch in one Place, and receive ic 
 in another, as in the Tanais, and JVolga, and o- 
 thers ; which no doubt is done by the Induftry 
 of Men. The Oby does the fame. The two 
 Rivers, Rengo and Coauza, produced the Ifle of 
 Loanda, on the Shore of fouthern Africa, where 
 they exonerate themfelves into the Sea, be- 
 caufe they bring down from the high Places a 
 great quantity of Slime and Gravel with great Vio- 
 lence, which they depofited fl:ill in the Mouths of 
 the Rivers, and fo made the Ifle of Loanda ; which at 
 firfl: was but a Sand- Bank, and now it is a fruitful 
 Ifland, abounding with Inhabitants and fertile Land. 
 We believe a great many Iflands on the Shore 
 were formerly Sand-Banks, or Clay-Bnnks, tho' 
 
 fome
 
 4IO ^he Abjblute Part Sect. V. 
 
 fome were made by parting them from the Con- 
 tinent, as at Norzuay : and this is moll probable oi" 
 thofc that are hard and rocky. 
 
 B U l\ in the hidian St-a, luch may happen 
 by both ways •, for while the Sea wears olt, it 
 doth at the fame time carry away with it much 
 Earth, which fettles in another Place i and this is 
 much caufed by iurious Winds, and frequent 
 Storms, that come from the breaking of the Clouds 
 in the rainy Months ; from Aldy to September. 
 The Sea is flrangely difturbed by thefe, fo that 
 the Sand and Clay is railed from the bottom, 
 and carried to the Indian Shores. Thus the Mouths 
 of the Harbours at Goa are fo obftruded by 
 Heaps of Sand, which come with tlie force of the 
 Storms from May to September^ that fmall Ships 
 can fcircely enter •, and thefe Heaps of Sand fo 
 cbftrucl the Harbour of Cochin^ that they are like 
 a Bar, or Wall, that neither great nor fmall Ships 
 can enter. 
 
 FOR continual Rains on Mount Gate^ and the 
 frequent Storms from the Clouds which are ktw 
 hanging as it were above the tops of the Moun- 
 tains, pour out fo much Water with fuch Violence 
 that the Sea carries a great deal of Sand to the 
 Shores ; where, meeting with Oppofition, the 
 Sand fubfides, which is carried away again by the 
 Sea, when the Winter is over, and the Harbours 
 cleared. 
 
 THERE are fome Iflands fo near the Land, 
 that they are furrounded at the time of full Sea ; 
 and if the intervening Chanel become higher, thefe 
 Iflands become a Part of the Continent. 
 
 AND the overflowing of the Nik makes the 
 Towns and Hills look like Iflands; and the JVolga 
 doth fo fwcll in May and June as to cover the 
 Iflands and Sand-Banks in it •, and feveral of the 
 IQands near India become like Sand- Banks in the 
 
 rainy
 
 Chap, i 8 . of Unherfal Geography. 4 1 1 
 
 rainy Months, when the Nile and Ganges overflow 
 theie Countries. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 There is ancther way that Iflands are formed hcfides 
 the two abovementionedy which is delivered by fome 
 IVriters^ viz. that the Earth on a fudden is car- 
 ried from the bottom of the Sea, and fuddenly rifes 
 to the Surface. 
 
 OTHERS think very juftly that this fabulous 
 way comes from the fabulous Greeks and Poets, who 
 will have Delos to have come up that way ; and 
 the grave Author Seneca fays, the Ifland Therafia 
 did, in his Time, come up in the jEgean Sea, and 
 that the Seamen obferved it : and tho' indeed there 
 are but few Examples of this kind, yet we are not 
 therefore to think it impofTible ; for there may be 
 in the bottom of the Sea fome porous, fpongy, 
 hollow, and fulphureous, Earth, (as there are many 
 forts of light Earth,) which is now grown to a 
 great Height under the Water ; and if it come to 
 break off by the force of the Sea, and being of lefs 
 or equal Weight with the Water, it may come to 
 the Superficies, and an Ifland appear on a fudden. 
 Or a Spirit fliut up under the Earth, and endea- 
 vouring to break out, may without the force of the 
 Water bring it up to the Surface ; for thefe Spirits 
 included have great Power, as appears in Earth- 
 quakes, by which whole Mountains have been 
 thrown up and fwallowed down, and the fame way 
 are great Towers and Walls blown up by Gun- 
 Powder placed under Ground. 
 
 I F therefoKe the Ifland that thus appears fud- 
 denly do yet adhere to the Bottom, it mufl: be 
 that it was forced up by the Spirits inclofed un- 
 derneath ; as fome write, that fometimes Moun- 
 tains
 
 412 TJje Abfolute Fart Sect. V. 
 
 tains have been blown up that way ; but if it do 
 not adhere to the Bottom, it might be loofened 
 from the Bottom, partly by the torce of the Wa- 
 ter, and partly by the inclofed Spirits, and come 
 up by it's own Lightnefs. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 FROM this another doubt ari fes •, Whether 
 there are floating Iflands ; as Thales thought the 
 whole Earth did float on the Water of the Ocean : 
 but his Opinion is fufficiently refuted from the 
 Sea's Chanel being continued every where, and 
 yet there may be floating Iflands if the Earth 
 be hollow, light, and fulphureous. Sefieca tells his 
 Experience, that he faw in the Lake Cutilia, m 
 the Fields of the Town Reate, belonging to the 
 Sabwes, an Ifland that floated, and Trees and 
 Herbs on it, that was carried here and there by 
 the Wind, yea by a gentle Gale -, and that he 
 never found it for a Day and Night in the fame 
 Place ; and he lays there was another Ifland that 
 floated in the Lake of Vadimone •, and another in 
 {tiQ.h.dke, oi Statione. Thus the Antients fay, that 
 Delos, and all the Iflands of the Cy chides^ did of 
 old float on the Sea. Nor need it be objeded, 
 why don't they fwim now ? for the Anfwer is eafy ; 
 the floating cannot hold out long, for they reach- 
 ing near the Bottom, and being carried from one 
 place to another, they meet with a Sand Bank and 
 and fettle there, efpecially if they come between 
 two Sand-Banks, then they join and become fixed. 
 In Honduras^ a Province of jlmerica^ there is a 
 Lake in which there are feveral little Hills, planted 
 with Shrubs and Herbs toffed up and down with 
 the Wind. 
 
 I N the large hoch^ called Lomond in Scotland^ 
 there is an Ifland that floats, and is driven by 
 
 the
 
 Chap, i 8 . of Vtiiverjal Geography. 413 
 
 the Wind: it feeds Cattle, as Boi'lbiasy the Wri- 
 ter of the Scots Hillory, relates. 
 
 SO far of the forming of dry Land where Sea 
 was -, now we fliall confidcr how there can Water 
 come where there was dry Land. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 'Tbe Rivers run in new Chaneh for feveral Caufes, 
 
 1. WHEN they come from their Fountains, 
 and get a Chanel either made by Art or Nature. 
 
 2. I F a River fend out a Branch from it, which 
 is caufed for the moft part by Men, either to bring 
 Water to a Town, or to another River : Examples 
 whereof we fhewed above. 
 
 3. IF Rivers gain more and more upon their 
 Banks ; which happens, i . When the Chanel grows 
 higher thro' the fubfiding of Mud and Sand. 2. If 
 it wear off the Banks by it's fwift Courfe. 3. If 
 it be increafed by another River flowing into it, 
 or by Rains or Snow. 
 
 4. IF they overflow the Land, and become 
 Lakes by not returning to their former Chanel, 
 which if they do and leave a good deal behind they 
 make Bogs. 
 
 COROLLART. ': 
 
 I T is probable Time was, when the Chanels of 
 the Rhine ^ Elbe^ Nile, and all other Rivers, were 
 dry Ground, and may again become fo. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVL 
 
 Lakes, Bogs, and /landing Pools, occupy Places that 
 they did not before, .1 
 
 I. WHEN
 
 414 ^^ Abfoliite Fart Sect. V. 
 
 1 . WHEN they are firft formed and enlarged 
 as in Chapter xv. 
 
 2. I F plenty of Rain fall. 
 
 3. IF the Rivers carry much "Water into the 
 Lakes with great force. 
 
 4. I F their Chanel become higher. 
 
 5. IF the Lakes by the frequent and flrong 
 Waves wear off the Banks, and cover more Ground. 
 Thus the Lake of Harlem^ within thefe thirty or 
 forty Years pad, is enlarged about one twentieth 
 of a Mile round. 
 
 , . > ,i;r COROLLARY. 
 
 I T is probable, that the Places where the Lake 
 Zaire, or Leinan, or Parime^ or of Harlem^ or of 
 McBOtis, and the Bogs in JVcJlphalia, and all others, 
 were once dry Ground. 
 
 Vi PROPOSITION XVII. 
 There is Ocean ivhere there was none before. 
 
 THIS may happen feveral ways ; i . When it 
 breaks into the Land, making Bays and Streights, 
 as the Mediterranean^ the Bay of Bengal^ the A- 
 ■rabian Gulph, and Bay of Camboia^ (^c. Thus 
 the Streights between Sicily and Italy, between 
 Ceylon and India, between Greece and Negroponte, 
 the Streights of Magellan, Manilba, and at the 
 Sound ', yea fome will have the Atlantic Ocean 
 thus made, and to have parted America from 
 Europe, that they may better deduce the Genera- 
 tions of Men there from Adam. It is certain the 
 Egyptian Pried told Solon, the Athenian, that about 
 fix hundred Years before Chrift (as may be ken 
 in Plato's Dialogue called Timceus) that there was 
 once an Ifland over againft the Herculean Streights 
 
 of
 
 Chap. 1 8. of Univerfal Geography. 41^ 
 o\ Gibr alter, greater tlr^n yl/ric a -And y^fi a, called 
 /Itlcuilii, and by a great Earthquake and Inun- 
 dation in a Day and Night, that it was after- 
 ward funk fx'iz. a Part of if j; by which wc may 
 underftand there was a Tradition among the Egyj>j. 
 tiaris, who were given to Learning, that America. 
 was feparated from the old World, many Ages 
 before. It is much more probable as to th'S 
 North part ot America, that New- France, 'New-- 
 England, and Canada, did of old join /r^/^// J; the 
 Antients fay the Streights of Gibraller were dug by 
 Hercules. 
 
 2. WHEN the Sea is driven on the Shore 
 with ftrong Winds breaking down the Shores and 
 Banks, made by Art or Nature ; there are feveral 
 Inflanccs of Inundations, as in T'heffal-^ of old, and 
 not long ago in Friejland and Holjtein. 
 
 3. WHEN it doth, by the Hime Caufcs, go 
 over the Land in feveral Places making Iflands ; 
 as we iliid of thofe in the £^7? Indies, and the Bay 
 of Bengal and Camboia, which flowed into the 
 Land. 
 
 4. W H E N it wears off the Shores, and fpreads 
 in upon the Land : thus the Bailie Ocean came 
 in upon Pomerania, and deftroyed Vineta, a moft 
 famous Sea- Port. Thus on the Shore of Nor-waj 
 it broke in, and cut off fome Iflands from the 
 Continent, and the German Ocean broke in on 
 Holland, near the Village of the Catti, and over- 
 fpread a great Tra6t of Ground ; thus the Ruir,s 
 of an old Brili/Jj Caftle, that was a Garrifon of 
 the Romans, is, a great way in the Sea, hid un- 
 der Water, And on the North part of Ceylon near 
 India, the Sea took off twenty Miles, and made 
 tlie Iflaixi Icfs j and there are many other Examples 
 alfo. 
 
 C OROL--
 
 4 1 6 ■' .- "The Ahfolute Fart S e c t. V. 
 
 CORO LLART, 
 
 HENCE we underftand, that v/here there is 
 now Sea there was Land, and again may be, it the 
 Earth hath lafted, and fhall continue, fbme thou- 
 fand Years ; of which fee Ariftotle in his Book 
 of Meteors, Chap. xii. Lib. i. and Stevin*s Geo- 
 graphy. If it be afked how the Sea can cover the 
 Mountains, we anfvver they are not to be covered, 
 but will be high Rocks therein, or Iflands, for 
 all Iflands almoft have Mountains in them -, as 
 Ceylon, Sumatra, Java ; and fome are nothing but 
 Mountains ; as St Helen, the I He of Jfcen/ion, the 
 Hefperides : and feeing thefe Places were once 
 Land, then thefe Iflands and Mountains in it were 
 hio;h Places on the Continent. 
 
 'D' 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIIL 
 
 Whether the whole Surface of this Globe may be either 
 all Land or Sea ; or if there may be more Land or 
 Water one time than another. 
 
 I T is fufficiently fliown in the fecond Propofition, 
 that there may be lefs Earth, and confequently 
 more Sea, one time than another. But to that 
 Queftion, whether there may be a Deluge that fliall 
 cover the whole, even the very Iflands •, we an- 
 fvver the way how fuch a thing may happen, may be 
 conceived and explained, yet can fcarce ever happen, 
 the Earth being fo compa6tly joined and the Moun- 
 tains fo high. The way it may happen is the fame as 
 in the fecond Propofition. If the Ocean continually 
 wafli away the Shores and lay them in deep Places, 
 at lad all the high Parts will come down and be 
 waflied away, and the Sea come in on the whole 
 Earth , there may bs fome Mountains or their Roots 
 
 wafliied
 
 Chap. i8. of XJniverfal Geography. 417 
 
 wafhed away, and they fall down -, ind it Were 
 eafier done if, as fome think, the Sea were higher 
 than the Land, bur this we have before refuted. 
 And to that, whether the Sea can ever go all into 
 Caverns of the Earth, and there be nothing but 
 dry Land, we anfwef the fame way ; the' it may 
 fcarce ever be : there is only one way by fuppofmg 
 the Caverns fo large as to contain the Sea, and none 
 have yet demonftrated the contrary \ and tho' they 
 are not, they may be made fo by the force of the 
 Water or fubterraneous Spirits. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 PFhy there are few IJlands in the middle of the Ocean, 
 and no Clujlers of them^ except at large JjJauds, or 
 near the Continent. 
 
 WE need not doubt of the Truth of this, being 
 confirmed by Experience. There is fcarce one 
 little Idand in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, 
 and there are but few found in the vaft Ocean be- 
 tween Africa and Brafil^ except St Helen and the 
 Ifle of Afcenfion ; but on the Shores of the Ocean j 
 or great Continent, are all the IQands, except the 
 few I mentioned, efpecially the Cluftersof Iflands ; 
 thofe of the jEgean Sea are near Europe and Afia^ 
 the Hefperides near Africa, the Maldvies near India^ 
 and all the Indian Iflands lie between Afta and 
 the South Land, only the Azores^ or Flandrian 
 Illes, feem to be in the middle of the Ocean, be- 
 tween America and the Old World j the' they are 
 nearer the latter. 
 
 THE Caufe of this Phsenomenon no doubt is, 
 that they were cut off the main Land by the 
 Sea's breaking in upon it, which could not cover 
 all Places it came to, bccaufe of their Height. Ic 
 is likely they rvre alfo fome of them mads thus : 
 
 V O L. I, E e ^h^
 
 4 1 8 "The Ahjolute Fart Sect. .V. 
 
 the Sea wafhing off Ibme Lands cannot carry their 
 fmall Parts far off, but lets them fall down by. de- 
 grees near the Shore, which being done for a long 
 Time, IQands are at laft formed, i. But in the 
 laiiddle Ocean there are tew Iflands, for the Par- 
 ticles waflied off the Shore do not go fo far. 2. 
 Becaufe there is a greater Motion and Force of the 
 Water, which r.uher increafes the Depth of the 
 Chanel than caufes any Iflands. 3. Becaufe .there 
 being no Continent there, no Cluftcr ot Iflands can 
 be formed, according to the firfl: way that we 
 fliewed they were made -, yet of old when the mid- 
 dle of the Ocean was not where it is now, there 
 might be a Clufter of Iflands, which might be gra- 
 dually waflied away. 
 
 \ -vt-i» 
 
 SECT.
 
 Chap. 19. ofTJniverfal Geography. 419' 
 
 SECT. VI. 
 
 Containing the Explanation of the Atmofpherd' 
 a?id Wlnds^ In three Chapters. * / 
 
 CHAP. XIX. !i 
 
 f 
 
 , Of the ATMOSPHERE and AIR. ■ 
 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 •',7 wolu; 73ai oju f'lU^ ui».^.- > 
 !n'^r<? «r^ continudily Vapours and Pmhesexhhle'dfrom 
 the dry as well as moift PartSy into the Space which 
 furrounds the Earth. 
 
 THE Caufeis twofold ; i. Theceleftial Heat 
 of the Stars, efpecially the iSun and Moon;'' 
 2. The terreftriai Heat,' or fubterraneous Fire, 
 mixed with the Earth, for we find all Bodies al- 
 moft fend out Exhalations when brought near the 
 Fire, tho* very gentle ; and feeing celeftial and 
 terreftriai Heat is nothing but Fire, therefore Va- 
 pours and Fumes muft be raifed thereby. And as 
 the Nature of Heat, fo Experience confirms the 
 Truth of it -, for Travellers in the Night may fee, 
 efpecially when the Moon (bines, and near Waters, 
 the Vapours that are raifed wandering about the 
 Air, and that they are raifed in the Day-time by 
 the Sun is commbnly known -, as alfo when litde 
 Clouds afcend, which is a fure figa of Rain. 
 
 E e 2 
 
 PRO'
 
 420 The Abfilute Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 P RO P S in O N II. 
 
 'The /limofphere is all that Space about the Earth, in 
 
 which the Vapours are •, ahd it is uncertain if afiy 
 thing elfe be contained in it but Exhalations. 
 
 IT is alfo t;ikcn for the Exhalations themfelves 
 that are about tlie Earth. It is no fmall Contro- 
 vcrfy among the modern Philolbphers, what that 
 is which is about the Earih. Several famous Ma- 
 thematicians are of Opinion there is nothing there 
 but Exhalations ; and fo the Atmofphere and Air 
 is counted the liime : and above the Atmofphere is 
 the ^Ethereal Subftance next it. Others think that 
 there is a kind of Body befides thefe Exhalations, 
 which is called Air, tho* they allow that Exhalati- 
 ons may turn to Air, and Air to thick Vapour and 
 Clouds ; and after this Air, all the Way to the 
 Orbit of the Moon, they p'ace another fubtile 
 Body, different from ^Ether, which they call Fire, 
 indeed ; but they confels, improperly, as no way 
 agreeing with our Fires ; for it is hot, (tho' not burn- 
 ing) dry, and very fubtile, not caufing the Refra- 
 diions of the Hays of the Sun and Stars, which they 
 own to be in their Air. Thefe things confidered, 
 the two Opinions of the Philofophers differ rather 
 in Words than in the Thing itfelf ; for as to the 
 Air, that is fo grofs as to caufe Refradtion, and may 
 be generated from Exhalations, that may be only 
 a more refined Exhalation, tho' not from the Elarth. 
 As to the fublunary Fire, feeing they own it is im- 
 properly called fo, and is fo fubtile as to caufe 
 no Refraction, it feems to differ but little from 
 the asthereal Matter •, we may then fay the At- 
 mofphere, or Air, is a Body about the Earth, in- 
 to which the Rays falling, are refraded flaying 
 ijfide the Quedion whence it comesj > which Defi- 
 nition
 
 C H A p. 1 9- of XJnivcrfal Geography. 421 
 
 nition agrees with the foregoing one, nor is it very 
 Jikely a Body lo fubtile could be exhaled from the 
 Earth, as to make no Refradlion or l\inderance to 
 the Rays of the Sun, that come thro* the A:Aha ; 
 and if there be fuch, we know how high they are, 
 or if they be out of the Atmofphere ; wliich yet, 
 if any wouki ftrongjy maintain, believing the Par- 
 ticles of Fire that come from the Sun, on the 
 Earth, do again travel back to ir, they will not 
 deny but the foregoing Definition is proper. 
 Therefore the Atmofphere and Air is nothing but 
 a great many fmall Bodies interwoven together and 
 adhering to the Earth \ as the Down on a Quince 
 or Peach. 
 
 PROPOSI'TION IIT. 
 
 There are fometi?nes more^ fomedmes feiver Exhala- 
 ihnsfent up ; efpecially in different Places. 
 
 THE Ciufe is, i. The difi'crent Elevation or 
 Deprefiion of the Sun above or below the Horizon. 
 2. The difierent Age of the Moon, and it's Eleva- 
 tion above the Horizon. 3. The rifing and letting 
 of the other Stars, and their Situation above the 
 Horizon. 4. The Difference in the Parts of the 
 Earth ; for Water and moift Places fend out more 
 Vapours than dry and earthy. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The Exhalations that compofe the Atmofphere are </ 
 different Kinds ^ efpeciall-j in different Countries^ viz. 
 watery, /aline, fulphureouSy earthy, and fpiriluous, 
 
 THE Caufe is, becaufe there are fuch different 
 
 Bodies in the Earth, and fome are moft eafily, 
 
 and others with difficulty drawn up 5 fome may 
 
 E e 3 doubt
 
 42 2 ^he Ahjoliite Tart Sect. VI. 
 
 doubt of the earthy Particles, becaufe of their 
 Weight J but yet this may be, i. Becaufe of the 
 exceeding fmallnefs of the minute Particles of Dufb, 
 that have more Superficies in proportion to the 
 quantity of Matter in them, and therefore are 
 lighter. 2. Becaufe of the mixture of fulphureous 
 Particles, which carry them violently along with 
 them. 
 
 AND that there are fulphureous Parts in the' 
 Air, appears from the fiery Meteors that are {<:tn^ 
 as IJghtning, Thunder, 'Jack with his Lanthorn, 
 and the fulphureous Smell that is after Thunder and 
 Lightning. 
 
 T II E R E can be no doubt of the watery Ex- 
 halations that are fpirituous and laline, they being 
 very fmall andeafily drawn up \ and the little Ani- 
 mals that are bred in the Air, in great Quantities 
 do teftify the fame. 
 
 THE Anjioleliam divide Exhalations into two 
 forts. Vapours, and Smoke. The Vapours are 
 from the Water, and do eafily turn to Water 
 again, and the Smoke from dry things -, thus Sal 
 Ammoniac turns all to Eume above the Fire ; and 
 hence jt is that different Countries have different 
 Air, and that it rains in one Place, and not in ano- 
 cher. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 ^je leajl and infetifihle Particles of Air heat hack or 
 reflcoi all the Rays, as a Looking-Glafs doth j but 
 
 ■, Jome of thofe that are perceivable and compounded 
 iranfmit more Rays and refle5i fewer ; others again, 
 iran/mit fezver Rays and reflect more. 
 
 THEREFORE the Parts of the Air are di- 
 vided into opake and pellucid j the former tranf- 
 mic fewer Rays, the latter more, 
 
 BECAUSE
 
 Chap. 19- ofJJniverfalGeogrnphv. 423 
 
 BECAUSE the lead Particles, like Atoms 
 both from the Earth and Water, are little folic! 
 Bodies without Pores, and therefore do refleft and 
 dilallow a Paflage to the Rays •, for it is very 
 probable, that I'ranfparency, or the palling of the 
 Rays, requires Pores duly difpofed, and void of 
 Matter. 
 
 BUT the Parts of the Atmofphere, or Air, 
 that are compounded of the lead Particles, if they 
 have feveral Pores, duly difpofed, will be tranf* 
 parent and tranfmit many Rays j but if the Particles 
 be joined very conf^fcdly, and be without many 
 Pores, they will not admit many Rays to pafs 
 through. 
 
 H ENC E it is, that the Sun difperfing a thick 
 dark and cloudy Air, makes it more porous and 
 tranfparent. 
 
 THAT the leaft Particles refled the Rays, ap- 
 pears from thisi if the Sun's Rays be admitted into 
 a dark Room, in a clear -Day, thro' a narrow 
 Hole, you will clearly fee the Rays reflected in 
 great Number (from the Particles flying in the Air) 
 to your Eye, as it were from a L.ooking-Glafs •, 
 and as thefe Particles are flill vifible, we may cor.- 
 clude, in fome Degree, the fame of thofe that efcape 
 the Sight, and are leaft of all. 
 
 SOME would have the moift Exhalations to 
 be tranfparent, and not the dry Fumes \ but they 
 are confuted by Experience and Reafon ; i . By 
 Realon •, becaufe the Funics and dry F'xhalatior.s 
 may become as fmall and porous as thofc that are 
 moill ; for they think that Tranfparency does not 
 confift in Porofity, but that it is a peculiar Quality 
 of the Medium: and 2. By Experience-, becaufe 
 a clear Air hath more dry than moilt Particles 
 in it. This is underftood from the new kind ol" 
 Wind- Guns which are difchargcd not by Powder 
 and Fire, but by help of the Air, which is com- 
 E e 4 pre (Ted
 
 424 ^'^t' ^hfohite Fart S e c T. VI, 
 
 prcfled and condenfcd, that it fcarce takes up the 
 lixtiech Part of the Room it had before, and yet 
 there is no moiftnefs in the Gun -, which muft have 
 been if the Particles of the clear Air had been from 
 Water. 
 
 - p Ropo sirio N \l. 
 
 Exhalations do not of themfehes and of their own Na- 
 ture afcend^ hut are forced up : or thus, the Air is 
 720t light y bid heavy, confidered abfolutely. 
 
 ALL Things are faid to be heavy which would 
 tend to the Center of the Earth if they were not 
 hindered, and that the Air c!(oth •, for the Earth be- 
 iiig dug, the Air goes down to the Room made' 
 there, and it's tending upwards is; i. Becaui'e 
 Heats rarifies and makes it take up a greater Room. 
 2. Becaufe it is forced by other Vapours. 
 
 T H U S in cold Countries, as Nova Zemlla, and 
 with us, no Cloud afcends in the Night, but the 
 Heat of the Sun coming on ratifies it, and makes 
 one Part to prefs and force anotlier: but if the leafb 
 Particles of Air were not folded together, but at 
 Liberty, they would move up and be light (p). 
 
 PRO- 
 
 A ) That Air is a ponderous Heiglit is, becaufe it is impof- 
 
 Body, appears from a variety of fible for it to defcend, unlefs at 
 
 Experiments, particularly one, tlie fame Time the Mercury in 
 
 from which it's Weight ufes the \'eirel afcend ; which, be- 
 
 likewife to be eftimated. ing on every Side prefTed with 
 
 Take a Glars Tube, clofed at the Weight of the ambient Air, 
 
 one end, which fill with Quick- cannot quit it's Place, unlefs the 
 
 filver, then invert it with the o- Weight of Air exceeded the 
 
 pen end, into a Veilcl, alfo filled 
 with Mercury, and the Mercury 
 in the Tube will forthwith fub- 
 fide, and after a few recipro- 
 caricns, Hand at thirty Inches 
 above the Surface of the Mer- 
 
 cury 
 
 contained in the VeiTcl. 
 
 The Reafon why the Quick- 
 
 Weight of Mercury in the 
 Tube. And that this is the Cafe 
 v/ill appear from hence ; put 
 all the above mentioned Appa- 
 ratus into a large Receiver, cut 
 of which, by the Air Pump, 
 extraft the Air ; then, as the 
 Air is extrafted, you may per- 
 
 filvcr is fufpended at fuch a ceive the Mercury, contained 
 
 in
 
 Chap. 19- of Univerfal Geography, 425 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 The upper Parts of the Atmofpherc are more fuhtik 
 than thofe below •, yet it may be, that thofe in the 
 middle Region may be thicker and gr offer than thofe 
 near the Earth. 
 
 FOR the lighter Parts go upwards and the 
 more fubtile Parts are the lighter, which fhows the 
 
 Truth 
 
 in theTube, gradually to ftibfide ; 
 but if again you fliall by degrees 
 let in the Air, the Mercury in 
 the Tube will afcend, in pro- 
 portion to the quantity of Air 
 intromitted, 'till at laft it reach 
 it's prilHne Height of thirty 
 Inches. This Apparatus, of the 
 Tube and \"efiel, together with 
 the contained Mercury, is, from 
 it's Ui'e in meafuring the Air, 
 called a Barometer : and from 
 it's Author, Torrlcellius, any Ex- 
 periment perform'd by means 
 thereof, is called Torricellian. 
 
 'Tismanifeft, that the weight 
 of the Mercury contained in the 
 Tube, and the weight of a Co- 
 lumn of Air, whofe Altitude is 
 that of the whole Atmofphere, 
 and whofe Bafis is equal to the O- 
 rifice of theTube, if weighed fe- 
 parately, the one will be equal 
 to the other ; fo that when the 
 Weight ofthe Airis diminifhed, 
 the Barometer is deprefled, and 
 'vice 'verfa. Hence by taking a 
 View of the Barometer, you 
 may, at any time, know the 
 prefent Gravity of the Air ; 
 which is a Problem of vaft Mo- 
 ment both in Univerfal Phyfics, 
 and ia Meteorology in parti- 
 
 cular, and which deferves tc 
 be ranked among the nobleft 
 Inventions of the modern Phi- 
 lofophers. 
 
 By the Experiments perform- 
 ed fome time ago before the 
 Royal Society, for comparing 
 the Weight of Air with Wa- 
 ter, and fo with other Bodies ; 
 by the firit Experiment the pro- 
 portion was found to be as i 
 to 840; by the next, as i to 
 852; and by the third as i to 
 860. And lately the Ingeni- 
 ous Mr Hatijkhee, by a very 
 fimple and accurately perform- 
 ed Experiment, found the Ra- 
 tio of Air and Water to be as 
 1 to 885. All which Experi- 
 ments being made in the Sum- 
 mer time, at which Seafon the 
 Air is by the Heat expanded, 
 and ccnfeqiicntly lighter ; and 
 the Barometer ftanding at about 
 29I Inches higher ; this might 
 perhaps be fafely determined up- 
 on, that the Barometer afcend- 
 ingto 30 Inches, and the Con- 
 ftitution of the Air at a Me- 
 dium, as to Cold and Heat, 
 the Ratio of Airto Waterwould 
 be as I to 800 ; and therefore 
 feeing, the Weight of Water 
 compared
 
 426 The Abfilute Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 Truth of" the nrft Part of the Propofition : and the 
 Caufe of the feeond Part is, that thofe in the mid- 
 dle Region eafily go together and become groffer, 
 the hot Particles carried up with them having left 
 them, and the Rays reflefted trom the Earth having 
 but fmall force in the middle Region, that is fo 
 diftant from the Earth. 
 
 WHENCE it is, that after Rain the middle 
 Region is more clear ; the grolTer Part being fal- 
 len down {a). 
 
 PRO- 
 
 compared with Mercury, is as 
 I to 13;, the Gravity of the 
 Air compared to the Gravity 
 !of Alercury would be as i to 
 
 JOjiGO. 
 
 yurhPs Appendix. 
 
 (q) If with the Hands we 
 fqueezc a blown Bladder, we 
 feel the included Air make a 
 llrong Refinance, and by the 
 Spring thereof, jumping back 
 and difengaging; itfelf, the Im- 
 prefhons, or Cavities, made by 
 the Hands on the Surface of the 
 Bladder, are immediately, on 
 ceafing to prcfs, expanded and 
 fmoothcd ; and this is called tliC 
 Elaftic Force of the Air. This 
 Force, every Particle of Aircon- 
 tinually excrcifcs, and afFcfting 
 u larger Space, contends againft 
 an equal Force of ambient Par- 
 ticles; whofe Refinance being 
 cither fortuitouily taken away or 
 impaired, the Particle inflant- 
 ly expands itfelf into the v/hole 
 Extent, be it ever fo large. 
 Hence if flcnder glafs Vials, ctr 
 Bladders full of Air, and care- 
 fully Itopp'd, be but into an 
 Air-Pump, they are burlc by 
 the Force of the included Air. 
 
 Thus if a Bladder, only a little 
 blown and flagging, be carried 
 to the Top of a Mountain, or 
 lofty Edifice, it immediately 
 fwells to iuch a Degree, that 
 if the Mountain be offufficient 
 Height, it feenis to be wholly 
 Ilufl'ed with Air. For the Al- 
 titude of the Atmofphcre not 
 being the fame upon the Top 
 of a M()untain, as upon the 
 plain Surface of the Earth, the 
 prefiure of the ambient Air is 
 not therefore fo ftrong upon 
 the Bladder placed there, and 
 therefore the Air, included in 
 it, fprings into a larger Space. 
 That the Airlikewife upon the 
 Top of a Mountain, is lighter 
 than in Places of lower Situa- 
 tion, is evident from the Baro- 
 meter, which being taken to 
 the Top of a Mountain, the 
 Mercury fubfides ; fo that by 
 means of it the Altitude, of 
 Mountains might be very ex- 
 aftly calculated, were it once 
 known in what proportion the 
 Mercury falls ; according to the 
 different Height of the I^lace. 
 
 Vaflly great, yea almoft in- 
 credible is this elaftic Force, 
 by which, according to the fa- 
 mous
 
 C H A p. 1 9- of Univerfal Geography. 427 
 
 PROPOSITION VIII. 
 
 The Atmofpbere, or Air, growing hot, takes up more 
 Room than before, and the more the Heat leaves it, 
 it contracts the more^ and takes up lefs Reom, 
 
 THIS is abundantly confirmed by that Iii- 
 ftrument called a Thermometer, by which is mea- 
 
 fured 
 
 mous Air Boyle*, the Air, 
 without the Affiftance of Heat, 
 \vas dilated into a Space not 
 only 60 or i 50, but 8000, yea 
 1 0000, andatlail 13 769 times 
 larger than that it poflefled in 
 it's natural State near the Sur- 
 face of the Earth. And feeing 
 the Air can be artificially com- 
 prefled f to the fixtieth part of 
 it's natural Space ; it appears 
 that the Place into which the 
 Air may be artificially condenf- 
 ed, to the Place, into which 
 it would dilate itfelf, if freed 
 from all Preflure, is at leaft, as 
 I to fixty times i 3 769 ; or ciore 
 than 826000. 
 
 By a great many Experiments 
 performed in England, France, 
 and Italy, relating to the Con- 
 traftion and Expanfion of Air, 
 it is found th.at the Spaces into 
 which, by different Weights, 
 it is condenfed, are among 
 themfelves in a reciprocal Pro- 
 portion to their Gravities ; or, 
 the greater the Preflure Is on the 
 Air, the lefs Space it pofleffes. 
 
 From which Theorem, toge- 
 ther with the Proportion above 
 
 * WalliisHydroJi. Prop. 13. 
 -^Philof. Tranjaa. N^ iSi, 
 
 determined betwixt the Weight 
 of Air and Mercury, it is cafy 
 to fee the Grounds of tlie Con- 
 troverfies contained here and 
 there in the Writings of the mo- 
 dern Philofophers, concerning 
 the leilcr denfity of the Air in 
 the upper Regions, as alfo 
 the Altitude ot the whole At- 
 mofphere. 
 
 Firll then, if v/e allow the 
 the Air to have no Elallicity, 
 but that thro' the whole Space 
 'twi>ct the Earth and the utmoil 
 bounds and extent of the At- 
 mofphere it is every where of 
 the fame Denfity; juft as Wa- 
 ter, which, howfoever deep, is 
 every where from top to bot- 
 tom equiilly dcnfe ; now fince 
 from what has been already 
 fa id, it appears, that the 
 Weight of a Column of Air, 
 reaching to the top of the 
 Atmofphere, is equal to the 
 Weight of Mercury contained 
 in a Barometer ; and feeing al- 
 fo the Proportion of Weight be- 
 twixt equal quantities of Mer« 
 cury and Air is fotmd ; it 
 were eafy to give a Defini- 
 tion of the Altitude of that Co- 
 lumn of Air, or of the whole 
 Atmofphere. For fcdng a Co. 
 lumn
 
 428 ^je Ahfohtc Fart S e c T. V I. 
 
 fured the Heat or Cold in the Air, for the colder 
 the Air in the Glafs, it takes up lefs Room, and 
 
 the 
 
 lumn of Air one Inch high, is 
 to the like Column of Mercu- 
 ry, as I to loSoo, it appears 
 that thefe 10800 Columns, or 
 a Column of Air 900 Foot 
 high, is equal in Weight to i 
 Inch of the Mercury, and con- 
 fequently that all tlie 30 Inches 
 of Mercury, contained in the 
 Barometer, require a Column of 
 Air 2-000 Foot high. So that, 
 according to this Hypothefis, 
 the Altitude of the Atmofphere 
 would be only 27000 Foot, or 
 a little more tiun 5 Miles. 
 
 But when, in the high Re- 
 gions, the Air, by it's elaftic 
 Force, refiles and expands it- 
 felf, according as the Weight 
 of the incumbent Atmofphere 
 is diminillied, it muft of necef- 
 fity be far more rarified and 
 fubtile than the Air near the 
 Surface of the Earth: and con- 
 fequently a much greater Alti- 
 tude muft be afligned to the 
 Atmofphere, than what was 
 found b)' the juft now mention- 
 ed Computation. 
 
 For feeing, according to the 
 Theorem above laid down, the 
 Spaces in which the Air is 
 included, are reciprocally pro- 
 portional to the compreffing 
 Gravities ; but the denfity of e- 
 very Body is in a reciprocal Ra- 
 tio to the Spaces, which that 
 Body poflefit;s ; the Dcnfity 
 therefore of the Air in any 
 Part of the Atmofphere will be 
 proportional to the Weight of 
 the whole incumbent Air. And 
 furUierj if we fuppofe the Al- 
 
 titude of the whole Atmo- 
 fphere divided into innume- 
 rable equal Parts, feeing the 
 Denfity of Air included in a- 
 ny one of thefe Parts is in 
 proportion to it's quantity, and 
 the Weight of the Atmofphere 
 is alfo as the quantity of the 
 whole incumbent Air ; it ap- 
 pears, that the quantity of the 
 whole incumbent Air is every 
 where, as the quantity of Air 
 included in the lower Part, 
 which conftitutes a Difference 
 between every two neareft 
 quantities of the whole incum- 
 bent Air. It is a Theorem in 
 Geometr)' ; that fuch Magni- 
 tudes whofe Di. Terences are 
 proportional to the Magnitudes 
 thcmfelves, thefe Magnitudes 
 are in a continued geometrical 
 Proportion. Whence if, ac- 
 cording to the Hypothefis, the 
 Altitude of the Air, by adding 
 the equal Parts, into which it is 
 divided, increafe in a continued 
 arithmetical Proportion, it's 
 Denfity will be diminifhed, or, 
 which is the fame, the Rare- 
 fadlion of the Air will be in- 
 creafed in a continued geome- 
 trical Proportion. Such as 
 know the way of following 
 fuch a Series, by taking a View 
 of one or more of the Rarefadi- 
 ons of the Air at different Alti- 
 tudes, rnay, without any Trou- 
 ble, determine it's Rarefaftion 
 in any Altitude, or the Alti- 
 tude anfwering to any Rarefafti- 
 on, and fo alio the Altitude of 
 the whole Atmofphere, if it may 
 be
 
 Chap. 19. of Unherjal Geography. 429 
 
 the more Room, the more Heat it acquires ; as 
 we Ihall fhow in the following Propofition. The 
 
 natural 
 
 be known, or made the e.v- 
 tieam Degree of Rarcfadion, 
 beyond which the Air cannot 
 pafs. Such as incline to know 
 more on this Subjeft, may 
 confult the famous Dr Gre- 
 go>y\ Aftronomy, Lih. v. Prop. 
 3. as alfo the excellent Dr 
 Halleyi DiiTertation in Ph'ilo- 
 fophical Trarfadions N° l8l. 
 who have demonllrated the 
 fame in a different, and fome- 
 what more difficult way of 
 reafoning, which I have here 
 borrowed from the Demon- 
 firations of a very learned 
 Friend, 
 
 But withal we muft not 
 conceal, that thefe things have 
 been rendered uncertain by the 
 Obfervatioos of the famous 
 CaJJlni * and his Affiftants ; 
 who, in order to extend the 
 Meridian Line of the Par'n 
 Obfervatory, after having with 
 great exaftnefs meafured the 
 Altitudes of feveral Mountains, 
 and marked the Height of the 
 Barometer on the Top of each 
 of them, they found that the 
 Rarefadlions difcovered by that 
 Method, no ways agreed with 
 thofe we have lately hiid down, 
 but that they were far greater 
 than what ought to come out 
 from the abovtmentioned Pro- 
 portion : whence becoming fuf- 
 picious, that the Experiments 
 they had formerly made for 
 £nding out the Rarefadion of 
 
 * Illjl. deTAcad. %. 1 703, 
 and 1 705. 
 
 the Air under different pref- 
 lures, had not been man;igcd 
 with fufficient Accuracy, tluy 
 determined again to put the 
 Matter upon 'fryal, which Sub- 
 jeft being diligently treated of 
 in the Royal Academy, and 
 when there were made great 
 Dilatations of Air, compared 
 to which, the Rarefa(flions found 
 on the Tops of Mountains, 
 were woundrous fmall ; yet they 
 found that all theie exaftly 
 followed the reciprocal Ratio 
 of their incumbent Gravities. 
 So that it feems to be put 
 beyond all doubt, that fuch is 
 the Nature of the Air, which 
 comes neareJi to the Earth's 
 Surface, that the Icfs preiTure 
 it has upon it, the greater 
 Space it dilates itfelf into : and 
 feeing the upper Air, or fuch as 
 environs the Tops of Alountains, 
 does not obferve this Propor- 
 tion, it follows, that it is of a 
 different Nature from the Air , 
 that is next us, which notwith- 
 flanding needs be no caufe of 
 wonder to us, if, according 
 to the moft approved Senti- 
 ments of Philofophers, we al- 
 low that there is in our At- 
 mofphere, bendes Vapours and 
 terreftrial Exhalations, a certain 
 Body of kin to itfelf, and en- 
 dowed with fuch AffeClions, 
 as we have above affigned to 
 the Air; and further, that thefe 
 Vapours and Exhalations, are 
 no ways capable of fo great 
 Rarefadion, as is the Air ; and 
 that thefe are mixed in far 
 greater
 
 430 1'he Abjolute Part Sect. VI. 
 
 natural Caufe of the Propofition is this •, that the 
 hot Particles of the Sun's Rays^ or any Fire, are 
 
 *-■..'-.= the 
 
 greater plenty with the Air 
 neareft us, than in the upper 
 Air. Thefe things being laid 
 down, it is nianifeft that the 
 Air of the higher Countries be- 
 ing lefs ftored wid- \'apours, 
 has, in proportion to it's Denfi- 
 ty,moreEIallicity in it than that 
 which comes next to the E::r:h, 
 whence the reciprocal Ratio of 
 Gravity, which is in the Air 
 next the Earth, does not hold 
 here ; and further, that \'«- 
 pours and Exhalations have not 
 fuch Elaftitity as Air, but that 
 this is much more rarihed arid 
 extenuated. But the excellent 
 Mr Fontenelk, Secretary of 
 the Society, explains thefe 
 Phrenomena in a quite diffe- 
 rent Manner, in his Hiftory 
 of the Academy, Anno 1708. 
 
 He propofes fome Experi- 
 ments performed by the famous 
 Mr De la Hire, and others, 
 from which he infers, that the 
 elaftic Force of the Air is in- 
 creafed wlien it is mixed with 
 Moifture, or when compound- 
 ed of Air and aqueous Vapours, 
 the Rarefiiftion will be greater, 
 than from pure Air; and that 
 therefore on the Tops of Moun- 
 tains the Air is found more 
 rarified, bccaufe many Vapours 
 are carried thither for produ- 
 cing of Rain. The Experiments 
 are thefe : 
 
 They took a flender glafs Si- 
 phon, one of whofc Legs end- 
 ed in a large hollow Sphere, be- 
 ing open at the other. Thij 
 
 Siphon was full of common Air, 
 and expofed to the external Air 
 coming into the Siphon. The 
 Globe and Siphon was plunged 
 into hot Water, found by pre- 
 vious Experiments to be of the 
 fame degree of Heat as boiling 
 Water, and confcquently cau- 
 fmg the fame degree of Rare- 
 faflion ; tho' the Fire under- 
 neath were'greater or lefs. 
 
 When the Air included in 
 the Globe was rarefied with 
 this degree of Heat, it would 
 be gradually thr'uft out at the 
 other end of the Siphon ; 'till 
 at length the Globe being heat- 
 ed to the utmoft, there was 
 left a very fmall quantity of Air, 
 highly rarefied, that poffefled 
 the whole Cavity. Then the 
 Water being removed from the 
 Fire, the Air, as it gradually 
 cooled, which before poflelTed 
 the whole Globe, being gra- 
 dually contracted by the Cold, 
 gave way to the Water that 
 entered at the Orifice of the 
 external Leg, and at length, 
 when the Water became entire- 
 ly cold, it was contraded into 
 a very fmall Space, whilft the 
 rell of the Globe remained 
 filled witli Water. Now by 
 comparing the Space, poflefTed 
 by the Air, cooled and redu- 
 ced to it's natural State, and 
 the whole Cavity of the Globe 
 which it had at the utmofl; 
 Heat, it appears how much the 
 Air was rarefied with that de- 
 gree of Heat. 
 
 This
 
 Chap. 19. of U/iherfal Geography, 43 i . 
 
 the mod iubtile in the World, and inconftanf 
 Motion, and wjiile thefe are mixed with the At- 
 
 ijv b,/x..; molphere. 
 
 This Experiment was firft 
 made in clear Weather, again 
 in a moift: and rainy Scafon ; and 
 at a third time, a little Water 
 was left adhering to the inner 
 Surface of the Globe. And it 
 was obferved that the Air con- 
 denfed at the end of the Ex- 
 perinaent, in the firft Cafe pof- 
 fefled f of the Globe, in the 
 fecond poflefled but z,, and in 
 the third j'^ \. Whence Mr 
 Fontenelle concludes, that the 
 Air was more dilated in the 
 fecond Cafe, but particularly in 
 the third, than in the firft Cafe; 
 and therefore as the Air is the 
 more dilated the more moift 
 Vapour is mixed with it; hence 
 he concludes it probable, that 
 for the fame Reafon, there is a 
 greater Rarefadionon the Tops 
 of Mountains, becaufe the Air 
 that furrounds them is mi.ted 
 with a greater quantity of A'a- 
 pour. But there are two Con- 
 fideratlons that render the Ar- 
 gument inconclufive. For firft 
 in the two later Experiments, 
 as aqueous \''apours were-plerp 
 tifully mixed with the Air, it 
 might happen that when the 
 Air was condenfed, and the 
 Water entered thro' the Siphon 
 into the Globe, thefe Vapours 
 might again return to Water, 
 and mixing with the other Wa- 
 ter partly by the Force of Con- 
 denfation, and partly by the 
 mutual Attraction there is be- 
 twixt the Particles of Liquors, 
 leave but little true Air inclu- 
 ded in the very fmall Space, 
 
 Whence It might fcem, that the 
 quantity of Air which rarefied 
 with the fame degree of Heat 
 poftefled the whole Cavity, was 
 lels in the two latter, than in 
 the former Cafe ; and therefore 
 more dilated, fo as to poftefs i 
 the whole Space. ' 
 
 Again, allowing that the i 
 Air was more rarefied in the 
 latter Cafes, yet as this was ef- . 
 feifled by the means of Heat, ' 
 I do not fee how it follows 
 that becaufe the Vapours mixed 
 with the Air, and agitated by 
 Heat, are more rarefied thaa 
 Air without Vapours, therefora 
 thefe Vapours without Heat, 
 fhould have a greater Elafticity 
 than pure Air. 
 
 We iliall here add a Table 
 of AI. CaJJhii, j 1171 i or, made 
 from the foregoing Obfervati- 
 (Sns, and exhibiting the Height 
 of the Air from the Surface of 
 the Sea, corrcfponding to the 
 Sinkings of the Barometer ; as 
 alfo the Spaces increafmg in 
 arithmetical Proportion, where- 
 in the Height of tTi-5"ATr' in: 
 creafes almoft half a French 
 League, whilft the Barometer 
 finks in twelfths of an Inch, 
 at a time when, being placed 
 en the Surface of the Sea, it 
 Hands at about 2 8 F;-^?;*:/» Inches' 
 or 29ff of Englijh. I ufc the 
 French Meafures, being unwil- 
 ling, by reducing them to the 
 Englijh Feet, to difturb the 
 beautiful Series of Propor- 
 tions by fmall fraftional Parts ; 
 tho' thefe may, by the help of 
 the
 
 4;^2 ^e Abfolute Tart S e c T. VI. 
 
 mofphere, they feparate them, with great Force, 
 and fo make more Pores, and thefe fiery Particles 
 going away, the Particles of Air lek by themfelves, 
 
 do 
 
 the lefTer Table fubjoined be eafily reduced to Etiglljh Mea- 
 fure. 
 
 Barometer falling. 
 
 Tnicelfths of 
 Inch. an Inch. 
 
 Di'vijions anfwering 
 to each tnuelfth 
 of an Inch. 
 
 Fathoms. Feet. 
 
 abo've the 
 Surface. 
 
 Fathoms. 
 
 Air 
 Seas 
 
 Feet. 
 
 o o 
 
 lO o 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 lO I 
 
 10 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 lO 2 
 
 20 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 lo 3 
 lo 4 
 lo 5 
 
 I I o 
 
 31 
 
 41 
 52 
 63 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 II I 
 
 II 2 
 
 74 
 86 
 
 4 
 
 
 9 
 
 ■ lO 
 
 II 
 
 I o 
 
 II 3 
 II 4 
 
 11 5 
 
 12 O 
 
 97 
 109 
 121 
 133 
 
 3 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 I I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 6 
 
 12 I 
 12 2 
 
 12 3 
 
 12 4 
 
 12 5 
 
 13 
 
 «45 
 
 157 
 
 170 
 182 
 
 195 
 
 208 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 lO 
 
 1 1 
 
 2 
 
 13 I 
 
 13 3 
 13 4 
 
 13 5 
 
 14 
 
 221 
 235 
 
 248 
 262 
 276 
 
 zgo 
 
 4 
 
 
 3 
 I 
 
 
 
 I 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 14 I 
 14 2 
 14 3 
 14 4 
 
 14 5 
 1; 
 
 304 
 3.8 
 
 333 
 
 347 
 362 
 
 1 ^77 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 3
 
 Chap. 19. ofUnroerfal Geography. 433 
 
 
 
 Di'vijians artjhiserivg 
 
 Height of 
 
 the jJir, 
 
 Barometer falling. 
 
 to each tu:elfth 
 
 abo've 
 
 the Sea's 
 
 
 
 of an Inch. 
 
 Surface 
 
 
 
 twelfths of 
 
 
 
 
 Inch. 
 
 an Inch. 
 
 Fathoms. Feet. 
 
 Fathoms. 
 
 Feel. 
 
 2 
 
 7 
 
 '5 I 
 
 jt, J 
 
 4 
 
 
 8 
 
 15 2 
 
 408 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 '5 3 
 
 423 
 
 3 
 
 
 10 
 
 «5 4 
 
 439 
 
 I 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 •5 5 
 
 455 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 Xh 6 
 
 471 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 I 
 
 ; 16 1 
 
 4H7 
 
 I 
 
 
 2 
 
 16 2 
 
 503 
 
 3 
 
 
 'J 
 
 16 3 
 
 520 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 16 4 
 
 536 
 
 4 
 
 
 5 
 
 16 5 
 
 553 
 
 3 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 570 
 
 3 
 
 
 7 
 
 17 1 
 
 5^7 
 
 4 
 
 
 8 
 
 17 2 
 
 605 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 17 3 
 
 622 
 
 3 
 
 
 10 
 
 17 4 
 
 640 
 
 I 
 
 
 It 
 
 ^7 5 
 
 658 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 676 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 18 I 
 
 694 
 
 I 
 
 •"" 
 
 ? 2 
 
 18 2 
 
 712 
 73» 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 18 ^'^- 3 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 18 4 
 
 749 
 
 4 
 
 
 5 
 
 18 5 
 
 768 
 
 3 
 
 
 6 
 
 19 
 
 787 
 
 3 
 
 
 7 
 
 19 1 
 
 806 
 
 4 
 
 
 8 
 
 19 z 
 
 826 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 19 3 
 
 845 
 
 3 
 
 
 10 
 
 19 4 
 
 865 
 
 I 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 19 5 
 
 885 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 905 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 20 I 
 
 925 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 20 2 
 
 9+5 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 20 3 
 
 966 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 20 4 
 
 986 
 
 4 
 
 
 5 
 
 20 5 
 
 1007 
 
 3 
 
 
 6 
 
 21 
 
 1028 
 
 ^.3 
 
 VOL. I. 
 
 Ff
 
 434 
 
 He 
 
 Abjolute Fart 
 
 Sect 
 
 .VI. 
 
 Barometer falling. 
 
 Tnxelfths of 
 Inch. an Inch. 
 
 Dinjijions anfnmering 
 to each t-welfth 
 of an Inch. 
 
 Fathoms. Fat. 
 
 Height of the 
 above the 
 Surface. 
 
 Fathoms. 
 
 Air, 
 Seas 
 
 Feet. 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 lO 
 
 1 1 
 
 o 
 
 21 I 
 21 2 
 21 3 
 21 4 
 
 21 5 
 
 22 O 
 
 1049 
 1071 
 1092 
 u 14 
 1 136 
 iiqS 
 
 4 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 22 I 
 
 1180 
 
 I 
 
 
 2 
 
 22 2 
 
 1202 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 \ 
 
 22 3 
 22 4 
 
 22 5 
 
 23 
 
 1225 
 
 1247 
 1270 
 1293 
 
 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 lO 
 
 II 
 
 o 
 
 ^3 ' 
 23 2 
 
 23 3 
 23 4 
 
 23 5 
 
 24 
 
 1316 
 
 1340 
 1363 
 
 1387 
 14U 
 
 1435 
 
 4 
 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 24 I 
 24 2 
 
 «459 
 1483 
 
 1 
 3 
 
 ! 
 
 Fathoms^
 
 C H AP. 19- of Vtiherfal Geography, 435 
 Fathoms, Feet, Inches, and ^twelfths of an Inch, 
 
 French. 
 
 Englijh. 
 
 French. 
 
 Englijh. 
 
 I 
 
 iS 
 
 60 
 
 64 
 
 2 
 
 ^n 
 
 70 
 
 -^ '2. 
 
 /4r5 
 
 3 
 
 zh 
 
 80 
 
 85. ^j 
 
 4 
 
 4i^ 
 
 90 
 
 96 
 
 5 
 
 sA 
 
 100 
 
 io6-;-f 
 
 6 
 
 6A 
 
 200 
 
 21 3 1^ 
 
 7 
 
 7.^5 
 
 300 
 
 320 
 
 8 
 
 8 A 
 
 400 
 
 4261T 
 
 9 
 
 9.^. 
 
 500 
 
 533 m 
 
 10 
 
 10J2. 
 
 600 
 
 640 
 
 20 
 
 21 i 
 
 700 
 
 746}f 
 
 30 
 
 3a ' 
 
 800 
 
 853 A 
 
 40 
 
 42 ff 
 
 900 
 
 960 
 
 50 
 
 53,^5 
 
 1000 
 
 io66^f 
 
 French. 
 
 Englijh. 
 
 French. 
 
 I 
 
 I 6 
 
 60 
 
 2 
 
 lit 
 
 70 
 
 3 
 
 2H 
 
 80 
 
 4 
 
 3f| 
 
 90 
 
 5 
 
 4t? 
 
 100 
 
 6 
 
 Sit 
 
 200 
 
 7 
 
 6,^6 
 
 300 
 
 8 
 
 Ih 
 
 400 
 
 9 
 
 81^6 
 
 500 
 
 10 
 
 9.^6 
 
 600 
 
 20 
 
 »8ff 
 
 700 
 
 30 
 
 28,^6 
 
 800 
 
 40 
 
 Zlh 
 
 900 
 
 SO 
 
 46|f 
 
 1000 
 
 Englijh. 
 
 65it 
 
 841-6 
 93 it 
 
 2811^6 
 
 375 
 468ft 
 
 5621*6 
 
 656x^6 
 750 
 
 843f^ 
 937 1*6 
 
 Ff %
 
 43 6 'The Ahjohte Tart S e c T. VI, 
 
 do again come together, and are folded into one 
 another ("r). 
 
 (r) Mr Haukjhee, in his Phy- 
 Jko - Mechanical Experiments, 
 pag. 218. has, by avery curious 
 Experiment, determined the 
 Ratio of the Places pofleffed 
 by the Air according as it is 
 differently heated. 
 
 ABC [Fig. 2!^.) is a refian- 
 gular Glafs Tube, B a little 
 Column of Quickfdver : A the 
 extremity of the Tube, cemen- 
 ted to a Screw, fitted with a 
 Cap, and fhut after the fettling 
 of the Quickfilver, the Space 
 A B is full of common Air, 
 included betwixt the Screw and 
 the Quickfilver ; whilll the part 
 of the Tube B C, is open to 
 the external Air. This Tube 
 Mr Haitkjhee placed in a pro- 
 per VefTel, along with a Ther- 
 mometer, then pouring in hot 
 Water enough to cover the 
 Ball of the Thermometer, the 
 Quickfilver B moved from or 
 
 approached towards A, accord- 
 ing as the Air AB was more 
 or lefs contradled by the De- 
 grees of Heat. And by means 
 of thefe Obferv-ations he made 
 the following 1 able ; wherein 
 the Degrees are the fame with 
 thofc marked on the Thermo- 
 meter for meafuring the afcent 
 of the Liquor ; being the inter- 
 mediate Degrees betwixt the 
 greatell Heat, and the greatefl 
 Cold of our Climate. The 
 Column of Parts fhews the Pro- 
 portion of the Spaces wherein 
 the fame Bulk of Air is includ- 
 ed according to the Degree of 
 Heat annexed ; where it is to 
 be obferved, that the Air con- 
 llantly and uniformly lofes one 
 144th part of the Space it oc- 
 cupies in the greateft Heat, 
 every twelve Degrees that the 
 Thermometer fmks. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Vje Part 
 
 of the greatejl 
 
 Degrees. 
 
 
 Parts. 
 
 
 Sp 
 
 ace 
 
 loji. 
 
 ^ 
 
 130 
 
 — — 
 
 144 
 
 — — 
 
 
 
 
 • '- J 
 
 120 
 
 
 
 H3 
 
 — — 
 
 ',■* 
 
 
 
 
 1 10 
 
 
 142 
 
 
 7a 
 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 
 141 
 
 
 4S 
 
 
 
 Abtnjt 
 
 90 
 
 
 
 140 
 
 
 ^? 
 
 
 r- 
 
 
 80 
 
 .— - 
 
 139 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 28 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 ■ 
 
 138 
 
 — — 
 
 1 
 2"4 
 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 — — 
 
 137 
 
 ""— 
 
 i'o 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 — — 
 
 136 
 
 — - — 
 
 il{ 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 135 
 
 — — 
 
 I 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 
 .30 
 
 
 13 + 
 
 
 1 
 
 1,4 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 ^ 
 
 133 
 
 •"" — 
 
 n 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 132 
 
 _— 
 
 1 
 
 J z 
 
 
 
 freezing 
 
 00 
 
 
 131 
 
 
 ri 
 
 8 
 
 
 Point. 
 
 10 
 
 
 130 
 
 — — 
 
 ■To 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 129 
 
 — ._ 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 
 Bthnu. 
 
 30 
 
 
 128 
 
 
 < 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 
 127 
 
 
 t 
 
 4 
 
 yuriiCt 
 
 
 50 
 
 ».«. 
 
 126 
 
 ■> ; 
 
 1 
 
 
 Appendix, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CQKQL'
 
 Chap. 19. of Unherfal Geography, 337 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 THEREFORE the Height of the Atmofphere 
 IS not conftant, but increafeth and decreafeth, at 
 Mid-day greateft, and Mid-night leaft, and of a 
 mean Height at Sun.rifing or letting, as in Prop- 
 fttion xiv. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 To make a Thermometer^ &r Thermofcope^ by which 
 we may try the Changes in the Air, as to Heat 
 and Cold. 
 
 LET us take a Glafs with a long round Neck 
 and round Body LH {Fig. 26.), let it be faftened 
 to a Board M N P Q, with it's Neck downward, 
 and let there be a Yeflel fo filled with coloured 
 Water, put under it, that the Part of the Neck 
 L F may be under the Water, and chufe a Day 
 of a middle Conftitution between Heat and Cold, 
 with which the Heat and Cold at other times may 
 be compared ; and let the Water be poured into 
 the Veffel at that time, when the Air growing cold 
 the Water will afcend above F of it's own accord ; 
 for the Air that before filled the Space F A being 
 condenfed by the Cold takes up lefs Space. On 
 the other hand, the Air being made more hot, 
 the Water will come down from F towards L ; for 
 the Air F H being rarified takes up more Space. 
 
 AND the Degrees of increafe and decreafe of 
 Heat and Cold may be known, if you divide the 
 Line F A into a certain Number of Parts. 
 
 O R without a Veflel underneath, let the Glafs 
 
 L H have, at the end L, a hollow Ball of Glafs, 
 
 with a fmall Hole on one Side, filled with Water, 
 
 F f 3 and
 
 43 8 "Hoe Ahfohite Tart S e c T. VI. 
 
 and the Degrees of Heat and Cold will be fhown 
 by the Rifing and Falling of the Water (i). 
 
 p Ro po s irio N X. 
 
 ji dear Air ma-j he fo rarified hy a great Fire as to 
 take up /evenly times a greater Space than before^ 
 and fn condenfed in a IVind-Gun as to take up only 
 the fixtielh part of the former Space ; but the Heat 
 of the Sun will not rarify fo much^ nor the ordi- 
 nary Cold condenfe fo much. 
 
 THIS is proved from the Molipile^ which if 
 it be taken when white with Heat, it will then 
 receive thirteen Ounces of Water i but the fame 
 jEolipile when cold, or in it's natural State, will 
 take thirteen and half a Dram, and that Part 
 which contains the half Dram is the Difference of 
 the two Spaces, and is almoft the feventieth Part of 
 the whole Cavity of the yEolipile. 
 
 {s) This kind of Thermome- 
 ter was thought to fhew the 
 Heat or Coldnefs of the Air, 
 with fufficient Accuracy before 
 the dilcovery of the Barome- 
 ter. But after it was found 
 that the Air was not of one 
 conftant Weight, but differed 
 at different Times, it was re- 
 marked, that the Water in- 
 cluded in the Glafs Neck, ac- 
 cording as the Weight of the 
 Airincreafedordiminifhed, and 
 reeking upon the V/ater con- 
 tained in the Veffel, muft alfo 
 afcend or defcend tho' the De- 
 gree of Heat fhould remain the 
 feme. Whence the Strudure 
 of the Thermometer was necef- 
 farily akered. Moftatprefent 
 ufe a fimilar Tube ABC (Fig. 
 zf.) ending in a Ball at the 
 
 Bottom. This they fill to a pro- 
 per HeightwithSpiritof Wine, 
 luppofe to B, then clofe theln- 
 flrument by melting it's Extre- 
 mity A, at the flame of a Lamp, 
 llie Spirit of Wine, being now 
 raiified or condenfed, according 
 to the different Temperature of 
 the Air, marks, by it^ afcent or 
 defcent in the Tube, the greater 
 or lefs Degree of Heat. In 
 making this Thermometer they 
 obferve fuch a Proportion in 
 the Capacity of the Ball to the 
 Stem, that the Spirit of Wine 
 may neither fill the whole Tube 
 in the greateft Degree of Heat, 
 nor all fmk into the Ball in the 
 greateft Cold. 
 
 Jurin'f Appendix.
 
 IVaA \ 
 
 '^ i^ -o 
 
 26. 
 p,43y. 
 
 p.438\ 
 
 t^io.2 6 p.^B^ 
 
 JK 
 B
 
 c
 
 C H A p. I p. of Univerfal Geography, 43 9 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 Why in Places of the Frigid Zone, when they have 
 not the Sun rifing and fetting^ the Air is fo?ne Days 
 clear ^ but grofs and cloudy Jor the mojl part. 
 
 T HE Caufe of that thick Cloudinefs, which is 
 almoil conftant, is, the fmall Heat of the fubterra- 
 neous Earth, or that comes from the Sun, or Moon, 
 (which remains for feveral Days and Nights above 
 the Horizon whilft the Sun is below, ) and other 
 Stars i which Heat, being weak, is not able todif- 
 pel the Cloud ; and fome Days being clear, is i.ot 
 from the grofs Vapours being made fmall, but from 
 their falling down on the Earth, or being driven 
 away by the Wind. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 JVhy fometimes in the greateft Cold in Winter the Air 
 is fubtile and clear ; whereas Cold condenfes and 
 contrails the Air. 
 
 COLD is twofold, moderate and exceflive : a 
 moderate Cold does not make the Air clear but 
 cloudy, for by the fmall Heat that is joined with 
 the Cold, the Vapours are raifed but not difpel- 
 led ; but a vehement exceflive Cold renders the 
 Air clear, for two Reafons ; i. It makes the grofs 
 Vapours in the Air more grofs -, and fo they fall 
 down, and the Air is thus cleared. 2. Becaufe 
 the Pores of the Earth are fhut up, and the Va- 
 pours are not exhaled from it, that render the Air 
 turbid and cloudy. The Sea indeed is not frozen 
 with Cold i yet it's Particles are made fo thick 
 with Cold, that it doth not fo readily fend out 
 Exhalations, tho' it doth a great many, being of 
 another Nature than the Earth, 
 
 Ff4 PRO-
 
 44^ ^he Abjolufe Fart Sect. VL 
 
 TROT O SI'TION XIII. 
 
 Wb"^ when "joe look thro' the Air in an horizontal Line 
 it appears thicker and more cloudy than that above, 
 or that in which we breathe. 
 
 THE Caufe is twofold ; the firft becaufe the Air 
 near the Horizon is really more cloudy ; tlie other 
 is a deceit in our Sight ; for the Eye takes in the 
 Diftances of the Parts of an Arch in the Hori- 
 zon, by very fmall Angles -, as it does the Diftances 
 of Pillars in a long Row : and as we judge thofe that 
 are diftant to be near, fo the diftant Particles of 
 Air are judged to be joined clofe ; but the Diftance 
 of the Particles of Air that is higher, the Eye kts 
 under great Angles and apprehends them the 
 better, 
 
 THE fame is the Caufe why the Air at a 
 Diftance appears to be cloudy ; but when we ap- 
 proach to it, it does not feem fo cloudy. 
 
 TROTOSIflON XIV. 
 
 Whether the Atmofphere or Air be alwap of the fame 
 Height in all Places -, cr if it's Figure be fpherical. 
 
 T H AT it is not of the fame but of very dif- 
 ferent Heights, appears in that the Sun is only 
 vertical to one Place at once, and fends it's Rays 
 obliquely to other Places ; and fo more weakly 
 the more they are remote from the Sun, or the 
 nearer the Poles : and therefore the power of the 
 Sun is different in different Places, and muft raife 
 the Vapours differently •, they are higheft diredtly 
 under the Sun, and loweft in the oppofite Point, 
 i^nd in a middle Height at tlij^ Pole, fo that the 
 Air is of an oval Figure, 
 
 :5rET 
 
 i'
 
 Chap. 19. of TJnherfal Geography, 441 
 
 YET the contrary, that the Height is the fame 
 in all Places, feems more probable -, tho' the Va- 
 pours are more elevated in fome Places than o- 
 thers ; yet becaufe the Air is fluid and by it's Gra- 
 vity tends downward, therefore the higher Parts 
 prefs thofe below ; and thofe again others fideways, 
 'till all the Parts come to be alike high ; and thus 
 it's fpherical Figure is proved the fame way as that 
 of the Water is proved by Archimedes, Chap. xiii. 
 for the Suppofitions here are the fame as there s 
 which if falfe the Demonftration fails. 
 
 DES Cartes alfo makes it oval, for a particular 
 Reafon ; fee Chap. xiv. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Vi'he Condenfation or Rarifa£Iion of the Air doth not 
 alter it's Height, 
 
 FOR not the whole, but a part only is con- 
 denfed or rarified, fometimes here, fometimes 
 there; which doth not alter the Height in one 
 Place more than another: only there may be a 
 greater Condenfation in one Part than in another : 
 \yhich can alter the Height but very little. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 The Altitude of the Atmofphere or Air is not only 
 the fame in different Places y hut is alivays the fame 
 both Summer and Winter. 
 
 FOR tho' the Heat in our Summer doth at- 
 tenuate our Air, and raife it more than in Winter, 
 yet becaufe then there is Winter in another Place, 
 the Air there is lefs raifed, and therefore a Part of 
 our Air will flow there : and when our Air is low 
 by the Cold, the Air of another Place that is hotter 
 
 will
 
 442 ^he Abfolute Fart Sect. VI, 
 
 will move to us, 'till the whole Air be equally 
 diftant from the Center. 
 
 AND the fame may be faid as to Day and 
 Night i for while at Night it is condenfed with us, 
 and is low, it ratifies more in another Place, and 
 moves to our Air 'till it makes a fpherical Figure ; 
 and becaufe all things are every where equal, the 
 Height will continue the fame every where •, and tho* 
 it may rarify and condenfe more in one Place and 
 Time than another, yet the Difference being fmall 
 will not much alter the Altitude ; as we faid in the 
 preceding Proportion. 
 
 THE fame may be faid of the Clouds, Rain, or 
 Vapours, in our or another Place, as from thefe 
 a greater or lefs Altitude feems to arife : but I an- 
 fwer, there is fcarce any time in which it doth 
 not rain, or a Cloud fall, in fome Place or other ; 
 and therefore while it rains in one Place the Air 
 becomes no lefs than it was, bccaufe it rained be- 
 fore in another Place, and fo it comes all to the 
 fame thing, and the quantity of the Air is neither 
 increafed nor diminiflied. 
 
 P RO PO S iriON XVII. 
 
 The colder the Air is, the thicker : and therefore it 
 is for the moji part colder in Winter than Summer 
 {in any particular Place), and likewife in the Night 
 more than in the Day, and the grofs Exhalations 
 f*-om the IVater in the Winter-time, increafe that 
 Denfity, efpecially in the Evening and Morning, 
 
 T F^ E Truth of the Propofition is clear from the 
 preceding ; nor is it any Objedion, that a Part of 
 the hotter Air moves where it is colder, and 
 more low -, for it is not that but fome neighbour- 
 ing Air that moves to the Place, becaufe of the 
 continual Protrufion, or PrefTure 5 or tho* it came 
 3 itfelf.
 
 Chap. 19. of JJniverfal Geography, 443 
 
 itfelf, yet by coming there, it would become 
 cold. 
 
 PRO PO S irjON XVIII. 
 
 There are commonly reckoned three Regions of the Air^ 
 of which that is in the middle inhere the Snow^ 
 Hail, and Rain are formed -, the firfi is that in 
 which we live reaching to the middle Region •, the 
 third is from the middle Region to the utmojl Bounds 
 of the Atmofphere, even to the fiery Region, as the 
 Ariftotelians fpeak, 
 
 THE middle Region is colder than the firfl and 
 third, which are counted hotter : becaufe the third 
 contains more fubtile, fiery, and fulphureous Ex- 
 halations which go up into it above the Place of 
 the Particles of Water, or are thruft there being 
 lighter. The Ariflotelians fay 'tis hotter becaufe near- 
 er to the fiery Sphere, and colder than the firfl: ; be- 
 caufe the Rays falling, join with thofe that are re- 
 fleded from the Earth, and fo double the Heat. 
 Moreover the Particles of the fubterraneous Fire 
 coming out of the Earth are diffipated there in the 
 lower Region ; and the middle Region being with- 
 out all thefe Advantages muft needs be colder. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 The nearer a Place is to the Pole, or the more dijlant 
 from the Place where the Sun is vertical, the Place 
 of the Air in which Rain, Snow, and Hail, is for m^ 
 ed is the nearer the Earth, 
 
 THE Caufe is, that the Rays fall more oblique- 
 ly on the Places about the Poles than on thofe a- 
 bout the Equator, and therefore being refraded 
 are far removed from the Perpendicular, and thus 
 
 the
 
 444 ^^ Ahfolute Tart Sect. VI. 
 
 the Heat becomes lefs, and the watery Vapours con- 
 traft into lefs Room, and by joining form the wa- 
 tery Meteors. 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 THE Superficies of the firfl Region is oval, 
 or rather elliptical, or like a Spheroid, bulging 
 out under the Torrid Zone, 
 
 PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 The nearer a Place is to the Poky the third Region 
 (in which the more fubtile and fulphureous parts tnove 
 up and down) begins further from the Earth. 
 
 FOR that Part of the Atmofphere which is 
 nearer the Pole contains fewer fubtiJe and fulphu- 
 reous Particles •, for the Sun brings fewer of them 
 thither from the Earth. And a V:k Number being 
 raifed there than in the Temperate Zone, and fewer in 
 the Temperate than in the Torrid Zone^ and the ut- 
 moft Bounds of the third Region equally diftant 
 from the Earth's Center by Propofitionxvi ; therefore 
 the beginning of that Region under the Frigid Zone» 
 is further from the Earth's Center than it's begin- 
 ning in the Torrid or Temperate Zone. 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 THE Superficies bounding the fecond Region 
 is as a Spheroid bulging in the Frigid Zone. Theff 
 are all to be fhown to Students by a Diagram. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXL 
 
 The Rays of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, do not 
 
 some dire^ly from the Heavens thro* the Air, to 
 
 3 ^^*K
 
 Chap. 19. cfUniverJal Geography, 445 
 
 our EyeSy hut turn a little afide from the Jtrait 
 Courfe, as foon as they enter the Air ; ivhicb is cat' 
 ledt by Writers in Optics^ their RefraElion. 
 
 T H AT Part of Optics which treats of the Re- 
 frad:ion of Light is very fine. Experience teftifies, 
 that the Rays coming from any Objedl out ot 
 one IVIediiim into another more grofs, or more 
 fine, do refrad or turn afide : the Thing is plain 
 from a common Experiment. Take a Vellel, to 
 the Bottom of which fix a Globe of Gold, or Brafs, 
 or Piece of Money, then go from the VelTel 'till 
 you cannot fee the Money for the Sides of the Vef- 
 fel, then fill the VelTel with Water and you will 
 fee the Money ; which fhews, that the Rays coming 
 from the Money as they go from the Water into the 
 Air turn from their Courl'e, before they can come to 
 the Eye •, which is called Refra^ion^ becaule the Line 
 is broke, as it were, coming from Water to Air. 
 
 THUS, Let the Center of the Earth be T, (Fig. 
 28) and L the Eye on it's Surface, and ^r/the 
 Surface of the Atmofphere, or Air j and therefore 
 no Ray can come to the Eye at L, which is under 
 L/g for the Rays below would fall on the rifing 
 Part of the Earth L i and thus no Star can appear 
 by a ftrait Ray 'till it come to the horizontal Line 
 L/^, but the Stars appear before that, while they 
 are under Lg; for Example in S, from which no 
 Ray can come ftrait to the Eye, but muft be 
 refrad:ed ; t. e. the Line or Ray S/ coming into 
 a thicker Medium at S, on the Atmofphere, is re- 
 fraded and runs on in the Line/L, tho' it was di- 
 reded to », and thus the Star appears before it 
 comes to the horizontal Line L/^. 
 
 THUS the Star in/ is not feen by the direfl 
 Ray /r, but by the refrafled Ray r L, tho' it was 
 diredted at the firft to m ; and therefore the Star 
 at /appears higher by the Refradion than it really 
 
 IS,
 
 446 T^he Ahjolute Part S e c T. VI . 
 
 is, it's Height being the Angle ^ L ^ or the Arch 
 A^g, as if it were in the Point a when it is really 
 in/. 
 
 THIS being the Law of Refraction, that the 
 Rays going into a grofler Medium, turn to the 
 perpendicular at the Point of Incidence, as here 
 / is the Point of Incidence, and T / the Perpen- 
 dicular drawn thro* /, thro* the Superficies ^ r/ ; 
 therefore the Ray S/« will be refraded towards 
 /T that from/ « it may become /L. 
 
 AND thus the Line or Ray r m becomes r L ; 
 but the contrary happens when the Ray goes into 
 a fine Medium, for then it goes from the Perpen- 
 dicular. 
 
 BESIDE it is the Nature of Refradion, that 
 the Rays falling perpendicularly on the Superficies 
 of another Medium, are not refradled, but only 
 thofe that fall obliquely, and thofe are the more 
 refrafted the more obliquely they fall. Thus the 
 Rays S T,/T, M ^T being perpendicular to the 
 Superficies are not refracted, but the Rays S/, jr 
 that fall obliquely are, and S/ more than/r. 
 
 FROM whence it alfo follows, and is manifeft 
 by Experience, that the nearer the Stars are to 
 the Horizon, their Rays are the more refra<5ted, 
 and the higher they are, the lefs j and Aftronomers 
 have found, that when a Star is twenty Degrees 
 high, the Refradion is infenfible, tho' there is ftili 
 a fmall Refradion. 
 
 AND Mathematicians, fkilled in Optics, have 
 by Obfer vat ions found the Laws of Refradion of 
 all oblique Rays, and that in every Medium there is 
 a conftant fixed Proportion between the Sine of 
 the Angle of Incidence and of the refraded Angle 
 (z. e.) between the Angle w/T and L/T, the Angle 
 »/L being the Angle of Refradion; and {o in 
 the Refradion of the Ray fr m. Therefore the 
 fame Proportion that is between the Sine of the 
 
 Angle
 
 Chap. 19- of XJniverfal Geography, j^^j 
 
 Angle T/« and the Sine of the Angle T/L, the 
 fame is between the Sine of the Angle T r tn and 
 the Sine of T r L. Therefore if the Quantity of 
 Refradtion be known by Obfervation at one Ele- 
 vation of a Star, the Quantity of Refradion for all 
 other Elevations may be known (t), 
 
 P RO^ 
 
 [/) It is of great Moment 
 in the making of exadt Aftro- 
 nomical Obfervations, to know 
 the Refraftion which the Rays 
 of Light fuffer in paffing thro* 
 our Atmofphere. This was de- 
 termined by the learned Mr 
 Loivthorp, by an Experiment 
 made before the Royal Society, 
 and fhewn to be as the Sine 
 of the Angle of Incidence and 
 Refraftion. See Philof. Tranf. 
 N° 257. But this Experiment 
 being queftioned by the Ra^al 
 Academy of Sciences at Paris, 
 who had not the fame Succefs, 
 [fee their Memoirs for the Year 
 1700.] Mr Z/0ic7^o;;^ repeated 
 it at the Requeft of the Royal 
 Society, and Mr Haujkbee alfo 
 performed it with much greater 
 Accuracy. See Haujkbee' s Phy- 
 Jico Mechanical Experiments, p. 
 175, and found the Proportion 
 betwixt the Angle of Incidence 
 and Refraftion was as 1 000000 
 10999736 ; fo that the refradlive 
 Power of the Air to bend a Ray 
 of Light from it's ftrait CourJe 
 in coming out of a Vacuum, 
 or the Difference of the faid 
 Sines, proportionabletotheSines 
 themfelves,is 2641 ooooooParts 
 And the Experiment being fe- 
 veral Times repeated, he found 
 that this refraftive Power ex- 
 aftly anfwered to the Propor- 
 tion of the di.%^t Penfiti^s of 
 
 the Air thro' which the Ray 
 paffed, fo as to be twice or 
 thrice as large when the Air had 
 twice or thrice the Deniity. 
 Whence we have an eafy Rule 
 for tinding the Refraftion in 
 any Time or Place, as being 
 always correfpondent to the 
 Denfity of the Air. But the 
 Denfity of the Air may be 
 meafured by a joint Obfer\-a- 
 tion of the Barometer and 
 Thermometer. I'or as the 
 Spaces, pofTcfled by the Air, 
 are reciprocally proportional to 
 the Weights that comprefs it 
 [fee the Note upon Propofttion 
 7. above] and it's Denfity re- 
 ciprocally as the Space it pof- 
 fefles, the Denfity of the Air 
 mull be proportional to the 
 Weight that comprefTes it, or 
 the Weight of the incumbent 
 Atmofphere; that is, theHeight 
 of the Quickfilver in the Baro- 
 meter. And this will be the 
 Cafe if the Heat of the Air 
 remain the fame. But if the 
 Height of the Barometer be 
 known, the Denfity of the Air 
 is reciprocally proportional to 
 the Spaces marked againft the 
 Degrees of the Thermometer 
 in the Tube above. [See the 
 Note to Propofttion 8.] Whence 
 it follows, according to the 
 known Theorem of compound' 
 ing Ratios, that the Denfity of 
 the
 
 448 
 
 ^he Abfolute Tart 
 
 Sect. VI. 
 
 ^ PRO PO SiriO N XXII. 
 
 ^be Atmofphere or Air caufes the Sun and other Stars 
 to appear before they come to the Horizon at rifingy 
 or after the-j. are paffed ity at felting \ and appear 
 higher than they really are^ while they are under 
 twenty Degrees of Elevation. 
 
 THE Caufe is fufficiently explained in the pre- 
 ceding Propofition. We may add fome Experi- 
 ments or natural Phenomena. When the Dutch 
 wintered in Nova Zembla, the Sun appeared to them 
 fixteen Days before it came to the Horizon, that is, 
 when under the Horizon four Degrees, and that 
 in a clear Sky ; and famous Aftronomers have 
 
 the Air is always as the direft 
 Ratio of the Heights of the 
 Barometer, compounded with 
 the reciprocal Ratio of the 
 Spaces marked againft the De- 
 grees of the Thermometer. 
 ' For Example, at the time 
 
 * the Experiment was made, 
 
 * the Height of the Barometer 
 
 * was 29 Inches, 7^ decimal 
 
 * Parts, and the Thermometer 
 
 * at 60, over againft which 
 ' the Space of 137 Parts is 
 ' marked ; Then, it muft be 
 
 * enquired, what the Denfity 
 
 * of the Air is, when the Ba- 
 
 * rometer is up at 30 Inches, 
 ' and the Thermometer 50 
 
 * degr. below the Line of Freez- 
 
 * ing, then the Column of Air 
 
 * in the former Experiments 
 
 * will not poffefs above the 
 ' Space of 126 Parts; fo that 
 
 * the Denfity of the Air fought 
 
 * for, will be to the Deniity 
 
 * of the Air at the Time the 
 
 * Experiment was made, as 
 ' 30 X 137. to 29, 75X 126J 
 ' eras 41 10 to 3748.5. 
 
 And hence may be under- 
 Ilood the Reafonwhy the Dutcb 
 who wintered in AW« Xembla^ 
 found fo great a Refraftion. 
 See Se^. vi. Cbap. 19. Prop, 
 30. For hence we underftand, 
 according to the Obfervations 
 of the French and others, (fee 
 Hiji. de r Acad. Scien. 1 700, 
 1 706, and La Me fur e de la 
 Terre) that the Refraftions are 
 greater towards the Poles than 
 near the Equator, and greater 
 in the fame Place in the Morn- 
 ing or Evening than at Noon ; 
 tho' there be no Difference 
 perceived in the Height of the 
 Barometer. For all this feems 
 to proceed from the fame Caufe 
 'viz. the greater Denfity of the 
 Air by reafon of Cold. 
 
 Jttrin^f Appendix, 
 
 found
 
 Chap. 19. of Univerfal Geography, ^J^g 
 
 found) with T'^cho, that, with us, when the Air is 
 clear in the Morning the Sun is feen elevated above 
 the Horizon thirty four Minutes, while 'tis yec 
 under the Horizon and it*s Limb but juft touch's 
 ing it, and as long in the Evening. 
 
 THUS the Virgin'' i Spike appears when 'tis thirty 
 two Minutes under the Horizon, for it feems to rife 
 when the Lion's Tail is thirty four Degrees, thirty 
 Minutes high, and on the fame Point. But thefe 
 two Stars are diftant thirty five Degrees two Mi- 
 nutes. 
 
 PRO PO S I'TION XXIIL 
 
 7'he gyojfer the Atmofphere is, the Refra^iofi is the 
 greater^ [other things being alike) i. e. there being 
 the fame Elevation of the Star, and the fame Height 
 of the Air. 
 
 THUS the Angle n/L., (Fig. 28.) which is 
 the Angle of Refi-a6tion, is the greater, or the re<^ 
 fracled Ray/L comes nearer to/T the thicker 
 the Atmofphere is, which thofe fkilled. in Optics 
 have found in all kinds of Mediums. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIV. 
 
 The gfojjer the Air is, the more the Star is undef 
 the Horizon when it firjl appears. 
 
 THE Ray Lf(Fig. 28.) is refrafled and firfl 
 fliows the Star, and L/T is the refrafted Angle j 
 and Sfn being the incident Ray, nfT will be the 
 Angle of Incidence, and nfL the Refraflion. 
 
 LET us then fuppofe the Air/^LO to be 
 groffer than when it made the Refra6tion nf L, 
 it will thus make the Angle of Refraftion greater* 
 viz. ofL, and the incident Ray will be Kfe. There- 
 
 VOL. I. Gg fore
 
 450 ^be Ahjohte Part Sect. VL 
 
 fore the Star being in K, the Ray K/ will be re- 
 fra6ted, that the rcfrad:ed/L may fhew the Star 5 
 but when the Air was not fo grofs the Scar was firft 
 leen when in S. . 
 
 PROPOSITION XXV. 
 
 l!be lower the Air, the Star is the more under the 
 Horizon when it firjt appears {other things being 
 alike) i. e. there being the fame Clearnefs or Thick- 
 nefs in the Air, or is feen the fooner or later before 
 it rife. 
 
 FOR, fuppofing the Air lov/, the refraded 
 Angle T/L \h\. 28.) will be greater ; for Exam- 
 ple, if the Altitude of the Air be T 4 the Angle 
 refradled Caccording to the firll Ray that comes 
 to L) will be T 4 I/. Let then 4, 9 be drawn 
 parallel with/»; then, by the Hypothefis in 
 Prop. xxi. as the Sine of one refrafted Angle 
 T/L is to the Sine of another refracted Angle 
 T4L, (for the Air differs only in height by fup- 
 pofition and not in thicknefs) fo is the Sine of 
 the Angle of Incidence «/T to the Sine of the 
 Angle of Incidence 3, 4, T, for the refrafled 
 Ray 4, L, and the incident Ray 3, 4, 6. But the 
 Sine of the Angle T 4 L hath to the Sine T 4 9» 
 the fame Propofition which the Sine of T/L hath 
 to T/«, as is eafily demonftrated by the Figure 
 for this Propofition. Therefore the Sine of the 
 Angle T, 4, L hath a greater Proportion to the 
 Sine of T, 4, 9, than the fame Sine T 4 L hath to 
 the Sine T, 4, 3 ; therefore the Sine T 4, 9 is 
 lefs than the SineT, 4, 3 -, and fo the Angle T 4, 3 
 is greater than the Angle T, 4, 9, and 3, 4, L than 
 9, 4, L, that is, than »/L ; and therefore the Line 
 4, 3 drawn out, viz. 3, 4, 6 the incident Ray for 
 the refradled one 4, L will fall under S/, and the 
 • ' ^ Star
 
 Chaf». ig. of Unherfal Geography, 45 x 
 
 Star will be in 6 to caufe the refradcd Ray 4 L 5 
 and thus 'tis lower than when in S where the Al- 
 titude of the Air was T/. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVL 
 
 ji Star may have a different Refratlion even in the 
 fame Place, provided the Denjity cf Air he different. 
 
 THE Problem is better put thus : The Altitude 
 of a Star and it's Refraction being given, viz. that 
 which is made at a given Height \ and there being 
 given likewife another Altitude of the Air ; to find 
 the Denfity of the Air requifite to caufe the fame Re- 
 fra£lion in that Altitude as was in the other. For Ex- 
 ample, in the Altitude of the Air T/, (Fig, 28.) the 
 Ray S/ makes the Angle of Refraftion nfl^-^ if 
 then there be another Altitude of the Air T 4, and 
 yet the Refraftion of the Star S in the fame Place of 
 the incident Ray 6, 4 which is almoft parallel with' 
 S/, becaufe of the great Diftance \ 'tisafl-ced whether 
 the Retradion 3, 4, L may be equal to the Refra- 
 tlion nf L. ; and if it may, whether or no muft the 
 •ocher Air be thicker or thinner, and in what Pro- 
 portion ? 
 
 I anfwer it may be, if the other given Altitude 
 of the Air be greater than the former T/, the 
 Denfity or Thicknefs of this fecond Air muft be 
 greater -, but if the other given Altitude be lefs as 
 T, 4, then the Thicknefs of the fecond Air muft be 
 lefs, or have a greater Raretadrion in it, and hoW 
 much that muft be is known from this, 
 
 I. FIND the Angle T 9 L (having T 4 and 
 T L) and T/L, then the Sine of the Angle T 4 L, 
 and the Sine of the Angle T 4 3 (which is the 
 Angle of Incidence of the Ray 3, 4, 6) thence is 
 found the Proportion of the Denfity of die Air, loi 
 that of the Etliereal Matter, from which the inci- 
 G g 2 den^
 
 452 ^'^ Ahjolute Tart Sect. VL 
 
 dent Ray comes. In the flime manner, let the Sines 
 ot" the Angle T/« and T/L be taken, and they 
 •will fhew the Proportion of the Denfity of the firft 
 Air to that of the Ethereal Matter -, and by com- 
 paring thefe Proportions it may be known, how 
 much more denle or rare the Air of the leffer height 
 ihould be. 
 
 YET properly fpeaking 'tis not the fame Re- 
 fradtion, for the incident Rays are not equally ele- 
 vated above the Superficies or the Mediums. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVII. 
 
 If the Air of one Place he both thicker and lower than 
 the Air of another^ the Sun^ and the reft of the 
 Stars, will be the more deprejfed, under the Horizon 
 of the former Place, when the-j firft begin to appear 
 than in the latter Place. 
 I 
 
 THE Demonftration of this Propofition is 
 manifefl from Prop. xxv. and xxvi •, and it alfo 
 thence follows, that if the Air be lower and grofler 
 in Places of the Frigid Zone than in the 'Temperate 
 and Torrid Zone, the Sun may be feen there longer 
 before the rifing and longer after the fetting, than 
 in other Places that are higher and more fubtile •, 
 for when 'tis more deprefled under the Horizon, 
 and comes to it more obliquely and more flowly 
 as in the Frigid Zone, it mufl then be feen much 
 fooner in the Frigid than in the Torrid Zone. But 
 'tis doubtful whether the Air be lower in the Frigid 
 Zone \ and tho* the Sun be feen fooner before it 
 rife, whether that may be only on Account of the 
 grofihefs of the Air i of which afterward. 
 
 PRO"
 
 C H AP. 19- ff Ufiherfal Geography, 453 
 
 PROPOSITION XXVIII. 
 
 If the Air of one Place he grcffer and higher than 
 that of another ; it may be on account of the great- 
 er Thicknefs cf the Air in one Place than the other ^ 
 that they do not fee the Stars before they rife, when 
 they are a good way under the Horizon. Andfucb 
 alfo may be the great Thicknef of the A'lr that there- 
 by they fhall fee the Stars before they rife, iho* 
 they have the fame Depreffion : l^ea the Air may be 
 fo thick as to fJjew the Stars when in a much greater 
 Depreffion under the Horizon of one Place than of 
 another. - , 
 
 YEA the thicknefs of the Air will caufe a much 
 greater Depreffion than the lownefs of the Air ; 
 and for the Refradlions in Nova Zembla there is 
 required a great Height of the Air with fome 
 thicknefs. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXIX. 
 
 // is impoffible that the Ref rations of a Star in dif- 
 ferent Altitudes fidould be equal {if the thicknefs of 
 the Air be the fame) to the Refraofions of the fame 
 Star in the fame Altitudes, if the Air be either 
 higher or lower, or thicker or thinner. 
 
 W E fhewed, in the preceding Propofition, that 
 if in the Altitude of the Air T/, (Fig, 28.) the 
 incident Ray S/« make the Refraftion »/L, the 
 Ray 6, 4, which, becaufe of the great Diflance, 
 may be reckoned parallel with S/, the Rays from 
 the fame Point, wc fay the Ray 6, 4 may, in a- 
 nother Altitude of the Air, as T 4, make the fame 
 Refraflion 3 4L equal to «/L, if the Air 4 L ^ be 
 thinner than the Air/o L d ; now 'tis demanded if 
 G g 3 that
 
 454' ^'^ Abjolute Tart S e c t . V I . 
 
 that may be in two Altitudes of a Star. For Ex- 
 ample, fuppofe the Star in S, the Air/o L<i, and 
 the Air 4 o L 6" be fo difpoled as to make the fame 
 Refradiion, whether in another Altitude as S, and 
 m the fame Atmofphere/r ^L and 41? Lo, the 
 Refradtion may be again equal, or the fame »2 r L ? 
 And I fay that it cannot be. 
 
 FOR if a Circle be defcribed v/ith the Center 
 T bounding the Air of another Altitude cutting 
 L r in 2, then 2 L v/ill be the refracted Ray in the 
 pther Air, by which the Scar/isfeen; for the 
 Ray 2 L muft be the Umie with r L, as the fame 
 apparent Altitude of the Star x_g is fuppofed, cr 
 the Angle r L/. Moreover, let the incident Ray, 
 anfwering that refracted one, be drawn thro' 2 as 
 72«;, which will be parallel with fr w, if the Re- 
 fra6lion L 2 w were equal to the Refra6lion \^r m\ 
 for if T 2 be alfo drawn, T iw will be the Angle 
 of Incidence, and T 2 L the Angle refradled, and 
 «> 2 L the Refradion. 
 
 THEREFORE as the Sine of 3 4 T to the 
 Sine L 4 T, fo is the Sine of -ix; 2 T to the Sine of 
 L 2 T. 
 
 A N D as the Sine of nfT to the Sine of L/T^ 
 foistheSineof /«rL to the Sine of LrT, and3 4L 
 being equal to »/ L, the A ngle -^y 2 T is not equal to 
 tnr L, or ^ 2 is not parallel with m r. This rc-^ 
 qiiires a longer Demonftration than can be given 
 here, as belonging to Geometry, which will be evi- 
 dent from the following Algebraic IVork. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXX. 
 
 flavifig in two Altitudes of a Star ohferved the Re- 
 fra^iom, to find from thence the Altitude of the Air^ 
 and the Proportion of their T>e''ifilies, or the Lam 
 ff RefraEiion in that Air. 
 
 THE
 
 C H AP. 19. of JJniverfal Geography, 4? r 
 
 THE Refradiion of a Star is equal to the Dif- 
 ference bcicween the obferved Altitude, and x\\<i 
 true Altitude, which is known by Calculation, 
 and thus Reflations are eafily known. Then to 
 our purpofe : 
 
 I F it were to be folved Geometrically, it would 
 be brought to this Problem : 
 
 LET the Star be in S (Fig. 29.) fending out 
 the Ray S/, and the Refradion nfL. 
 
 A N D in the Altitude/^ it's Refraftion m r L. 
 
 THEREFORE in the Circle drf, who've 
 Center is T, there is given TL the Semidiame- 
 ter of the Earth, and drawing T r, T/, L/, L;-, 
 the Angles T //and T Lr may be had -, the latter 
 being made of the Star's Altitude, and a right 
 Angle, and the Angles «/L and ?n r L are given ; 
 and we know that the Proportion of the Sine of the 
 Angle nfT to L/T is the fame as the Sine of 
 the Angle ^» r T to the Sine of L r T. From thefe 
 to find the Semidiameter T/ or Tr, and the 
 Proportion of the Sine of «/T to the Sine L/T, 
 or to find the Angle T/L. Which will give the 
 Proportion of the Sines. 
 
 THE Algebraic Solution is fomething difficult, 
 but the common fynthetic way requires many Lem- 
 mata to be premifed, which the former Solutiori 
 doth not. Let us therefore produce the analytic 
 Solution, to fhew that it will confirm the pre- 
 ceding Propofition. Let the Sine of the right 
 Angle T L F, or 
 
 The Radius be h 
 
 and Sine TLr^ ^et us find the Angle 
 
 bine nf I. a -j^^^ ^^^.^j^j^ ^^ • ^^^^^ 
 
 Sine comp, g ^F, and all thefreft are 
 SinemrL b j^^^^,^^^ 
 
 Sine comp. k 
 
 Sine T/L 
 
 Gg4 FIRST,
 
 456 T^he Abjolute Tart S e c T. VI. 
 
 FIRST, becauie there is given the Sine of 
 both the Angles T/L and L/«, the Sine of the 
 whole Angles w/T is given, "Siz. if the Sine of 
 each Angle be multiplied into the Co-Sine of the 
 other, and the Sum of their Produds divided by 
 the Radius. Thus the Sine of the Angle w/T will 
 
 pe -^ , . ■, ,. ,, ,, 
 
 MOREOVER, feeing the Sine T L/ is to 
 
 the Sine T/L (So is T/ to T L or T r to T Lj 
 
 fo is the Sine T L r to the Sine T r L i that Sine 
 
 c a 
 T ^ L will be — . And feeing there is given alfo 
 
 the Sine Mr L, let there be found, according to 
 the former Rule, the Sine of the whole m r Ty 
 
 ,; , . kca-\~h\/b4. — ccaa ^, , , 
 
 which IS ' >-, . Thus we have the 
 
 Sine of four Angles L/T, «/T, L r T, mrT^ 
 for we know they are proportional fince as a i 
 (ig-p d\/ bb — ^'^. .£f, k c a -\- ^ *^ ^ ^ — c c a ck 
 
 And therefore cga~\~cd^bb-^.'aa:=^kca~\-b 
 %/ b^ — c c aa-^ or if — be = mm^ and g — k^^n % 
 
 t hen, afte r due Reduflion, it will be n a -^ d 
 \ bb — aar=.h\! mm — aa. And both Sides fquar- 
 tdhhmm — h hn a — nnaa — ddbb-\-d^ a'^ 
 2 na dsj b b — a a. For -p'' write hh mm — ddhb, 
 ^nd q q for d d — h h — « w, and fquare again 
 ^*-\-qqaa^=^2nadVbb — a a^ and it will be 
 p'^'~t~q a'^~\-2 p'^qqa iZ— 4 nnbbddaa — /\.nndda*, 
 :^n<^ dividing by j^ndd-^q'*-^ an4 fubllituting other 
 
 Sines
 
 Chap. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 457 
 
 Sines a*—rraa — 54, And a a= — r r -h 
 
 2 i 
 
 v^— r' — S"^ or ^ <^ = v^ — r+ -i-v/-~ r'^ — S"^ 
 4 ^ 4 _ ' 4 
 
 FROM this Equation it appears that the Pro- 
 blem is determined, and that a, which is tlie S'me 
 of the Angle T/L, may be found by extradting 
 the fquare Root. And from thence 'tis found, 
 that two Refradiions are fufficient to find the Al- 
 titude of the Air T F, and the Rule of Propor- 
 tion between them ; which I take Notice of be- 
 caufe 1 fee Kepler^ in his Epitome of Ajlromm^j 
 "p. 6^, takes three Refradlions, tho* he did not try 
 this Method himfelf. 
 
 THE Refolution of this Problem may be alfo 
 had by the Rule of Poficion, by affuming T/in 
 a certain Proportion to T L, and trying if, by 
 that Aflumption, the Sines of the four Angles 
 T/L, T/«, T r L, T r w will be proportional. 
 
 THEREFORE, in the Triangle /LT, let there 
 be found the Angle T fh from having /"T, T L, 
 and T L/. And likewife in the Triangle T L r, find 
 the Angle T r L from having T r, TL, and TL r. 
 
 LET there be then taken the Sine of the 
 Angles T/L, Tfn^ TrL, Trjn-, and let there 
 be a fourth Proportional taken to the Sines T/L, 
 T/», TrL. And if T r;« be equal to this fourth 
 Proportional, then the afiumed Height of the Air 
 T/ will be juft ; but if the Sine T r mhe greater 
 ichan the fourth Proportional, then T/ mufl: be 
 taken lefs ; but if lefs, then it mud be taken more j 
 ?ind fo always 'till they become equal. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 SUPPOSE the Virgin* s Spike, or any other 
 
 Star, or the Sun, to be feen in the Horizon L/ 
 
 ^ when
 
 458 72?^ Abfolute Part Sect. VI. 
 
 when 3 2 Minutes under it, as in S ; thus the Re, 
 fradion »/L is 32. 
 
 THEN when the Sun hath the apparent Al- 
 titude g X 1 degr. 22 7nm. or the true Altitude 
 I degr. the Refradion L r ;;z is 2 2 ??ii/i. 
 
 THE Semidiameter T L is 860 German Miles, 
 But fuppofe it 1 0000, and the Altitude o/to be 5 
 
 of thefe Parts, viz. or of the Semidia-^ 
 
 loooo 2000 
 
 meter T L -, that is, about i of a Mile. 
 
 T H E R E F O R E in the Triangle T L/, the 
 Radius being 10,000,000. 
 
 AS /T to TL, fo is the Sine TL/ to the 
 Sine T/L. 
 
 2001 : 2000 : : 10,000,000: 9,995,992, the 
 Sine of 88 degr. 22 niin. ^ofec. 
 
 AND thus Tfn will be 88 degr. 54 mm. 40 fee. 
 whofe Sine is 9,998,200. 
 
 AGAIN, in the Triangle T r L. 
 
 ASTr: TL, fo is the Sine of the Angle T L r 
 to the Sine T r L. 
 
 2001 : 2000 : : 9,997,155 : 9,992>i59j '^^ 
 Sine of 87 degr. 43 fnin. 40 fee. 
 
 THEREFORE Trm is 88 degr. 5 mln. 
 ip fee. whofe Sine is 9,994,500. 
 
 THEN let there be found a fourth Propor- 
 tional to the Sines of T/L, T/«, T r L. 
 
 AS T/L : T/«:: T r L. 
 
 AS 9,995,992 : 9,998,200 : : 9,992,159 : 
 9,994,366. 
 
 AND with that fourth Number compare the 
 Sine of the Angle T r w, which is 9,994,500. 
 
 A N D we find that this Sine is very near to 
 that fourth Number ; and therefore the alTumed 
 Altitude of the Air, viz. i of a Mile, is not far 
 from the Truth. And if any one defire it more 
 accurately, he may alTume another Altitude, and 
 work the fame way, 'till the Sine of T r m be
 
 G H A p . 19. of XJniverfal Geography. 4 ^9 
 
 nearer to the fourth Proportional •, or, by the 
 Rule of Falfe, having it twice too little, you 
 may find the true Altitude as near as poffible, for 
 it cannot be found perfei5tly true *, becaufe a fmall 
 Diiference in the Sines changes it very much if it 
 be but half a Minute : and befides this the Canon 
 of Sines mud be very exaft. 
 
 WE conclude therefore, that the Height of 
 the Air is about the 2000 pare of the Semidiameter 
 of the Earth, which is 1,633,190 Perches ; and 
 the Altitude of the Air 816 Perches, one Perch 
 being twelve RhinlandiJiD Feet : but 'tis better al- 
 lowed to be half a German Mile, for the Refradlion 
 L/;? was found, hyTycho, to be greater, and may 
 be thirty fix or forty eight Minutes ; and then the 
 Height of the Air will be one Mile. 
 
 THE Height of the Air being known, there 
 is alfo known the Proportion of the Denfity of 
 the Air to that of the Ethereal Matter, or the 
 Law of Refradion, in that Air making fuch Re- 
 fraftions in fjch Altitudes, i. e. the Proportion of 
 the Sine T/L to the Sine T/77, before found, is 
 the Proportion fought. 
 
 AS 9,995,992 to 9,998,200. And the Reafon 
 why thefe Refractions are fo fmall is, becaufe we 
 fuppofed a clear Air, not much differing from 
 the Ethereal Matter in Denfity j as fome have 
 imagined. 
 
 MOREOVER, whether the Altitude of the 
 Air be the fame in all Places and Times may be 
 known •, if we ufe the fame way two Refradlions 
 at two Altitudes in a different Air and Time. And 
 that Students may underftand thefe Secrets of 
 Nature, I have, that they may try a Calculation, 
 fet down Examples from Tycho^s Obfervations, 
 who obferved the Refradlions of the Sun and 
 Moon for every Degree of their Height ; and be- 
 caufe they differ from the Obfervations of Lanperg^ 
 
 made
 
 460 
 
 lie Ahfolute Tart S e c t . VI. 
 
 made in a different Air (\{ made at allj, I will alfo 
 add them. 
 
 Degrees of 
 Altitude. 
 
 Refrailionofthe 
 Sun, according 
 to Tycho. 
 
 Refrailionofthe Refraction of the bw. 
 Moon, according and Moon, according 
 to Tycho. fo Lanfberg. 
 
 Degrees. 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 Minutes. 
 
 26 
 20 
 
 17 
 
 Minutes. 
 33 
 
 25 
 20 
 
 17 
 15 
 
 Minutes. Seconds. 
 34 
 26 
 21 
 18 
 
 15 4^ 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 H 
 13 
 
 J2 
 
 1 r 
 
 '4 
 '4 
 13 
 12 
 
 14 
 12 30 
 11 15 
 
 10 (; 
 
 9 
 10 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 2 
 
 10 
 
 lO 
 
 9 
 9 
 
 1 1 
 II 
 10 
 10 
 
 9 5 
 8 15 
 
 7 35 
 7 5 
 
 »4 
 15 
 16 
 
 8 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 8 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 6 40 
 6 19 
 6 
 
 5 42 
 
 '7 
 18 
 
 »9 
 
 20 
 
 6 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 6 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 5 27 
 5 7 
 4 50 
 4 33 
 
 21 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24. 
 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 3 
 
 4 
 3 
 3 
 3 
 
 4 lb 
 4 
 
 3 44 
 
 3 28 
 
 25 
 26 
 27 
 28 
 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 
 3 2 
 2 56 
 2 40 
 2 24 
 
 29 
 30 
 
 3f 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 34 
 35 
 36 
 
 37 
 38 
 
 2 2 
 I I 
 
 1 
 
 2 9 
 I 54 
 I 39 
 
 I 24 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 9 
 55 
 41 
 27 
 13 
 
 
 LANSBERG
 
 Chap. 19. of Unherfa! Geography, 461 
 
 LANS BERG fets down the fame Refraaions 
 for the Sun and Moon ; and Tycho makes a fmall 
 Difference near the Horizon, thofe of the Sun grea- 
 ter, and at the fifth Degree equal ; and afterward 
 the Moon's Refraftions Ibmewhat greater than thofe 
 of the Sun : I confefs I do not fee why, except it be 
 attributed to the weaknefs of the Moon's Light. 
 And moreover, Tycho omitted Seconds, which arc 
 not to be negleded, if they approach near fixty, 
 for they are of ufe in calculating the Height of the 
 Air. But as for the Refradtions of all the Stars they 
 are equal, or very little different, if in one Air ; but 
 if the Air be grofler, the Refradions are greater. 
 For Example, the Dutch, at Nova Zembla, found 
 in Winter that the Sun began to appear after a 
 Night of fome Months, when it was 4 Degr. un- 
 der the Horizon, at leaft it's Limb ; therefore the 
 Refradlion w/L is 4 dc^, 30 7nin. the Caufe where- 
 of none have fufficiently explained. 
 
 AND then, when it was 3 degr. 45 mm. under 
 the Horizon, they faw it elevated above the Ho- 
 rizon 30 min. viz. it's upper Limb ; therefore the 
 Refraction mrL, (for we muft conceive inr s to fall 
 under the Horizon, or r L^ to be 30 ;«i/7.) will be 
 4.degr. 15 min. and r LT 90 degr. 30 min. From this 
 may be found the Altitude of the Air L/, and the 
 Denfity of the Air at Nova Zembla, which was clear 
 at the time of Obfervation. And the Altitude of 
 the Air is thereby found much greater, almoft two 
 Miles j nor will the fuppofition of a greater thicknefs 
 in the Air help the Matter, as we fhall fhev/ in the 
 following Propofirion ; becaufe the Angle T/L 
 cannot be greater than 85 degr. 30 i7iin. (i{ nfL be 
 4 degr. 30 tnin.) tho' it wUl be greater if ^/be fup- 
 pofed lefs than two Miles ; therefore the Truth of 
 the Obfervarion may be juftly doubted of, feeing 
 there is no fuch Obfervation any where •, yea the 
 contrary hath been obferved in the fame Place, 
 
 fee
 
 462 Tlje Ahfolute Part Sect. VI^ 
 
 fee Chap. xxvi. Prop. xiii. at the end. Befides this, 
 there can be no Reafon given why the Air, after fo" 
 long abfence of the Sun, fhould be higher than 
 when the Sun left tliem after it had been prefcnt a 
 long time •, rather tiie contrary fhould happen, the 
 Air being made grofler and lower by Condenfati- 
 on, as fome may urge that count the Height of the 
 Air inconftant. Yet, when I confider thefe things 
 more accurately, three Particulars occur to me 
 that might confirm that Appearance and the great 
 Refraction : for the Obfervation cannot be denied, 
 confidering that the Obferver underftood Aftrono- 
 my, and faw the Sun above the Horizon for fome 
 Days after, when it was ftill under the Horizon ; 
 nor muft we doubt of the Number of the Days 
 in the long Night they had, for when they came 
 back they counted the fame Day of the Month, 
 as their own People did, which could not be if 
 they had miftaken before. For if we admit fuch 
 an Altitude of the Air as is inconfiftent with the 
 Refracftions in the Temperate and Torrid Zone:, we 
 mull fay the Air is of the fime Height every where 
 as truly in the Torrid and Temperate., as in the Frigid 
 Zone. But, in the "^ or rid and Tefnperate., the upper 
 Region of the Air is fo fubtile, that it doth not 
 caiifc Refraction, but only the middle Region of it ; 
 and therefore no wonder if the Refractions in the 
 Torrid and Temperate Zones are lefs ; for the Air 
 that caufcs them is lower, which fhould caufe the 
 Ivefraftion to be greater ; yet it muft be much 
 more rarified than the other Air. But to this it 
 may beobjefled, that the Obfervations of the Sai- 
 lors were made in a clear Air, as themfelves fay \ to 
 which I anfwer, that 'tis not probable that the 
 Air was then fo fubtile as the cleared Air in the 
 Torrid and Temperate Zone. Secondly, it may be 
 faid that the Air of the Fripd Zonc^ when the Sun 
 returns to it after a long abfence, is firfl refined in 
 
 the
 
 Chap. 19. of XJniverfal Geography. 463 
 
 the upper Region, and that the middle is fomewhat 
 more grofs, and therefore the Sun is feen by two 
 Refradions, as the Stars are thro' Air and Glafs, 
 and a double Retra6lion depreflcth the Star under 
 the Horizon more than a fingle one, and fo the 
 Altitude of the Air of one Mile, or three Quar- 
 ters, will be enough. Nor can it be objedted^ 
 why doth not the fame thing happen when the Sun 
 departs from that Air, and the long Night begins ; 
 for then it is probable the Difference of the tiiick- 
 nefs of the Air is lefs, becaufe of the Sun's long 
 Continuance ; or we may fay the Exhalations are 
 more grofs, in the Mornings of that Zone, after 
 that long abfence. Thirdly, if a double Refradion 
 doth not fatisfy, and it will not be granted that 
 the upper Region caufes no Rcfra6tion, as was 
 Hiid, then it mull be granted that the Air in that 
 Place of the Frigid TLone was then much higher 
 than in our Temperate Zone^ and alfo much grolTer 
 Cfor 'tis only the Altitude that leflens the Refra- 
 (5lion) : but if there be a great thicknefs, the Re- 
 fraftion is much more increafed thereby, than 'tis 
 diminifhed by lelTening the Altitude. But the firfi: 
 of thefe three Caufes is beft, that fuppofes the Al- 
 titude of the Air to be two Miles Cfor it cannot 
 be lefs in Nova Zemhla where the horizontal Re- 
 fraftion faid to be 4 degr. 30 min.) : the other 
 two lie under feveral Difficulties. We have faid 
 it was the thicknefs of the Air that was the Caufe 
 why, the Altitude being the fame, the Sun Wvis not 
 feen for fo many Days after it ceafed to rife on the 
 third of November \ and fo we muft anfwer, that 
 the Caufe may be the fame why the fame Dutchtnen 
 did not, on the thirtieth o^ May 1596, fee the 
 Sun in the middle of the Night, in the Latitude 
 69 degr. 42 jnin. when it was not one Degree under 
 the Horizon. But we have laid too much of this, 
 occafioned by the difficulty of the thing -, there 
 2 muft
 
 464 I^Je Abfilute Tart Sect. VI. 
 
 mult be, for an accurate knowledge of it, molt 
 accurate Obfervations. Yet we muft not thinks 
 that if Obfervations of a Star, in different Eleva- 
 tions, do not give the fame Altitude, that there- 
 fore it hath different Altitudes, on account of the 
 Difference of the Denficy of the Air, which is 
 greater the nearer the Horizon ; and therefore Ob- 
 lervation will give a different Altitude, tho' it be 
 the fame, for, in the Calculation, the Denfity, and 
 confequently the Refraction, is accounted the fame* 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXI. 
 
 Ilav'ing the Tiepreffion of a Star under the HorizoH 
 when it Jirjl begins to appear {that is, having the hori- 
 zontal Refra£fion of a Star), to find the leaft poffihle 
 Altitude of that Air, in which the RefraElion is 
 ?nade ; and the Grojfnefs of that Air and the great- 
 efl ^antity pojfible by which it exceeds the Denfi- 
 ty of the ALther •, that is, the greatefi RefraElion 
 pojfible. Or more generally thus : Having the Re- 
 fratfion of a Star, at iCs apparent Altitude^ to find 
 the leafi pojfible Height. 
 
 LET the horizontal Refradion be nfL, {Fig. 
 28.) or the Deprellion of the Star under the Hori- 
 zon ^/j or g L J, when it firft begins to appear, as 
 it was in Nova Zembla 4 dcgr. 30 min. 'Tis known 
 from the Doftrine of Optics, if a Ray, as ;/, touch 
 the Air in/-, that is, if the Angle S/-^ or«/T be 
 a right Angle, then the Ray is not refraded ; but if 
 the Star be under the Tangent, then no Ray can 
 come to /diredly. Therefore it is requifite the 
 Star be above that Tangent, and that sf-^ or «/T 
 be lefs than 90 degr. Let it then be 89 degr. 59 min. 
 or 90 itfelf, provided it be no greater than from 
 «/ T. Let there be taken the Angle of horizontal Re- 
 fradion \degr. 30 min, and there remains the Angle 
 
 T/L
 
 Chap. 19. of Univerfal Geography. 46 r 
 
 T/L 85 degr. 29 min. the greatefl that can be-, 
 then if it be made as the Sine I7 -L is to the Radius, 
 fo is L T to T/, which is the leaft Altitude of the 
 Air pofTible. For becaufe the Sine T/L is the 
 greaceft that can be, tiie fourth Proportional T/ 
 is the leaft that can be, if the middle Terms, viz, 
 the whole Sine T L/ and T L, be ftill the fame : 
 if the Refraftion of the Ray, that appears at the 
 Horizon, be not given, but the Refradion in the 
 Altitude xLjg^ we may work the fame way in the 
 Triangle L r T. 
 
 LIKEWISE the Proportion of the Sine of 
 the Angle nfT 89 degr. 59 min. to the Sine T/L 
 85 degr. 29 min. will be the greatefl: pofTible Pro- 
 portion between the Denfity of the Air and that of 
 
 the -^ther. 
 
 ■ ■ .' ■ ■. I. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXIL 
 
 Having the Altitude of the Air., and one Refra5fion 
 in it of a Star in a certain Altitude^ to find the 
 ha'ijo of Refraofion^ or the Proportion of the Sine 
 of the Angle of Incidence, to the Sine of the re- 
 fraSied Angle ; or to find the thicknef of the Air by 
 that Refraction, '^'' 
 
 THE Altitude of the Air muft be greater than 
 that we found to be the leaft poftible, otherwife 
 the Refra6lion is not right taken, and the Problem 
 is impoflible. {Fig. 28.) Let it therefore be greater, 
 fuppofe Tr; and alfo let the Refra6lion in the ap- 
 parent Altitude xLg bewrL. Then there may 
 be found the refrafted Angle T r L (having T r, 
 T L, and the Angle T L r) to which T r L if you 
 addwrL, you will have the Angle of Incidence 
 w r T, and the Proportion of the Sine mr T to the 
 Sine L r T i which will be the Rule of refracting 
 
 V O L. L H h in
 
 466 'The Ahjolufe Part Sect. VL 
 
 m that Air, or rhc ProporLion of the Air's Denfity 
 to that ot tht; j\Li\\tir. 
 
 PRO PO Sin ON XXXIII. 
 
 Having the Ahitiide of the Air, and the RefraBlon 
 of a Star in one Altitude ; to find the Refraoiion in 
 another Aititc/dj. 
 
 FOR Example, let the Altitude of the Air be 
 I'/'or T r, and the Rthaction nfL. at the appa- 
 rent Altitude 0, and the horizontal Ray is the re- 
 traded Angle. Then let there be given the appa- 
 rent Altitude rhgOY X Lg, and let the Refraftion 
 be found by the preceding Propofition, or the Pro- 
 portion of the Sine nfT to T/L. Then in the 
 Triangle T r L, having T r and T JL, and the 
 Angle r L T, find the Angle T r L -, and as the 
 Sine T/L is 10 the Sine Tfn. So let T r L be 
 to another Sine, which v/ill be the Sine of the An- 
 gle m r T, from which take T r L, and there re- 
 mains the Refradion m r L which was fought. 
 
 THE Antients ufed a more intricate and alfo a 
 falfe Method for finding it. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXIV. 
 
 Having the Altitude of the Air, and the Law of Re- 
 frahion ; to find the Rtfra^ion at the apparent AU 
 titude of the Star, and from thence the true Altitude. 
 
 THIS is the fame with the former, where the 
 Law of Refraction was to be found from a given 
 Refradion in a given Height. Examj^lcs tor work- 
 ing may be taken, from the Table laid down be- 
 
 lorc,. 
 
 Of
 
 Chap. ig. ofUnivcrfalGcogt-aphy. 467 
 
 Of the ReJ{eciio7i of Light i?i the Air, 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXV. 
 
 ^he Rays of the Sun and Moon are not onh refraSfed 
 after they have entered the Atmofphere^ hut alfo re- 
 flexed from the Particles of Air, or hat back as it 
 herefrom a rough Mirror, becaufe of the irreoular 
 Situation of the Particles. 
 
 FOR if ocherwife, no part of the Atmofphcre 
 would be lucid, except that the Sun is above ; and 
 the Sun being in the Eaft, the Air in the South 
 and Weft would be dark ; therefore as fome Rays 
 pafs thro' the Atmofphcre, fo fome are receded 
 leveral Ways, from one Particle to another, and 
 thus they make the Air lucid. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXVI. 
 
 Refie5iion of the Rays of the Sun frojn the Particles of 
 Air, is the chief Caufe of the Twilight^ that is in 
 the Morning and Evening, 
 
 THIS is evident from the preceding Propo- 
 fitioh ; for as the Sun being in the Eaft, it's R:iys, 
 darted to the Weft, are reflected to our Eyes, and 
 fo render the Weft Part vifible -, \o the Sun being 
 under the Horizon, it's Rays Ihot Into our Air, 
 are reflefted to our Eyes from the Eaft in tii;; iVIorn- 
 ing, and from the Weft in the Evening. 
 
 H h 2 PRO^
 
 468 lie Jhjblute Part Sect. VI. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXVII. 
 
 The firjl of the Morning 'Twilight^ that is, the en- 
 lightncd Air in the Eajf, and alfo the end of the 
 Evening Twilight, begins when the Sun is about 18 
 degr. under the Horizon, 
 
 THIS Propofition is built on Obfervation ; for 
 if in the Morning, fuppofe about one or two 
 o'clock, we obfcrve narrowly towards the Eaft, 
 when a little white Colour begins to appear in the 
 Air to the Eaft Part of the Horizon, and note the 
 Hour and Minute, we may thence know the De- 
 preffion of the Sun. 
 
 W E here fuppofe that the Air is clear, of which 
 there being a great Difference, fome have theretore 
 thought the 1 wilight begun and ended at the twen- 
 tieth Degree under the Horizon, others only at 
 the f]xteenth Degree ; for the grolTer the Air is, 
 the Twilight is the lefs fenfible ; the contrary of 
 which we faid happened in the Refradtion, which 
 is then moft fenfible. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXVIII. 
 
 The Altitude of the Air, or the Matter that caufes the 
 Twilight, cannot be known from the ^^antity of 
 Twilight, as fome have thought -, nor does the be- 
 ginning of the Twilight proceed from a finglc^ but a 
 double Refleoiion. 
 
 I>et TL^ {Fig. 29.) be the Earth, gfom the 
 Bounds of the Air, and L the Place of the Earth ia 
 which the Twilight appears, or the Light in the ho- 
 rizonral Air/, and therefore /L, is the Ray refled:ed 
 from the Air/, and the incident folar Ray/g S. Ma- 
 thematicians, who have written of the Twilight, will 
 2 have
 
 Chap. 19. of TJnlvei-fal Geography, 469 
 
 have the incident Ray in/, which makes the reflect- 
 ed Ray/L, to come from the Sun j \ and becauleno 
 Ray can come to /"from the Sun, while tiie Sun is un- 
 der the Tangent/^ i i therefore when the Sun comes 
 to the Tangent fhs^ for Example to i, then doth 
 the Ray begin to come to/; and becaufe they will 
 have the Refleftion to be from/, as from a con- 
 cave Mirror, therefore T fh muft be equal to 
 T/L ; and becaufe the Sun is found to be 18 d'^^r. 
 under the Horizon, nfs muft be 18 dcgr. and 
 L//? 162 degr. and T//3 or T /"L 8 i dtgr, and LT 
 9 degr. from whence T/ is found 174 German 
 Miles Cas Clavius and Nonius make it) and the Air 
 about eleven Miles : nay Alhazen and Vilellio make 
 it thirteen Miles. 
 
 SO great an Ahitude of the Air is not to be al- 
 lowed as difagreeing with other Ph:Enomena, and 
 being founded on a filfe Hypothefis, that the Ray 
 gbsy which makes the refledled Ray /L, comes 
 from the Sun itielf, which is filfe •, for it comes, 
 by Reflection, from another Ray, for Example 
 from the Ray g I. And that it is not necefiary to 
 make a fmall Light in j, that the Ray fg fliould 
 come from the Sun itfelf, but that another Ray 
 may ferve, is proved from hence, that we fee, in 
 the wefl:ern Air, fome Light before the Sun rifes, 
 tho' 'tis certain no dired Ray can come from the 
 Sun to the wefl:ern Air, but from another Particle 
 of Air, for Example from/and -, and fo the re- 
 flected Ray L m comes from the incident Ray fm 
 which is reflected from the incident Ray gf^ and 
 again gf from another g L ; which perhaps comes 
 again from another. Secondly, 'tis worth remark- 
 ing, that they have made the Reflection from the 
 Air as from a concave Mirror ; the Center of 
 which Cavity isT the Center of the Earth, which is 
 falfe j for the Rays refleCt from the Air without any 
 regard to the Center of the Earth, but to their Su- 
 fi h 3 perficies,
 
 470 T^he Ahfilute Tart S e c t . V I . 
 
 pcrBcies, as is evident from the Ray L m^ which 
 comes from the v/eftern Air to L •, for if it came 
 from m as from a Concavity, it's incident Ray 
 fhould have come irom the Place y, whereas it 
 comes from o, or between/ and o. Therefore the 
 Kay L m fo reflcded, is from the Particle m as the 
 Figure required. And in the Air there are Parti- 
 cles oi very different Figures •, and fo no wonder if 
 they make Rcticclions thro' the Air every way. 
 
 PROPOSITION XXXIX. 
 
 Suppofiug the Twilight is net made by one hut a douhle 
 RefietUofi, to find from thence the Altitude of the 
 jiir^ luhich ?nay agree better -with other ObfervU" 
 iions. 
 
 IT was faid in the laft Propofition, that the 
 Rayg/^/", {Fig. 29.) which makes the firft reflect- 
 ed Ray in the Beginning ot the Twilight, does 
 not come from the Sun itielf, but that 'tis refleded 
 in g ; let therefore the incident Ray be ^ / fwhich 
 may touch the Earth ?;;/>, and fo Ig is the firft Ray 
 which can come to g) and let us now fuppofe it to 
 come from the Sun itfelf immediately, and by Re- 
 fraction to be turned a little afide •, that is, let QL 
 be the Ray from the Sun, and let Ipg be the refract- 
 ed Ray, and_g^ J the reflected Ray, and/L the fe- 
 cond reflected Ray. The Altitude of the Air T/ 
 is to be found •, and, becaufe the incident Ray QJ 
 refracts into g /a-, let us fuppofe the Angle of Re- 
 fraCtion |; /x to be 30 ?nin. and that the Center of 
 the Sun is 17 degr. under the Horizon, when the 
 Twilight begins ■■, therefore the Limb of the Sun 
 will be 16 dfgr. 45 min. under it, and fubftraCling 
 the 30 min. ibr the Refraction, and Angle nKx 
 will be 16 degr. 15 min. which is the DeprefTion of 
 the Sun's Limb after RefraClion. And becaufe 
 
 K L,
 
 Chap. 19- ofVnrjerfalGcogj-aphy. 471 
 
 K L, K/? are equal, and alfo /L, ^/), tlicn K^, 
 K/ will be equal, and the Angle K/^ equal to K_g /» 
 and both together equal to ^ K « 16 degr. 15 mvi. 
 therefore ls.jg is 8 t<V^?". 7 mm. ar,d/TL 4 /^f'^''- 
 and T/L 80 Jrgr. v/hence T/ is found to be 861 
 Miles. and a half, and thus the Air's Akirude 
 I Mile and a half, which is far lefs than was tor- 
 mcrly made by the Twiligiu, and will be found 
 much lefs if a threefold Refleftion be made the be- 
 ginning of the Twilight •, which is not impofTible. 
 And this double or triple Refieftion is better allow- 
 ed for the Caufe of the IVilight's Continuance, 
 than that which Kepler brings from the fplendid 
 Matter about the Sun, You may I'-e more of ihe 
 Time of Twilight and it's various lengths^ in [he 
 fecond Part of this Book. 
 
 PROPOSITION XL. 
 
 To fi)id the Ahitude of the Clouds by the ^^hidrmit (a). 
 
 THE Air b^ing calm and clear, fix on fome 
 Point in the Cloud that is remarkable, and mca- 
 
 (a) Air Bc'ik tells us, that a 
 good Aftronomer, who had di- 
 vers times meaiurcd the Height 
 of the Clouds, afllired him, that 
 he could never find any that 
 were above three quarters of a 
 Mile high, and that few ex- 
 ceeded half a Mile. And Mr 
 Crab trie (an excellent Mathe- 
 matician of the laft age) upon 
 meafuring their Height, was 
 furprized to find them no high- 
 er, and wrote to jiis friend (that 
 great Genius of the laft age) Mr 
 Honor, about it. Who in his 
 Letter, No-u. 23, 1637, tells 
 him, ' I am not furprized that 
 II h 
 
 you found tlie Clouds fo low, 
 becaufe I have often found it 
 fo. I remember that T con 
 trived a w.-y, about two or 
 three years ago, of takli g tlu 
 Heigiit of the Clouds ult'x 
 a Quadrant, ail atone'itation ; 
 and I never could find ar.y. 
 that were at moft above a 
 Mile and half high.' After 
 I'ards, faith he, ' I found that 
 fame metiiod in Kepler [^Jir. 
 Cop. p. 70.) where he faith. 
 'I'lie Clouds are never above 
 a quarter of a Cerrnan Mile 
 hic^h, that is one of our 
 EugUfo Mile?. 
 
 fare
 
 472 ^he Abjolute Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 fure it'i Height as if it were the Top of a Steeple, 
 at two Stations : by two Obfcrvcrs at the fime time ; 
 and thus you may find it's Height, which is never 
 found to be ibove a Quarter of a Mile. 
 
 P RO P O S it: 10 N XLI. 
 
 ^0 mcafure the ^lantit-j of the Air, having it's Al- 
 titude given. 
 
 THIS is only to meafure the Space between 
 the Earth and the utmoft Bounds of the Air, which 
 is eafily done, having the Altitude of the Air, by 
 meafuring the Solidity of the Sphere made of the 
 Earth and Air, and then of the Earth only -, and 
 ilibftrading the one from the other, there remains 
 the Quantity of Air. 
 
 PROPOSITION XLII. 
 
 I'he Air cf certain Places hathfome peculiar Properties, 
 
 THUS in Egypt it feldom, or rather never, 
 rains ; and if fmall Rain fall at any Time, there 
 follow Difeafes, as Catarrhs, Fevers, Afthmas, i^c. 
 The Inundation of the Nile., and the daily Hoar- 
 frofts in the Morning, fupply the want of Rain. 
 And fo in the Kingdom of Peru, there are never 
 feen Rains: and in feveral Places under the Equa- 
 tor it rains for a whole half Year, and is fair the 
 other. See Part ii. Chap. xxvi. 
 
 THE Ifland P u Ion Timor h for the mod part 
 covered with Mifts and Hoar-froft. 
 
 I N the Idand Sumatra, the Air is unwholefome, 
 on account of the feveral Handing Pools in it ; and 
 the like holds of feveral other Places, as in old 
 Mexico, Malacca, C^c, 
 
 THE
 
 Chap. 19. of Vniverfal Geography. 473 
 
 THE Ifland of St Thomas, lying under the E- 
 quator, is thought of all Countries to have the 
 grolTeft unwholl'omeft Air, tho* it be moft fruitful 
 in every kind. 
 
 I N the Province of Chili the Air is fo very fine 
 and fubtile that the Blade of a Sword, Iheathed 
 without wiping, will notruft. 
 
 I N the Azores the Air and Winds arc fo fliarp 
 as in a fhort time to corrode Plates of Iron and the 
 Tiles on the Houfes, reducing them to powder. 
 
 ARISTOTLE fays, that on Mount Olympus 
 there is not the lead Motion of the Air, nor even 
 any Air at all, for the Characters, written on the 
 Duft there, remain as at firft, after many Years 5 
 and they that go up it, cannot live there, except 
 they carry with them wet Sponges, by the help of 
 which they breathe. 
 
 I N America, when the Spaniards were pafTing 
 from Nicaragua to the Province of Peru, many ot 
 them, as they pafled over the Tops of the Moun- 
 tains, did, with their Horfes, there breathe their 
 laft, or were turned into Statues with the Cold -, 
 and thus continued 'till they that efcaped returned. 
 Some think this was owing to want of Air, but that 
 is not likely ; nor what Arijlotle fays of Olympus ; 
 for the contrary is found on higher Mountains, 
 whofe Tops are covered with Snow. Therefore 
 'tis certain thefe Mountains could not be above the 
 Air, but the Air fnowed upon them. See the Chap, 
 of Mountains. 5«/?;^^«^, an Eye-witnefs, fays, that 
 Olympus in Summer is covered with Snow, 
 
 THE Air about the Iflands in the Indian O- 
 cean is fo fragrant with the fmell of Spices, that 
 Seamen perceive it (efpecially when the Spices are 
 ripe) three or four Miles off, when the Wind is 
 againft them. 
 
 THE Sea Air is more unwholfome than that on 
 Land, and lefs agreeable to thofe that are not ufed 
 
 to
 
 474 *^^ Abfolute Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 to It. Ihe Difference is very fenfiblc v/hen Seamen 
 come near the Shore ; for they know when they are 
 within a Mile of the Land, by drawing in the 
 Land Air in breathing. This the Seamen of 
 Soffala^ on the eaftern Shore oi Africa , know cfpe- 
 cialiy. 
 
 WHILST this was printing, I met with an 
 Obfervai ion made by David Fniiichiui on Mount 
 Carphtilhus in Hungary^ which, becaufe 'tis very 
 ufeful in forming a Judgment of the Akitude of 
 the Air, and ot it's feveral Regions, I thought 
 proper to add it here, tho' it Iliould have come in at 
 Prop, xviii. He fays, ' Carpathus is the chief of the 
 ' Mountains in Hungary^ which Name is common 
 ' to all that Traft of the Sar??ialian Mountains, 
 
 * which feparates the Hungarians from the Ruffians^ 
 *■ Polanders, Moravians, Silefians, and thofe in that 
 ' Part of Aujlria beyond the Danube. Their Jiigh 
 
 * and frightful Tops that are above the Clouds 
 ' appear at Ccvjareopoiis. They are called Ibmetimes 
 ' by a Name importing that they are almoft conti- 
 ' nually covered with Snows ; and by another 
 ' Name that imports them to be bald and lliaven 
 
 * as it were. And indeed the Rocks there do far 
 
 * exceed the Alps in Laly, Switzerland^ and Tyrol, 
 
 * in roughnefs and Precipices : they are almoft un- 
 ^ paflable, and no Body goes near them but thofe 
 
 * that are curious Admirers of Nature. 
 
 ' AND to mention this by the way -, when I 
 
 * wasa Youth, having, in June \6i^y a De fire to 
 
 * try how high thefe Mountains might be, I went 
 ' up with two of my School-Fellows: when I had 
 ' got up to the Top of the firfl Rock with great 
 ' Difficulty, and thought I was on the Top of all, 
 ' there appeared another ragged Rock much high- 
 ' er ; and when I had clamber'd to it, over many 
 ' large and loofe Stones, fany one whcrccff being 
 ' thrown down would carry Ibme hundreds far 
 
 'i « p;reatei
 
 C H A p. 1 9- of TJniverfal Geography. 475 
 
 ' greater before it, with fuch a Noife, that one 
 
 * would think the whole Mountain were tumbling) 
 ' again another higher appeared, and then fomc 
 ' leirer, the latter whereol Hill exceeded the Former 
 ' in Height. Through all thefe Caverns I was obli- 
 ' ged to pals, with theiunioft Danger of my Life 
 
 * till I gained the Summit. Whenever I. look'd 
 ' down trom the Iteep Rocks into the Vales below, 
 ' that were thick let with large Trees, the Appear- 
 ■* ance was like that of a dark Night i or elle of 
 ^ the blue and high Sky, which we fometimes fee 
 ' in fair Weather. And it a[)peared to me, that 
 ' if I had been to tall, I Ihould have tumbled, 
 ' not to the Earth but into the Heavens. For the 
 ' vifible Obje<5ls, on account of the great Declivi- 
 ^ ty, appeared diminiflied and confuted. But when 
 ' I afcended to a higher Mountain, I came into 
 ' thick Clouds, and having got thro' them, I did 
 ' after fome Hours fit down, when I was not far 
 ' from the Top, and plainly obfervcd the white 
 
 * Clouds, I was among, moving below ; and over 
 ' them I had a clear profpe6l fome Miles beyond the 
 
 * Bounds of the Country C)\ Sepufiam^ in which the 
 ' Mountains were. I alfo law other Clouds higher, 
 ' others lower, and fome equally difl:ant irom the 
 ' Earth •, from all which I gathered three things, 
 ' I. That I had palTed the beginning of the middle 
 
 * Region of the Air. 'j.. That the Diftance of the 
 ' Clouds from the Earth is diiferent in different 
 ' Places, according to the Vapours raifed. 3. That 
 ' the Difbance of the lowefl Clouds from the 
 
 * Earth, is far from being fcventy two German 
 « Miles, as fome would have it ; and is only half 
 ' a Gertnan Mile. Wltcn I came to the Top of 
 
 * the Mountain the Air was ih thin and calm 
 ' that I could not perceive the Motion of a Hair, 
 ' tho' there was a vehem-'nt Wind when I was on 
 f the Mountains below. From whence I find that 
 
 * the
 
 476 ^e Abfohfe Part S e c T. V I. 
 
 the highefl Top of Mount Carpathus rifes a Ger- 
 fnan Mile from it*s lowed Root up to the higheft 
 Region of the Air, to which the Winds never 
 reach. I fired a Piftol on the Top, which at 
 firft made no greater Noife than if I had broke 
 a Stick or Staff; but, after a little time, there 
 was a murmuring for a long while, which filled 
 the Vallies and Woods below. And coming 
 down thro' the ancient Snows to the Vallies, I 
 fired again, which made a dreadful Sound, as if 
 great Guns had been fired, and I was afraid the 
 whole Mountain fhould come down on me. The 
 Sound lafted for half a Quarter of an Hour, 'till 
 it had reached the moft fecret Caverns, where 
 the Sound being enlarged reflefted back every 
 Way -, which Caverns not being above, there 
 was at firft little rebounding, but when the Sound 
 reached thofe below, it rebounded violently. 
 On thefe high Mountains it hails or fnows for 
 the moft Part, even in the middle of Summer ; 
 viz. as oft as it rains in the neighbouring Vallies 
 below : which I have found. The Snows of 
 different Years may be known from their Colour 
 and firm Surface. 
 
 CHAP,
 
 Chap. 20. of Uiiiverjal Geography, 477 
 
 C H A P. XX. t 
 
 Of the Winds in general, and of the Points of 
 the Compafs. 
 
 TH E Wind is a Motion of the Air ; and there- 
 fore the Confideration of it belongs to the 
 jibfolute Part of Geography ; efpecially feeing the 
 Knowledge of it belongs to Hydrography, and 
 moll of all to Navigation, which requires fome 
 Knowledge of Geography : and tho* I willingly 
 allow *tis more Phyfical, yet becaufe it contains 
 feveral things, that relate to Geography we (hall 
 fpeak briefly to it. 
 
 PRO POSITION I. 
 
 The Wind is a Commotion of the Air which may he felt ^ 
 or which hath fome Force, 
 
 THUS it may be defined by the Con fen t of 
 all Nations : nor do I care to difpute with Critics 
 about it. If the Motion be gentle, 'tis called a 
 Gale or Breeze -, and if it be not felt, 'tis not called 
 a Wind ; for fuch fmall Motions are conftantly in 
 the Air, tho' there is no Wind, as appears from 
 the Sun-Beams let into a dark Chamber, thro' a 
 fmall Hole, where you fee the Atoms carried with 
 the Air : and therefore we put in the Word/d-// in 
 the Definition, becaufe the Motion of the Atoms is 
 only feen. 
 
 PRO'
 
 478 ^he AbfoluteTart Sect. VI. 
 
 FR P S IT 10 N II. 
 
 'Tbe fVinds for the inojl part tend from one Point to 
 the oppofite, and drive Bodies before them. 
 
 THIS appears from the Force of Wind on our 
 Bodies, and efpecially from the Vanes fet on the 
 Top-mafts of Ships, which turn to the Point con- 
 trary to that the Wind comes from. Yet this is 
 not always diredt and conflant, but with fome 
 Agitation to the adjacent Points. Some think there 
 fhould be added in the Definition, a Commotion 
 towards one Point, or to the fame Part ; but we 
 think it may be better left out, feeing there are 
 fome circular Winds ; and, fpeaking accurately, 
 no Wind exadly obferves the fame Point. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 ^ Point of the Compafs is an imaginary Plane, per- 
 pendicularly extended from any Point of the Earth 
 to one of thofe that are on the Circumference of a 
 Circle y having that Point for it's Center. 
 
 SUCH is the true and common Notion of a 
 Point of the Horizon. Sometimes the Points on 
 the Horizon, are the Things we call Points by 
 way of Eminence. 
 
 T H E explaining of the Points of the Compafs 
 doth not belong to this Se£tion of Geography, but 
 to the third, of the Comparative Properties •, but 
 becaufe the feveral Winds are called by them, or 
 they by the other ; therefore we here anticipate 
 treating of them. And this is their Ufe, that when 
 feveral Things have different Situations we deter- 
 mine them thereby. 
 
 PRO'
 
 Chap. 20. of Unlverfal Geography. 4-^^ 
 
 PRO PO SIT J ON IV. 
 
 'The Points are infinite in number, for Planes 7na^ he 
 drawn from alt the Points on the Horizon -, hut only 
 thirty two of them, have got Names, which are com" 
 men to the fVinds that hlow from them. 
 
 THE Points, and alfo the Winds, are two fold 
 as the Cardinal and Collateral ; the Cardinal are 
 North, South, Eaft, and Weft. The Collateral 
 are thole between two Cardinal onts,, of which there 
 are twenty eight, there being feven in every fourth 
 Part of the Horizon ; and of thefe, thofe that are 
 exadly in the middle between the two are the chief 
 ones, being 45 degr. diftant from the Cardinals^ as 
 N. E. S. E. S. W. N. W. 
 
 PROPOSITION V. 
 
 Thefe thirty two Points are equally diflant from each 
 other, viz. each from it^s adjacent Point \ whence 
 there are 1 1 degr. of the Horizon, and 1 5 min, 
 hetwixt every tivo adjacent Points : And the Car- 
 dinal Points are 90 degr. from each other. 
 
 THERE being 360 degr. in all Circles, fo on 
 the Horizon ; and thirty two Points being on the 
 Horizon, each Point mull be 11 degr. 15 min. 
 
 THIS Divifion, with the feveral Names of 
 every Point, was made by the Germans, as moft 
 commodious ; their Names are not eafily exprefled 
 in other Language^ : tho* their Order and Names 
 are in the following Table, 
 
 N for
 
 North. 
 
 Eaft. 
 
 South. 
 
 N and by E 
 
 E and by S 
 
 S and by W 
 
 N N E 
 
 ESE 
 
 SS W 
 
 NEandbyN 
 
 S E and by E 
 
 S W and by S 
 
 NE 
 
 SE 
 
 s w 
 
 N E and by E 
 
 S E and by S 
 
 S W and by W 
 
 ENE 
 
 SSE 
 
 WS W 
 
 E and by N 
 
 S and by E 
 
 W and by S 
 
 480 The Abjoluie Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 ^ forKorth, S for South, H for Eaft ^ and ^ for 
 Weft. 
 
 Wefl. 
 
 W and by N 
 
 W N W 
 
 N Wand by W 
 
 N W 
 
 N W and by N 
 
 N N W 
 
 N and by W. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Becaufe there is a confiderable Diftance between thefe 
 thirty two Points^ fome put a Point between every 
 two, and make fiicty four j which are obferved in 
 long Voyages. . . • 
 
 BUT Mathematicians, finding that Divifion not 
 accurate enough, made as many Points as Degrees 
 on the Horizon, viz. three hundred and fixty, 
 which are exprefled by their Diftance from the 
 North and South ; but there is not required fo nice 
 a Divifion for the Wind. 
 
 YET the thirty two Winds might be better de- 
 figned than from the thirty two Points, from which 
 they blow ; and this would ferve in all Languages ; 
 that is, if they were called the firft, fecond, and 
 third, as they are in order from the one Cardinal 
 to the other. 
 
 PROPOSITION VII. 
 
 The AntientSy both Greeks and Latins, counted few 
 Winds, or rather they gave Names to few ; nor 
 are thefe few determinate, one Wind having fever ^ 
 Names, not taken from any order, which make it 
 hard to undsrftand their fever al Points. 
 
 INDEED
 
 C H A p. 20. of Vniverfal Geography. 48 1 
 
 INDEED the Greeks had anciently but the 
 four Girdinal Winds j nor are any more mention- 
 ed by Homer : and to tliefe they afterwards added 
 four ; I. That was made one where the Sun rifeth 
 at the Winter Solftice, between the South and Eaft, 
 called Enrus ; for the Eail Wind itfelf was called 
 Subfolanus i but Gellius calls the former VulturnuSy 
 and the Eaft Wind Eurus. 2, That Point in 
 which it then fets, called Africus. 3. That where 
 the Sun rifeth in the Summer Solftice, between the 
 Eaft and North j and the Wind from thence was 
 called Aquilo. 4. Where it then fets between 
 North and Weft, called by the Grecians Corns, 
 
 P RO PO S I'flO N viii. 
 
 The Deftgnation of the IVinds by the Greeks was very 
 incommodious for Sailors^ and others-, ivbich Incon- 
 'venience they did not much find^ not going far from 
 Greece in their Navigations. 
 
 FOR in Places of different Latitudes, thofe 
 Divifions they made, were not the fime -, yet the 
 Greeks retained them, augmenting them with othei^ 
 four intermediate Winds, which they gave Names 
 to, and fo made twelve in all : tho* others among 
 them gave other Names to fome of them. The 
 Latins added one between every two adjacent 
 "Winds ; and fo made twenty tour. And Seneca 
 fpeaks of their being obferved of old by Varro to be 
 incommodious, and therefore they were fo ordered 
 as to be made equally diftant^ without regard to 
 the Place of the Sun's rifing and letting at dirferent 
 Times of the Year. But what Seneca fays, that 
 there are no more Winds than twelve, is erroneous 
 and ridiculous : For they are infinite, 
 
 VOL. I. li PRO*
 
 482 1'he Abjolute Part S e c t. V I. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 We have explained the feveral Winds that have their 
 JSames from the Points they blow from^ and jhewn 
 that the Divifions of the Greeks and Latins are 
 incommodious for Navigation and Geography. 
 
 THEREFORE we retain the Divifion of 
 the Moderns into thirty two Winds, equally di- 
 ftant. And thofe are called oppofite and contrary 
 Winds that blow from the Points diametrically op- 
 pofite : for we confider the Winds as coming from 
 another Place to us ; but the Points we conceive as 
 extending from us to another Place. 
 
 ' PROPOSITION X. 
 
 The Caufes of the Winds are various ; for feeing the 
 Wind is nothing hut a continual Impulfe of the Air^ 
 all thofe things that caufe the one, are Caufes of the 
 other, 
 
 I. THE principal and general Caufe is the 
 Sun itfelf, which, by it's fiery Beams, rarifies 
 and attenuates the Air ; efpecially that which is 
 juft under it ; and the Air rarified takes up more 
 Room : and hence it is, that the Air thrufts for- 
 ward the Air next to it ; and the Sun going round 
 from Eaft to Weft, the PrelTure is made weft- 
 ward, as appears in moft Places of the horrid Zone^ 
 and every where there on the Sea a continual 
 Eaft Wind blows : and the Air rarified prefles 
 weftward within the Tropics. There is a Preflure 
 indeed all round, but the Air is not admitted to 
 other Points, the Prefture not being fo great as 
 towards the Weft, becaufe the Sun moves thac 
 way, but in our Climate, 'tis fo only for the moft 
 
 part,
 
 Chap. 2 o. of Vniverfal Geography. 483 
 
 part, before and after Sun riling, when there arc no 
 other Winds that blow llronger, and overcome it. 
 And fome Places, or other Points, are more dif- 
 pofed to receive this Force than others •, and there- 
 fore when the Air is thrult moft to the North, the 
 Wind is faid to blow from the South ; and fo of 
 other Winds. And 'tis to be obferved, that when 
 this is to any Point between the four Cardinals, 
 then the Wind feems different in different Coun- 
 tries. For tho' the Point, in refped of the Place 
 the Sun is vertical to, be but one, yet it is different 
 in refpetfl of other Places. And thus one and the 
 fameCaufe makes a Wind that hath different Names 
 in different Places : if that Caufe be affiiled by o- 
 thers the Wind is ftrong, if hindered but weak. 
 And oft-times another Wind blows that is helped 
 by the general Caufe. 
 
 2. THE fecond and moft frequent Caufe of the 
 "Wind, are the Exhalations from Sea and Land that 
 are raifed plentifully, and with fome Force ; but 
 they do not caufe a Wind 'till they begin to ra- 
 rify. 
 
 3. THE Rarefadion and Attenuation of the 
 Clouds, great or fmall, made by the Sun and other 
 Stars, or by the fulphureous Part iclesand Fire en- 
 clofed in a Place. 
 
 4. THE melting of Snow and Ice, efpecially 
 that which lies on high Places : for they are not in- 
 tirely melted. 
 
 5. THE Rifing, and various Situation, of the 
 Moon and Stars. 
 
 6. THE Condenfation or Rareflidion of the 
 Air and Vapours by Heat or Cold. 
 
 7. THE defcending of Clouds that thereby 
 prefs the Air below. 
 
 THE Confidcration of the Mollpile is of ufe, 
 
 for underftanding thefe Caufes of the Wind -, for 
 
 die Water inclofed in it, being heated with Fire, 
 
 I i 2 fends
 
 484 I'he Ahfolute Tart Sect. VI. 
 
 l^iuls, out of a fmall Hole of ic, a ftrong Steam of 
 Vapours, like a Wind blowing, which continues 
 'till the Water is all exhaled. The grofler Air that 
 furrounds ferves initead of that fmall Hole ; and 
 fometimes 'tis itrengthened by other Vapours and 
 little Clouds behind it, and fometimes 'tis condcn- 
 Jed, and fo makes v/ay for the Air to move to that 
 
 Point. •■ ■' '■ -V ; V. . '.. :.>; 
 
 PROPOSITION XI. 
 
 IVh-j the IVind jnay blow in a Line perpendicular to 
 the Horizon. 
 
 T tl E Ileafon is, that the Air furrounds the 
 Earth in a fpherical Figure, and the Air is ihruft 
 about for the moil part in a great Circle of the 
 Earth ; and tho' the Air may be alfo thruft in a 
 tranfverfe Line, yet becaufe the Air doth not prefs 
 fo much, or refills more at the Sides, therefore the 
 Wind blows in the middle. 
 
 W E fliall underftand this better if we confider 
 the firft Caufe of the Winds. For the Sun thrufts 
 the Air to all the Points of the Place that it is ver- 
 tical to •, but 'tis not received in all thefe Points, 
 as was faid. l^ we then confider great Circles to 
 be drawn from that Place, and between thefe, 
 thofe to which the Air is forced, or in which 'tis 
 received, all the Places of the Earth fituated in that 
 Circle, or Semicircle, will feel the Wind coming 
 down perpendicularly ; becaufe all great Circles 
 that pafs thro' any Place are perpendicular to the 
 Horizon of that Place j for the fame Reafon, if 
 the Wind break out from a Cloud broke, or dif- 
 iblved, thofe Places that are fituated, beyond thofe 
 Circles will not feel the W^ind, tho' the Air move 
 above their Horizon ; becaufe 'tis not perpendi- 
 cular, but oblique to that Horizon. 
 
 YET
 
 C FT A p. 20. of Vniverfal Geography. 485 
 
 YET 'tis not generally true, that the Wind 
 goes down perpendicular to the Horizon i for ot- 
 ten it blows in the Air tranfverfly. 
 
 THUS' we may Tee the Smoke that comes out 
 of a Chimney is not carried by tiie Wind all one 
 way, but a part of it goes another way. 
 
 PROPOSITION XII. 
 
 fFhy the IVinds biozv with [ome Interruption^ rc.Jling 
 as it were for a TimCy and on a fudden return 
 with Force ; and why on the Sea they are more 
 conflant. 
 
 THE Reafon I fuppofe is, that the Caufe of 
 the Wind is not conflant, and takes fome time to 
 gather it's Strength ; and the Exhalations being 
 more conftant on the Sea, and the Motion of the 
 Wind lefs hindered ; therefore that Change is not 
 fo fenfible there, tho' there is fome Change as to 
 the Degrees of blowing. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIII. 
 
 M'^hy no Wind blows perpendicularly from the Air or 
 Places of the Earth. 
 
 ARISTOTLE, in his fecond Book of Meteors 
 Chap. ix. treats very obfcurely of this Oueftion i 
 fo that his Followers do not agree about his O- 
 pinion : nor fliall I be at Pains to write their O- 
 pinions. The Caufe which feems to be more 
 intelligible is, that the Air being thrufl down 
 to the Center of the Earth cannot go that way, 
 but is hindered by other Vapours that are forced 
 up-, and the great Refiftance of the Air below 
 caufes the Force downwards, to tend fideways : 
 v/hich is the more probable becaufe that which 
 
 I i 3 tbc
 
 486 *r/v Ahfohife Tart Sect. VI. 
 
 the Wind confifts of is lighter for tlie moft part 
 than that Air \ and aifo more rarified than the Air 
 near the Earth. , , ,: 
 
 PROPOSI'TION XIV. 
 
 Wh-j the Eajl JVindi are more frequent than the JVeJl. 
 
 THE Caufe of this is manifeft from Prop. 10, 
 where we made the Sun the chief Caufe which rari- 
 fies the Air from Eaft to Weft ; and therefore the 
 Air is more prefied towards the Weft : and this 
 cannot be hindered except there are a great Quan- 
 tity of Exhalations or Clouds in the weltern Parts, 
 which is not very frequent. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Why the North and Eajl IVinds are mere ft r org and 
 Jevere^ and the South and PFefi IVmds ^nore iveak 
 and gentle. 
 
 THE Reafon is becaufe the North Air is grof- 
 fer on account of the Cold, and the South Air in 
 our Zone is more rarified by the Sun \ and the more 
 rarified the Air is, it's Motion is the lefs forcible ; 
 yet the South Winds are cold, dry, and ftrong, in 
 the Temperate Zone^ contrary to ours, no lefs than 
 the North Winds are to us. But the Eaft W^inds 
 are fevere or more intenfe on another Account, viz. 
 that they arife for the moft part from the Rare- 
 faction of the Air by the Sun, which is continually 
 carried from Eaft to W-'eft, and fo is forced more 
 towards tlie Weft. But 'tis likely there are other 
 Caufes which hinder or promote this Motion. 
 The Portuguefe Sailors call the North and Eaft 
 Wind Brxjas ; but the South and Weft they call 
 'Afjdavalcs, 
 
 P RO'
 
 C H A p. 20. of Uiiivetfal Geography. 487 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 IPlpy the South and IVefi Winds are found to he hotter 
 than the Eajl or North, which have a much greater 
 frigorific Power. 
 
 THUS is the Queftlon ufually propofed ; but 
 we mult knov/ 'tis not to be underftood gene- 
 rally of all Places, but only thofe in our Zone •, for 
 in the other Temperate Zone, towards the Sourh 
 from the Equator, the contrary holds good -, for 
 in thole Places the North Winds are hot, and the 
 South more cold, and fo the Nature of the I'hing 
 requires. For the South Wind being more hot, 
 and the North more cold, proceeds hence diat the 
 South Winds come from Places near the Torrid Zone^ 
 and the North Winds from the Frigid Zone ; but 
 the contrary happens in Places near the Antar5]ic 
 Pole ; for the North Winds come to them from 
 the Torrid Zone^ and the South Winds from the 
 Frigid. But another Account is to be given of 
 the Eaft and Weft Winds -, for the different Places 
 of the two Temperate 'Zones are not to be regarded 
 here. Firft we faid in the preceding Propofirion, 
 that the Weft Winds are lefs frequent in all Places \ 
 the Caufe of which is the i'ame with that for which, 
 the Weft are found to be hotter ; viz. becaufe they 
 blow for the moft part in the Night-time after 
 Sun fet, where the Air, prefTed to our Place, is 
 hotter or lefs cold than the Air of our Place ; as 
 being further from the fetting Sun than the Place 
 between us and the Sun then. There is another 
 Caufe which alfo holds good in the Difference 
 between the North and South Wind i "ciz, that the 
 Weft Winds do not blow fo Itrongly, but 
 with fome flownefs •, for 'tis known that a Gile 
 or Breeze is the colder the more fiercely it blows i 
 I i A. tho'
 
 488; The Ahfohtte Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 ^h(/ it be really in itfelF not colder \ as our 
 Breath (which we can make either cold or hot J 
 
 Ihews. . - ,, 
 
 P RO P S iriO N XVII. 
 
 r/7jy Seamen when ihey fee a /mall black Cloud expe£l 
 IVind from the Part in which it is, efpecially if it 
 be of a pale and hlachfJo Colour -, and to explain 
 other Signs of the approaching Winds. 
 
 A twofold Reafon may be given •, for either the 
 Clouds of that Colour fhow that they are foon to be 
 refolved and difTipated into a Wind ; or the Clouds 
 falling down by their Weight, prefs the Air be- 
 low, which caufcs a Wind : of that peculiar little 
 Cloud which the Dutch call the Ox-eye^ fee the Chap^ 
 tcr following. 
 
 W H E N the Sun appears fpotted, at it's rifmg, 
 and hiding itfelf as it were under a pale or black 
 Cloud, it foretels Showers or Winds to come. 
 2. If the rifing Sun ieem hollow, cafting it's Beams 
 as it were from it's middle, it fhews a wet or 
 windy Seafon approaching. 3. IF the Sun be of a 
 pale Colour at letting, it denotes Rain •, but if it 
 be of a red Colour, it Ihews the next Day will be 
 clear and calm. 4. If the Sun fet pale behind black 
 Clouds it Ihews there will be a North Wind foon. 
 
 5. If the Moon be red, like Gold, 'tis a fure Sign 
 of a Wind to come, according to the commo^ 
 Verfe 
 
 Pallida Luna pluit, rubicundaflai, alba ferenat. 
 
 6. A Halo about the Moon ; 7. If the Moon's 
 Horns be blackifli, and, 8. If the North Horn of the 
 Moon appear to be more ftretched out, 'tis a Sign 
 of a North Wind j but it the South Horn appear 
 
 " fo,
 
 Chap. 20. of JJnivcrfal Geography, 489 
 
 fo, 'tis a Sign of a South Wind approaching. 9. 
 The rifing ot the Moon, and remarkable Stars, as 
 Ar^urus^ Orion^ and efpecially the rifing of thofe 
 in Capricorn^ with the Sun. 10. If the two fmall 
 Stars in Cancer^ called Afelli, be covered with a 
 Cloud •, if the North one, then a South Wind i but 
 if the South one, then a North Wind. ii. The 
 Winds do, for the mod part, begin to fettle in a 
 Point, when the Rains are over. 12. A certain 
 Noife and Murmuring ; as if there were a Boiling 
 heard in the Sea. 13. The Antients alfo took their 
 Signs from living Creatures *, as the Crow, the 
 Goat, the Dolphin, &c. 14. From fiery Me- 
 teors, Lightening, and opening of the Ground, 
 and falling Stars ; but not that Light feen in the 
 Dark, or Jack "iju'ith his Lanthorn. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVIIL 
 
 IFhy the JVinds in Spring and Autumn blow more 
 Jlrongly and frequently , than in the Heat of Summer 
 or Cold of Winter. 
 
 I fuppofe 'tis fo in Spring, partly becaufe of the 
 melting of the Snow, efpecially in high Places ; 
 partly becaufe the Pores of the Earth are then 
 open, and fend forth more Exhalations ; and part- 
 ly becaufe the Air and Vapour then becomes more 
 rare ; being condenfed in the Winter. Moreover, 
 there falls much Rain a Month before the Spring, 
 and in the Spring itfelf, becaufe the moill Con- 
 ftellations are in thofe Places of the Zodiac, into 
 which when the Sun enters the Spring begins. 
 But the Caufe of the frequent Rains, and blowing 
 of the Winds in Harveft, is, that the Sun then 
 draws up fome Vapours ; but the Heat being 
 fmall, it only draws thofe that are groITer and 
 pot fine enough. But in the Summer there are 
 
 few
 
 490 ^he Ahjolute Part Sect. VI. 
 
 few Winds, for the fame Caufe for which there 
 are Rains but feklom then j njiz. that the Sun does 
 too much attenuate the Exhalations, and fuffers 
 them not to go fo much together as is necefla- 
 ry to produce Wind, Which Caufe is not indeed 
 general, nor always true \ nor is it generally true, 
 that there are no Winds in the hot Summer, but 
 only that it often happens fo. In a fevere Winter 
 there are few Winds •, becaufe few Vapours are then 
 exhaled, and thofe that are raifed are either con- 
 denfed to Snow, or elfe are not fo rarified or difli- 
 pated thro' the Cold, as to caufe a Wind. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIX. 
 
 In what Altitude^ or in what Region, of the Aiiy do 
 the IVinds begin to blow ? 
 
 SOME think they are not above the lower 
 Region of the Air ; becaufe the Tops of high 
 Mountains, as Olympus, are found to have no 
 Wind on them. I doubt the Truth thereof, for 
 the- Smoke from the Top of Mount Ai^tna is feen 
 to be tofied here and there ; and therefore I think 
 there may be fuch a Commotion of the Air in the 
 higheft Region alfo. '; 
 
 PROPOSITION XX. 
 
 How far ma-j one and the fame JVind blow ? 
 
 T H E R E is a great Difference in this Matter ; 
 for the Winds blowing from Eaft to Weft, under 
 the Torrid Zone, feem to go round the Earth ; and 
 thofe alfo that blow thither from the South or 
 North ufe to accompany the Seamen a great way 
 for many Day?. The fame feems alfo true of cal- 
 lateral Winds ; but here lies the Difference, that the 
 
 fame
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of JJtiherfal Geography. 49 1 
 
 fame Winds differ in different Places, as we faid 
 under Prop. 10. at the end of the Explication of the 
 firfl Ciufe. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of the Khids of M^ifidsy and of I'empejls. 
 
 N the preceding Chapter we gave the Divi- 
 fion of the Winds, their Differences, or rather 
 different Names, which they have from the feveral 
 Points they feem to blow from. This Divifion 
 was therefore accidental, and rcfpefting a certain 
 Place on the Earth, v>?hich thefe Points referred 
 to. We fliall in this Chapter give other Divifions 
 and Properties of the Winds belonging to certain 
 Places of the Earth, or certain Times of the Year ; 
 tho' we wifh we had more and exafter Obferva- 
 tions of them. But we fhall produce fome that we 
 have gathered with much Pains from the Journals 
 of Sailors. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 So?ne IVifids are conjlant, others inconftant., 
 
 THE conftant are fuch as blow at leaft one 
 Hour, or two, from the fame Point. 
 
 THE inconftant are fuch as blow one v/hile 
 •from one Point, and another while from another, 
 in a fmall Time. 
 
 THE Caufe of tKeir fhort continuance in one 
 •Point, and of their changing on a fudden, feems 
 
 5 tc
 
 492 Tlje Ahjohte Part Sect. VI. 
 
 to be firft their proceeding from a general Caufe, 
 or a Caufe that is more or lefs durable. 
 
 T H US the Winds that proceed from the Mo- 
 tion of the Air with the Sun are conllant ; and 
 thofe likewife that proceed from the melting of the 
 Snow, efpeciaJly in high Places. 2. There being 
 no fuch Vapours in that Quarter the Wind blows 
 from as are fit to make Wind. 3. If the Air 
 about the Cloud, from which the Wind comes, be 
 thicker, and hinder it's Paflage ; but if the Air is 
 not thick or clofe together, and but a few Vapours, 
 here and there, in the feveral Quarters -, or laflly, 
 if the general Caufes do not operate there, then the 
 Wind is found to be changeable, and for the moft 
 part gentle. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 There n a General and Particular Wind. 
 
 THAT is called by Sailors a General Wind 
 which blows in feveral Places at one Time, thro* 
 a large Trad of the Earth, almofl: all the Year 
 round. 
 
 AND this Wind is hindered, i. In Places of 
 the Sea near Land •, for here they drive againft 
 the Vapours that come from other Points -, and 
 therefore *tis in the middle of the Sea that 
 this General Wind is obferved. 2. There may 
 alfo blow another Wind in the middle of the 
 Sea, when there is a Cloud, or lb me other Caufe 
 in another Point, ftrong enough to produce 
 Wind. From thefe two Caufes it is that the General 
 Winds are not fo conflant as they might be other- 
 wife. 
 
 THESE General Winds are found only be- 
 tween the Tropics round the Earth, except in fome 
 Places where they are feven Degrees beyond the 
 
 Tropics ',
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of Umverjal Geography, 493 
 
 Tropics •, and they are ever from the Eaft, or from 
 collateral Points, as South-Eall and North-Eaft, 
 and that the whole Year round •, yet not always 
 with the fame Degree of Force in all thofe Places, 
 but they are hindered in fome Places more, in 
 others lefs. They are mod conftant in the Pacific 
 Sea ; viz. that Part of it which lies between the 
 Tropics-, fo that the Ships which come from the 
 Aquapulco^ a Port in JSew Spain in America, to 
 the Phillippine Iflands, that is, from Eafl: to Weft, 
 often fail three Months widiout ever changing or 
 fhifting their Sails -, having a conftant Eaft or 
 North- Eaft "Wind: nor did ever any Ship yet 
 perifh in that vafh Voyage of one thoufand fix 
 hundred and fifty Miles. And therefore the Sailors 
 think they may fleep there fecurely : nor is there 
 any need of taking care of the Ship, when that 
 General Wind carries them ftrait to their defired 
 Port, the Philippine Ides ; near to which indeed 
 there are fome other Winds that come againft the 
 General Wind. And thus 'tis alfo in failing from 
 the Cape of Good- Hope to Brafil in America -, in the 
 middle of which Voyage lies the IQe of St Helena, 
 to which they commonly go as they return from 
 India to Europe, and lies about three hundred and 
 iifty Miles from the faid Cape : which is run oft- 
 times in fixteen Days, and fometimes in twelve, as 
 the General Winds are more or lefs ftrong ; and 
 the Seamen are as fecure when they come to the 
 fame Parallel of Latitude with St Helena (for the 
 Cape is beyond the South Tropic) •, their chiefeft 
 care is to obferve that they do not pafs by the Ifland, 
 as 'tis very fmall, for if they pafs it but the eighth 
 part of a Mile, they cannot return to it for the 
 eafterly Wind. Thus they are forced to go to 
 Brafil for frefh Water, or the other Ifland called 
 Afcenfion with great lofs of Time. 
 
 IF
 
 494 ' ^^ Abfoliite Tart Se ct. VI, 
 I F it be afked how they fliil when they come the 
 contrary way,i. e, from the Philippines to New Spain, 
 or from Brafil to the Cape of Good- Hope going to In- 
 dia ; in thefe Voyages the Reader mult oblerve a 
 threefold Artifice ; for either they fail the Sea be- 
 yond the Tropics, (and thus do not go to St Helena 
 while they go from Europe to India)^ or when they 
 fail within the Tropics they do not go diredly from 
 "Weft to Eaft but obliquely, from the North, or a 
 Point collateral to it, to the South, and fome Point 
 collateral to it ; or laftly, they chufe thole Times 
 for fiiling in which they know the general Wind is 
 often diverted : but this laft feldom happens, and 
 therefore the other two are more frequent j of which 
 we fhall fay more in the Chapter of Navigation. 
 
 THERE are then two Seas under tht Torrid 
 Zone in which the general Wind, from the Eaft and 
 collateral Points, prevails thro' the whole Year ; 
 viz. that between South Africa and Brafil^ and 
 that between America and the Oriental Ides, of 
 which the Philippines are a Part. And the third 
 Part of this Sea in the Torrid Zone^ viz, between 
 South Africa and the Oriental Ides, is not without 
 the general Wind ; though 'tis often interrupted 
 bccaufe of the many I (lands there •, and more in 
 fome Places than others. This Wind blows moft 
 between Mozambique^ in Africa^ and India^ in the 
 Months of January^ February, March, April ; and 
 in the reft of the Months other Winds blow, of 
 •which in the following Propofition : This general 
 Wind is more hindered in the Seas among the Indian 
 Ifles. The Eaft Winds begin to blow hard in the 
 Month of May at the Ifle of Banda^ with fome 
 Rain ; and at Malacca in September ; and in other 
 Places otherwifc, as will be fhewn in the following 
 Propofition. 
 
 YET this general Wind does not happen alike 
 near the Tropic in all Places, but extends itfelfditfe- 
 
 rently -,
 
 C M A p. 2 I . of Uiiiverfal Geography, 49 j 
 
 rently ; for the Tropics are diftant from the Equa- 
 tor on both Sides twenty-three Degrees, and thirty- 
 Minutes ; and the general Wind extends itfelf in 
 one Meridian to the Latitude of twenty Degrees j 
 in another to fifteen, in another twelve. 
 
 THUS in the Indian Ocean, when the Eafl; or 
 South- Eaft Wind blows, in the Month of January 
 and February, 'tis not fenfible *tiil you come to the 
 fifteenth Degree of Latitude. 
 
 S O in going from Goa to the Cape of Good-Hope^ 
 they have not the general Wind 'till they come to 
 the twelfth Degree of South Latitude ; which th^ 
 have to the twenty-eighth Degree of the fame La- 
 titude. 
 
 L LK E W I S E in the Sea between Jfrka and 
 America, between the fourth Degree of North 
 Latitude, and the tenth or eleventh Degree, 
 Seamen have not obferved the general "Wind to 
 blow i for when they have failed from St Helena be- 
 yond the Equator with that Wind, to the fourth 
 Degree of North Latitude, then they have been 
 without it 'till they came to the tenth Degree of 
 North Latitude ; from which to the thirtieth De- 
 gree the North- Eaft Wind is found to blow con- 
 llantly, tho* that thirtieth Degree is feven Degrees 
 from the Torrid Zone ; yet in the Parallel of fix, 
 feven, or eight Degrees of Latitude, ^c. it blows 
 in fome Places, but in the tenth Degree in all Places 
 'till they come to the thirtieth. In the fame manner 
 beyond the Tropic of Capricorn, between the Cape 
 of Good-Hope and Brafil, the South- Eaft Wind, 
 blows to the thirtieth Degree thro* the whole 
 Year. 
 
 AND tho*, as we fald, this Wind is not fenfibb 
 on all Shores, and much lefs in the inland Parts, 
 yet on fome it is fenfible enough ; thus on the 
 Shores of Brafil, and on the Shores of the Kingdom 
 of Lowango^ in Africa, the South-Eaft Winds blow 
 
 daily.
 
 496 ^e Ahfohte Tart S e c T. VI. 
 
 daily, although other Winds are mixed with 
 them. 
 
 THERE is a threefold Caufe affigned by Na- 
 turalifts for this General Wind (for the Antients 
 knew nothing of it, nor of the Torrid Zone itfelf ). 
 Some think the Sun's moving from Eaft to Weft is 
 the Caufe of it ; becaufe it rarifies the Air that it 
 goes over; which Rarifadion follows the Sun, ftili 
 thrufting the Air before it. 
 
 OTHERS, viz. thofe who fuppofe the Hea- 
 vens fixed, and the Earth to revolve, are of Opi- 
 nion, that the General Wind comes from the Earth's 
 moving from Weft to Eaft, and the Air with it, 
 but not fo faft as we ; and therefore that we go 
 againft the Air, or the Air againft us, from Eaft 
 to Weft. 
 
 A third Caufe is brought by Des Cartes, which 
 is altogether new -, {Pari 4. Prop. 49. of the Prin- 
 ciples) where he endeavours to fliew that the Moon 
 caufes this Motion of the Air as well as the Tides ; 
 but becaufe the Knowledge of his Opinion requires 
 alfo the Knowledge of his other Suppofitions, we 
 ihall not fay any thing of it here ; being afterwards 
 to fhew that it cannot be fo. The firft Caufe 
 pleafes us beft ; and the fecond feems not to be re- 
 ceived *, becaufe feveral of the Copernicans do not 
 admit it ; and no Reafon can be thus given why it 
 ihould blow only within the Tropics, and not alfo 
 beyond them («j. 
 
 PRO^ 
 
 (u) Dr Halley, a Perfon well rience. But he only takes No- 
 
 flcilled ill Meteorology, as well tice of fuch Winds as blow in 
 
 as in all parts of Pliyfics, has, the Ocean; there being fo much 
 
 with extraordinary Accuracy, inconftancy and variablenefs in 
 
 profecuted the Hiltory of the Land-Winds, that from them 
 
 Conftant periodical Winds ; a Perfon can make out nothing 
 
 which he deduces not only from clear or certain, 
 
 the Obfervations of Seamen, Firft of all then, he divides 
 
 but alfo from his own Expe- the Ocean into three ample 
 
 Seas
 
 C H AP. 2 1, of Vniverfal Geography. 407 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 Some U^inds have a fiated Time and Period, others 
 are unfixed, and blow at uncertain -limes. 
 
 THOSE are called Stated and Periodical 
 Winds that blow at certain Times of the Year, 
 
 and 
 
 Seas, 'viz. I. The Atlantic. 
 2, .T\\t hdian ; and, 3.TheP«- 
 cijic Sea ; proceeding to de- 
 fcribe in order, the Winds that 
 generally blow in each of thefe. 
 In the Atlmitic Ocean, thro' 
 the whole Year, blows the 
 Eaft Wind ; yet fo as to turn 
 a little South or North, accord- 
 ing to the different Situation 
 of Places. Of which Turnings 
 this is the Sum. 
 
 1 . Seamen near the African 
 Shore, as foon as they have 
 failed paft the Canary Iflands, 
 about twenty eight Degrees of 
 North Latitude, obferve the 
 Wind to blow pretty loud from 
 South-Eaft. This Wind conti- 
 nues with them in their Courfe 
 fouthward 'till they come at the 
 tenth Degr. of North Latitude, 
 provided they be an hundred 
 or more Leagues from the Coaft 
 of Guinea, between which De- 
 gree, and the 4th of North La- 
 titude, there are interchangeably 
 frequent Calms and Hurricanes. 
 
 2. They who fail to the Ca- 
 rihhee Illands, as they approach 
 the Coaft of America, perceive 
 the N. rth-Eaft Wind more 
 and more to retire eaftward, in- 
 fomuch that fometimes it is full 
 Eaft; fometimes alfo, tho' rare- 
 ly, it may turn a little to the 
 
 VOL. L 
 
 South ; whofc violence they ob' 
 ferved perpetually to abate. 
 
 3. As to theconUantWinds, 
 they don't extend further than 
 twenty eight Degrees North 
 Latitude, to the Coaft of Afri- 
 ca, and near the Border of A~ 
 merica they go to thirty, thirty 
 one, or thirty two Degrees. 
 The fame is obfervable South of 
 the Equator; where, near the 
 Cape of Good-Hope, the Limits 
 of thefe Winds are three or four 
 Degrees further diftant from 
 the Equinodtial Line, than on 
 the Coafts of Brafil. 
 
 4. From the fourth Degree 
 of North Latitude to the above- 
 mentioned Bounds on the South 
 Side of the Equator, the Wind is 
 obferved almoft perpetually to 
 blow from the intermediate 
 Parts 'twixt South and Eaft, tho' 
 for the moft part 'twixt Eaft and 
 South-Eaft ; yet fo, as that 
 thofc who fail near the Coaft 
 of Africa have the Wind turn.^ 
 ing rather South, but ap- 
 proaching America they obferve 
 it decline fo much to the 
 eaftward, that it almoft blows 
 direft Eaft. I had Occafion 
 to tarry for the Space of a 
 Year on this part of the O- 
 cean, during which time the 
 Changes of the Weather were 
 
 Kk fQ
 
 498 The Ahjolute Fart S e c t. VI. 
 
 and ceafe for a fct Time, and then begin to blow 
 again •, Tome of thefe are anniverfary, others blow 
 
 after 
 
 fo frequent, that I had fuffic'- 
 ent Employment in obferving 
 thefe Matters. I found there- 
 fore the Wind ahnoft always 
 to poflefs the third or fourth 
 Point from the Eail. As oft 
 as it approached nearer the Eaft, 
 it blew more vehemently and 
 raifed a Storm ; but when it 
 came from the Points more 
 fouthward, it was much more 
 calm, and made the Air clear. 
 But I never perceived a Wind 
 blowing from Eaft to North, 
 or from South to Weft. 
 
 5. Thefe Winds undergo 
 fome Change, which is owing 
 to the different Seafons of tlie 
 Year. i"or when the Sun pafTes 
 the Equator northward a pretty 
 way, this South-Eaft Wind, 
 elpecially in this narrow Tracl 
 of Sea between Guinea and 
 Braftl, declines fomcwhat more 
 to the South, as the North- 
 Eaft does to Eaft. And again, 
 upon the Sun's entering the 
 Tropic of Capricorn, tlic South- 
 Eaft Wind approaches nighcr 
 to Eaft, as doth the North-Eaft 
 to North. 
 
 6. There is found a certain 
 Tradl of Sea in this Ocean, 
 which, near the Coaft of Gui- 
 nea, extends for the Space of 
 five hundred Leagues, from 
 Mount Leo to StTho?7iai's Ifle, 
 wherein South, or South-Weft, 
 Winds conilantly blow. For 
 the South-Eaft Wind having 
 once palTed the Equator be- 
 comes conftant, which in our 
 fourtn Obfcrvation we demon- 
 
 ftrated to blow to the South of 
 the Equator. About eighty or 
 one hundred Leagues from the 
 Coaft of Guinea, it turns by 
 degrees fouthward, and having 
 turned that Point, it declines 
 to Points near tlie Weft, 'till 
 touching the very Shore, it 
 either obtains the South-Weft 
 Point, or that 'twixtitanddirccl 
 Weft. Such kind of Winds on 
 this Coaft are fi.\' J ,tho' frequent- 
 ly interrupted with Caims and 
 'lempefts, which violently pro- 
 ceed from any Air. Seamen alfo, 
 much to their lofs, fometimes 
 find the Winds eafterly ; which 
 being attended with Clouds 
 and a grofter Air, are very un- 
 wholeiome. 
 
 7.'Twixtthetenth and fourth 
 Degrees of North Lat in that 
 Trad which is bounded by the 
 Meridians of Cape Ferd, and 
 the remote Iflands adjacent to 
 it, I know not if I can fay 
 that any Wind blows either 
 conftant or variable. The 
 Calm is almoft perpetual, the 
 Thunder and Lightening ex- 
 treamly terrible, and Rains fo ve- 
 ry frc.]ucnt, that from them the 
 Tradt is named rai?i)\ If there 
 happen any Winds they go off 
 into Blafts, blowing with fuch 
 inconftancy, that they don't 
 continue for the Space of one 
 Hour, without Calms; and the 
 Ship:, of the fame Fleet, which 
 are all in Sight one of another, 
 have each ot them their proper 
 Winds. On which Account fail- 
 ing is fo diihcult in thefe Places, 
 that
 
 Chap. 2 1. of JJniverfal Geography. ^qq 
 
 after they have ceafed half a Year, and others re- 
 turn in a Month's time : and fome blow once a 
 
 Day. 
 
 that rometimcs Ships with great 
 difficulty f.iil thefe fix Degrees 
 in whole Months. 
 
 From the three foregoing 
 Obfcrvations two things may- 
 be expLiined, which Alariners 
 experience in failing betwixt 
 Europe and India , or Gui- 
 nea. 
 
 In the firft Place, that tho' 
 this Sea, in that Part where 
 it is narroweft between Guinea 
 and Brafil, extends no lefs than 
 iive hundred Leagues, yet with 
 great Difficulty Ships, fleer- 
 ing their Courfe fouthward, 
 pais this Traft, efpccially in 
 the Months Jiil^ and Augujl ; 
 which arifes hence, that during 
 thefe Months the South-Eall 
 Wind, blowing on the South 
 of the Equator, pafies it's or- 
 dinary bounds four Degrees 
 North Latitude ; and further, 
 turns fo far South, that fome- 
 times 'tis carried ftrait from that 
 Point, fometimes alfo from the 
 intermediate Points betwixt it 
 and the Weft. When there- 
 fore the Courfe muil be ileer- 
 ed againll the Wind , if that 
 be towards the South- Weft 
 Point, they have a Wind that 
 turns more and more to Eaft, 
 as they retire from the Conti- 
 nent of Africa ; but the Dan- 
 ger is in paffing the Coaft of 
 Brnftl, where Quickfands are 
 fo frequent. But if they go 
 towards South-Eaft, they mult 
 of neceffity come near the Coaft 
 of Guinea, from which they 
 can't otherwife retire, than by 
 
 failing towaids the Eaft as far 
 as St 'Thomas'" s liund. 
 
 2. What all Ships loofing 
 from Guinea to Europe, nccef- 
 farily do for the Rcafon laid 
 down in our Sixth Obfervation. 
 For near the Shore blows the 
 South-Weft Vv'iud, with which 
 they can ne:tl;er fail, the land ly- 
 ing in the way, nor go foagainft 
 it, as to dired their Courfe north- 
 ward to Europe. They fail tiien 
 in a Courfe quite different from 
 thatintended, 1//2;. either South, 
 or to the Point next to South- 
 eaftward. Following this Courfe 
 they indeed retire from the 
 Shore, but have the Wind more 
 and more contrary, and are 0- 
 bliged to fteer Itill more to the 
 Eaft, 'till they make the L^and 
 ot St Thomas, and the Lopejian 
 Cape ; wherehnding a Windde- 
 clining from South to Eaft, fail 
 wefterly with it 'till they come 
 to the fourth Degree of South 
 Latitude, where they find a 
 South -eaft Wind blowing per- 
 petually. 
 
 On Account of thefe conftant 
 Winds, all Mariners who iail 
 to America, or Virginia, firft 
 fteer fouthward, that by the 
 Affiftance of this conftant Eaft- 
 Wind they may be cairied 
 weft ward. For the fame Rea- 
 fon, they who come from thofe 
 Countries for Europe, directing 
 their Courfe northward, endea- 
 vour, as foon as poffible, to 
 come at the thirtieth Degree of 
 North Latitude. For here, firft, 
 they find the Winds variable ; 
 K. k 2 yet
 
 500 The Abjolute Tart Sect. VI. 
 
 Day. The ftated Winds are otherwife fubdivided, 
 'VIZ, Ibme when they begin to blow, continue for 
 
 lome 
 
 }'et more frequently blowing 
 trom the SouLh-Welt Points. 
 
 II. As in the Atlantic, fo in 
 the Indian Ocean, the Winds 
 are partly conftant, and partly 
 p/eriodical ; that is, they blow 
 for fix Months in one Point, 
 and the fix following in the 
 very oppofite Point. Both 
 thefe Points, and the Seafons 
 at which they turn to the 
 oppofite Sides, differ with the 
 Places. And tho' it be matter 
 of great difficulty to obfcrve 
 how the Trads of the Sea 
 may be defined when fub- 
 jed to each periodical Wind, 
 or Monfoons as they call 
 them : Yet liaving iifcd clofe 
 Application, I don't fcniple 
 believing the following Par- 
 ticulars. 
 
 1 . Betwixt ten and thir- 
 ty Degrees of South Latitude 
 tliro' that Tra<5l of Sea bound- 
 ed by St Lai'.rence\ Ifland and 
 Ne^u Holland, the South-Eall 
 Wind blows all the Year ; yet 
 fo as to be fomewhat nearer 
 the Eaft than South j jiill as a- 
 bout the fame Latitude in the 
 Atlantic Sea, we above Hiew'd 
 them to be. 
 
 2. That South-Eafl Wind 
 blows, from May to Noi;ember, 
 to the fecond Degree from the 
 Equator ; in which Month of 
 No'vember, between the third 
 and tenth Degrees of South La- 
 titude, near that Meridian 
 which paffes thro' the northern 
 V\wX. of St Laurencth Ifland, 
 
 as alfo between the fecond and 
 twelfth Degree about Sumatra 
 and Ja-va, arifes a Wind con- 
 trary to the former, 'vi%. the 
 North- Weft, which reigns the 
 other fix Months ; 'viz. from 
 Ko'vember to May. This AIo- 
 tion of Winds is found to ex- 
 tend to the Molucca Iflands. 
 
 3. Northward from the third 
 Degreeof South Latitude, in all 
 the Arabian or Indian Sea, and 
 in the Bay of Betigal, from Su- 
 matra as far as the Shore of A- 
 
 frica, is obferved a Motion dif- 
 fering from the former, breath- 
 ing from the North-Eafl Cli- 
 mates from Oitober to April, 
 which for the next fix Months 
 rifes from the oppofite, or 
 South-Weft, Points. Then it 
 breathes more violently, and 
 brings Clouds and Rain ; but 
 upon the blowing of the North- 
 Eaft Wind the Heavens become 
 fercne. But it is to be obfer- 
 ved, that in the Bay of Ben- 
 gal the Winds keep neither 
 their Force nor their Points 
 with the fame Conftancy, as in 
 the /W//?//: Sea. Alfo the South- 
 Weft Winds, near the African 
 Shore, decline more fouthward ; 
 near India, more weftward. 
 
 4. On the South of the E- 
 quator, that Tracfl of Sea, which 
 lies between Africa and Lau- 
 rence Ifland, and which goes 
 as far as the Equator, feems 
 to appertain to the Motion of 
 Winds jull now laid down. For 
 in thefe Places the South-Weft 
 Wind blows from Q^ober to 
 
 Aprils
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of Vniverfal Geography. 50 1 
 
 fome Months, fome for half a Year, fome for a 
 Month, and fome for a few Days. 
 
 AMONG 
 
 j^pril, fomcwhvit nearer the 
 South ; but fuch as fail to the 
 North perceive it decline to- 
 wards the Weft, which at length 
 coincides with the periodical 
 South-Weft Wind, which they 
 fay blows at that Seafon of the 
 Year, from the North Side of 
 the Equator. But what Winds 
 during the reft of the Yea-r, 
 reign in that Sea, I cannot fuf- 
 ficiently determine: becaufe our 
 Sailors, in their return from 
 India, fteer their Courfe be- 
 yond the IHand of St Lau- 
 rence. This only I could learn, 
 that the Wind for the moft 
 part comes from the eaftern 
 Points, fometimes declining to 
 the North, and at other times 
 to the South. 
 
 5 . On the Eaft of Sumatra, 
 and North of the Equator, as 
 alfo on the Coafts of Camboia 
 and C,6/«^, the periodical North- 
 Eaft Winds come nearer to 
 North, as do the South-Weft 
 Winds to South. And this is ob- 
 ferved to hold 'till you havegone 
 beyond the Philippine Iflands 
 on the Eaft, and as far as Ja- 
 pan towards the North, In the 
 Month OSlober, or November, a 
 northerly Gale arifcs ; and in 
 May a Ibutherly, which con- 
 tinues from that time du- 
 ring the whole Summer. But 
 it is to be marked, that the 
 Points of the Winds are not io 
 fteadily fixed in thefe Parts, as 
 they are in other Seas : fo that 
 fometimes the South Winds de- 
 cline a Point or two towards 
 
 the Eaft, as the nortliern do 
 towards the Weft : whicii feems 
 to take it's rife from the Bulk 
 of the Lands, that are every 
 where interpofed in this Sea. 
 
 6. About the fame Longitude 
 on the South of the Equator, 
 ■viiz. in the intermediate Space 
 between tlie Iftands Sumatra 
 and J'a'Z'a lying to the Weft, 
 and Ne-M Guinea to the Eaft, 
 nearly the fame periodical Winds 
 blow from the North or South ; 
 b.it fo that the North Winds 
 incline to the Weft, and the 
 South to the Eaft. And thefe 
 blow with the fame inconftan- 
 cy and fliifting of the Point, as 
 tiaofe of the Quarter above- 
 mentioned ; but the Motions 
 begin four or fix Weeks later 
 than in that Sea. 
 
 7. The Change of thefe Mo- 
 tions does not happen fuddcnly, 
 or at once ; but in fome Places 
 there are Calms, and in others 
 changeable Wmds. And often 
 on the Shore of Cormandel, 
 towards the end of the acciden- 
 tal Motion ; and the two laft 
 Months there arifc furious Tem- 
 pefts in the Chinefe Sea ; with 
 the periodical Wind at South. 
 
 All Navigation in neceflarily 
 regulated according to thefe 
 Winds ; for if Sailors fliould de- 
 lay the Seafon 'till the contra- 
 ry Motion begins, they muft 
 either fail back, or go into 
 Harbour, and wait for the re- 
 turn of the Trade -Wind. 
 
 Kk 
 
 III. The
 
 502 T^he Abfolute Part Sect. VI. 
 
 AMONG thefe the chief are thofe which Sailors 
 
 find CO blow, for fome Months, in fome Parts of the 
 
 Sea ; 
 
 III. The third, or P^cifc 
 Cceaii, llretches nearJy as far 
 as tl.e two former taken toge- 
 ther; viz. one hundred and fifty 
 Degrees, from the weftern Shore 
 of America to tl;e PhiHppine 
 Ifles. But as this is failed by 
 very few befides the Spaniards, 
 from Spain to the Manilhas, 
 and that only once a Year ; 
 whilft th.y conftantly take the 
 fame Courfe ; it remains in a 
 great Meafure unknown to us ; 
 and cannot therefore be defcri- 
 bed with the fame exadnefs as 
 the reft. Thus much is certain ; 
 as well from the Obfervations 
 of the Spaniards, as others, that 
 the Winds which blow here 
 have a gi eat affinity with thofe 
 in the Atlantic ; for the North- 
 Eaft blows to the Nortli of the 
 Equator, and the South- Weft 
 to the North of the fame, with 
 fuch a Strength and Conftancy, 
 that the vaft extent of this O- 
 cean may be failed in about ten 
 Weeks, without fhiftirg the 
 Sails. Here alfo are no Tem- 
 pefts, fo that failing is no where 
 fo commodious, as neither Wind 
 is wanted, nor it's Violence to 
 be feared. Whence fome ima- 
 gine, that it is as (liorta Voyage 
 thro' the Streights of Magellan 
 to China or Japan, as by 
 doubling the Cape of Good- 
 Hope. 
 
 . Thefe Trade-Winds extend 
 not to above thirty Degrees of 
 Latitude on both Sides of the 
 Equator, as in the Atlantic O- 
 tean. This appears in part froiA 
 
 the Courfe obferved by the Spa- 
 niards returning from the Ma- 
 nilhas to Neuo Spain ; fcr by 
 means of the fjuthern Wind, 
 which blows in thefe Iflands 
 during the Summer Months, 
 they fail to the South up to 
 the Latitude of "Japan ; where 
 they firft meet with various 
 Winds that will carry them to 
 the Eaft. And in part again, 
 from the Oblcrvations of Schoo- 
 tin and others, who failing to 
 India thro' the Streights of 
 Magellan, found almoft the 
 fame Diftance of the Winds 
 on the South of the Equator. 
 And in this alfo the Winds of 
 the Pacific agree with thofe 
 of the Atla^iiic Ocean j that 
 near the Coaft of Peru they 
 approach to the South, as on 
 the Coaft of Angola. 
 
 That the Reader may form 
 the better Notion, we ftiall 
 add a Figure (fee Fig. 30.) re- 
 prefenting to the Eye all the 
 Quarters and Points of all 
 the Winds. The Limits of 
 each Traft are marked with 
 pricked Lines, as well in the 
 Atlantic, whether they fepa- 
 rate the variable Winds from 
 the cor.ftant, as in the Indian 
 Ocean, where they alfofeparate 
 the different Monfoons from one 
 another. The eafieft way of 
 marking the Quarters of the 
 Winds feemed to be by a Se- 
 ries of little ftiarp-headed Lines, 
 pointing alternately to the Parts 
 of the Horizon from whence 
 the Winds blow. But as the 
 Pacific
 
 C H A p. 2 r. of Vniverfal Geography. ^03 
 
 Sea ; and thefe fas alfo the times of their blow- 
 ing) are called Monjoons j whicii are iouhu chief- 
 
 Pacific Ocean is fo extreamly 
 large, and yet in a great niea- 
 fure unknown to u.s; 1 was un- 
 willing to exhibit the whole, 
 to prevent enl -rging the Map 
 beyond a reafonaole lize. 
 
 There ariles, from the Pre- 
 mifes, various Queitions worthy 
 the Coniideration of Philofo- 
 phers : the principal are thefe. 
 I . Why does the Wind in the 
 Atlayitic and Pacific Ocean, 
 continually blow from the Eall 
 within thirty Degrees on both 
 Sides the Equator ? 2. Why is 
 not the like conflant Wind 
 found beyond thefe Limits ? 
 3 . Why is the Weft Wind found 
 perpetual near the Coait of Gui- 
 nea? 4. Why, in the northern 
 Part of the Indian Ocean, do 
 the Winds for fix Months con- 
 fpire with the aforefaid Winds; 
 and for the other iix, blow 
 from the oppoiite Point; whilft 
 that part of the fame Ocean 
 which lies on the South Side 
 of the Equator, has no other 
 Winds but what are found in 
 other Seas ? 5. Why do the 
 conftant Winds on the North 
 Side of the Equator incline to 
 the North ; and on the South 
 Side to the South ; 6. Why 
 in the Chinefie Sea, chiefly, is 
 there fo remarkable an Inclina- 
 tion of the Winds to the North ? 
 
 For the folving of thefe Pro- 
 blems, I offer the following 
 Particulars to the Confideration 
 of the Learned. 
 
 Wind is properly defined a 
 Current, or Motion of the Air, 
 
 which if conftant, or perpetual, 
 mult have a permanent or con- 
 ftant Cauie. Some imagine 
 this Caufe to be the aunual 
 Revolution of the Earth about 
 it's own Axis. This might 
 periiaps be allowed, if ahnoft 
 continual Calms were not found 
 in the Atlantic Ocean near the 
 Equator ; and alfo Well Wmds 
 upon the Coaft of Guinea, and 
 weftern Trade-V/inds in the In- 
 dian Ocean, under the Equator. 
 Befides, the Air being a ponde- 
 rous or gravitating Body, it will 
 acquire the fame Velocity as 
 the Earth; and as it rolls along 
 therewith in the annual Moti- 
 on, it will feem more to do it 
 in the diunr.l ; which is not 
 above a thirtieth fo fwift as the 
 other. So that fome other 
 Caufe muft be fought for. 
 
 The true Caufe wc judge to 
 be the Sun continually permeat- 
 ing the Ocean ; with the Ad- 
 dition of t!ie Nature of the Soil 
 and adjacent Country. 
 
 For by the known Laws of 
 of Hydroftarics, that part of the 
 Air which is moft rarified by 
 Heat, is the llghteft; and con- 
 lequently the others tend to- 
 wards it, 'till an /rquilihritan be 
 obtained. But as the Sun con- 
 tinually moves tov.-ards the 
 Wert ; it is manifeft that the 
 Air, moft heated by it's direft 
 Rays, mult thus move the fame 
 way ; and therefore the v/hole 
 Mafs of the lower Air. By 
 this Means there is produced 
 a general Eaft Wind, which 
 
 K k 4 putting
 
 504 '^'^ Abjolute Fart S e c T. VI. 
 
 ly in the Indian Ocean, from Africa to the Thi- 
 lippne Ifles ; tho' in other Places they are not quite 
 
 "wuhout 
 
 putting all the Parts of the 
 Air, refting upon the vaft Ocean 
 into Motion, they all keep 
 their own Motion 'till the Sun 
 returns; whence the Eaft Wind 
 becomes perpetual. 
 
 And hence it follows, that 
 the Wind on the North or 
 South Side of the Equator, 
 ought to incline towards the 
 North or South. For as the 
 Air ncnr the Equator receives 
 the Sun's Rays perpendicularly, 
 twice every Year, and never 
 more inclined than thirty De- 
 grees, it muft of courfe be 
 greatly rarified by fo great a 
 Heat. Near the Tropics alfo 
 the Sun is vertical, for a confide- 
 rable Time ; but as it is diflant 
 therefrom forty-leven Degrees 
 for no lefs a time ; the Air 
 hence becomes fo cold that it 
 cannot afterwards be brought 
 to the fame Degree of Heat, 
 which it receives under the 
 Line. Whence the Air, being 
 lefs rarified on both Sides the 
 Equator, flows to the middle. 
 And this Motion being com- 
 pounded with the Eaft Wind 
 abovementioned, explains all 
 the Phsenomena of the general 
 Winds ; which, if the Surface 
 of the Earth was every where 
 covered with Sea, would blow 
 v/ith the fame conftancy they 
 do in the Atlantic and Ethiopic 
 Oceans. 
 
 But as the Ocean is inter- 
 rupted with fuch large Trafts 
 of Land, regard muft be had to 
 JhcNatureof the Soil, and the 
 
 Pofition of high Mountains ; to 
 which two Caufes the Changes 
 of the Wind feem principally 
 aftignable For when a Coun- 
 try lying near the Equator is 
 low and fandy, the Heat of 
 the Sun, refleded by the Sand 
 is fo great as to be almoft in- 
 credible. And thus the Air of 
 this Place being highly rari- 
 fied ; the denier Parts of the 
 Air will necefllirily move thi- 
 ther to reftore the JEqidlibrium. 
 Whence I judge, that near the 
 Coaft of Guinea the Wind con- 
 ftantly blows to the Land ; as 
 it is e.xceeding probable that 
 the inner Parts of Africa are 
 violently heated : fmce even 
 themoft northern Parts thereof, 
 by reafon of their Heat, made 
 the Antients believe ail the Parts 
 beyond the Tropics uninhabi- 
 table. 
 
 And hence we may explain 
 thofe freq'ient Calms; mention- 
 ed above in our fixth Obferva- 
 tion. For as that Part of the 
 Atlantic lies betwixt the Weft 
 Winds perceived near Guinea, 
 and the conftant Eaft Wind 
 that blows in the Parts fome- 
 what more to the Weft, the 
 Air lying thereon giving way 
 to neither of thefe contrary 
 Winds, keeps it's Place, and 
 makes a Calm. And the Air 
 not able to fupport the Vapours 
 here plentifully raifed by the 
 Heat, as being more light and 
 rarified ; the oppofite Winds 
 frequently caufe the Rains to 
 fall heavy. 
 
 AxA
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of Umverfal Geography. 50 r 
 
 wichout them ; the obferving of thofe times is ve- 
 ry materia], when Sailors go to the fame Point, 
 
 or 
 
 above mentionttd of the inner 
 Parts of Jfrica ; but wlien the 
 Sun declines to tJie South they 
 enjoy a temperate Air. But 
 this is owing to the long Ridges 
 of Mountains whofe 'J'ops be- 
 ing generally covered with 
 Snow in the Winter; this great- 
 ly cools the Air. For this Rea- 
 fon the general North^Eail 
 Wind blowing in the hiiian 
 Sea is at one time of the Year 
 hotter, and at another colder 
 than the Wind carried circularly 
 from the South -Weft ; which is 
 the hotteft of thefe contrary 
 Winds ; when it blows thro' the 
 upper Region of the Air; it 
 follows that the under Courfe of 
 the Air one vv'hile moves from 
 the North -Eaft, another from 
 the South-Weft ; from the later 
 in the Summer, and from the 
 former in Winter ; as we ob- 
 ferved in explaining the Ph:£- 
 nomena of the Trade-Winds. 
 
 From the fame Caufeitfeems 
 to proceed, that the North- 
 Weft Wind fucceeds the South- 
 Eaft in a certain Trad of the 
 Indian Ocean, lying without 
 the Equinottiaj, at the time 
 that the Sun approaches tlic 
 Tropic of Capricorn. 
 
 But here we muft not con- 
 ceal, that there is a great dif- 
 ficulty in explaining the 
 Reafon why in the fame Lati- 
 tude of the Indian Ocean thcfc 
 Winds are found, there is a per- 
 petual Eaft Wind in the At- 
 lantic without any Variation 
 at all. 
 
 It 
 
 And hence it appears, that 
 the Part of th.e Air rarified by 
 Heat, being conftantlycomprel- 
 fed on all Sides by the colder 
 and denfer Air, that furrounds 
 it, muft be continually driven 
 upwards, as it were like a Va- 
 pour, and be there every way 
 equally difperfed to maintain 
 the jEquilibrium ; fo that the 
 upper Courfe or Motion of the 
 Air ftiall be contrary the under. 
 And thus, as it were by a cir- 
 cular Motion, the conftant 
 Winds that blow near the Earth , 
 produce another Wind that 
 blows a contrary way in the 
 upper Regions of the Air. And 
 this Conjedure is alfo in part 
 confirmed by Experience. For 
 when Sailors are got beyond 
 the Limits of the Trade-Winds, 
 they immediatly find a Wind 
 blowing from the oppofite Quar- 
 ter. And hence alfo we may 
 eafily explain the Phaenomena 
 of periodical Winds, or the re- 
 turn of the Monfoons ; which 
 as it fcarce admits of any other 
 Solution, fo it confiderably con- 
 firms our Hypothecs of the cir- 
 cular Motion of the Air. 
 
 Forfuppofing this circular Mo- 
 tion of the Winds, we muft ob- 
 ferve that the northern part of 
 the Indian Ocean is every where 
 interfperfed with Land, running 
 out within the Limits of the 
 periodical Winds, niiz. Arabia, 
 Perfia, India, ISc. which Coun- 
 tries at the time the Sun is in 
 the northern Signs of the Eclip- 
 tic, fufFers the fame Heat we
 
 5o6 T^he Ahjhlute Part Sect. VI. 
 
 or one collateral to the Point they blow to ; nor 
 can they return 'till thofe Winds blow the con- 
 trary way, which in a certain time they will do 
 and concinue to blov/ fo long the other way. Tho' 
 they do hot immediately begin to blow the other 
 way, when they have done blowing the former 
 way j but after fome Days more, or lefs, in which 
 the Winds are unfettled ; and the Sailor fometimes 
 furprized with Calms \ and the Sea-Waves move fe- 
 veral Ways •, yea, and frequent Storms arife. Some 
 of the Monfoons return twice in a Year, but not with 
 the fame Vehemence. 
 
 I. I N that part of the Atlantic Ocean which lies 
 in the Torrid Zone^ and that alfo in the Temperate^ 
 the North Wind blows frequently in the Months 
 of Oclober, November^ ancl January ; and thefe 
 Months are the bed times to go trom Europe to 
 India, that they may get beyond the Equator wirh 
 the help of them ; for it hath been found, that 
 fome Ships that had gone from Europe in March 
 have not come fooner to Brafil than thofe that 
 jeft it in Ocfoher ; coming both to it in the Month 
 of February -, being helped by the North Winds. 
 But becaufe this Wind is not fo conftant and 
 certain, Seamen do not reckon it among the Mcn- 
 foons. Nor is it eafy to give the caufe of that Wind 
 in thefe Months ; except we refer them to the 
 great quantity of thick Vapours at that time, or the 
 conftant prefiure then made by the heavy Clouds. 
 And they that wintered in Nova Zsmbla fay, there 
 was a conftant North Wind all the Winter -, which 
 could not be by a Rarefa6tion of the Air made by 
 the Sun, v/hich was under the Horizon. Yet we 
 
 It is alfo very difficult to ex- are found only in the northern 
 
 plain why the Limits of the part of the Indian Ocean ; 
 
 conftant Winds fcarce reach be- whiLI in the South part the- 
 
 yond thirty Degrees of Lati- North-Eaft Wind perpetually 
 
 tiide ; as alfo why Monfoons 
 
 think
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of Unherfal Geographv, coy 
 
 think it may be maintained in the general, that 
 moll of thefe Monfoons come from the melting of 
 the Snow, or the clifTolution of the Clouds in the 
 North and South Places, eipecially the Mountains 
 which I am apt to believe, becaufe thefe Monfoons 
 blow, for the moft part, from the North or South, 
 or the Points collateral ; and becaufe the Snov/ and 
 Clouds in the northern Parts are difTolved by the 
 Sun •, efpecially in that half Year it goes thro' the 
 North part of the Ecliptic, the Monjoom are then 
 from the North, and in the other half from the 
 South. 
 
 THE Caufe of thefe Monfoons in the Sea, blow- 
 ing moftly from collateral Points, as South-Eaft, 
 North-Ealt, or thofe next them, feems to be from 
 the different Situation of the Places in which the 
 Snow and thick Clouds are -, or from the general 
 Wind which may divert them to another Point : 
 for that Wind blowing to the Wefl, and the Mon- 
 j'oons tending North and South, they muft hinder 
 one another \ and thus go in a Point between the 
 Cardinals. But the South- Weft and North- Wefb 
 Monfoons are rare and weak, and are fcarce to be 
 reckoned Monfoons ^\^\\tvi the North and SouthWinds 
 feem fometimes by accident to decline to the 
 Weft, but are drawn to the Eaft by the general 
 Winds. There are required for giving the Caufcs 
 of the great variety of the Monfoons in different 
 Places, more accurate Obfervations, not of one 
 Year only, but of feveral Years j with the Times of 
 the Winter, Rains, Snows, and of the Mountains in 
 thofe Places from which the ftated Winds blow. We 
 fliould alfo know the Motion and Age of the Moon ; 
 which may caufe a Change in this Matter. 
 
 2. I N the Month of Jul^^ and fome Months 
 near it, the South Winds blow at Cape Verd in 
 Africa (when there is a Winter of Rain there) which 
 
 feems
 
 5o8 I'he Abfohite Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 feems to be from the fame Caufs that makes the 
 North Winds blow in Winter, in our Zone. 
 
 3. AT the Cape of Good-Hope the North-Eaft 
 Wind blows in September. 
 
 4. AT Patanen (which is a Kingdom and a 
 Town of the fame Name in India^ beyond the 
 Mountains of the Gate) there are conftant Rains, 
 and a North-Eaft Wind that blows ; but in the 
 other Months an Eaft Wind blows thro', and 'tis 
 Summer then. 
 
 5. ABOUT Sumatra the Change of the Adon- 
 foom is in November and December. 
 
 6. I N the I (land of del Ma^o, one of the hit 
 Ifles in the Azores^ there blows a vehement Wind 
 in the end of Juguji from the South, with much 
 Kain, which moiftens the Land, that is naturally 
 dry, and then the Grafs begins to fpring up ; 
 which fattens a great many Goats there, againfl: 
 the end of December. 
 
 7. I N the Kingdom of CoNgo in Africa, from 
 the middle of March to September \ when the Win- 
 ter reigns there, the North, Weft, and North- Weft 
 Winds blow, or others intermedite, which force 
 the Clouds together on the Tops of the Moun- 
 tains, and caufe a dark Air with Rain ('fee the 
 next Propofition) : but from September to March 
 the Winds are contrary, being South, Eaft, and 
 South-Eaft, and others intermediate. We have 
 taken thefe differences of the anniverfary and Jiated 
 Winds from the Obfervations of Sailors, who call 
 tlieni Monfoons when they blow for a great way 
 on the Sea. We would now treat of their Caufes ; 
 but we want to know the Mountains, Snows, and 
 the Times of their dilTolving, and other things ; nor 
 are the Obfervations of Sailors fo exadl as to de- 
 ferve an accurate Enquiry into their Caufes. 
 
 ^ THE Monfoons that are moft famous are; i. 
 Thofe in the Indian Ocean, between Africa and 
 
 India^
 
 Chap. 21. of U72iverfal Geography. ^09 
 
 India ; and at the Molucca Ifles they begin in Ja- 
 tjuar'j^ and blow to the Weft fix Months to the 
 beginning of June j and in September and Augufl 
 it begins to blow to the Eaft j and in Jiine^ 7^6'» 
 and Augujt, there is a Change of the Monfoons and 
 raging Storms from the North. But when we 
 fpeak of Winds blowing to the Eaft or Weft, we 
 underftand all the collateral Points, 
 
 2. BUT at the Shores, the eaftern Monfoon va- 
 ries much ', fo that only from January to the end 
 of March or the middle of May, the Ships that 
 go to Perfia, Arabia, Mecca, and Africa, only 
 fail when they come from India on this Side the 
 Gate, or the Shore of Malabar ; for the Storms 
 rage in the end of May, and all June, July, and 
 Augufi, with a North Wind often, or a raging 
 North-Eaft Wind ; therefore no Ships go from 
 India on this Side the Gate in thefe Months. But 
 on the Shore of India, beyond the Gate, or the 
 Eaft Shore, or the Shore of Cormandel, they know 
 nothing of thefe Storms. They fail in the Month 
 of September from Ceylon and Java, and other 
 Ifles there to the Molucca Ifles ; for then the Weft 
 Monfoons begin, that hinder the general Eaft Wind : 
 but when they come to the fifteenth Degree of 
 South Latitude, from the Equator, the weftern 
 Monfoon is fenfible in the Lidian Ocean, and a 
 general South- Eaft Wind fills the Sails- 
 
 3. FROM Cochin to Malacca, i. e. from Weft 
 to Eaft, they begin to fail in March 1, for then the 
 Weft Monfoons begin there, or rather the North- 
 Weft Wind blows often. 
 
 4. I N the Kingdom of Guzarat, i. e. in India 
 on this Side of the Gate, the North- Weft Winds 
 blow the half of the Year from March to Sep- 
 tember, and the other half Year the South Winds, 
 and that without much hindrance by other Winds. 
 
 3 5. THE
 
 5 1 o "The Ahjolute Part S e c T. VI. 
 
 5. THE Butch fail from Java^ for the moil 
 Part, in the Months of January and February, when 
 they return to Europe ; they fail then with an Eaft 
 Wind to the eighteenth Degree of South Latitude. 
 Here the South Wind begins, or the South- Eaft 
 with which they fail to Si Helena. 
 
 6. T H O' in the Indian Ocean, from January 
 to June, the Monfoons are Eaft, and from Auguft 
 to January Weft -, yet, in feveral Parts, when you 
 are to fail from one Place to another, there are 
 fome fet times that are counted beft ; becaufe the 
 collateral Winds blow more or lefs at thofe times, 
 or other Winds do more or lefs mix themfelves 
 with thefe. Therefore they take one Monfoon 
 when they are to fail from Cochin to Malacca •, and 
 another when they are to go from Malacca to 
 Maccou, a Port-Town in China •, and another when 
 from Mciccou to Japan. 
 
 7. AT the Ifle of Banda the weftern Winds 
 ceafe at the end of March ; and at the end of 
 April the Winds are variable, and become calm 
 on a fudden ; and in May the vehement Eaft 
 Winds begin, with Rain. 
 
 8. AT the Ifle of Ceylon, near the Cape of Ponto- 
 Gallo, on the fourteenth of March there is firft a 
 weftern Wind, then a conftant South- Weft from 
 the end of March to the firft of OUoher \ then the 
 North-Eaft Wind begins, and blows to the middle 
 of March: but fometimes the Monfoons come 
 fooner or later by ten Days or more. 
 
 9. I N the Voyage from Mozambique, in Africa, 
 to Goa, in India, the South Winds rule all the way 
 to the Equator, in the Month of May and June, 
 but from the Equator to Goa the South and South- 
 Weft Winds prevail in the Months of July and 
 Auguft, and the following Months. 
 
 10. I C^ the thirty-fifth Degree of the Eleva- 
 tion of the Meridian that pafles thro', ^rijlan de 
 
 Conhcif
 
 C H A p. 2 I . of Univerfal Geography, c 1 1 
 
 Cofiha, the Weft Wind rages in the Month of 
 May, at New- Moon. 
 
 11. IN two Degrees thirty Minutes North La- 
 titude, the South Wind prevails on the Sea leventy 
 Miles from Guinea, from the twenty-fifth of April 
 to the fifth of Ma'^ (but not on the Shore, or 
 Guinea itfelf) ; and after the fifth of M?)' the famq 
 Wind is felt at three, and three Degrees and thirty 
 Minutes Latitude. 
 
 12. AT the irie of Aladagafcar the North and 
 North- Weft Winds prevail from the fifteenth of 
 April to the laft of May ; but in February and 
 March the Winds blow from Eaft and South. 
 
 13. FROM Madagafcar to the Cape of Good' 
 Hope, both thro' Sea and Land, the North Wind 
 and the ColJateral to the Eaft, blow continually 
 in the Months of March and April; fo that *tis 
 counted a wonder if a South or South- Eaft Wind 
 ftiould blow then for two Days. 
 
 14. THE South Wind is vehement in the 
 Bay of Bengal after the twentieth of April ; and 
 after that the South- Weft and North Winds are 
 ftrong. 
 
 1-5. THE South and South- Weft Winds, and 
 oftentimes the South-Eaft, ferve for failing from 
 Malacca to Maccou, in the Months of July, 05lo- 
 her, November, and Decef?iber ; but in June, and the 
 beginning of 7/^/7 the Weft Winds rage about Ma- 
 lacca in the Sea oi China. 
 
 16. T H E Wind by which they fail from Java 
 to China, i. e. from Weft to Eaft, begins with the 
 Month of May. 
 
 17. THE Wind by which they fail from China 
 to Japan, i. e. from Weft to Eaft, prevails in the 
 Months oiJu7ie and July ; which is a South- Weft 
 W^ind i tho* oftentimes there comes in a North 
 Wind, and others collateral to it eaftward ; and 
 that chiefly in the Day-time: but in the Night 
 
 there
 
 512 Tlje Ahfolute Fart S e c t. V L 
 
 there comes in a South-Eaft Wind, and South by 
 Eall. 
 
 1 8. BUT when they fail from Japan to Maccou, 
 i. e. from Eaft to Welt, in February and Marchy 
 there is an Ealt and North- Eaft Wind ; but thcfe do 
 not prevail on the Sea, but at the Shores of China % 
 which they that fail from Japan find in their Voyage. 
 
 19. WHEN they fail from the Philippines^ or 
 China f to Aquapulco^ a Port in New Spain, there is a 
 Weft Wind in June, Ju^'jt and Augiijl -y tho' very 
 weak, except at Full Moon -, but they are moftly 
 Souch-Weft Winds. But they keep from the Tornd 
 Zone near the northern Shores of Afnerica to fhun 
 the general Eaft Wind, tho' 'tis but weak then -, 
 for 'tis to be known in general, that the weftern 
 Winds are more weak than theeaftern, becaufe the 
 former are hindered, and the latter promoted by 
 the general Wind. 
 
 20. 1 N the Sea of China the South and South- 
 Weft Monfoon is in July, Augujl, and 05lober -, but 
 thefe Winds turn to the Eaft: for they never turn 
 immediately to the South, but firft they blow fomc 
 Days to the Eaft, and then to the South ; tho' 
 the North- Eaft Wind is fometimes changed, on 
 a fudden, to the South-Weft, and fometimes from 
 the North to the South immediately, which is very 
 common here. 
 
 T 11 U S the more conftant anniverfary Winds 
 are found at Sea ; both thofe that are lefs conftant, 
 and thofe alfo that are anniverfiry, as well on the 
 Shore as Places near the Shores. 
 
 PROPOSITION IV. 
 
 The Etefian or anniverfary Winds in Greece, proceed 
 from the Rains and Snows melted on the Mountains. 
 
 THE Grecians obfcrved two Kinds of ftated 
 Winds each Year, which they called Etefia: -, i. The 
 
 Summer,
 
 C H A p. 2 I. of Ufiiverfal Geography. ^ \ ^ 
 
 Summer, or Dog-winds^ which were called Etejix 
 in general j becaule they were more ftrong and I'cn- 
 fible. 2. The IVmter-lVindi, which they called Chs- 
 lidonian or Ornithian. 
 
 THE Etefian Dog-'windi are from the North, 
 Writers differ about the time of their begin- 
 ning. Arijlotle^ having told us they blow af- 
 ter the Summer Solllice, adds nothing of the 
 exa6\: time •, which was a great negled: : and the 
 more becaufe when he fpoke of the Ornitbics he 
 omitted both the time and the part they came 
 from. Moreover, they who have marked the time 
 of thefe Eteficdy have made their forerunners, which 
 is about eight Days fooner, to begin when the 
 Dog-Jlar rifeth, on the fixch, or fifteenth of July ; 
 and to continue forty of the Dog-dap, and fo end 
 with Augujl : tho' others extend them to the middle 
 of September. They blow only in the Daytime : nor 
 do they come early in the iVIorning -, which made 
 the Seamen call them delicate and lazy. 
 
 THE Caufe of thefe Winds is no doubt the 
 melting of the Snow on the northern Mountains, by 
 the Heat of the Sun, which is then at the greateft ; 
 having for feveral Months fhone on thole Moun- 
 tains, without fetting. And with this Caufe it a- 
 grees well that they ceafe at Night ; becaufe then 
 the melting ceafes, or is fmaller than to make a Wind, 
 the Sun being then near or under the Horizon. 
 
 THIS fame northerly Dog-'wind, not only in 
 Greece^ but alfo in Tbracia, Macedonia^ the /Egean 
 Sea, and it's Ifles, (which I know are fometimes 
 all included in the Name of Greece) yea, in Egypt 
 alfo, and Africa, and probably the lame that vv* 
 fliid in the former Propofitions, did blow in the 
 Kingdom of Congo^ beyond the Equator, between 
 Mirch and September \ we fay the Hime Dog-wifid, 
 ^c. are the fame with the Eteft^e of the GreciafUy 
 or come from the fame Caufe. And likewife that 
 
 VOL. I. LI North
 
 5 1 4 ^he Ahjolute Fart S e c t . V I. 
 
 North Wind which we faid blows in tlie kingdom 
 of Guzarat^ from March to September^ proceeds from 
 the melted Snow on the Mountains of /Ifia ; which 
 they called the Sannatian Mountains, and the 
 Earth's Belt ; and therefore we reckoned it among 
 the Monfoom. 
 
 THE fecond anniverHiry Wind of the Grecians ^ 
 is the Chelidonian^ or the Bird^s Wind \ which they 
 tell us began alter the W^ inter : but they do not tell 
 us the Day when it began. Thefe are South Winds 
 contrary to the Dog-winds^ very weak, and likewife 
 inconftant, and of lefs Duration -, which makes the 
 Sea pleadmt, and fignifies the coming of the Win- 
 ter Birds, which they call Chelidom. Arijlotle fays 
 they blow by turns to the middle of Summer, 'till 
 the eafterly Winds, or Dog-ivinds^ from the North, 
 begin, but very weakly. 
 
 THEIR Caufe is alfo the melting of the 
 Snow on the Mountains of the Moon in Mono- 
 niotapay which are called fnowy by the Portuguefe : 
 which Snow the Sun melts and rarifies the Air 
 thereby \ becaufe 'tis Summer there, when 'tis Win- 
 ter with us and in Greece ; the Sun then being in the 
 South part of the Ecliptic. And this Wind is alfo 
 found in the Kingdom, of Cor/go, in Egypt, and in 
 the uEgean Sea ; and the like in Guzarat^ but for 
 many more Months : for it begins in Congo and 
 Cuzarat in September^ and blows 'till March. 
 
 I T was the yearly Wind among the Grecians ; 
 which they called Ornithias, or the Bird-Wind ; and 
 they faid it continued after the vernal Equinox, 
 while the Sun was mounting to our Zenith. 
 
 PRO P OS I'TION V. 
 
 Wh^ thefe 'Ext(\^.n Winds do not blow iu Italy, Ger- 
 many, PrufTia, and other kingdofnsyfinci they are 
 nearer the Mountains in the Norths from which the 
 Etefian Winds of the Grecians hlowy as we faid. 
 
 THIS
 
 C H A p. 2 r . of Ufiiverfdl Geography. 5 1 ^ 
 
 THIS Queftion hath no Tmall difficulty in it ; 
 and I could wifh to hive more accurate Oblcrva- 
 tions o:; this Head, to determine what Winds then 
 blow in tht leveral Places \ or if they return again 
 each Year i lor I remember to have read, that in 
 Aq^uitania^ a part of France, there is an anniver- 
 fary Wind. 
 
 BUT if any thing be faid to this Queftion, thefc 
 Particulars feem proper •, i. In our Di:'^.D^v5 the 
 North W^ind blows, which carnot be denied. 2. *T'is 
 not fo conftant, nor doth it return every Year ; per- 
 haps it may not be felt, becaufe of the frequent blow- 
 ings of other Winds. 3. Itmight be fliid ; the Moun- 
 tain whereon the Snow begins lirft to meJt, is fituated 
 dire6lly towards Greece •, and therefore the firft Dog- 
 JVind is carried thither •, and the Vapours from the 
 Snow on the reft of the Mountain is carried thither •, 
 becaufe they then find an open Paftage that way : 
 but thefe extemporary Thoughts I fhall lay afide, io 
 foon as I find better from better Obfer vat ions. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. 
 
 Some IVindi are proper^ and almoji perpetual, to fome 
 Place or Tra^ of the Earth, othen inconjiant. 
 
 THERE are few Places where a Wind blows 
 always •, the principal are thefe : viz, i. Places un- 
 der the Torrid Zone, efpecially the Parts of the Pa- 
 cific and Ethiopic Sea in that Zone have a perpetual 
 Wind from the Eaft, or fome collateral Point, which 
 we called. Prop. 11, a general Wind. And this 
 Wind is not fo much to be termed proper as com- 
 mon, or belonging to many Places ; for 'tis by ac- 
 cident that 'tis not felt in all Places-, 'viz. becaufe 
 other Winds blow more ftrongly. The Caufe of 
 it is given in the forecited Place. 
 
 2. ON the Shores of the Kingdom of Peru and 
 Parts of Chili, and the adjacent Places on the Sea, 
 
 "LI 2 the
 
 5 1 6 'Tbe Ahfolute Tart S e c t. VI. 
 
 the Wind is almofl: perpetually South, or in fome 
 collateral Point to the Weft. It begins at the forty 
 fixth Degree of Latitude, and blows to Panama at 
 the American Ifthmus, and makes the Siiips (load- 
 ed with Gold and Silver) come from hima to Ma- 
 nama, in a few Days •, tho' it takes a great many 
 Days to return : but in Places remote from the 
 Sea this Wind doth not blow. 'Tis hard to give 
 the caufe of this Wind *, becaufe the South-Land, 
 from which it fecms to blow, is not yet known to 
 us ; yet I luppole there are found therein Moun- 
 tains continually covered with Snow, from the 
 conftant meltings whereof thefe Winds blow. But 
 I would not here prepoffefs the Reader's Judg- 
 ment with my Conjeftures. Perhaps the Snows 
 that are found at the Streights of Magellan^ all the 
 Year, are the Caufe of this Wind. But yet thefe 
 Mountains lie from the South eaflward, and the 
 Winds blow from a Point declining from the South 
 weftward. Let us then leave this 'till we have a 
 better knowledge of the South Continent. 
 
 3, AT the Shores of the Magellanic Land, or 
 del Fuogo^ about the Streights of La Maire, there 
 blow almoft conftant Weft Winds ftrongly ; fo 
 that the Trees decline from a perpendicular to the 
 Eaft. Nor is there any Place where thefe Weft: 
 Winds blow fo much. But on the other Side of the 
 Streights of La Maire, the South Wind blows on 
 the Shores of the South Land. I can give no other 
 reafon for it than the melting of the Snow, and the 
 breaking of the Clouds in the South Land ; which 
 extends itfelf on the Weft Side of that Streight, 
 from South to North. Thefe Things are doubtful, 
 and to be more diligently enquired into. 
 •r 4. ON the Shore of Malabar, in Ltdia, the 
 North and North- Weft Wind blows almoft the 
 whole Year. The Caufe is the melting of the 
 Snow on the Mountains of Sarmatia. in /ifia^ as thofe 
 
 of
 
 C H A p. 2 I . of JJniverfal Geography. 5 1 7 
 
 of" Imaus, Caucafus^ or from the Clouds on otacf 
 Mountains in /Jfia that prefs the Air below. 
 
 5. ON the Sea, nQ2LT Guinea^ the North-Weft 
 Wind blows frequently ; but further off the North- 
 Eaft Wind blows. 
 
 6. HALF way between Japan and Liampo^ 
 a Sea-Port Town in China, the Weft Winds blow 
 ail the way to Japan •, thefc blow there in November 
 and December. 
 
 7. A T the Idand Guoton, not far from the 
 IQand dos Cavallos, the South Wind is frequent 
 on the Chinefe Sea •, whilft on the adjacent Seas the 
 North Wind rages. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIL 
 
 Thofe JVinds that blow for fome Hours ever^ D^y-» ^f^ 
 form Places, at a certain Time of the 7'ear, belong to 
 the -periodical or fated IFinds. 
 
 THEY are found to be twofold -, but only in 
 fome Places near the Sea. Some blow from the in- 
 land Parts to the Sea ; others again from the Sea to 
 the Land : the former is called a Land- Wind, the 
 latter a Sea- Wind. 
 
 I. ON the Malabar Shore in the Summer-time, 
 from September to April, the Land-Winds blow 
 from twelve at Night to twelve at Noon, which 
 are Eaft Winds •, Ror are they fenfible beyond ten 
 Miles on the Sea -, and from twelve at Day to twelve 
 at Night the Sea- Wind blows from the Weft, but 
 fo weakly that Ships have little Benefit from it. 
 The former Eaft Winds I fuppofe come partly from 
 the general Wind, and partly from the Clouds on 
 the Mountains of the Gate : but the Caufe of the 
 latter is the diffolving of the Clouds by the weftern 
 Sun -, which Clouds were forced together by the 
 Eaft Winds. Thefe are my ConjecT:ures j but in 
 other Months the North W^ind rages there, as alio 
 
 L i 3 the
 
 5 1 8 I'he Ahjolute Fart S e c T. VI. 
 
 the Eaft, North-Eaft ; nor are the gentle Land 
 and Sea-Winds fcnfible there, lor the frequent 
 Storms. 
 
 2. AT th^ T own oi' Mafidipa I a}i^ on the Shore 
 of Coromandel^ the Land-Winds be^in to blow 
 on the firft Day of June ; they lad only fourteen 
 Days, and then it is the Ships go from thence. 
 But thefe are rather to be referred to the Mon- 
 foom i for fo far as 1 underftand from Sailors Ac- 
 counts, the Land- Winds are conftant on thofeDays j, 
 nor do the Sea- Winds come after them. 
 
 3« GN the American Shpre oi^ New- Spain the 
 Land- Winds blow to the Pacific Sea at twelve at 
 Night -, but the Sea- Winds in the Day. 
 
 4. I N the Kingdom of Congo, and the Provinces 
 of Lopo Confaho, the Land-Winds blow from the 
 Evening to the Morning, when the Sea-Winds 
 bt'gin to blow and mitigate the Heat of the Day. 
 
 5. A S to the Eaft Winds which blow before and 
 at Sun-rifing, every Day, in all Places, efpecially 
 at Sea, when other Winds blpw not, particularly 
 in Brafil where they blow every Day in the Morn- 
 ing ; the Caufe is plain : for either they are a 
 Part of the general Wind, or elfe the Sun rarifies 
 the grofs Particles of the Air that were condenfed 
 by Night. 
 
 6. THE Etefian Winds of the Grecians, or 
 their Chelidonian Winds, come among thefe ^(o- 
 tidian Winds. 
 
 7. O N the Shore of Camhaya a Varella, at Pulo- 
 Catte, the Land and Sea- Breezes fucceed one ano- 
 ther daily, from the twenty- eighth of July to the 
 fourth of Augujt •, for then the Monfoom ceafe, 
 and there is a perfeft Calm for a while. The 
 j^and- Breezes are from the Weft and North- Weft. 
 But the Sea-Breezes are from the Eaft, and the 
 collateral Points which turn to the North ; and 
 dien turn back to the South » when *cis calm 'till the 
 
 / Land 
 
 ;
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of Umverfal Geography. 5 1 9 
 
 Land-Breezes come, which are not iek on the Se;i 
 above two Miles from the Shore. Thel'e Land and 
 Sea-Breezes are aifo found at Havanua in America. 
 
 PROPOSITION VIIL 
 
 ^e nearer ive come to the Equator from the Ar5fic 
 Pole, the northern IVinds are the zveaker ; and be- 
 yond the Equator the South IVinds are Jlrong, and 
 cold and dry, efpecially in Chili and Peru. 
 
 THE Caufe of both is the fame : becaufe they 
 come from the northern and fouthern Places : yet 
 there are found South Winds in the northern, and 
 North Winds in the fouthern Parts. 
 
 PROPOSITION IX. 
 
 It appears from what hath been faid, that there are 
 four different kinds of IVinds. 
 
 1. THE Common, which blow in all Places, 
 and all times ; except hindered by others, as the 
 General one. 
 
 2. THE Proper, or fuch as blow at all times, 
 but only in a certain Place or Tra6t of the Earth, 
 
 3. THOSE which blow in feveral Places, but not 
 at all Times, as the Monfoons, or ^loiidian Winds. 
 
 4. THOSE which blow neither at all Times, 
 nor in very many Places. 
 
 PROPOSITION X. 
 
 Some JVinds are fudden, andjlrong, but do not laft long ; 
 fuch are Hurricanes., with, and without Lightening ; 
 Whirlwinds, Storm from the IVater, and frotn the 
 Air. Thefe are in fome Places anniverfary : and 
 fome are only frequent in certain Places at Sea. 
 
 THE Wind called Pr^7?fr ; is a ftrongWind 
 
 that breaks out with Lightening and Flame. Such 
 
 L I 4 ^"^^^^^ 
 
 *-
 
 520 ■ lie Abjolute Fart Sect. VI, 
 
 ^eldom happen, and fcarce without the Ecnephia ; 
 Seneca calls Prejler a Whirlwind with Lightening. 
 THE Ecnephia is a ftrong and fudden Wind 
 that breaks out from fomc Cloud ; which is frequent 
 in the Ethiopic Sea, between B^afil and South A- 
 frica •, efpecially at the Cape of Good-Hope, and on 
 the other Side of Jfrica, at Terra de Natal, and 
 2X Guinea, under the Equator. Tho. Portuguefe q?A\ 
 them Travados, the Latins Procella, but the Greek 
 W^ord Ecnephia is beft : they are moft frequent in 
 certain Places, and in certain Months of the Year. 
 A little Cloud, and fometimes feveral of theni 
 bl^ck or blackifh, are plainly feen by Sailors tq 
 go together, and increafe even in a clear Sky, be- 
 tore the Wind breaks out -, ar.d when they firft fee 
 them, they lliould gather in their Sails, and prepare 
 their Ship againft the raging Wind that is at hand ; 
 but before the Portuguefe knew this Prognoftic of 
 Wind they loft feveral Ships, being the firif that had 
 failed the Ethiopic Ocean. For w:hen India was 
 made known by Gamma, the King of Portugal {tut 
 a greater Fleet of Ships, of large Bottoms, to the 
 Number of thirteen, under Caprali in the Year 
 1500; which* was the firft Fleet fent to Brafil, 
 with great Joy to the Portuguefe. 
 
 WHEN they had waited there the Month of 
 April, they failed in Maj towards the Cape of 
 Good-Hope, with raging Storms •, and tho' they faw 
 the Signs tliereof, yet they knew not the Tempeft 
 that was to follow -, which Maffcus thus defcribcs. 
 ' THEY made a long Run of almoft two 
 ' hundred Leagues from Brafil towards the Cape 
 
 * ('which is about one thoufand German Miles) the 
 
 * Ocean and Winds all the wh^le raging. FJii,ving 
 ' entered that Voyage in Maj, with more Bold- 
 
 * nefs than Succefs, a fiery Comet appeared con- 
 " tinually to the tenth Day, with a fearful Afpe6t ; 
 ^ and the Sea and Heavens often changing ; the 
 
 ' black
 
 Chap. 21. ofXJniverfal Geography. 52 1 
 
 * black and foul Clouds having gathered together 
 
 * in the North into a round Form, and the Wind 
 ' feeming to come all againft them as it were by 
 
 * Reflexion: the Sea being faint in deceitful Calms. 
 ' The Sailors not knowing the Tempefts that ufed 
 ' to rage there, fpread their Sails to gather the 
 ' Wind •, when on a fudden the W'ind broke out 
 ^ from the Clouds in the North on four Ships 
 ' whofe Tackling was not in order to be handed, 
 ' and overfet them in a Moment ; and tho* the reft 
 ' were looking on, yet not one of a great many 
 
 * could be faved from death, except a few that 
 ' had Oars or broken Pieces of Sails thrown to 
 ' them. The North Wind continuing, the Sea 
 •^ rofe fometimes high as it were to the Stars ; and 
 ' again fell low to the Bottom ; the Sea looked 
 
 * black in the Day-time, and fiery in the Night, 
 
 * which Storm held them twenty D.iys/ So far 
 Maffeus. 
 
 THE Cape of Gcod-^Hope is difaftrous for fuch 
 Storms from the Clouds. 
 
 NOT far from the Shore there is a high 
 Mountain, broad on the Top like a Table, from 
 which great Storms often proceed -, and this prog- 
 nofticates ftrangely. For when the Sky is clear, 
 and the Sea fmooth, there is a little Cloud feen on 
 the Top of the Hill, which appears at firft no 
 larger than a Hazel Nut, and tb.en like a Walnut 
 which the Duuh call the Ox-eye y and then covers 
 the whole Plain above, and the Dutch compare 
 it to a Table fpread wit.h all kinds of Meat on 
 it : then the Storms begin to blow from the Top 
 of the Mountain with fuch Force that overwhelms 
 all Ships that are not on their Guard, or have 
 their Sails out ; but Sailors are now more wary, 
 and when they fee the Ox-eye, they run immedi- 
 ately from the Shore as much as they can, and ga* 
 ther in their Sails, and do what is proper i;o de- 
 
 knd
 
 522 The Ahfiliite Fart Sect. VI^ 
 
 lend their Ships : nor does this Sign ever fail. 
 The like S[orm rages at "^erra - I^latal^ having 
 ti:ke Ox-e^e there alio \ and by v.. feveral Ships have 
 been loft •, and likewil'e in th- -vhole Trad, between 
 that and the Cape of Good-Hope. There is alfo 
 in Dauph'nd m France^ nor f r ficm Vicnne^ a high 
 Mouniain, on whofe T^p there is a Lake, from 
 which all the Srorms thereabouts arife ; on the Top 
 of it there is a little Cloud or Exhalation, which 
 portends Thunder and Rain. 
 
 O N the Sea under the Equator, between Ame- 
 rica and Africay and near the Equator j there are 
 irequently fuch Siorms-, efpecially in thofe Mondis 
 in which there are few or no conliant Winds blow- 
 ing -, and that almoft thro' the whole Year, efpe- 
 cially in Aprily May^ and June, (in otlicr Months, 
 *tis more rare) and they are very remarkable on 
 the Shores of Guinea. They break forth three or four 
 limes in, a Day, and ceafe on a fudden, varying ordi- 
 narily every half Hour ; but they are moft vehement 
 at firft. They break out from the black and filthy 
 Clouds that appear when the Sky is clear and the Sea 
 calm, by which the Seamen know they are approach- 
 ing. And with their help it is that Sailors get beyond 
 the Equator ; for other conftant Winds are often 
 wanting, efpecially in thofe three Months, for they 
 do not hinder the Ships failing except at the firft 
 breaking out. 
 
 B U T in that part of the Sea which is next the 
 Kingdom of Loango^ in Africa^ the Storm is often in 
 the Months of January^ February., Mareh, Aprils 
 and in different Places of Africa at other times. 
 
 THUS like wife at a Promontory in Africa^ called 
 now Guardafu, not far from the Mouth of the Red-^ 
 Sea, there rages in the Month of May every Year a 
 North Wind, and the Ecnephias moft vehemently. 
 
 FOR 'tis obfervable, that as fome Winds lefs 
 
 fcircible blow yearly s fo there are Storms and Tem- 
 
 3 pefts
 
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of JJnherfal Geography, 
 
 pefts anniverfary in fome Places : and with iuch a 
 Storm, not far from that Cape, did Sodreus, the 
 Portuguefe Conful, perifh in the Year 1505 •, and 
 tho* he was ddmoniflied by the Africans^ yet he 
 would not hearken to it. 
 
 BUT in the Entrance of the /fr^^w« Gulph, 
 and in AraVia^ and Ethiopia, there is a peculiar and 
 wonderful Storm happens. A thick black Cloud, 
 mixed with fiery little Clouds (which are terrible to 
 behold j, brings Darknefs in the Day, and on a fudden 
 there breaks out a Storm, which is foon over ; but 
 it throws fuch a quantity of red Sand on the Land 
 and Sea, that the Arabians fay it fometimes buries 
 whole Companies of Merchants and Travellers, with 
 their Camels, viz. the Caravans that pafs there once 
 or twice a Year, being gathered (out of all parts of 
 Afia) in 5)n^, they arrive thence from Aleppo to 
 Arabia^ to the Number of fix thoufand Men, who 
 dare not travel by themfelves, becaule of the Rob- 
 beries by the Arabians, and other Dangers, as they 
 do from India to China and Tartary : and from 
 hence 'tis they fay the Arabian and Egyptian Mum- 
 my comes ; their Bbdies being dried in the Sand 
 with the Sun's Heat. This Storm comes from the 
 North to which the Red-Sea is extended ; and there- 
 fore 'tis likely, there being a great quantity of red 
 Sand on that Shore, that 'tis carried up by the Wind, 
 which caufes a red Colour to appear among the 
 Clouds, and afterwards talis down. 
 
 AND 'tis alfo probable, that there is fuch a 
 Storm of Sand in Libya, becaufe of the great Heaps 
 of that Sand there ; which the Antients knew when 
 they wrote of the difficult accefs to the Temple of 
 Jupiter Hammon in Uhya : nor were they without the 
 knowledge of the way how Mummy was made. In 
 Guzarai, a Kingdom in /«^7,3, Clouds of Sand, or 
 a vaft quantity of fmall Dull raifed by the Sun's 
 
 Heat,
 
 524 TJje Abfolute Part Sect. VI. 
 
 Heat, doth often opprefs Travellers j as is written 
 by 'Tivift a Dutchman^ who lived long there, 
 
 A S to the Caufe of thefe Storms, 'tis plain they 
 come trom the Clouds, and may be formed two 
 ways. f. If a Cloud falls down, by it's Weight it 
 will move the Air under it, as a Sheet, or Sail, let 
 flill ; and hence 'tis the fmaller the Cloud appears the 
 Storm after it is the greater •, for the Cloud, or Ox- 
 ey^ is then high, and appears fmall, and falling 
 down, moves the Air with greater force. 2. If ful- 
 phureoiis Spirits inclofed in the Cloud, break out 
 on a fudden in one Place, other Parts being fhut 
 as the Wind breaks out of a Bottle, when the 
 Liquor in it is heated ; but the firft Caufe feems the 
 truer. 
 
 PROPOSITION XT. 
 
 Exhydrias is a Wind that breaks out of a Cloud with 
 a great quantity of Water. 
 
 THIS differs but little from an Ecnephias-, on- 
 ly the Cloud, from which it feems to break out, is 
 now condenfed to Water, and born up fo long by 
 the Clouds about it, and perhaps forced together 
 by the Winds, 'till at laft it falls down, and beats 
 the Air below it, which caufes the Wind : but thefe 
 are rare, and the Ecnephias itfelf hath often Showers 
 attending it, and therefore the Difference is only in 
 Degree -, except that the Exhydrias for the moll part 
 comes ftrait down. 
 
 PROP O S Il'ION XIL 
 
 J Typhon is aflrongfwift Wind that blows from all 
 Points^ wandring about all quarters, and generally 
 comes from above. 
 
 THIS is frequent in the Oriental Sea, efpecially in 
 the Sea at Siam^ Cbina^ Rndjapan, and between Ma* 
 ,^:(a and Japan. It breaks out violently almoft from 
 
 the
 
 C H A p. 2 1 . of U?iiverjal Geography. r 2 - 
 
 the weftern Point, and turning round the Horizon 
 with a rapid Force performs the Revolution in twen- 
 ty Hours; ftill growing ftronger and ftrongcr ; 
 raifing thole Seas with it's ftrong whirHng about, to 
 a great Height, every tenth Wave rifing above the 
 relt, which dafhing againft one another with great 
 force, the Seamen lofe all hopes of their Lives •, for 
 which, and other Storms, failing from India to 
 Japan is very dangerous j fo that if one Ship of three 
 get fafe there, 'tis counted to be a profperous Voyage, 
 The Typhon rages moft in Summer, and more than 
 can be conceived by thofe who have not feen it •, fo that 
 'tis no wonder the Ribs of the ftrongeft and largeft 
 Ships fhould be loofened : you would think the Hea- 
 vens and Earth were turned to their antient Chaos. 
 
 I T rages not only at Sea, but on Land, and over- 
 turns Houfes, and pulls up Trees by the Roots, and 
 carries great Ships a quarter of a Mile from the Sea. 
 
 I T feldom lafts above fix Hours. In the Indian 
 Ocean the Sea is at firft plain : but there come after- 
 wards dreadful Waves. Thus about the Town of 
 ^rbeil in Perfta, in the Months of June and July^ k 
 raifes a great deal of Duft every Day at twelve of 
 the Clock -, and lafts one Hour. 
 
 THE Caufeofit, no doubt, is that the Wind rufh- 
 ing to a certain Point, isobftrucfted, and returns on it 
 felf, and is thus turned round, as we fee in W^attr 
 that turns round about in a Vortex, when it meets 
 v/ith an Obftacle ; or it may come from furious 
 Winds meeting one another, which renders the Sea 
 plain, and dafhes againft the Ships between them. 
 If this Wind blow from above, 'tis called Cata-gis. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIIL 
 
 Whether fome Winds came from the Earth, either frojn 
 the Land or IFater. 
 
 W E think this is very cafy to conceive ; for fee- 
 ing there are in the -Earth, and at the Sea Bottom, fe- 
 
 vera
 
 526 l^he AhjUute Fart Sect. VI. 
 
 veral Cavities ; there may be in them fulphureous 
 Spirits, which may break out violently, efpecially 
 if a little hindered at firft : and if much hindered 
 this caufes an Earthquake, *till at laft they make way 
 for themfelves. Thus in the Maurice Ifies there of- 
 ten breaks out a Smoak from the Earth ; and alfo 
 from fome Caverns. In Japan there is a Fountain 
 that breaks out at certain Hours of the Day, with 
 sreat Force and Noife. 
 
 BUT I do not remember to have read of any 
 Wind coming out of the Sea. 
 
 PROPOSITION XIV. 
 
 Whether afr^ Wind arifafrom the Tides, or the flowing 
 of Rivers. 
 
 EXPERIENCE teftifies, that in thofe Places 
 where the Tides are fenfible, when the Sea flows, the 
 Wind doth for the moll part blow from the Sea, 
 when other Winds ceafe •, and therefore it feems the 
 Air that is contiguous to the Water flows with it to 
 the fame Point : but 'tis to be confidered, whether 
 that happens confl:antly. And I believe there may be 
 another caufe given of that Wind, viz. That the Air 
 is driven from it*s Place by the Water that flows in 
 on the Land : for a fmall matter moves the Air •, and 
 thus *tis thought the Air moves with the Rivers 
 that run fwiftly, as the Zaire and Rhine. 
 
 PROPOSITION XV. 
 
 Why the fiery Appearances Ca^ov^ Pollux, and Hek- 
 na, and what they call Jack in the Lantern, ap- 
 pear amidfl Storms. 
 
 NOT one, but a great many, are feen on the 
 Mails of Ships, wandring with an uncertain Motion, 
 tho* they leem fometimes to cleave ciole to the Sails 
 and Malls •, but they frequently leap up and down, 
 with intermifTion, affording an oblcure Flame, like 
 
 that
 
 Chap. 21. of U?nverfal Geography. 527 
 
 that of a Candle burning faintly. If five of them are 
 feen together, which the Portuguefe call the Virgin 
 Marfs Crowny they take it for a iure Sign of the 
 Storm being foon over. Their Caufe is fome fulphu- 
 reous and bituminous Matter beat down by the Mo- 
 tion of the Air above, and gathering together is kind- 
 led by the Agitation of the Air; as Butter is gathered 
 together by the Agitation of the Cream. And from 
 this Appearance we gather, that thefe Storms come 
 from fuiphureous Spirits that rarify the Air, and 
 put it into a Motion. 
 
 PROPOSITION XVI. 
 
 IVhy Calms are fo frequent in the Sea near Guinea, and 
 under the Equator ^ in the Atlantic Ocean between 
 America and Africa. 
 
 THIS is a Phaenomenon concerning the Winds, 
 of no fmall difficulty ; that at Guinea^ which is two 
 Degrees from the Equator, and under the Equator 
 itfelf, there Ihould be almoft a conftant Calm, eipe- 
 cially in April^ Ma-^^ and June^ where there are no 
 Monfoons, and when the like is not found in otliQr 
 Places fituated under the Equator. There is in- 
 deed an Ecnephias pretty frequent there fometimes 5 
 and is defired by Seamen, becaufe by the fcelp there- 
 of they get beyond the Equator : for fometimes go- 
 ing from Europe to India^ they are kept a whole 
 Month under the Equator : but they take care to keep 
 from the Coafl of Guinea ; and without lofs of time 
 fail towards the Coaft of Brazil, to avoid being be- 
 calmed ; which hath kept fome Ships three Months 
 near the Shore. I have not yet found the reafon of ic, 
 except it may be faid, that there is no Snow found 
 on the Mountains of Africa, between Guinea and 
 Barbary ; which may caufe a conflant Wind. 
 
 PRO^
 
 528 Tlje Abjolute Fart, &c. S e c T. Vf 
 
 PRO po s irio N XVIL 
 
 In fome Countries the Storms are anniverfary. 
 
 "W E gave Examples of this before, viz. i . Coij- 
 cerning the changing of the Alonfoons. 2. Of tht 
 Eatephias. 3 . Of the Typbon. 4. At the Cape oi 
 Good-Hope, in June and July. 5. In the Ifland ol 
 Del Mayo at the latter end of Augujl ; to which add. 
 6. The Storms at Tercera, in Augujl. 7. In thirty 
 five Degrees of the Meridian of Trijlan de Cunha 
 And in the Month of May, at New- Moon, the 
 Weft Wind rages, and fwallows up Ships -, but ir 
 thirty three Degrees on the fame Meridian the 
 North and North-Eaft. 8. At Pulon Timor, ir 
 the Chinefe Sea the Weft Winds rage in June and 
 July, and are dangerous. 9. Between China and 
 Japan there are fcveral Storms from the New Moor 
 in July-t to the twelfth Day of the Moon. 10. If. 
 in the fame Place, other Winds befides the Mon- 
 foons blow fometimes from one Point, and fome- 
 times from another, 'till they fettle in the North- 
 Eaft, a Storm certainly happens. 
 
 •The End of the Firjl Vohwie. 
 
 THE libra: 
 
 UNiV£ivoy;;i'Y OF Cx^L.irv^^vNi/
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 JAN 2 1 1991 
 JUL 24)991 
 
 AC MAY 1 2(m 
 
 TITE LXBKA^^' 
 
 ui^^:-
 
 i^l.j 
 
 f 
 
 ^58 00387 611 
 
 ■ 'W^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 UC SOUTHFRM RFGIONAl LIBRARY TACIUTY 
 IIIIIII IIII 
 
 A 000 046 283 8
 
 ^ 
 
 J:j^ 
 
 
 
 i^l 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^h^ 
 
 'M^ 
 
 ,^'p 
 
 V'^:*»'' •-r*''.. 
 
 'mC 
 
 v*^:TS^.n